I 


CORSO  DI  STUDIO  ITALIANO, 


COURSE  op  STUDY  FOR  THE  ITALIAN  LANGUAGE,  prepared 
by  Dr.  BACHI,  Instructor  in  Harvard  University  ;  and 
for  sale  by  C.  C.  LITTLE  &  Co.,  Washington  Street, 
Boston  ;  and  at  theJCJ^jocE&sj^^BooKSTORE,  Cambridge. 


UHIVEESITY 


, 

A  GRAMMAR  OF  THE  ITALIAN  LANGUAGE  ;  a  New  Edition 
revised  and  improved,  with  the  addition  of  Practical  Exercises  and 
numerous  Illustrations,  drawn  from  the  Italian  Classic  Writers. 
1  vol.  12mo. 

PART    II. 

RACCOLTA  DI  FAVOLE  MORALI,  or  a  Collection  of  Italian 
Fables  in  Prose  and  Verse,  with  Interlinear  Translations.  1  vol. 
12mo. 

PA  RT    III. 

SCELTA  DI  PROSE  ITALIANS,  or  Extracts  from  the  Works 
of  the  best  Italian  Prose  Writers,  both  Ancient  and  Modern.  1  vol. 
12mo 


PART    IV. 

TEATRO  SCELTO  ITALIANO,  or  a  Selection  of  Italian  Dra- 
mas, from  the  Works  of  Goldoni,  Nota,  Giraud,  Alfieri,  Monti,  and 
Manzoni,  with  Notes.  1  vol.  12mo. 

PART    V. 

I  POETI  ITALIANI  MAGGIORI,  or  Extracts  from  Tasso,  Ari- 
osto,  Poliziano,  and  Petrarca,  and  the  Inferno  of  Dante,  with  Ana- 
lytical and  Historical  Notes.  2  vols.  12mo.  (The  first  volume  is 
in  Press.) 

PART    VI. 

CONVERSAZIONE  ITALIANA,  or  a  Collection  of  Phrases  and 
Familiar  Dialogues  in  Italian  and  English.  1  vol.  12mo. 

PART    VII. 

A  KEY  to  the  EXERCISES  contained  in  the  Italian  Gram- 
mar. 1  vol.  12mo.  (In  Press.) 


At  the    Bookstore  of  C.  C.  LITTLE  &,  Co.  may  be  had 
also  the  following  Works  of  the  same  Author  : 

I. 

RUDIMENTS  OF  THE  ITALIAN  LANGUAGE,  or  Easy  Lessons 
in  Spelling  and  Reading,  with  an  Abridgment  of  the  Grammar. 
Adapted  to  the  Capacity  of  Children.  1  vol.  16mo. 


II. 

MRS.  BARBAULD'S  HYMNS  FOR  CHILDREN,  in  Italian ;  being 
a  Sequel  to  the  "  Easy  Lessons  in  Reading,"  in  the  aboveraen- 
tioned  Rudiments.  1  vol.  16mo. 

III. 

A  COMPARATIVE  VIEW  OF  THE  ITALIAN  AND  SPANISH 
LANGUAGES,  or  an  Easy  Method  of  Learning  the  Spanish  Tongue 
for  those  who  are  already  acquainted  with  the  Italian.  1  vol.  I2mo. 

IV. 

A  COMPARATIVE  VIEW  OF  THE  SPANISH  AND  PORTUGUESE 
LANGUAGES,  or  an  Easy  Method  of  learning  the  Portuguese  Tongue 
for  those  who  are  already  acquainted  with  the  Spanish.  1  vol. 
12mo. 


CORSO  DI   STUDIO  ITALIANO. 


PART   I. 
ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


CAMBRIDGE: 

FOLSOM,     WELLS,    AND     THURSTON, 

PRINTERS    TO    THE    UNIVERSITY. 


A 

GRAMMAR 


ITALIAN    LANGUAGE 


BY  \ 

PIETRO    BACHI, 

INSTRUCTER   IN    HARVARD    UNIVERSITY. 


A    NEW  EDITION   REVISEEL- AND  IMPROVED, 

WJT^I*  THE    ADDITION    OF 

PRACTICAL  EXERCISES  AND  NUMEROUS  ILLUSTRATIONS, 
DRAWN    FROM    THE    ITALIAN    CLASSICS. 


,*t    K'DIUI* 

uso  per  base,  P  esempio  per  consiglio, 


BOSTON: 

CHARLES  C.  LITTLE   AND   JAMES  BROWN. 

LONDON: 
RICHARD  JAMES  KENNETT. 


M    DCCC    XXXVIII. 


.    - 


Entered  according  to  act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1838;  by 

PIETRO     B  ACHI, 

in  the  Clerk's  office  of  the  District  Court,  for  the  District  of  Massachusetts. 


"DE  exteris  hominibus  jam  nunc  dicam,  quorum  de- 
merendi,  si  tibi  id  cordi  est,  persane  ampla  in  praesens 
oblata  est  occasio.  Ut  enim  apud  eos  ingenio  quis 
forte  floridior,  aut  moribus  amoenis  et^  elegantibus, 
linguam  Etruscam  in  deliciis  habet  prsecipuis,  quin  et 
in  solidd  etiam  parte  eruditionis  esse  sibi  ponendam 
ducit,  prsesertim  si  Grasca  aut  Latina  vel  nullo,  vel 
modico,  tinctu  imbiberit.  Ego  certe  istis  utrisque 
linguis,  non  extremis  tantummodo  labris  madidus,  sed, 
si  quis  alius,  quantum  per  annos  licuit,  poculis  ma 
joribus  prolutus,  possum  tamen  nonnunquam  ad  ilium 
Dantem  et  Petrarcam,  aliosque  vestros  complurimos, 
libenter  et  cupide  comissaturn  ire.  Nee  me  tarn  ipsae 
Athena3  Atticas  cum  illo  suo  pellucido  Ilisso,  nee  ilia 
vetus  Roma  sua  Tiberis  ripa  retinere  valuerunt,  quin 
scepe  Arnum  vestrum  et  Fassulanos  illos  colles  invisere 
amem." 

MILTON.  Epist.  ad  Benedictum  Buommattei  ; 
Florent.,  Sept.  10.,  1638. 


PREFACE 

TO   THE   FORMER  EDITION. 


As  A  NATURAL  consequence  of  the  general  advancement  of 
this  country  in  literature,  the  importance  attached  to  an  ac- 
quaintance with  the  Italian  Language,  as  a  part  of  polite  ed- 
ucation, has  considerably  increased.  Not  only  does  it  now 
enter  into  the  circle  of  the  elegant  studies  of  females,  as  the 
handmaid  and  ally  of  the  ornamental  arts,  but  the  spirit  of 
its  higher  literature  begins  to  be  understood  by  the  culti- 
vated of  both  sexes ;  and  within  a  short  time  a  place  has  been 
conceded  to  Dante  and  Tdsso  in  the  same  academic  course 
with  Homer  and  Virgil. 

But  while  the  other  languages  of  the  continent  of  Europe 
have  possessed  the  advantage  of  a  variety  of  good  gram- 
mars written  in  English,  the  Italian  Instructer  has  had  the 
mortification  to  see  in  almost  universal  use  the  farrago  of 
Veneroni*  to  the  disparagement  of  his  native  tongue  and 
the  perplexity  of  those  who  would  learn  it.  It  is  true,  that 
other  grammars  are  extant  of  various  degrees  of  merit,  and 
those  of  Galigndniy  Sanlagnello,  and  Vergani  are  entitled  to 
much  praise  ;  the  first  two,  however,  are  hardly  known  here, 

*  Veneroni  was  a  native  of  Verdun,  a  small  town  of  Burgundy,  in 
France;  his  real  name  was  Vigneron ;  but,  having  learnt  Italian,  and 
wishing  to  teach  it  in  Paris,  he  Italianized  his  name  and  called  himself 
a  Florentine.  The  Complete  Italian  Master  by  Signor  Veneroni  was 
written  for  a  few  crowns  by  Roselli,  the  extraordinary  adventurer, 
who  has  left  us  his  history  in  the  romance  entitled  The  Unfortunate 
Neapolitan. 


PREFACE.  XI 

and  the  last,  which  is  perhaps  the  best  of  them  all,  has  been 
confined  principally  to  New- York ;  where  indeed  the  want  of 
a  suitable  grammar  has  been  far  less  felt  than  in  other  places, 
from  the  singular  good  fortune  of  that  city  in  enjoying  the 
living  instruction  of  the  venerable  Da  Ponte,  whose  own  writ- 
ings, in  prose  as  well  as  in  verse,  form  an  integral  and  perma- 
nent part  of  the  noble  literature,  which  he  has  done  so  much 
to  propagate  in  America. 

The  field,  therefore,  was  open  for  attempting  to  treat  in 
English  the  Grammar  of  the  Italian  Language  in  a  man- 
ner better  suited  to  the  wants  of  the  public ;  and  the  au- 
thor, in  entering  it,  has  flattered  himself  that  he  should 
render  an  acceptable  service,  if,  after  a  thorough  study  of 
Italian  writers  on  their  own  tongue,  and  a  diligent  examina- 
tion of  the  labors  of  his  predecessors  both  in  Great  Britain 
France,  and  Germany,  he  should  be  able  to  produce  a  more 
complete,  and  methodical,  and,  at  the  same  time,  strictly  prac- 
tical treatise,  than  now  exists  in  English,  however  far  he 
might  fall  short  of  that  perfection  of  which  he  has  the  idea. 

In  the  Introduction  are  given  very  summarily  the  principles 
of  general  grammar,  and  the  terms  are  defined  in  which  those 
principles  are  afterwards  applied  to  the  Italian  tongue. 

The  Part  devoted  to  Pronunciation  affords,  it  is  believed, 
more  full  information  on  the  subject  than  can  elsewhere  be 
found  ;  and,  as  the  words  are  carefully  represented  by  English 
combinations  of  letters  of  equivalent  sound,*  students  who  can- 

*  The  vowel  a  is  represented  by  the  combination  of  letters  ah,  pro- 
nounced without  aspiration  as  in  the  words  sirrah,  hallelujah,  &c.  :  e, 
by  ay,  as  in  day,  except  when  it  occurs  before  certain  consonants 
with  which  in  English  it  has  what  is  called  the  short  sound,  nearly 
resembling  the  sound  in  Italian,  as  in  the  syllables  em,  el,  &c. ;  be- 
fore r,  however,  e  is  sounded  long,  like  ay  :  i,  by  ee,  as  in  sleep :  u,  by 
oo,  as  in  ooze.  In  the  combinations  k,y — g,y  —  l,y  —  n,y,  a  comma 
is  inserted  to  prevent  the  letter  before  it  from  coalescing  with  the  y, 
which  is  to  be  pronounced  with  the  following  vowel  as  if  it  began  the 
syllable. 


Xll  PREFACE. 

not  avail  themselves  of  oral  instruction,  may  yet  make  such  an 
approximation  to  a  just  pronunciation,  as  to  perceive  and  enjoy 
in  a  good  degree  the  rhythm  and  harmony  of  the  classic  au- 
thors, and,  with  few  errors  to  unlearn,  be  prepared  to  take  ad- 
vantage of  future  opportunities  of  improving  their  pronuncia- 
tion by  intercourse  with  accomplished  speakers  of  the  lan- 
guage. 

In  treating  of  the  different  Parts  of  Speech,  in  the  division 
called  Analogy,  while  the  author  has  wished  that  nothing 
should  be  wanting  to  the  completeness  of  this  part  of  his  trea- 
tise, he  has  striven  so  to  methodize  the  various  particulars  that 
they  should  lie  ready  for  use.  The  verbs,  especially,  are  given 
with  unexampled  fulness;  and  to  both  the  regular  and  irregular 
verbs  are  annexed  the  poetical  forms,  which  constitute  no  small 
difficulty  for  learners,  even  in  reading  the  older  prose  writers. 
This  is  an  advantage  not  afforded  to  the  same  extent  in  any 
preceding  grammar. 

As  to  the  Syntax,  a  few  scattered  observations  only  are  to  be 
found  in  the  best  grammars.  These  are  here  digested  under 
their  proper  heads,  increased  by  various  new  ones,  and  all  of 
them  supported  by  citations  from  those  Classics  from  whose 
authority  no  appeal  can  be  allowed,  though  colloquial  usage 
may  in  a  few  instances  be  at  variance  with  them. 

The  Orthography  contains  the  result  of  what  has  been  writ- 
ten by  Italian  authors  on  the  subject,  and  such  rules  as  have 
been  deduced  from  the  usage  of  the  best  writers. 

Throughout  the  Grammar,  it  should  be  observed,  the 
principal  rules  are  placed  under  their  appropriate  heads,  in 
large  type ;  exceptions  to  general  rules  and  subordinate  obser- 
vations are  printed  in  smaller  type.  Every  Italian  word  of 
more  than  one  syllable  is  carefully  accented,  that  the  mere 
perusal  of  the  Grammar  may  operate  as  a  perpetual  lesson 
in  pronunciation,  preparing  the  pupil  to  read  currently  the 
first  author  put  into  his  hands,  and  sparing  the  instructer  the 


PREFACE.  Kill 

trouble  of  much  inculcation.  For  an  analogous  reason,  every 
Italian  word  and  sentence  is  accompanied  by  a  literal  English 
version,  which  is  often  indispensable  to  the  beginner,  and  can 
rarely  be  unuseful. 

The  author  is  well  aware  of  the  amount  of  indulgence 
which  his  English  style  will  require  on  the  part  of  his  readers, 
whose  very  pursuit  of  a  foreign  literature  implies  a  degree  of 
cultivation  in  their  own,  which  must  make  them  impatient  of 
the  constraint  and  want  of  idiomatic  propriety  they  will  here 
meet  with.  Grammatical  propriety,  however,  and  perspicuity 
were  the  highest  qualities  to  which  he  could  at  present  pre- 
tend, in  a  language  whose  idioms  are  so  remote  from  his  own ; 
and,  if  he  has  been  in  any  good  degree  successful  in  attaining 
these,  he  relies  on  the  candor  of  ingenuous  scholars  to  attrib- 
ute his  defects  to  the  difficulty  of  the  case,  and  not  suppose 
that  he  undervalues  or  is  insensible  to  the  charms  of  a  good 
style  ;  which  would  indeed  be  inexcusable  in  one  whose  ambi- 
tion it  is  to  spread  a  knowledge  of  the  most  graceful  of  mod- 
ern dialects : 

"Illam,  quidquid  agit,  quoquo  vestigia  movit, 
Componit  furtim  subsequiturque  Decor." 

TIEULL.  /.  4.  c.  2. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  PRESENT  EDITION. 


THE  flattering  reception,  which  the  former  edition  of  this 
Grammar  has  met  with,  both  in  this  country  and  abroad,  and 
the  wide  circulation,  which  in  a  few  years  it  has  obtained  in  the 
different  quarters  of  this  Union,  have  made  it  the  duty  of  the 
author  to  redouble  his  efforts  to  approach  nearer  to  the  end 
which  he  originally  proposed  to  himself. 

A  long  experience  in  teaching,  the  useful  suggestions  made 
to  him  by  friends  who  have  been  using  his  book  both  in  private 
and  public  instruction,  together  with  an  incessant  study  of  his 
native  tongue  in  the  works  of  the  classic  writers,  have  enabled 
him  to  make  such  improvements,  as  to  render  the  work  more 
deserving  of  the  public  favor. 

But  the  light,  which  the  writings  of  Monti,  Compa^noni, 
Romdni,  Ambros6li,  Lucches'tni,  and  others,  have  shed  on  Phi- 
lology, in  Italy,  has  given  origin,  within  the  last  few  years, 
to  so  many  valuable  treatises  on  Grammar,  that,  to  derive  ad- 
vantage from  their  works,  and  to  suit  this  book  to  the  present 
times,  it  was  necessary  to  remodel  the  former  plan,  and  intro- 
duce such  changes,  as  appeared  to  be  required  by  the  philoso- 
phy of  the  language,  and  the  progress  of  grammatical  science. 

To  obtain  this  object,  the  Grammar  has  been  newly  writ- 
ten, the  arrangement  altered,  the  method  simplified,  and  the 
style  generally  improved.  Several  remarks,  which  had  been 
found  useless,  have  been  omitted,  and  many  important  rules, 
which  had  been  omitted,  have  been  introduced.  The  verbs 
have  been  better  displayed  :  and  the  Syntax  has  been  increased 


PREFACE.  XV 

by  several  important  chapters,  such  as  those  on  the  Regimen  of 
Words,  the  Agreement  of  Participles,  &c. 

Sensible  of  the  truth  of  the  principle,  that  a  grammarian 
ought  not  to  limit  himself  to  a  mere  exposition  of  principles, 
but  should  deduce  them  from  sound  reason  and  verify  them 
by  the  authority  of  the  classic  writers,  —  ("  Grammaticorum 
sine  ratione  testimoniisque  auctoritas  nulla  est."  —  SANCT. 
Minerv.  1.  1.  c.  2.)  —  the  author  has,  in  this  new  edition,  endeav- 
oured first  to  write  and  explain  his  rules,  and  then  to  add,  by 
way  of  illustration,  the  classical  authorities,  which  have  furnished 
him  the  Examples  corroborating  the  principles  he  has  laid 


Convinced,  too,  of  the  advantage  which  the  student  naturally 
derives  from  the  practical   application  of  abstract  principles, 
he  has  introduced,  in  each  chapter  of  the  Grammar,  one   or      . 
more  Exercises,  as  the  subject  or  the  importance  of  the  rules  *  >..<P 
seemed  to  require. 

The  Examples,  as  well  as  the  Exercises,  have  been  chiefly 
drawn  from  the  writers  of  the  fourteenth  century,  such  as  Ddnte, 
Petrdrca,  Boccdccio,  Villani,  &c.  ;  in  many  instances  from  those 
of  the  sixteenth,  as  Machiavelli,  Guicciardini,  Ariosto,  Tdsso, 
&c.  ;  and,  when  these  have  failed  to  supply  apposite  illustra- 
tions, from  the  best  poets  and  prose  writers  of  the  eighteenth 
century,  and  from  those  among  the  moderns  who  have  distin- 
guished themselves  for  purity  of  diction  and  elegance  of  style, 
as  Alfieri,  Foscolo,  Botta,  Manzoni,  &€. 

To  prevent  any  interruption  in  the  regular  progress  of  the 
different  'parts  of  the  book,  and  to  reduce  the  principles  to  a  more 
compact  form,  it  was  at  first  thought  advisable  to  throw  into  an  \ 
Appendix,  at  the  end  of  the  volume,  certain  lists  of  words  and 
supplementary  remarks,  which  formerly  occupied  a  place  in  the 
Analogy  ;  but  the  size,  which  the  work  had  already  attained, 


XVI  PREFACE. 

determined  the  author  to  reserve  it  to  be  published  in  a  separate 
form,  particularly  as  its  omission  at  present  affects  in  no  man- 
ner the  completeness  of  the  Grammar,  however  useful  such  an 
appendage  might  be. 

Sorae  improvements  have  also  been  made  in  the  typo- 
graphical execution  of  the  work.  The  most  important  parts 
of  the  rules  have  been  printed  in  italics.  In  the  examples, 
which  immediately  follow,  the  words  which  directly  illustrate 
the  rules  are  printed  in  SMALL  CAPITALS  ;  and  the  whole  of 
these  examples,  which  always  recur  in  the  succeeding  citations 
from  the  classics,  are  there  printed  in  SMALL  CAPITALS,  to  en- 
gage the  attention  of  the  learner  to  their  connexion  with  the 
longer  passages,  from  which  they  were  at  first  detached. 

Should  the  volume  appear  to  any  one  larger  than  is  necessary 
for  common  use,  he  should  observe,  that,  of  the  whole  number 
of  pages,  351  only  are  occupied  by  the  rules  of  the  language 
and  their  immediate  illustrations,  and  that  the  remainder  of  the 
book  is  filled  by  Exercises  (which  are  commonly  printed  in  a 
separate  volume),  and  by  a  collection  of  eighteen  hundred  cita- 
tions from  the  classics,  which  exhibit  all  the  principal  phenomena 
of  the  language,  in  a  form  which  gives  the  student  ready  access 
to  a  high  authority  for,  and  a  happy  exemplification  of,  every 
principle,  thus  making  him  familiar  beforehand  with  the  idioms 
and  constructions,  which  would  be  the  chief  impediments  in 
his  reading  the  most  difficult  authors. 

As  to  the  mode  of  using  this  Grammar,  the  author  would 
recommend  the  following  plan.  Let  the  principles  first  be  prop- 
erly explained  and  exemplified  by  the  instructer,  and  let  them  be 
properly  learned  and  recited  by  the  student.  This  done,  let  the 
instructer  point  out  the  application  of  them  in  the  citations  from 
the  classics  which  follow  the  rules  of  each  chapter,  and  let  the 
student  account  for  them  (and  for  as  many  others  as  he  may  have 


PREFACE.  XV11 

already  learned),  by  parsing  the  words  which  form  the  subjects  of 
the  rules  with  which  he  is  already  acquainted  ;  and,  when  he 
has  become  familiar  with  them,  let  him  be  directed  to  write  out 
the  Exercises.  This  method,  if  strictly  adhered  to,  cannot 
fail  to  prove  highly  useful  to  the  learner,  and  satisfactory  to  the 
teacher. 

Desirous  that  his  book  should  not  fall  short  of  that  perfection, 
which  grammatical  science  seems  lately  to  have  reached  in 
Italy,  the  author  has  spared  neither  expense  nor  diligence  in 
procuring  all  the  best  treatises  on  the  Italian  language,  which 
have  hitherto  been  published  in  Europe.  Some  of  these  have 
been  of  great  assistance  to  him  in  his  labors,  and  in  many  in- 
stances he  has  not  hesitated  to  adopt  from  them  many  excellent 
hints  and  valuable  remarks.  Still  he  trusts,  that  the  manner 
in  which  he  has  combined  his  scattered  materials  into  a  body 
of  principles,  all  illustrated  by  a  variety  of  unquestionable  clas- 
sical authorities,  will  secure  to  his  work  the  character  of  origi- 
nality, so  far  as  this  can  belong  to  any  grammar  of  a  language 
long  since  settled  in  its  usages  and  idioms  : 

"  Etiamsi  omnia  a  veteribus  inventa  sunt,  hoc  tamen  erit 
semper  novum,  usus  et  dispositio  inventorum  ab  aliis." 

SENEC.  Epist.  64. 

Cambridge,  September,  1838. 


A  LIST  OF  WORKS 

EXAMINED  WITH    REFERENCE    TO  THE  COMPILATION    OF  THIS 
GRAMMAR. 


ALBERTI  (di  Villanuova,  Francesco  <T),  Dizionario  Universale 
Critico  Enciclopedico  della  Lingua  Italiana.  Lucca,  1805. 
6  vol.  4to. 

Jllberti  (de  Villeneiwe,  Francois  eT),  Grand  Dictionnaire  Fran- 
gois-Italien,  et  Italien-Francois.  Bassano,  1831.  2  vol.  4to. 

Algarotti  [Francesco),  Lettere  Filologiche,  raccolte  da  Bar- 
tolommeo  Gamba.  Venezia,  1826.  1  vol.  12mo. 

Alunno  (Francesco),  Le  Ricchezze  della  Lingua  sopra  il  Deca- 
merone.  Venezia,  1557.  1  vol.  4to. 

Ambrosoli  (Francesco),  Manuale  della  Lingua  Italiana.     Milano, 

1829.  1vol.     12mo. 

Barberi  (J.  Ph.),  Grammaire  des  Grammaires  Italiennes,  ou 
Cours  Coraplet  de  Langue  Italienne.  Paris,  1819.  2  vol.  8vo. 

,  Petit  Tresor  de  la  Langue  Francaise  et  de  la  Lan- 
gue Italienne.  Paris,  1821.  I  vol.  8vo. 

Baretti  (Joseph),  A  Dictionary  of  the  English  and  Italian  Lan- 
guages. London,  1835.  2  vols.  8vo. 

Bdrtoli   (Daniele),  Trattato  dell'  Ortografia  Italiana.     Milano, 

1830.  1  vol.     12mo. 

Bazzarini  (Antonio),  Ortografia  Enciclopedica  Universale. 
Venezia,  1824.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Bimbo  (Pietro),  Prose,  nelle  quali  si  ragiona  della  Volgar  Lin- 
gua, colle  Giunte  di  Lodovico  Castelv^tro.  Milano,  1824. 
1  vol.  12mo. 

Berganiini  (Giov an- Pietro),  Voci  Italiane  d' Autori  Approvati 
dalla  Crusca,  nel  Vocabolario  di  essa  non  registrate.  Vene- 
zia, 1745.  1  vol.  4to. 

Biagioli  ( G.),  Grammaire  Italienne  Elementaire  et  Raisonnee. 
Paris,  1825.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Borelli  (Pasqudle),  Principj  dell'  Arte  Etimologica.  Napoli, 
1830.  1  vol.  4to. 

Brosse  (Charles  de),  Trait£  de  la  Formation  Mecam'que  des 
Langues.  Paris,  1801.  2  vol.  12mo. 


WORKS    EXAMINED.  XIX 

Bruni  (Donato  Antonio),  Osservazioni  sopra  la  Lingua  Toscana. 

Napoli,  1759.     1  vol.     12mo. 
Bullet  (J.  B.)  Memoires  sur  la  Langue  Celtique.     Besanc,on, 

1760.    3  vol.    fol. 
BuommatUi  (Benedetto),  Delia  Lingua  Toscana,  Libri  Due,colle 

note  di  Anton-Maria  Salvini.     Milano,  1807.     2  vol.    8vo. 
Caleffi  ( Giuseppe)  Grammatica  della  Lingua  Italiana,  compilata 

su-lle  migliori  moderne  Grammatiche.    "Firenze,  1832.     1  vol. 

12mo. 
Cardindli  (Francesco),  Dizionario  portatile  della  Lingua  Italiana. 

Bologna,  1828.    2  vol.    8vo. 

Carducci  (Facondo),  Element!  della  Lettiira,  ed  Ortografia  Ita- 
liana. Siena,  1828.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Cesari  (Antonio),  Dissertazione  sopra  lo  Stato  della  Lingua 
Italiana.  Verona,  1810.  1  vol.  4to. 

Cesarotti  (Melckior),  Saggi  sulla  Filosofia  delle  Lingue,  e  del 
Gusto.  Milano,  1821.  1  vol.  12nio. 

Cinonio  [alias  Mambelli  (Marc-Ant6nio)],  Osservazioni  della 
Lingua  Italiana,  illustrate  ed  accresciute  da  Luigi  Lamberti. 
Milano,  1811.  4  vol.  8vo. 

Cittadini  (Celso\  Le  Origini  della  Toscana  Favella.  Siena, 
1628.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Compagnoni  (Giuseppe),  Teorica  de'  Verbi  Italiani,  regolari, 
anomali,  difettivi,  e  mal-noti ;  compilata  sulle  opere  del  Cino- 
nio. del  Pistolesi,  del  Mastrofini,  e  d'  altri  piu  illustri  Gram- 
matici.  Livorno,  1830.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Corticelli  (Salvadore),  Regole  ed  Osservazioni  della  Lingua 
Toscana.  Bassano,  1827.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Coureil  ( Gio.  de),  Nuova  Grammatica  della  Lingua  Italiana  per 
gl'  Italiani.  Livorno,  1816.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Dalmistro,  Osservazioni  intorno  alia  Lingua  Italiana.  Venezia, 
1821.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Da-P6nte  (Lorenzo),  Elementi  della  Lingua  Italiana.  Nuova- 
Y6rk,  1831.  1  vol.  12mo. 

DeW  Arte  della  Parola,  considerata  ne'  varj  Modi  della  sua 
Espressione.  Milano,  1827.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Del-Muro  (Vincenzo),  Grammatica  Ragionata  della  Lingua 
Italiana.  Napoli,  1804.  1vol.  8vo. 

Destutt-de-Tracy  (Antonio  Luigi  Clemente),  Grammatica  Gene- 
rale,  colle  Annotazioni  di  Giuseppe  Compagnoni.  Milano, 
1817.  2vol.  8vo. 


XX  WORKS    EXAMINED. 

Diziondiio  della  Lingua  Italiana.     Padova,  1827.     7  vol.    4to. 

Dolce  (Lodovico),  Osservazioni  sulla  Lingua  Italiana.     Venezia, 
1562.     1vol.    8vo. 

Elementi  della  Lingua  Italiana  ad  tfso  delle  Scuole.     Venezia, 
1810.     1  vol.    8vo. 

della  Grammatica,  e  della  Ortografia  Italiana,  ricavati 

dal  Pallavicino,  Bartoli,  Rogacci,  Buommattei.     Napoli,  1829. 
1  vol.     12m  o. 

Faccioldti  (Jdcopo),  Ortografia  Moderna  Italiana.     Napoli,  1831. 
1  vol.    4to. 

Ferrarii  (Octavii),   Origines    Linguae    Italic®.      Patavii,  1676. 

1  vol.     fol. 

Fornasari,  Theoretisch  praktische   Anleitung    zur   Erlernung 
der  Italienischen  Sprache,  in    einer  neuen,  und  fasslicheren 

Darstellung.     Wien,  1830.    1  vol.     8vo. 

Franscini  (Stefano),  Grammatica  Inferiore  della  Lingua  Italiana. 
Milano,  1832.     1  vol.    J2mo. 

Galignani  (J.  .#.),  Grammar  and    Exercises,   in  Twenty-four 

Lectures  on  the  Italian  Language,  enlarged   and  improved 

by  Antonio  Montucci.     London,  1823.    1  vol.    8vo. 
GiambuUdri  (Pier-Francesco),    Lezioni,    aggiuntovi   1'  Origine 

della  Lingua  Fiorentina,  altrimenti  il  Gello.     Milano,  1827. 

1  vol.     12mo. 
Gianntlli  (Leonardo),  Regole  Grammaticali  per  chi  vuol  par- 

lare,  e  scrivere  correttamente  Toscano.    Liicca,  1820.     1  vol. 

12mo. 
Gigli  (Girolamo),  Lezioni  di  Lingua  Toscana.    Venezia,  1722. 

1  vol.    8vo. 

Gioia  ( Melchior),  Ideologia.     Milano,  1822.     2vol.     8vo. 
Gorio  (A.  F.),    Storia   Antiquaria    Etrusca.      Firenze,    1749. 

1  vol.     12mo. 
Gran  Diziondrio  della  Lingua  Italiana.    Bologna,  1828.    7  vol. 

4to. 
Grdssi  (Giuseppe),  Saggio  intorno   ai  Sinonimi  della  Lingua 

Italiana.    Firenze,  1832.     1  vol.    8vo. 
Jagemann  (Chr.  Jos.),  Neues   Deutsh-Italianishes   Hand-Wor- 

ter-Buch.    Leipzig,  1799.    2  vol.    8vo. 
Jaklitsch  (Giuseppe),  Principj  Elementari  della  Lingua  Italiana. 

Milano,  1829.     1  vol.    8vo. 

Lemmi  (Giov.  Spirito),    Element!  ragionati  della  Lingua   To- 
scana.   Liv6rno,  1808.     1  vol.    8vo. 


WORKS    EXAMINED.  XXI 

Lucchesini  (Cesare],  Dell'  Illustrazione  delle  Lingue  Antiche  e 

Moderne,    e    principalmente    dell'    Italiana.      Lucca,  . 

2  vol.    8vo. 
Mdier   (Andrea),  Delia  Lingua   Comune   d'  Italia.     Venezia, 

1822.     1  vol.     12rno. 
Mdnni  (Dom&nico  Maria),  Lezioni  di  Lingua  Toscana.    Milano, 

1824.     1  vol.     12mo. 
Martignoni  ( Girolamo),  Nuovo  Metodo  per  la  Lingua  Italiana  la 

piil  Scelta,  estensivo  a  tiitte  le  Lingue.     Milano,  1743.    2  vol. 

4to. 
Mastrofini  (Marco),  Teoria  e  Prospetto,  ossia  Dizionario  Critico 

de'  Verbi  Italian!  coniugati,  speciahnente  degli    anomali,  e 

mal-noti.   Roma,  1814.    2  vol.    4to. 
Mastroti  (Francesco),  Corso  di  Lingua  Italiana.    Napoli,  1833* 

1  vol.    8vo. 

Mazzinghi,  Ortografia   Italiana.     Napoli,  1829.     1  vol.     12mo. 
Meidinger,  Praktische  Italienische  Grammatik,   wodurch  man 

diese   Sprache   auf  eine   ganz    neue,   und  sehr  leichte   Art 

in  kurzer  Zeit  griindlich  erlernen  kann.     Leipzig,  1821.     1 

vol.     8vo. 
Mendgio  (Egidio),  Origini  della  Lingua  Italiana.    Parigi,  1669. 

1  vol.    fol. 
Menzini  (Benedetto),  Delia  Costruzione  Irregolare  della  Lingua 

Toscana.     Verona,  1744.     1  vol.     4to. 
Momo  (Giovanni),  Sintassi,  Frasi,  e  Voci  per  perferzionarsi  nella 

Lingua  Italiana.     Milano,  1809.     1  vol.     8vo. 
Monti  ( Vincenzo],  Proposta  di  alciine  Correzioni  ed  Aggiiinte  al 

Vocabolario  della  Crusca.     Milano,  1826.     7  vol.   8vo. 
Mucci   (Domenico),   Nuova  Grammatica  Italiana,  formata  su  i 

Principj  di  Grammatica  Generale.   Napoii,  1832.   1  vol.    12mo. 

Muratori  (Ludovico  Jlntdnio],  Dissertazioni  sopra  le  Antichita 
Italiane.     Milano,  1751.    3  vol.    4to. 

Napione  (Francesco  Galedni),  Dell'  Uso  e  de'  Pregi  della  Lingua 
Italiana.     Milano,  1830.     2vol.    12mo. 

JVe^t  (Lorenzo),  Dizionario  Ortologico  Pratico  della  Lingua  Ita- 
liana.   Pavia,  1825.     1  vol.    8vo. 

Nuova  Ortografia  Italiana,  con  1'Aggiiinta  di  varie  Voci  Dubbie. 

Padova,  1825.     1  vol.     12mo. 
Onorati  (Niccolb),  Dizionario  di  Voci  Dubbie  Italiane.    Napoli, 

1783.     1  vol.  4to. 

Ortografia  della  Lingua  Italiana.    MiUno,  1829.     1  vol.    18mo, 


XX11  WORKS    EXAMINED. 

Panizzi  (Antonio),  An  Elementary  Italian  Grammar.  London, 
1828.  1  vol.  12ino. 

Parenti  (Marc-Ant6nio),  Annotazioni  al  Dizionario  Italiano,  che 
si  etampa  in  Bologna.  Modena,  1826.  3  vol.  8vo. 

Peretti  (Vincent),  Grammaire  Italienne  compose*e  d'apres  les 
meilleurs  Auteurs  et  Grammairiens  d'ltalie.  Paris,  1815.  1 
vol.  8vo. 

Pergamini  ( Gidcomo),  Trattato  della  Lingua  Italiana.    Venezia, 

1613.     1vol.    8vo. 
Pezzdna  (Angelo),  Osservazioni  concernenti  alia  Lingua  Italiana, 

ed  ai  suoi  Vocabolarj.     Parma,  1823.     1  vol.    8vo. 

Pistolesi  ( Giam-Battista),  Prospetto  de5  Verb!  Italian!  regolari 
e  irregolari.  Pisa,  1813.  1  vol.  4to. 

P6nza  (Michele),  L'  Annotatore  degli  Errori  di  Lingua.  Tori- 
no, 1829.  1  vol.  8vo. 

,  Grammatica  della  Lingua  Italiana.    Torino,  1834.     1 

vol.     12mo. 

Puoti  (Basilio),  Regole  Elementari  della  Lingua  Italiana.  Na- 
poli,  1836.  2  vol.  12mo. 

Rabbi  (Carlo  Costdnzo),  Sinonimi  ed  Aggiunti  Italiani.  Vene- 
zia. 1817.  1  vol.  4to. 

Romdni  ( Giovanni),  Teorica  della  Lingua  Italiana.  Milano,  1825. 
2vol.  8vo. 

'• — ,  Teorica  de'  Sinonimi  Italiani.     Milano,  1825.     1  vol. 

8vo. 
,  Dizionario  Generale  de'  Sinonimi  Italiani.    Milano,  1826. 

3  vol.     8vo. 

,  Osservazioni  sopra  Varie  Voci  del  Vocabolario  della 

Criisca.  Milano,  1826.  1  vol.  8vo. 

,  Opiiscoli  Scelti  sulla  Lingua  Italiana.  Milano,  1826.  1 

vol.  8vo. 

Rosdsco  (Girolamo),  Delia  Lingua  Toscana,  Dialoghi  Sette.  Mi- 
lano, 1824.  2  vol.  12mo. 

Roster  (Gidcomo),  Osservazioni  Grammatical!  intorno  alia  Lin- 
gua Italiana.  Firenze,  1826.  1  vol.  8vo. 

,  Element!  Grammatical!  Ragionati  di  Lingua  Italiana. 

Firenze,  1827.     1  vol.    8vo. 

Salvidti  (Leondrdo),  Avvertimenti  della  Lingua  sopra  il  Deca- 
merone.  Milano,  1810.  3  vol.  8vo. 

Saniagnello  (M.\  A  Complete  Grammar  of  the  Italian  Lan- 
guage, London,  1828.  1  vol,  12mo. 


WORKS    EXAMINED.  XX111 

Scilta  di  V6ci  della  Lingua  Italiana,  con  Regole  ed  Osservazioni. 
Milano,  1828.  1  vol.  12mo. 

Sodve  (Francesco),  Grammatica  Ragionata  della  Lingua  Ita- 
liana, colle  Aggiiinte  di  Antonio  Bianchini.  Brescia,  1829. 

1  vol.     12mo. 

Solddti  (Matteo),  Sullo  Stato  presente  della  Lingua  Italiana. 
(Atti  dell'  Acad.  Ital.,  vol.  I.) 

Sortsi  (Pier-Domenico),  Erudimenti  della  Lingua  Italiana. 
Milano,  1831.  1  vol.  12mo. 

Spadqfora  (Pldcido),  Prosodia  Italiana,  colla  Giunta  di  tre  brevi 
Trattati  ;  T  uno  della  Z,  e  sua  varieta ;  e  P  altro  dell'  E  e 
O :  il  terzo  della  buona  e  rea  Proniinzia.  Venezia,  1820. 

2  vol,    8vo. 

Tommaseo  (Niccolb),  Nuovo  Dizionario  de'  Sinonimi  della  Lin- 
gua Italiana.  Firenze,  1830.  1  vol.  8vo. 

Toselli  (Ottdvio),   Origine   della   Lingua  Italiana.      Bologna, 

1831.    3vol.     8vo. 
Fdnzon  (Carlo  Antonio^  Grammatica  Ragionata  della  Lingua 

Italiana.    Livorno,  1834.     1  vol.     8vo. 

,  Dizionario  Universale  della  Lingua  Italiana.     Livorno, 

1827.    3  vol.    8vo. 
Vdrchi  (Benedetto),  L'  Ercolano,  o  Ragionamento  sulle  Lingue, 

ed  in  particolare  della  Toscana  e  Fiorentina.    Milano,  1803. 

1  vol.     8vo. 

Vergani  (M.  A.),  A  New  and  Complete  Italian  Grammar.  Leg- 
horn, 1824.  1  vol.  12mo. 

Vocdboldrio   degli   Accademici  della  Crusca.    Venezia,  1763. 

7  vol.    4to. 
?  colle  Aggiunte  di  Antonio  Cesari.      Verona, 

7  vol.    4to. 

— — Universale  della  Lingua  Italiana.     Napoli,  1829 — 

[Iprimi]5  vol.    4to.,  [che   contengono  le  lettere  A  —  RU. 
(Opera  in  corso.)] 

Zanobetti  ( Giovanni),  Nuovo  Dizionario  Portatile  della  Lingua 
Italiana.  Livorno,  1827.  1  vol.  16mo. 

Zotti  (Romualdo),  Grammaire  Italienne,  et  Themes  sur  la  Lan- 
gue  Italienne.  Paris,  1823.  2  vol.  12mo. 


A  TABLE 

OF  THE  ABBREVIATIONS  OF  THE  NAMES  OF  AUTHORS  AND  OF 
THE  WORKS  QUOTED  IN  THIS  GRAMMAR. 


AGN.  PAND,  o.          Pandolfmi  (Jgnolo),  'Trattato  del  Governo 

deila  Famiglia,'  pagina  o. 
Alam.  Colt.  o.  o.         Jllam&nni  (Luigi),  '  La  ColtivazioneJ  libro 

o.  pag.  o. 

Alberg.  Nov.  *#/&erga/i-Capacelli  (Francesco), <  ./Vbi'£//e.5 

Albert.  )  JUbertano,  Giudice  da  Brescia,  Volgarizza- 

Abertan.  c.  o.          ]      mento  de' '  Tre  Trattati,'  capitolo  o. 

.  o.  o.  , ,  Trattato  o.  cap.  o. 

Alf.  Fil.  o.  o.  ?  Alfiiri  (Vittorio),  'Tragedie,'  Filippo,  atto 

Filip.  o.  o.       \      o.  scerm  o. 

Antig.  o.  o. ,  Jlnligone,  atto  o.  scena  o. 

Saul.  o.  o.          ,  S'litt.  atto  o.  scena  o. 

Alg.  lett.  A!gar6Ui  (Francesco),  'Lettered 

Alleg.  ^  Allteri   (Alessandro),  {  Lettere  e  Rime,' 

Allegr.  o.  \    x  pag.  o. 

Ambr.  Cof.  o.  o.         Ambra    (Francesco   d'),    *  La    Cofandria^ 

comedm,  atto  o.  sc^na  o. 

Am.  Ant.  ^l  Jlmmaestramenti  degli  JlntichiJ  raccolti  e 
Amm.  Ant  d.  o. r.  o.  >  volgarizzati  da  Fra  Bartolommeo  da  San 
o.  o.  o.  )  Concordio,  distribuzione  o.  rubrica  o.  am- 

maestra mento  o. 
Amor.  Amortlti  ((  arlo),  i  Viaggio  ai  Tre  Laghi ; 

Maggiore,  di  Lucano,  e  di  Cdmo.' 
Ann,  Car.  Vedi  Car.,  Caro. 

Ann.  Vang.  *  Jlnnotazidni  sopra  gli  Evangtlj.'    (Testo  a 

ptnna.  citato  nel  Vocabolario  della  Criisca.) 

Ariost.  )  Ariosto  (Ludovico), '  Orlando  FurwsoJ  can- 

Far,  o.  o.    £      to  o.  stanza  o. 

B.  Vedi  Boc.c. 

Barb.  Gr.  Gr.  Barberi  (J-Ph.),  *  Grammaires  des   Gram- 

maires  Italiennes.' 

Bellinc.  Beltincioni  (Bernardo),  '  Rime.' 

Bemb.  ?  Bimbo  (Pietro), 4  Stdria  di  Venezia,'  lib.  o. 

Stor.  o.  o.       J      pag.  o. 

Lett.  o.  o.  o.      ., l  Leliere  Volgari,'  voliime  o.  lib.  o. 

pag.  o. 
Ben.Varch.  Vedi  Parch. 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


XXV 


Bent.  \Bentivoglio    (Cardinal   Guido),    «  Letter ej 

lett.  o.  S      lettera  o. 

Benv.  Cell.  Oref.  o.  Cellini   (Benvenuto\  'Trattati  (due)   delP 

Oreficeria,  e  della  Scultura,'  pag.  o. 
Ber.  Tass.  lett.  Tdsso  (Bernardo), '  Lettere? 

Bern.  Orl.  o.  o.         Berni  (Francesco),  '  Orlando  InnamordtoJ 

canto  o.  stanza  o. 
,  'Rime  Burlesche,'  vol.  o.  pag.  o. 


^  Boccdccio  (Giovanni),  <  Decamerone,'  Intro- 
duzione. 


'Decam.'  Proemio. 

giorndta  o.  Proemio. 

giorndta  o.  novella  o. 

giornata  o.  canzone. 

Conclusione. 


Rim.  o.  o. 

B. 

Bocc. 

Intr.  i 

Introd. 

Proem. 

g.  o.  Proem. 

g.  o.  n.  o. 

g.  o.  canz. 

Concl. 

Corb. 

A  met.  o. 

Fiam. 

Fiamm.  o.  o. 

Pdloc.  o. 

Lab. 

Laber.  o. 

Tes.  o.  o. 

Testam. 

Vis.  o. 

Vis.  Amor. 

Com.  Dant. 

Vit.  Dant.  o. 

Boccal. 

Boez.  Varch.  o.  o. 
Borgh.  Rip.  o. 
Tosc.  o. 

Arm.  Fam.  o. 

tine,'  discorso,  pag.  o. 
Bott.  Stor.  Am.  1.  o.  Botta  (Carlo),  «  StMa  della  Guerra  della 

Independenza  degli  Stati  Uniti  di^m^n- 

ca,'  lib.  o. 

Brun.                       iBrunetto    Latini,  'II  Tesoro'  volgarizzato 
Brunet.  Tes.  o.  o.  £     da  Bono  Giamboni,  lib.  o,  cap.  o. 
Pataff.  o.       ,  <  II  Patdffio,'  cap.  o.    (Testo  a  pen- 

na,  citdto  nel  Vocabolario.) 


Vedi Lab.,  Laber.  o. 

,  'JlmetoJ  pag.  o. 

, '  FiammettaJ  lib.  o.  numero  o. 

, { Fildcolo '  e  '  FilocopoJ  lib.  o. 

, '  Laberinto  d'  Amore,'  ossia  *  il  Cor- 

baccio,'  num.  o. 

,  *  Teseide,'  canto  o.  stanza  o. 

,  *  Testament 

, '  Jlmor6sa  Visione,'  canto  o. 


, 4  Comento  sopra  i  primi  Diciassette 

Canti  delP  Inferno  di  Ddnte.' 

,  '  Vita  di  Dante  JLlighieriJ  pag.  o. 

Boccallni  (Traiano),  'Ragguagli   di   Par- 

nasso.' 
Vedi  Varch. 

Borghini  (Raffaello),  4I1  RiposoJ  num.  o. 
,  ( Vincenzo),  *  Delia  Toscdna,  e  delle 

sue  Citta,'  discorso,  pag.  o. 

-,  *  DelP  Arme  delle  Famiglie  Fioren- 


XXVI 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


Buom. 

Ling.  Tosc.  o. 

o.  o. 
Buon. 

Buonar.  Rim.  o. 
Fier.  Introd. 


Buommattei  (Benedetto),  '  Delia  Lingua 
Toscdna,  Libri  Due,'  lib.  o.  trattato  o. 
cap.  o. 

Buonarroti  ( Michel- A*ngelo,  il  vecchio), 
1  Rime,'  pag.  o. 

(Michel-Angelo,   il  giovane),   'La 


*      FieraJ  comedia  in  cinque  giornate,  Intro- 
L       duzione. 

o.  o.  o.    J giornata  o.  atto  o.  scena  o. 

Burchiell.  p.  o.  s.  o.  Burchiello,  l  Soneiti^  pdrte  o.  sonetto  o. 
But.  Com.  Dant.        Buti  (Francesco  di  Bartolo  da),  i  Comento, 

ovvero  Lettura  sopra  il  Pcema  di  Dante.1 

Inf.  Purg.  Par.  o.  Inferno,  Purgatorio,  Paradiso,  canto  o. 

Cant.  Cam.  o.  Cdnti   Carnascialeschi,    pag.   o.     (Testo   a 

penna,  citato  net  Vocabolario.) 

Car.  >Caro  (Aimibal),  4  Lettere  Familiari,'  parte 

Caro.  lett.  o.  o.        5      °-  P'^S-  °- 

Matt.  s.  o.          ,  '  Mattaccini1  sonetto  o. 

Casa  Galat.  o.  Cdsa     (Monsignor    Giovanni    della),    *  II 

Galateo1  pag.  o. 

lett.  o.  ,  «  Lettere1  lettera  o. 

Castigl.  Cort.  1.  o.  o.  Castiglione    (Baldassare),  '  II 

lib.  o.  pag.  o. 
Cavalc.  >  Cavdlca  (Fra  Domenico),  Volgarizzamento 

Att.  A  post  o  5      degli  '  Atti  degli  Apostoli?  pag.  o. 

Sin  ' 


-Espos.  Simb. 
o.  o. 

Frutt.  Ling. 

Med.  cuor. 

Pungil.  o. 

Speccri.  Cr. 

Stolt.  o. 

Cavalcanti. 
Cecch.  Dot.  o.o. 

Esalt.  cr. 

Inc.  o.  o. 

Spir.  o.  o. 

Cesar. 
Cinon.  t  o. 


1  Esposizione    del    Simbolo    degli 
Apdstoli,'  lib.  o.  pag.  o. 

,  '  Trattato  de'  Frutti  delta  Lingua.1 

,  '  Medicina  del  Cuore.' 


,  '  PungitinguaJ  cap.  o. 

1  Specchio  della  CroceS 

Trattato    deile   *  Trenta    Sloltizie 


dell'  Uomo,'  pag.  o. 

'Esposizione  delle  sue  Canzoni.' 

Cer.chi  (Giovan-Maria),  l  La  DoteJ  comedia, 
atto  o.  scena  o. 

,  '  L'  Esaltazione  della  CroceJ  come- 
dia, atto  o.  scena  o. 

1  Gl'  Incantesimij'  comedia,  atto  o. 


sc£na  o. 


4  Lo  SpiritoJ  comedia,  atto  o.  sce- 
na o. 

CesaroHi  (Melchior),  Traduzione  dell' l  Ili- 
ade  d'  Om^ro.' 

Cindnio,  *  Osservazioni  della  Lingua  Itali- 
ana,'  tomo  o. 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


XXV11 


Class,  Esempio   tirato   da   Auto  re    Cldssico,   del 

quale  non  si  rimembra  il  nome.    Occorre 
rarissime  volte. 
Cort.  Osserv.  Corticelli  (Salvadore),  '  Regole  ed  Osserva- 

zioni  della  Lingua  Toscana.' 

Cr.  ?  Crescenzi  (Pietro  de'),  'Trattato  dell'  Agri- 

Cresc.  o.  o.  o.         $      coltura,  lib.  o.  cap.  o.  num.  o. 
Cron.  Mor.  *  Crimea  di  Giovanni  Morelli.' 

Cms.  ?  '  Vocabolario  degli  Accademici  della  Cru- 

Crusca.  S      sc(1*' 

Dant.  Inf.  o.  Dante  Atighifri,  'Divina  Commedia,'  Infer- 

wo,  canto  o. 

,  *  Comm.'  Purgatorio,  canto  o. 

, ,  Paradiso,  canto  o. 

, '  ConvivioS 

,'Rime.' 


—  Pur.  &  Purg.  o. 

—  Par.&Parad.o. 
Conv. 

Rim. 

Dav. 
Davan. 

Seism,  p.  o. 

Colt. 

Tac.  ann.l.o.  o. 


>  Davanzdti  (Bernardo),  '6pere.' 

,  <  Scisma  d'  Inghilterra,'  pag.  o. 

— , t  Coltivazione  Toscana.' 

,  Volgarizzamento  degli ;  Anndli  di 

Cornelio  Tacito,'  lib.  o.  pag.  o. 

~,  Volgarizzamento  delle  c  Storie  di 

Taciio?  lib.  o.  pag.  o. 

,  Volgarizzamento  della  *  Germdnia 


di  TdcitoS  pag.  o. 

,   Volgarizzamento    della   '  Vita  di 

Giulio  Agricola  di  Tacito,'  pag.  o. 

-,  Volgarizzamento  del  *  Dialogo  del- 


St.  ) 

Stor. 

Tac.  Stor.  o.  o.) 

Tac.  Germ.  o.  - 

Vit.  Agr.  o. 

—  Tac.Perd.Eloq.o.- 

Tac.  Post.  o. 

traduzione  degli  Anndli  di  Tacito?  pag.  o. 
Declam.  Quintil.  C.  Volgarizzamento    delle   '  Declamazioni    di 

Quintilidno,   testo    a   penna   di    Matteo 

Caccini.     (Citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 
Volgarizzanento  della  'Locuzidne 

trio  Falereo '  di  Piero  Segni,  pag.  o. 


le  Cagioni  della  Perduta  Eloquenza  di 
Tacito,'  pag.  o. 

1  Postille  ai  primi  se*i  libri  della  sua 


Demetr.  Segn.  o. 

Den. 

Riv.Ital.  l.o. 

c.  o. 
Letter. 

Lett. 

Sag.  Letter. 


[  Denina  (Carlo), 
I      o.  cap.  o. 


Rivoluzioni  dj  ItdliaJ  lib. 


, '  Discorso  Sopra  le  Vicende  della 

LetteraturaS 
,  *  Sdggio  sopra  la  Letterattira  Itali- 

dna.' 


XXVlll  TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 

Dep.  Decam.  o.  'Annotazioni  e  Discorsi  sopra  alcuni  luoghi 
del  Decamerone  di  Giovanni  Boccaccio, 
fatti  da'  Deputdti  '  [eletti  dal  Gran-Diica 
Cosimo  1. 1'  anno  1565,  per  la  correzione 
di  quell'  6pera],  pag.  o. 

Dial.  S.  Greg.  m.  Volgarizzamento  de' '  Didloghi  di  San  Gre- 
gorio  Jlldgno.9 

Din.  Comp.  o.  o.  Compdgni  (Dmo\  <  Storia,  ovvero  Oronaca 
Fiorentina,  lib.  o.  pag.  o. 

JDittam.  )  l  II  Dittamondo  '  di  Fazio  degli  Uberti,  lib. 

o.  o.  $      o.  cap.  o. 

Eriz.  Giorn.  Erizzo  (Sebastiano),  « Le  Sei  Giorndte.' 

Fav.  Esop.  o.  Volgarizzamento  delle  *  Fdvole  d*  Esopo? 

pag.  o.  (Testo  a  ptnna,  citato  net  Vo- 
cabolario.) 

Fior.  Vt.  c.  o.  *  Fiore  di  Virtu?  cap.  o. 

A  .  ?  Firenzuola  (ignolo),  Traduzione  dell'  «^- 

—  As  d'  6r.  o.  I     sino  *  «*  d'  Apuleio,'  pag.  o. 

—  dial.  bell.  donn.  o. ,  *  Didlogo  dilU  Bellezze  delle  D6n- 

we,'  pag.  o. 

disc.  an.  o.         ,  '  Discdrso  degli  AnimdliJ  pag.  o. 

Luc.  o.  o.  , 1 1  Liicidi?  comedia,  atto  o.  scena  o. 

nov.  o.   '  ,  l  NovelleJ  novella  o. 

Trin.  o.  o.         ,  l  Trinuzia?  comedia,  atto  o.  scena  o. 

Fosc.  Foscolo  (Ugo), '  Esame  Critic  o  de'  Commen- 

tatori  di  Dante.' 

Fr.  Giord.                ?  Fra     Giordano    da    Ripalta,    «  Prediche, ' 
Fra  Giord.  o.           J      pag.  o. 
S.  Pred.  o.     ,  testo  (a  penna)  Salvidti,  prtdica  o. 

(Citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 

Fr.  Guitt.  ?  Fra    Guittone   d'   Arezzo,   « Lettered  lette- 

Fra  Guitt.  lett.  o.   $      tera  o. 
Franc.  Barb.  o.  o.      Barberino  (Francesco),  *  Document!  d'  A- 

more,'  poesie,  pag.  o.  verso  o. 
Fr.  Sacch.  ^ 

Fran.  Sacch.  >  Vedi  Sacch. 

Franc.  Sacch.        } 
Fris.  Elog.  Galil.       Fiisi  (Paolo),  «  EUgio  di  Galileo  Galilei: 

|^|j  Q  \  Galileo  Galilei, «  Saggiat6re,'  pag.  o. 

Mach.  Sol.  o.    ,   *  Istoria  e   Dimostrazioni  intorno 

alle  Mdcchie  Soldri,  e  loro  accident!,' 
pag.  o. 

Gang.  ?  Ganganelli  (Giovan-Vincenzo  Antonio  [Pa- 
lett.  S     Pa  Clem6nte  XIV.] ),  <  Lettered 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


XXIX 


Cell. 

Circ.  o.  o. 

Giamb.  1.  o. 

Gian.  Stor.  Civ. 

Nap.  1.  o.  c.  o. 
Gio.  Fior.  Pecor. 

g.  o.  n.  o. 
Gio.  &  Giov.  Vill. 

1.  o.  c.  o.  o. 
Giral.  lett. 
Gold. 

Avvent. 

Ver.  Am. 

Gr.  ? 

S.  Gir.  o.  o.    £ 

Gram.  Gram. 
Guar.  Past.  Fid.  o.  o. 

Guicc. 

Stor.  o.  o. 

Stor.  Ital. 

Guid. 
o. 


Incer.  c.  o. 

Lab.  o. 

Lasc.  Sibill.  o.  o. 

Spir.  o.  o. 

Lib.  Cur.  Malatt. 

Libr.  Adorn.  Donn. 

Lipp.  M.  o.  o.         ? 

Malm.  o.  o.     $ 

Liv.  dec.  o. 


Lod,  Mar.  Rim.  o. 
Lod.  Nov. 
Lor.  Med.  c.  o. 


Gelli  (Giovam-Battista),  *  La  Circe,'  dialogo 

o.  pag.  o. 
Giambulldri  (Pier-Francesco),   '  Storia   d' 

Europa,'  lib.  o. 
Giannone  (Pielro), '  Stdria  Civile  del  Regno 

di  NdpoUJ  lib.  o.  cap.  o. 

Vedi  Ser  Giov.  Pecor. 

Vill&ni  ( Giovanni),  c  Storia,'  lib.  o.  cap.  o. 

num.  o. 

Girdhli  (Giraldo), « Ltttere.' 
Goldoni  (Carlo),  <  L'  Avventurttre  Onorato,' 

comedia. 

*  II  Vtro  AmicoJ  comedia. 

Volgarizzame'nto  de' c  Grddi  di  San  Giro- 

lamoj  cap.  o.  pag.  o. 
Vedi  Barb.  Gr.  Gr. 
Guarini  (Giovam-Battista),  'Pastor  Fido,' 

atto  o.  scena  o. 

Guicciardini  (Francesco),  *  Stdria  d?  Italia? 
lib.  o.  pag.  o. 

Guido  Giudice  dalle  Colonne  di  Messina, 
Volgarizzamento  della*  Storia  della  Guer- 
ra  Troiana'  pag.  o.  (Testo  aptnna,  citato 
nel  Vocabolario.) 

'  Rime  Antiche  d'  Incerti  JlutoriJ  canzone  o. 

Vedi  Bocc.  Lab.,  Laber. 

Grazzini  (Anton-Francesco)  detto  il  Ldsca, 
1  La  SibillaS  comedia,  atto  o.  scena  o. 

,  '  La  SpiritdtaJ  comedia, .  atto  o. 

scena  o. 

Volgarizzame'nto  del l  Libro,  ossia  Trattato 
della  Cura  di  tutte  le  Malattlo:  (Te»to 
a  penna,  citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 

'  Libro  degli  Jldornamenli  delle  DdnneS 
(T6sto  a  penna,  citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 

Lippi  (Lorenzo),  { II  Malmantile  Racqui- 
stato,'  canto  o.  stanza  o. 

Volgarizzamento  delle  *  Deche  (Prima  e 
Terza)  di  Tito  LivioJ  deca  o.  (Testo  a, 
penna,  citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 

Martelli  (Lodovico,)  *  .Rime,'  pag.  o. 

Lodoli  (Francesco), « Novelle.' 

Medici  (Lorenzo  dP),  *Canzoni  a  Ballo, 
canzone  o. 


XXX 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


—  ,     .LIU.  ./veftGfcu,    siaiiz-a  v. 

dia,  Prdlogo. 

Mach.  j 
Stor.  Fior.  1.  o.  ] 

Cnm 

^Machiavelli   (Niccolo),   '  Istorie  Florentine,' 
I      lib.  o. 

4  f^nvn^rf'tP  ' 

lett. 

,  i  Lettered 

i  Tl    Pry-noVnr  ' 

Maestruzz.  o.  o. 

Volgarizzamento  della  '  Somma  Pisanella, 

Maff.  Mer.  o.  o. 

Manz.  Prom.  Spos. 

c.  o. 

Matt  Fran.  ) 

—  Franz.  Rim.  o.o.  { 
Matt.  Vill.  o.  o. 
Mes.  Bin.  Rim.  1.  o. 

Cin.  o. 

Metast.  Artas.  o.  o. 

lett. 

Miliz.  Art.  Dis. 

Mor.  S.  Greg.  & 

Gregor.  o.  o. 
Nov.  Ant.  o. 

Ovid.  Pist. 

Pall. 


detta  il  Maestruzzo?  lib.  o.  cap.  o.    (Testo 

a  penna,  citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 
Maffei  (Scipione),  '  MeropeJ  tragedia,  atto 

o.  scena  o. 
Manzoni  (Alessandro),  '  I  Promessi  SpfoiJ 

cap.  o. 
Franzesi  (Matteo),  l  Rime  Burlesche,'  vol.  o. 

pag.  o. 

Villdni  (Matteo],  t  Storia,'  lib,  o.  cap.  o. 
Messer  Bino,  l  Rime  Burlesche,'  lib.  o. 
-  Cino  da  Pistoia,  '  Rime.'  pag.  o. 
Metastdsio   (Pietro),    'JlrtaserseJ    dramma, 

atto  o.  scena  o. 


Passav.  o. 

Ver.  Pen. 

Spec.  Ver. 

Pen. 

Past.  Fid.  o.  o. 
Pataff.  o. 
Pecor.  g.  o.  n.  o. 
Petr.] 

8.  O. 

C.  O. 

lett. 


m 

Milizia  (Francesco),  cDizionario  delle  Belle 
Arti  del  Disegno.' 

Vedi  Zan.  da  Strat. 

4  II  Novellino,  ossia  Cento  NbMe  JlnticlieJ 

novella  o. 
Volgarizzamerrto  delle  'Pistole  rf'  Ovidio.' 

(Testo  a  penna,  citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 
Pallavicino,  '  Concilio  di  Trento.' 

Passavdnti  (Fra  Jacopo),  '  Specchio  di  Ver  a 
Penitenza,  pag.  o. 


Vedi  Guar.  Past.  Fid.  o.  o. 

Vedi  Brun.,  Brunei.  Pataff. 

Gio.  Fior.  Pecor. 

I  Petrdrca  (Francesco),  '  Rime.' 

• , '  Rime,'  sonetto.  o. 

I , ,  canzone  o. 

, l  Letter e  Familiari: 


TABLE    ON    ABBREVIATIONS. 


XXXI 


•  Tri. 

•  Trionf. 

Am.        ) 

• Amor.    5 

Fam. 

— -  Mort. 

Tern.      ? 

Temp.    $ 

c.o. 

Uom.  ill.  o. 


,  l  TrMnfi.' 

,  <  Trionfo  tf  Amore? 
,  -  £  delta  Fdma? 


'del  Tempo^ 

,  cap.  o. 
<  Vite  degli  Uomini  lllustri?  volga- 


rizzate,  pag.  o. 

Pign.  Fav.  Pignotti  (Lorenzo),  '  j 

Poliz.  St.  o.  o.  Polizidno,  (Agnolo),  '  Stdnze  per  la  Giostra 

di  Giuliano,'  canto  o,  stanza  o. 

Pros.  Fior.  o.  'Prose  Florentine,'- p&g.  o. 

Red.  annot.  Ditir.      Redi  (Francesco), '  AnnoJ,azi6ni  al  suo  Di- 
tirdmbo' 

cons.  o.  o.          '  Consulti  Medici,  vol.  o.  pag.  o. 

Ditir.  o.  ,  'Bacco  in  Toscana,'  ditirdmbo,  pag.  o. 

Ins.  o.  ,  '  Esperienze  intorno  alia  generazione 

degP  Insetti'  pag.  o. 

lett.  o.  o.  , '  Lettere  Familiari,'  vol.  o.  pag.  o. 

Vip.  o.  o.  ,  '  Osservazioni   intorno   alle    Vipere? 

lettere,  vol.  o.  pag.  o. 

Ricett.  Fior.  o.  '  Ricettdrio  FiortntinoJ  pag.  o. 

Rim.  Ant  p.  o.  '  Rime  Antiche,  ossia  Raccolta  di  Sonetti, 

Canzoni,  ed  altre  Rime  di  diversi  antichi 
poeti  Toscani,'  pdg.  o. 

Rosasco.  Rosdsco  (Girolamo),  '  Delia  Lingua  Tosca- 

na, Dialoghi  Sette.' 

Sacch.  n.  o.  Saccketti  (Franco), ' NovelleJ  novella  o. 

rim.  o.  ,  l  Rime?  pag.  o. 

Op.  div.  o.         ,  '  O'pere  Diverse,'  pag.  o. 

Sag.  Nat.  esp.  o.      '  Sdggi  di  Naturali  Esperienze'  fatte  nell' 
Accademia  del  Cimento,  descritti  da  Lo- 
renzo Magalotti,  pag.  o. 
I  Salvidti( Leonardo),  'Avvertimenti  della  Lin- 
gua sopra  il  Decamerone,'  vol.  o.  lib.  o. 
I      cap.  o. 
, '  II  GrdnchioJ  comedia,  atto  o.  sce- 


Salv.  Avvert.  vol. 
o.  1.  o. 

o.  o.  o. 

1 Granch.  o.  o. 

Spin.  o.  o. 


,  4  La  SpmaJ  comedia,  atto  o.  sce- 


Salvin.Pros.Tosc.  o.  Salvini    (Anton-Maria),   'Prose    ToscdneJ 
pag.  o. 


XXX11  TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 

Seal.  S.  Agost.  Volgarizzamento  della  *  Scdla  del  Paradise,' 
attribuita  a  San?  Jlgostino.  (Testo  a  pin- 
na,  citato  ml  Vocabolario.) 

Segn.  Crist,  instr.  )  Segneri  (Paolo),  <I1  Cristidno  Instruito  nella 
o.  o.  $      siia  Legge,'  parte  o.  ragionamento  o. 

Mann.  Marz.  o. ,  '  Manna  dell'  anima,'  mese  di  Mar- 

zo.  giorno  o. 

Nov.  o.     , ,  mese  di  Novembre.  giorno  o. 

Sen.  )  Volgarizzamento  delle  *  Pistole  di  Seneca? 

Pist.  o.  £      pistola  o, 

Ser    Giov.    Fior.  1 

Pecor.  f  Ser    Giovanni    Fiorentino,    '  II    Pecoronc,' 

—  Gio.  Fior.  Pe-  £     giorndta  o.  novella  o. 
cor.  g.  o.  n.  o,      ) 

Soav.  Nov.  Sodve  (Francesco)  '  Novelle  Morali.' 

Sod.  Colt.  o.  Soderini  (Giovan-Vittorio),  *  La  Coltivazwne 

delle  Viti,'  pag.  o. 

St.  Agost.  Citt.  Dio.  Volgarizzamento   della  <  Citta  di  IM   di 
o.  o.  SanV  Jlgostino,  lib.  o.  cap.  o.     (Testo  a 

penna,  atdto  nel  Vocabolario.) 

Stor.  Pistol,  p.  o.  *  Storie  Pistolesi,  ovve.ro  delle  cose  avvenute 
in  Toscana  dal  1300  al  1348,'  pag.  o. 

Stor.  Semif.  o.  Volgarizzamento  della  '  Storia  di  SemifonteJ 

pag.  o. 

Tass.  Am.  o.  o.       ?  Tdsso   (Torquato),    4  Jlminta,  Favola  Bos- 

Amint.  o.  o.    ^      chereccia,'  atto  o  scena  o. 

Ger.  o.  o.  ,  l  Gerusalemme  Liberata,  canto  o.  stan- 
za o. 

Teor.   Verb.   Ital.     <  Teorica  de>    Ferbi  Italian^  di  Giuseppe 
part.  o.  §.  o.  Compagnoni,  pdrte  o.  pardgrafo  o, 

^^^ett.  I  Tolommti  (Claudio),  «  Ltttere.' 

Tratt.   segr.   cos.      <  Trattdto   delle   Segrete  cdse  delle   Donne: 

donn.  (Testo  a penna,  citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 

Vanz.  Fdnzon  (Carlo  Antonio),  «  Gframmatica  Ra- 

gionata  della  Lingua  Italiana.' 

Varch.  )  Varchi( Benedetto), Traduzione  della4  Con- 
Boez.  o.  o.      \      solazione  Filosofica  di  Boezio,  lib.  o.  pro- 

sa  &  rima  o. 
Ercol.  o.  — ,  <  Ercoldno,  ossia  Ragionamento  sul- 

le  Lingue,'  pag.  o. 

Rim.  o.  l  Rime,7  pag.  o. 

Sen.  ben.  o.  o.  Traduzione  de'  libri  de' l  Benefaj  di  Stne- 

caj  lib.  o.  cap.  o. 

Vas.  Vasari  (Giorgio), '  Trattato  d^lla  Pittura.' 

Vill.  Vedi  Gio.  &f  Giov.  Vill. 


TABLE    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


XXX111 


Vine.  Mart.  rim.  o. 
Vit.  S.  Ant 

—  S.  Cater. 

—  S.  Franc. 

—  S.  G.  Bat. 


Martelli(  Vincenzo),  'Rime  e  Lettere,'  pag.  o 
6  Vita  di  SanC  Antonio.'9    (Testo  a  penna, 
citato  nel  Vocabolario) 

6 di  Santa  Caterina  da  Siena.' 

' di  San  Francisco? 


r-  S.  Giov.  Guald. 
(Guad.  lib.)  o. 

—  SS.  PP.  o.  o. 
--  Pad.  o.  o. 
Zan.  da  Strat.  o.  o. 


di  San  Giovam-Battista.' 


-  -  —  di  San  Giovam-Battisfa,  MS.  della 
Librerla  de'  Guadagni,  pag.  o.     (Citato 


Vite  dff  Sdnti  Pa- 


Zibald.  Andr.  o.  o. 


nel  Vocabolario.) 
>  Volgarizzamento  delle 

drij  vol.  o.  pag.  o. 

Zandbi  da  Strata,  Volgarizzamento  de' 
f  Morali  di  San  Gregorio  Magno,'  lib.  o. 
num.  o. 

*  Zibaldone,  ovverp  Libro  di  Varie  Cose,' 
testo  a  penna  di  Andrea  Andreim,  parte 
o.  pag.  o.  (Citato  nel  Vocabolario.) 


ITALIAN    GRAMMAR. 


INTRODUCTION. 

(jrR  AMMAR  is  the  art  of  speaking  and  writing  correctly. 

SPEAKING  and  WRITING  are  the  expression  of  our  thoughts 
by  words. 

WORDS  may  be  considered  as  articulate  sounds,  or  as  signs 
of  our  thoughts. 

Words  considered  as  ARTICULATE  SOUNDS,  are  formed  of 
syllables,  and  syllables  of  letters. 

SYLLABLES  consist  of  one  or  more  letters  pronounced 
by  a  single  impulse  of  the  voice,  and  constituting  a  word,  or 
part  of  a  word. 

Words  that  consist  of  one  syllable,  are  called  monosyllables; 
those  that  consist  of  two  syllables,  are  called  dissyllables  ;  and 
those  that  consist  of  more  syllables,  are* called  poly syllables. 

LETTERS  are  certain  figures  or  characters,  which  represent 
sounds  and  articulations. 

SOUNDS  are  simple  emissions  of  the  voice  ;  and  ARTICULA- 
TIONS are  the  modifications  which  sounds  receive  by  the 
movements  of  the  organs  of  speech.  The  letters  which  repre- 
sent the  sounds,  as,  a,  e,  i,  fyc.,  are  called  vowels ;  and  those 
which  represent  the  articulations,  as,  b,  c,  d,  fyc.,  are  called 
consonants,  because  they  can  only  be  sounded  ivith  a  vowel. 

The  union  of  two  vowels,  pronounced  by  a  single  impulse  of 
the  voice,  is  called  a  diphthong;  and  that  of  three  vowels  pro- 
nounced in  like  manner,  is  called  a  triphthong. 

Words  considered  as  SIGNS  OF  OUR  THOUGHTS,  are 
divided  into  several  classes,  which  constitute  the  different 
PARTS  OF  SPEECH.  These  in  Italian  are  nine ;  viz.  the 
article,  noun,  pronoun,  verb,  participle,  adverb,  preposition,  con- 
junction, and  interjection. 

Of  these  nine  Parts  of  Speech,  the  article,  noun,  pronoun, 
verb,  and  participle,  are  VARIABLE,  that  is,  change  their  ter- 
mination ;  the  rest  are  INVARIABLE. 

1 


2  INTRODUCTION. 

The  ARTICLE  is  a  word  placed  before  a  noun  to  denote 
the  extent  of  its  signification  ;  as,  il,  lo,  la,  '  the' : — IL  libro, 
'  the  book' ;  LO  sprone,  i  the  spur' ;  LA.  cdsa,  l  the  house'. 

The  NOUN  is  either  substantive,  or  adjective. 

A  SUBSTANTIVE  noun  is  a  word,  which  serves  to  denote  a 
person  or  thing ;  as,  Pietro, '  Peter' ;  sole ,  '  sun' ;  virtu, '  virtue'. 
,  Substantive  nouns  are  either  proper  or  common. 

A  proper  noun  is  one,  which  is  individually  applicable  to  a 
person  or  thing  ;  as,  Cesare,  '  Caesar' ;  Roma, t  Rome'. 

A  common  noun  is  one,  which  may  be  applied  to  all  persons 
or  things  of  the  same  kind  ;  as,  uomo,  '  man' ;  citta, '  city'. 

Some  common  nouns  are  also  called  collective,  from  their 
presenting  to  the  mind  the  idea  of  a  collection  of  persons  or 
things  ;  as,  gente,  '  people' ;  esercito, '  army'. 

An  ADJECTIVE  noun  is  a  word  added  to  a  substantive  to  ex- 
press its  quality;  as,  dotto,  'learned' ;  bella,  'beautiful': — un  uo- 
mo DOTTO,  '  a  learned  man' ;  una  BELLA  citta, '  a  beautiful  city'. 

Adjectives  may  express  the  quality  of  an  object,  either  abso- 
lutely, that  is,  without  any  relation  to  other  objects,  or  relatively 
to  other  objects ;  which  produces  different  degrees  of  qualitica*- 
tionr^  these  have  been  reduced  to  the  following  three,  viz.  the 
positive,  comparative,  and  superlative. 

The  positive  is  the  adjective  itself,  expressing  the  quality  of 
an  object,  without  any  relation  of  comparison  ;  as  ncco, '  rich' ; 
po'vero,  '  poor'. 

The  comparative  is  the  adjective  expressing  a  relation  of 
superiority,  inferiority,  or  equality,  between  two  or  more  objects 
in  comparison ;  as,  piu,meno,  or  si  ricco, '  more,  less,  or  so  rich' ; 
piu,  meno,  or  si  povero,  '  more,  less,  or  so  poor' : — Pietro  e  PIU, 
or  MENO  RICCO  di  Tommdso,  '  Peter  is  more,  or  less  rich  than 
Thomas' ;  Tommdso  e  PIU,  or  MENO  POVERO  di  Paolo,  '  Thomas 
is  more,  or  less  poor  than  Paul' ;  Pietro  e  Tommdso  sono  si  Ric- 
CHI,  or  si  POVERI  come  Paolo,  '  Peter  and  Thomas  are  so  rich, 
or  so  poor  as  Paul'. 

The  Superlative  is  the  adjective  expressing  the  quality  of  the 
object  in  the  highest  degree  of  superiority,  or  the  lowest  degree 
of  inferiority. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  superlative,  the  relative,  and  the 
absolute. 

The  relative  superlative  expresses  the  superiority  or  inferi- 
ority of  an  object,  with  relation  to  others  ;  as,  il  piu,  or  il  meno 
ricco,  '  the  most,  or  the  least  rich' ;  il  piu,  or  il  mtno  povero, 
'  the  most,  or  the  least  poor' : — Tommdso  e  IL  PIU,  or  IL  MENO 
RICCO, — Paolo  e  IL  PIU,  or  IL  MENO  POVERO,  di  tutti ;  '  Thomas 
is  the  most,  or  the  least  rich,— Paul  is  the  most,  or  the  least 
poor,  of  all'. 


INTRODUCTION.  3 

The  absolute  superlative  shows  that  the  object  spoken  of 
possesses  a  quality  in  the  superlative  degree,  but  without 
reference  to  any  other ;  as,  ricchissimo, '  very  rich' ;  poverissimo, 
4  very  poor'. 

A  great  number  of  Italian  nouns  are  susceptible  of  a  change 
of  termination,  which,  modifying  the  primitive  idea  expressed 
by  them,  augments  or  diminishes  their  signification  ;  as,  uo'mo, 
4  man' ;  OMONE,  i  large  man' :  ruscello,  '  brook' ;  RUSCEL.LETTO, 
'small  brook'.  The  nouns  thus  altered,  are  called  AUGMENTA- 
TIVES  and  DIMINUTIVES. 

With  nouns  are  usually  classed  the  NUMERALS,  which  are 
either  cardinal,  or  ordinal. 

Cardinal  numbers  are  those,  which  determine  a  collection  of 
objects,  with  regard  to  their  number  or  quantity;  as,  uno, 
1  one' ;  died,  i  ten'. 

,     Ordinal  numbers  determine  objects  with  regard  to  their  order 
or  arrangement ;  as,  primo,  '  first' ;  decimo, '  tenth'. 

Italian  nouns  are  varied  by  gender  and  number. 

Gender  is  a  division  of  nouns  according  to  sex.  Nouns 
denoting  males  are  masculine;  nouns  denoting  females  are 
feminine.  This  division,  which  properly  regards  only  nouns 
having  sex,  is  in  Italian  extended  also  to  all  other  nouns, 
though  they  have  no  sex  ;  so  that  every  noun  is  either  of  the 
masculine  or  feminine  gender.  But  there  are  certain  nouns 
which  belong  to  both  genders,  and  these  are  said  to  be  of  the 
common  gender. 

JVumber  is  the  designation  of  one  or  more  objects.  There 
are  two  numbers,  viz.  the  singular  and  plural.  The  singular 
designates  one  single  person  or  thing ;  the  plural,  more  than 
one  person  or  thing. 

The  various  relations  of  nouns,  which  in  Latin  are  denoted 
by  different  terminations,  or  cases,  are  expressed  in  Italian 
by  certain  prepositions  placed  before  them ;  and  for  the  nom- 
inative and  accusative  of  the  Latin,  have  been  substituted  the 
terms  subjective,  and  objective  ;  and  for  the  genitive,  dative,  and 
ablative, — the  terms  relation  of  possession,  of  attribution,  and  of 
derivation. 

A  PRONOUN  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun,  already 
expressed,  to  prevent  its  frequent  repetition  ;  and  like  the  noun 
is  either  substantive  or  adjective. 

Substantive  pronouns  are  either  personal,  conjunctive,  relative, 
or  interrogative ;  and  adjective  pronouns  are  either  possessive, 
demonstrative,  or  indefinite. 


4  INTRODUCTION. 

The  personal  pronouns  are  those,  which  mark  the  persons. 

The  persons  are  three,  viz.  the  first,  second,  and  third.  The 
first  is  the  person  speaking  ;  as,  io,  '  I' ;  no'i,  '  we' : — the  second 
is  the  person  spoken  to  ;  as,  tu,  '  thou' ;  voi,  '  you' : — and  the 
third  is  the  person  spoken  of;  as,  egli,  'he' ;  ella, '  she' ;  eglino. 
elleno,  l  they'. 

The  conjunctive  pronouns  are  those,  which  are  always  joined 
to  a  verb.  They  are  derived  from  the  personal  pronouns,  and 
are  divided  into  conjunctive,  property  speaking ;  as,  mi,  '  me',  or 
'  to  me' ;  ti,  l  thee',  or  '  to  thee' ;  si,  '  one's  self,  or  l  to  ones' 
self: — MI  duole,  'it  grieves  me' ;  TI  parla,  '  he  speaks  to  thee'  ; 
si  loda,  'he  praises  himself: — and  relative  conjunctive  pro- 
nouns ;  as,  ne,  '  of  it,  of  him,  of  her',  or  i  of  them' ; — NE  vorrei 
veder  la  fine,  ' 1  should  like  to  see  the  end  of  it'. 

The  relative  pronouns  are  those,  which  refer  to  a  person  or 
thing,  that  has  been  before  spoken  of;  as,  chi,  '  who'  or  '  he 
that';  die,  il  qudle,  'who',  or  'which  that': — CHI  si  umilia  si 
esalta,  'who',  or  'he  that  humbles  himself  exalts  himself:  V  uo- 
mo,  CHE  or  il  QUALE  scrive,  'the  man,  who  or  that  writes';  il  libro, 
CHE  or  il  QUALE  io  leggo,  '  the  book,  which  or  that  I  read'. 

The  person  or  thing,  which  relative  pronouns  refer  to,  is 
called  the  antecedent. 

The  interrogative  pronouns  are  those,  which  are  used  to 
interrogate,  or  ask  a  question;  as,  chi?  'who?'  che?  'what?7 
qudle ?  'which?' — CHI  e?  'who  is  it?'  ciiE/dfe?  'what  are 
you  doing  ?'  QUALE  volete^  '  which  will  you  have  ?' 

The  possessive  pronouns  are  those,  which  mark  the  possession 
of  a  person  or  a  thing ;  as,  mio,  '  my',  or  '  mine' ;  tuo,  '  thy',  or 
'  thine' ;  suo,  '  his,  her,  hers',  or  '  its' : — MIO  fratello,  '  my  bro- 
ther' ;  U  TUO  cappello,  'thy  hat' ;  questo  e  suo,  'this  is  his,  hers', 
or  'its'. 

The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  those,  which  point  out  the 
particular  person  or  thing  of  which  we  speak;  as,  questo,  '  this' ; 
quello,  'that';  cotesto,  'that  near  you': — QUESTO  giovine, '  this 
youth';  QUELLO  specchio,  'that  looking-glass';  COTESTO  libro, 
'  that  book  near  you'. 

The  indefinite  pronouns  are  those,  which  express  a  person 
or  thing  in  a  general  and  unlimited  sense ;  as,  alcuno, '  some 
one' ;  ogni,  '  every' ;  niente,  '  nothing'. 

Italian  pronouns,  like  the  nouns,  are  varied  by  gender  and 
number. 

A  VERB  is  a  word,  which  by  itself  implies  affirmation ;  as, 
essere,  '  to  be' : — ESSERE  amabile,  '  to  be  amiable' :  and  neces- 
sarily supposes  a  subject  and  a  quality,  to  which  it  affirms  that 
the  subject  is,  or  is  not  attributed  ;  as,  la  VIRTU  e  AMABILE, 


INTRODUCTION.  5 

4  virtue  is  amiable' ;  la  PIGRIZIA  non  &  LODEVOLE,  *  slothfulness 
is  not  laudable'. 

There  is  but  one  verb,  stricldy  speaking ;  essere,  '  to  be' ; 
because  this  alone  expresses  affirmation.  But  there  are  other 
words,  which  in  themselves  contain  both  the  verb  essere,  and 
the  quality,  which  it  affirms  to  belong-  to  the  subject  of  which 
we  speak ;  as,  amdre  (essere  amdnte),  l  to  love  (to  be  a  lover 
of)';  sprezzdre  (essere  sprezzdnte),  '  to  despise  (to  be  a  despiser 
of)': — egli  AMA  (egli  E  AMANTE),  'he  loves  (he  is  a  lover  of)'; 
ella  SPREZZA  (ella  E  SPREZZANTE),  '  she  despises  (she  is  a 
despiser  of)' ;  and  to  these  has  also  been  given  the  name  of 
verbs,  and  they  are  used  to  express  the  quality  of  the  subject, 
or  the  action  it  performs  or  it  undergoes. 

Verbs  are  commonly  divided  into  active,  passive,  neuter,  pro- 
nominal, and  unipersonaL 

Active  verbs  are  those,  that  express  an  action,  which  falls  or 
may  immediately  fall  upon  an  object ;  as.  amdre,  t  to  love' : — 
amdre  LA  VIRTU,  '  to  love  virtue'. 

The  object  upon  which  the  action  of  the  verb  falls,  is  called 
the  regimen  or  complement  of  this  verb.  Besides  this  first  com- 
plement, which  is  called  direct,  many  active  verbs  may  have  a 
second  complement,  which  is  called  indirect ;  as,  scrivere.  '  to 
write' : — scrivere  UNA  LETTERA,  *  to  write  a  letter' : — scrivere 
una  lettera  AD  UN  AMICO,  i  to  write  a  letter  to  a  friend.'  This 
last,  however,  properly  speaking,  is  rather  a  complement  of  the 
preposition,  which  always  precedes  it. 

Passive  verbs  are  those,  that  express  an  action  which  falls 
upon  the  subject ;  as  essere  amdto,  '  to  be  loved' : — LA  VIRT&  e 
amdta, '  virtue  is  loved'. 

JVew/er  verbs  are  those,  that  express  a  state  of  being,  or  an 
action  which  does  not  fall  directly  upon  an  object ;  as,  dormire, 
1  to  sleep' ;  nuocere, l  to  be  noxious'. 

Pronominal  verbs  are  those,  that  are  varied  with  two  pro- 
nouns of  the  same  person ;  as,  vender-si,  '  to  sell '  or  '  to  be 
sold' : — QUESTO  LJBRO  si  vende  cdro,  l  this  book  sells',  or  *  is 
sold  dear'. 

To  pronominal,  properly,  belong  reflective  and  reciprocal  verbs. 

Reflective  verbs  are  those,  that  express  either  the  action  of  a 
subject  which  acts  upon  itself;  as,  difender-si,  'to  defend  ones' 
self: — io  MI  difendo, '  I  defend  myself;  or  an  action  of  the  sub- 
ject, which  terminates  finally  in  itself;  as,/dr-si  un  dovere  '  to 
make  to  ones'  self  a  duty' : — EGLI  si  faun  dovere,  'he  makes  to 
himself  a  duty'. 

Reciprocal  verbs  are  those,  that  express  the  action  of  several 
subjects,  who  act  respectively  the  one  upon  the  other  ;  as, 
aiutdr-si ;  'to  assist  each  other';  NOI  ci  aiutidmo,  'we  assist 
each  other'. 

1* 


6  INTRODUCTION. 

Unipersonal,  or,  as  they  are  usually  called,  impersonal  verbs, 
are  those,  that  are  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular  of 
each  tense  ;  as,  accadere, l  to  happen': — accdde, '  it  happens';  ac- 
cddde,  '  it  happened' ;  accaderd,  '  it  will  happen'. 

There  are  moreover  two  verbs,  which  generally  assist  to 
vary  other  verbs,  and  which,  consequently,  are  called  auxiliary 
verbs:  these  are,  avere,  'to  have';  and  essere,  'to  be': — AVERE 
letto, f  to  have  read' ;  ESSERE  paiiito,  'to  (be)  have  departed'. 

Italian  verbs  are  varied  by  mood,  tense,  number,  and  person. 

Mood  is  a  particular  form  of  the  verb,  which  shows  the  man- 
ner in  which  the  action,  or  the  state  of  being,  is  represented. 

There  are  five  moods,  viz.  the  infinitive,  indicative,  conjunc- 
tive, conditional,  and  imperative. 

The  infinitive,  represents  the  action  in  an  indefinite  manner, 
and  without  distinction  of  person  or  number ;  as,  scrivere,  '  to 
write'. 

The  indicative  represents  the  action  absolutely,  and  without 
dependence  on  any  other  word  ;  as,  io  scrivo,  '  I  write'. 

The  conjunctive  represents  the  action  as  depending  upon 
another  verb  with  which  it  is  connected  by  a  conjunction ;  as, 
bisogna,  che  io  SCRIVA,  '  it  is  necessary,  that  I  write'. 

The  conditional 
a  condition ; 
could'. 

The  imperative  represents  the  action  in  commanding,  exhort- 
ing, or  intreating ;  as,  sciivi,  '  write  thou' ;  scrivete,  i  write  ye' ; 
scrividmo, '  let  us  write'. 


C  lit  SUJVI.VA,      it  10  iicocooai^,  tuai  a.    VVJ.IL^  • 

iitional  represents  the  action  with  dependence  upon 
i ;  as,  io  SCRIVEREI,  se  potessi,  1 1  should  write,  if  I 


Each  of  these  moods,  except  the  imperative,  has  different 
tenses. 

Tense  is  a  distinction  of  time,  which  shows  when  the  action  is 
done.  Time,  strictly  speaking,  is  either  present,  past,  ex  future. 

The  present  denotes  the  action  doing  by  a  subject  at  the 
very  time  in  which  we  are  speaking  ;  as,  io, CANTO,  '  I  sing'. 

The  past  or  preterite  denotes  the  action  done  by  a  subject 
before  the  time  in  which  we  are  speaking;  as,  io  CANTAI,  'I 
sang'. 

The  future  denotes  the  action  to  be  done  by  a  subject  after 
the  time  in  which  we  are  speaking ;  as,  io  CANTERO,  { I  will 
sing'. 

The  preterite  is  divided  into  imperfect  and  perfect. 

The  imperfect  expresses  an  action  done  in  a  time  past,  but 
present  in  respect  to  another  action  done  in  a  time  also  past : 
as,  io  CANTAVA,  qudndo  voi  entrdste,  '  I  was  singing,  when  you 
came  in'. 

The  perfect  expresses  an  action  done  in  a  time  completely 


INTRODUCTION.  7 

past,  and  without  reference  to  any  other  action ;  as  io  CANTAI 
tm'  aria,  ' 1  sang  an  air'. 

Tenses  are  either  simple  or  compound. 

Simple  tenses  are  those,  which  are  formed  without  the  assist- 
ance of  either  the  auxiliary  verbs  avere,  i  to  have',  or  essere, 
4  to  be';  as,  pdrlo,  *I  speak';  venni,  'I  came';  lodero,  *  I, will 
praise'. 

Compound  tenses  are  those,  which  are  formed  of  the  simple 
tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verb  avere,  '  to  have',  or  essere,  '  to  be', 
and  the  participle  of  the  verb  varied ;  as,  ho  parldto,  i  I  have 
spoken' ;  sono  venuto,  1 1  (am)  have  come' ;  avrb  loddto,  or  sarb 
loddto,  'I  will  have  praised,'  or  '  will  be  praised'. 

Each  tense  contains  two  numbers  ;  the  singular  and  plural. 

The  number  is  singular,  when  one  single  subject  causes 
the  action  of  the  verb  ;  as,  fo  mdngio, i  I  eat' ; — and  it  is  plural, 
when  more  subjects  contribute  to  the  same  action;  as,  NOI 
mangidmo,  *  we  eat'. 

Each  number  has  three  persons,  which  are  denoted  by  the 
personal  pronouns,  io,  '  I' ;  tu,  '  thou' ;  egli, i  he',  or  ella,  '  she' ; 
in  the  singular ; — and  not,  *  we' ;  voi,  *  you' ;  eglino,  or  elleno, 
t  they' ;  in  the  plural ;  as,  io  vedo, 1 1  see' ;  TU  vedi, l  thou  seest'; 
EGLI  or  ELLA  vede,  'he  or  she  sees' : — NOI  vedidmo,  '  we  see' ; 
voi  vedete,  l  you  see' ;  EGLINO  or  ELLENO  vedono,  l  they  see'. 

The  assemblage  of  several  verbs,  forming  all  their  moods, 
tenses,  numbers,  and  persons,  according  to  the  same  rule,  is 
called  a  conjugation. 

Such  verbs  as  conform  to  the  rule  of  any  conjugation,  are 
called  regular;  and  such  as  differ  in  any  respect,  are  called 
irregular. 

Verbs  which  are  not  used  in  certain  tenses,  numbers,  or  per- 
sons, are  called  defective. 

The  PARTICIPLE  is  a  word  which  partakes  at  the  same  time 
of  the  nature  of  the  verb  and  of  the  adjective  ;  as,  amdnte, 
'loving' ;  amdto, l  loved.'  It  partakes  of  the  nature  of  the  verb, 
because  it  has  its  signification,  and  has  reference  to  time  ;  as, 
amdnte  (che  AMA)  Dio,  *  loving  (who  loves)  God' ;  AMATO  (che  K 
AMATO)  da  Dio,  '  loved  (who  is  loved)  by  God' ;  and  it  partakes 
of  the  nature  of  the  adjective,  because,  like  an  adjective,  it 
qualifies  a  noun ;  as,  uomo  ONORATO,  *  honored  man' ;  virtu  PRO- 
VATA,  l  tried  virtue'. 

Participles  are  divided  into  present  and  past . 

The  present  participle  expresses  the  action  of  the  subject,  or 
the  ^quality  of  a  noun,  at  the  moment  in  which  we  speak  ;  as. 
amdnte,  '•  loving' : — dimna  AMANTE,  '  a  loving  woman'. 

The  past  participle  expresses  the  action  or  quality  as  per- 


8  INTRODUCTION. 

fected  or  past;  as,  temuto,  'feared': — castigo  TEMUTO,  'feared 
punishment'. 

With  the  participle  is  usually  classed  the  GERUND,  which, 
like  the  participle,  is  an  inflexion  of  the  verb,  but  has  nothing 
in  common  with  the  adjective. 

Italian  participles  are  varied  by  gender  and  number. 

An  ADVERB  is  a  word,  which  serves  to  modify  a  verb,  an 
adjective,  or  another  adverb,  expressing  the  manner,  or  circum- 
stances of  its  signification  ;  as,  m'w,  '  more' ;  mdlto,  '  very' ;  dis- 
tintamente,  'distinctly' : — egliparla  DISTINTAMENTE,  'he  speaks 
distinctly';  siete  MOLTO  savio,  'you  are  very  wise' ;  PIU  since- 
ramente, '  more  sincerely'. 

Adverbs  are  divided  into  those  of  quality,  order,  time,  place, 
quantity,  comparison,  fyc. 

Adverbs  of  quality  are  those,  which  express  the  manner  in 
which  things  are  done;  as,  saviamente,  'wisely';  elegant entente, 
'  elegantly' ;  inconsideratamente,  '  inconsiderately' : — egli  pensa 
SAVIAMENTE,  '  he  thinks  wisely' ;  ilia  scrive  ELEGANTEMENTE, 
'she  writes  elegantly';  hdnno  agito  INCONSIDERATAMENTE. 
c  they  have  acted  inconsiderately'. 

Adverbs  of  order  serve  to  express  the  arrangement  of  things 
in  regard  to  one  another ;  as,  prima,  '  first' ;  poi,  '  then' ;  da 
principio,  '  before' ;  in  seguito, '  afterward' : — PRIMA  andremo  in 
Frdncia,  '  we  will  go  first  to  France' ;  POI  in  Italia,  '  then  to 
Italy' ;  DA  PRINCIPIO  si  deve  evitdre  il  male,  '  we  must  before 
avoid  evil';  IN  SEGUITO  si  deve  far  del  bene,  '  afterward  we  must 
do  good'. 

Adverbs  of  time  are  those,  which  express  some  relation  of 
time ;  as,  ieri, '  yesterday';  oggi,  '  to-day';  domdni,  'to-morrow': 
— lo  vidi  IERI,  '  I  saw  him  yesterday';  mini  OGGI,  'come  to-day'; 
partirb  DOMANI,  '  I  shall  depart  to-morrow'. 

Adverbs  of  place  serve  to  denote  the  situation  or  the  distance 
of  an  object ;  as,  qui,  '  here' ;  la,  '  there' ;  vicino,  '  near' ;  Ion- 
tdno,  '  far' : — son  qui, '  I  am  here' ;  guarddte  LA,  '  look  there' : 
sta  qul  VICING,  '  he  lives  near  here' ;  e  troppo  LONTANO,  '  it  is 
too  far'. 

Adverbs  of  quantity  are  those,  which  modify  an  object  in  re- 
lation to  quantity  ;  as,  poco,  '  little';  assdi,  '  much';  abbastdnza, 
'enough': — pdrla  ASSAI,  'he  speaks  much';  riftette  POCO,  'he 
reflects  little' ;  ne  ha  ABBASTANZA,  '  he  has  enough  of  it'. 

Adverbs  of  comparison  serve  to  denote  the  different  degrees 
of  quality  of  the  objects  compared ;  &B,piu, '  more' ;  meno,  'less7; 
cosi — -come, '  so — as' :— V  onore  vale  PIU  delle  ricchezze,  '  honor  is 
worth  more  than  riches' ;  il  suo  cuore  non  e  MEN  bello  del  viso, 


INTRODUCTION.  9 

*  her  heart  is  not  less  beautiful  than  her  face' ;  egli  non  e  si  do- 
cile, COME  e  vivace, '  he  is  not  so  docile  as  he  is  lively'. 

Adverbs  are  either  simple  or  compound.  Simple  adverbs  are 
those  which  consist  of  a  simple  word  ;  as,  qui,  '  here';  poi,  'then'; 
be"ne, '  well' ;  and  compound  adverbs  are  those,  which  consist  of 
an  adjective  and  the  word  m&nte,  l  manner' ;  as,  dolcemtnte  (con 
dolce  mente), '  sweetly  (in  a  sweet  manner)'.  There  are  besides 
several  expressions,  which  in  several  words  announce  the  same 
idea  that  might  be  expressed  by  one  adverb  ;  as,  di  buon  grddo, 
'  willingly' ;  qudnto  prima,  l  very  soon' ;  aW  improvviso,  '  unex- 
pectedly'; and  these  are  called  ADVERBIAL  PHRASES. 

A  PREPOSITION  is  a  word,  which  is  placed  before  a  noun,  a 

pronoun,  or  a  verb,  to  show  its  relation  to  some  other  word ;  as, 

in,  '  in' ;  con,  '  with' ;  senza,  '  without' : — non  e  IN  cdsa,  '  he  is 

not  (in  the  house)  at  home';  verro  CON  vat,  'I  will  come  with 

s    you' ;  SENZA  anddr  piu  dlle  lunghe,  '  without  going  any  further'. 

Prepositions  have  several  denominations,  viz.  of  place,  order, 
time,  union,  opposition,  fyc.  according  to  the  several  relations 
they  express. 

The  word  which  follows  the  preposition  is  called  its  regimen 
or  complement. 

A  CONJUNCTION  is  a  word,  which  serves  to  join  words  and 
sentences  together  ;  as,  e,  *  and' ;  ne, '  nor,  neither' ;  ma,  *  but' ; 
nondimtno,  'nevertheless': — bella  E  buona, l  handsome  and  good'; 
is'i;  mdngia  NE  beve,  l  he  neither  eats  nor  drinks' ;  egli  e  povero 
MA  onordto,  '  he  is  poor  but  honored' ;  ella  e  molto  gidvane,  e 
NONDIMENO  e  molto  sdvia,  ts\\e  is  yet  very  young,  and  never- 
theless she  is  very  wise'. 

Besides  the  general  use  of  connecting  words  and  sentences 
together,  conjunctions  sometimes  express  the  particular  point 
of  view  in  which  the  mind  considers  the  words  and  sentences 
so  connected ;  hence  the  division  of  conjunctions  into  explica- 
tive, adversative,  alternative,  conclusive,  fyc. 

An  INTERJECTION  is  a  word,  which  is  used  to  express  an 
emotion  or  affection  of  the  mind ;  as,  ah!  '  ah  !'  oh!  l  oh !'  aime! 
« alas !' 


The  affections  of  the  mind  may  be  of  joy,  grief,  indignation, 
contempt,  fy-c.  which  give  to  the  interjections  different  denomi- 
nations. 

Of  the  foregoing  Parts  of  Speech,  some  are  occasionally  em- 
ployed, when  they  are  not  absolutely  necessary  to  grammatical 
construction,  but  serve,  nevertheless,  to  give  strength  and 
energy  to  the  discourse;  as,  gid,  mica,  pure,  mdi : — GIA  Dio  non 
voglia,  'may  God  forbid';  non  son  MICA  fdvole,  'they  are  not 


10  INTRODUCTION. 

fables';  la  cosa  andb  PUR  cosi,  'the  affairs  went  off  so';  MA:  si, 
che  io  le  conosco,  'yes,  that  I  know  them'.  These  words,  when 
so  used,  are  called  EXPLETIVES. 

WORDS  form  the  whole  subject  of  Grammar.  They  may 
be  either  expressed  by  the  voice,  or  represented  in  writing  by 
characters. 

The  collection  of  letters  of  which  the  words  of  a  language 
are  formed,  is  called  the  ALPHABET. 

That  part  of  Grammar,  which  teaches  how  to  express  the 
sounds  of  words,  is  called  PRONUNCIATION. 

That  part  which  treats  of  the  different  sorts  of  words  and 
their  various  modifications,  is  called  ANALOGY. 

That  part  of  Grammar,  which  treats  of  the  connexion  and 
right  order  of  words  among  themselves,  is  called  SYNTAX. 

That  part,  which  teaches  how  to  write  words  correctly,  is 
called  ORTHOGRAPHY. 


ITALIAN    ALPHABET. 


THE  Italian  Alphabet  contains  twenty-two  letters, 
which  the  modern  Romans,  following  the  Latin,  name 
and  pronounce  as  follows  : 


(Figur 

e) 

(Nome) 

(Pron.) 

(Figure) 

(Namo) 

(Pron.) 

A 

a 

a 

ah 

M   m 

em 

aytn 

B 

b 

be 

bay 

JV    n 

en 

ayri 

C 

c 

ce 

chay 

O     o 

o 

o 

D 

d 

de 

day 

P     p 

pe 

pay 

E 
F 

e 
f 

e 
ef 

ay 
ayf 

I     I 

qu 
er 

koo 
ayr> 

G 

ge 

j<*y 

S      s 

es 

ays' 

H 

acca 

ahk'-kah 

T     i 

te 

tay 

1 

m 
i 

i 

ee 

U    u 

u 

00 

J 

j 

Je 

yay 

V    v 

ve 

vay 

L 

I 

el 

w 

Z     z 

zeta 

dsay'-tah 

The  Florentines,  on  the  authority  of  the  "  Fathers  of 
the  Language,"  *  name  and  pronounce  them  as  follows  : 


(Figur 

A 

e) 

a 

(Name)      (Pron.) 

a             ah 

(Figure) 

M   m 

(Name) 

6mme 

(Pron.) 

aym'-may 

B 

b 

bi           bee 

JY    n 

cnne 

ayn'-nay 

C 

c 

ci           chee 

0     o 

0 

0 

D 

d 

di           dee 

P    p 

Pi 

pee 

E 

e 

c             ay 

Q    9 

qu 

koo 

F 

f 

efie        ayf-foy 

R        T 

erre 

ayr'-ray 

G 

S 

gi          j'ee 

S      s 

6sse 

ays'-say 

H 

h 

acca       ahk'-kah 

T     t 

ti 

tee 

I 

i 

i  corto    ee  cor'-to 

U    u 

u 

00 

J 

j 

i  liingo  ee  loon1  -go 

V    v 

vi 

vee 

L 

I 

611e        ayl'-lay           Z     z 

z<ka 

dsay'-tah 

*  E  di  qutsti  cotdli  sdno  mdlti  ididti, 
che  non  suprebbono  I1  ABBICCI.  (Dant. 
Conv.) 

E'gli  il  crederebbe  alldra,  che  guar- 
ddndo  v6i,  igli  creder6bbc,  che  voi  sa- 
p6ste  V  ABBICCI.  (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  5.) 

E  f&  edificare  tdnte  badte,  qu&nte  tet- 
tere  ha  nelV  ABBICC!.  (Giov.  Vill.  1.  1. 
c.  13.) 


And  of  such  ones,  there  are  many  so 
ignorant,  that  do  not  know  even  the 

ah-bee-chce1 . 

He  might  thiirk  so,  if  looking  at  you 
at  the  same  time,  he  should  think  that 
you  had  learned  your  a-b-c. 

And  caused  so  many  convents  to  be 
built  as  there  are  letters  in  tho  a-b-c. 


12  ALPHABET. 

Of  these    twenty-two    letters,  A,  E,  I,  O,   [7,    are 
vowels  ;  B,  C,  D,  F,  <?,  L,  M,  JV,  P,  Q,  #,  S,  T, 

T7,  2T,  are  consonants  ;  .7  is  considered  as  a  voitfeZ ;  and 
H  is  a  simple  sign,  having  710  sound. 


The  Latin  letters  K  k,  X  x,  Y  y,  have  no  place  in 
the  Italian  Alphabet. 

Instead  of  &,  either  c  or  ch  is  used  ;  as, 

Senza  fallo  tf  caUndi  sara  Without  fail  by  the  kalends 

capildno  Buffalmdcco.     (Bocc.  Buffalmacco  will  be  captain. 
g.8.n.9.) 

Diceva    un     cmrie    ed    un  He    said    a    Kyrie    and    a 

Sdnctus*    (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  2.)  Sanctus. 

X  is  sometimes  translated  into  s  or  55,  and  sometimes 
into  cc  ;  as, 

Jlcciocchb  io  prima  es£mplo  So  that  I  might  first  set  the 

dea  a  tutti  vol.  (Bocc.  Intr.)  example  to  all  of  you. 

Un  giovane  lor  nipote,  che  They  sent  a  young  man, 

avta  nome  Alessdndro,  mandd-  nephew  of  theirs,  called  Alex- 

rono.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.)  ander. 

S6pra  gli  alii  palagi,  e  so-  It  [the  wind]  leaves  it  [the 
pra  V  ecctlse  torn  la  Idscia.  dust]  upon  the  high  palaces 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  Proem.)  and  the  lofty  towers. 

The  word  ;  Xerxes'  is  written  with  an  s,  —  S6rse ;  but  the  word t  Xan- 
thus  '  is  written  with  an  x}  —  Xdnto,  *  the  Scamander ' ;  to  distinguish 
it  from  Sdnto, '  Saint' 


For  T  has  been  substituted  i ;  as, 

Feggio  lunge  da?  Idghi  Jhtr-        I  see  far  from  the  Avernian 
nt,  €  Stigi.     (Petr.  s.  265.)  and  Stygian  lakes. 


The  English  and  German  W  w,  in  translating  proper 
names,  is  commonly  changed  into  u  when  it  is  a  vowel, 
and  into  v  or  g  when  a  consonant ;  as,  Neuton,  *  New- 
ton '  :  Fallenstein,  '  Wallenstein  ' ;  Galles,  '  Wales.' 


PART     I. 

ITALIAN    PRONUNCIATION. 


CHAPTER    I. 

SOUNDS  OF  THE  VOWELS. 
A       is  sounded  like  a  in  the  English  word/ArfAer;  as, 

(Pronounce) 

ArA,  ah'  -rah,  altar  ; 

A/WIA,  ahZ'-mah,  soul. 

E       has  two  sounds,  one  open,  the  other  close  : 

E  open  is  sounded  like  ai  in  the  English  word 
/Air;  as, 

*Ema,  t&i'-mah,  theme  ; 

VEna,  vai'-na/i,  oats. 

E  close  is  sounded  like  ai  in  the  English  word 
as, 


Ivga,  l&if-gah,  alliance  ; 

m&if-lah,  apple. 


J        is  sounded  like  ee  in  English  ;  or  like  i  in  the 
English  word  machine  ;  as, 

inwo,  een'-no,  hymn  ; 

fate,  lee'-tay,  strife. 

O       has  two  sounds,  one  open,  the  other  close  : 

O  open  is  sounded  like  o  in  the  English  word 
cord;  as, 

fcofta,  lot'-tdh,  blow  ; 

rof-sah,  rose. 


14  PRONUNCIATION. 

O  dose  is  sounded  like  o  in  the  English  word 
bone  ;   as, 

folia,  foU-lah,  crowd; 

or  a,  o'-rah,  hour. 

U       is  sounded  like  oo  in  the  English  word  ooze  ;   as, 

uso,  oo'-so,  use ; 

tvtto,  toot1 -to,  all. 

When  these  vowels  are  at  the  end  of  words  marked 
with  an  accent,  they  have  a  quick  and  sharp  sound, 
which  very  seldom  occurs  in  the  English  language  ;  as, 

bontA,  Zxm-tah7,  goodness ; 

affE,  ahf-fay',  in  truth ; 

ball,  bah-lee',  bailiff; 

/o/6,  fah-lof,  bonfire ; 

tribu,  tree-boo',  tribe. 

[For  Rules  how  10  Determine  when  the  vowels  .E,  O,  are  Pronounced  open, 
or  close,  see  APPENDIX,  A.] 


CHAPTER    II. 

PRONUNCIATION  OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 

ITALIAN  consonants,  except  C,  G,  R,  S,  Z,  are  pro- 
nounced as  in  English. 

C  followed  by  the  vowels  e,  i,  is  pronounced  like 
ch  in  the  English  words  cuerry,  cm'% ;  as, 

cena,  chay'-nah,  supper ; 

cibo,  cheef-bo,  food. 

G  followed  by  the  vowels  e,  i,  is  pronounced  likey 
in  English  ;  or  like  g  in  the  English  words  Gem, 
GinGer ;  as, 

Gelo,  ^jay'-lo  frost ; 

Giro  jee'-ro,  turn. 

R          in  the   beginning  of  words,  or   in   the  middle 


CONSONANTS.  15 

when  it  begins  a  syllable,  is  pronounced  like  r 
in  the  English  words  wain,  marine ;  as, 

Rupe,  loo'-pay,  rock ; 

mdRe,  mah'-iay,  fcea : 

But  at  the  end  of  words,  or  when  it  ends  a 
syllable,  or  when  preceded  by  another  conso- 
nant, or  when  doubled,  it  has  a  rolling  sound  to 
which  there  is  nothing  similar  in  the  English  lan- 
guage, and  which  can  be  acquired  only  by  oral 
instruction  ;  as, 

peR,  pay? ',  for; 

eRto,  ay^-to,  steep ; 

atRo,  ah'-tw,  black ; 

oRRido,  otf-ree-do,  horrid. 

S  in  the  beginning  of  words,  or  when  preceded 
or  followed  by  another  consonant,  or  when  dou- 
bled, is  pronounced  sharp,  like  s  in  the  English 
words  saint,  pulse,  discount,  assembly;  as, 

santo,  sahnf-to,  saiit ; 

film,  jayV-sah,  mulberry ; 

sea,  ay'-skah,  bait ; 

lesso,  lays' -so,  .  boiled. 

Between  two  vowels,  and  in  the  last  syllabic 
of  all  substantive  and  adjective  nouns  that  end 
in  ise,  uso,  usa,  it  is  pronounced  flat,  or  soft  like 
z  ;  or  like  s  in  the  English  word  rose ;  as, 

viso,  vee'-zo,  visage ; 

palese,  pah-layf-zay,  manifest  ; 

abuso,  ah-boo'-zo,  abuse ; 

confusa,  con-foo1 -zah,  confounded. 

In  the  last  syllable  of  all  adjective  nouns  end- 
ing in  050,  osa,  it  is  pronounced  sharp ;  as, 

virtuoso,  veer-too, o1 '-so,  virtuous  ; 

maestosa,  ?nah,ay-sto' -sah,          majestic. 

Z  cannot  be  submitted' to  certain  rules.  It  can 
only  be  said,  that,  in  the  beginning  of  words,  or 
when  single,  it  is  pronounced  flat,  or  soft  like  ds 
in  the  English  word  Winnsor ;  as, 

zodiaco,  dso-dee' ,ah-ko,  zodiac ; 

zanzdra,  dsahn-dsah' -rah,         gnat. 


1.6  PRONUNCIATION. 

When  preceded  by  a  consonant,  or  when  fol- 
lowed by  two  vowels,  or  when  doubled,  it  is 
pronounced  sharp,  like  is  in  the  English  word 
benefiTS ;  as, 

c&lza,  kahV-tBoh,  stocking ; 

grdzia,  grdk r-tsee,a/i,  grace ; 

belUzza,  bayl-layf -tsah,  beauty. 

In  the  last  syllable  of  words  ending  in  dnza. 
enza,  onza,  it  is  pronounced  something  like  z  in 
the  English  word  razor ;  as, 

danza,  dahn'-zah,  dance ; 

clemtnza,  klay-maynf-zah,  clemency ; 

lonza,  lon'-zah,  panther. 

[For  a  list  of  Words  varying  from  the  general  Rules,  respecting  the  Pronuncia* 
tion  of  Z,  see  APPENDIX,  B.J 


CHAPTER    III. 


OF  /  AND  II. 

J  is  considered  as  a  vowel  in  Italian.  It  is  used 
instead  of  ii,  at  the  end  of  words,  in  the  plural  of 
some  nouns  ;  *  and  it  is  sounded  like  ee  in  the 
English  word  /EE,  each  e  being  distinctly  pro- 
nounced ;  as. 

temps,  ?  for  £  tempiiy        taym'~pe,Q,        temples  ; 
studs,  S        (  studu,         stoof-de,e,          studies. 

H  has  no  sound.  It  is  only  used  to  denote  the  hard 
sound  of  the  consonants  c,  g,  before  the  vowels  e, 
i;  as,  in 


CHerico, 

kayf-ree-ko, 

clerk  ; 

cuitdrra, 

kee-tahr'  -rah, 

guitar  ; 

gutzzo, 

gty'-tso, 

Moor; 

gniro, 

geef-ro, 

dormouse  : 

DOUBLE    CONSONANTS.  17 

To  prolong  the  sound  of  the  vowels  a,  e,  i,  o,  u, 
in  the  interjections, 

an!  ah!  ah! 

den !  day !  alas ! 

IH!  ee!  ih! 

j?oH !  po !  pooh ! 

UH  I  do !  uh ! 

To  distinguish  the  words,* 

I  have,        HO,          o,  j  r  o,  o,  or; 

thou  hast,  Hai,        a^,ee,     f  f        )  di,  ah',ee,      to  the ; 

he  has,        He*,         aft,          f  T     Q  W  a^i,  to  ; 

they  have,  Hanno,  akn'-no,  }  (  anno,  ahnf-no,  year. 

And  in  each  case  it  is  a  sign,  a  mark  of  distinction 
rather  than  a  letter. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

DOUBLE    CONSONANTS. 

Cc        followed  by  the  vowels  e,  iy  is  pronounced  like 
tch  in  the  English  word   W«TCH  ;  as, 

accento,  aht-chayn'-to,  accent; 

accidio,  aht-chee' -dee,o,  slaughter. 

Gg       I  followed    by   the  vowels  e,   i,  is  pronounced 
like  dg  in  the  English  word  /ODoe ;  as, 
oGGtito,  o&-jaytf-to,  object; 

oQGidi,  od-jee~dee',  now-a-days. 

Ch         followed  by    the  vowels  e,   i,    is  pronounced 
like  k  in  the  English  words,  Kept,  Keep;  as, 

CH&O,  kayf-to,  quiet; 

cuino,  kee'-wo,  inclined. 


O.UU.     ,      lit,       lilt!     j     7t(?j       Ol    1L     •       Ot-U.j     WHICH     1UUUC     DOCHia    IU     "o    pi oi^iu.w.^ j 

simplifies  the  orthography  of  the  words,  and  dispenses  with  a  useless  letter. 


18  PRONUNCIATION. 

Followed  by  the  vowels  ia,  ie>  io,  iu>  it  is  pro- 
nounced like  Jci  in  the  English  word  Kind;  as, 

cmave,  k,y«V-tww,  key  ; 

cmesa,  k,yayf-sah,  church ; 

CHwma,  k,yo'-maft,  head  of  hair  ; 

cmusa,  k,yoo'-sa/z,  hedge. 

Gh  followed  by  the  vowels  e,  i,  is  pronounced  like 
g  in  the  English  words  oe£,  Giddy  ;  as, 

GH^m&o,  gaymf-bo,  crooked ;    v 

GHiro,  gee'-ro,  dormouse. 

Followed  by  the  vowels  ia,  ie,  zo,  £w,  it  is  pro- 
nounced like  gui  in  the  English  word  cuic?e ;  as, 

Gmanda,  g,yahnf-dah,  acorn ; 

GHiera,  g,yayf-rah,  quiver ; 

Gmdtto,  -  g,yotf-to,  glutton ; 

tegGHiuzza,  tayg-g,yoot'-sah,  baking-pan. 

Gl  followed  by  the  vowel  i:  and  in  all  words  in 
which  i  is  followed  by  another  vowel,  is  pro- 
nounced like  II  in  the  English  word  brilliant ; 

as, 

GLI,  l>yee',  the ; 

601,1,  «y-l,yee,  he ; 

vdQiAa,  vof-l,yah,  desire  ; 

CIGLW,  cheef-l,yo,  eye-brow: 

But  in  all  words  in  which  gli  is  followed  by  a 
consonant,  it  is  pronounced  like  gl  in  the  Eng- 
lish word  Glimmer ;  as, 

neGijigtnte,          nay-g\ee-jayn'-tay,   negligent ; 
anGi*icano,          ahn-g\ee-kahf-no,     Anglican. 

It  has  the  same  sound  in  the  words, 

ahn1  -glee,  Englishmen ; 

ahnf -glee,ah,  England. 

Gn       followed   by  the   vowels  «,  e,  i,  o,  u,  is  pro- 
nounced something  like  ni  in  the  English  word 
as, 

mah-gahf-n9yah,         blemish ; 
ah-n,yayy~lo,  lamb ; 


SYLLABLES.  19 

incoGmto,  een-ko'-n,yee-io,          unknown; 

bisoGNo,  &ee-s</-n,yo,  need  ; 

iGNudo,  ee-n,yW-cfo,  naked. 

Sc         followed   by  the   vowels    e,  i,  is    pronounced 
like  sh  in  the  English  word  sneZ/,  smp ;  as, 

sc^na,  shayf-nah,  scene ; 

scimicf,  9  sheef-mee,ah,  ape. 

Sch       followed  by  the  vowels  e,  i,  is  pronounced  like 
skin  the  English  words  SKeteA,  &K.ill ;  as, 

scHrnio,  skai/r'-no,  mockery ; 

scni/b,  skee^o,  skiff. 

Followed  by  the  vowels  ia,  ie,  io,  iu,  it  is  pro- 
nounced like  sJc  in  the  English  word  SK^  ;  as, 

scuiavOj  sk,ya^-vo,  slave ; 

scHi^na,  8k,yayf -nah,  the  back ; 

scmoppo,  skflop-po,  musket ; 

scnmma,  sk^oo'-r/ia/i,  froth. 


CHAPTER    V. 

OF     SYLLABLES. 

CIA',  do,  ciu,  are  pronounced  like  cha,  cho,  chooyin 
the  English  words  CHAHW,  cnop,  cnoo^e  ;  as, 

ciAZda,  chaM-rfa,  wafer; 

cibmpo,  chom'-po,  clown ; 

ciurwa,  choo/^-ma/i,  crew. 

Gid,  gio,  giu,  are  pronounced  like  ja>  jo,  ju,  in  the 
English  words  jAr,  jore,  jury  ;  as, 

.      jahZ'-Zo,  yellow ; 

jor'-wo,  day ; 

ju'-^fo,  just. 

Scid.  scio,  sciu,  are   pronounced  like  sha,  sho,  shoo, 
in  the  English  words  SHA#,  snop,  SHOO^;  as, 

sciAme,  shah'-mai/,  swarm ; 

scio/fo,  sholf-to,  loose ; 

sciugd^o,  shoo-gah'-to,  wiped. 


20  PRONUNCIATION. 

Gud,  gue,  gui,  are  pronounced  like  gua,  gue,  gui, 
in  the  English  words  /anGUAge,  Za/iGUE/,  lanGuid ;  as, 

GUAncia,  gwa.hnf -chah,  cheek, 

GUErra,  gwayr'-raft,  war ; 

Gvida,  gwee'-dah,  guide. 

Qua,  qui,  qui,  quo,  are  pronounced  like  qua,  que,  qui, 
quo,  in  the  English  words  quality  9  Question,  quibble, 
quote ;  as, 

quAnto,  kwahn'-/o,  how-much ; 

QUES/O,  kway'-^o,  this ; 

quinto,  kween'-fo,  fifth ; 

quotidiano,  kwo-tee-dee,ah'-no,  daily. 


CHAPTER    VI. 


DIPHTHONGS    AND    TRIPHTHONGS. 

ITALIAN  diphthongs  are  so  pronounced  as  to  give  to 
each  vowel  its  proper  sound.  They  are  generally  di- 
vided into  two  classes,  the  long  and  the  short. 

Long  diphthongs  are  those,  in  which  each  vowel  is 
as  distinctly  pronounced  as  if  they  formed  each  a  sep- 
arate syllable ;  as, 


tie 

AEre, 

ah',  ay  -ray, 

air; 

di 

mAi, 

mah^ee, 

never  ; 

do 

pAolo, 

pah^o-Zo,  . 

a  pau]  ; 

du 

Aura, 

ah^oo-?*^, 

breeze  ; 

ea 

borEA, 

bof~ro.y,&h, 

the  north-wind  : 

ee 

VEEmenza 

v&y,<iy-mctynf-z(th 

,      vehemence  ; 

ei 

€0 

ZEI, 

EoZo, 

Zay^ee, 
ay'jO-Zo, 

her; 
^Eolus  ; 

en 

fan  do, 

jTayr,oo-c?o, 

feud  ; 

6i 

vbi, 

vo^ee, 

you  ; 

06 

cobrte, 

/co,o?v-tav, 

cohort  ; 

ui 

coZui, 

ko-loof,ee, 

that-one. 

GENERAL  RULES.  21 

Short  diphthongs  are  so  pronounced,  that,  of  the  two 
vowels,  one  is  so  faintly  heard  as  to  seem  blended 
with  the  other  ;  as, 

id           /iA<0,                /eejah'-fo,  breath; 

ie             CIE/O,                 chee,&yf-lo,  heaven; 

id             pibva,                pee^-vah,  rain ; 

iu            piuma,              pee,oof-mah,  feather ; 

ud            quAnto,             kwtihnfto,  how-much ; 

ue            guE/fo,             gvr*.yf-fah,  cage; 

ui              quinto,              kween'-to,  fifth ; 

u6            Juono,               foo,o'-no,  thunder. 

Triphthongs  are  generally  classed  with  the  short 
diphthongs,  and  are  pronounced, 

dio            gAio,               gah',yo,  gay; 

Ui             miEi.               meejay'jee,  mine ; 

uai           fcuoi,                600^  ,ee,  oxen; 

udio-        guAio,             g-wah^yo,  wailing ; 

teoio          cuoio,              Xwo^yo,  leather ; 

iuoi          lacciuoi,          laht-choo,of  ,ee,  snares. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

GENERAL   RULES    ON    THE   ITALIAN     PRONUN- 
CIATION. 

ITALIAN  words  are  pronounced  exactly  as  they  are 
written,  there  being  no  silent  letter  except  h. 

Every  vowel  always  preserves  its  proper  sound,  inde- 
pendently of  the  consonants  which  accompany  it.* 

*  There  is,  perhaps,  no  greater  difficulty  for  foreigners  in  pronouncing  Ital- 
ian, than  that  of  the  vowels  E,  O,  whose  sound,  either  open  or  close,  often 
determines  the  signification  of  words  ;  as  in  melc,  pesca,  t&ma  ;  collo,  /ore,  voto, 
which  pronounced  with  .E  and  O  open,  mean,  'honey',  'a  peach',  'theme'; 
'  neck',  '  the  bar', '  void' :  and  pronounced  with  E  and  O  close,  signify,  '  apples', 
'fishing',  'fear';  'with  the',  '  a  hole',  'vow'. 

[For  a  list  of  Words  of  Similar  Orthography,  but  of  Different  Signification, 
distinguished  by  the  Different  Sound  of  E,  O,  see  APPENDIX,  A.  (2)] 


PRONUNCIATION. 


When  consonants  are  doubled,  each  of  them  is  sepa- 
rately pronounced  ;*  as, 


frah-tayV  -lo,  brother  ; 

a/id-dob'-bo,  ornament; 

%cRR^re,  ayr-ro'  -ray,  error  ; 

aTTre'zzi,  a/it-  trayt'  -see,  utensils. 

If  a  word  ends  with  a  consonant,  and  the  following 
word  begins  with  a  vowel,  the  consonant  of  the  former, 
in  the  pronunciation,  is  joined  to  the  vowel  or  first  syl- 
lable of  the  latter  ;  as, 

/?CR  Amore,  ^?e-R   A-more,  pay-Yzh-mof-ray, 

for  love  sake  ; 

qudi,  Angostia,  qua-i*    AN-goscia       kwah-lahn-go'-shahj 

what  anguish; 

granrf  inviio,  gran-v    iy-vito,         grahn-deen-veef  -to, 

great  invitation. 

When  gti  precedes  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel, 
the  vowel  or  first  syllable  of  the  latter  is  joined  to  gli, 
so  as  to  form  a  single  syllable  ;  as, 

GLI  onorij       GLI   o-non",       l,yo-n</-ree,          the  honors  ; 

OCC/IT,    &e-GLi   oc-chi,  bay-l,yokf  -kee,     beautiful  eyes. 


In  all  Italian  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  there 
is  always  one,  upon  which  the  voice,  in  pronouncing 
the  word,  is  heard  stronger  than  upon  the  others.  This, 
which  is  generally  effected  by  raising  the  voice  upon 
that  syllable  and  letting  it  fall  upon  the  rest,  is  com- 
monly called  the  tonic  accent  of  the  word.  The  sylla- 
ble upon  which  the  tonic  accent  falls,  is  pronounced 
longer  than  the  other  syllables  ;  each  of  which  is  not  to 

*  The  importance  of  the  observance  of  this  rule  will  at  once  be  perceived  by 
the  learner,  when,  in  advancing  in  the  study  of  the  language,  he  observes  a  great 
number  of  words  written  with  a  double  consonant,  whose  signification  would  be 
entirely  altered  by  pronouncing  them  with  a  single  consonant;  as  in  COIRRO, 
Jiocco,  presso,  rdssa,  seRRa,  SONNO,  'car',  'tassel',  'near',  'red',  'saw',  'sleep': 
which  pronounced  with  a  single  consonant,  cdRO,  fioco,  preaoj  rdsa,  SCRG,  SOKO. 
signify  'dear',  'hoarse',  'taken',  'rose',  'evening',  'lam'. 

[For  a  list  of  Words,  whose  Signification  is  determined  by  the  Pronunciatioik 
of  double  Consonants,  see  APPENDIX,  C.] 


EXERCISE.  23 

occupy  more  than  half  the  time  employed  in  pronounc- 
ing the  accented  syllable  ;  as, 

oNda,  ox-ddh,  wave ; 

WCCEL/O,  do2-chayl-Z0,  bird ; 

E&ano,  &y-bah-no,  ebony ; 

dh-mee-stah,  amity. 


EXERCISE  ON  THE  PRONUNCIATION. 

Cedro,  citron ;  cenere,  ashes ;  celebre,  celebrated ;  cicatrice, 
scar ;  cicaldta,  chit-chat ;  cipolla,  onion  ;  cidncia,  story ;  ciarldre, 
to  prate ;  cidlda,  wafer ;  cielo,  heaven ;  cieco,  blind ;  cioccoldte, 
chocolate  ;  cio'cco,  stump  ;  do,  this  ;  fanciullo,  child  ;  ciurma, 
crew ;  ciuffb,  a  tuft  of  hair ;  gente,  people;  genere,  gender ; 
giro,  turn  ;  gigdnte,  giant ;  ginocchio,  knee  ;  giardino,  garden ; 
giammdi,  never  ;  gidllo,  yellow  ;  gio'rno,  day ;  gidgo,  yoke  ;  gio- 
condo,  'merry ;  giovane,  youth  ;  giugno,  June  ;  giulio,  gay ; 
giudice,  judge  ;  giudicare,to  judge  ;  rdwe,  copper  ;  rovina,Tuin  ; 
orroVe,  horror;  parlare,  to  speak;  firro,  iron;  drZo,  border ; 
merce,  reward  ;  bardo,  bard ;  arrovelldre,  to  be  angry  ;  iiretire, 
to  ensnare  ;  crudele,  cruel ;  /orza,  force  ;  territdrio,  territory  ; 
tartdreo,  tartarean ;  5ct/w^,  health ;  servo,  servant ;  sorte,  fate  ; 
sire,  sire  ;  so'pra,  above  ;  cosi,  so  ;  singoldre,  singular  ;  sole,  sun ; 
su,  upon  ;  superdre,  to  surmount;  palese,' manifest ;  cortese,  cor- 
teous ;  speso,  expended  ;  reso,  rendered ;  rosa,  rose ;  sposa, 
spouse ;  ma,  laughter ;  musa,  muse  ;  virtuoso,  virtuous  ;  con- 
fuso,  confounded ;  zolla,  clod  ;  zio,  uncle  ;  zuppa,  soup  ;  zerbino, 
a  spark ;  zimdrra,  night-gown ;  pozzo,  a  well ;  carezze,  caresses  ; 
carrozza,  couch  ;  tdzza,  cup  ;  ammazzdre,  to  kill ;  pizzico,  pinch ; 
orzo,  barley  ;  zizzdnia,  tare  ;  rezzo,'  shade ;  vizio,  vice ;  zotico, 
rude  ;  letizia,  joy  ;  nazione,  nation  ;  timpj,  temples  ;  studj,  stu- 
dies ;  esempj,  examples ;  vizj,  vices  ;  eccidj,  slaughters  ;  augurj, 
auguries  ;  ho,  I  have ;  hdi,  thou  hast ;  ha,  he  has ;  hdnno,  they 
have  ;  ah !  ah !  deh !  alas !  ih !  ih !  poh !  pooh !  uh !  uh !  accidio, 
steel ;  accento,  accent ;  accidioso,  sluggish ;  Idccio,  noose  ;  fdc- 
cia,  face  ;  lacciuolo,  snare ;  oggetto,  object ;  soggwmo,  abode ; 


24  PRONUNCIATION. 

pioggia,  rain ;  rdggio,  ray ;  aggiunta,  addition ;  oggi,  to-day . 
cMto,  quiet ;  chino,  inclined ;  cherubino,  cherubim ;  chimico, 
chymist ;  chermes,  cochineal ;  chimera,  chimera ;  chicchessia, 
whosoever ;  chidve,  key  ;  chwstro,  cloister  ;  chiusa,  hedge  ;  chia- 
mdrc,  to  call ;  chttsa,  church ;  chiodo,  nail ;  chitrico,  clerk ; 
ghembo,  crooked  ;  ghermfoe,  to  gripe  ;  ghiro,  dormouse ;  ghiribiz- 
20,  whim ;  ghervne,  gore,  ghirldnda,  garland ;  ghidia,  gravel ; 
ghidccio,  ice  ;  lusinghiere,  flattering ;  preghtera,  prayer ;  ghiotto, 
greedy;  tegghiuzza,  baking-pan ;  figli,  children ;  fdgli,  leaves  ; 
piglidre,  to  take  jfamiglia,  family  ;  moglie,  wife  ;  orgoglio,  pride  ; 
imbroglio,  embarassment ;  fogliuto,  leafy  ;  figliuolo,  son ;  negli- 
genza,  negligence  ;  negUtto,  neglected ;  dngli,  Englishmen ; 
dnglia,  England  ;  anglicdno,  Anglican  ;  campdgna,  the  country ; 
magndminp,  magnanimous;  ingegntre,  engineer;  spignere,  to 
push ;  magnifico,  magnificent ;  sigrwre,  sir ;  ttgno,  wood  ;  ignu- 
do,  naked ;  scesa,  descent ;  scemdre,  to  diminish ;  sctttro,  scep- 
ter ;  scimia,  ape  ;  scisma,  schism  ;  sciagura,  misfortune  ;  scidme, 
swarm ;  sciancdto,  hipped  ;  scitnza,  science  ;  coscitnza,  con- 
science ;  sciocco,  foolish ;  sciorre,  to  loose  ;  sciugatoio,  towel ; 
sciugdre,  to  wipe  ;  schidvo,  slave;  schiantdre,  to  tear;  schttna, 
the  back ;  schittto,  candid ;  schioppo,  musket ;  schiuma,  froth ; 
guadagndre,  to  gain ;  guerra,  war ;  guarddre,  to  look  ;  guerire, 
to  heat ;  guercio,  squint-eyed ;  guida,  guide  ;  guiddre,  to  guide ; 
qudttro,  four ;  qualitd,  quality  ;  quddro,  picture  ;  qudle,  which  ; 
qutsto,  this  ;  quercia,  oak  ;  quitte,  quiet ;  quindici,  fifteen  ;  quivi, 
there  ;  quotididno,  daily. 


PART     II. 

ITALIAN    ANALOGY. 


PARTS    OF    SPEECH. 

(Variable)  (Invariable) 

L' AR-HCOLO,  the  Article;          L' AVVERBIO,         Jhe  Mvtrb ; 

IL  NOME,  the  Noun  ;  LA  PREPOSIZIONE,  the  Preposi- 

[tion ; 

IL  PRONOME,  the  Pronoun ;  LA  CONGIUNZIONE,  the  Conjunc- 

[tion  ; 

JL  VERBO,  the  Verb ;  L'  INTERIEZIONE,  the  Interjec- 

[tion. 

JL  PARTicipio,  the  Participle : 


CHAPTER    L 

ARTICLES. 

THERE  are  three  articles  in  Italian  ;  ?7,  lo,  la,  ( the5,  in 
the  singular;  i  or  li,*  gli,  le,  c  the',  in  the  plural  number. 

It,  lo,  and  i  or  li,  gli,  are  used  with  masculine,  la  and 
/e,  with  feminine  nouns. 

I/,  and  i  or  K,  are  put  before  masculine  nouns  begin- 
ning with  a  consonant,  except  z,  or  s  followed  by  ano- 
ther consonant ;  as, 

IL  vratello,  the  brother ;  i  Figliuoli,  the  children  ; 

IL  Marito,    the  husband ;          LI  Fadri,     the  fathers. 

*  We  meet  with  li  frequently  in  the  Classics,  especially  in  poetry ;  but  modern 
writers  generally  use  i  in  preference  to  it. 

3 


26  ANALOGY. 

Lo  and  gli,  are  put  before  masculine  nouns  beginning 
with  z,  s  followed  by  another  consonant,  or  a  vowel ;  * 

as, 

LO  zio,  the  uncle  ;  GLI  zejiri,     the  zephyrs 

LO  STrepito,     the  noise  ;  GLI  sprom,   the  spurs  ; 

LO  innocente,  the  innocent  man  ;       GLI  bcchi,     the  eyes. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

The  noun  Dwt  '  God',  before  its  plural,  Dei,  t  Gods',  takes  the 
article  gli;  as, 

GLI  Dei,  "the  Gods. 

After  the  preposition  per,  ( for,  by,  or  through',  whether  the 
nouns  begins  with  z,  s:  or  any  other  consonant,  the  article  lo  is  more 
properly  used;  as, 

per  LO  anwre,  for  the  love  ;        per  LO  braccio,  by  the  arm. 

In  the  plural,  however,  if  the  noun  begins  with  any  consonant 
but  z,  or  s  followed  by  another  consonant,  we  may  use  indifferently, 
either  gli  or  li ;  as, 

per  GLI  boschi,  through  the  woods ; 

per  LI  regni,  through  the  regions. 


La  and  le,  are  put  before  all  feminine  nouns  begin- 
ning either  with  a  consonant,  or  a  vowel;  as, 

LA  Reina,       the  queen ;  LE  cortesie,     the  courtesies : 

LA  sorella,    the  sister ;  LE  mddri,       the  mothers  ; 

LA  yobillct,    the  nobleness  ;        LE  Anime,       the  souls. 

The  articles  lo,  la,  before  a  noun  beginning  with  a 
vowel ;  and  gli,  le,  before  a  noun  beginning  with  i,  e ; 

*  Poets  very  often  use  lo  before  nouns  beginning  with  other  consonants  than  z, 
or  8  followed  by  another  consonant;  and  il  before  nouns  beginning  with  those 
consonants ;  as, 

Lo  oi6rno  se  n'anddva  e  Va.tr  bruno;  The  day  was  closing,  and  the  dusky 

(Dant.  Inf.  2.)  air  ; 

Seguielo  appresso  it,  splendido,  e  on-  Next  followed  the  splendid  and  hon- 

•rdndo—Pricivdllc;  (Bocc.  Vis.  1.)  orable  Pricivalle  ; 

GLI  Rdwii   schidnta,  abdtte,  e  porta  Tears  off  the  boughs,  beats  down, 

fuori  ;  (Dant.  Inf.  9.)  and  hurls  away  ; 

but  in  prose  this  usage  is,  by  all  good  writers,  carefully  avoided. 


ARTICLES.  27 

generally  drop  o,  #,  i,  e,  and  take  an  apostrophe  instead 
of  them  ;*  as. 


(for 


infirm  ; 


(for 


Sometimes  the  article  il  drops  the  i  after  a  word 
ending  with  a  vowel,  and  takes  an  apostrophe  instead 
of  it;  as, 

E'  L  viso,  ?  and  the  coun-  uscio  *L  colpo,    )  the  blow 

(for  E  IL  viso),  $      tenance  ;          {for  uscio  IL  cdlpo),  $     issued, 


EXAMPLES. 


L'  vn  fratello  L'  kltro  abban- 
dondva,e  LA  SORELLA  IL  FRA- 
TELLO, e  spesse  volte  LA  donna 
IL  swo  MARITO.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

E  che  maggior  cosa  e,  LI  PA- 

DRI  6  LE    MADRI,  I  FIGLIUOLI    dl 

risitdre  e  di  sermre  schivdvano. 
(Bocc.  Intr.; 

LA  REINA  non  si  sapeva  sazi- 
dre  d'udire  LA  NOBILTA  e  LE 
CORTESIE  del  giovane  re.  (Nov. 
ant.  35.) 

JVbw  istette  gudri  a  levdrsi  IL 
ne,  il  qudle  LO  STREPITO  del  ca- 
ricdnti  e  delle  bestie  aveva  desto. 
(Bocc.  g.  7.  Proem.) 

Avevan  LO  INNOCENTE  per  fal- 
sa suspizione  accusdto.  (Bocc. 
g\  3.  n.  7.) 

E  con  amor  si  Idgna — Ch1  ha 
si  cdldi  GLI  SPRON,  si  duro  IL 
vreno,  (Petr.  s.  140.) 

Lucdvan  GLI  OCCHI  suoi  piu 
che  LA  stella.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

»#Z  tempo  DEGLI  DEI  fdlsi  e 
bugidrdi.  (Dant.  Inf.  1.) 


One  brother  abandoned  the 
other,  and  the  sister  the  broth- 
er, and  oftentimes  the  wife  her 
husband. 

And  what  is  more,  the  fath- 
ers and  the  mothers  shunned 
to  visit  and  serve  their  chil- 
dren. 

The  queen  could  not  be  sat- 
isfied with  hearing  of  the  no- 
bleness and  the  courtesies  of 
the  young  king. 

The  king  was  not  long  in  get- 
ting up,  whom  the  noise  of  the 
beasts  and  of  those  who  loaded 
them  had  already  awakened. 

They  had  accused  the  in- 
nocent man  on  a  false  suspi- 
cion. 

And  complains  of  love,  that 
has  so  sharp  spurs,  and  so  hard 
a  bit. 

Her  eyes  shone  more  than 
the  star. 

In  the  time  of  fabled  and 
false  deities. 


*  Le  drops  the  e  sometimes,  and  takes 

poetry,  even  before  words  beginning  with 

Ei  sonfra  iS&.nimc  piu  were.  (D.Inf.  6.) 

C&nto  L» \rrni  pietdse.  (Tass.  Ger.  1.) 


an  apostrophe  instead  of  it,  chiefly  in 
any  o.her  vowel }  as, 

They  are  amidst  blacker  souls. 

I  sing  the  pious  arms. 


28 


ANALOGY. 


Sempre  tenendo  PERLO  BRAC- 
cio  LO  infermo.  (Bocc.g.2.n.8.) 

PER  LO  suo  A  MORE  adunque 
a  noi  tipiega.  (Dant.  Purg.  1.) 

Ldsciane  anddre  PER  IA  tuft 
sctte  REGNI.  (Dant.  Purg.  1.) 

L'  ANIMA  tua  e  da  viltdte  offe- 
sa, — LA  quail  molte  fidte  L'  UOMO 
ingombra, — Sicche  cV  onrdta  im- 
presa  lo  rivolve.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

/  pcnsier  son  saette  E'  L  viso 
un  sole — E'  L  desirfoco.  (Petr.) 

Zefiro  torna,  E'L  lei  tempo 
rimenat~E  ifiori,  e  L'ERBE,  sua 
dolce  famiglia.  (Petr.  s.  269.) 


hcchi  vostri  uscfo  'L 
COLPO  mortdle.  (Petr.) 

Del  bel  paese  Id  dovx  JL  si 
suona.  (Dant.  Inf.  33.) 


Holding  always  the  sick  man 
by  the  arm. 

Then  for  her  love  condescend 
to  our  desires. 

Let  us  pass  through  thy  se- 
ven regions. 

Thy  soul  is  by  vile  fear  as- 
sailed, which  oft, — So  overcast 
a  man,  that  he  recoils — From 
noble  undertaking. 

The  thoughts  are  arrows, 
and  the  countenance  a  sun, — 
and  the  desire  fire. 

Zephyr  returns,  bringing 
back  flowers,  and  herbs,  his 
sweet  family. 

From  your  eyes  the  mortal 
blow  issued. 

Of  that  fair  land  where  si  is 
spoken. 


When  the  articles  il,  lo,  la  ;  i  or  li,  gli,  le,  are  im- 
mediately preceded  by  the  prepositions  di,  c  of;  #? 
c  to';  da,  c  from  or  by7  ;  in  or  ne,  '  in?  ;  con,  '  with'; 
per,  c  for,  by,  j>r  through'  ;  su,  c  upon'  ;  fra  or  tra7 
6  amongst'  ;  in  order  to  avoid  the  harshness  of  sound 
produced  by  two  monosyllables  coming  together,  they 
are  united  to  them,  so  as  to  form  a  single  word  ;  as, 


a    i,     AI,  to  the  ;          da  gli, 

su  la,  SULLA,   upon  the  ;     tra  le, 


DAGLI,      from  or  by  the  ; 
TRALLE,  amongst  the. 


Union  of  the  Prepositions  DI.  A,  DA,  IN  or  NE,  CON, 
PER,  su,  FRA  or  TRA,  with  the  Article 


di  il, 
a  H, 
dail, 

in  or  ne  il, 
con  iZ, 
per  il, 


TL,  the; 


DEL, 

AL, 

DA.L, 

NEL, 

COL, 

PEL, 


of  the ; 

to  the  ; 

from  or  by  the  ; 

in  the; 

with  the  ; 

for,  by  or  through  the; 


ARTICLES. 


suit, 

f™?, 
tra  il, 


SUL, 

FRAL, 

TRAL, 


upon  the ; 
amongst  the. 


i  or  LI,  the, 

di  i  or  di  li,  DEI  or  BELLI,* 

a  i  or  ali,  AI  or  ALLI, 

da  ?*  or  da  li,  DAI  or  DALLI, 
in  or  ne  i,  or  in  or  ?ie  Zi,  NEI  or  NELLI, 

con  i  or  con  li,  coi  or  COLLI, 

per  i  or  per  Zi,  PEI  or  PELLI, 

su  i  or  su  li,  sth  or  SULLI, 

fra  i  or  fra  li,  FRAI  or  FRALLI, 

fra  i  or  Jra  /i,  TRAI  or  TRALLI, 


of  the ; 

to  the  ; 

from  or  by  the  ; 

in  the  ; 

with  the ; 

for,  by  or  thro.' the; 

upon  the  ; 

amongst  the. 


LO,  the  ; 

di  Zo, 

DELLO,* 

of  the  ; 

a  Zo, 

ALLO, 

to  the  ; 

dalo, 

DALLO, 

from  or  by  the  ; 

in  or  ne  lo, 

NELLO, 

in  the  ; 

con  lo. 

COLLO, 

with  the  ; 

per  lo, 

PELLO, 

for,  by  or  thro.'  the; 

su  Zo, 

Sl^LLO, 

upon  the  ; 

fra  Zo, 
tra  Zo, 

FRX.LLO,    ? 
TRALLO,    ^ 

amongst  thee. 

GLI,  the  ; 

di  gli, 

DEGLI,* 

of  the  ; 

a  gli, 

AGLI, 

to  the  ; 

da  gli, 

DAGLI, 

from  or  by  the  ; 

in  or  ne  gli, 

NEGLI, 

in  the  ; 

con  gli, 

COGLI, 

with  the  ; 

per  gli, 

PEGLI, 

for,  by  or  thro.'  the; 

sugli, 

StJGLI, 

upon  the  ; 

fra  gli, 
tra  gli, 

FRAGLI,      ) 
TRAGLI,     ^ 

amongst  the, 

*  Poets  very  often 
N6  mai  nascdse  il  citl  si  f6lta  nilb- 

fcia, — CAe,  sopraggiunta  dal  fur6r  d& 

venti, — Non  fuggisse  DA  I  p6ggi,  e  DA 

LE  valli.    (Petr.  c.  14.) 

DA  L'  erba,  e  DA  LI  fi6r  ddntro  a 

quel  stno — Pdsti,  ciascun  saria  di  coUr 

vinto.    (Dant.  Purg.  7) 

'  Al  Padre,  al  Figlioy  A  LO  Spirito 

Santo*— Comindt  *  gl6ria>  tutto  H  Pa- 

ra<Hso.    (Dant.  Par.  27.) 


use  them  separate ;  as, 

Nor  ever  did  the  aky  conceal  so  thick 
a  cloud,  that,  overtaken  by  the  fury 
of  ihe  wind,  it  would  not  flee  from  the 
hills,  and  the  valleys  ; 

By  the  herbs  and  flowers,  placed 
in  that  recess,  in  color  all  would  be 
surpassed  ; 

*  Glory  to  the  Father,  to  the  Son,— 
And  to  the  Holy  Spirit,'  rang  aloud— 
Throughout  all  Paradise.- 


30 


ANALOGY. 


LA,  the ; 


di  lat 
a  la, 
da  la, 
in  or  ne  la, 
con  la, 
per  la, 
sula, 
fra  lay 
tra  Ia9 


DELLAy 

ALLA, 

DALLA, 

NELLA, 

COLLA, 

PELLA, 

SULLA, 

FRALLA, 

TRALLA, 


of  the  ; 

to  the  ; 

from  or  by  the  ; 

in  the  ; 

with  the  ; 

for,  by  or  through  the ; 

upon  the ; 

amongst  the. 


di  le, 
ale, 
dale, 

in  or  ne  le. 
con  Ie9 
per  le, 
su  le, 
fra  le, 
tra  le? 


LE,  the ; 
DELLE, 

ALLE, 
DALLE, 
WELLE, 
COLLE, 

PELLE, 

SULLE, 

FRALLE,  > 
TRALLE,  5 


of  the; 

to  the ; 

from  or  by  the  ; 

in  the ; 

with  the ; 

for,  by,  or  through  the  ; 

upon  the ; 

amongst  the. 


D6i,  di,  ddi,  nei,  coi,  pei,  sui,  frdi  or  trdi,  followed 
by  a  noun  beginning  with  a  consonant,  drop  the  i,  and 
take  an  apostrophe  instead  of  it ;  as, 

DE'  prati,     of  the  meadows  ;      A'  cdnti,         to  singing  ; 
DA'  varenti,  by  the  relations  ;      NE'  Giardini,  in  the  gardens  ; 
co'  Raggi,    with  the  rays ;          PE'  Monti,       through  the  moun- 

[tains ; 
su'  itibri,     upon  the  books  ;       TRA'  ¥wri,     amongst  the  flow- 

[ers. 


Pel,  petto,  pella,  and  pelli,  pegli,  ptlle,  in  elegant 
style  are  better  written  per  lo,  per  la,  and  per  li,  per 
gli,  per  le  ;  as, 

PER  LO  Dwca,    by  my  guide  ;      PER  LA  pieta,      through  pity  ; 
PER  GLI  occhi,  through  the  PER  LE  frondi,    on  account  of 

[eyes ;  [the  leaves* 


ARTICLES. 


31 


And  scrupulous  writers  before  nouns  beginning  with  z 
or  s  followed  by  another  consonant,  use  collo,  trallo, 
colla,  trdtta,  and  cogli,  tragli,  colle,  trdlle,  and  sugli, 
always  separated  ;*  as, 

CON  LA  zazzera,  with  the 
[head  of  hair ; 

CON  GLI  sciocchi,  with  the 
[ignorant ; 

su  GLI  scudi,  upon  the 
[shield. 


CON  LO  splendore,  with  the 
[splendor  : 

su  LO  SMalto,         upon  the 
[enamel ; 
among  the 

[stars ; 


EXAMPLES. 


Come  NE'  Lucidi  sereni  sono 
le  stelle  ornamento  DEL  cielo,  e 
NELL  A  primavera  i  fiori  DE' 
PRATI,  e  DE'  cdlli  i  rivestiti  ar- 
buscelli  ;  cost  DE'  laudevoli  co- 
stumi,e  DE'  nagionamenti  belli 
sono  i  leggiddri  motti.  (Bocc. 
g.  6.  n.  1.) 

E  divenuti  piu  lieti}  su  si  le- 
vdrono,  ed  A'  suoni.,  ed  A'  CANTI 
cd  A'  •Ralli  da  capo  si  dierono. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  Proem.) 

Ok,  sventurdta!  che  si  dird 
DA'  Tiwi  fratelli,  DA'  PARENTI, 
DA'  vitini,  qudndo  si  saprd,  eke 
tu  sii  qui  trovdta  ?  (Bocc.  g.  8. 
n.  7.) 

Qudndo  NE'  GIARD£NI  entrdtc, 
disttsa  la  dilicdta  mdno,  coglietc 
le  rose,  e  lascidte  le  spine  stare. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.) 

Omlrose  selve,  6ve  per  cote  il 
sole, — Che  vi  fa  co'  suoi  RAGGI 
dlte  e  superbe.  (Petr.  s.  129.) 


As  in  the  bright  clear  sky, 
the  stars  are  the  ornament  of 
the  heavens,  and  in  the  spring 
the  flowers  are  of  the  meadows, 
and  the  verdant  shrubs  of  the 
hills,  so  witty  sayings  are  the  or- 
naments of  praiseworthy  man- 
ners and  fine  conversations. 

And  having  become  more 
gay,  they  arose  and  gave  them- 
selves once  more  to  playing, 
singing,  and  dancing. 

Oh,  unfortunate  woman  !  what 
will  be  said  by  thy  brothers,  by 
thy  relations,  by  thy  neighbors, 
when  it  shall  be  known,  that 
thou  hast  been  found  here  ? 

When  you  enter  into  the 
gardens,  extending  your  deli- 
cate hand,  you  cull  the  roses, 
and  leave  the  thorns. 

Shady  woods,  where  strikes 
the  sun,  which  renders  you 
with  its  rays  so  lofty  and  noble. 


*  And  in  poetry  even  before  nouns  beginning  with  any  other  letter ;  as, 


Ecco  la  Jiera  CON  LA  coda  agfaia. 
(Dant.  Inf.  17.) 

Vidi  Solon— CON  GLI  dltri  sei  di  a'ti 
Grtcia,  si  vtinta.    (Petr.  Tr.  Fam.) 


.Behold  the  beast  with    sharpened 
tail; 

I  saw  Solon  with  the  other  six  of 
whom  Greece  boasts. 


ANALOGY. 


E  quindi  passdi  in  terra 
d'Jibruzzi,  dove  gli  uomini  c  le 
femmine  vdnno  in  zoccoli  su  PE' 
M6KTI.  (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  10.) 

Ldscio  lo  file,  e  vo  PE'  nolci 
pomi — Promessi  a  me  PER  LO 
verdce  DUCA.  (Dant.  Inf.  16.) 

Cosl  avestu  riposti — DE'  Bei 
vestigi  spdrsi, — Ancor  TRA'  Fi6- 
meVerba.  (Petr.  c.  26.) 


PER  GLI  OCCHI  mi  passb  den- 
tro  la  mente.  (Rim.  ant.  p.  49.) 

Era  'Z  giorno  eft  al  Sol  si  sco- 
lordro — PER  LA  PIET.A  del  suo 
Fattore  i  red.  (Petr.  s.  3.) 

Giunsc  nel  bosco  PER  LE  FR6x- 
DI  ombroso.  (Bocc.  Tes.  5.  33.) 

CON  LO  SPLENDOR  die  SUa  l)d- 

'{ezza  adduce.    (Incer.  c.  4.) 

JYVm  errdr  CON  GLI  sci6ccHi. 
(Petr.  c.  47.) 


And  then  I  passed  to  the  land 
of  Abruzzi,  where  men  and  wo- 
men go  in  wooden  shoes  up 
over  the  mountains. 

I  leave  the  gall,  in  quest  of 
the  sweet  fruit,  which  has  been 
promised  to  me  by  my  faithful 
guide. 

Thus  would  that  thou,  (O 
heart,)  hadst  still  preserved 
some  of  the  beautiful  footsteps, 
here  and  there,  amongst  the 
flowers  and  the  grass. 

It  passed  through  my  eyes 
to  my  mind. 

It  was  the  day  when  the  rays 
of  the  sun  grew  pale,  through 
pity  for  his  Maker. 

He  arrived  in  the  wood,  shady 
on  account  of  its  leaves. 

With  the  splendor  which 
brings  her  beauty. 

Do  not  wonder  in  error  with 
the  ignorant. 


The  English  indefinite  article  a,  an,  is  expressed  in 
Italian  by  the  indefinite  pronouns  un,  uno,  una,  accord- 
ing to  the  rules  already  given  with  regard  to  the  articles 
il,  lo,  la,  '  the' ;  as, 

UN  wercatdnte,  a  merchant ;     UNO  spirdglio,  a  breathing-hole ; 
UIT A  Fiamma,  a  flame ;  UNA  zeba,         a  goat. 

Uno,  like  lo,  before  a  noun  beginning  with  a  vowel, 
drops  the  o,  but  takes  no  apostrophe  instead  of  it ;  una 
drops  the  a  and  takes  an  apostrophe  ;  as, 

UN  uomo,      a  man  ;  UN'  bmbra,     a  shade  ; 

UN  Arrwre,     a  love ;  UN'  bra,         an  hour. 

When  a  noun  is  taken  in  a  partitive  sense,  the  Eng- 
lish adjectives  some  and  any  are  expressed  by  ther 


ARTICLES.  33 

words  del,  dello,  della,  in  the   singular  ;  and  dei,  degli, 
delle,  or  alcuni,  alcune,  in  the  plural ;  as, 

DEL  pane,  some  bread ;  DELL'  olio,          some  oil ; 

ALCTJNE  cose,        some  things ;  ALCUNI  udmini,  some  men  ; 

DEGLI  STromenti,  some  instru-  DELLE  ardnce,    some  oranges, 
[ments ; 


EXAMPLES. 


In  Parigi  fu  UN  gran  MER- 

CATANTE.      (BOCC.  g.  1.  n.  2.) 

lEra  Arriguccio  UN  Fiero  uo- 
MO,  e  UN  Forte.  (Bocc.  g.  7. 
n.  6.) 

Nella  qudl  grotta  ddva  alqudn- 
to  lume  tfNO  SPIRAGLIO  fat  to  nel 
monte.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

UN  volerc,  UN  AMORE  ci  ha 
sempre  tenuti  legdti  e  congiunti, 
cd  UN  wedesimo  giorno  ci  diede 
al  mondo  ;  pidcciavi,  poiche  UN' 
ORA  ci  toglie,  che  similemente 
UNA  uedesima  FIAMMA  ci  con- 
siimi.  (Bocc.  Filoc.) 

Gli  diedi  DEL  PANE  e  DEL  cd- 
cio.  (Firenz.) 

tfno  de'  famiglidri  di  Mes- 
ser  Neri  accese  il  fuoco.  e  po- 
sta  la  padella  sopra  il  treppie, 
e  DELL'  OLIO  messovi,  comincio 
ad  aspettdre,  che  le  giovani  gli 
gittdssero  DEL  pesce.  (Bocc.  g. 
30.  n.  6.) 

Di  niuna  cosa  sermeno,  che  di 
porgere  ALC^NE  COSE  dagl'  in- 
fermi  addomanddte,  (B.  Intr.) 


There  was  in  Paris  a  great 
merchant. 

Arriguccio   was   a   haughty 
and  strong  man. 


In  which  grotto  came  some 
light  through  a  breathing-hole, 
opened  in  the  mountain. 

One  will,  one  love,  has  al- 
ways kept  us  bound  an'd  united, 
and  the  same  day  gave  us  to 
the  world ;  may  it  please  you, 
then,  since  the  same  hour  takes 
us  from  it,  that  one  same  flame 
should  consume  us. 

I  gave  him  some  bread  and 
some  cheese. 

One  of  the  domestics  of  Mes- 
ser  Neri  kindled  the  fire,  and 
having  put  the  frying-pan  up- 
on a  trevet,  and  having  put 
some  oil  in  it,  he  began  to  wait 
that  the  young  women  should 
throw  into  it  some  fish. 

They  ^  rendered  no  service, 
but  to  reach  some  things  called 
for  by  the  sick. 


34  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE    I . 


[Let  the  learner  here  put  the  right  Article  according  to  the  gender  marked, 
against  the  Italian  nouns,  and  the  number  of  the  same,  as  indicated  by  the 
English  words.] 

The  sacred    Tiber,     the  Egyptian    obelisks,    the   temples 
sdcro     Teveretm.y          Egizidni    obellschi^m^          tempj,m. 

still  dark  with  the  vapor  of  the  sacrifices,  the  Flavian 
ancora  foacki  vapore}m.  sacrifizj^.j  Fldvioz 

Amphitheatre       which    lies    like  a  mangled       giant,*      the 
anfitedtro1  ,m.*      il  qudle  gidce  come      sbrandto"2   gigdnte^m., 

columns     which      describe     the      customs       of  the  soldiery, 
colonnejf.      che        descrwono  costumdnzef.  mili,zia,f., 

the  triumphal      arches,      the      space     of  the    Forum,      the 
trionfdli*       drchijm.,  spdzio,m:  ,F6r0,ra., 

mausoleums,  the   majestic     ruins    of  the  circuses    and  of  the 
mausolei,m.,  maestosc"    rume,1?.  circhi,m.       e 

baths,    and    all    the  remains  of  the  Roman        splendor, 
terme,f.,       e    tutti  avdnz^m.  Romano?  splendidezza,1?., 

fill      the      mind 
empiono          dnimo,m. 


withf  I    delightful      wonder. 
di     I        sodvc         maramglia. 


Nero      to    appease  them,  ordered    that  the   fasces  of  the 
JYerone      per   appacidr^  li}t       bandi         che  fdsci,m. 


emperor 
imperat6re,m. 


should  be  borne  I     with    the     laurel.        The 
si  portdssero      \  allorojm. 


senators          complained       against  I    the   insolence   of  the 

di  insolenzaS. 


against 


the    avarice    of  the 


senatdri,m.          si  dolivano 

plebeians,  and  the     plebeians 
plebei,m.,     e  plebei,m.  di  avariziaS. 

magistrates     and  of  the     great. 
magistrdti,m.       e  grdndi,m. 

*  In  this  and  the  following  Exercises,  the  numbers  affixed  to  the  Ilalian  words 
are  intended  to  denote  the  order  in  which  they  are  to  be  placed ;  as,  'Flavioz  anfi- 
tectlro*', — aitfittatro  Fldvio. 

|  When  an  English  word  or  phrase  cannot  be  rendered  literally,  but  by  an 
equivalent  Italian  word  or  phrase,  they  are  both  included  between  brackets"  [  ]  ; 
as,  *  with'  con ;  di,  *  of. 

J  The  sign  ^,  is  used  to  denote,  that  the  words  under  which  it  is  found,  are  to 
be  joined  in  one  •,  as,  per  appaciar^_,li, — per  appacidrli. 


ARTICLES. 


He  proposed  that  (the)  honors  [should  be  rendered!  to  Galba, 
— *  Propose     che      2    on6ri,3m.\       si       rendessero1  \  a  Gdlba, 


and  that  the  memory    of    Piso      also 
e      che     3    memoria^ f.  di5  Pisone6  dnche2 


He  departed 
—     Parti 


should  be  celebrated. 
si  celebrdsse1. 

the  temple    of  (the) 


to   I       carry          to  I 
per  I       portdre         in  I 

the  standards    of  the   empire.     (The)    princes 
ijnpero,m.  principijU 

reputation  and      I  with  their 
reputazione      e         \    con       il 

hand  and   I  with  their  1    arms. 
e          con       le      \     drmi. 


insegnefi. 
with  their  I 


con      la    1 

I  with  their 
I   con      la 


Concord 
Conc6rdia,f. 

do      more 
fdnno     piu 

advice,    than 
consiglio,     che 

Not  pardoning,    as    in  (the)  other  armies,     the   first     fault,! 
Non  pcrdondndo,  come  in  dltri  csercitiym.,        prima  fdltaj'., 

he  who  left      the     standard 

chi  lascidva  insegnaj'. 

was  immediately  beheaded.  It  appeared  to  him  that  he  heard 
era     subitamente  decapitdto.  —  pdrve2  Gli1  sentire6 


nor 
Tie 


the    second,     but 
secondaf.,    ma 


I  about      (the)    mid-night       people       descend  in  the  house. 
I  insu?          4      mezzanbttcfL  pcrsone™       scendere7        8     cdsa,9f. 

Having  entered  into  the  tower,  she   began    to     weep.      For 
Entrdta  torref.,    —    comincio   a  pidngere.     Per 

the  pain       he     felt,  he  began  to     roar,     so  that  he  seem- 
doldr.m.  —  sentito,  —  comincio  a  mugghiar,       che  —  pareva 

ed  a   lion.        Fleeing    through  the  woods. 
ledne,m.     Fuggendo      per  bdschi,m. 


He    was 
Fu 

seen    by 
veduto   da 

to  come 

venire 

a      companion 
compdgnofm. 

I  to      a    gossip 
\da           comdrc,2?. 

of  his. 
suo.1 

of  hers. 

sva.1 

Having 

caused  him 
Fdtto^  lo 

1  He  gav 
1     —  diedi 

to  him 

Gli1 

a  purse 
3  bdrsa*f. 

with    some      florins 
con5         7        fiormifm. 

in  it. 
dentro0. 

Having  found  in  the  garden  some     capons,   some  wine,   and 
Trovati  6rto,m.  cappdni,m., 

some  eggs,      lie  supped 
uovaf..    —      ceno 


entirely    at    his    ease.i 
a  suo  bell'     dgio.\ 


Such  words,  as,  though  necessary  in  English,  are  not  to  be  expressed  in 
Italian,  are  in  this  part  marked  with  a  dash  j  and  such  words  as  are  necessary 
in  Italian,  but  are  not  expressed  in  English,  are  in  this  language  introduced, 
•in  Dalies,  and  included  between  parentheses  ;  as,  'He  proposed  that  (the)  honor* 
nhould  be  rendered',— Propose  che  si  rendessero  gli  ontri. 


36  ANALOGY. 


CHAPTER  II. 


SUBSTANTIVE   NOUNS. 

ALL  Italian  substantives  end  with  one  of  the  vowels 
o,  a,  e,  i,  u*  It  is  these  vowels  that  show  their  gendei 
and  number. 

GEND  ER. 

Nouns  ending  in  o  are  of  the  masculine  gender  ;  as, 

Ubro,  book ;  specchio,          mirror ; 

oriuolo,          watch ;  scrittoio,          scrutoire. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


Proper  names  of  women  ;  as, 

Sdffo,    Sappho  ;  E'ro,      Hero ;  Catisto,  Calisto  : 

Erato,  Erato  ;  dtropo,  Atropos  ;  Metto,   Alecto  : 

Some  contracted  nouns,  generally  used  in  poetry  ;  as, 

immdgo,(foT  \  .  testudo,(for  7  .     ,   .         Cartdgo,  (for  )    Car- 

immdgine)    $l™%e  >  testudint)     J  tortoise  '    Cartdgine)    5  thage: 

And  the  nouns3 

mdnO)  hand  ;  eco}  echo, 

are  feminine. 

Some  nouns  of  animate  beings  ending  in  o,  in  the  feminine 
change  o  into  a;  as, 

Colombo,          pigeon ;  Colombo,         hen-dove  ; 

cavdllo,          horse ;  cavallA,          mare ; 

gdtto,  cat;  gattA,  she-cat. 

*  Lapis,  l  pencil',  and  some  very  few  foreign  nouns,  as,  ribes,  '  currants',  cher- 
me^,  *  cochineal  5*  &c.,  are  the  only  exceptions  to  this  rule.  But,  then,  we  meet 
in'Italian  with  many  nouns,  which,  in  composition,  are  made  to  end  with  a 
consonant ;  and  this  on  principles,  which  will  be  explained  in  Part  IIP.  when 
treating  of  ITALIAN  ORTHOGRAPHY. 


SUBSTANTIVES.  37 

Nouns  ending  in  a  are  of  the  feminine  gender ;  as, 

cdsA,    house  ;  strddA,  street ; 

port  A,  door;  chits  A,  church. 

u  x  c  K  p  T  i  o  N  s . 
Proper  names  of  men ;  as, 

^Eneas ;          Andrea,   Andrew  ,       Tobza,  Toby ; 
,  Attila ;  Battista,  Baptist ;        Luca,    Luke  : 

Nouns  of  professions  exercised  by  men  ;  as, 

artista,  artist;  scriba,  scrivener;        alchimista,  alchymist; 

legisla,  lawyer ;          potta}    poet;  ebanista,  cabinet-maker  - 

Nouns  of  dignity  ;  as, 

papa,         pope ;  duca,         duke ;         g&rdrca,   high-priest ; 

patridrca,  patriarch ;  mondrca,  monarch  ;  demdrca,  demarch  : 

Nouns  derived  from  the  Greek,  ending  in  ma^mma ;  as, 

clima,     climate  ;         diadema,  diadem  ;     pocma,  poem  ; 

prisma,  prism  ;  enimma,   enigma  ;   progrdmma,  programma  : 

Nouns  formed  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  ;  as, 

pascibietola,  logger-  santinfizza,  hypocrite:  guardaroba,  the  ma»- 
[head  ;  °[ter  of  the  wardrobe  ; 

And  the  following, 

j  sofa  ;  sdrra, ;  sciloma,  long  discourse  ; 

cipa,  sot  ;  canape,  hemp;  baccald,  cod-fish  : 

ire  masculine. 


The  nouns, 

diota,       idiot;  eremita,    hermit;      anacoreta,  anchorite; 

pocrita,  hypocrite;          apostata,   apostate;    patriotta,  patriot; 
deicida,    deicide  ;  parriclda,  parricide  ;  regicida,  regicide  ; 

raticida,  fratricide  ;          omiclda,   homicide  ;  matricida,  matricide  ; 
intagonista,  antagonist;  regalista,  royalist;     monopolista,  monopo- 

[list; 
Deista,  Deist ;  ateista,  atheist;  Calvinista,  Calvinist; 

Are  of  the  common  gender. 


38 


ANALOGY. 


Some  names  of  animate  beings  ending  in  a,  in  the  masculine 
change  a  into  o ;  as, 

,  doe  ;  c^rvo,  stag  ; 

A,  she- wolf ;  lupo,  wolf; 

OTSA,  she-bear ;  orso,  bear. 

The  nouns,  tima,  piantta,  drdmma,  podesth,  in  the  significa- 
tion of  *  theme',  '  planet',  ;  drama',  '  civil  magistrate',  are  mas- 
culine ;  and  in  the  signification  of  '  fear',  '  cope',  '  drachm', 
'power',  are  feminine. 


EXAMPLES. 


Galedtto  fu  IL  LIBRO  e  chi  lo 
scrisse.  (Dant.  Inf.  5.) 

O'ra  eke  debbo  dire  di  quelli 
che  escono  DALLO  scRiTToio/ra 
la  ginte  cdlla  pinna  neW  orec- 
chio.  (Casa  Galat.  86.) 

Gli  abitatdri  di  questo  Castillo 
con  ARMATA  MANO  pervennero  at 
lido.  (Guid.  60.) 

Tdle   che  di   lontdno Nelle 

valli    ECO   TRISTA     risuondva. 
(Bocc.  Tes.  11,  30.) 

V&ro  diro  fdrse,  e  parr  a  men- 
z6gna — C/i'  i  sent?  trdrmi  delta 
PROPRIA  IMAGO  (Petr.  c.  4,  8.) 


Siccdme  qudndo  IL  COLOMBO 
si  pons, — Prisso  al  compdgno. 
(Dant.  Par.  25.) 

Niuna  gldria  a  uri1  dquila 
&  Vaver  vinto  UNA  COLOMBA. 
(Bocc.  g.  n.) 

In  CASA  TUA  sei  orgoglidso  e 
incomp  or  labile  ;  a  case  altrui, 
umile  e  dimesso.  (Varch.  Sen. 
ben.  3.  28.) 

Mise  dissenzione  NELLA  CHIE- 
SA,  ttnindo  sitta  c6ntro  al  Pa- 
pa con  certi  cardindli  ed  dltri 
c^rici.  (Giov.  Vill.  1.4,21,  1.) 


The  book  and  he  who  wrote 
it  were  [to  us]  Galeotto. 

No.w  what  must  I  say  of 
those,  who  come  out  of  their 
study  among  the  people  with 
a  pen  over  the  ear. 

The  inhabitants  of  this  castle 
with  arms  in  their  hands  reach- 
ed the  shore. 

Such  that  at  a  distance 
sounded  in  the  valleys  like  a 
sad  echo. 

Perhaps  I  shall  tell  the  truth 
and  it  will  appear  false,  that  1 
felt  myself  drawn  away  from 
my  own  body. 

As  when  the  dove  alight* 
by  his  mate. 

. 

No  glory  comes  to  an  eagl< 
from  having  conquered  a  dove  I 

In  thy  house  thou  art  prouc  | 
and  insupportable;  and  at  the 
houses  of  others,  humble  an<{ 
submissive. 

He  put  dissension  in  th<| 
church,  plotting  against  th 
Pope  with  certain  cardinal 
and  other  priests. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


39 


fu  IL  maggtore,  e  ipiu  SAVIO 
LEGISTA,  che  fdsse  fino  al  suo 
timpo.  (Giov.'Vill.  8.  65,  2:) 

II  tnio  signdre  nella  liber alitd 
a  QLVEL  gran  MONARCA  non  cede. 
(Red.  Vip.  1.  7.) 

Ecoslfigurdndo  'I  Paradiso,- 
Convien  saltdr  LO  SAGRATOPOE- 
MA, — Cdme  chi  trudva  suo  cam- 
min  reciso.  (Dant.  Par.  23.) 

Ribdldo,  SANTINFIZZA,  gabba- 
dei, —  Che  a  quel  d'dltri  pon  cin- 
que e  cam  sei.  (Lipp.  M.  7.  68.) 

Orfinisci  dra  auESTO  TT^O  sci- 
6MA,  che  tuavevi  comincidto  di 
colui  Id.  (Salv.  Spin.  1.  3.) 

Parole,  le  qudli  lo  Spirito 
Sdnto  sdpra  la  lingua  delV  u6MO 
ID  i6T  A  ponev  a.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  4.) 

Ed  T^NA  LtfpA,  che  di  tutte 
brdme — Sembrdva  cdrca.  (Dant. 
Inf.  1.) 

Ed  ecco,  memo  a  lei,  uscir  d* 
unamdcchiafolta  UN  itipogrdn- 
de  e  terribile.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  7.) 

Perocche  s\  mi  cdccia  IL  LtiN- 
GO  TEMA.  (Dant.  Inf.  4.) 

Da,  auESTA  TEMA  acciocche  tu 
ti  sdlve.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

Lo  BEL  PIANETA,  che  ttd  flWOT 

conforta — Faceva     tutto     rider 
VOriente.     (Dant.  Purg.  1.) 

Aricora,  Idscio  #NA  PIANETA 
di  zendddo  vermzglio.  (Bocc. 
Testam.) 

DRAMMA  e  un  componimento 
poetico  rappresentatzvo.  (Cru- 


S«»z'  essa  non  fermdi  peso  di 
DRAMMA.    (Dant.  Purg.  21.) 

Qudndo  verrd  lor  NIMICA  PO- 
(Dant.  Inf.  6.) 


He  was  the  greatest  and  the 
wisest  lawyer,  that  had  been 
seen  until  his  time. 

My  master  in  liberality  does 
not  yield  to  that  monarch. 

And  with  such  figuring  of  Pa- 
radise,—The  sacred  strain  must 
leap,  like  one  that  meets-A  sud- 
den interruption  to  his  road. 

Ribald,  hypocrite,  mocker  of 
God,  who  'add  five  to  that  of 
others,  and  take  out  six. 

Now  finish  that  long  discourse 
that  thou  hadst  begun  about 
that  man. 

Words,  which  the  Holy 
Ghost  put  into  the  mouth  of  the 
ignorant  man. 

And  a  she-wolf  who  seemed 
to  be  laden  with  wants  of  every 


When  lo  !  near  her,  came 
out  from  a  thick  hedge  a  large 
and  terrible  wolf. 

For  my  wide  theme  so  urges 
me  on. 

That  thou  mayest  be  relieved 
from  this  fear. 

The  beautiful  planet  that  in- 
vites to  love,  made  all  the 
orient  laugh. 

I  bequeath,  moreover,  a  cope 
of  crimson  silk  stuff. 

The  drama  is  a  poetical 
composition  to  be  represented. 

Without  which,  I  did  not 
rest  a  moment. 

When  shall  come  the  Power 
adverse  to  them. 


40  ANALOGY. 

Come  piu  tosto  pots,  rfandS  a  As  soon  as  he  could,  he  went 

eolui}ckein  luogo  DEL  PODKST!         to  him  who  filled  the  place  of 
(Bocc.  g,  2.  n.  1 .)  '     Podestk. 


Nouns  ending  in  e  are  some  of  them  masculine,  and 
some  feminine ;  as. 

cdrmE,  m.,  poem  ;  falcEj  f.,  reaping  hook  ; 

co'Z/E,  m.,  hill  ;  siepE,  f.,  hedge  ; 

t/?orE,  m.,    flower ;  ntw,  f.,  snow. 

Those  ending  in  ge,  les  me,  re,  se,  nte,  are  generally 
masculine  ;    as, 


?GE,       king ;  inaLE,    path ; 

MME,     river ;  CMO'RE,    heart  ; 

;,  utensil ;  WO'NTE,  mountain. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

The  nouns, 

I6gge,       law,  faldnge,  phalanx ;    laringe,  larynx ", 

indolej     disposition  ;  prole,  offspring  ;  pelle,  skin  ; 

bile,          bile;  voile,  valley;       ipirbole.  hyperbole; 

drme,       arm;  fame,  hunger;     spsme,  hope; 

scure,       hatchet;  polvere,  dust;          vepre,  brier; 

torrc,        tower;  febbre,  fever;         mddre,  mother; 

frdsc,       phrase ;  buiose,  dungeons;  ge.nte,,  people ; 

mente,      mind  ;  lente,  lens ;  patente,  patent ; 

corrente,  current;  sorgente}  source;      scmente,  seed; 
are  feminine. 


Those  ending  in  be,  ce,  pe,  te,  ve,  ie,  ine,  one,  are, 
generally,  feminine ;    as, 

JO^BE,  common  people  ;  cicatrice,  scar ; 

hedge ;  a?*TE,         art ; 

key ;  s^riE,        series ; 

,  image  ;  tncuifiNE,  anvil ; 

reason ;  nozt&KE,    nation. 


SUBSTANTIVES.  41 

EXCEPTIONS. 

The  nouns, 

dice,  elk ;  pesce,         fish ;  mdntice,       bellows ; 

eodice,        code ;         cdlice,        chalice ;  vortice,        vortex ; 

pepe,          pepper ;     presepe,    stable ;  recipe,          recipe ; 

vdte,  bard;         Idtte,          milk;  limite,         limit; 

breve,         a  brief;      conclave,  conclave;  architrave,  architrave; 

erzne,          hair ;          cdrdine,    hinge ;  confine,      confine ; 

disordine,  disorder ;  glutine,     glue ;  pettine,        comb ; 

lastone,      stick ;        mattone,    brick ;  paragone,  comparison; 

are  masculine. 


The  nouns,    . 

dere,  air ;  cdrcere,*  prison  ;          c^nere,*  ashes j 

tirbore,  tree ;      fdlgore,  thunderbolt ;    fronted  forehead ; 

fonte, fountain ;  /tmc,t  rope;  trdve,     beam; 

grtgge,*  flock;  cons&rte,  consort;        ertde,    heir; 

partnte,  parent; 
are  of  the  common  gender. 

Names  of  animate  beings,  ending  in  c,  are  generally  of  the 
common  gender ;  as, 

Uprv,       hare;  strpv,       snake. 

The  noun  dimdne,  when  it  means  i  to-morrow',  is  masculine ; 
but  when  it  signifies  'the  beginning  of  the  day',  is  feminine. 

The  noun  mdrgine,  when  it  means  'scar',  is  feminine  ;  but 
when  it  means  *  margin,' '  extremity',  is  of  the  common  gender. 

The  nouns /ante,  and^ne,  when  they  mean  'foot-soldier';  and 
aim'  or  '  design',  are  masculine :   but  when  they  mean  '  ser- 
vant'; and  '  end'  or  '  termination',  are  of  the  common  gender. 

The  nouns  oste,  and  ordine,  when  they  mean  '  host',  an  *  inn- 
keeper' ;  and  '  order',  a  '  command',  are  masculine  :  but  when 
they  mean  '  host,'  an  '  army';  and  '  order',  '  arrangement',  or  a 
4  religious  order',  they  are  of  the  common  gender. 

*  Corcere,  ccnere,  and  gregge,  in  the  plural  number,  cdrceH,  *  prisons',  c6nerir 
4  ashes'  j  and  grcggi,  *  flocks',  are  feminine  only, 
t  Frtnte  and  /tine,  in  prose,  are  feminine  only. 

4* 


ANALOGY. 


EXAMPLES. 


Ennio  di  quel  cantd  RTJVIDO 
CARME.  (?etr.  s.  153.) 

Qucsta  era  molto  bine  affossa- 
ta,  e  con  BUONA  SIEPE.  (Sacch. 
n.  91.) 

Vidigente,  alia  riva  <f  UN  gran 
FIUMK.  (Dant.  Inf.  3.) 

Un  rlv!)  d'dcqua  chiarissima, 
il  qudle  d'una  montagnetta  di- 
scendera  in  UNA  VALLE  oMBu6- 
s&.  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  I.) 

Serrdtalacella  COLLA  CHIAVE, 
dirittamente  sen  ando  alia  came- 
ra dclloMate.  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.4.) 

Fawns  dal  cielo  una  colomba 
bidncac'jme  neve,  e,  messo  il  bec- 

CO  BEL    C  ALICE,    tllttO    'I  SOingUt 

si  bevre.    (Pass.  136.) 

Ed  evvi,  oltre  a  questo.  TAERE 
assdipiii  TKESCO.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

Ma  poicche  Z'AERE  a  divenir 
incomincio.(Bocc.  Araet.) 


Ed  entrdta  nel  CHIARO  FONTZ 
tutta  si  rnise  nellc  deque.  (Bocc. 
Amet.) 

Dintorno  ALL  A  F^NTE  sipose- 
roasedere.  (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  1.) 

JWm  credo  UN  SERPE,  che  ha  'I 
cor  cotdnto  accrbo.  (Dittam.  2. 
12.) 

Te  non  colomba,  ma  VELENOSA 
SERPE  conosctndo,  con  tutta  la 
forza  di  perseguire  intendo. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

Lo  stolto  semprc  procrdstina 
di  far  btne,  dicendo  :  '  Dimdn 
farb  bsne';  e  sempre  Z'UN  DI- 

MANK  diman^Z'A 

(Aibertan.  c.  61.) 


Ennius  sang  of  him  a  rude 
song. 

This  was  well  f  rtified  by  a 
ditch,  and  by  a  good  hedge. 

I  beheld  a  throng  upon  the 
shore  of  a  great  stream. 

A.  stream  of  very  clear  water, 
which  descended  from  a  little 
hill  into  a  shady  valley. 


Having  locked  the  cell  with 
the  key,  he  went  directly  to  the 
chamber  of  the  Abbot. 

There  descended  from  Hea- 
von  a  dove  as  white  as  snow, 
and,  having  put  its  b  *ak  into  the 
chalice,  it  drank  all  the  blood. 

And  there,  besides  this,  the 
air  is  a  great  deal  more  fresh. 

But  when  the  air  began  to 
be  good. 

And  having  entered  into  the 
clear  fountain,  she  plunged 
herself  into  the  water. 

They  sat  around  the  fountain. 


I  do   not  beliewe  a   serpent, 
who  has  a  heart  so  cruel. 


Knowing  thee  to  be  not  a 
dove,  but  a  venomous  serpent, 
I  intend  to  persecute  thee  with 
all  my  power. 

The  fool  always  delays  to 
do  good,  saying:  'To-morrow 
1  will  do  good.'  And  one  to- 
morrow ever  requires  another. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


Qudndofui  desto  inndnzi  LA 
DIMANE, — Pidnger  senlii  fra  'I 
sonno  i  miei  figliuoli.  (Dant. 
inf.  33.) 

Si  ricordo  lei  doverc  avere 
tfsA  MARGINE,  a  gmsa  d'una 
€7ocetta,  sopra  I'orecchia  sini- 
stra,  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  5.) 

Lofondo  suo,  ed  dmbo  le  pen- 
did — Fdtte  eron  pietra,  e  i  MAR- 
TINI d'alldto.  (Dant.  Inf.  14.) 

Posciachfr  ella  sifu  condotta 
ALLA  MARGINE  delCdlta  ripa, 
nuotdndo  scampdmmo .  (Firenz. 
Aein.) 

Manddndo  cinquccento  FANTI 
UHIBELLINI  del  contddo  di  Fi- 
renze.  (Giov.  Vill.  1.  7.  c.  109.) 

DoLcm6so  piu  che  dltro — Se ' 
fdtto  FANTE.  (Bocc.  Tes.  4. 

83.; 

Jiveva  Giacomino  in  cdsa  UNA 

FANTE    ATTEMPATA.       (BOCC.   g. 

5.  n.  5.) 

Un  uomo  a  LIETO  FfNE  per- 
venuto.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  4.) 

Questa  fu  LA  FINE  delV  im- 
pzratore  Arrigo.  (Giov.  Vill. 
1.7.  c.  22.) 

Volendo  IL  stio  OSTE  esser 
pagato,  primieramente  GLI  die- 
de  r  una.  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

Cosi  avvenne  nel  nostro  bene 

AVVENTURATO       OSTE.         (GlOV. 

Vill.  I.  11.  c.  53.) 

CongregdtfjtA  BELLA,  egrdn- 
de,  K  PODEROSA  6sTE.  (Bocc.  g. 
2,  n.  7.) 

Dal  Signdr  Jlnnibale  Ruccelldi, 
potrd  ella  intendere  L'  ORDINE 
deUe  cose.  (Casa,  lett.  8.) 

Se  con  sdna  msnte  sard   RI- 

eOARDATO  L,'  ORDINE  delle  COSC. 

(Boec.  g.  9.  n.  9.) 


When  I  awoke  before  the 
morning,  I  heard  my  sons  sob 
in  their  slumber. 


He  recollected  that  she  ought 
to  have  a  scar,  like  a  cross, 
above  the  left  ear. 

Its  bed  and  sloping  sides,  and 
both  the  margins,  were  petri- 
fied. 

After  that  she  came  to  the 
margin  of  the  high  bank,  we 
escaped  by  swimming. 

Sending  five  hundred  Ghi- 
belline  foot-soldiers  from  the 
territory  of  Florence. 

Wretched   more    than   any 
other,  thou  art  made  a  servant. 

Giacomino  had  in  his  bouse 
an  elderly  servant  maid. 


A  man  who  had  come  to  a 
happy  end. 

This  was  the  end  of  the  Em- 
peror Henry. 

His  host  desiring  to  be  paid, 
he  first  gave  him  that  one. 


Thus  he  fell  in  with  our  for-j 
lunate  army. 

He  collected  a  fine,  large  and 
powerful  army. 


From  Mr  Annibal  Ruccellai, 
you  may  hear  the  order  which 
I  have  given  to  him. 

If  we  should  consider  with 
sound  mind  the  order  of  things. 


44  ANALOGY. 

PRESA  L'  ORDINE  tra  loro,  il  Having   made  the  arrange - 

trattdto  fu    riveldto    al  Duca.        raent  among  themselves,  they 

Stor.  Pistol,  p.  171.)  revealed    the    subject    to    the 

duke. 

Jo  ho  avuta  sempre  special  I  have  always  had  a  special 

divozione    AL    VOSTRO   ORDINE.         devotion  to  your  order. 
(Bocc.  g.  1..  n.  I.) 

Al  tempo  del  ditto  Papa  Jnno-  In  the  times  of  the  said  Pope 

cenzo  si  comincio  LA  SANTA  OR-  Innocent,  was  instituted  the  or  • 

DINE  d&  Frdti  Minori.     (Giov.  der  of  the  Minor  Friars. 
Vill.  1.  1.  c.  24.) 


Nouns  ending  in  i  are  some  of  them  masculine,  and 
some  feminine ;  as, 

eclissi,  m.,    eclipse  ;  crisi,  f.,  crisis ; 

brindisi,  m.,  toast ;  f&i,  f.,    thesis. 

Nouns  of  dignity,  as, 

ball,  bailiff;  pdri,  peer;  guardasigitti,     keeper 

'[of the  seal: 

The  noun  di,  *  day',  and  its  compounds  ;  as, 
buond\t  good  day  ;      mezzodl,  noon  ;       oggidi,  now-a-days: 

Nouns  formed  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the  plural ;  as, 
lavaceci,      dunce  ;  graffiasdnti,  hypocrite  ;  guardaportoni,  porter  -r 
leccapidtti, glutton ;  cacciadidvoli,  exorcist;  cavadenti,  tooth  draw- 

[er: 

And  the  following, 

alealt,    alkali ;         ambdssi,  ambs-aces  ;        zdnni,   merry-andrew  ; 
abbiccif  alphabet ;    barbagidnni,  owl ;  soprattieni,  delay ; 

cremisl,  crimson  ;     diesi,  diesis  [in  music] ;  appigionasi,  notice  of 

[a  house  to  let : 
are  masculine. 

The  noun  Gencsi,  *  Genesis',  is  of  the  common  gender. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


45 


Nouns  ending  in  u  are  some  of  them  masculine,  and 
some  feminine;  as, 


me'u,  m.  dill ; 

ragUy  m.         ragout-, 
soprappib,  m.  overplus ; 


gru,f.  crane ; 
tribhf.  tribe ; 
gioventuf.  youth. 


EXAMPLES. 


Signijicdva  gran  sccco  nslla 
vegnentc  state,  e  poi  nella  oppo- 
sizione  di  CUJELLO  ECCLISSI 
gran  sovcrchio  d>  deque.  (Giov. 
Viil.  1.  11.  c.  2.) 

Qucl,  eke  i  medici  nostri  ckid- 
man  CRISI.  (Bern.  Rim.  1.  16.) 

Cingonlo  intorno  i  suoi  FA  MO- 
ST PARI.  (Ariost.  Far.  38.  79.) 


H  medico  si  f  ice  loro  incontro 
dicendo,  che  Iddio  dtsse~l6ro  IL 
UONDL  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

IL  maggior  CACCIADIAVOH 
non  &  in  Toscdna.  (Lor.  Med. 
Arid.  2.  5.) 

Ma  tdli  cose  hdnno  piu  DEL 
Ayyi,esondison6ste.  (Demetr. 
Seng.  67.) 

Comincertmo    dal     principio 

DEL  GENESI.      (GlOV.  Vill.  1.  11. 

c.2) 

Lascidsse  loro  nn  per  cento 
di  quanta  kdnno,  e  guadagnds- 
sonsi  quell  uno  col  sudore  del 
ro/io,  come  comdnda  LA  GENESI. 
(Dav.  Seism,  p.  38.) 

IL  MEU  i  CALDO  cd  c  erba,  il 
cui  s6me  e  detto  con  simlglidnie 
nome.  (Cr.  6.  78.  1.) 

lo  ho  giudicdto,  che  egli  sia 
oramdi  bene  con  qwilche  freno 
riientre  i  cdldi  impeti  BELLA 
stf  A  GiovKNTilL.  (Firenz.  Asin. 
178.) 


It  announced  a  great  drought 
in  the  following  summer,and  af- 
terward at  the  opposition  of  that 
eclipse,  a  great  abundance  of 
water. 

That,  which  our  physicians 
call  crisis. 

His  famous  peers  surround 
him. 

The  physician  went  to  meet 
them,  wishing  God  would  give 
them  a  good  day. 

A  greater  exorcist  is  not  to 
be  found  in  Tuscany, 


But  such  things  more  become 
a  merry-andrew,  and  are  in- 
decent. 

We  will  commence  from  the 
beginning  of  Genesis. 


That  he  should  leave  them 
one  per  centum  of  what  they 
have,  and  that  they  should  earn 
that  one  by  the  sweat  of  their 
brow,  as  is  commanded  in  Gen- 
esis. 

The  dill  is  warm,  and  it  is  an 
herb  whose  seed  is  called  by 
the  same  name. 

I  have  thought,  that  it  is 
now  proper  to  moderate,  with 
some  restraint,  the  warm  im- 
pulses of  his  youth. 


46  ANALOGY. 

Adjectives,  verbs,  adverbs,  prepositions,  when  used 
substantively,  are  of  the  masculine  gender ;  as, 

lello,  beautiful :  seguitdre,  to  continue  ; 

dove,  where;  quando,     when; 

come,  how;  perche,       why; 

sl>  yes ;  no,  no. 

The  names  of  the  days  of  the  week,  except  Dome- 
nica,  «  Sunday';  and  those  of  the  months,  are  masculine  ; 
as, 

Mercoledl,    Wednesday;  Sabato,   Saturday; 

Sprite,         April;  dgosto,   August. 

Names  of  trees  are  masculine ;  as, 
olmo,  elm-tree;  mirto,    myrtle-tree ; 

no'ce,   walnut-tree;,  limone,  lemon-tree. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Queraa,  oak-tree  ;  vite,  vine  ;  ginestra,  broom ; 

are  feminine. 

Names  of  fruits  are  feminine* ;  as, 

pera,      pear;  ardncia,  orange; 

susina,  plum;  ciriegia,  cherry. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


Pdmo,  apple  ;  fico,     fig ;  d&ttero,  date ; 

cedro,    citron  \  pino,  pine ;  limdne,   lemon, 

are  masculine. 


Some  masculine  nouns,  when  used  to  denote   a  femi- 
nine object,  take  a  different  termination;  as, 

amico,  friend,  m. ;  arnica,  friend,  f. ; 

cugino,  cousin,  in. ;  cugina,  cousin,  f. ; 

genitore,  father;  genitrice,  mother;  - 

autore,  author ;  autrice,  authoress ; 

poita,  poet ;  poetessa  poetess ; 

sacerdote,  priest ;  sacerdotessa.  priestess  ; 

duca,  duke ;  duchessa,  duchess ; 

principe,  prince;  principessa,  princess; 

re,  king ;  regina,  queen. 

*  These  are  generally  formed  from  the  names  of  trees,  changing  o  into  a;  as, 
mdxdorZo,  *  almond-tree' ;  widndorM,  *  an  almond'  igtlso,  'mulberry-tree'; 
'  a  mulberry.' 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


47 


Some  names  of  animate  beings  denote  the   feminine 
by  a  different  word  ;  as, 

uomo,  man;  donna,  woman; 

tdro,     bull;  vacca,    cow; 

pdrco,  pig;  troia,     sow; 

Some  in  the  feminine  take  a  different  termination  ;  as. 


cane,  dog ; 
/eone,  lion; 


cag-na,      bitch ; 
leondssa,  lioness ; 


And  others  are  either  masculine  or  feminine,   and 
designate  both  genders ;  as, 


corvo,  m.,  crow ; 


panUra*  £,  panther. 


EXAMPLES. 


Le  donne,  gudndo  arrivano  a 
quardnta  dnni  perdono  IL  BELLO 
dilla  gioventudinc.  (Libr. 
Adorn.  Donn.) 

La  regina  a  Filomina,  voltdta, 
le  impose  IL  SEGUITARE.  (Bocc. 
g.  3.  n.  3.) 

IL  D6vE  w  ho  gia  pensdto. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.) 

Sarei  continto  di  sapere  IL 
GIUANDO.  (Petr.  s.  306.) 

DEL  C^ME  non  ti  cdglia  IL 
PERCHE  ti  diro.  (Bocc.  Filoc.) 

Son  certa  DEL  si.  (Bocc.  g. 
7.  n.  7.) 

Ciascuno  rispdsc  DEL  NO. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

Jlncora  JL  MERCOLEDI,  e  7 
Venerdlj  e  IL  SABATO.  (Maes- 
truzz.  1.  33.) 

L*AMOR6  SOMIRTO — Crescepiu 
volontitr  net  cespo  intiro.  ( Alam. 
Colt.  1.  16.) 

LA  vfTE  appo  ?i6i  t  assai  co~ 
noscitita.  (Cr.  4. 1. 1.) 


When  women  arrive  at  forty 
years  they  lose  the  beauty  of 
youth. 

The  queen  turning  to  Filo- 
mena,  ordered  her  to  continue. 

I  have  already  thought  of  the 
where. 

I  should  be  happy  to  know 
the  when. 

Do  not  trouble  yourself  about 
the  how,  I  will  tell  you  the 
why. 

I  am  certain  of  the  .affirma- 
tive. 

Every  one  answered  in  the 
negative. 

Even  Wednesday,  and  Fri- 
day, and  Saturday. 

-     The  amorous  myrtle  grow* 
better  in  the  whole  bush. 


The  Vine  among  us  is  very 
well  known. 


46 


ANALOGY. 


Ti  sir  bo  gclse,  mdndorle, 
e  SUSINE.  (Bocc.  Amet.  15.) 

Tson  qutl  dellefruUc  del  mat 
6rto — Chequiriprendo  DATTERO 
per  FICO.  (Dant.  Inf.  33.) 

E  di  qu&sto  consiglio  fu  au- 
trice  una  ch'tbbe  n6me  Polisso. 
(But.  Com.  Dant.) 

D6xNA  e  nume  generico  dilla 
FEMMIXA  dilla  spezie  umdna. 
(Crusca.) 

Mi  sovvihied'avcrfdtlo  man- 
gidre  al  LE6NK  della  cdrnc  d'u- 
naLEONEssA.  (Red.  Ins.  71 .) 

Infra  molte  bidnche  colombe 
aggiugne.piu  di  bellezza  UN  NE- 
no  c6RVo,  chc  un cdndido  cAgno. 
(Bocc.  g,9n.  10.) 


I  keep  for  thee  mulberries,  al 
monds,  and  plums. 

He — am  I,  who  fruit  from 
evil  garden  brought ;— And  here 
my  fig  is  with  a  date  repaid. 

And  the  author  of  this  coun- 
sel was  one  who  was  named 
Polisso. 

Woman  is  the  generic  name 
of  the  female  of  the  human 
species. 

I  recollect  to  have  made  the 
lion  eat  of  the  flesh  of  the  li- 
oness. 

Amongst  many  white  doves 
a  black  crow  adds  more  beauty 
than  a  white  swan. 


NUMBER,    Or     FORMATION    OF    THE    PLURAL, 

Masculine  nouns,  ending  in  0,  a,  e,  form  the  plural  by 
changing  0,  a,  e,  into  ?*;  as, 

/i&ro,       book;  Zi&ri,  books; 

cavdllo,  horse  ;  cavdlli,  horses  ; 

^O&A,     poet;  potti,  poets; 

climA,      climate ;  c/imi,  climates ; 

JWTE,       flower ;  fior^  flowers ; 

leprE,      hare ;  lepn,  hares. 

Feminine  nouns,  ending  in  0,  e,  form  the  plural   by 
changing  0,  e,  into  i;  as, 

mdno,  hand;  mdm,    hands; 

drtE,     art;  drti,      arts; 

fontE,    fountain ;        .  font i,     fountains. 

Feminine  nouns  ending  in  a,  form  the  plural  by  chang- 
ing a  into  e;  r s, 


house ; 
,  table ; 


COSE,    houses ; 
E,  tables; 


SUBSTANTIVES.  49 

Nouns  ending  in   t,  u,  or  in  ie,  or  with  an  accented 
vowel,  do  not  change  their  termination  in  the  plural ;  as, 

estasi)    extacy ;  tstasi,  extacies  ; 

gru,       crane;  gru,  cranes; 

sptciE,  sort;  sptciE,  sorts; 

rE,*        king;  rE,  kings; 

cittA*    city;  cittA,  cities; 

virtu*  virtue ;  virth,  virtues. 

The  following  nouns  in  the  plural  have  an  irregular 
formation  : 


Dw, 

udmo, 

bue, 


God  ; 
man  ; 
ox  ; 


D6i,t         Gods  ; 
uomini,     men ; 
budi^        oxen. 


EXAMPLE: 


ALCUNI  CAVALLI  si  diputano 
a  vettura,  dltri  a  cdrr&.(Cr.  6.  9.) 

Ef  dimsa  la  terra  in  SETTE 
CLIMI.  (But.  Com.  Dant.) 

Ed  io  9l  provdi  sul  primo 
uprir  DE'  Fi6ri.  (Petr.  c.  38.) 

COLLE  mie  MANI  avrei  gid 
posto  in  terra — Queste  meinbra 
noiosc.  (Petr.  s.  29.) 

Qualcuna  rf'  este  ndtti — Chiu- 
da  omdi  quisle  DIJE  r6NTi  di 
pitinto.  (Petr.  c.  46.) 

E  diquello  un  mezzo  bicchier 
per  uomo  desse  ALLE  prime  MEN- 
SB.  (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  2.) 

E  questo  e  essere  in  ESTASI. 
(But.  Com.  Dant.) 

LE  GRU  hdnno  un  loro  re,  e 
tutte  lo  servono,  (Fior.Vt.  c.  19.) 

De*  qudli  animdli  sono  quasi 
infinite  LE  SPECIE.  (Gell.  Circ. 
2.  29.) 


Some  horses  are  destined  for 
burden,  others  to  the  carriage. 

The  earth  is  divided  into 
seven  climates. 

And  I  experienced  it  at  the 
first  blooming  of  the  flo\yers. 

I  should  have  already  with 
my  own  hands  laid  in  the 
ground  thes«  wearisome  limbs. 

Let  one  of  these  nights 
close  these  two  fountains  of 
tears. 

And  of  that  [wine]  he  should 
give  half  a  tumbler  to  each  man 
at  the  first  course. 

And  this  is  to  be  in  extacy. 

The  cranesJiave  a  king,  and 
all  serve  him. 

Of  which  animals,  the  spe- 
cies are  almost  infinite. 


*  Such  nouns  are  generally  contracted ;  as  re  from  rjge,  cittd  from  cittAde, 
virtu  from  virtude ;  and  when  :h.'V  are  used  entire,  that  is,  without  the  suppres- 
sion of  any  syllable  rege,  cittdde,  virtude,  they  change  their  termination,  and 
make  in  the  plural  rcgi>  'kings';  cittddi, ;  cities'^  mrtudi^  'virtues'  according 
to  the  general  rule. 

5 


50  ANALOGY. 

LE  CITTA  son  nemiche,  amici  Cities    are    unfriendly,    the 

i  boschi  —  A'  miiipcnsieri.  (Fetr.         woods     are     friendly    to    my 
c.  37J  thoughts. 


Tutti  iREGidel   mondo  sono  All  the  kings  in  the  world 

mino  a  vostro  sposo.  (Fr.  Guitt.  are  inferior  to  your  husband. 
lett.  10.; 

Tosto    GLI  DEI    d'  abisso    in  Soon  the  go  ds  of  the  Abyss 

vdrie  tdrme  —  Concorron  dogni  in   different  bands,  rush   from 

intorno  alV    dlte  porte.     (Tass.  all  sides  to  the  lofty  gates. 
Ger.  3.  5.) 

Veggendo  MOI/TI  UOMINI  nil-  Seeing  many  men  frequent 

La  cdrte  del  padre  usdre.  (Bocc.  the  court  of  her  father. 
g.  4.  n.  1.) 

Perche  addiv6nne,  che  i  su6i.  Wherefore  it  happened,  that 

gli  dsini,  le  pecore,  per  li  cdmpi  the  oxen,  the  asses,  the  goats, 

.96  n'anddvano.    (Bocc.  Introd.)  went  astray  through  the  fields. 


Many  nouns   in  o  in  the  plural  end  in  i,  and  more 
elegantly  in  a  ;  as, 


audio,  ring;  \  Qr  rings  ; 


labbm. 


Some  have  only  the  termination  in  a  in  the  plural  ;  as, 


miglio,  mile  ;  ml^/iA,  miles  ; 

staio,     bushel;  stdiA,     bushels; 

udvo,      egg;  UOVA,     eggs. 

[For  a  list  of  Words  in  0,  making  the  plural  in  i  or  a,  see  APPENDIX,  D.] 

Riso,  l  laughter'  ;  membto,  '  limb',  or  t  member  of  the  human 
body',  form  their  plural  in  i  and  a  ;  risi,  risa,  *  laughter'  ;  w^m- 
brit  membra,  l  limbs'  :  but  riso,  '  rice'  ;  mtmbro,  '  member  of  a 
corporation  or  political  body',  form  their  plural  in  i  only  ;  risi, 

*  rice'  ;  mtmbri,  '  members'. 

Gtsto,  (  exploit'  ;  frutto,  l  the  fruit  of  a  tree'  ;  Ugno,  i  fire- 
wood,' form  their  plural  in  i  and  a  ;  gtsti,  gtsta,  i  exploits'  ; 
frutti,frutta,  '  fruits'  ;  Itgni,  Ugna,  {  wood'  :  but  gtsto,  i  gesture'  ; 
frutto,  *  production  of  the  earth',  or  '  income'  ;  ttgno,  l  the  hard 
substance  of  a  tree',  '  a  ship,'  or  '  a  coach',  form  their  plural  in  i 
only  ;  g&ti,  '  gestures  '  ;  frutti,  '  produce'  or  '  income  '  ;  Ugni, 

*  billets  of  wood',  *  ships',  or  *  coaches'. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


51 


Osso,  i  bone',  has  a  treble  termination  in  the  plural,  making 
dssi,  osse,  ossa,  '  bones'. 

When  these  nouns  take  the  termination  in  a  in  the 
plural,  they  become  feminine,  and  receive  the  article  It 
before  them ;  as,  le  anilla,  '  the  rings' ;  le  miglia,  *  the 
miles  ' ;  lefrutta,  *  the  fruits' ;  le  osse  or  le  ossa,  '  the 
bones.' 

Finally  there  are,  in  Italian,  as  well  as  in  all  other  languages, 
some  nouns  which  have  only  the  singular  number;  as,  all 
proper  names,*  names  of  metals,  and  the  words  prole,  '  genera- 
tion' ;  progenie,  '  progeny' ;  stirpe,  '  race' ;  mane,  *  morning' ; 
miele,  '  honey,'  &c. ;  and  others  which  have  only  the  plural ;  as, 
Idri,  *  household  gods';  annali,  'annals';  calzoni,  'breeches'; 
vdnni,  l  wings' ;  forbid,  l  scissars' ;  nozze,  '  nuptials' ;  esequie, 
1  exequies' ;  reni,  '  the  reins' ;  molle  or  molli,  '  tongs' ;  spezie  or 
spfaj,  '  spices' ;  froge,  l  the  skin  over  the  nostrils  of  a  horse' ; 
&c. 


EXAMPLES. 


Fdttosi  prestdre  a  Madonna 
Giacomma  un  DE*  suoi  ANELLI, 
guivi  per  sua  moglie  sposd  la 
ddi.iina.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  4.) 

Lalunga  gutrra — Che  DEL- 
L'ANELLA  fe'  si  dlte  spoglie. 
(Dant.  Inf.  28.) 

E'lla  fcce  portdre  i  due  cap- 
poni  Ihsi,  e  M6LTE  u6vA 
fresche.  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  1.) 

Lascidrono  anddr  Calandrino 
con  LE  maggior  EISA  del  mondo. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  3.) 

Lo  spirto  DALLE  lille  MEM- 
BRA scidlto.  (Petr.  s.  259.) 

Tdnto  piu  celebrd_  Tiberio 
SIJE  GESTA  in  sendto.  (Dav. 
Tac.  ann.  1.  2.) 

Viveano  quasi  come  lestie  di 
FBT^TTA,  e  di  ghidnde.  (Giov. 
Vill.  1.  1.  c.  23.) 


Having  asked  Madonna  Gia- 
comina  to  lend  him  one  of  her 
rings,  there  took  Catharine  to 
wife. 

That  long  war,  in  which  was 
made  the  rich  booty  of  the 
rings. 

She  caused  to  be  brought 
the  two  boiled  capons,  and 
many  fresh  eggs. 

They  let  Calandrino  go  with 
the  greatest  laughter  in  the 
world. 

The  spirit  freed  from  the 
beautiful  limbs. 

Tiberius  celebrated  so  much 
the  more  his  exploits  in  the  se- 
nate. 

They  lived  like  beasts  on 
fruit  and  mast . 


*  When  proper  names  of  persons^  however,  are  taken  as  common,  they  are 
used  also  in  the  plural ;  as,  t  Chiabrera,  i  Filicaia,  i  JKedi,  i  Jtfenzini,  i  Ouidi,  i 
Frugdni,  e  tanti  dltri  sublimi  e  pr igiatkssimi  irtgtgni, « the  Chiabreras,  the  Fili- 
caias,  the  Redis,  the  Menzinis,  the  Guidis,  the  Frugonis,  and  so  many  other  sub- 
lime and  most  worthy  geniuses.' 


52  ANALOGY, 

ttfuoco  cresce  per  LE  I.E-INA,  Fire  is    increased  by  wood, 

e  qudnte  piii  ce  ne  metti  mag-  and  the  more  you  put  on,  the 

giore  si  fa.     (Fr.  Giord.  146.)  larger  it  becomes. 

Fu  r,on  solamtnte  vcciso,  ma  He  was  not  only  killed,  but 

fino  ALL'  OSSA  divordto.    (JBocc.  devoured  even  to  the  bones, 
g.  2.  n.  9.) 

LA  ST£KPE  non  fa  le  singu-  Family   does   not    make   ex- 

Idri  persone  nlbili,  ma  le  singu-  traordinary  persons  noble,   but 

Idri    persone   fdnno    nobile   LA  extraordinary    persons    render 

BTIRPE.     (Dant.  Conv.)  their  family  noble. 

Cristo  voile  per  sva  prcsenza  Christ  wished  to  honor   with 

onordr  LE    NOZZE  di  Cdna  Ga-  his    presence    the    nuptials    of 

lil-ia,)  equimfdre  ilpTinio  mird-  Cana   of  Galilee,  and  there  to 

colo.     (Cavalc.  Espos.  simb.  1.)  work  the  first  miracle. 


Independently  of  the  change  of  termination,  there  are 
in  Italian  many  nouns,  which  in  the  plural  undergo  a 
certain  change  of  orthography. 

Thus  all  nouns  ending  in  ca,  ga,  in  order  to  preserve 
in  the  plural  before  the  vowels  i,  e,  the  same  sound 
which  c,  g,  have  in  the  singular  before  the  vowel  #,  take 
an  h,  in  the  plural  after  the  consonant  c,  g  ;  as, 

monarcA,    monarch;  mcmdrcm,  monarchs  ; 

cotflGA,      colleague;  collegni,     colleagues; 

monacA9     nun ;  mo'nacHe,    nuns ; 

rod ;  vergHe,       rods* 


Nouns  ending  in  co,  go,  consisting  of  two  syllables, 
also  take  an  h  in  the  plural  after  c,  g  ;  as, 

g-two'co,  sport;  giuocm,  sports: 

place ;  luogui,   places. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


Greco, { Greek'  ;  porcoj  'hog' ;  in  the  plural  make,  Greet, c  Greeks'; 
porcij '  hogs.'    Mdgo,  -  magician',  in  the  plural  makes  either  i 
or  magi, '  magicians'. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


53 


Nouns  in  co,  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  if  co,  go, 
are  preceded  by  a  consonant,  take  an  h  in  the  plural ; 
and  if  they  are  preceded  by  a  vowel  they  are  written 
without  h ;  as, 

bifdlco,  laborer ;  bifolcni,     laborers ; 

albtroo,  inn ;  albtrgui,   inns ; 

mtdico,  physician;  mtdici,      physicians; 

tedloGo,  theologian ;  te&oQi,      theologians. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


The  following  nouns, 

cdrico,     charge ; 

fondaco,  warehouse ; 
pdrroco,  parson ; 
stdmaco,  stomach ; 
mdnico,   handle  ; 
traffico,    trading ; 

in  the  plural  make, 

cdricm,      charges ; 
fdndacui,  warehouses  ; 
pdrrociii,    parsons  ; 
stomacni,   stomachs  ; 
mdnicui,    handles ; 
tradings  ; 


dbbligo,  obligation ; 
ripiegOj   expedient ; 
catdlogo,  catalogue ; 
impiego,  employment ; 
gastigo,  punishment; 
intrigo,  intrigue  ; 


obbligui,    obligations  j 
ripidgm,    expedients  ; 
catdlogni,  catalogues; 
impiegui,  employments ; 
gastigRit     punishments ; 
intrigui,     intrigues. 


Several  other  nouns  in  co,go,  are  indifferently  written 
with  or  without  the  h  ;  as, 

mendzco,    beggar  ; 
equivoco,    equivoque  ; 
didloGO,      dialogue ; 
apologue  ; 


[  For  a  list  of  Nouns  ending  in  co,  go,  and  making  the  plural  in  ci,  £t,  or  eftt, 

ghi,  see  APPEKVIX  D.  (2.)} 

5* 


54  ANALOGY. 

Nouns  ending  in  cm,  gia,  and  ccia,  ggia,  unaccented, 
form  their  plural  by  changing  a  into  e,  and  suppressing 
the  i  ;  as, 

IdnciA,    lance  ;  ZdncE,    lances  ; 

frdnGiA,  fringe  ;  frdnGE,  fringes  ; 

arrow;  jWccE,  arrows; 

A,  strand  f  ^idcGE,  strands. 


Nouns  ending  in  do,  gio,  and  ccio,  gg*io,  unaccented, 
form  their  plural  by  changing  o  into  i,  and  suppressing 
the  i  that  they  have  in  the  singular;  or  what  is  the  same, 
by  suppressing  only  the  o  ;  as, 

fcdcro,    kiss  ;  6dci,   kisses  ; 

/r^Gio,    honor;  freGi,  honors  ; 

Jdccio,   snare  5  Zacci,   snares  ; 

"raGGio,   ray  ;  rdcei,  rays. 

But  if  cia,  gia,  and  ccia,  ggia,  or  cio,  ^zo  and  ccio,  ggio  are  ac- 
cented, the  i  is  never  suppressed  ;  as, 

c/eoiA,        elegy;  elegie,        elegies  j 

farmaciA,  pharmacy  ;  fairnacie,  pharmacies; 

reading-desk  ;  leggii,        reading-desks. 


Nouns  ending  in  chio,  ghio,  glio,  form  the  plural  by 
suppressing  the  o  ;  as, 

OCCHIO,      eye  ;  OCCHI,        eyes  ; 

mwg-GHio,  bellowing  ;  mwg-GHi,   bellowings  ; 

5coGi,io,  rock  ;  ^CO'GLI,      rocks. 


Nouns  ending  in  dio*  6io,  also  form  their  plural  by 
suppressing  the  o  ;  as, 

fornAio,  baker  ;  fornAi,   bakers; 

Jttatbio,    spinning-wheel;          JXatoi,   spinning-wheels, 

All  other  nouns  ending  in   io,  if  io   is  unaccented, 

*  Most  nouns  in  dio  end  alsoindro;  as,  libraioor  librA.Ro,for>  dioor/ornARO; 
when  they  take  this  last  termination,  in  the  plural  they  make  librari,  '  booksel- 
lers' ;/or«dri,  *  bakers'  ;  according  to  the  general  rule. 


SUBSTANTIVES, 


55 


form  their  plural  by  changing  io  into  j  ;  but  if  io  is  ac- 
cented, they  form  it  by  changing  the  o  of  io  into  t;  as, 

studj,  studies, 

benefits,  benefits ; 

rii,  rivulets ; 

desii,  desires. 


studio,       study; 
benefizio,*  benefit ; 
rio,  rivulet ; 

desio,        desire ; 


The  noun  moglie, '  wife',  forms  the  plural  by  suppres- 
sing the  e ;  mogli,  '  wives'. 


EXAMPLES. 


La  contessa  Mateldafondo  un 
ndbile  monasterio  di  MONACHE. 
(Giov.  Vill.  1.  4.  c.  20.) 

II  dl  che  costei  ndcque  eran  le 
stelle — In  Lu6aHi  alii  ed  eietti. 
(Petr.  c.  44.) 

Tra  brutti  PORCI  piu  degni  di 
gdlle, —  Che  d'  dltro  cibofdtto  in 
umdn  uso.  (Dant.  Purg.  14.) 

/  sdvj  si  partirono,  e  torndrsi 
a*  I6ro  ALBERGHI.  (Nov. ant.  6.) 

Si  su6l  ricdrrere  n&  mdli 
pericolosi  a' MEDICI  eccellenti. 
(Casa.  Jett.  41).) 

Ponendo  loro  grandissimi 
CARICHI  di  montte.  (Stor.  Fist. 
170.) 

Le  risptiste  xive,  le  novel* e  vi 
erano,  e  gli  APQLOGT.  (Pros. 
Fior.  6.) 

Spdrti  costdro  per  la  piccolo, 
cdsa,  pdrte  ri1  andd  nella  c6rte,  e 
poste  giii  lor  LANCE,  avvenne 
che  uno  di  loro  gittb  la  sua 
LANCIA  net  fieno.  (Bocc.  g.  5. 
n.  30 


The  countess  Matilda  found- 
ed a  noble  convent  of  nuns, 

On  the  day  when  this  lady 
was  born,  the  stars  were  in 
high  and  chosen  places. 

'Midst  brute  swine — Worth- 
ier of  acorns  than  of  other  food 
— Created  for  man's  use. 

The  sages  went  away,  and 
returned  to  their  dwellings. 

In  dangerous  diseases  we 
are  accustomed  to  have  re- 
course to  excellent  physicians. 


Laying     upon     them 
great  imposts  of  money. 


very 


There  were    witty   answers, 
stories,  and  fables. 


These  having  spread  them- 
selves through  the  small  house, 
and  having  laid  down  their  lan- 
ces, it  happened  that  one  of 
them  threw  his  lance  into  the 
hay. 


*  Many  nouns  in  zio,  end  also  in  do  or  gio  ;  as,  benefizio  or  benefkc i o,  sertAzio 
or*er73iaioj  but,  however  they  may  end,  constantly  form  the  plural  in  j  ;  aa, 
benefizj  or  benejicj, l  benefits'  5  servizj  or  sermgj,  *  services'. 


56 


ANALOGY. 


Gia  nella  sommita  de  piu 
alii  monti  apparivano  i  RAGGI 
delta  surge nte  luce.  (Bocc.  g. 
8.  proem.) 

Le  giocdnde  ode,  e  le  lascive 
ELEGIE,  a  tutte  le  dltre  studiose 
drti  antipongono.  (Dav.  Tac. 
Perd.  Eloq.) 

10  soleva  esseruno  degli  OCCHI 
del  capo  vdstro.     (Pecor.  g.  4. 

Mi  parea  per  tutto,  dove  che 
io  mi  volgessi,  sentire  MTJGGHI, 
urlif  e  strida  di  diversi  c  fero- 
cissimi  animdli.  (Lab.  29.) 

Che  giova  dunque,  per  che  tut- 
ta  spdlme — La  mia  barchetta, 

poicht  infra   gli  sc6GLi E' 

ritenuta.     (Petr.  c.  39.) 

Donne,  n6i  sidmo  gidvani 
roRNAi. — Dell'  drte  nostra  buon 
maestri  assdi.  (Cant.  Cam. 
34.) 

11  qudle,   n&   liberdli  STTJDJ 
ammaestrdto,  sommamente  i  xa- 
lordsi  udmini  onordva.     (Bocc. 
Vil.  Dant.) 

Jlppresso  costdro  le  sirdcchie 
e  le  M6GLI  loro,  tutte  di  brimo 
vestite.  nennero.  (Bocc.  g.  3. 
n.7.) 


Already  on  the  summit  of 
the  highest  mountains  appeared 
the  rays  of  the  rising  light. 

They  prefer  the  merry  odes 
and  the  lascivious  elegies  to  all 
the  other  studious  arts. 

I  used  to  be  one  of  the  eyes 
of your  head, 

I  seemed  to  hear,  wherever 
I  turned,  the  bellowings,  the 
bowlings,  and  the  cries  of  dif- 
ferent and  very  ferocious  ani- 
mals. 

What  does  it  avail  to  spread 
all  the  sails  of  my  bark,  if  she 
is  impeded  among  the  rocks. 

Ladies,  we  are  young  bakers 
very  well  skilled  in  our  art. 


Who,  being  well  skilled  in 
liberal  pursuits,  greatly  honored 
learned  men. 


After  them  came  their  sisters 
and  their  wives,  all  dressed  in 
mourning. 


VARIATION      OF     NOUNS. 

Italian  nouns  are  varied  by  means  of  certain  preposi- 
tions placed  before  them  ;  viz.  DI,  {  of,  in  the  genitive, 
or  relation  of  possession  ;  A,  *  to',  in  the  dative,  or  rela- 
tion of  attribution  ;  DA,  c  from  or  by',  in  the  ablative, 
or  relation  of  derivation.  The  nominative,  or  subjective, 
and  the  accusative,  or  objective,  are  distinguished  by  the 
place  they  occupy  in  the  sentence. 

Proper  nouns  are  generally  varied  with  the  prepositions 
only :  common  nouns  with  the  prepositions  and  the  ar- 


SUBSTANTIVES.  57 

tides  il,  lo,  la  ;  i  or  li,  gli,  le,  «  the'.     When  common 
nouns  are  used  in  an   indefinite  sense,  they  are   varied 
with  the  prepositions  and  the  pronouns  uno,  una,  '  a  'or 
an' ;  alcani,  alcune, '  some'. 


Variation  of  a  Proper  Noun. 

Subjective  (N.)*—        .....      Chare,  CaBsar  : 

C  Possession    (G.)  —     di  Ces  ire,  of  Caesar; 

Relation  of  2  Attribution  (D.)  —     a    Cesare,  to  Caesar; 

(  Derivation  (Ab.)  —     da  Chare,  from  or  by  Caesar; 

Objective  (Ac.)  —     ......        Cisare,  Caesar. 

Before  a  noun  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the  preposi- 
tion di  drops  the  i  and  takes  an  apostrophe  in  its  stead  ; 
and  the  preposition  a  takes  a  d  after  it  ;  as, 


D>  AHtdnio,      >    f  Anth  .     AD  Antonio,  >        Anthonv 

(for  DI   Antonio),  $  y  '      (for  A  Ant6mo),  $ 


Variation  of  Common  Nouns. 

Masculine  Noun,  beginning  with  a  Consonant,  varied 
with  the  article  iL 


Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.) —     il  Lihro,  the  book  ;  i  or  li  libri,  the  books  ; 

-  C  Poss.  (G.) — del  libro,  of  the  book  ;  dei  libri,  of  the  books  ; 

Relat.  -?  Atlr.  (D.) — al  Libro,  to  the  book  ;  di  libri,  to  the  books ; 

(  Der.  (Ab.) — dal  libro, from  the  dai  libri,  from  the 

[book ;  [books ; 

Objective  (Ac.) —       il  libro,  the  book  ;  i  libri,  the  books. 

*  To  facilitate  i  he  Variation  of  these  and  other  nouns,  to  those  who  are  ac- 
customed to  the  Latin  Declension,  we  have  added  to  each  relation  the  Initial  of 
the  name  of  the  corresponding  case  in  Latin;  thus  (N.)  stands  for  nominative  ;  (G.) 
for  genitive ;  &c. 


58  ANALOGY. 

Masculine  Noun,  beginning  with  a  Consonant,  varied 
with  the  article  lo. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.) — lo  spicchio,  the  mirror ;     gli  specchi,  the  mirrors ; 

f  Poss.  (G.) — dello  specchio,  of  degli  spscchi,  of  the 

[the  mirror  ;  [mirrors ; 

Relat  J  Attr.  (D.) — dllo  specchio,  to  dgli  specchi,  to  the 

[the  mirror  ;  [mirrors  ; 

I  Der.  (Ab.) — ddllo  specchio,  from  ddgli  spicchi,   from  the 

L                                     [the  mirror;  [mirrors; 

Objective  (Ac.) — lo  specchio,  the  mirror;     gli  specchi,  the  mirrors. 


Masculine  Noun,  beginning  with  a  Vowel. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.) —     V  amico,  the  friend  ;  gli  ani  i,  the  friends  ; 

f  Poss.  (G.) — delV  amici,  of  the  degli  amici,  of  the 

[friend ;  [friends ; 

Relat  J  ^ttr'  (^') — a^'  amic°i  to  t^ie  ^*  amid,  to  the 

'     j  [friend ;  [friends; . 

I  Der.  (Ab.) — daW  amico,  from  ddgli  amid,  from  the 
l_                                       [the  friend ;  [friends ; 

Objective  (Ac.) —       V  amico  the  friend  ;  gli  amwij  the  friends. 


Feminine  Noun,  beginning  with  a  Consonant. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.)  —      la  cdsa,  the  house  ;       le  case,  the  houses  ; 

f  Poss.  (G.y-deUa  cdsa,  of  the        >  din   ^        f  ^    houge 

[house  ;  $ 
Relat  J  Attr'  (-»•)-«««  cdsa,  to  the        _     ^^^  to  the  houses  . 


J  Der.  (Ab.)  —  ddlla  cdsa,  from  dalle  case,  from  the 

^  [the  house  ;  [houses  ; 

Objective  (Ac.)  —     la  cdsa,  the  house  ;      le  case,  the  houses. 


SUBSTANTIVES.  59 

Feminine  Noun,  beginning  with  a  Vowel. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.)  —     V  dnina,  the  soul  ;         le  dnime,  the  souls  ; 
Poss.  (G.)-deH'  dnima,  of  the 


e  ^       ^e  ^^  of  the  soujs. 
Relat.-   Attr*  (D-)~«H'  anima,  to  the     '  >  ^  dj|i       to  the  goulg  . 

[SOUl;     } 

Der.  (Ab.)---daW  dnima,  from        <Z«We  dnime,  from  the 

[the  soul  ;  [souls  ; 

Objective  (Ac.)  —      V  dnima,  the  soul  ;       le  dnimc,  the  souls. 


Variation  of  Common  Nouns  used  in  an  Indefinite 
Sense. 

Masculine  Noun. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.) —    un  uccello,  a  bird  ;  alcuni  uccelli,  some  birds ; 

fPoss.  (G.) — d>  un  uccilioj  of  a  d*  alcuni  uccdlli,  of  some 
1                                         [bird;  [birds; 

Relat  j  Attr.(D.) — adunuccello,toa.  ad  alcuni  uccelli,  to  some 


[bird ;  [birds ; 

Der.  (Ab.) — da  un  uccello,          da  alcuni  ucc&li,  from  some 


|     J-»CA.    \f\.\J .  J^—U,l*    €*/«/    U.H/Ct't/t/j  U.I*  tH/OM./C/t'  W^Ubl/CC'j  •*  V»**  OWIliO 

[from  a  bird  ;  birds ; 

Objective  (Ac.) —    un  uccello,  a  bird  ;    alcuni  uccelli,  some  birds. 


Feminine  Noun. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subjective  (N.) —  una  mela,  an  apple ;  alcune  mele,  some  apples  ; 

fPoss.  (G.) — d)  una  mela,  of  an  dj  alcune  mele,  of  some 

[apple ;  [apples  j 

P  ,  ,  J  Attr.  (D.) — ad  una  mela,  to  ad  alcune  mele}  to  some 

[an  apple  ;  [apples  ; 

',  Der.  (Ab.) — daunavnela,  da  alcune  mele ,  from  some 

^                        [from  an  apple ;  [apples ; 

Objective  (Ac.) — unamela^  an  apple  ;    alcune  mele,  some  apples. 


60  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE     II. 

[The  learner  will  supply  the  article  according  to  the  Gender  of  the  nouns, 
and  will  form  their  Plural  and  vary  them,  according  to  the  preceding  rules.] 

The   study   of  (the)  belles   lettres.      The    country  of  the 
studio  bella      letter  a.  paese 

Amazons.     The    fable    of  the   frogs.       The    virtues   of  the 
Jlmazone.  fdvola  rdna.  virtu 

Romans.    The  hatred   of  the   enemies.     The    poets  of  (the) 
Romdno.  odio  nemico.  poeta 

Latium. 
Isizio. 

He  gave  praise  to  the  valiant,*  consolation  to  the  infirm,* 
—    Dava    lode  valente,         conforto  infer  mo, 

example  to  all.*    He  has  bought  the  horse  of  the  prince  for 
essmpio         tutto.     —    Ha  comprdto         cavdlLo  principe  per 

a    small    sum     of    money.      (The)    fortune     is     sometimes 
piccolo,  somma  da.na.ro .  fortuna       e    gudlche  volta 

who   deserve 
che    meritano 

a    better    fate.      He    proposed    the     model    of   the    future 
miglitir  sdrte.       —       Propose  modillo  avvenire2 

government,    avoiding     all     the     things,   which  had     I 

governo1,       scanzdndo    tutte  cosa,        che  erano    \ 

lately     displeased.        The       prince      took       the      public 
frescamente  spiaciute.  principe      tdlse          4      publiciG 

books      I  from      the         hands    I    of     the     I  questors,      and 
tibro^  di  mdno1    \        di2  \  questdre3,         e 

I  entrusted  I     them    I   to  the   praetors. 
diede  cura2  \       nel      \  pretore. 

The    cries  and  (the)  bowlings  of  the  ravages    spread    (the) 
strido    e  urlo  salvdgio  spdrsero 

-  terror  among  the   Europeans.      Thousands   of   people,    who 
terrore  Europto.  Migliaio  ginte,       che 

were  present  at    the    speech  of  Regulus    to  the    Romans, 
erano  pres  nti    a  orazicne  Regolo  Romano, 

*  To   the  valiant^  to  the  infirm,  tt  all,  here  used  in  the  plural  number. 


unjust    towards  (some)     unhappy    creatures, 
ingiusta    verso       alciini  infelice. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


61 


wept ;     and    he    departed    to    return    to    Carthage,    as     he 
pidnsero ;  ed  egli    partissi    per  ritorndre        Cartdgine,  come    — 

had    promised,    amidst    the    acclamations   of  the    multitude. 
Gva  promesso,       fra  acclamazione  moltitudine. 

Thetis,  wishing    to  render  Achilles  invulnerable,  dipped  him 
Tetide,   bramdndo  di  rtndere    Jlchille    i-nvulnerdbile,  immerse?  lol 


in  the   river    Styx,    holding  him   by     one    I  of  his 


heels. 


fiiime    Siige,     tenendo^^lo    per     uno     \   delle     calcdgno. 

They    conducted     him   to  the    spot,  and    by    threats     and 
condussercfi     Lol  sito,      e      eon    mindccia    t 

promises  they    disposed     him  to  ascend  the  walls. 
promessa  disposero^     lol     a    salirc  miiro. 


He    led     into  |    the  field  twelve  hundreds  of  buffaloes,  nine 
—   Mend       a     \          cdmpo  dodici    centindio  di      lufala,     nove 

hundred     cows,    many   calves,    and  over  a     thousand  hogs. 
cento        vdcca,    assdi2  vitelld1,      e      oltre    a         mille      porco. 

She    had     I  her  I  cheeks    all    burnt  by  the  many    tears    she 
-  Jlveva    I    le    \  gudncia,  tutte    arse    per        molte  Idgrima    — 


had  shed.       Weeping,  she  I  fell 

--  —  .      Piangendo,   —    J  si  Lascio  cadert2 

and    humbly         asked     |  his        pardon 

perdondnzcfi 


auu.      nuifiuiy  aoivcu.        /  ma 

ed    umilmtntc      domando^  \  gli* 


feet, 
piede4. 


at   I  his 
a'3  '\glii 

for  I  (the)       past 
dil  \      3    passdti* 


injuries. 
oltrdggio.3 

book, 


in  ON   city    of  Lycia,  a 
in        citta,    di    Libia, 


There    was     found 
Si  trovo 

which     had     brass    leaves,  - —  (the)  leaves   of   brass. 
che        avca     — : —  foglio  rdme. 

Calandrino    waited    all    the     following     evening    with     his 


Calandrmo       stette     tidta 


contrivances     to 
artificio        per 


catch 
piglidre 


vegnente2 

bat. 
vispistrdllo. 


serai 


con     snot- 


ANALOGY. 


CHAPTER   III. 

ADJECTIVE  NOUNS  —  COMPARATIVES  AND 
SUPERLATIVES. 

ITALIAN  Adjectives  end  with  one  of  the  vowels,  o,  a,  e. 

GENDER. 

Adjectives  ending  in  0,  are  masculine,  and  become 
feminine  by  changing  o  into  a  ;  as, 

virtuoso,  )  Yimous  •          \  uomo  virtuoso,  m.,  virtuous  man  ; 
virtues  A,  $  \fanciullA    virtuo'sA,  f.,    virtuous 

[young  woman  : 

sinctro,   ?  sincere,  ^  amo'rE  sinctro,  m.,  sincere  love  ; 

sincerA,    \      blameless  ;  \  naturA  sinctrA,  f.,  blameless  na- 

[ture. 


Adjectives  ending  in  e,  are  of  the  common  gender  ;  as,J 

f  modo  cortisE,  m,,  courteous 
,  m.  &  f-.courteous  ;  j  &n^A  ^^  ^  cofeouf  ' 
\  ••  [soul:  ; 

L  consigUo  fedelEj  m.,  faithful 

,  m.  &  f.,  faithful  ;  [counsel;^ 

(  guidAfedelE,  f.,  faithful  guide. 


FORMATION    OF    THE    PLURAL. 

Adjectives  ending  in  o,  e,  form  the  plural  by  chang- J 
ing  o,  e,  into  i  ;  as, 

$piactrE  ameno,  s.,  delightful  pleasure  ;,j 
{ludghi  amtni,  p.,  delightful  places  : 

.     .  Cg-en^E  prudtntE,  s.,      prudent  people ; 

/'  c  Pru<^en^  5       i  uomini  prudtnti,  p.  m.,    prudent  men  ;^ 
^li>  )  (  vtrgim  prudenti,  p.  f.,  prudent  virgins. 


ADJECTIVES.  63 

The  adjective  bello,  '  handsome',  '  beautiful',  before  nouns  be- 
ginning with  s  followed  by  another  consonant,  z,  or  a  vowel,  makes 
bcgli  in  the  plural ;  as, 

leG-Li  spdcchi,  beautiful  mirrors ; 

Sec  LI  zaffiri,  beautiful  sapphires  ; 

team  occhi,  beautiful  eyes. 


Adjectives  ending  in  a,  form  the  plural  by  changing  a 
into  e  ;  as, 


preziosA,    )         .  $  g-iw  A  prezwsA,  s.,  precious  jewel; 

preziosE,    $  p  '   J  pi^^rE  preziosE,  p.,  precious  stones. 


Adjectives  ending  in  co,  ^*o;  ca,  ga  ;  do,  gio  ;  cia, 
gia ;  cftto,  g"Aio,  glio  ;  and  io,  in  the  singular,  follow, 
in  the  plural,  the  rules  already  given  for  the  formation 
of  the  plural  of  Substantives. 


AGREEMENT     OF     ADJECTIVES. 

Italian  adjectives  agree  with  their  substantives  in  gen- 
der and  number ;  as, 

uomo  dotto  ed  ammaestralo,        a  learned  and  well-instructed 

man ; 

bwhiA.  e  virtuosA  glnfe*  good  and  virtuous  people  ; 

valordsi  udmini,   btllE  donnE,    brave  men,,  fair  women,  pretty 
leggiddn  gifoam,  youths. 


EXAMPLES. 

Grdnde  intendimento  e  quello  Great  is   the  understanding 

(Cun  UOMO  VIRTUOSO,   come  fu  of  a  virtuous  man,  as  he  was. 
costui.  (Fr.  Sacch.  n.  75.) 

La  Sibilla  e  bellzssima '  FAN-  The   Sibyl  is  a   very  beauti- 

ciULLA,i£ne  alletata,  e  VIRTUO-  ful  young  woman,    well  bred, 

SA.     (Lasc.Sibill.il.)  and  virtuous. 


64 


ANALOGY. 


Sia  manifesto,  la  dcmenza,  c 

SINCERO     AM6RE,    che  U  dcttO  re 

portava  al  nostro  comune.  (Giov. 
Till.  1.  1.  c.  2.) 

Questa  NATURA  al  stio  fai- 
tdre  uriita, —  Qualfu  crcdta,  fu 
SINCERA  e  buona.  (Dant.  Par/7) 

O  ANIMA    CORTESE    MantOTa- 

na.  (Dant .  Inf.  2.) 

In  dubbio  stdto  si  FEDEL 
COXSIGLIO.  (Petr.  c.  49.) 

Prese  a  persuader  Tibirio, 
ch'  e'  rivesse  fuori  di  PKmat  in 
LU6GHI  AME5I.  (Day.  Tac.  am. 
4.  95.) 

Laonde,  secJndo  chr  w  posso 
far  congkiettura,  chc  e  quillu 
eke  i  PRUDENTI  UOMINI  chidma- 
no  indovindre,  tu  mostri  d'essere 
innamordta  agramente.  (Firenz. 
Asin.  150.) 

Vtrgine  saggia,  e  del  Id 
numero  una — Delte  be&te  VER- 
GINI  PRUDENTI.  (Petr.  c.  49.) 

In  me  movindo  de>  BEULI 
occnri  rdi — Crin  d'  amor  pen- 
sflcri.  (Petr.  s.  9.) 

E  trovo  in  quella  cdssa  moltc 
FREZi6sE  PIETHE,  e  legate,  & 
sciolte.  (Bocc.  g.  2  n.  4.) 

Rice  HI  dttlc  prede  de'  Fio- 
rcntini.  (Giov. V ill.  1.  9.  e.  320.) 

4 

Molti  cherici,  eziandio  da  LUN- 
GHE  parti,  cominciarono  a  ve- 
nire al  servo  di  Dw.  (Vit.  S. 
Giov.  Gualb.  295.) 

D'un  medcsmo  peccdto  al 
'/nando  LERCI.  (Dant.  Inf.  15.) 

Qite/Ze  drche  d'argcnto. — Chc 
stinieresti  pieno  di  tesoro,— 
Sporte  son  piene  di  vesciche 
r.uor.  (Tass.  Am.  1.2.) 


Let  the  clemency,  and  sin- 
cere love,  which  the  said  king 
bore  to  our  community,  be 
manifest. 

This  nature  with  its  Maker 
thus  conjoined, — Created  first 
was  blameless,  and  good. 

O  courteous  Mantuan  soul. 


In  a  doubtful  condition  so 
faithful  counsel. 

He  undertook  to  persuade 
Tiberius,  that  he  should  live  in 
some  delightful  place,  ont  of 
Rome. 

Therefore,  as  far  as  I  can 
conjecture,  which  is  what  pru- 
dentmen  call  to  guess,  you  ap- 
pear to  be  greatly  in  love. 


Wise  Virgin,  and  one  of  the 
beautiful  number  of  the  blessec 
prudent  virgins. 

Turning  the  .beams  of  her 
beautiful  eyes  to  me,  creates 
thoughts  of  love. 

And  she  found  in  that  chest 
many  precious  stones,  some 
set,  and  some  not  set. 

Enriched  with  the  booty  of 
the  Florentines. 

Many  clergymen,  even  from 
distant  parts,  began  to  come  to 
see  the  servant  of  God. 


By  one  same  sin  polluted  in 
the  world. 

Those  chests  of  silver,  which 
you  would  imagine  to  be  filled, 
with  treasures,  are  baskets  fill- 
ed with  empty  bladders. 


COMPARATIVES. 


Cost  per  li  gran  SAVJ  si  con- 
jessa, — Chela  Femce  muore,  e 
poi  rindsce.  (Dant.  Inf.  24.) 

UOMO   DOTTO  delle  scritture, 

ED  'AMMAESTRATO  dtlld  fide   dt 

Crzsto.      (Add.    Cavalc.     Att. 
Apost.  113.) 

Mia  sorella  e  quest  a — Ndta  di 

BU6NA      E       VIRT06SA        GENTE. 

(Arios.  Fur.  18.  82.) 

Qudnti    VALOROSI     UOMINI, 
qudnte    BELLE    D6NNE,    qudnti 

LEGGIADRJ  GI(SvANI,    la  SGTOj  V6- 

'  gnente,  nelV  dltro  mondo  cendro- 
no  con  li  loro  passdti !    (Bocc. 

Intr.) 


So  mighty  sages  tell,  that  the 
Phoenix  dies,  and  springs  forth- 
with renascent. 

A  man  learned  in  Holy 
Writ,  and  well  instructed  in 
the  Christian  faith. 


This    is  my   sister,  born  of 
good  and  virtuous  people. 


How  many  brave  men,  how 
many  fair  women,  how  many 
pretty  youths,  the  coming 
evening,  supped  in  the  other 
world  with  their  departed 
friends  ! 


COMPARATIVE 

Comparatives  are  generally 
the  adjective  or  positive  the  adverb  pia,  ' 
press  a  relation  of  superiority  :  meno,  '  less',  to  express 
a  relation  of  inferiority  :  and  si  or  cost;  *  so',  tanto, '  so', 
c  so  much' ;  quanto,  i  as', ;  as  much' ;  quanto  piu,  *  the 
more' ;  quanto  meno,  '  the  less' ;  altrettdnto,  'as',  f  as 
much' ;  to  express  a  relation  of  equality,  between  the 
objects  compared  $  as, 


-  litto,        happy  : 

PIU  LIETO, 

more  happy  ; 

(dtera,      proud  ; 

MENO  ALTERA, 

less  proud  ; 

bella,        beautiful  ; 

si  or  co  si  BELLA, 

so  beautiful  ; 

sdno,        healthy  ; 

TANTO  8  A  NO, 

so  healthy; 

famoso,    famous  : 

QUANTO  FAM6SO3 

as  famous; 

altitroj     proud  ; 

QUANTO  PIU  ^.LTIERO, 

the  more  proud  ; 

nocente,   guilty  ; 

QUANTO  MENO  NocENTE,  the  less  guilty  ; 

contenti,  pleased  ;  < 

TKIVTI.  ( 

as  much  pleased. 

Comparatives  of  superiority  and  inferiority  generally 
require  before  the  second  of  the  objects  compared,  or, 
what  is  the  same,  the  second  term  of  comparison,  the 


<tf  ANALOGY. 

preposition  di,  c  than',  if  it  be  a  substantive  noun  or  pro- 
noun, or  a  numeral  adjective  ;  and  the  conjunction  die. 
4  than',  if  it  be  any  other  adjective,  a  verb,  or  an  ad- 
verb ;*  as, 

FIU  lieto  DI  ME,  more  happy  than  I ; 

MEN  bello  DEL  viso.  less  beautiful  than  the  face  ; 

FIU  DI  M!LLE  scogli.  more  than  a  thousand  rocks  ; 

PIU  f6rte  C:;E  SAVIO,  more  strong  than  wise  ; 

non  MENO  odorifere  CHE  >  not  less  odoriferous  than  are  the 
siENoZe  sptzie,  $  drugs ; 

PIU  Mlla  CHE  MAI,  more  handsome  than  , ever. 

Sometimes  these  comparatives  are  formed  by  the  adverbs  meglio. 
'  better',  and  peggio.  c  worse' :  and  then  they  always  require  dit  or 
che>  before  the  second  term  of  comparison  ;  according  to  the  gen- 
eral rule  ;*  as. 

MEGLTO    D5  ALTiir.    diccimilia  better  than  another  ten  thou- 

dobbre,  sand  pistoles  ; 

rtina    dellc    PE'jeio    maritdtc  one  of  the  worst-married  that 

CHE  sf  A,  there  is. 

Very  often  the  second  term  of  comparison  is  a  verb  understood 
or  $  pronoun  and  a  verb,  and  then  this  second  term  of  comparison 
always  requires  che  before  it;  as. 

scorgevasi  PIU  pom-pa  CHE  ,  there  was  perceived  more 
[scorg£vasi]  Icalta,  pomp  than  sincerity. 

PIU  bclla  CHE  [(•']  iina  lamia.  more  beautiful  than  a  lamia. 

scappo  PEGGIO  CHE   [scappa]  he  ned  worse  (more  violent- 

un  toro.  ly)  than  a  bull : 

inttndi   MEGLIO    CH'   io   non  thou      understandest    better 

RAGioNOj  than  I  can  speak  ; 

•'«  This,  however,  is  not  without  exception,  as  we  not  seldom  meet,  in  the 
Classics,  with  expressions  similar  to  these  ; 

U'na  donna  PIU  bella  assdi  CHE   'L  A  woman^a  great  deal  more  bean- 

SOLB.    (Petr.  c.  24.)  tiful  than  the  sun. 

Reputiamci  w6No   care  CHE  TUTTE  Do  we-consider  ourselves  less  dear 

Z'  nitre  .*     (Bocc.  Introd.)  than  all  the  others  ? 

To  so  M£GLIO  CHE  SLTRO  iidmofar  1  know  how  to  do  what  I  wish,  be'  - 

«td  cfte  io  t>6glio.    (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.)  ter  than  any  other  man. 


COMPARATIVES. 


67 


Comparatives  of  equality  always  require  before  the 
second  term  of  comparison  another  adverb  correlative  to 
that  by  which  they  are  formed.  Thus, 


si  or  cosij      so,  as  ;            ^        (  come,                   as  ; 

tdnto,            so,   so  much  ; 

j  qudnto,                 as  ; 

qudnto,         as,   as  much  ; 
quanta  piu,  the  more  ; 

g   1  tdnto, 
•§   i  tdnto  piii,  or 
:  g*  \  tdnto  mtno, 

as  ; 
the  more,  or 
the  less  ; 

qudnto  mtno,  the  le"ss  ; 

**  I  tdnto  mtno,  or 
j  tdnto  piu, 

the  less,  or 
the  more  ; 

ultrettanto,    as,   asmuch;^ 

(  qudnto.  or  come,  as  : 

"si  lieta  COME  lella, 
TANTO  sdno  QUANTO  zo, 

quANT.o    [6gli]    era  fanwso, 
TANTO  [ella]  £ra  bellissima, 

QtlANTO     PIU     dltitro,     TANTO 

MENO  amdto, 

3IEN0  noctntt)  TANTO 


ALTRETTANTO  COntentl,    COME 

se  fosse  venvto  il  Diica, 


as  glad  as  fair ; 

as  healthy  or  strong  as  I ; 

as  much  as  he  was  famous, 
she  was  beautiful ; 

the  more  proud,  the  less  be- 
loved ; 

the  less  guilty,  the  more  im- 
patient; 

as  pleased  as  if  the   Duke 
had  come. 


Sometimes  come, l  as  ',  and  qudle,  l  as ',  'like.9,  are  used  to  form 
these  comparatives,  and  then  they  require  the  correlatives  cosi, 
'  thus  ',  and  tale,  (  such  '  ;  as. 


COME  il  f red  do  mi  offese,  cosi  il 
cdldo  mi  fa  noia,  * 

<U?ALE  [colpo]  adino  dd  in  pa- 
rtte,  TAL  [colpo]  riceve. 


as  the  cold  injured  me,  thus 
the  heat  annoys  me  ; 

the  ass  who  kicks  against  the 
wall,  receives  such  a  blow  as 
he  gives. 

Tdnto,  qudnto,  altrettdnto^   and   qudle,    and    their    correlatives, 
sometimes  are  made  to  agree  with  the  nouns  with  which  they  are 

^i.-.c-d  j  as. 

as  many  times  as  ; 

as  many  as  they  see,  so  many 
they  desire ;  , 

fifty  Paternosters,  and  as  many 
Ave-Marias ; 

paid  in  such  money,  as  the 
provisions  had  been  sold  for. 


qudntr., 

qudntE   NE   veggono.  tdntx 
desiderano, 

cinqudnta  Paterndstri,  e  altret- 
td  - 


pagdto  di  tdlv  moneti,  qudh  le 
derrdtr.  erano  state  rcndt'ite, 


- 


'ANALOGY. 


Often  the  adverbs  cosl  and  tdnto  are  suppressed,  and 
the  comparative  is  formed  by  the  use  of  their  correlatives 
only ;  as, 

Tcosi]  bianco  COME  we're,  white  as  snow ; 


fattenderb  [tanto]  QUANT o 


I  will  wait  for  thee  as  long 
as  thou  wishest. 


To  increase  or  diminish  the  force  of  comparatives, 
we  make  use  of  the  adverbs  troppo,  molto  or  assai,  or 
via  or  vie, <  far',  '  much,'  or  '  a  great  deal',  before  piu, 
and  meno  ;  as,  troppo,  motto,  or  assai  piu —  via  or  vie 
ply,, '  much,'  or  <  a  great  deal  more  '  ;  troppo,  molto,  or 
assai  meno  —  via  or  vie  meno,  '  much '  or  '  a  great  deal 
less '  ;  as, 

TROPPO  PIU  "bella,  a  great  deal  more  beautiful ; 

MOLTO  PIU  core,  much  more  dear  : 

ASSAI  PIU  lucente*  far  more  bright ; 

V!E  PIU  forte,  a  great  deal  more  strong  ; 

MOLTO  MEN  fo'rti.  much  less  able. 


EXAMPLES. 


Iiu  rividi  piu  Leila  c  MENO 
ALTERA.  (Petr.s.261.) 

JVessun  tisse  giammdi  riu 
BI  ME  LIETO.  (Petr.  c.  7.) 

Dek !  senonhdi  BEI^  viso  it 
cor  .MEN  BELLOW  (Ariost:  Fur. 
c.  4.) 

E  sperdndo  venire  in  miglwr 
porio — Poi  mi  condussc  in  PIII 
DIMII.LE  scdGM.  (Petr.  c.  21.) 

Sapvidte  che  guellecdmere  s6- 

nO  NON    MENOr    ADORIFERE,  CHE 
S1ENO    i     LOSSOU     rft'?LE     S  FEZ  IE 

delta  vostra  lottega.    (Bocc.  g. 
8.  n.  9.) 

Saro  PIU  CITE  MAI  BELLA. 
(Petr.) 

Quello,     che     vdlse    MEGLIO 

IV    ALTRE     DIECIMILIA    DOBBRE. 

(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 


I  saw  her  again,  more  beau- 
tiful and  legs  proud. 

None  ever  lived  more  happy 
than  I. 

Ah !  if  thou  hast  not  aj 
heart  less  beautiful  than  thy 
face. 

And  hoping  to  come  to  a  bet-; 
ter  harbor,  he  conducted  me  up- 
on more  than  a  thousand  rocks. 

Know  that  those  chambers, 
are  not  less  odoriferous,  than 
are  the  boxes  of  drugs  jn  yourj 
shop. 

1  shall  be  more  beautiful  •< 
than  ever. 


That,  which  was  more  valu- 
able than  another  ten  thousand 
pistoles. 


COMPARATIVES. 


16  son  pur  TJNA  DELLE  PEG- 
t;io  MARITATE  femine  che  sia 
etl  mondo.  (Firenz.  Lye.  4.  1.) 

SCORGEVASI  in  questo  parldre 
di  Tib6rio  PIU  POMPA  CHE  LE- 
ALTA.  (Dav.  Ann.  Tac.l.  1.) 

E'lla  e  una  giovane  quaggiu 
che  e  PIU  BELLA  CHE  TJNA  LA- 
MIA. (Bocc/g.  9.  n.  5.) 

PEGGIO  CHE  UN  TORO  SCAFFO 
dcAV  altar  e.  (Dav.  Storie.) 

•Se'  sdvio'E  'NTENDI  ME'  CH'I' 
NON  RAGIONO.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

Vdltaver  me  si  LIETA  COME 
BELLA.  (Dant.  Par.  2.) 

Sew  avessi  co  si  BELL  A  COTTA 
COME  ELLA.  (Nov.  ant.  25.) 

TANTO  il  fdccia  Dw  SANO 
delle  rtni  GIUANTO  io.  (Bocc.) 

CluANTO  trd*  cavalier i  ERA 
il  Marchese  FAMOSO,  TANTO  la 
d6nna  tra  tutte  V  dltre  ddnne  del 
mondo  ERA  BELLISSIMA.  (Bocc. 
g.  l.n.5.) 

TANTO  ,PIU  cieco  son  w  di  te 
Q.U \NTOPiusdnoamante.  (Guar. 
Past.  Fid.  3.  3.) 

E'ssa   TANTO     PIU    IMPAZIEN- 

TjLmente   sosteneva  questa  noia 

duANTO  MENO  SI   SCntlVd  NOCEN- 

TE.  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  5.) 

Delia  vcnuta  de*  cavalieri,  i 
Fiorentinifurono  ALTRETTANTO 

CONTENTI,  COME  SE  FOSSE  VENU- 

TO  IL  DTJCA  inpersona.  (Giov. 
Till.  1.  10.) 

Demetrio,  ndstro  amico,  su6l 
dire,  che  ALTRETTANTO  gli  e  del- 
le parole  dellafdlle  gentc,  auAN- 
TO  d&  sudni  che  fa  il  vento.  (Sen. 
fist.) 


I  am  indeed  one  of  the  worst- 
married  women  in  the  world. 


There  was  perceived. in  this 
speech  of  Tiberius  more  pomp 
than  sincerity. 

There  is  a  young  woma» 
here  below  more  beautiful  than 
a  lamia. 

He  fled  from  the  altar  worse 
(more  violently)  than  a  bull. 

Thou  art  wise,  and  under - 
standest better  than  I  can  speak. 

Turning  to  me  with  aspect 
as  glad  as  fair. 

If  I  had  so  beautiful  a  dress 
as  she. 

May  God  make  him  as  strong 
in  his  loins  as  I  am. 

As  much  as  the  Marquis  was 
famous  among  the  knights,  the 
lady  was  beautiful  among  the 
other  ladies. 


I  am  as  much  more  blind  than 
thou  as  I  am  more  enamoured. 


She  rbore  this  vexation  so 
much  the  more  impatiently, 
the  less  she  felt  guilty. 

The  Florentines  were  as 
pleased  with  the  arrival  of  the 
knights,  as  if  the  Duke  had 
come  in  person. 


Demetrius,  our  friend,  used 
to  say,  that  it  happens  with  th« 
words  of  foolish  persons,  as  it 
does  with  the  sounds  which  the 
wind  makes. 


70 


ANALOGY. 


£  COME     It      troppo     FREDDO 

{•aista  notte  MI  OFFESE.  cosi  it 
CALDOyi'incominciaa  TAT  gran- 
dissima  NOT  A.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

Assai  dee  bastare  a  clascuno, 

St  'ClUALE  ASINO  DA  IN  PARETE, 

TAL  RICEVE',  senza  volere  dltre 
ingiuridre.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  8.) 


TANTE  VOLTE  Q.UANTE  etla 
nclla  memdria  mi  vitne.  (Bocc. 
Filoe.) 

.Yon  s6no  i  giovani  d1  unci^ 
eontenti,  ma  GIVANTE  NE  TEG- 

C-OSa,     TANTE     NE    DESIDERANO. 

(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7-3 

La  mattina  si  vudle  ariddre  dl- 
tachiesa,  e  quivi  dire  CINQCAN- 
TA  PATERNOSTRI  E  ALTRET- 

TANTE      AvEMARlE.        (BoCC.  g. 

3.n.  4.) 

Videsi  DI  TAL  MONETA  PAGA- 

TO,    aUALI    LE    DERRATE  ERANO 
?TATE     VBNDtJTE.       (BoCC.  g.  6. 

ft.  5.) 

Un  vestimento  di  lino  sottilis- 
simoj  e  BIANCO  COME  NEVE. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  6  ) 

I'p  volentieri  —  T'  ATTENDE- 
RO  auANTo  vroi.  (MaiF.  Mer. 

4.2.) 

TROPPO  Fill  BELLA  gli  pdrVt ':. 

che  stimdto  non  avea.  (Bocc.  g. 

7.n.7.) 

MOLTO  piu  belle  e  _PIU  CARE, 
che  ndinon  sidmo.(Bdcc.  Intr.) 

Ond'  ella  Jessi  —  LUCENTE 
Flu  ASSAI  di  qitel  cfc  dV  era. 
(Dant,  Par.  5.) 

Vedi  Sansone — VIE  PIU  FOR- 
TE CHE  SAVIO.  (Petr.Tr.  Amor.) 

E'lle  s6no  MOLTO  MEN  FO:ITI 
$he  gli  udmini  a  sostenere. 
(Bocc.  Introd.) 


And  as  the  excessive  cold 
last  night  injured  me,  thus  the 
heat  begins  now  to  annoy  me 
greatly. 

It  ought  to  be  quite  sufficient 
for  any  one,  that  '  the  ass  who  j 
kicks  against  the  wall,  receives 
such  a  blow,  as  he  gives,'  with- 
out wishing  to  cause  any  far- 
ther injury* 

As  many  times  as  she  comes 
into  my  remembrance. 


people  are  not  satisfi- 
ed with  one;  but  as  many  they 
see.  so  many  they  desire. 


In  the  morning  we  must  go 
to  church,  and  there  say  fifty 
Paternosters  and  as  many  Ave- 
Marias. 


He  saw  himself  paid  in  such 
money  as  the  provisions  had 
been  sold  for. 


A  garment  of  linen  very  fine, 
and  white  as  snow. 


I  will  wait  for  thee  willingly 
as  long  as  thou  wishest. 


She  appeared  to  him  a  great 
deal  more  beautiful  than  he 
had  imagined. 

Much  more  fair  and  much 
-more  dear,  than  we  are. 

Whence  she  became  far  more 
brisrht  than  she  had  been. 


See    Sampson  a  great    deal 
more  strong  than  wise. 

They    are    much    less    able 
than  men  to  bear. 


COMPARATIVES. 


EXERCISE    III. 

He  has  no  other — more  children  than  him.     I  know  not,  who. 
—  ha2  Mm1    —  figliuolo  lid.       —  so%    JY0n,l  chi 

could    recover    I  my   property  I  more      properly      than  thoiL 
possa    riscuotere  \    il        jfwo  convenevole  te. 

Peter,  who  had    more   desire   of  eating  than    of   sleeping", 
Pietro,    che    aviva  vdglia        mangidre  dormire, 

asked         whether  there  was   any  thing    for  I    supper.      We 


domanddva        se          vi    fosse  alcuna  cosa 


da          cena. 


are        less  powerful    than    the    Greeks,  ~they    have    more 
sidmo  podcrdso  Greco,      essi    fydnno 

bravery,  wealth,  and  wisdom  than   we.     Who  I  would   fare  I 
prodezza,    tesoro,     c        sapere  n6i.         Chi  \      starebbe 

better    than  I,    if  that    money*    were     mine  ?        In     this 
me,  se    quel    dendro      fossero      miei  ?  quests 

season    the  nights  are  longer  than  the  days.      He      began 
stagione  n6tte    sono  lungo  dl:          —    Comincw 

to     coast     along  (the)   Barbary,    robbing    every- one      who 
a   costeggidre    —  Barberia,      rubdndo      ciascuno          che 


was  less  powerful  I   than    he.       I    I  do  not 
poteva        meno  lui.  \     non 


say,  that  it 
dico,  -  che     6i 


is      not    a      sin,    but  God  pardons  |  (of)   I  greater  sins   to 
sia*  non1  —  peccdto,  ma  Iddio  perddna   \  (de})  \  grdnde    a 

him  who  I  repents  himself.        It  appeared   that    she     was 
chi        I  pente2        si.1  ' —     Parea         che     ilia    fosse 

whiter  than  (the)  snow.     She   afflicts    more  than   she   con- 
bidnco  .  n&ve.        —    rfffligge  —      con- 

soles    (not). 
sola2       won1. 

None   in    this    wretched    world  was    so   miserable   as     I 
Niuno        questo  sciagurdto   mdndo    fu  miser o  w 

am.  Am'  I     not    as    beautifulf    as  (is)    the     wife     of 

— .  sono*  i03  JVbnl  bello  sm  moglie 

Richard  ?        Who      commended     him  so    much    as    thou  ? 
Riccidrdo  ?          Chi        commendo2        il l  tu  f 

*  That  money,  in  the  plural  number. 
t  Beautiful,  in  the  feminine  gender. 


72  ANALOGY. 

The  master  gave   as  much  faith  to  the  words     of  Bruno,  as 
maestro    diede  fide  parola          Bruno, 


was 


due       I  to     any        truth.  I     began 


I  si  sarebbe  convenuta  \      qualunque  veritd.  comincidi3 

to     flee     as  much  as  I  could.      I  will   defend  her  certainly 
a4  fuggire5   l —    poteiz.     I'o  difendero^      la?  -  per  certo* 


as  much  as  I 


shall  be  able. 
potrd. 


The    more    the    heart  is    excited,    the  less   can    (the) 
cuorfr   £    commosso,  pud 

man     express  I    his        feeling.       The   more    crazy    he     is 


uomo   esprimcre  \  il  siw 


sentimenlo.  pdzzo  egli*    e1- 


than  you,  the  more  he  is  enamoured,     As  I  it    came   into    his 
rat,  —    e   innamordto .  \      gli     venne    in 

mind,      I  so  he  did.         I     wish    to    go  to  hear  (the)   mass, 
pensiero,  \       —  fece.         I'o  voglio  anddre         mtgsa, 

and  recommend    myself  to  God  as  much  as  I    can. 
e     raccomdndar^mi  Dio —  posso. 


I    His, 
I  La  sua 

joyful. 
allegro. 


presence  J  will  make  it  appear  to  us  i  much    more 
presenza  \  celo  fard  parere 

For  I  (the)  which  object  (the)  fortune  was  |  a  great 
A    J  qudle    oggetto  for  tuna  fu2 


deal  more  I   propitious  to  him.      This    family   is  far  greater^ 
3      J    propizia*         gli-1     Questo  famiglia  e  grdndej^ 

and  a  great  deal  more  known.        A  great  deal  more  pure 
conosciuta.  pura 

than     a      white      dove. 
Candida  Colombo, . 


SUPERLATIVES. 

Relative  superlatives  are  formed  by  prefixing  the 
article*  il,  i  or  li,  '  the',  for  the  masculine,  and  la,  h\ 
'  the',  for  the  feminine,  to  the  comparative  ;  as, 

piu  forte,       more  strong ;       IL  piu  forte,       the  most  strong ;  ; 
piii  vezzosi,  more  graceful ;    i  piii  vezzosi,     the  most  graceful ; 
mtnofresca,  less  fresh  ;          «A  meno  fresca,  the  least  fresh  ; 
piu  belle,       more  beautiful ;  LE  piu  belk,       the  most  beautiful. 


SUPERLATIVES.  73 

When  these  superlatives  are  followed  by  a  second 
term  of  comparison,  and  this  is  a  noun  or  a  pronoun, 
they  require  the  prepositions  di,  i  of  or  in  ';  fra  or  tra, 
'  amongst'  ;  after  them  ;  as, 

il  piii  forte  DI  TUTTJ  gli        the  strongest  of  all  men  ; 
uomini, 

i   piu    vezzdsi  fanciulli        the  most  graceful   children  in 
DEL  HONDO,  the  world  ; 

il  piu  perfttto  TRA  TANTI,        the   most  perfect  amongst   so 

many. 

If  the  second  term  is  a  verb,  the  superlative  requires 
the  conjunction  che,  c  that'  ;  after  it  ;  as, 

ilpiufelice  CHE'SI  TROVI         the  happiest  man  that  can  be 
sotto  le  stille,  found  under  the  stars  ; 

il  piu  sdvio  uomo    CHE         the  wisest  man  ever  was  in  the 
FOSSE  al  mondo,  world. 

When  the  object  compared,  or  the  first  term  of  com- 
parison, precedes  the  superlative,  the  article  of  this 
superlative  is  generally  suppressed  ;  as, 

iljwre  [il]  piu  bello,  the  most  beautiful  flower; 

/'  eta  [la]  menfr&sca,  the  least  fresh  age. 

Absolute  superlatives  are  formed  by  changing  the  last 
vowel  of  the  plural  of  adjectives,  into  issimo  for  the 
masculine,  and  into  issima  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 

Ulhy      beautiful  ;  bellissmo,     very  beautiful  ; 

HCC&E,    rich  ;  n'ccMssiMA,  very  rich  ; 

JMk,    faithful; 


A  few  adjectives  take  the  termination  errimo,  for  the 
masculine,  and  errima,  for  the  feminine,  in  their  super- 
lative ;  as, 

ceZe&re,    celebrated;  ccZcfeERRiMO,   very  celebrated; 

salubre,  wholesome  ;  sa/w&ERRiMA,  very  wholesome  ; 

dcre,        severe  ;  «CERRIMO,       very  severe. 

7 


74  ANALOGY. 

These  superlatives  may  be  also  formed  by  prefixing 
the  adverbs  troppo,  molto,  or  assai,  '  very5,  to  the  posi- 
tive ;  as, 

pitne,    full ;  TROPPO  piene,  very  full ; 

rtire,      rare ;  MOLTO  rare,     very  rare ; 

vicini,   near;  ASSAI  vicim,      very  near: 

Or  by  making  use  of  such  expressions  as,  sopra  ogni 
dltro,  £  above  every  other  one' ;  stnza  modo,  *  exceed- 
ingly' ;  senza  fine,  c  extremely' ;  fuor  di  misura,  {  be- 
yond measure' ;  &c. ;  as, 

SOPRA  OGNI  ALTRo/eJice,  happy  above  every  other  one ; 

grosso  SENZA  MODO,  exceedingly  coarse  ; 

bedta  SENZA  F!NE,  extremely  blessed ; 

doUnte  FUOR  DI  MISURA,  grieved  beyond  measure. 

Very  often  we  form  them  by  repeating  the  adjective  ; 
as, 

vivo,        lively ;  vivo  vivo,  very  lively ; 

piccino,  small ;  piccino  PICCINO,  very  small ; 

lenta,      slow ;  Unta  LENTA,         very  slow. 

To  increase  the  force  of  superlatives,  we  use  the 
adverbs, piu9  '  more';  molto,  '  much';  tanto,  '  so  much'; 
before  them ;  and  sometimes  we  raise  the  repeated 
adjective  to  the  superlative  degree  ;*  as, 

piti  nobiHssimo,  very  noble  ; 

MOLTO  bellissima,  extremely  beautiful ; 

T^NTO  bellissima,  so  very  beautiful ; 

grdndi  GRANDISSIMI,  exceedingly  great. 

There  are  a  few  adjectives,  which  beside  their  regular 


*  This  form  of  expression  ia  found  in  the  earlier  classics,  though  very  seldom 
adopted  by  modern  writers. 


SUPERLATIVES. 


75 


Italian  form,  retain  in  the  comparative  and  superlative 
degree  the  irregular  form  which  they  have  in  Latin  ;  as, 


buono,       \piuluono, 

[good;}orMiGLi6RE, 
cattivo,      ]piucattivo, 


bonissimo, 


J  cattivissimo, 
\  or  PESSIMO, 

\ 


beflt. 
b< 

worst  . 
W 


to  which  may  be  added, 


suPERi6RE,  superior; 
INFERIORE,    inferior; 


INFIMO,        lowest. 


EXAMPLES. 


Raccontano  ancora,  die  tra 
lorofu  E'rcole,  IL  piu  FORTE  DI 
TIJTTI  GLI  UOMINI.  (Day.  Tac. 
Germ.) 

E'ran  i  piu  belli,  e  i  PIU  VEZ- 
zosi  FANCIIJLLI  DEL  HONDO. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.) 

E  di  tdrtole  ho  preso  una 
nidmta  —  LE  PIU  BELLE  del 
mondo.  (Bocc.  Amet.  15.) 

TRA  TANTI,  e  si  Hi  xolti  IL 
PIU  PERFETTO.  (Petr.  B.  201.) 


.They  relate  also,  that  among 
them  was  Hercules,  the  strong- 
est  of  all  men. 


•*.  They  were  the  most  beau- 
tiful  and  the  most  graceful 
children  in  the  world. 

And  I  have  taken  a  nest-full 
of  turtles,  the  most  beautiful  in 
the  world. 

The  most  perfect  amongst  so 
many,  and  so  beautiful  coun- 
tenances. 


*  From  these  two  comparatives  are  derived  the  substantives  maggidre  and 
mindre,  which,  used  in  the  plural,  are  equivalent  —  maggi6rit  to  'parents',  *  ances- 
tors', 'superiors';  —  mmdri,  to  'inferiors';  as, 


a'    su6i     MAUGIUUI  ;          Disobedient  to  his  parents. 


Who  were  thy  ancestors? 

Therefore  he  neither  treats  with 
due  reverence  his  superiors,  nor 
with  due  mildness  his  inferiors. 


Disubbidiente 
(Pass.) 

Chi  fur  li  MAGGIOR  tudi?  (Dant. 
Int.  10.) 

E  perd  non  rtndc  debita  reverenza  alii 
MAGOIORI,  nd  debita  mansuetudine 
alii  MiN6m.  (Bocc,  Com.  Dant. 
Inf.  8.) 


ANALOGY. 


Sard  IL  nu  FELfcE,  e  con- 
lento  urfmOf  CHE  si  TR6vi  SOTTO 
LE  STELLE.  (Macch.  Com.) 

E'gli  era  IL  rm  SAVIO,  cd  il 

piu    avveduto  UOMO    CHE     AL 

MONDO  FOSSE.  (Bocc.  ff.  10.  n. 
10.) 

IL  FIORE  PIU  BELLO  delV  eta 
nostra.  (Lod.  Mart.  Rim.) 

Quel  fudco,  ch'io  pensdi,  eke 
fosse  spento — Da  L'ETA.  MEN 
FRESCA.  (Petr.  c.  13.) 

Assdi  sostenne — Per  BELLIS- 
SIMO  amor  quisti  al  suo  tempo. 
(Petr.  s.  172.) 

Fdtta  fare  una  RICCHISSIMA 
corona  d'oro  e  dipietre  prezidse, 
per  corondrsi  re  di  Lombardia. 
(Giov.  Vill.l.  11.  c.  76.) 

Per  la  loro  singoldr  pietd 
verso  questa  Santa  St=de,  e  verso 
tutti  ndij  suoi  FEDELISSIMI  ser- 
vitdri.  (Casa,  lett.  23.) 

Archita,  ingegner  CELEBER- 
HIMO  tra  gli  antichi.  C^egn. 
Crist,  instr.  3.  2.) 

H  reobdrbaro  si  e  loro  medi- 
cina  SALUBERRIMA.  (Tratt. 
segr.  cos.  dorm.) 

11  Duca  di  Ghelderi,  ACCER- 
RIMO  nimico  suo.  (Guicc.  Stor. 
6-) 

JVe  dubito  punto  die  non  sien 
di  quelli,  che  dirdnno  le  c6se 
dette  esser  TROPPO  PIENE  di  m6t- 
ti  e  di  cidncc.  (Bocc.  Concl.) 

Son  MOLTO  RARE  a  cercdre  le 
notizie.  (Borgh.  Tosc.  352.) 

E  un  giorno,  ASSAI  VICINI 
della  camera^  sico  medesmi, 
comincidrono  a  ragiondre. 
(Bocc.  n.  1.) 


I  shall  be  the  most  happy 
and  the  most  contented  manj 
that  can  be  found  under  the 
stars. 

He  was  the  most  wise,  and 
the  most  wary  man  ever  was  in 
the  world. 

The  most  beautiful  flower  of 
our  age. 

That  fire,  which  I  thought 
would  be  extinguished  by  ma- 
turer  age. 

This  one  suffered  much  in 
his  time  for  the  love  of  a  very 
beautiful  person. 

Having  caused  to  be  made  a 
very  rich  crown  of  gold  and  of 
precious  stones,  in  order  to 
crown  himself  king  of  Lombar- 
dy. 

Through  their  singular  piety 
towards  this  Holy  See,  and  to- 
wards us  all,  its  most  faithful 
servants. 

Archytas,  a  very  celebrated 
architect  amongst  the  ancients. 

Rhubard  is  for  them  a  very 
wholesome  medicine. 


The  Duke  of  Ghelderi,  his 
most  severe  enemy. 

Nor  doubt  I  at  all,  that  there 
are  many,  who  will  say,  that 
the  things  which  1  have  said 
are  very  full  of  words  and  idle 
stories. 

News  is  very  rare  to  be 
found. 

And  one  day,  very  near  that 
room,  they  began  to'talk  among 
themselves. 


SUPERLATIVES. 


77 


JSstimdva    il    prince     SOFRA 

OGNI   ALTRO  FELICE.       (BoCC.  g. 

2.  n.  7.) 

Uomo  mater  idle,  e  G  ROSSO 
SENZA  MODO.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  6.) 

Fdmmi,  die  puoi,  ddlla  sua 
grdzia  ddgno,  SENZA  FINE  o 
BEATA.  (Petr.  c.  49.) 

DOLENTE      FUOR     DI     MISURA, 

senza  alciin  indugio,  cid  che  il 
re  domanddva  f6ce.  CBocc.  g. 
2.  n.  7.) 

Efbbe  un  cavdllo,  e  dd>  suoi 
fdnti  ilfice,  vivo  vivo  scorticdre. 
(Nov.  ant.  54.) 

Basi,  e  divento  PICCIN  picciNO. 
(Buonar.  Fier.  2.  4.) 

E'lla  sen  na  notdndo  LENTA 
LENTA.  (Dant.  Inf.  17.) 

Iddio  ftce  Vuomo  PIU  NOBI- 
LISSIMO  che  gli  dltri  animdli. 
(Crusca.) 

Vide  Vdmbra  sua  MOLTO  BEL- 
LISSIMA.  (Nov.  Ant.  43.) 

Appr6sso  i  qudli  Biancafiore 
veniva  TANTO  BELLI SSIMA,  che 
dgni  comparazidne  ci  surza 
scdrsa.  (Bocc.  Filpc.  7.) 

O'ndc  prona  nillo  stdmaco 
travdgli  GRANDI  GRANDissiMi. 
(Red.  cons.  1. 16.) 

I'o  non  potrii  tr  attar  c  per  la 
salute  d&  midifratelli  con  MAG- 
uioR  affezion  (Vdnimo,  ne  con 
MIGL.IOR  modo  di  qudllo,  che  ho 
w  trattdto.  (Casa.  lett.  21.) 

Col  PEGGIORE  spirto  di  Ro- 
mdgna — Trovdi  un  tal  di  voi, 
che  per  su'  opra — In  dnima  in 
Cocito  gid  si  bdgna.  fDant. 
Inf.  33.) 

O'nde  nel  circhio  M IN  ORE  in 
eterno  e  consunto.  (Dant.  Inf. 

11.) 


He  thought  the  prince  happy 
above  every  other  one. 

An  exceedingly  coarse  and 
uncouth  man. 

Make  me,  O  you  who  can, 
extremely  blessed  lady,  worthy 
of  his  favor. 

Grieved  beyond  measure, 
without  any  delay,  he  did  that 
which  the  king  wished. 

He  had  a  horse,  and  caused 
it  to  be  flayed  all  alive  by  his 
servants. 

He  came  near  dying,  and 
became  very  small. 

It  went  on  sailing  very  slow. 


-    God  made  man  much  more 
noble  than  the  other  animals. 

He  saw  his  shadow  extreme- 
ly beautiful. 

Next  whom  came  Biancafiore 
so  very  beautiful,  that  every 
comparison  would  fail. 


Wherefore  he  experiences 
exceedingly  great  pains  in  his 
stomach. 

I  could  not  act  for  the  wel- 
fare of  my  brothers  with  greater 
interest,  nor  in  a  better  manner 
than  that  in  which  I  have 
acted. 

In  company  with  the  worst 
spirit  of  Romagna  I  found  such 
an  one  of  you,  as,  for  his  do- 
ings, even  now  in  soul  is  plung- 
ed in  Cocytus. 

Whence  in  the  smaller  circle 
is  eternally  consumed. 

7* 


78 


ANALOGY. 


n  qudle  ddlla  pdrie  SUPERI- 
ORE  alia  INFERIORS  da  il  suo 
dolce,  e  consondntc  suono. 
(Declam.  Quintil.  C.) 

Le  vdlte  pidne  d1  OTTIMI  mni. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.) 

;    Essindo    stdto    in    mta    un 
PESSIMO  uomo.     (Bocc.  n.  1.) 

La  MASSIMA  attimtd  dd'  rdggi 
soldri.  (Sag.  Nat.  esp.) 

Le  MINIME  alterazioni  del 
frtddo.  (Sag.  Nat.  esp.) 


Which  from  the  superior  to 
the  inferior  part  gives  its  sweet 
and  harmonious  sound. 


The  cellars  full  of  the  best 
wines. 

Having    been  in  his    life  a 
very  bad  man. 

The  greatest  power   of  the 
solar  rays. 

The  smallest  alterations  of 
cold. 


EXERCISE    IV. 

Let  the   strongest   of  all  the     Romans      come     forward. 
4        5    tutto*    7      Romano*     V&nga\    inndnzi* 


The 


rostra      were      immediately      covered 
rostro3     Furond    subitamtnte5        copdrti* 


with    the 


heads  of  the  most  illustrious    patricians. 
ttschio  2      illustre*         patrizio.1 

a     short    space  of  time,   I  to    be    made 
—  piccolo  spdzio        ttmpo   \  fare 

beautiful,    and  of    the   largest,   and   of  the   richest  palaces, 
bdllo  grdnde  ricco      palagio. 


He    caused,   in 

—       Ftce, 

one   of  the    most 


which  -   had     ever    been    seen. 
fossero"  mdi1     stdti    veduti. 


I    esteem  him  the  most 
I'o     rtputo2    il1    , 


handsome,  the   most   agreeable,  the   most  graceful,  and  the 
b'UlOf  piactvole,  leggiddro, 

most  wise  knight  that  I   can    be  found  I  in  the  kingdom  of 
sdvio  cavalier  e          \  trovdr  si    possa5  \  1      redme*     3 

Prance.        He  was  the   most  amusing    man  in  the   world. 
Frdncia*        —  E'ra  sollazzdvole  uomo  rnondo. 


She    is    the   most   happy    woman    in    the    world. 
—     E1        1          3    felice*    donncfi  mondo. 


The 


planet    most    remote    from  the    earth. 
piantta  remoto  tirra. 


The  most  furious 


SUPERLATIVES 


mies  with  I  their   I  tall  persons,   and  long  spears     strik 
ico1  \  le  loro  \  alto   persona,  lungo    dsta  fediscon 


enemies 
nemico 

I  from  a  distance. 
da  disco  sto. 


79 
strike 


Having  taken  a  very  large   stone,  she  I  let      it      fall    I  into 
Prtsa  grdnde  pidtra,  —   |  la  lasqio  cadtre  \    in 


the  well. 
pozzo. 


The  stone  in  reaching  (in)  the  water  made  a 
pietra    —  giungindo  dcqua     flee 


very  great  noise. 
grande  rumor e. 

of  very  fine  linen. 
sottile2  lino.1 


They  were  dressed 
E'rano  vestiti 


in 

di 


a    garment 
vestimdnto 


She    was    a    very   beautiful    woman, 
E'ra  —  ddnna, 


wise,  and  very  virtuous.  He   is   a  very  austere   man.        A 

sdvio,                     ondsto.  E'gli  e                    acre2    uomo.l 

very  celebrated    poet.  They    would      commit  themselves 

celebre      poeta.  E'lle  vorrebbero2  metter*        si1 


quite  alive 


to  the  flames.  I 
nel        fudco.    \ 


You  are  exceedingly  good. 
—     Siete  buono. 


I   will    be    the    best    husband  in  the   world.  He  was 

I'o  sard                                   marito                    mondo.  E'gli    era 

ie  worst  man,  that  I  perhaps  ever  was  born.    1  Be    sure* 

uomo,              I     forse      mdi     nascesse.  Siate    certo, 


lat  I  have    a    greater    desire 
ic    w      ho%   —  3     vdglia^ 


of   it  I 
nel 


than  you. 

voi. 


The 

2 


ery  great  confidence  which  he  has  with  us   I  makes  him    say 
3    confidenza*    che$    —  ha$   con7  nois  \    Gliel    fa     dire1 


fa     dire1 

We    have    drunk     I  of    the  I     best    wine.        He 
~-  Abbidmo  bevuto    \     d'  un    \  vino.          

the  smallest  fault.        The  highest 
j  colpa. 

in    |     a       dark       cloud. 
oscuro*    nebbia.1 


does  not  pardon  him 
JVon    gli  perdona 

arts  were  wrapt 

drte  erano  avvdlte  \    d' 


80  ANALOGY. 

CHAPTER    IV. 
AUGMENTATIVES  AND  DIMINUTIVES. 

AUGMENTATIVE^. 

THERE  are  three  kinds  of  augmentatives  ;  those  that 
express  bigness  or  grandeur  ;  those  that  express  vigor 
or  beauty  ;  and  those  that  express  contempt. 

To  express  bigness  or  grandeur,  we  change  the  last 
vowel  of  nouns,  if  masculine,  into  one,  ozzo,  and,  ii 
feminine,  into  one,  ozza;  as, 

cappello,  hat ;  cappettb&B,  large  hat  ;* 

foresA,      country  girl ;  /oresozzA,  fine  country  girl ; 

btllo,        handsome ;  bdtixE,       large  and  handsome ; 

frtscA,      fresh ;  frescbzzA,  fine  and  fresh. 

When  a  feminine  noun  takes  the  termination  one,  in  the  aug 
mentative,  it  becomes  masculine;  as, 

donnA,    f.,    woman  ;  donnoxE,    m.,    large  woman  ; 

campdnA,  f,  bell ;  camjpanoNE,  m.,  large  bell. 


To  express  vigor  or  beauty,  we  use  otto,  occio,  fo 
the  masculine,  and  otta,  occia,  for  the  feminine ;  as, 

gidvanv,   youth;  giovanoTTo,      handsome      an 

[vigorous  youth 

bellA,         fair ;  bellbcciA,          very  fair ; 

gratidE,    large ;  grandbi'TA,       handsome      anl 

[large! 

grossA,      large;  grossbc  CIA,  very  large  and  firm^ 

*  It  is  impossible  to  give  in  any  other  tongue  the  full  and  exact  meaning  of 
Italian  Augmentatives  and  Diminutives  ;  the  translations,  therefore,  throughout 
this  chapter,  must  be  regarded  as  attempts  at  expressing  by  several  wordw 
and  as  far  as  the  English  permits  it,  the  change  of  signification  wh  ch,  in  Italian, 
is  effected  by  a  simple  change  of  termination,  forming  one  of  the  striking  beautiei 
of  this  language. 


AUGMENTATIVES.  81 

To  express  contempt,  we  use  the  terminations  accio, 
azzo,  astro,  for  the  masculine,  and  accia,  azza,  astra, 
aglia,  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 

Zifero,        book ;  librAccio,         bad  book  j 

popolo,      people ;  popolAzzo,      populace ; 

giwanv,  young  man  ;         giovanA.sTE.0^  contemptible 

[young  man ; 
gentE,       folks :  gentAGLiA,       rabble. 


We  can  join  the  augmentative  termination  of  bigness 
o  that  which  expresses  contempt,  and  that  of  contempt  to 
that  of  bigness  ;  and  thus  form  a  double  augmentative  ; 


idmo,    man;     omAccio,  bad  man;          owiAcciO'NE,  a  very 

[bad  man ; 

ibaldo,  ribald  ;  ribaldbNV,  great  ribald  ;    ribaldoNA'CCIQ,  very 

[great  ribald. 

And  sometimes  by  repeating  the  termination  of  con- 
empt,  we  form  a  treble  augmentative  ;  as, 

idnco,  white ;  feiancASTRo,  whitish  ; 

ianc A STRONE, slightly  whitish;    feiancASTRONaccio,    of     a 

[dirty  white. 


EXAMPLES. 


Per    in     capo     CAPPELLONI  Having  on  their  heads  very 

rdndi  alia  Spagnuola.     (Lasc.  large  hats   after   the    Spanish 

ibill.  2.  2.)  fashion. 

E'ra  una  piacevole,  e  fresco,  She  was  a  pleasant  and  fresh 

ORESOZZA.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  u.S.)  fine  country  girl. 

JYVm    vidi    mdi    uomini   piu  I    never  saw    more    large, 

ELLONI.     (Caro.  lett.  2.  137.)  handsome  men. 

Vedi  tu,  donna  mia,  come  le  Dost    thou     see,    my    good 

ostre  s6no  tutte    FKESCOZZE  ?  woman,  how  ours  are  all   fine 

Agn.  Pand.  47.)  and  fresh  ? 

TA'lle  guagnel,  tu  s&i  UN  BEL  In  truth,  you  are  a  fine  large 

ONNONE.     (Bern.  rim.  2.  7.)  woman. 


82 


ANALOGY. 


Son&ten  CAMPANONE.  (Buo- 
nar.  Fier.  2  .  3.  9.) 

11  valoroso,  e  gia  Id  GIOVA- 
N6xxo  Mdbiade  fa  molto  famo- 
so.  (Matt.  Franz,  rim.  169.) 

Oh  !  c6me  ella  e  6rat  e  fre- 
scoccia,  e  BELLOCCIA.  (Las, 
Spir.) 

JF'o  avea  una  conca  assdi 
GRAKDOTTA.  (Mes.  Bin.  rim. 
1.  202.) 

E'Ua  e  GROSSOCCIA,  tarchid- 
ta,  e  giuliva.  (Lor.  Med. 
Nenc.) 

Fee1  egli  di  quelle  un  famdso 
LIBRACCIO.  (Allegr.  92.) 

Fo  non  son  ndto  Ailla  feccia 
del  POPOLAZZO.  (Bocc.  g.  10. 
n.  8.) 

N6i  non  temidmo  d1  un  GIO- 
VANASTRO.  (Dav.  Tac.  Ann. 


Ring  the  large  belt 


The  valorous  and  handsoin 
and  vigorous  youth  Alcibiade 
was  very  famous. 

Oh !  how  very  fresh,  an< 
fair  she  is  now. 


I  had  a  pan  very  handsom 
and  large. 

She  is  very  large  and  firn 
well-limbed,  and  gay. 


He  made  of  them  a  famou 
bad  book. 

I  was  not  born  of  the  drej 
of  the  populace. 


"We  do  not  fear  a  contemp 
ible  young  man. 


Guiddva,  gli  accoltelldnti 
Giulidno,  le  ciurme  Appollinare, 
non  cdme  capitdni,  ma  licenziosi 
e  pigri,  c6me  la  lor  GENTAGLIA. 
(Dav.  Tac.  Stor.  3.) 

Jlccddde,  eke  quest  i  OMAcci6Ni 
Jurono  sconoscenti  do1  beneficj 
ricevuti  da  Gidve.  (Fir.  dial. 
bell,  donn.) 

Quel  RIBALDONACCIO  delfra- 
tello  ha  consumdlo  tdnto. 
(Cecch.  Dot.  1.  2.) 

Essendo  qudsto  un  cfrrto 
BIANCASTRONACCIO  senza  trop- 
po  bdrba.  (Fir.  nov.  7.) 


Julian   led    the     gladiator 
Appollinaris  the  rowers,  not 
captains,  but  as  licentious,  an 
slothful  men,  like  their  rabb] 

It  followed,  that  these  vei 
bad  men  were  ungrateful  fort 
benefits  received  from  Jupitt 


That  very  great  ribald  oft! 
brother  has  consumed  so  muc 


This  one  being  a  certain 
man  of  a  dirty  white  (palj 
color  and  without  much  beard. 


AUGMENTATIVES.  83 


EXERCISE    V. 

[This  and  the  following  Exercise  on  Diminutives,  are  introduced 
)lely  for  the  purpose  of  habituating  the  learner  to  the  formation 
f  such  words;  but  as  all  nouns  are  not  susceptible  of  the  same 
lodification,  and  as  the  employment  of  one  termination  in  prefer- 
ice to  the  others  depends  entirely  on  usage  and  euphony,  nothing 
nt  constant  reading,  and  the  study  of  the  classics,  can  teach  the 
per  use  of  these  words.] 

He  is  a   coarse    and  I  good-for-nothing  I   man.  That 

—   Ef     grdnde,2     t$    |       da     nidla*  \  udmo.l        Cotesta 

a    dirty,   ugly   servant.        The    kitchens    of  (the)    great 
sudicio'2  fdntcl  cucina 

jttons  are  always  filled  I  with  I  cooks.     I         Go  home, 
tidtto   s6no  sempre  pieno  \     di     \    cuoco.     \  Anddtevene  a  cdsa 


to  be  beside  I 
uscito 


eat  contemptible      fool,      you  appear  to  me 
sciocconej   voi    parete%     mi1 

f)  yourself.     Take  that  large  cup,  and  wash  it  well.     Thou 
vdi.          Ptglia  quel  tdzza,    e     Idva^^lo    bene.         Tu 

a   fine  large  woman.          He      had    in  that  chamber   a 
donna.  E'gli  aveva        quello    camera 

ge  old  chest,  which  had  been  made   I  since  the  time  I  of  his 
cassdne,     che  era      fdtto    \      fin  ddllo 

her's    grand-father.       He    bites    them    all  with   that  ugly  a 
dre*  dvolo.l  E'gli  mdrde*    /el     tutte  con   quello 


outh.     This  great  fool 
cca.     Questo  pecora 


wants  to  teach  me   how  to  know 
-mi  vu6l  far  conoscerc 


he)       thing's,    as    if   I  were  born  yesterday.        Each       of 

cdstf,   crime  sc   io  fossi  ndta       ieri.             ognuno-      — 

em    had    a  bad  large  sword.  They  opened  a    large    box 

—     Aveva1                         spdda.  —      Aprirono                   cdssa 


of  I  their  father.      I  speak  only   of  ungrateful,   and   very 
del  I    Idro2  pddrel     I'o  pdrlo    s6lo  ingrdto,          e 

oud    men.     Ring  the  large      bell,  behold    the     council  of 
perbo    —  .      Sundte  campdnttj   ecco  consiglio 

e   widows,  that  enter,  People,  that  are  born  of  the    uregs 
veddva,     che     entra.    Gente,     che      e      ndta  feccia 

'the  rabble.    I   1     never     saw    I    men  so  very  handsome. 
popolo.     —  j    Non  vidi  mdi    \   uomo  cosi  bello. 


84  ANALOGY. 

She  would  appear  to  you  a  fine  large  woman.       They  I  scat- 
E'lla     parrebbe2  m*l  .  bella      femina.         —      | 

tered  themselves   i  through  that    rabble. 
Si          spdrsero  per      quelto    ciurma. 


DIMINUTIVES. 

Diminutives  may  be  divided  into  four  classes,  viz. 
those  that  express  kindness  or  tenderness  ;  those  that 
express  smallness  or  prettiness  ;  those  that  express 
compassion  ;  and  those  that  express  contempt  or  indig- 
nation. 

To  express  kindness  or  tenderness,  we  change  the 
last  vowel  of  nouns  into  erello,  for  the  masculine,  and 
into  erella,  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 

ioj  old  man  ;  VCCC/WERELLO,  poor  old  man  ; 

fool  ;  pazzERELLA,     poor  little  fool. 

To  express  smallness  or  prettiness,  we  use  the  ter- 
minations ino,  etto,  ello,  uccio,  uzzo,  for  the  masculine, 
and  ina,  etta,  ella,  uccia,  uzza  ;  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 


Of  boy  ;  fanciuttixo,   little  boy  ; 

rusctllo,    brook  ;  ruscelteTTo.  small  brook  ; 

JintstrA,     window  ;  ^/wes/rELLA,  little  window  ; 

6o'ccA,        mouth;  &OCCUCCIA,     pretty  little  mouth  ; 

umido,       damp;  umiduzzo,     slightly  damp. 

Some  feminine  nouns  take  the  terminations  ino,  etto,  ello.  in  the 
diminutive,  and  then  they  become  masculine  ;  as, 

COSA,      f.,      house  ;  CASINO,  m.,          small  house,  or 

[country-house  ; 

capdnnA}  f.,  cottage  ;  copawiETTO,  m.,  little  cottage  ; 

portA,  f.,       door;  portELio,  m.,       small  door,  or 

[carriage-door. 


To  express  compassion,  we  use  the  termination  tc- 
ciuolo,  for  the  masculine,  and  icciuola,  for  the  feminine  ; 


DIMINUTIVES.  85 

x  and  all  those  terminations  used  to  express  smallness  or 
prettiness ;  as, 

udmo,    man ;  omicciu6LO,      poor  little  man; 

t&wu,  woman  ;       «ftmnicciuoi,A,  wretched  little  woman ; 

To  express  contempt  or  indignation,  we  use  the  ter- 
minations iccidtto,  icciattolo,  for  the  masculine,  and 
iccidtta,  iccidttola,  for  the  feminine  ;  and  all  the  termi- 
nations used  to  express  compassion,  except  ino,  and  ma; 

as, 

man;        5  omicciiTTO,     ?   despicable 

\  OTWICCIATTOLO,  $   puny  fellow  ; 

t 

No  rule  cnn  be  given  how  to  determine  in  which  sig- 
nification the  terminations  bo,  etto,  ello,  uccio,  uzzo, 
icciuolo,  are  used;  the  connexion  of  the  words,  is  the 
only  guide.  Thus, 

ftmina,  woman;     vile  /emt'riELLA,        vile,  contemptible  little 

[woman  ; 

gidvine,  giri;          gentile  g-tortn^LLA,  genteel  little  girl; 
utimo,       man  ;         bud,io  omicciuoLo,  good,  poor  little  man. 

Very  often,  instead  of  diminishing  the  substantive  we 
diminish  the  adjective  which  qualifies  it ;  and  sometimes 
we  diminish  both  the  substantive  and  the  adjective  ;  as, 

figliuoli  Uneri,  young  children ;   Jiglivdli  ienen&L!.!,  very  young 

[children; 
bdcca piccola,    little  mouth;         feoccueciA  piccolixA.,  pretty 

[little  mouth  ; 

C  c?onnicciuoLE    vedov^TTE^ 

ddnmvtdove,  widowed  women ;  <  wretched  young 

^  [widowed  women. 

Besides  the  above  terminations  there  are  some  nouns 
which  have  a  peculiar  ending  in  their  diminutive  ;  as, 

parte,     part ;  pa/^icELLA,  small  part ; 

lume,      light;  touciivo,       small  light; 

Mama,  white;  6iancoLiNA,  pretty  white: 


Hfi  ANALOGY. 

Others  have  quite  an  irregular  termination  ;  as, 

mercctnte,  merchant  ;  mercantooLO,  little  miserable  merchant  ; 

paglia,      straw  ;  />ag-ZiucA,         small  piece  of  straw  ; 

bacio,        kiss;  fcactozzo,         cordial  smacking  kiss  ; 

amdro,       bitter;  amaroGNO^o,  bitterish. 

[For  a  List  of  such  Diminutives,  see  APPENDIX,  E.] 

We  may  join  two  different  terminations  in  the  formation 
of  diminutives  ;  and  then  we  form  a  double  diminutive, 
which  sometimes,  besides  the  idea  of  kindness  or  tender- 
ness, expresses  also  that  of  prettiness  or  compliment;  and 
sometimes  serves%to  diminish  the  object  still  more,  and  to 
convey  also  the  idea  of  prettiness  ;  as, 


cattivo,  miserable  man  ;  caftwELLo,  a  wretched  man  ; 

cafti'tJELLU'CCIO,     wretched  little  man  ; 

Zi&ro,  book  ;    libr^TTO,  small  book  ;    Zt&rETTPNO,  pretty  little 

[book. 

Sometimes  we  make  use  of  the  diminutive  termination 
to  diminish  the  augmentative;  and  when  we  wish  to 
express  contempt  for  the  object  represented  by  the 
name  already  diminished,  we  augment  the  diminutive  ; 
as, 

Iddro,  robber  ;     ZadroNE,  highwayman  ;    fodrowCE'LLO  ; 

[pilferer  ; 
(ZdwiA,  lady  ;         damiizzA,  petty  lady  ;      damuzz  A'CCIA, 

[pretended  lady. 

^Finally,  such  is  the  genius  of  the  Italian  language  in 
this  respect,  that  we  may  even  modify  the  verbs  and 
adverbs  by  one  or  more  syllables  added  to  them;  thus, 

T  to  give  many 

From  feocidre,  to  kiss  ;  we  make  ftaciuccHiARE      <  little    kisses 

}  one        after 
'  another  ; 

"    cantdre,  to  sing;      «      5  canteRELLARE,    ?      , 
I  orcawfrccHiARE,  5  lo 

"    pdco,       little;         «      5/^ocMNO, 


btne,       well;          «      \  Jeni,NO»  pretty  well  ; 

very  well. 


DIMINUTIVES. 


87 


E  X  A  M  P  L  E  I 


M6vesi  'I  VECCHIEREL  canu- 
tox  e  bidnco.  (Petr.  s.  14.) 

O    PAZZERELLA,    tU    HOH     Sttl 

quello  eke  si  bfdtto.     (Macch.) 

Che  ancdr  ?n'  odidsti  essendo 
FANCiuLLiNO.  (Bern.  Ol.  1. 
21.) 

Che  non  per  mstdj  ma  per 
suono  e  n6to  —  D'  un  RI*SCEL- 
LETTO.  che  quivi  discende. 
(Dant.  Inf.  34.) 

Vide  entrdre  un  tdpo  per  la 
FINESTRELLA.  (Nov.  ant.  90.) 

Quella  BOCCUCCIA  sdnta. 
(Bellinc.) 

Dubito  che  non  sia  un  poco 
UMIDIZZO.  (Crusca.) 

Dal  mmo  piano  di  CIUESTO 
CASINO  si  scende  in  dltre  stdnze 
sotto  terra.  (Borgh.  Rip.  132.) 

Che  abbidmo  ndi  a  fare,  se 
non  a  mendrlo  in  GUJESTO  CA- 

PANNETTO.    (BOCC.    g.    3.    n.  1.) 

Sdlsesulfico,  e  fu  giunto  AL 
PORTELLO.  (Lor.  Medic.  119.) 

Un  OMICCIUOLO  di  piccola 
condizidne.  (Franc.  Sacch.  Op. 
div.  134.) 

Avete  vdi  mdi  pdsto  wienie  a 
queste  DONNICCIUOLE  ?  (Agn. 
Pand  6.) 

E'gli  k,  un  certo  OMICCIATTO, 
che  non  e  nessun  di  vdi,  che  veg- 
gendolo  non  Vavesse  a  noia. 
(Lor.  Med.  Arid,  prol.) 

E  m  mdndano,  a  lor  capric- 

ClO,    gli    OMICCIATTOLI     71071    SO 

iamente,  ma  i  barbassdri.    (Al- 
leff.  181.) 


The  hoary  and  white-headed 
poor  old  man  moves  on. 

O  poor  little  fool,  you  don't 
know  what  has  been  done. 

For  you  hated  me  from  the 
time  I  was  a  little  boy. 

Discovered  not  by  sight,  but 
by  the  sound  of  a  small  brook 
that  descends  there. 


He  saw  a  mouse  enter 
through  the  little  window. 

That  divine,  pretty  little 
mouth. 

I  doubt  whether  it  is  not 
somewhat  slightly  damp. 

From  the  first  story  of  this 
small  house  we  descend  into 
other  rooms  under  ground. 

What  else  have  we  to  do, 
but  to  bring  him  into  this  little 
cottage. 

He  climbed  the  fig  tree,  and 
reached  the  small  door. 

A  poor  little  man  of  low 
condition. 


Have    you  ever   thought  of 
these  wretched  little  women  ? 


He  is  a  certain  despicable 
puny  fellow,  that  there  is  none 
of  you,  who  on  seeing  him 
would  not  dislike  him. 

£ 

And  they  send  to  you,  ac- 
cording to  their  whim,  despi- 
cable ignorant  men  as  well  as 
great  and  learned. 


88 


ANALOGY. 


VlL  FEMIKELLA  in  Puglld    U 

prende.     (Petr.) 

U'na  GF.NTIL  piacevol  GIO- 
YINELLA.  (Mes.  Gin.) 

l/TCBUON  OMICCIUOLO.    (BoCC. 

g.  3.  n.  1.) 

/FIGLIUOI.I  ancdr  TENEREL- 
LI.  (Fir.  Disc.  an.  79.) 

Con  Una  BOCCUCCIA  PICCO- 
LiwA.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  W.) 

Qy.este  DONNicciu6LE  vn- 
DOVETTE.  (Agn.  Pand.  6.) 

Essendo  gia  una  PARTICELLA 
delta  n6tte  passdta.  (Bocc  g.  1.) 

Avendo  un  LUMICINO  in  md- 
no.  (Matt.  Fran,  Rim.) 

Con  quelle  site  man'ne  BIAN- 
«OL!NE.  (Fir.  Asin.  41.) 

MERCANTUOLO  di  qu&ttro  de- 
ndri.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

Tra  veccia,  t  I6glio,  f.  Irucio- 
li,  e  PAGLI^CHE.  (Car.  Matt. 
..8.) 

Se  non  m'  avessi  dato  tal 
BACi6zzo.  (Pataff.  9.) 

Di  sapore  AMAROGNOLO, 
mnlto  acre,  e  penetrative.  (Ri- 
cett.  Fior.  J9.) 

Ritorni  dlla  corte  piu  gialloy 
epiu  CATTIVEL:^CCIO,  r/icmai. 
(Franc.  Sacch.  nov.  74.) 

Mi  hdnno  portdto  qui  il  LI- 
BRETT  IN o  degli  enimmi  del  Si- 
gnCr  Coltcllini.  (Red.  lett.  2.) 

Vi  prego,   che,  inndnzi    che 

COtSstO  LANDRONCELLO    vddd  dl- 

truve,  mi  f  accidie  render  e  un 
miopdio  d'  uJse.  (Bocc.  g.  8. 
a,  5.) 


A  vile,  contemptible  little 
woman,  in  Apulia  captivate** 
him. 

A  genteel,  agreeable  little 
girl. 

A  good,  poor  little  man. 


The     young    ones     [of   the 
dove]  yet  very  young. 

With  a  pretty  little  mouth. 


These       wretched 
widowed  women. 


young 


A   small    part   of  the   night 
having  already  passed. 

Having  a  small  light  in  hi» 
hand. 


With      her 
white  hands. 


small      pretty 


Little  miserable  merchant 
worth  four  farthings. 

Between  vetch,  darnel, 
shavings,  and  small  pieces  of 
straw. 

If  thou  hadst  not  given  me 
such  a  cordial  smacking  kiss 

Of  a  taste  bitterish,  very 
acrid,  and  penetrating. 

He  returned  to  the  court 
more  pale,  and  wretched  than 
ever. 

They  have  brought  me  here 
the  pretty  little  book  of  enig- 
mas of  Mr  Coltellini. 

1  pray  you,  that,  before 
this  pilferer  goes  elsewhere, 
you  would  make  him  return  to 
me  a  pair  of  spatterdashes  Q£ 
mine. 


DIMINUTIVES. 


Essendomi  accattdta  un  po'  di 
DAMUZZACGiAsafoata'ca.  (Alleg. 
57.) 

Allor  la  BACICCUHIAI.  (Pa- 
taff.  9.) 

dccertdtevi,  che  w  *vi  pdrto 
un  BENONE  grandone.  (Car. 
lett.  1.) 


Having  obtained  somewhat 
of  the  character  of  an  uncouth 
pretended  lady. 

Then  I  gave  her  many  little 
kisses  one  after  another. 

Be  assured,  that  I  love  you 
hugely. 


EXERCISE    VI|. 


The   little     boy      took    out    all  the     flowers,    that     he 

giovine        trdsse     tutto  fioret       che     egli 

With  a    pretty    little    mouth, 

Con  b6ccat 


had    in  the  little    basket. 
avevn  canestro. 


Dost    thou 
tu* 


whose     lips    looked    like     two  little    rubies. 
le  cui      Idbbro  parevano  —       due  rubmi. 

think  |  that  I  will  suffer  that  thou  1     shouldst  pawn  my 
Credit  \    che  'to    sdffera          che     tu     \          ?»'  impegni    la 

little     gown  ?          He      conducted 

gonnellal         E'gli        mise*  mi*         p 

remote  narrow     lanes.        Like    the    little    sheep    that 

fuor  di  mdnof  strdda.l       C6me 

come    out    I  of  the  I     fold,     I  first   one, 
escono       \    dal      \    chiuso,    \   ad      una} 

three,  I  and  the    others  remain     a    little 
tre,      I    e  dltra      stdnno 

down    I  their  I     eyes  and    I  their  I  nose. 
do       I    gli    j    occhio     e  il     \  muso. 

sackcloth,     with     a     miserable    little 
con      • —  vil 


me      through      certain 
mi1         per  certa 


pecora,  che 

I  then  two,    I  then 
a  due,      I        a 

timid,      lowering 
timida,         atterdn- 


Clothed  , 
Vestito 


in 

di 


me 
avdra 

very 


hat          She      wag 
cappello.        E'lla      tre, 

I     have    found    him  with  a 
Po    ho%  trovdto3      lol      con 

I  Do  not   be    sparing      with 
I     Non      voglidte     essermi 

of  a  discreet  little  smile.    The  other  was  a       child 
discrete  rzso.  dltro    era       fanciullv 

not      yet      one    year     old. 
nori*  anc6ra*  un4     dnnrf     — • 
8^ 


somewhat  slightly  malicious 
alqudnto  malizitiso. 

little    book    in    his    hand. 
libra  —     mdno. 


small,     who 
piccolo,     che 


wai 
avecfi 


90 


ANALOGY. 


Who  is    this     contemptible  little  man,  that  has  come 


Chi      e  questo 
insult 


to 
adir 


I  us  in 
ci1   5   r 

a  torn    little  cap. 
rdtto  bcretta. 

Accompany     the  little 
Accompagndte 

child         flatters 
fanciullo   lusinga 

having      heard 


uonio,    che     tz  vcnitto^ 

ur      house  ?      He     had    I  on  I    his  head 
itra7    cdsa  f*        —     Aveva  \  in  \    —     capo 

Little     boxes     made    I   of   I        boards. 
casstinc     fdtti     \  con   \  dsse. 

Thus    the      blind    little 
Cost  cieco 


master. 
padionc. 

(the)     lovers. 
amdnte. 


these 
questo 


words, 
pardia, 


The     poor  little     woman, 
vccchia, 

said,         Have       a     very 
disse,         Abbiidt 


little 
tdnto 


(of)  , patience. 
pazitnza. 


CHAPTER    V 

NUMERALS. 

CARDINAL      NUMBERS, 

U'no, 
due, 

one  ; 
two; 

vent*  uno,     ? 
or  ventuno,  £ 

twenty-one  r 

tre, 

three  ; 

ventidue, 

twenty-  two  ; 

qu&ttro, 
cinque. 

four; 
five; 

ventitre, 
ventiqudttro, 

twenty-  three  , 
^twenty-four  j 

** 

six  ; 

ventidnque, 

twenty-five; 

sttte, 

seven; 

venlisei, 

twenty-six  ; 

6tto, 

eight  ; 

ventiselte, 

twenty  -seven^ 

nove, 

died, 

nine  ; 
ten; 

venf  otto,     ) 
or  ventotto,  $ 

twenty-eight  ; 

undid. 

eleven  ; 

ventinove, 

twenty-nine  ; 

dodid, 

twelve  ; 

trenta, 

thirty  ; 

tredid, 

thirteen  ; 

trentuno, 

thirty-one  ; 

quattordid, 

fourteen  ; 

. 

•     .     •     • 

quindid, 

fifteen  ; 

trentttlo, 

thirty-eight  ^ 

sedici* 

sixteen  ; 

4 

didassette, 

seventeen  ; 

quaranta, 

forty  ; 

didotto, 

eighteen  ; 

.     .     . 

» 

didannove, 

nineteen  ; 

cinquanta, 

fifty; 

venti, 

twenty  ; 

sessdnta, 
setidnta, 
ottdnta, 
novdnta, 

cento, 
duecento,      J 
ducenlo,       > 
or  dugento,  j 
trecento, 
quattrocento, 

NUME 
sixty; 
seventy  ; 
eighty  ; 
ninety  ; 
hundred  ; 
two  hundred  ; 

three  hundred; 
four  hundred  ; 

RALS. 

mills, 
duemila, 
or  dumUa, 
tremila, 

mittecento,  or  i 
mille  e  cento,  ( 

91 

thousand  ; 
£      two  thousand  ; 
three  thousand; 

eleven  hun- 
,                [dred  ; 

diecimUa, 
centomila, 

milione, 

ten  thousand  ; 

hundred    thoua- 
[and; 

million. 

The  numbers  vcntisei,  ventfsette,  quarantasei,  ottantasette,  are 
sometimes  contracted  into  venziiy  'twenty-six' ;  venzette, { twenty- 
seven'  ;  quaranzei, '  forty-six' ',  ottanzitte,  '  eighty-seven*. 

Cento,  when  followed  by  quardnta,  cinquanta,  sessdnta,  settdnta, 
loses  its  last  syllable,  and  makes  cenquardnta,  'one  hundred  and 
forty'  ;  cencin quanta,  *  one  hundred  and  fifty' ;  censessdnta,  *  one 
hundred  and  sixty';  censettdnta ,  *  one  hundred  and  seventy.' 


Cardinal  numbers,  except  uno  and  its  compounds,  are 
generally  of  the  common  gender;  as, 


siltz  dnni,  m., 
quindici  sUlle,  f., 


seven  years; 
fifteen  stars. 


The  Italians  make  use  of  these  numbers,  instead  of  the 
ordinal,  to  indicate  the  days  of  the  month  ;  and  then 
they  are  preceded  by  the  masculine  articles  i  or  li;  or 
by  the  words  di,  alii,  or  addi ;  as, 

LI  vENTiquATTRo  Giugno,         the  24th  of  June ; 
AI  DICIOTTO  di  Dicembre,  on  the  18th  of  December; 

ALLI  QUATTORDICI  di  Gennwo,    on  the  14th  of  January ; 
ADD!  DODICI  di  Mdrzo,  on  the  12th  of  March. 


EXCEPTION. 


The  first  day  of  the  month  is  indicated  by  the  ordinal  number 
imot  '  first,'  preceded  in  like  manner  by  i7,  al,  or  add\. 


pnmo 


92  ANALOGY. 

When  they  are  used  to  indicate  the  hours  of  the  day, 
they  are  preceded  by  the  feminine  article  Za,  le ;  but 
then  the  word  6ra,  *  hour3 ;  ore,  *  hours' ;  is  either  ex- 
pressed or  understood ;  as, 

LE  DUE  ore,  two  o'clock ; 

LE  QUATTRO  [ore],  four  o'clock. 

Una,  and  its  compounds  ventuno,  trentuno,  &c., 
before  feminine  nouns,  like  other  adjectives,  change  o 
into  a;  as, 

IMA  L!BRA,  one  pound ; 

novantunA  RTTOTA,  ninety-one  wheels. 

When  cardinal  numbers  are  used  as  substantives,  all 
but  tre  and  those  ending  in  i,  are  made  to  vary  .in  the 
plural ;  as, 

due  cinqui,  two  fives  ; 

tre  novi,  three  nines. 

Mille  and  milione,  in  the  plural  make  mila  and  milio- 
ni;  as, 

diciotto  MiLA,  eighteen  thousand  ; 

un  milione  di  MILIONI,  a  million  millions. 


EXAMPLES. 

Vivettednni  VENZEI.    (Franc.  He  lived  twenty-six  years. 
Sacch.  rim.  40.) 

JVe   figlio     TENZETTE     (lello  It  [a  scorpion]  brought  forth 

stisso  colore.     (Red.  Ins.  47.)  twenty-seven  [scorpions]  of  the 

same  color. 

Dintro  La  citld  di   Roma  vi  Within    the   city    of  Rome 

sono  auARANZEic/ziese  cardina-  there     are     forty-six    cardinal 

lane.     (Brun.  Tes.  3.  3.)  churches. 

Un    milione,   e    OTTANZETTE  One     million"  and     eighty" 

miglidia,  e  cinquecento  fiormi  seven  thousand  and  five  hand" 

d'oro.     (*Dav.  Tac.  Tost.  429.)  red  gold  florins. 

&v6ndor>i    in    quel    eoncilio  There  being  in  that  council 

CENduARANTeftto  vescovi.  (Petr.  one    hundred    and  forty-eight 

Uoin.  ill.  82.)  bishops. 


NUMERALS. 


CKNCINQUANTA  de'  suoi  cava- 
liiri  mandd  incontra  air  6ste  d& 
Fiorentini.  (Giov.  Vill.  1.  9.) 

Piu  di  CENSETTANTA  dnni 
ttdtivarono  gli  Dei  scnza  tdalo. 
(St.  Agost.  Citt.  Dio.  4.  31. 

La  voglia  e  la  ragion  combat- 
tut'  hanno — sette,  e  SETT'  AMU. 
(Petr.  s.  80.) 

QUINPICI  STELLE,  che  in  di- 
verse  plage — Lo  cielo  aovivan 
di  tdnto  aereJio.  (Dant.  Par. 
13.) 

Di  Ferrara,  LI  VENTICIUATTRO 
GitfcNo,  Mille  seictnto  sette. 
(Bent.  lett.  I.) 

A'l    D1CIOTTO    DI    DlCEMBRE. 

(Bav.) 

A'LLT  auATTORDici  DI  GEN- 
WAIO.  (Macch.) 

II  detto  anno  ADD!  DODICI  DI 
MARZO.  (Giov.  Vill.) 

Che  6ra  e  f — Sono  LE  Q.UAT- 
THO.  (Class.) 

E'ccoii  la  notte,  ecco  LE  Dt/E 
«K«,  6cco  le  qudttro.  (Firenz.) 

TJgli  tiNA  LIBRA  di  castrone. 
(Burchiell.  p.  2.  s.  1.) 

Jintre  NOVANTUNA  Ru6rA. 
(Dant.  Conv.) 

E  dicidmo  DUE  cfwftui,  due 
stlti,  THE  NOVI,  perchb  questi 
numerdli,  sempre  che  stdnnoper 
sustanttvi,  si  dedinano.  (Buom. 
Ling.  Tosc.  2.  8.  13.) 

Efran  per  numero  DICIOTTO 
M!LA.  (Bemb.  Stor.  12.  176.) 

Al  padre  Carrara  rinda  in 
mio  njme  UN  MI  LION  E  DI  MILIO- 
wj  di  saluti.  (Red.  lett.  2.) 


He  sent  one  hundred  and 
fifty  of  his  horsemen  against 
the  Florentine  host. 

They  adored  their  gods,  with- 
out idols,  for  more  than  one 
hundred  and  seventy  years. 

Inclination  and  reason  have 
'striven  for  seven  after  seven 
years.  .  ^  V 

Fifteen  stars,  which  in  dif- 
ferent    spheres     enliven      the . 
skies  with  so  much  serenity. 

Ferrara,  24th  June,  1607. 


On  the  18th  December. 


On  the  14th  January. 

On  the  12th  of  March  of  the 
said  year. 

What   o'clock   is   it? — It   i» 
four  o'clock. 

Behold     night,    behold     two 
o'clock,  behold  four  o'clock. 

Take  one  pound  of  mutton. 


Other  ninety-one  wheels. 

And  we  say  two  fives,  two 
sevens,  three  nines,  because 
these  numerals,  when  thej 
stand  as  substantives,  are  de- 
clined. . 

They  were  eighteen  thous- 
and in  number. 

Give  to  father  Carrara,  in 
my  behalf,  a  million  millions 
of  salutations. 


ANALOGY. 


ORDINAL     NUMBERS. 


Primo, 

secondo, 

terzo, 

quarto, 

quinto, 

s6sto, 

settimo, 

ottdvo, 

nono, 

ddcimo, 

decimoprimoj 
*und6cimo  or 
undictsimo, 
'     decimosecondo, 


first; 
second ; 
third  ; 
fourth ; 
fifth  ;       . 
sixth ; 
seventh  ; 
eighth ; 
ninth ; 
tenth ; 


eleventh ; 


dodecimp,™  twelfth; 

dodicesimo, 

*decimoterzo, 

terzodtcimo,  or     >  thirteenth; 

tredictsimo,          } 

*decimoqudrto,     > 

quartodtcimo,  or  >  fourteenth 

quattordicesimo,  ) 


>•  sixteenth 


seven- 
teenth  ; 


*quaranUsimo,  or 
quadragtsimo, 


quint  sdtcimo,  or  >  fifteenth  ; 

qumdicesimo,       ) 

*decimos6sto,        ^ 

sestodtcimo,  or 

sedictsimo, 

*decimos6ttimo, 

settimodtcimo,  or 

diciassettesimo, 

*decimottdvo, 

'ottodecimo,  or 

diciottisimo, 

*decimonono, 

nonodecimo,  or 

diciannovtsimo, 


t 


eight- 
eenth  ; 

nine- 
teenth  ; 


*ventesimoprimo, 
vige  imoprimo  or 
ventuntsimo, 
*ventesimosecdndo, 


'  twenty- 
first: 


*trentesimoprimo, 
trigesimoprimo,  or  S  i;"11^ 
trentunesimo,  > 


*sessanUsimo,  or 


>  fortieth : 


quinquagtsimo,  or    >  fiftieth  j 
quingenttsimo,         5 


>  sixti 

?  seven- 
5      tieth ; 


*settantesimo  or 
stttuagtsimo, 


*ottardtsimo,m       >  eightieth : 
ottagtsimo,  J 


*novanttsimo,  or 
nonog&toto, 


y  ninetieth ; 


centesimo,  hundredth  ; 

ducenUsimo,  or  ?  two 
dugenttsimo,       $  hundredth  ; 
trecenttsimo,  three  hundredth: 


milltsimo, 


thousandth  : 
millionth, 


*  We  mark  with  an  asterisk  those,  amongst  the  different  names  of  the  same 
numbers,  that  are  most  in  use. 


NUMERALS. 


95 


The  ordinal  numbers  from  primo  to  decimo,  and  ven- 
tesimo,  trentesimo,  &c.,  before  feminine  nouns  change  o 
into  a;  and  in  the  plural  change  o  into  i,  for  the  mascu- 
line, and  a  into  e,  for  the  feminine ;  as, 

la  primA.  DONNA,  the  first  woman ; 

le  ttrzE  PERCOSSE,  the  third  stripes  ; 

l&  cinquantesimA.  LETTERA,  the  fiftieth  letter  ; 

i  primi*  DI,  the  first  days  : 

And  their  compounds,  quartodecimo,  decimosettimo, 
&c.,  change  both  the  last  vowel  of  the  last,  and  the  last 
vowel  of  the  first  of  the  two  component  numbers  ;  as, 

la  quartA.decimA.  CONDIZIONE,     the  fourteenth  condition  ; 
la  decwi&stttimA.  STOLT!ZIA,      the  seventeenth  folly. 


EXAMPLES. 


Delle  quali  LA  PIUMA 
chiameremo  Pampinea,  la  se- 
cdnda  Fiamm6tta,  Filomena  la 
terza,  fyc.  (Bocc,  Introd.) 

Nessuno — Le  seconde  aspettd- 
va  ne  LE  TEKZE  [percosse.] 
^Dant.  Inf.  18.) 

Fra  Guittone,  nella  LETTERA 
che  nel  mio  c6dice  e  la  CINGIUAN- 
TESIMA.  (Red.  annot.  Ditir.) 

E  ne'  DI  PRIMI  dentro  al 
divznseno — Nasccimmo.  (Bocc. 
Araet.  96.) 

LA     aUARTADECIMA       CONDI- 

XIONE,  che  deve  avere  la  confes- 
yione9  si  &  accelerdta,  (Passav. 
176.) 

LA    DECIMASETTIMA    STOLTI- 

ZIA,  e  diqutlli  che  vogliono  fug- 
gire.  (Cavalc.  Stolt.  228.) 


Tlie  first  of  whom,  we  will 
call  Pampinea,  the  second 
Fiammetta,  the  third  Filome- 
na, &c. 

None  waited  for  the  second, 
nor  the  third  [stripes  .] 


Fra  Guittone,  in  the  letter 
which  in  my  MS.  copy  is  the 
fiftieth. 

And  in  the  first  days  we 
were  born  in  the  divine  bosom. 


The  fourteenth  condition, 
which  the  confession  ought  to 
have,  is  that  of  being  early. 


The     seventeenth    folly,     is 
that  of  those  who  desire  to  flee. 


*  Pr'tmi  is  sometimes  used  as  a  substantive,  and  then  has  the   signification  of 
'ancestors',  'parents'  ;  as, 

Fieramtntcfuro  avversi  —  A  me  e  They  were  fiercely  adverse  to  roe, 

a>  miei  PRIMI,  e  a  miapdrte.    (Dant.          to  my  ancestors,  and  to  my  party, 
laf.  10.) 


96 


ANALOGY. 


COLLECTIVE,     DISTRIBUTIVE,      AND      PRO- 
PORTIONAL     NUMBERS. 


Pdio, 

Colle 
a  pair  ; 

ctive. 
quarantina, 
cinquantina, 
sessantina, 
letlantina, 
ottantina, 
novantinat 

centindiOj 
miglidio, 

two  scores,  or 
[forty  ; 
fifty,  or  two  scores 
[and  a  half; 
three  scores,  or 
[sixty  : 
seventy,  or    three 
[scores  and  a  half; 
four   scores,   or 
-  [eighty; 
ninety,  or  four 
[scores  and  a  half; 
a  hundred  ; 
a  thousand  ; 

cinquina. 

the  number  of  five; 

settina, 

the  number  of 
[seven  ; 

decina, 

ten,  or  half  a 

dodicina 
or  dozzina 

>  a  dozen  ; 

veniina, 
treniina, 

a  score,  or  twenty  ; 
thirty,  or  a  score 

[and  a  half 


Distributive. 


Una  metdt 
un  tirzo, 
un  quarto, 
un  quinto, 

one  half; 
one  third  ; 
one  fourth; 
one  fifth  ; 

un  ststo, 
un  stltimo, 
un  ottdvo, 
un  nowo, 

one  sixth  ; 
one  seventh  ; 
one  eighth  ; 
one  ninth  ;  &< 

Proportional. 

Ddppio, 
triplo, 
quddruplo, 

double  ; 
triple  ; 
quadruple  ; 

quintuple, 
ctntuplo, 

quintuple 
ten-fold  ; 
a  hundred-fold* 

Collective,  distributive,  and  proportional  numbers 
low  the  rules  of  other  adjectives. 


*  TVeina,  quattriwa,  seina^  otti-na  &c.,  are  sometimes  used  by  the  It  lians  im 
common  language,  to  express  (  the  number  of  thti-e*,  l  f  four',  'of  six*,  *  9f 
eight',  &c.,  but  they  have  never  been  employed  by  good  writers. 


NUMERALS. 


97 


With  numeral  adjectives  are  generally  classed  the  fol- 
lowing words ;  viz, 

ambiduo,  \ 
ambeduo,  I 
amboduo,  v  both,  both 
amenduo,  (  of  them. 


dmbi, 
dmbe, 
dmboj 

amenduni, 
amendune, 
entrdmbi, 

ambidue, 
ambedue, 
ambodue, 
amendue, 

ambidui, 
ambedui, 

A'mbi,  its  compounds,  and  amenduni,  are  used  in 
speaking  of  masculine  objects  :  dmbe,  its  compounds, 
and  amendane,  in  speaking  of  feminine  :  the  others 
may  be  used  for  both  genders  ;  as, 

both  lovers ; 
both  sages ; 
both  eyes ; 
both  women ; 
both  turned ; 
both  arms ; 

both  hemispheres  ; 

both  shores  ; 

both  hogs ; 

both  things,  or  both  of  them  ; 

Sofronia  and  Olindo  both  of 
the  same  city. 


dmbi  AMANTI, 
ambidue  SAVJ, 
dmbe  LE  L\icr, 
ambedue  DONNE, 
dmbo  CONVERSI, 

dm6oi,E    BRACCIA, 

amenduo  GLI  EMISPERI, 
amendue  LE  SPONDE, 
amenduni  PORCI, 
aniendum  COSE, 

SOFRONIA  ed  OLiNDO 

d^una  cittdde  entrdmbi, 


EXAMPLES. 


FILKNO  e  TIRSI  AMBI  novelli 
\MANTI.  (Vine,  Mart.  rim. 
4-) 

jL'  UNO  e  Z'ALTRO  SAVIO  diced 
vero,  percid  ad  AMBIDUE  donoe. 
(Nov.  ant.  23.) 

E  sien  nel  cuor  puriite  AMBE 
LE  LUCI — Ch'dlla  strdda  d?am6r 
mi  furon  dud.  (Petr.  c.  8.) 

Allora  AMBEDUE  [d6nne] 
entrtrono  netla  fossa,  (Nov. 
ant.  35.) 

Alfine,  AMBO  CONVERSI  al 
giusto  seggio.  (Petr.  c.  48.) 


Philenus'  and   Thyrsis  both 
new  lovers. 

Both    sages   told  the  truth, 
therefore  he  gave  to  both. 


And  let  the  heart  bear  pun- 
ishment for  both  eyes,  which 
led  me  to  the  road  of  love. 

Then  both  [women]  entered 
into  the  ditch. 

Finally  both   turned   to  the 
seat  of  justice. 
9 


98 


ANALOGY. 


Con  AMBO  IE  BRACCIA  mi 
prese.  (Dant.  Inf.  19.) 

n  confine — D'  AMENDED  GLI 
IMISPERI.  (Dant.  Inf.  20.) 

Per  cui  tremdvano  AMENDtJE 
IE  SPONDE.  (Dant.  Inf.  9.) 

AMENDTJNI  [porci]  M6RTI 
cdddero  in  terra.  (Bocc.  In- 
trod.) 

Ntlla  vostra  elezione  sta,  di 
tdrre  qudl  piu  vi  pidce  DELLE 

D#E        [COSe],      O        AMENDTJNE. 

(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  1.) 

Colii  SOFRONIA,  OLINDO  egli 
s?app&lla — DJ  una  cittdde  EN- 
TRAMBI,  e  d'una  fede.  (Tass. 
Ger.  2. 16.) 


He    seized    me    with    both 
arras. 

The  confine   of  both  hemi- 
spheres. 

On  account  of  which  both 
shores  trembled. 

Both  [hogs]  fell  dead  to  the 
earth. 


It  is  at  your  choice,  to  take 
which  of  the  two  [things]  you 
like  best,  or  both. 


She  is  called  Sofronia,  he 
Olindo,  both  of  the  same  city 
and  of  the  same  faith. 


EXERCISE     VII. 


He     sent 
—      Mando 


his 

suo 


five 


hundred  horsemen 
cavdllo 


brother    with     six    cohorts,     and 
fratello  coorte,        e 

to  I    Terra  di  Lavoro.        He   made  him 
in  I  —     fece*     GM 


grieve       for    this      sin       forty  days.    He    passed 
pidngere     —   questo  peccdto  di.        —      Passo 

Tunis  I  to  I  Apulia    with  more   than  eight  hundred      Spanish 
Tuni&i  I  in  \  Puglia  Spagnuolo^ 

horsemen.        Metellus     was  already  in    Lombardy   I  with  j 
cavaliere.1  Metello        era      gid,  Lombardia    \    colla  \ 

his    army    of    three    legions,     who 
suo*    6stel  legidne,        che 

France. 
Frdncia. 

I 

I'o    ho      qui  lira,     \    di 

to  have  bought  a    farm.        And  this  was  four  hundred  years 
comprdre      podere.        E      do     fu  anno 


was  coming 
veniva 


from 
di 


from 
di 


Being    already    about    (to)  thirty  years 
Essendo      gia,     di  vresso*  — 3  4    dnno^ 


old. 
Essendo      gid,     dipresso*  — 3  4    dnno5  xecchio.1 

have  here  two  hundred  livres,  |  with  |  which  I    intended 

io         voleva 


before  (that)  Rome  I  was    begun.      I 
dn*t       che    Roma3  \  si    eomintidsse.1  \ 


He  was  of  the  age 
—    E'ra        —    eta, 


NUMERALS.  99 

of  twenty-six  or  twenty-seven  (years).        One  hundred  and 
o  anno.  — 

seventy     archers.        He  sent  one  hundred  and  fifty  I  of  I 
sagittdrio.        —  Mandd   —  —  |  de*  \ 


his    soldiers. 
suo       fdnte. 

They     went     to  Messina  the  twenty-fourth  of  December. 
—      Anddrono  Dicembre. 

He    was  baptized  I  on  the  sixteenth,  in  St.    John's.  On 

—         Battezzos-si    \  San  Giovanni. 

the  eighteenth  of  December,  having  heard  of  the  insurrection 
Dicdmbre,    -      udita  rivdlta 

of  the  legion,      he  went  out  I  (of)  the  palace  dressed  I  in  I 
legione,  s'  uscl        \  —    paldgio  vestito      \  di  \ 

black.        The  first  of  the  month  I  will  pay  you.        Come    at 
nero.  mese  —  pagherd*    vi.1          Venite    a 

(the)  six  o'clock,  and  we  will  speak  I  of  it.  I         He  arrived 
-    .    «    —     parleremo*  \    Tit.1   |  —     Giunse 

at  Milan    at  (the)  one    o'clock  1  in  I  the  night.        At  (the) 
a    Mildno    a  •••  |  di  \  notte.          A 

twelve  o'clock  I  I    went    to  see    I    our    ambassador. 
i  I      mi  ported  dal    •   \  ndstro  ambasciaddre, 

It  I  was  worth  I  thirty-one  livres.        Thou  didst  usurp  one 
—  I      Valeva      \  lira.  -     Usurpdsti 

He  came 

jf 

to  an  agreement     I  on  I  condition    of  paying  sixty  thousand 
accordo  \  con  \  eondizidne  pagdre 

ducats  to  the  conquerors.      Salute  him  I  for  me  I   a  thousand 
ducdto  mncitore.        Salutatc^,  lo%  [  me^i    |  — 

millions  of  times. 
volta. 

Here  begins    the  eleventh  book.         He  arrived       happily 
Qui  commcia  2    libro.1          —    Arrivd   felicemente 

to  the  fortieth  year  I    of    1  his     life.        Contradicting   (to) 
anno  \  della  \  suo     vita.         Contradicendo 

himself        in  the  fourteenth  chapter.     Boniface    the   Eighth 
*e  medesimo  2  capitolo.1    Bonifdxio3    — 


hundred  and  seventy-five  thousand  gold    florins. 

d'  dro*  fiorincil. 


100  ANALOGY. 

being        Pope  in  Rome,  the    Abb£     of  Cligni   came    to   the 
Essendo*   pdpa2     5  Roma,6     10  Abbdte"    «  13    venne7 


court.         In 
cdrte.9          A 

The  twenty-first  stanza. 
stanza. 


the  time  of  the   Emperor    Frederic  the  First, 
tempo  Imperatofe    Federico    — 


He    had    tied  both 


his 


feet.          II      bit    I  both  I  my  | 


—  Jlveva  legdti  i      pitde.         \  Mi  morsi 

hands  through  grief.       They  entered  both  I  into  I  the  garden. 
mdno      per      dolor e.   .       —     Entrdrono          \    in    \        gia^dino 

I        gave       it    to  both. 
—   ho*  date*  Lo.1 


CHAPTER  VI. 

SUBSTANTIVE  PRONOUNS, 

PERSONAL  AND  CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS, 

THE  Italian  personal  pronouns  are  the  following  : 

Singular.  Plural. 

1st  Person,         T.O,  m.  &  f.,  I;  noi}  ra.  &  f,     we; 

2d  Person,        tu,  ra.  &f.,  thou;       ,         voi}  m.  &  f.,    you; 
f  {      effli.  1 

eSh>  he;  lotegiino, 

3d  Person,^  0*°**0>  m-         he  or  itj    ,  or^"'  m-        Uhey. 
ella.  she:  ^       ^ 


j      ella, 


6h^  U^o, 

she  or  it;      or  ess  e,  f.,         J 

Singular  and  Plural. 

o   r     C  one's  self,  himself,  herself 
3d  Person,         se,  ra.  &  f,    £      .^  tneraselves. 


Conjunctive  pronouns  are  derived  from  the  personal 
pronouns,  and  are  divided  into  conjunctive,  properly 
speaking,  and  relative  conjunctive  pronouns. 

Personal  pronouns  are  varied  with  the  prepositions 
only. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


101 


VARIATION     OF     PERSONAL     PRONOUNS, 


70. 
SINGULAR. 

Personal.  Conjunc.     Relat. 
Subjective          (N.) — io,  I; 

fPoss.    (G.) — dime,  of  me; 

Relat.  <  Attr.    (D.) —  a  me,  mi,  to  me ; 

(  Der.  (Ab.) —  da  me,  from  me  ; 

Objective          (Ac.) —  me,  mi,  me : 

PLURAL. 


Personal.             Conjunc.    Relat. 

Subjective          (N. 

)—  noi, 

we  ; 

(Poss.    (G. 

)  —  di  noi, 

of  us; 

Relat.  <Attr.    (D.' 
(Der.  (Ab.; 

)  —  a  noi,               ne  or  ci, 
)  —  da  noi, 

to  us; 
from  us 

Objective          (Ac.] 

)  —  noi,                   ne  or  czj 

USr 

TV. 
SINGULAR. 

Conjunc.    Relat. 


Personal. 
Subjective          (N.) —  tu, 

(  Poss.    (G.)—  di  te, 
Relat.  I  Attr.    (D.)—  a  te,  ti, 

(Der.  (Ab.V— da*e, 
Objective          (Ac.) —  te,  ti, 


PLURAL. 


Personal. 
Subjective.        (N.) — voi, 

(Poss.    (G.)—  divoi, 
Relat.  <  Attr.    (D.)  —  a  voi, 

(  Der.   (Ab.) —  da  voi, 
Objective         (Ac.) — voi, 


thou  ; 
of  thee  ; 
to  thee  ; 
from  thee  . 
thee  : 


Conjunc.    Relat. 


ye  or  you  ; 
of you; 
to  you; 
from  you ; 
you. 


EGLI. 
SINGULAR. 

Personal.  Conjunc.    Relat. 
(N.)— -egli,  he; 

(Poss.   (G.)—dilui,  ne,       of  him ; 

<  Attr.  (D. )—  a  lui,  gli  or  li,  to  him; 

(Der.  (Ab.)—  da  lui,  ne,       from  him  , 

Objective.        (Ac.)—  lui,  ilotlo,  him: 


Subjective 
Relat 


102  ANALOGY. 


PLURAL. 

Personal.  Conjunc.      Relat. 


f  wrsuuui.  wuujuiit.  jrvuiui. 

Subjective          (N. ) —  egli  or  eglino,  they ; 

C  Poss.    (G.) —  di  loro,  nt,        of  them  ~, 
Relat.  \  Attr.    (D.)—  a  Idro,              Idro,  to  them  ; 

(  Der.  (Ab.) —  da  Idro,  ne,        from  them  ; 
Objective         (Ac.) —  I6ro,                gli  or  li}  them. 


SINGULAR. 


Personal.  Conjunc.     Relat. 
Subjective          (N.) — esso,  he  or  it; 

C  Poss.    (G.) — d'  esso,  ne,        of  him  or  it; 

Relat.  <  Attr,    (D.) —  ad  esso,  gli,  to  him  or  it , 

{Der.  (Ab.) — da  esso,  ,     ne.        fromhimorit; 

Objective          (Ac.) —  esso.  lo.  him  or  it : 


PLURAL.' 

Personal,  Conjunc.     Relat. 
Subjective          (N.) —  essi,  they ; 

C  Poss.    (G.) —  d1  essi,  ne,        of  them  ; 

Relat.  <  Attr.    (D.)~  ad  essi,  to  them  : 

(Der,  (Ab.) — da  essi,  ne,        from  them 

Objective          (Ac.) —  essi,  gli  or  li,  them. 


ELLA. 


SINGULAR. 

Personal.  Coujune.     Relat. 
Subjective          (N.)—  ella,  she ; 

(Poss.    <G.)—  dilei,  ne,       of  her; 

Relat.  ]  Attr.    (D.)—  a  lei,  h,  to  her ; 

(Der.  (Ab.)—  da  lei.  ne,      from  her  ; 

Objective          (Ac.)-lei,  la,  her: 

PLURAL. 

Personal.  Conjunc.     Relat. 
Subjective          (N.) —  elle  or  elleno?  they  ; 

C  Poss.     (G.) — dildro,  nc,        of  them; 

Relat.  \  Attr.     (D.)—  a  I6ro9  Idro,  to  them ; 

(Der.    (Ab.)—  da  Uro,  nt,        from  them 

Objective         (Ac.)—  loroj  l«,  -them. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 


103 


SINGULAR. 


Personal. 
Subjective  (N.)  —  essa, 

fPoss.  (G.)  —  d1  essa  , 
Relat.  <  Attr.  (D.)  —  ad  essa, 

(  Der.  (Ab.)  —  da  essa, 
Objective  (Ac.)  —  essa^ 


Conjunc.     Relat. 

le, 
la, 


. 

she  or  it  : 
of  her  or  it; 
to  her  or  it  ; 
from  her  or  it  ; 
her  or  :    : 


PLURAL. 


Personal. 
Subjective  (N.)  —  esse, 

£  Poss.  (G.)  —  d>  esse, 
Relat.  <  Attr.  (D.)—  ad  esse, 

(Der.  (Ab.)  —  da  esse, 
Objective  .  (Ac.)  —  esse, 


Conjunc,     Relat. 

they; 

ne,       of  them  ; 
to  them  / 
ne,      from  them  ; 
le.  them. 


Personal. 
Subjective          (N.)—     .. 

CPoss.    (G.)  —  di  se, 
Relat.  <Attr.    (D.)  —  a  se, 

(  Der.    (Ab.)  —  da  se, 
Objective          (Ac.)  —  se} 


Conjunc.     Relat. 


of  one's  self; 
to  one's  self; 
from  one's  seli  ; 
one's  self. 


la,  tu,  egli,  ella  ;  noi,  voi,  egli  or  eglino,  elle  or 
etteno,  are-  applied  to  animate  beings  ;  esso,  essa  ;  essi, 
esse  ;  se,  may  be  applied  both  to  animate  and  inanimate 
beings. 

The  pronouns  esso,  essa,  are  used  sometimes  to  express 
the  self-same,  the  very  object  of  which  we  speak  ;  and 
then  they  are  elegantly  supplied  by  the  words  desso, 
dessa,  but  in  the  subjective  only  ;  as, 

in  ESSA  luce,  in  that  very  light  ; 

ESSO  Messtr  Teddldo,  the  same  Messer  Tedaldo  ; 

tu  non  par  DESSO,  thou  dost  not  seem  thyself; 

el?  e  ben  DESSA,  it  is  she,  herself. 


*  Se  is  used  to  express  a  relation  of  identity  with  the  subject,  and  has  no 
jectivc. 


104  ANALOGY. 

In  familiar  conversation,  the  Italians  very  often  employ  lui,  and 
lei,  as  subjectives,  instead  of  egli  and  ella ;  but  this  usage, 
though  authorized  by  some  writers,  ought  never  to  be  followed  in 
the  written  language. 

We  find  also  in  some  classics  egli  and  ella,  used  for  lui  and  lei ; 
and  elle  for  loro ;  as,  memoria  d'  ELLA,  '  memory  of  her' ;  e  sudn 
di  man  con  ELLE,  *  and  striking  of  hands  with  them'  :  and  'tllo  for 


•a*MVj        gu.u,j.ii   j\j\A*.a^ii    u,g  UJ.  .i*  o  i/   iiim     ,     XjLiLil   OlUjUUiItU  X/C//tofcC//  <J  3  t-,      V1JH3JT 

were  pensive' ;  c/t'  alcuna  gloria  i  rei  avrebber  d'  ELLI,  *  for  the 
guilty  souls  would  derive  no  glory  from  them' ;  this  license,  never- 
theless, must  be  left  entirely  to  the  Poets. 

La  for  ella,  le  for  elleno,  and  gli  for  egli  and  for  eglino  ;  as,  LA 
mi  scusi,  'excuse  me' ;  LE  mi  dzcano,  *  tell  me' ;  GLI  era  qui,  '  he 
was  here';  &c.;  are  contractions,  which,  however  common  they 
may  be  in  Tuscany,  and  supported  by  the  authority  of  several 
writers,  are  notwithstanding  to  be  carefully  avoided  in  the  written 
language,  especially  in  an  elevated  style  of  composition. 


The  pronouns  zo,  tu,  egli,  ella,  esso,  are  often  used 
as  mere  expletives  ;  as, 

5'  io  moinssij  io,  if  I  should  die  ; 

tu  di1  tue  parole,  TU,  thou  mayest  say  what  thou 

[pleasest; 

EGI.I  k  una  compassione  a        it  excites  pity  to  see  him ; 
[vedtrlo, 

JELLA  non  andra  cosi,  it  shall  not  be  so  ; 

dndiamo  con  6s so  lui,  let  us  go  with  him. 

I'o  is  sometimes  written  f  ;  and  egli,  eglino ,  are  con- 
tracted into  6i,  and  often  written  e' ;  as, 

i'  non  so  ridire,  I  cannot  say  ; 

EI  dtbbe  avtr  inteso,  he  must  have  heard  ; 

EI  sigittaro  in  sulla  spiagga,  they  leaped  upon  the  shore  ; 

E'  penso,  he  thought ; 

domandb  chi  tffossero,  he  asked  who  they  were, 

When  the  pronouns  me,  te,  se,  are  preceded  by  the 
preposition  con,  'with',  we  often  transpose  the  preposi- 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  „   105 

lion,  make  an  elision  of  tne  n,  and  form  of  them  a  single 
word  ;  as, 

ton  me,  MECO,  wirth  me ; 

con  te,  TECO,  with  thee ; 

con  s£,  SECQ,  with  one's  self,  himself,  &c. 

We  find  in  the  classics  ndsco,  vosco  ;  used  for  £on  not,  e  with  us1, 
and  con  voi,  '  with  you' ;  but  these  expressions  have  become 
obsolete. 


Italian  personal  pronouns  are  very  often  suppressed, 
the  termination  of  the  verb  being  sufficient  to  indicate 
the  person  ;  as, 

andidmo  [n6i]  a  Roma,  let  us  go  to  Rome  ; 

[egli]  domandbchifossero,       he  asked  who  they  were. 


The  English  reflective  pronouns  myself,  thyself,  our- 
selves, &c.,  are  expressed  in  Italian  by  the  personal 
pronouns,  and  the  word  stesso,  m.,  stessa,  f.,  or  me- 
desimo,  m.,  medcsima,  f.,  for  the  singular;  and  stessi, 
m.,  stesse,  f.,  or  medisimi,  m.,  medesime,  f  ,  for  the 
plural;  as, 

Singular.  Plural. 

f      w  stessot         ~]  C      noi  stessi, 


1st   !  or  medesimo,  m.  ^  lf         \  or  m^mmi..,m.  ^ 

Per.)       vo  stessa,  ndi  stesse,      f 

^or  medesima,  f.   J  \^ormedesime,  f.) 

2d  C       tu  stesso,  m.    7  ft  lf          C     »oi  .(>*«,  m.  7  yourseives; 
Per.  (^       tu  stessa,  f.       $  C      ^e  stesse,  i.  yj 


3d 
Per. 


*  stesso,     ~)  himself,        C      eglino  stessi, 
or  esso  stesso,  m.  5      or  itself;  ^  or  essi  stessi,  m. 
ella  stessa,       >  herself,          C      elleno  stesse, 


or  essa  stessa,  f.  3      0**  itself;  ^  or  eisse  st£sse,  f. 

Tone's  self,    ^ 

se  stesso,  m.   J  himself,         I      se  sttssi,  m. 

5e  stessa,  f.       j  herself,          [      se  stesse,  f. 

L     or  itself;  J 


them- 
selves 


106 


ANALOGY. 


EXAMPLES. 


Vld'  W    IN     ESS  A     LtJCE     dltTG 

lucerne.     (Dant.  Par.  8.) 

Quantunque  il  maggiore  a 
diciotC  dnni  non  aggiugnesse, 
qudndo  ESSO  MESSERTEDALDO, 
ricchissimo  venne  a  mdrte. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

Tu  NON  mi  PAR  DESSO. 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  3.) 

ELL'  E  BEN  DESSA,  ancora  e 
in  vita.  (Petr.  s.  290.) 

Chefarebbe  egli  s'fo  MORISSJ, 
fo?  (Macch.  Com.) 

Tu    Di'  TUB    PAROLE,     TU  J    W 

per  me  non  mi  terro  mdi  sdlva, 
se  noi  non  la  incantidmo.  (Bocc. 
g.  7.  n.  1.) 

E'GLI    E    1JNA  COMPASSIONS  A 

VEDERLO.     (Macch.  Com.) 

E'LLA  NON  ANDRA  cosi,  c/i'  io 
non  te  ne  pdghi.  (Boce.  g.  9. 
n.  5.) 

ANDIAMO  CON  ESSO  LUI  A 
ROMA.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

I'  NON  BO  ben  RIDIR  com'  i' 
v*  entrdi.  (Dant.  Inf.  1.) 

E'l     DEBBE     AVERE      1NTESO, 

che  tu  ,ragioni  di  lui.  (Gell. 
Circ.  2.  39.) 

Ond'    EI     SI    GITTAR     tuttl    IN 

STJLLA  SPIAGGIA.  (Dant.  Purg. 
2.) 

Laonde  E'  gli  PEN  so  di  volere 
la  seguente  mattzna  ristordre. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

Mendti  i  gentiluomini  nel 
giardinOj  cortesemente  gli  DO- 

MANDO,  CHI  E'  F6SSERO.    (BoCC. 

g.  10.  n.  9.) 


In  that  very  light  1  saw 
other  luminaries. 

Although  the  eldest  was  not 
arrived  to  the  age  of  eighteen, 
when  this  same  Messer  Tedal- 
do  died  very  rich. 

Thou  dost  not  seem  to  me 
thyself. 

It  is  she  herself,  she  is  yet 
alive. 

What  would  he  do  if  I  should 
die? 

Thou  mayest  say  what  thou 
pleasest;  as  for  me  I  shall 
never  consider  myself  safe,  if 
we  do  not  enchant  her. 

It  excites  pity  to  see  him. 


It  shall  not  be  so,  that  I  will 
not  pay  }^ou  for  it. 

Let  us  go  to  Roms  with  him. 

I  cannot  say  how  I  entered 
it. 

He  must  have  heard,  that 
thou  speakest  of  him. 

Wherefore  they  leaped  all 
upon  the  shore. 

Therefore  he  thought  to 
restore  them  on  the  following 
morning. 

Having  led  tke  gentlemen 
in  the  garden,  he  courteously 
asked  them,  who  they  were. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


107 


E  in  segno  di  .cid,  ne  rdeo 
ME  co  delle  sue  cose  piu  care. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  9.) 

Miofiglio  otf  £,  e  per  che  non 
e  TECO  ?  (Dant.  Inf.  10.) 

Quel  giorno  ch'  w  lascidi 
grave,  ejtensosa — Madonna,  e'l 
mio  cor  SECO.  (Petr.  s.  212.) 

I'o  MEDESIMO  non  so  quel 
ch'  i1  mi  voglio.  (Petr.  s.  103.) 

.E  tut  TU  STESSO,  talora  a  me 
usbergo  di  mm  gloria  tu  sembri. 
(Alf.  Saul.  2.  1.) 

Ma  com9  &,  che  si  gran  rom6r 
non  suone — Per  dltri  messi,  o 
per  LEI  STESSA  il  sentaf  (Petr. 
s.  213.) 

Non  come  fidmma  che  per 
forza  e  spenta,—Ma  che  per 
SE  MEDESMA  siconsume,  (Petr. 
Tri.) 


And  as  a  proof  of  this,  I  will 
take  with  me  those  things 
which  are  the  most  dear  to  her. 

Where  is  my  son,  and  why 
is  he  not  witk  thee  ? 

That  day  when  I  left  my 
lady  serious  and  pensive,  and 
my  heart  with  her.  • 

I  know  not  myseif  what  I 
want. 

And  thou,  thyself,  sometimes 
seemest  to  me  the  shield  of  my 
glory. 

But  how  is  it,  that  so  great  a 
rumor  does  not  sound  through 
other  messengers,  or.  that  she 
does  not  hear  it  herself. 

Not  like  a  flame  which  is 
extinguished  by  force,  but  like 
one  which  consumes  itself. 


EXERCISE    VIII. 

I    know,     better     than    any     other    man,  how    to      do 

so,                                       —        dltro   udmo,  —         far 

that       which       I      please.        God       never  will       ^have 

do          che                    voglio.          Iddio    mdi  non  amcL 

me    for    this      sin.        Thou    wilt    ask 
quisto  peccdto. 


dirdi2 


mercy  on 

misericdrdia  \    di 

her      whether      she      wants      any     thing.        You      appear 
lei  se  vudl  nulla.  parete 


to 


o    be      a      man      of    God,      how      do     you     say      such 
uomo  Dio,      come      —  ditel  cotesto 

words?        Without     expecting     any     reprehension     from 
pardla?  Senza         attendere      ripfensione 

you.  The    magistrate    begun    to     have  pity 

Podestd.       comincid  ad     aver       compassi6nt 


108  ANALOGY. 

1  upon   j      her.        She     pleases     me      so    much,    that    I 
I      dii      I  pidce*        mi1         tdnto,  che 

could     not  express  it.        Having  taken       leave    I  of  I  him, 
potrei2  nonl      dir^,  lo.          Preso  commidtcfi  \  da.1  \    '  2, 

he    I   returned    I   to    his    house.        They     never      return^ 
I   sene  torno  —       cdsa.  mdi  non    rendono2 


it,     and     we     return      it 
Zo,1,     e  rendidmo^  la* 


as     soon    as  we     have 

come  —   abbidmo2 


used        it.        We     are      ready       I  to   I       do    it,     since 
adoperdtcfi  lal.  sidmo     presti        \    di   \      fdr^,lo,  poicke 

it    pleases     you.         She     would     drive     me     out     of     the 
—    place2        vfi.  scaccercbbc2        mil    fu6r  — 

house.        I     have     spoken      I   to    him        of    you.        We 
cdsa.  ko2     rhgiondto3    \      gli1 

make     better  work.        You    promised    I    to  me         I  to 
faccidmo  lavorw.  .    prometteste*  \       mi*  \  di 

let    me  speak  with     I       your      wife. 

fdr^^mi  partdre       \     con  la     \      .vdstra2  donna?.         [State 

joyful,     I   you  are     in  your    house.          j  Do     not    trust 
lietamente,  \  siete        vostra?    cdsa1.          \  Non    vi    fiddte 

to    J    them.        They*  had    all     gone     to     church. 
di  erano  tuttc  anddte  chiesa. 


It    is     he,  himself.         She     I  does     not    seem  I       I  to 

—     E1    —  ,                              non  sembra               \  di 

lo     herself.  Many     years     (they)      have      not     passed. 

t  :.,:?•               .  molto5      dnno6                     sono3      non*    passdti4. 

They     went  with    him.        Come     with    me.        II    have 

-  -  Anddron  :         Venite                        .                     non 

nothing    j    to     do    with    thee.        We      have      seen     them 

ho  nitnte   \     a  far                                   —     albidmo*  veduti3    Gli  l 

ourselves.  She     herself    has    brought    I   them   I   to    me. 


Thou    hast      said       it      thyself.          They        began        to 
-     kdi*       ditto3      Lo1  .  -    comincidrontf  a* 

speak  amongst        themselves. 

ragiondre*  Seco1  z. 

*  They,  in  the  feminine  gender. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


109 


Conjunctive  Pronouns. 

Singular.  Plural, 

let  Per.     t»i,  m.  <fc  f.,      £  ^eme  '>        I  ne  or  ci,  m.  &  f. ,  J  ^  ?s  > 

3dPe,     «,,..*£,     {t^ehf'      }     ,i,m.&f.,      |j£jj3 

1^ZiorZ£,*m.,  to  him  or  it;  Wro,  m.,  to  them  ; 

«7   or  Zo,*  m.,  him  or  it ;  gli  or  II  f  m.,  them  ; 

Ze,*f,,  to  her  or  it;  Mro,  f.,  to  them  ; 

la,*  f; ,  her  or  it  ;  Ze,*  f,  them. 


3d  Per. 


Singular  and  Plural. 


'  si,  m.  & 


jTto  one's  s«lf, " 

to  himself, 
J  to  hererelf, 
]  to  itself  or 
^  to  themselves;  j 


^  of  him  or  it, 
,  nc,  m.  &  f,  <  of  her  or  it, 
^  of  them  ; 


Tone's  self7 
I  himself, 
m.  &  f.,  <(  herself, 
j  itself  or 
^  themselves ; 

C  from  him  or  it, 
w«,  m.  &  f.,  <  from  her  or  it, 
/from  them. 


Mi,  ti,  ne  or  ci,  ui,  are  applied  to  animate  beings 
only ;  the  others  may  be  applied  both  to  animate  and 
inanimate  beings. 

Conjunctive  pronouns  take  the  place  of  personal 
pronouns,  when  these  pronouns  are  in  the  objective  or 
relation  of  attribution,  and  are  closely  connected  with 
a  verb ;  as, 

MI  poUte  torre  [for  poUtt  torre 

A  ME], 
non  TI  pdssono   mudvere  [for 

non  pdssono  muovere  TE], 
NE   sar&bbe   gran  bidsimo  [for 

sarMe  A  NOI  gran  bidsimo], 


you  can  take  away  from 

me; 
they  cannot  move  thee  ; 


it  would  be  in  us  a  great 
fault ; 


*  The  pronouns  z7,  Z0,  £a,  K,  gli,  le,  appear,  in  orthogr  phy,  to  bo  th  •  same 
words^as  the  articles  i'Z,  lo,  la,  li,  gli,  le.  The  learner,  however,  will  observe, 
that  when  the  words  i/,  Zo,  &c.,  are  followed  by  a  noww,  a  verb  in  the  irtfnitiv* 
wood,  or  any  other  word  used  as  a  noun,  they  are  always  articles  ;  but  whom 
'Ihey  are  followed  by  a  Terb  in  a  tense  of  the  indicativ  ,  the  conjunctive,  or  "he 
conditional  mood,  or  when  they  are  joined  to  a  verb,  thej  arc  alway*  * 

pronouns. 

10 


no 


ci  ha  guiddti  [for  ha  guiddti 

NOI], 
OLI  vinne  a  memoria  [for  vtn- 

ne  a  memoria  A  LUI], 
LI  si  bra,  mostrdto   [for  si  ira, 

mostrdto  A  LUI], 
LI     conddnni     [for    conddnni 

LORO], 

IL  chiamb  [for  chiamb  LUI], 
LO  avtsse  fdtto    duUnte    [for 

avtssefdtto  LUI  doUnte,~\ 
LA  mandb  [for  mandb  LEI], 
LE  poUsse  torndre  [for  pottsse 

torndre  A  LEI], 
LE  donerb  [for  donerb  LORO], 
&•«  paruto  LORO  [for  ^ra  pa- 

mfo  A  LORO], 
si  t^efe  davdnti  [for  v&fc  rfa- 

vdnh'  A  SE], 
si  Zaseid  cadtre  [for  toct'6  ca- 

ctere  SE], 

mipidn  di  parldryv  [for^id- 

cc  c:  me  diparldre  DI  ESSO], 

a  qudn'i  NE  giactvuno   [for  a 

qudnti  DI  LORO  giactvano], 


ANALOGY. 

it  has  guided  us  ; 

there  came  into  his  mind  ; 


he  had  shown  himself  to 

him; 
it  should  condemn  them ; 

she  called  him ; 
it  had  afflicted  him  ; 

he  sent  her ; 

it  might  cause  her; 

I  will  give  them  ; 

it  had  seemed  to  them  ; 

he  sees  before  him  ; 
she  let  herself  fall; 

it  pleases  me  to  speak  of 

it; 
from  as  many  of  them  as 

were  abed. 


If  the  conjunctive  pronouns  mi,  ti,  ct,  vi,  li,  lo,  le,  la, 
si,  ne,  are  followed  by  a  verb  beginning  with  a  vowel, 
they  commonly  lose  the  i  and  take  an  apostrophe  in  its 
stead;  as, 


M'  hA  rotto, 
c'  immdlle, 
L'  offendtva, 
N'  Avrtmmo, 


he  has  bruised  me  ; 

thou  suckest  us ; 

he  offended  them ; 

we  should  have  from  him. 


When  they  are  preceded  by  a  verb  they  are  joined  to 
it  so  as  to  form  one  single  word  ;  as, 


dondrMi, 
pdrveTi, 


to  give  me ; 

it  appeared  to  thee  ; 

to  send  him ; 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


11 


,  he  being  in  want ; 

telling  him. 

In  using  the  pronouns  il,  lo,  li,  gli,  la,  le,  we  follow 
the  rules  already  given  with  regard  to  the  articles  il,  lo, 
la,  <  the  ' ;  as, 


IL  consentiy 
chi  LO  scrisse, 
L'  Amero, 
GLI  Aspettdva, 


thou  consentest  to  it ; 
he  who  wrote  it ; 
I  will  love  him ; 
he  expected  them. 


The  pronouns  mi,   ti,  ci,  vi,  si,  ne,  are  often  used 
as  mere  expletives  ;  as, 

io  MI  5o?io,  I  am  ; 

se  tu  TI  hdi  posto  mente,  whether  thou  hast  minded ; 

s  empre  che  tu  ci  viverdi.  as  long  as  thou  livest ; 

£t'o  che  voi  vi  dite,  what  you  say  ; 

si  uscl  del  paldgio,  he  went  out  the  palace ; 

the  NK  fosse  del  budn  what  had  become  of  the  good 
udmo,  man. 


xx  AMP  L  ES, 


V6l  MI     POTETE  Tt)RRE  qudntO 

tengo,  e  DonAKMi,siccdmev6stro 
uomo  a  chi  vi  pidce.  (Bocc.  g. 
3.  n.9.) 

S'  egli  PARVETF  il  fallo  mio 
cosi  grdnde,  che  ^ON  TI  rtissoNO 
Mc6vERE  a  pietdtc  alcuna  le 
amdre  Idgrime,  ne  gli  umili 
prieghi,  muovafi  almeno  questo 
sdlo  mio  atto.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

11    MANDARLO     fuOI'l     dl    COLSCL 

ndstra  cos),  infermo  NE  SAREBBK 

GRAN  BIASIMO.  (BoCC.  g.  1.  n.l.) 

II  vostro  sennot  piu  che  il 
nostro  avvedimento,  ci  HA  GUI- 
BATI.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 


BlSOGNANDOGLI      WIO, 

quantitd  di  dandri,  GLI  VENNE 
A  MEMOKIA  tm  ricco  Giudco. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  3.) 


You  can  take  away  from  me 
all  I  have,  and  give  me,  like 
one  of  your  men,  to  whomso- 
ever it  pleases  you. 

If  my  fault  appeared  to  thee 
so  great,  that  neither  my  bitter 
tears,  nor  my  humble  prayers, 
can  move  thee  to  pity,  at 
least  let  this  single  act  of  mine 
move  thee. 

To  send  him  out  of  our  house, 
so  infirm  as  he  is,  would  be  in 
us  a  great  fault. 

Your  wisdom, more  than  our 
foresight,  has  guided  us. 

Being  in  want  of  a  good  sum 
of  money,  there  came  into  hi§ 
mind  a  rich  Jew. 


ANALOGY. 


11  stgutnte,  di  appdrve  per 
visidne  Cristo  a  Ruberto,  DICEN- 
DOLI,  che  in  fdrrna  di  lebbroso 

LI     SI    ERA     MOSTRATO,    VOlendo 

provdre    la  sua  pietd.     (Giov. 
Vill.  1.  4.  c.  18.) 

O  LI  CONDAKW  i  a  sempiterno 
pidnto.  (Petr.  s.  214.) 

Assdi  volte  invdno  IL  CHIAMO. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.n.  6.) 

Se  d'una  cosa  sola  non  LO 
AVESSE  la  fortuna  FATTO  DO- 
LEKTE.  (Boec  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

Ad  una  lor  possessions  LA  nc 
MANDO.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  7.) 

Cumincid  a  dubitdre,  non  quel 
suo  guarddr  cost  fiso  movesse 
la  sua  rusticitd  ad  alcuna  cosa, 
che  vtrgogna  LE  POTESSE  TOR- 
HARK.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

5'  elle  vi  pidccionot  w  LIB  vi 
DONERO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  9.) 


JVe  ERA  ancora  LOR 
alcuna  volta,  tdnto  gaiamente 
eantdr  gli  usignuoli,  quanta 
quella  mattina  pareva.  (Boce. 
g.  7.  Proem.) 

DAVANTI  si  VEDK  due,  che 
verso  lui  con  una  lanterna  in 
mdno  Tenitno.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n. 
5.) 

E'ssa  sopra  il  sdno  del  Cdnte 
si  LASCIO  con  la  tisia  CADERE. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  &.) 

E'gU  ill  PlAcE  DI  PARLARME. 

(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 
E'gli,  pianamtnte   anddndo, 

A  aUANTI  NE  GIACEVANO,  a  tutti 

in  simil  mani6rataglid  icaptlli. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  2.) 

M'  HA  con  un  bastone  tutto 
SOTTO.  (Bocc.  g.  7»  n.  7.) 


The  following  day,  Christ 
appeared  in  a  vision  to  Robert, 
saying  to  him,  that  he  had 
shown  himself  to  him  in  the 
form  of  a  leper,  to  try  his  pity. 


Or  it  should  condemn  them 
to  eternal  woe. 

She  called  him  many  times 
in  vain. 

If  fortune  had  not  afflicted 
him  in  one  thing  alone. 

He  sent  her  to  a  farm  of 
theirs. 

She  began  to  doubt,  lest  her 
looking  so  fixedly  should  more 
his  uncouthness  to  do  some- 
thing, which  might  cause  her 
shame. 

If  you  like  them,  I  will  giy« 
them  to  you. 

Nor  had  it  ever  seemed  to 
them,  that  the  nightingales  had 
at  any  time  sung  so  cheerfully, 
as  they  appeared  to  do  that 


He  sees  before  him  two  per- 
sons, who  came  towards  him 
with  a  lantern  in  their  hands. 


She  let  her  head  fall  on   the 
bosom  of  the  Count. 


It  pleases  me  to  speak  of  it. 


He,  walking  softly,  from  as 
many  of  them  as  were  abed,  cut 
a  tuft  of  hair  in  the  same  man- 
ner. 

He  has  bruised  me  all  over 
with  a  stick. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


113 


2£  nelV  eterna  pot  si  mal 
€'iMn6LLE.  (Dant.  Inf.  12.) 

Dicendo  che  quello  che  dovea 
rft/ender/eL'oFFENDEVA.  (Fav. 
Esop.  67.) 

Sc  egli  sapesse  lavordr  V6rtot 
io  mi  credo,  che  noi  N'AVREMMO 
buon  servigio.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n. 
1.) 

JVe  tu  IL  CONSENTI,  Amor6. 
(Tass.  Ger.  2.  15.) 

Galeoltofu  il  libra,  e  CHI  LO 
SCRISSE.  (Dant.  Inf.  5.) 

I'o  ho  amdto,  ed  dmo  GuiscAr- 
do,  e  quanta  viverd  L'AMERO. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

GLI     ASPETTAVA.      (BOCC.     g. 

3.  n.  7.) 

I'o  MI  SONO  un  povero  pelle- 
grmo.  (Bocc.  Filoc.  1.  5.) 

I'o  non  so,  SE  TU  T'HAI  POSTO 
MENTE,  come  noi  sidmo  tenute 
strttte.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 

Con  tuo  ddnno  ti  ricorderdi, 

SEMPKE  CHE  TU  CI  VIVERAI,  del 

ncme  mio.     (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.,4.) 

Anddte,  goccioloni ;  vdi  non 
sap6te  cid  CHE  voi  vi  D!TE. 
(Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  6.) 

DEL  PALAGIO  s'usci,  e  fug- 
gissi  a  cdsa.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.) 

La  ddnna  se  ne  venne,  e  DEL 
BUON  UOMO  domandd,  CHE  NE 
FOSSI.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 


And  in  the  eternal  [life] 
thus  miserably  thou  suckest  us 

Saying  that  he  who  ought  to 
have  defended  them,  offended 
them. 

If  he  knew  how  to  cultivate 
the  garden,  I  believe  that  we 
should  have  from  him  good 
service. 

Nor  thou  dost  consent  to  it, 
O  Love. 

The  book,  and  he  who  wrote 
it,  were  [to  us]  Galeottoi 

•  I  have  loved,  and  love  GUIS- 
cardo,  and  will  love  him  ai 
long  as  I  live. 

He  expected  them. 
I  am  a  poor  pilgrim. 


I  know  not,  whether  thou 
hast  minded,  how  close  we  are 
kept. 

To  thy  sorrow  thou  wilt  re- 
member my  name,  as  long  as 
thou  livest. 

Go  away,  fools  ;  you  do  not 
know  what  you  say. 


He  went  out  the  palace, 
and  fled  to  his  house. 

The  woman  came,  and  asked 
what  had  become  of  the  good 
man. 


When  the  pronouns  mt,  ti,  gli,  ne  or  ci,  vi,  .si,  are 

immediately  followed  by  the  pronouns  lo,  la,  gti,  U,  le, 

ne,  they  are  generally  united  and  form  a  single  word;  as, 

mi  lo,  MELO,  him  or  it  to  me  ;       ci  li,     CELT,    them  to  us ; 

'ti  la,  TELA.  her  or  it  to  thee  ;    vi  gli,  VEGLI,  them  to  you. 

10* 


114  ANALOGS 

Union  of  the  Pronouns  m,  w,  GLI,  NE  or  ci,  ri,  si, 
with  the  Pronouns  LO,  LA,  GLI,  LI,  NE. 

MI,  to  me  y 

mi  lo,  (inviate)  MELO,*  (send)  him  or  it  to  me  j 

mi  la,  (mostrate)  MELA,  (show)  her  or  it  to  me  ? 


m*  #/*»  )  C  , 

mi  /t,    |       (prestate)  <  MELI,    >        (7enrf)  them  to  me  ; 

mi  le,    )  C  MELE,    3 

T  (give)  to  me  of  it,  or  t<x 

mi  ne,  (date)  MENE?  <  me  of  them  ;  some  of  it, 

(  [or  some  of  them, 

TI,  to  thee  ; 

it  lo,  TELO*   (invio),  (I  send)  him  or  it  to  thee  ; 

ti  Ja,  TELA  (mostro),  (I  show)  her  or  it  to  thee  ; 


ti  gli,  TEGLI 

ti  li, 


TELI    >  (presto),  (I  lend)  them  to  thee  ; 

ti  It,  TELE     ) 


GLI,  to  him  or  her  ; 
K  fo,          OLIELO  (invia),  J  ^  sends)  him  ^ 

GLI^LA  (mostra),  |  ^Ae  slww 

gK  It,  OLIELI    )  /n-i-t,-,  5  ^e  lends)  them  to  him  or 

glile,  OL,6LE   ^Prt  ^  [her; 

f  (he  gives)  to  him  or  her  of 

7.  5GLIENE?Mi\  )  it,  or  to  him  or  her  of  them; 

**>       \  —  L^NE  J  ^A)»  S  _to  her  of  it,  or  to  her  of 

[them  ;  &c. 

*  Some  writers  use  these  pronouns,  with  exception  of  glielo^  &c.,  separate  ;— 

UK  JLO    8E  LO.  NE  LO  OT  CE  LO,  &e. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS.  115 

NE  or  ci,  to  us  5 

(mostrate)    <  (show)  her  or  it  to  us  ; 


ne  gli,     ^  /  NEGLI, 

or  ci  glij  I  I  or  CEGLI, 

or  lift,    /  (P«*t*te)     <^CELI,   /  (knd ' them  to  U8  ' 
ne  le        V  /  NELE, 

or  ci  fe,    /  \  or  CELE, 


(date\  CENE  J  (8im)  to  us  of  i4'  or  to  u* 

tnc'  NJE)       ^     J  [ofthem;&c. 

vi,  to  you ; 

vi  lo,  VELO  (inviamo),  (we  send)  him  or  it  to  you ; 

vi  Za,  VELA  (mostriamo),  (we  show)  her  or  it  to  you  ; 

vi  gli,          VEGLI  i 

vi  ft,  VELI     >  (prestiamo),         (we  lend)  them  to  you  ; 

vi  /e,  VELE    ) 

^ne,,    v^  (d^o),      s^^r^Tr^Vc: 

si,  to  one's  self; 

Vi  lo,  SELO  (inviano),  J  ^%  ^rf;  him  or  it  to 

^  [themselves ; 


M  ia,  SELA  (mostrano),  J  ^e^  Mo^  r}!er  or  *  to 

^  [themselves  ; 

si  gli,  SEGLI  )  r  ,.,      ,     ,,  ., 

W  /7  m?r  T      V  rnv^^tann^  5  I  ^C3/  '€n«/    them  to  them- 

S£  SLE    S  <  [">«»! 

C  ^/iey  g^vcj  to  themselves 

sine,  SENE  (danno),  <  of  it,  or  to  themselves  of 

<  [them;  &c. 


MeJo9  mo,  glielo,  nelo  or  celo,  veto,  selo,  &c., 
before  a  verb  beginning  with  a  consonant,  except  z,  and 
^  followed  by  another  consonant 9  often  drop  the  o ; 


116  ANALOGY. 

and  before  a  verb  beginning  with  a  vowel,  drop  the  o 
and  take  an  apostrophe  in  its  stead  ;  as", 

MEL  visse,  he  told  it  to  me ;      *> 

TEL  Trarrbj  I  will  draw  it  for  you  ; 

-   non  GLIEL  ceZat,  I  did  not  conceal  it  from  him  ; 

GLIEL'  \ptrsi,  I  revealed  it  to  him  ; 

CEL'  Avetefatta,  you  have  deceived  us ; 

SEN'  vntrb,  she  entered. 

When  the  pronouns  mi,  ti,  ct,  vi,  gli,  U>  &c.,  are 
preceded  by  the  adverb  ecco,  c  behold',  they  form  with 
this  a  single  word  ;  as, 

^ccomi,  behold  me ; 

Decoct,  behold  us ; 

cccoZc,  behold  them. 

When  the  pronoun  lo  is  preceded  by  the  adverb  non, 
'no,  not',  it  is,  more  elegantly,  changed  into  il  and  joined 
with  the  adverb  in  a  single  word  ;  as, 

non  t7,          NOL  vide,  she  does  not  see  him  ; 

non  il,          NOL  ntgo,  I  do  not  deny  it. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tu  dV  (Z«/drMELO  vedere  ne'  Thou  sayest,  that  thou  wilt 

mm.     (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  4.)  make  rne  see  it    amongst  the 

living. 

MEL  BISBE  il  padre  mio,  ch'io  My    father   told     me,    that 

mi    guarddssi  —  Di    per    gid  J,  should    take    care   never  to 

mdi  nella  Mcssenia   il   piede.  set  my  foot  in  Messenia. 
(MafivMer.  3.  4.) 

Per  vederfdre  il  tomo  a  qu&  To     see     those  v  maccaroni 

moGcherdni,  e  fcfrMENE  una  sa-         falling  down,  and  give   myself 
tolla.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  3.)  a  bellyful. 

Sznza  alcun  maestro  w  TEL  -Without  any  master,  I  will 

TRARRO    ottimamentc.      (Bocc.         draw  it  for  you  very  well, 
g.  7.  n.  9.) 

I'o  non  mene  maravzglio,  nl  I  do  not  wonder  at  it,  nor  do 

TENE  so  ripigliare.     (Bocc.   g.         I  know  how  to  reprove  you  for 
3.  n.  3.)  it, 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


117 


Ifo  ch'era  d'ubbidir  disideroso 

— NoN     GLIEL     CELAI    ma    tllttO 

GLIEL'    APERSI.      (Dant.   Inf. 
10.) 

Gli  amici  noi  albidmo  quali 
CEGLI  eleggidmo.  (Bocc.  g. 

La  ddnna  udendo  questo,  e 
dopo  molte  riconfermazidni 
/(i^eLENE  dal  Zeppa,  credendolot 
disse.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  8.) 

Vedindo  I'uomo  la  semplicitd 
del  fanciullo  GLIENE  vennc 
pietd.  (Matt.  Vill.  10.  30.) 

V6i  CEL'  AVETE  FATTA. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

Qudnte  CENE  vedete  voi,  It 
eui  bellezze  si6n  fdtte  cdme  It 
mie?  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  2.) 

C6me  questo  aweniito  mi  sia^ 
iritvemente  VEL  faro  chidro. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  4.) 

Mi  place  di  /arvENE  piu 
chidre  con  una  piccola  novelUtta. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  3.) 

In  processo  di  tempo  SB  LB 
riprese.  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  3.) 

-    SEN'    ENTRO   nella   cdsa   del 
pover  uomo.   (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  3.) 

Lo  scalar  e,  accostdtosi  alVu- 
sciOjdisse:  "  E^CCOMI  qui,  ma- 
ddnna."  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

E'CCOLE,  die  ella  medesima 
piang&ndo  meV  ha  riportdte. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

E'lla  o  lo  spr6zza,  o  NOL  VEDE, 
o  nons'avvede.  (Tass.  Ger.  2. 
16.) 

Ifo  NOL  posso  negdr,  e  NOL 
NEGO.  (Petr.  s.  202.) 


I,  who  was  desirous  of  obey- 
ing, did  not  conceal  it,  but  re- 
vealed to  him  all. 


*.    We  have  such  friends  as  we 
choose  them  for  us. 


The  lady  hearing  this,  and 
after  many  confirmations  of  it 
made  to  her  by  Zeppa,  believ- 
ing it,  said . 

The  man  seeing  the  sim- 
plicity of  the  boy,  took  pity  up- 
on him. 

You  have  deceived  us. 


How  many  of  them  do  you 
see,  .whose  beauties  are  such 
as  mine  ? 

How  this  happened  to  me, 
I  will  explain  to  you  briefly. 

It  pleases  me  to  make  you 
more  conscious  of  it,  with  a 
small  tale. 

In  the  progress  of  time  he 
took  them  back. 

She  entered  in  the  house  of 
the  poor  man. 

The  scholar,  coming  to  the 
door,  said  :  "  Behold  me  here; 
madam." 

Behold  them,  which  she  her- 
self weeping  has  brought  back 
to  me. 

She  either  despises  him,  or 
does  not  see  him,  or  does  not 
understand. 

I  cannot  deny  it,  and  do  not 
deny  it. 


118  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE  IX. 

But    what    wishest    thou    that  I     should    say    to    her 

Ma        che          vudi                      che  dicaz             1 

for    you,     I      if    it      happens  that      I     should     speak 

da  tiia  pdrte,    \      se             avvidne  che                    favdlli* 

to     her?         They     will    rob    us,  and    perhaps     will    take 
ruberdnnd*       *,  e%        forsc4        torrdnno^ 

(to    us)     even      I     our     I       life.  I      will       lodge    you 

5       dncke              la       \       vita.  albcrgherd%           1 

willingly,      as      I      can.        The  youth    told    him     every 
volentieri,     come          potro.                giovanttto  disse2         J       6gni 

thing.        I      will      pardon        him  willingly,     and    pardon 

c6sa.           —        perdoneroS                 2  Voleniieril,     e4    perdono7 

him     now.          He     gave     to     him  his     I      benediction, 


6      ,5ra5.  _      Di^ 


lasua  I        bcnedizione, 


holding      him     for    a    very    holy    man.        How     1     doei 
tentndo^,  sdnto   uomo.  Che       \ 

it    appear    |    to     thee?        Have  I     well     kept 


1      ?  ho'2       3      ben*     serbdta5 


my 
la* 


promise     to    you  ?        My    brother    writes     to     me,      that 
promessa*  1    ?          mio3    frattllo*    Scrive1^,          *,  che 


without    any    fail,    I  I  should     send 
sinza      alcun  fdllo,       \  dbbia  manddti* 

gold    florins ;    I  otherwise  1   I  his 


to  him  one  thousand 


<Wro2  Jiorino1 ;  |     se  non?     \    \  la"7 


head     will     be     cut     oft* 
testa8          sard6         taglidta* 

(to  him.)        I     have     not     deceived     you    I     to     I     deprive 
4.  Ao3       non1     inganndta4  \     per     \        tor^ 

you     of     I    your    property.  I          Certainly     although      thou 
il      vdstro.  Certo         quantunque 

affirmest    it,    I    I    do     not    believe    I    that    thou    believes! 
aftrmi*         \.     3     |        non      crtdo4  \      che5        e          creda* 

it.        Having      turned      himself     to      I    his    I      wife,      he 
7.         Volto I     la     I     moglie,      — 

asked       her    if    she    had      had    them.        If   thou   I     dost 
domando2      1      se3  avesse6  avuti4        5.          Se  \       non 

not    do    it,    I    thou     wilt    repent    thyself    of  it    so    many 
fdi2         lo^y  \  pentcrdi6  tdnte 

times,    that    thou      1    wilt.      die      I      of    it. 
volt*,       cA«  I  vorrdi  morire2  \  l. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  119 

He     granted    it    to    him       freely.  I     want      to    go 
concedetteS                            Liber  amente^.  —  Vdglio      and  arc 

and   I    tell    him,  that  he    j  should  go  away:  Leave 

a      j     dir^       1,     che  \    sene  vdda.  Ldscia^, 

me,    I     beg    it    of    thee     (thee  of  it).        That    which    he 
,        prego*  —    —      —  1  Quello       che 

afterwards    said    to    me,    I     do     not    dare     to    tell    it    to 
pot          disse%  1  ,  non  oso        dir^, 

you,    if    first    you     do  not      pardon      me.        The        song 
,    se  prima    non      per donate*       1.  2  canzone3 

being  finished,  the    master    said :    "  What    dost   thou  think 
Finital,  maestro    disse :      "  Che         —       —        — 

of    it       (does  it  apvear  to  thee  of  it)?"  You    did    not 

—   —  —   —  pdre'2  non 

believe      it,    when    I    told    it    to    you.        Having       kept 
eredevdte2    1,    qudndo*       dissi*  4    .         Avendo^,  serbdti2 

them    full    a    year    I    to    I  return  them    to    him,     I     gave 
gli1       len3    4    dnnob   \   per6  \  render7^,    9  8^,  10  diedil~ 

them     away     for    the    love    of    God.        BehoM    me ;  what 
11        amdr  Dw.  ;    che 

I    do    you    want    I    of   I    me  ?        Behold     one    (of  them), 
volete  I    da    j          f  1^  una3  z 

behold     another    of    them, 
'x^  uridltra3  2. 


RELATIVE      AND      INTERROGATIVE 
P  R  O  N  O  U  N  S  . 

Relative  Pronouns. 

Singular  and  Plural. 

Chi,  m.  &  f.     who,     he  or  she  that,     they  that ; 

$;£:&?:}  wh°'  which' that' 

Singular.  Plural. 

quale,  m.  &  f.  who,  which,         qudli,  m.  &  f 

Chi  refers  to  persons  only ;  che,  ctii,  qudte,  both  to 
persons  and  things* 


1QO  ANALOGY. 

Che  is  chiefly  used  in  the  subjective,  and  citi  in  all 
other  relations,  but  the  subjective;  chi,  quale,  are  used 
in  all  their  relations  ;  as, 

CHI  qfftndc,  6dia,  he  that  offends,  hates  ; 

A   cm  non  si   mttte  navi*  to  him  who  does  not  set  him- 

gdndo,  self  navigating; 

qutlla,  CHE  io  ctrco,  she,  whom  I  seek ; 

gli  occhi  DI  CHE  io  parldi,  the  eyes  of  which  I  spoke  ; 

A  cui  si  amnidglia,  to  which  she  unites  herself; 

DACUI  fosse.  V  ingiuria  ri-  from  whom  the    offence  was 

ceviua,  received  ; 

IL    QUALE    tra    piactvole  who  was  an  agreeable  young 

giovane,  man  ; 

pr6sso  ALLA  QUALE  ska  ri-  near  which  should  be  situated 

posto  un  diletUvole  piano,  a  delightful  plain ; 

uno  BE'  quALi  ira  chiama-  one  of  whom  was  called  Pan> 

to  PanfUo,  philus ; 

i  nomi  DELLE  QUALI  roc-  whose  names  I  would  relate* 

conterti, 


Cui  is  generally  used  instead  of  chi,  che,  qudle  ;  as, 

non  guarddndo  cui  [or  CHI]         not  minding  whom  she  jeered; 

motteggidsse, 
colti,  cui  [or  CHE]  tgli  amd-        she,  whom  he  loved  ; 

va, 
colui,  cui    [or   IL   QUALE]         he,  whom  I  killed, 

io  uccisi, 


Che  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  qudle  ;  as, 

un  cavalitr,  CHE  [or  IL  QUA-  a  knight,  whom  Italy  honors ; 

LE]  Italia  onorat 

la  misiria  in  CHE  [or  NEL-  the  misfortune  into  which  she 

LA  QU^LE]  tra  venuta,  had  fallen  : 

Sometimes,  it  is  used  with  the  article  il,  in  the  signifi- 
cation of  la  qudl  cosa,  *  which  thing' ;  as, 

JL  CHE  [or  LA  QUAL  COSA]         which  thing  displeased  them  ; 
dispidcque  loro, 

BEL  CHE  avvedutosi,  which  thing  he  having  ob- 

served. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  121 

Sometimes  it  is    used  in   the  signification   of  cosa, 
*  thing'  ;  che  cosa,  c  what  thing'  ;  as, 

un  bel  CHE  [or  una    bella        a  fine  thing  j 
cos  A], 

sinza  saper  CHE   for  CHE        without  knowing  what  thing 
COSA]  sperare,  to  hope  : 

And  sometimes  it  is  equivalent  to  the  English  pronoun 
€  what'  only;  as, 

CHE  doldre  io  sento,  what  pain  I  feel  ; 

CHE  dance  tu  di',  what  stories  thou  tellest 

Che  before    a    vowel  drops  the  er  and    takes  an 
apostrophe  in  its  stead  ;  as, 


CHJ  Eo-Zi  e  usdto,  which  is  wont  ; 

di  CH'  io  parlai,  of  which  I  spoke. 


Quale  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  chi;  as, 

f6lle  e  QUALE  [or  CHI]  crtde,      foolish  is  he  who  helieves  ; 
QUALE  [or  CHI]  piu  possMe,      he  who  [possesses]  has  more  : 

And  sometimes  it  is  equivalent  to  the  English  pronoun 
*  what  '  ;  as, 


/o'sse  la  cagidne,  what  the  cause  was  ; 

quALE  fosse  V  hnimo  di  lei,      what  her  mind  was. 

Qudle,  unless  followed  by  z,  or  s  followed  by  another 
consonant,  in  the  singular  drops  the  e;  and  in  the  plu- 
ral makes  quai,  and  qua'?  as, 

QU^L  amore,  what  love  ; 

la  quAL  cosa,  which  thing  ; 

t  qu^i  vizj,  which  vices  ; 

dlle  quA*  lettere,  to  which  letters. 


To  avoid  the  ambiguity,  which  would  arise  in  Ital- 
ian, from  the  inversion  of  the  different  words  of  a  sen- 

U 


122  ANALOGY. 

tence,  when  the  pronouns  che,  quale,  refer  lo  the 
object  of  the  proposition,  they  are  changed  for  the 
pronoun  cui.  Thus  the  phrase,  { the  city  which  the 
wood  conceals',  if  *  city'  is  the  subject  of  the  proposi- 
tion, is  rendered  la  cittd  CHE  or  la  Q.UA'LE  il  bosco  ascon- 
de,  <  the  city  which  conceals  the  wood' ;  but  if c  city'  is 
the  object  of  the  proposition,  then  it  is  rendered  la  citta 
cui  ilbosco  ascbnde,  '  the  city  which  the  wood  conceals' ; 
as, 

Vuomo  CHE  Dio  non  teme,  the  man  who  does  not  fear 

God; 

f  udmo  cui  sdnno  piglia,  a  man  who  is  seized  by  sleep. 


Instead  of  di  cui,  del  or  dilla  quale,  dii  or  delle 
quali  ;  da  cui,  ddl  qudh  ;  con  cui,  col  quale  ;  per  cui, 
per  lo  quale,  &c.,  we  often  find  used  the  adverb  onrfe, 
which  then  assumes  the  nature  of  a  relative  pronoun  ;  as, 

quei   sospiri  ONDE    [or  DI        those    sighs    with    which  I 
cui]  io  nudriva  il  cuore,  nourished  my  heart ; 

nilla    prigione    ONDE   [or        in  the  prison  from  which  she 
DALLA  QU^LE]  k.  sciolta,  is  released ; 

ogni  Idccio  ONDK  [or  COL        every    tie    with    which    my 
QUALE]     U    mio   core  &  heart  is  bound ; 

awinto, 

quillo    usciuolo    ONDE    [or        that  little  door  through  which 
PER  LO  QUALE]  6ra  en-  he  had  entered. 

trdto, 

Before  a  vowel,  onde  drops  the  e,  and  takes  an  apos- 
trophe instead  of  it ;  as, 

OND'  io,  of  which  I ; 

OND'  Era,  through  which  he  [was]  had. 


Chi,  che,  cui,  are  varied  with  the  prepositions  only  ; 
quale  is  varied  both  with  the  prepositions  and  the  article 
il  or  la,  c  the',  according  to  the  gender  of  the  object  it 
refers  to. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


123 


The  prepositions  di}  «,   are  often  elegantly  suppressed  before 

.';;;  as, 


in  cdsa  [di]  cui  era  mortot 

v6i  [a]  cui  fortuna  ha  posto 
in  mdno  ilfrdno, 


in  whose  house  he  had  died  ; 

you,  into  whose  hands  fortune 
has  put  the  reins. 


EXAMPLES. 


CHI     Ol'FEIfDE,     ODIA,     6    UOU 

dimcntica.     (Dav.  Vit.  Agr.) 

Qucl  piacere,  CH'  EGLI  E 
USATO  di  dare  A  CHI  trdppo  SON 
si  METTE  n&  suoi  pclagki  NA- 
VIGANDO.  (Bocc.  Proem.) 

QUELLA,  CH'iO    CERCO    C  71071 

ritrdvo  in  terra.     (Petr.  s.  34.) 

GLI  OCCHI  DI  CH'IO  PARLAI 
si  caldamente.  (Fetr.  s.  251.) 

Moltisongli  animdli  A  ct7i 
si  AMMCJGLIA.  (Dant.  Inf.  1.) 

Nella  mente  ritorndndosi  chi 
egli  era,  e  qudl  FOSSE  L'lNGitJ- 
RIA  mcEVtJTA,  c  perche,  e  DA 
cuj.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

Dioneo,  IL  auALE,  ollre  ad 
ognidltro,  ERA  PIACEVOL  GIO- 
VANE.  (Bocc.  Introd.) 

U'Tia  montdgna  dspra  ederta, 

PRESSO    ALLA     dUALE    UN    BEL- 

j.issiMO  pidno  e  dilettevolc  sia 
rip6sto.     (Bocc.  Introd.) 

DE'     Q.UALI     1JNO      ERA     chl(L~  * 

mito  PAMFILO.    (Bocc.  Introd.) 

Sette  gidvani  donnc,  i  NOMI 
DELLE  auALi  io  in  prdpria  fdr- 
maracconterei.  (Bocc.  Introd.) 

NON     GUARDANDO     CUI     MOT- 

TEGGIASSE,  credetido  vlncere  fu 
-cinta..     (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  10.) 

COLEI  maritdndOj  cui  EGLI 
AMAVA.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  6.) 


He  that  offends,  hates,  and 
does  not  forget. 

That  pleasure,  which  it  is 
wont  to  give  to  him  who  does 
not  set  himself  navigating 
too  much  through  its  seas. 

She  whom  I  seek,  and  do 
not  find  on  earth. 

The  eyes  of  which  I  spoke  so 
warmly. 

Many  are  the  animals  to 
which  she  unites  herself. 

Revolving  in  his  mind,  who 
he  was,  and  what  the  offence 
received  was,  and  why,  and 
;from  whom  received. 

Dioneo,  who  was  agreeable 
beyond  every  other  young 


A  mountain  rough  and  steep, 
near  which  is  situated  a  very 
beautiful  and  delightful  plain. 


One  of  whom  was  called 
Pamphilus. 

Seven  young  women,  whose 
names  I  Would  relate  in  their 
true  form. 

Not  minding  whom  she 
jeered,  believing  to  conquer 
she  was  conquered. 

Marrying  her,  whom  he 
loved. 


124 


ANALOGY. 


COLIJI,  ctfi  fo  cccftfi. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

S6pra  zl  mdnte  Tarpeo,  can- 
zcn,  vcdrdi — UN  CAVALIER,  CH' 

ITALIA    tutta    ON6RA.       (PetT.    C. 

6.) 

Diana,  che  conosceva  LA  MI- 
SERIA  IN  CHE  Biancafidre  ERA 
VEstjTA,  temper 6  le  sue  ire  con 
giiisto  freno.  (Bocc.  Filoc.  1. 

Avevan  sentito  perck£  presa 
la  Ninetta  fdsse ;  IL  CHE  fdrte 
DispiAcoruE  LORG.  (Bocc.  g.  4. 
n.3.) 

DEL  CHE  AWEDtfrosi  Mar- 
celto^  disse.  (Dav.  Stor.  ).  4.) 

Mi  pareva  UN  BEL  CHE  Ves- 
sernefudra.  (Bern.  rim.  1.  74.) 

La  gidvane  prese  Iu6no  augic- 
rio  d'  aver  questo  n6me  udito, 
e  comincid  a  SPERAR  SENZA 

SAFER  CHE.      (BoCC.  g.  5.  D.  2.) 

Dio  il  sa,  CHE  DOLC^RE  to 
SENTO.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.) 

Po  non  so  che  rfndreuccio,  ne 
CHE  CIANCE  son  quclle,  che  TU 
Di*.  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  5.) 

F6LLE     E     QUAL     CREDE,    eke 

per  sudi  consigli  mudver  possa 
Vdrdine  del  citlo.     (Dittam.) 

QDAL  PIU  genie  POSSIEDE — 
Colui  e  piu  da1  su6i  nemici  av- 
v6Uo.  (Petr.  c\  29.) 

Laonde  fdtto  ckiamdre  il 
Siniscalco,  e  domanddto  auiL 
FOSSE  del  romlre  LA  CAGIONE. 
(Bocc.  g.  6.  Proem.) 

La  donna,  conoscendo  CIUAL 
r6ssE  L'ANIMO  pi  LEI,  lasciS 
stare  le  parole.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n, 
8.) 

QUAL  AMORE  avrcble  i  sospiri 
di  Titofdtti  a  Gisippo  nel  cudr 
serUire.se  non  costei?  (Bocc. 
g.  10.  n.  6.) 


He,  whom  I  killed. 

On  the  Tarpeian  mountain, 
O  Song,  thou  wilt  see  a  knight^ 
whom  all  Italy  honors. 

Diana,  who  knew  the  mis- 
fortune into  which  Biancafiore 
had  fallen,  moderated  her  anger 
with  a  proper  restraint. 

They  had  heard  why  Ninetta 
had  been  taken ;  which  thing 
displeased  them  much. 

Which  thing  Marcellus  har- 

ing  observed,  said. 

Tt  appeared  to  me  a  fine  thin/^ 
to  be  out  of  ft. 

The  girl  took  it  as  a  good 
omen,  to  have  heard  this  name, 
and  began  to  hope,  without 
knowing  what  [thing]  to  hope. 

God  knows  [it]  what  pain  I 
feeL 

1  know  not  what  Andreuccio, 
or  what  stories  these  are  which 
thou  tellest. 

Foolish  is  he  who  believes, 
that  be  can  change  the  decrees 
of  heaven  by  his  deliberations. 

He  who  has. more  subjects, 
is  surrounded  by  more  enemies. 


Having,  therefore,  caused  the 
senechal  to  be  called,  and  hav- 
ing asked  what  the  cause  of  the 
noise  was. 

The  woman,  knowing  what 
her  mind  was,  abandoned  the 
conversation. 

What  love  could  the  sighs 
of  Titus,  have  caused  Gisippus 
to  feel  in  his  heart,  if  not  that  of 
her. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


125 


LA  Q.UAL  c6sA  veggtndo  An- 
dreucdo.     (Boec.  g.  2.  n.  5.) 


vizj  procedono  da 
<;uesta  xclenosa  radicc.  (Aram. 
Ant.  317.) 

A'LLE  Q.UA'  LETTEKE  io  mi 
rimctto.  (Casa.  lett,  18.) 

Che  atttnde  ciascun  UOM  CHE 
Dfo  VON  TEME.  (Dant.  Inf.  3,) 

E  cdddi  c6me  L'  UOM  cui 
SONKO  riGLiA.  (Dant.  Inf.  3.) 

V6i  che  ascoltdte  in  rime 
xpdrse  il  sudno  —  Di  aujsi  sospf- 

RI  OND*    fo    NUDRIVA     IL    CUORE. 

(Petr.  e.  1.) 
NELLA  BELLA  PRIGIONE  OND' 

OR  A  E  SCIOLTA  —  P6cO    CTtt    Stdtd 

ancor  V  alma  gentile.     (Petr.  e. 
44.) 

/'  agglo  in  6dio  la  spente,  e  i 
deliri  —  Ed  OGNI  LACCJO  ONDE'L 

Mfo  COR    E    AYVINTO.       (Petr,  S~ 

75.) 
PER  auELLo  USCIUOLO,  OND' 

KRA      ENTRATO,    il    miSC,  fufoi. 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

It  budn  uomo,  is  CASA  cui 
MORTO  ^RA,  disse.  (Bocc.  g.  4. 
n.  8.) 

V6l,  CIJI   FORTUNA   IJA    POSTO 

is   MA  NO  it  frtno  —  Dellc  belle 
conirdde.     (Petr.  c,  29.) 


thing     Andreuccie 


Which 
seeing. 

Which    vices  proceed  from 
this  venomous  root. 

To  which  letters  I  refer. 


Which  waits  for  every  maa 
who  does  not  fear  God. 

And  I  dropped  down,  like  a 
man  who  is  seized  by  sleep. 

You  who  hear  in  scattered 
rhymes  the  sound  of  those  sighs 
with  which  I  nourished  my 
heart. 

The  gentle  soul  had  been  but 
a  short  time  in  the  beautiful 
prison  from  which  she  is  now 
released. 

I  hold  in  hatred  the  hope, 
the  ravings,  and  every  tie  with 
which  my  heart  is  bound. 


She  put  him  out  of  that  little 
door  through  which  he  had 
entered. 


good    man,    in   whose 
house  he  had  died,  said. 

You,  into  whose  hands  for 
tune  has  put  the  reins  of  the 
beautiful  countries. 


EXERCISE    X. 


He   determined  i       to    find        I 
Pensd        I  di  voler  trovdre  \ 

This      wretched  little  man  who   is 
Qussto  cattivo          —  e'2 


who    had      done      this. 
avcssc-  fat  to*  questo1. 

here,        I    saw    there 


(that 


was)    sleeping, 
si         dormiva, 


whilst 
mentrc 


I 


saw 
vidi* 

was      dividing 
divideva3 

11* 


the 
i 


]*26  ANALOGY. 

things  stolen  with   him  whom  afterwards   I    killed.     Render 
furto*  colui  --  ucdsi. 


me  at  least  the  clothes  I  (of    mine)  \    (the)  which     I     have 
almeno  pdnno  \        miei  ko3 

left     there.        (The)  Fiammetta,  whose     hair*     was    curly, 
lascidiP  ri2.  ,  capello   erano  crespv, 

long,    and    of    the    color    of    gold.        This    is    the    ring, 
lungo,     e        —      —     6ro.          Qucsto  £  anello, 

which     she     already     carried     I     to     I     France     the     first 
gia?         porto*  in      \     Frdncia  prim*) 

time      that      she      made      that      journey      I    with     her 
rdlta  fece        quel      cammino  col 

brother.        Neither     I,    nor      the      one      from      whom    J 
fratello.  ,       ne  colui 

received     her,         ever      knew     I   whose     daughter 

r.hhi?  *  -n.nn  sni;f>.rm,rma  mAi?  \  *        •fi.fr1.itntl.aQ 


she 
si 


was.     I      She,   who    knew     well,     that     which     she        had 
fdsse.*  I  ,  sapira    bene,      do 


to     do.        Having     turned     herself    to     Pamphilus,  who 
a1  /arcs.        -      Rivolta     —  -                Panfilo, 

sat        I    at    I  her    right,        pleasantly      said    to  him.  The 

sedeva*  \  dlla1  \  sua*  de  strap  piacevolmente*  dissc?             *.  3 


first    (of  whom),    to  whom  the     queen      gave 
primo*      i2567      rcgina? 


such    a 
tal9 

charge,     was    Philostratus,     who     began     in    this          way. 
cdn"c010,      fu         FildstratOj  -  comincio         questo  maniera. 

Are    you    that    woman,     who      must      come       to      speak 
Siete  quello     ddnna,  dovetcz     venire3      c4   parldre$ 

to    him  ?       The    young   man  is    the      son      of  Landolphus 
1 1  gldvane  e    —    figlMlo          Landdlfo 

of    Procida,    by    (the)    whose     means     thou     art     a    king; 
,      per  -       dpera*  se'     —      re; 

the    young    woman    is    the     daughter    of  Marin   Bulgaro, 
gidxane  e      —       figliudla 

(the)  whose    power    causes   that    thou    art    not    now     sent 
potenza       fa  23     ^a&   non*    dggi*     scac- 

away      I  from  I      Tschia. 

riti/fl       \     di     I 


*  Hair,  in  the  plural  number. 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  127 

The     woman,     hearing    him     speak      whom      she      held 
donna j        udcndo    costiii  parldre  tencva 


for    a     dumb     man,    was     quite     amazed. 
tiitta  stordl. 


—    mutolo 


She  went 
sen'     vsci9 

out  I  of  the   church,    hy       that     way  through  which  he  had 
9    chiesa,™  Pen    quello2   via*  4  5      —  era9 

come.         Now,        determine    I   without    any    other    delay, 


venuto.'*         Or, 


ti   consiglia     \      scnza  dltro        indugia, 


and    j      take      I  that    man     whom    you     wish  most.      To 

t      J  ti  piglia*  j  -    -             *      -     ruck'3  piu.* 

(the)    which,    I     could    not    resist,      for      any  thing      in 

i7  nonQ  resistere*             •  ~  cdsa2 


the       world.        By       the      hundred       steps       by       which 
3     mdndo.4         Per  scaglidne    per 

j  one     ascends  j    to    the     Tarpeian    rock.          At     I     (the) 
j    si          sdle       I  Tarpeo        -  .  Di 

which     thing,     all     Uie     others    frightened        began          to 
cosa.    tutto  dltro        spavcntdti     tomincidrcno^    a' 

flee.  He    saw    the      lady,      who      loves    my     brother. 

fuggire*  vide  ddnna,  dma      mw     fratelh. 

Behold    the     young     man,    whom      his      daughter      loves, 
E'cco  gidvane,  sua?       figtia3          dma.' 


'Interrogative  Pronouns. 

The  relative  pronouns  chi,  cAe,  and  quale  or  quali, 
when  used  to  ask  a  question,  become  interrogative 
pronouns. 

Chi  always  denotes  a  person  :  che  denotes  things,  or 
the  quality  of  persons  and  things  :  qudle  or  quali  denotes 
both  persons  and  things,  or  the  qualities  of  persons  and 
things ;  as, 

CHI  siete  voi  ?  Who  are  you  ? 

CHI  £  quESTi  ?  Who  is  this  one  ? 

CHE  [cosa]  hdif  What  ails  thee  ? 

CHE  HOMO  £  ?  What  man  is  he  ? 

CHE  ORAZi6NE  ?  What  prayer  ? 


ANALOGY. 

DIAVOLO?  What  demon? 

quAL  PAURA  ?  What  fear  ? 

QU^LI  LEGGI  ?  What  conditions  ? 

Although  both  c//<:  and  qudle  denote  things  or  the  qualities  of 
persons  and  things,  it  is  nevertheless  to  be  observed,  that,  when 
we  inquire  of  an  object  without  reference  to  its  intrinsic  merit, 
qudle  is  generally  used  ;  but  if  our  inquiry  refers  to  the  intrinsic 
ir.'-Tit  of  the  object,  we  use  chc  in  preference  ;  a?, 

tuAL  fu  la  ca.gi.6nf.  ?        What  was  the  cause  '". 
fiUAL  ducefia  d6gno  f     What  leader  would  be  worthy  ? 
<JHE  gentc  c  ?  What  [kind  of]  people  are  they  ? 

CHE  peecdti  kdifdtto  ?     What  [kind  of]  sins  hast  thou  com  • 

[mitted  ? 


Cut  is  often  used  as  an  interrogative  pronoun,   in- 
stead of  chi ;  as, 

Con  cui  [or  con  chi]  sti        With  whom  hast  thou  been? 
stato? 


are  used  also 


The  pronouns  cAe,  and  qudle  or  quali, 
in  exclamations  ;  as, 

CHE  veduta  amdra !  What  a  sad  sight ! 

QUAL  pdlvcre!  What  dust! 

QUA  i  martin  !  What  torments  ! 

Interrogative  pronouns  are  varied  with  {he prepositions 
only. 


K  X.  A  M  P  I.  K  S  . 

De'  quai  ne  io,  ne  '/  duca  mlo  Of  wliom  neither  I    nor   my 

eaccorst — Se  non  qwindo  gri-  leader   was  aware   until  they 

ddr  :  "  cm  SIETJE  v6i  ?"  (Dant.  exclaimed  :  "  Who  are  you  ?" 
Inf.  25.) 

CHI  E  auEHTi  ckt  coslslarnu-  Who    is   this    that    sneezes 

tisct?    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.)  thus? 

CHE  HAI  TU,  RAcca  f   (Dant.  \Vhat  ails  thee,  Bocca  ? 
Inf.  32.) 

CBK  UOMO  vcostui?    (Bocc.  What  man  is  this  ? 
£.  1.  n.  1.) 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


£   tdi    CHK     ORA7IONE     \lSOte 

di  dire,  eammindndo  ?     (Bocc.) 


And    what  prayer   are  you 
wont  to  say,  when  you  travel  ? 


Qu  AL  DIAVOL  ti  toccaf  (Dant.)  What  demon  touches  thee  ? 


QVALI  LKGGI?  qudli  mindcce? 

Q.UA.I.     PAURA?       (BOCC.      g.      10. 

n.  d) 

Ma  ditemi,  auAi.  FD  LA  CA- 
aioNR  per  la  qualc  v6i  con  lui  vi 
turbdstc?  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 


QUAL     DtfcE     FiA      DEGNO     di 

ttro?    (Tass.  Ger.  I.  52.) 

CHE   GENTK  ^,   che  par    nel 
du-Sl  si  vint  a  ?     (Dant.  Inf.  3.) 

CHE  PECCATI    HAI   tU    FATTO  ? 

(Bocc.) 

CON  CtJI  ti  CftlKDl    tU   JESSKRK 

STATO  ?    (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  6.) 

Ah!   CHE    VEDtJTA      AMARA      « 

(Tass.  Ger.  19.  105.) 


r^  per  Varia  stesa  —  POL- 
VERB  *'  veggio  !  (Tass.  Ger. 
3.  JO.) 

QuAi  MAKTITU  !     (Crusca.) 

E  se  nonpidngi,  DI  che  pidn- 
ger  sudli  f    (Danl.  Inf.  33.) 


What      conditions  ?       what 
threats  ?  what  fear  ? 


But  tell  me,  what  wa§  the 
cause  that  you  were  displeased 
with  him  ? 

What  leader  will  be  worthy 
of  them? 

What  people  are  these,  who 
seem  so  overcome  with  woe  7 

What  sins  hast  thou  com- 
mitted ? 

With  whom  dost  thou  think 
to  have  been  ? 

Ah!  what  a  bitter  and  sad 
sight ! 

What  dust  do  I  see  spread 
through  the  air ! 


What  torments  1 

And  if  at  this,  thou  dost  not 
weep,  at  what  art  thou  accus- 
tomed to  weep ! 


EXERCISE    XI, 


Who  knocks     below  ?        What    fear    have     you  ?    Who 
picchia      laggiuf  paura    avete  f 

chastised     you     thus?      What    do    we      do?        What    do 
tastigo*       vi1       cosi?  —      *    faccidmo1  f 

we     wait  for?        What  ilo  we  dream  of?        What    sleep, 
—     attendidmo?  sognidmof  s6nno1 

or  what  lethargy  has     lulled     thus  I    thy    I  virtue?      What 
o  letdrgo      ha      sopite?     cosi1  |  la  tua  |    virtu  f 

chains,    what    prison,    what  crosses  I  would  be    sufficient?! 
catena^  cdrccre,  cr6ce   |      ei        lasterebbero  ? 


ISO 


ANALOGY. 


Who  does  not  know  that    without    money*  (the)      idleness 
—    non      sa  senza      dendro  poltroneria 

c&nnot    subsist  ?        "  Woman,    what  dost    thou    do  ?"      to 
non  pud    durdrc  ?  "  D6nnat  —        tu?      fa??*' 

TV  horn  the  woman  replied!      '<  Dost  thou  not       see      it?" 
ddnna    rispcse  :          "  -     tu4  JVYm1^  vedi3  lo*  ?  " 

What  is    this    secret  ?        And 
e     cotes  to  secrcto  f  E 


what  is    this    supposition  ? 
£     questa  supposizionc  ? 

What  thing    is    that  which  you    have    made  me  eat  ? 

1  mangidre  f 


cosa      e  questo 


—      avete%  fdtto% 


"  Sir, 


The 
* 


I     must 
a  me  convene 

a  great  fault." 
gran   faJ-lo.'* 

What  I    wilt    thou  pay 
2      [       pagkcrdi  tu* 

thou      do      me  ?        if 
i? 


ask 
domanddr^ 


your 
xi 


pardon 
perddno 


for 
di 


me 
3 

thou 


live 


asked 


master      said  :    "  And  1  for    what  ?" 
maestro3    Disse  :l      "E     \  di  .*'' 

for?   I  What     coulnst 

Di?1    I  potre.t? 

doest    so,    what  j    shall      v.  e 
fdi       cost,        *   I        vivrtm 

I  on  ?  I     Alas  !  and  in  what  manner  ?  The         admiral 
I  di1  ?  j     Oimc ,'    e  modo  f        4    ammirdglio^ 

him     then,     what  thing      had       brought    him  to 


avesse9    condotto™ 


that. 


Dost  thou  know     i 
2    Condsci1 


ho 


those 
coldr 


are, 
sieno. 


(the)  whom 


thou  wishest  (that) 

VlXJl 


the  negative. 
n6. 


should     be  burnt  ?    The  king  replied  I  in 
s'drdano?  re      rispose  \  di 

What  sins     hast  thou   committed,  that  thou 
pcccdto  kdi    .      fdttot 


wishest  to  confess     thyself.  In 

rude"3         confessdre?        ti\  Di 

two    young   men    offended  these?    But 
gidvanc6        offtso*  19        Ma 

human     faults,  and  usual     faults. 
wn&na*    cdlpu,*    i,    usdta- 


what 


have 
h&nno1 


what? 


these 
questo* 

they 


are 
son 


Oh,  what  a      bitter 
O,  —    amdruz 

What    splendid      spoils! 
supirba        spdglia  ! 

is    kindled  for  thee  ! 

(*x£a3      l        2/ 


sight ! 
veditta  /i 


What  glorious  triumphs ! 
gloridso2    tridnfo1  i 


O,    my      son, 
O,    mio2  figliudfi, 


what     fllame 
fidmma 


•j.  in  t{;p  plaral  number. 


POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS.  131 

CHAPTER    VII. 
ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

POSSESSIVE     PRONOUNS. 

THE  Italian  possessive  pronouns  are  the  following : 

Singular.  Plural. 

Mio,  m.        mia,  f.  my  or  mine,  miei  m.  mie,  f, 

tiio,  m.          tua}  f.  thy  or  thine,  tufa,*  m.        die,  f. 

suo,  m.         sua,  f.  his,  her,  hers  or  its,  su6i,*  m.        stie,  f. 

ndstro,  m.    ndstra,  f.  our  or  ours,  nostri,  m.  ntstre,  f. 

vostro,  m.     rostra,  f.  your  or  yours,  vostri,  m.  vostre,  f. 


*SS&.J      their  ^theirs,  {g^ib*' '' 

i7  M!O  Ugno,  my  bark ; 

la  TUAjiglioletta,  thy  little  daughter ; 

i  suoi  avversdrj,  their  adversaries  ; 

/e  NOSTRE  pompe,  our  pomps ; 

#LORO  anddre,  their  deportment; 

fe  LORO  parole,  their  words. 

3/io,  two,  swo,  nostroy  vostro,  and  £dro,  are  sometimes  used  with 
the  article  substantively, — 17  mzo,  #*iio,  il  suo,  &c.;  and  then  the 
word  acere,  {  property',  is  understood  ;  and  they  are  equivalent 
to  'my  property',  '  thy  property',  &c. ;  as, 

mdngi  DEL  STJO,  let  him  eat  of  his  own  [proper- 

TiOTi  mangerd  DEL  NOSTRO,         he  will  not  eat  of  ours,      [ty  ;] 

*  Poets  for  the  sake  of  Rhyme,  often  use  nti?',  vwi,  instead  of  no»,  « we*;  »<Jt, 
4  you'.  This  license  is  extended  also  to  tuoi,  sudi,  which  in  poetry  are  often 
changed  into  tui,  *  thy  or  thine  j  sui,  <  his,  her,  hers  or  its  j  their  or  theirs' ;  aat 

"  Di  rado—Incontra.,"  mi   rispose^  "  Seldom  happens,"  replied  he  to 

"  che,  di  xv'i—Fdccia  >l  cammino  atain,  me,  "  that  any  one  of  us  goes  through 

per  qudl  to  vddo.—  Ter1  t,  ch*  dltra  the  way,  which  I  am  going.    But  I 

jSota   quagffid    Fv'it—Congiurdto    da  was  there  below  once  before,  conjured 

quiMa  Eriton  cruda,— Che  richiamdva  by  that  crue I  Erich tho,  who  recalled  th t 

r<Jm&r«a'corptsu'i."    (Dant.  Inf.  9.)  shades  to  their  bodies." 

Tosto  ch'  alpU  d6lla  sua  ttmba  FU'J,  Aa  noon  as  1  reached  the  foot  of  hi* 

— Guarddmmi  un  pdco,   e  pdi  quasi  tomb,  he  looked  at  me  awhile,  and 

sdegnoso—Mi  dimandd  :    "  Chi  fur  li  then,  a'most  with  contempt,  he  ask««l 

maggidr  TUI."    (Dant.  Inf.  10.)  me  :•'*  Who  were  thy  ancestors." 

JVVSi  udiremo   e  parlertmo  «  vu'i.  We  will  bear  and  f  peak  to  you. 

(Dant.  Inf.  5.) 


132  ANALOGY, 

Miei,  tudi,  nostri,  and  Idro,  are  also  used  substantively, — t  miei 
i  tuoi,  i  suoi,  indstri,  i  Idro;  and  then  the  word  partnti,  *  relations' ; 
amid,  *  friends' ;  compagni,  'companions';  familiarly  *  domes- 
tics';  solddti,  'soldiers';  or  scgudci,  'followers',  is  understood^ 
and  they  are  equivalent  to  'my  relations', '  thy  friends',  s  his  com- 
panions', '  our  domestics', '  your  soldiers',  l  their  followers' ;  as, 

incdntra  A'  MJ£I,  against  my  relations; 

pregdto  DA'  suoi,  requested  by  his  friends. 


Possessive  pronouns  are  sometimes  expressed  bj  the 
conjunctive  pronouns  mi,  ti,gli,  le,  &c.,  and  we  say  *  ME'/O 
prendo  in  braccia,  instead  of  loprendo  nclle  MI'E  braccia, 
'  I  take  him  in  my  arms' ;  LE  sigitto  ai  piedi,  instead  of 
si  gitto  ai  suoi  piedi,  '  he  threw  himself  at  her  feet' ; 
fac. ;  as, 

MI  si  strugge  il  cudre,  my  heart  melts; 

GLI  si  gittb  at  collo,  she  threw  herself  on  his  neck  $ 

si  lascib  casc&r  Vumino,          he  let  his  hook  fall. 

To  avoid  the  ambiguity  which  in  many  instances 
would  arise,  in  Italian,  from  the  indiscriminate  use  of 
the  possessive  pronouns  suo,  sue,  suoi,  sue;  when 
these  pronouns  do  not  relate  to  the  subject  of  the  prop- 
osition, they  are  changed  for  the  personal  pronouns  di 
/lit,  di  lei,  eof  him,'  '  of  her*.  Thus  in  the  phrase 
*  John  loves  Peter  and  his  children,'  if  the  pronoun  his 
relates  to  John,  the  subject  of  the  proposition,  it  is  ex- 
pressed byi  suoi  ;  as,  Giovanni  ama  Pietro  e  i  suoi^/Z- 
fliuoli,  '  John  loves  Peter  and  his  [John's]  children' ; 
ut  if  Ax*  does  not  relate  to  John,  but  to  Peter,  the  06- 
ject  of  the  proposition,  then  it  is  expressed  by  i  di  lui; 
as,  Giovanni  dma  Pietro*  i  DI  IAII  jigliuoli,  *  John  loves 
Peter  and  his  [Peter's]  childrenr : 

mandb    ad  uccidere   siio        he  sent  to  kill  his  father    [the 
pddre,  father  of  him  who  sent] ; 

sua  sortlla  e  i  ftgli  DI        her  sister  and  her  children  [the 
L£I,  children  of  her  sister]. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


133 


The  pronouns  suo,  sua,  suoi,  sue,  are  very  often  expressed  by 
lui,  di  tti,  even  in,  cases  when  no  ambiguity  would  arise ;  as, 

la  ingratitudine  DI  LTJI,        his  ingratitude  ; 
alia  cdsa  DI  LEI,  to  her  house. 


Possessive  pronouns  are   generally  varied  with  the 
repositions  and  articles. 


EXAMPLES. 


Dictro  al  MIO  LEGNO,  che  can- 
ndo  vdrca.  (Dant.  Par.  2.) 

Se  tu  ti  cont6nti  di  lascidre  ap- 
"esso  di  me  questa  TUA  FIGLIO- 
STTA,  w  la  prenderd  volenti6ri. 
Jocc.  g,  2.  n.  8.) 

A  Hi  tribuni  pdrve  luogo  e  t6m- 
>  d'assalire  i  suoi  AVVERSARJ. 
jiv.  dec.  3.) 

Pdssan  vostri  trionfij  e  VOSTRE 
>MPE.  (Petr.  cap.  11.) 

JVbn  uman  veramente  ma  divi- 
» — LOR  ANDAR  era,  e  LOR  sdnte 
LROLE.  (Petr.  Trionf.) 

Or  MANGI  DEL  St7O,  s'dgli  716 /ICt, 
\  DEL  JNOSTRO  NON  MANGERA 

fM.     (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

PerM  qu6lpopolo&  si  empio-- 
.contra  AJ  MIEI  in  ciascuna  sua 
%ge.  (Dant.  Inf.  c.  10.) 

Vdssene,  pregdto  DA'  suoi,  a 
kidssi.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  8.) 

Nel  pensdrlo  MI  si  STRUGGE  IL 
>RE.  (Maff.  Mer.  4.  7.) 

Piangdndo  GLI  si  GITTO  AL 
»LLO.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

Si    LASCIO    CASCAR   L*   UNCINO 

piedi.     (Dant.  Inf.  21.) 

EgH  lo  MANDO  AD  UCC1DERE 
ro  PADRE.  (Class.) 


Behind  my  bark,  which  singing 
cuts  its  way. 

If  thou  art  willing  to  leave  with 
me  this  little  daughter  of  thine,  I 
will  take  her  with  pleasure. 

This  appeared  to  the  tribunes  a 
proper  place  and  time  to  assail  their 
adversaries. 

Your  triumphs  and  your  pomps 
pass  away. 

Their  deportment  and  their  holy 
words  truly  were  not  human,  but 
divine. 

Let  him  eat  of  his  own  property, 
if  he  has  any,  for  he  will  not  eat 
of  ours. 

Why  is  that  people  so  fell  against 
my  kin  in  all  their  laws. 

> 

He  goes  to  Chiassi  at  the  re- 
quest of  his  friends. 

In  thinking  of  it  my  heart  melts. 

Weeping,  she  threw  herself  on 
his  neck. 

He  let  the  hook  fall  at  his  feet. 


He  sent  him  to  kill  his  father, 
[the  father  of  him  who  sent.] 


12 


134 


ANALOGY. 


Mia  mddre    dma    egualmente 

SUA  SORELLA,  E  I  F1GLI    DI  LEI. 

(Crusca.) 


Avendo  rigudrdo  dlLA  INGRA- 
TiTUDiNE^n  LUI  verso  mm  md- 
dre mostrdta.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  5.) 

Comincid  a  ripardrsi  memo  AL- 

LA    CASA    DI    LEI.       (BOCC.  g.  2.  I). 

8.) 


My  mother  loves  equally  her 
sister,  and  her  children,  [the  chil- 
dren of  her  sister.] 

Considering  his  ingratitude 
shown  towards  my  mother. 

He  began  to  resort  near  her 
house. 


EXERCISE    XII. 

He      loved      more     (the)    my     life      than      (the)      your 
amd        piu  vita 


benevolence.     Fearing  that  he 
benevoUnza.        Temendo — 


should     be 
non  fosse 


reprehended, 


he     kept      (the)     his      love       concealed     as     much     as     he 

—  teneva6    3  4        am6re$  nascoso7        —      *        — 

could.          Since     thou     art     my     friend,     I     will     show     it 
poteva2        Perche  sei  amico,  insegnerd3     la1 

to    thee.  (The)     thy     virtue      is      great,     and     known 

virtu        e        molto,     e    conosciuto 

every    where.  I          In    coming     out     (from)    the     church 
per    tutto.      I  Uscendo  chiesa 

he     saw     this      count,     and     (the)  his    little    children,    who 

—  vide      questo   conte,       e  figliuolo, 

asked                   alms.         She     refused    to    be    familiar    with 
addomanddvano2  limosina1.  rifiutdva  —    — 


him — (the)     (his     familiarity.) 
dimestichezza. 


The    holy    Friar,    who    had 
sdnto  Frdte,  avda* 


confessed      him,      having      asceniled        (on)  the      pulpit, 

confessato3        1           salito               in  sit  pergamo 

began         to      preach         wonderful         things     of  him,    and 

comincio3    a20     predicdre21    maravigliosa18    cosa19  l        2      e4 

of    (the)     his     life,     of     (the)     his     fastings,  of     (the)     his 

5        '       vita7,              8         9        digiuno™,  "            12 

simplicity,    and    of  (the)    his     innocence.      I  often  observed 

semplicita™,   e14               15        16        innocenza.11  spesso  mirdva 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


135 


how     much     the     sun     had      run          of  (the)  his     luminous 
qudnto  2         sole3  avesse1  trascorso4  5        6     luminoso* 


But    what 
Ma 


shall     we     say 
diremo    noi 


to     those     who 
coloro 


(the)   my  hunger? 
2        3     fame*  1 


The 


journey. 
vidggio7 

feel     so     much       pity  for 

hdnno5  cotdnto6  compassione7  di1 

public      places     of   Rome  are     full     of   ancient    likenesses 

pubblico2  luogo1  Roma  son    pieno         antica         immdgine 

of   (the)    my     ancestors.  It    is     not    my    intention     I  to  I 

maggiore.  —    e2  Non1  intenzione    \  di  \ 


explain 
spiegdre 


at 
al 


friendship     demand. 
amicizia        vogliono. 


present,     that     which     the     laws     of    (the) 
presentej  quello  legge 

attach 


did     not     seek  I 
non    cercdi 


any     blemish     to   the    honesty,     and    to     the      purity 
alcuno  mdcola  onesta,        e  chiarezza 


imporre 
of 


(the)    your    blood. 
sdngue. 


Who      could       reply      to  (the)     your 
saprebbe  rispondere 


wise     words?        In     (the)     happiness      they    are    unhappy, 

felicita          sono     miserot 


sdvio    parola  ? 

in     (the)    riches      poor,       and      in     (the)     their 
ricchezza  mendico,      e 

unfortunate. 
sciagurdto. 


adventures 
ventura 


The     lady     then     said     to     that    one:      "  Come, 
donna  allora*   disse1     2  colui3    :     "  Vieni, 


and 
e 


ask        thy  property — (the)  (thine).     I  have  not    deceived  you 
damAnda ho3    non1  inganndto*  * 


domdnda 

I    to 
I  per 


'ngannato 

rob  you  of  your  property—  (the)  (yours).     Not        only 
tor . .  Non  solamente 


hast     thou     gambled  my  property—  (tfie;  (mine),  but  thou  hast 
nfhai    -    giuocdto      —    --  >     ™a  -    ^ai 


also 
sopra1 

1  his 

it 


prevented  (the)  my  going.        He 


astonished  ^     I 
!  impedito   '  anddla.        Fece  maramglidre  \ 

father,     and     all     (the)     his     relations,     and     every 
padre,        e      tutti  ,      « 


136 


ANALOGY. 


one     else     who     knew    him.     Minghino  with  (the)  his  com- 
cun     dltro  conosceva?      l. 

panions     concealed     himself     in     the     house     of     a    friend 


ripose 


—        casa 


of    his. 


Cimon,    who      had     already      descended    with 
Cimone,  era*        gia1  disc6so5 


(the)  his    troops, 


had     determined 
avea  preso    consiglio 


flee 
fuggire 


into  1 


some  neighbouring"    wood. 
alcuno     vicino2  selva1. 


sat 


Feigning 
7atto  sembidnte 

not 
non2 

to 

know       him, 
conoscer^        , 

she 
si  pose  a 

at      his  —  (to     him     at    the)     feet.          I     set    in 
3        piede.              posi2  — 

my — (to    me     in  the)     heart 


to  I     give     thee     that    which 
di    \     ddr^,  quello 

thou     wentest     seeking,     and    I    have     given    it   to   thee. 
anddvi        cercdndo,        e      -    diedi^  2  ^,l. 

Perotto    recognised    him,      and     weeping      threw      himself 
riconobbe2        *,  e      piangendo         gitto3        si2 

at    his — (to  him  at  the)  feet,      and    embraced    him,  saying  : 
4      piede,      e        abbraccid^,  llo,     dicendo : 

(<  My     father !"        Tedaldo    sj>eaks     with    the    woman,     and 
<c  miG2  Padre  !"1  pdrla  donna,        e 

frees     her     husband — (the     husband     of     her)     from     death. 
liber  a     — marito  morte. 

He     sent    him    to     kill       his  father  —  (the    father    of    him 
mando2    l      ad  uccidere         padre —      

who      sent).          My     father     loves     his     brother,     and     his 
padre       dma  fratello,        e        — 

children  —  (the    children     of    him — his      brother). 
figlio  —       , 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  137 


DEMONSTRATIVE       PRONOUNS. 

Singular. 

Qudsto,  m.      qudsta,  f.  this  ; 

quello,  m.        quella,  f,  that  ; 

cotesto.  m.       cotestaA.  ")  .,    . 

or  codUto,  m.  eoMtta,  f.  \  that  near  y°u  ' 

costuij  m.        he,  this  man  ;     eost6i,  f.  she,  this  woman. 

j  in.         he,  that  man  ;     colei,  f.  she,  that  woman. 


cotestui,  or  C  he,  the  or  that  7  cotesldi,  or  C  she,  the  or  that  wo- 
codestuij  m.  £  man  near  you.  J  codestei,  f.  (  man  near  you. 

Plural. 

Qutsti,  m.         qutste,  f.  these. 

quelli,  m.          quelle,  f.  those. 

cotdsti.  m.         coteste.  f.          )  ,, 
orcod<Um.    •MtfHl.i        ^those  near  you. 

costoro,  m.  &  f.  they,  these  men,  these  women. 

coloro,  m.  &  f.  they,  those  men,  those  women. 

cotestoro,  or  £  they,  the  or  those  men  near  you, 

codestoro,  m.  &  f  .  (  those  women  near  you. 

y  6sta,  for  '  questp,  questa,  l  this,5  have  become  obsolete. 


Questo,  quello,  and  cotesto  or  codesto,  may  be  used  in 
speaking  of  both  persons  and  things ;  cost&i,  col&i,  and 
cotestui  or  codestui,  denote  persons  only. 

Questo  and  costui  are  employed  to  point  out  an  object 
near  the  person  speaking ;  cotesto  or  codesto,  and  cotes- 
tui or  codestui,  to  point  out  an  object  near  the  person 
spoken  to  ;  and  quello  and  colui,  to  point  out  an  object 
at  a  distance  from  both  the  person  speaking  and  the 
person  spoken  to  ;  *  as, 

*  From  the  pronouns  questo,  quello,  and  cotesto  or  codesto,  some  derive  the  adverbs 


out  a  place  at  a  distance  both  from  the  person  speaking  and  the  person  spoken  to. — 
(The  rule  is  correct;  but  as  to  the  derivation,  it  appears  to  us,  that  the  pronoun 
questo  is  derived  from  the  adverb  qul  and  the  pronoun  6sto,  qu(*)6sto,  and  the  pronoun 
quello  from  the  adverb  qul  and  the  pronoun  ello,  qu(i)611o  ;  rather  than  that  qul  w 
derived  from  questo  or  quello.) 


138  ANALOGY. 

QUESTO  dendro,  this  money ; 

QUELLA  [donna,]  that  lady  ; 

COTESTI  pdnni,  those  clothes  ; 

COSTEI*  e  un  sole,  this  woman  is  like  a  sun. 

COLTJI  che  ne  invia,  that  man  who  sends  us. 

batlete  COTESTORO,*  beat  those  [boys]. 

This  rule  is  equally  observed,  when  the  pronouns 
questo,  quello,  and  cotesto  or  codesto,  point  out  an  abstract 
substance,  or  a  thing  which  is  in  the  person  speaking, 
the  person  spoken  to,  or  the  person  spoken  of;  as, 

QUESTI  sospiri,  these  sighs ; 

QUELLA  allegrtzza,  that  merriment ; 

COTESTE  parole^  those  words. 

Quello,  followed  by  a  noun  beginning  with  a  vowel  drops  the  o  and 
takes  an  apostrophe  in  its  stead  ;  and  followed  by  a  noun  beginning 
with  any  consonant  but  z,  or  s  followed  by  another  consonant,  drops 
its  last  syllable.  Followed  by  a  noun  beginning  with  a  vowel,  z,  or  s 
followed  by  another  consonant,  in  the  plural  it  makes  quegli ;  as, 

QUEL  Tossente  k,  Creole,  that  powerful  one  is  Hercules ; 

QUELL'  Altro  k,  Demofonte,  the  other  is  Demophoon  ; 

QUEGH  xngeli,  those  angels  ; 

QUEGLI  spiriti,  those  spirits. 

Qutlli,  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a  consonant,  is  contracted 
into  quei,  and  often  written  que';  as, 

QUEI  DO/ci  lumi,  those  sweet  lights  ; 

QUE'  compdgni,  those  companions. 

Qudsta,  followed  by  the  nouns  mattina  or  mane,  *  morning ' ;  sdra, 
(  evening ' ;  notte, '  night ' ;  often  drops  the  first  syllable,  and  forms  with 
them  a  single  word  ;  as, 

-  .    • 

qutsta  matlina,        STAMATTINA,     7  ,. 
or  questa  mdne,         STAMANE,          j  thls  mominS  > 
questasera,  STASERA,  this  evening; 

qu6sta  notte,  STANOTTE,  to-night,  or  last  night. 

*  Observe,  that  after  the  pronouns  costiii,  colbi,  coiestbi  or  codesthi,  &.c.  we  never 
use  the  substantive  uomo,  '  man  ',  or  ddnna,  '  woman  ',  in  the  feminine  ;  and  do  not 
say  costiii  urfmo,  colei  donna  ;  but  simply  costbi,  for  '  this  man  J  ;  coUi,  for  '  that  wo- 
man ' ;  &c. :  costiii,  coltoi,  cotestui,  &c.,  containing  in  themselves  both  the  adjective 
pronouns  questo,  quello,  cotesto,  &c.,  and  the  substantive  pronoun  Hii,  or  lei  in  the 
feminine,  &c. — costui  orquesto  lui, '  this  man  ' ;  colei  or  quetta  lei,  *  that  woman'  j  &c. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  139 

Questo,  quello,  and  cotesto  or  codesto,  are  often  used 
substantively,  and  then  they  are  equivalent  to  questa  cosa, 
6  this  thing  ' ;  quella  cosa,  '  that  thing  ' ;  &LC.  as, 

udito   QUE'STO  (or  questa     having  heard  this  (or  this  thing) ; 

cosa), 

COTE'STO  (or  cotesta  cosa)     that  (or  that  thing)  ought  not  to 
non  si  vorrdbbefdre,  be  done. 

We  say  sometimes  in  questo,  in  questa,  in  quello,  in 
quella,  and  then  the  words  istdnte,  '  instant ' ;  momento 
stesso, c  very  moment ' ;  bra  stessa, £  very  hour  ' ;  occasione 
stessa,  c  very  occasion  '  ;  are  understood  ;  and  in  questo, 
in  quelld,  are  equivalent  to  '  in  this  very  moment,'  6  in 
that  very  hour  ' ;  &c.  as, 

IN  QUESTO  soppravvtnne  la        at  this  very  instant  came  the 
fdnte,  servant ; 

vidi  IN  j  QUE'LLA  una  nave        I  saw  at  that  very  moment  a 
piccioletta,  rather  small  bark. 

Quello,  in  speaking  of  a  city,  territory,  country,  &c., 
is  equivalent  to  cittd,  territorio,  paese,  &c.  ;  as, 
QUEL  di  Perugia,  the  territory  of  Perugia ; 

QUEL  di  Bergamo,  the  country  of  Bergamo. 


We  very  often  use  questi,  quegli,  and  cotesti  or  codesti, 
in  the  singular,  in  speaking  of  persons,  but  in  the  sub- 
jective only  ;  and  then  questiis  equivalent  to  quest9  uomo, 
'  this  man  ' ;  quegli,  to  quell''  uomo,  c  that  man  ' ;  cotesti, 
to  cotest'  uomo,  '  that  man  near  you  ';  as, 

QUESTI  e  il  mio  Signdre,  »          this  is  my  master ;  , 
QUEGLI  e  Cdco,  that  is  Cacus  ; 

COTESTI,  che  ancor  vive,  that  one  who  is  yet  alive. 

When  quegli  is  so  used,  in  the  plural,  it  makes  queglino  (quegli 
uomini),  t  those  men.' 

Quegli  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a  consonant  is,  like  quelli, 
contracted  into  quei^  and  often  written  qu6  ' ;  as, 

QUEI  chefu  presente,  he  who  was  present ; 

QUE*  rispose,  that  one  answered. 


140  ANALOGY. 

Questo  and  quello,  and  questi  and  quegli,  sometimes 
serve  to  denote  two  objects  already  spoken  of;  questo 
and  questi  being  used  for  the  near,  and  quello  and  quegli 
for  the  distant  object ;  and  then  they  correspond  to  the 
English  expressions  the  latter  and  the  former  ;  as, 

QUESTI  51  rredono  aver  da-  the  latter  think  to  derive  their 

gli  iddii  il  ministero  ministry  from  the  gods,  the 

QUELLI  il  segreto,  former,  their  secret ; 

QUEGLI  vuole,  che  io  ti  perdo-  the  former  demands  that  I 

ni,  e  QUESTI,  che  in  te  in-  should  pardon  thee,  the  latter 

crudelisca,  that  I  should  be  cruel  with 

thee. 


To  the  above  demonstrative  pronouns  may  be  added 
do,  'this  or  that ' ;  which  is  equivalent  to  questo, 
quello,  and  cotesto  or  codesto ;  in  the  signification  of 
questa,  quella,  or  coiesta  or  codesta  cosa,  '  this,  that,  or 
that  thing  near  you ' ;  but  it  never  refers  to  a  person  ;  as, 

ci6  ch>  io  ne  sento,  that  which  I  think  of  it ; 

ch'  k  cio  eke,  tu  d?  ?  what  is  that  which  thou  sayest  ? 

ci6  udito,  having  heard  this  [thing.] 

The  Italian  expressions,  do  che,  questo  che,  quello  che, 
generally  correspond  to  the  English  pronoun  what,  used 
in  the  signification  of c  this  which'  or  '  that  which' ;  as, 

cio  CHE  tu  hdi  a  fare,  what  thou  hast  to  dp  ; 

QUELLO  CHE  dictva  Mritino,  what  Adrian  said. 


Demonstrative  pronouns  are  varied  with  the  prepo- 
sitions only. 

Sometimes  the  ^preposition  di,  l  of,'  is  suppressed  before  tbe  pro- 
nouns costui,  coluij  and  cotestui  or  codestui,  and  the  pronouns  are 
put  before  the  noun  with  which  they  are  connected  ;  as, 

al  COSTUI^  tempo  {for  al  tempo    in  the  time  of  this  one  ; 
DI  costui), 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS.  141 

by  the  counsel  of  that  one ; 
for  the  deeds  of  those. 


per  lo  COLXJI  consiglio  (for  per 
lo  consiglio  DI  colui), 


per  le  COSTORO  opere  (for  per 
le  opere  DI  costoro), 


E  XAM  PL  E  S  . 


Signora,  tenete  QUESTO  DENA- 
RO.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  1.) 

Le  mie  nottifa  triste,  e  i  giorni 
oscuri — QUELLA,  che  n'ha  portdto 
ipensier  miei.  (Petr.  s.  250.) 

Veggindom  COTESTI  PAJTNI,  m 
ho  creduto  lui.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

Cost  COSTEI  ch'  E  tra  le  donne 
ujv  SOLE.  (Petr.  s.  9.) 

La  donna,  che  COLUI  CHE  a  te 
KB  INVIA — Spesso  $al  sonno  la- 
grimando  desta.  (Petr.  s.  8.) 

Perche  BATTETE  voi  COTESTO- 
RO  ?  (Nov.  ant.  45.) 

Che  fdnno  meco  omai  Q.UESTI 
SOSPIRI, — Che  nascean  di  dolor  e  ? 
(Petr.  c.  33.) 

I'o  giudicherei  ottimamcnte  fat- 
to,  che  quellafesta,  QUELLA  ALLE- 
GREZZA,  che  noi  potessimo,  pren- 
dessimo.  (Bocc.  Introd.) 

Voi  mi  parete  uomo  di  Dio, 
come  dite  voi  COTESTE  PAROLE  1 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  1.) 

Colui  cti f.  secoe  QUEL  POSSEN- 
TE  e  forte  ERCOLE,  QUELL'  ALTRO 
DEMOFOJVTE.  (Petr.  Tr.  Am.) 

QUEGLI  ANGELI,  6  QUEGLI  SP1- 

RITI.     (Cinon.  t.  4.) 

QUEI  DOLCI  LTJMI — S'acqmstctn 
per  ventura,  e  nonper  arte.  (Petr. 
s.  224.) 

E  cosl  la  portd  a  QUE'  suoi 
CQMPAGNI.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  2.) 


Madam,  take  this  money. 

That  lady  who  has  taken  away 
my  thoughts  makes  my  nights  sad, 
and  my  days  gloomy. 

Seeing  you  with  those  clothes,  I 
took  you  for  him. 

Thus  this  woman,  who  is  like  a 
sun  amongst  the  other  women. 

The  lady,  who  often  wakens  from 
his  sleep,  weeping,  him  who  sends 
us  to  thee. 

Why  do  you  heat  those  boys  ? 

What  do  these  sighs  which 
sprung  from  grief  do  now  with  me? 

1  should  think  it  very  well  done 
that  we  should  take  that  enjoyment 
— that  merriment,  which  we  could. 


You  appear  to  me  to  be  a  man 
of  God,  how  do  you  say  those 
words  ? 

That  one  who  is  with  him,  is 
that  powerful  and  strong  Hercules, 
the  other  is  Demophoon. 

Those  angels  and  those  spirits. 

Those  sweet  lights  are  ac- 
quired by  good  luck  and  not  by 
art. 

And  thus  he  carried  her  to  those 
companions  of  his. 


142 


ANALOGY. 


Di  questo  di  STAMATTINA  sard 
w  tenuto  a  voi.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n. 
9.) 

STAMANE  era  unfanciullo,  e  or 
sonvecchio.  (Petr.  c.  11.) 

Egli  ci  e  STASERA  venuto  un  de' 
suoifratelli.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

Ubbridco,  fastidioso,  tu  non  c' 
entrerdi  STANOTTE.  (Bocc.  g.  7. 
n,  4.) 

UDITO  QUESTO.  (Petr.  Tr.  Tern.) 
Figliuola  mia,    COTESTO     NON 

SI  VORREBBE    FARE.       (BOCC.   g.  3. 

n.  8.) 

IN  QUESTO  LA  FANTE  di  lei 
SOPPRAVVENNE.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n. 


I*  V1DI  UNA  NAVE  PICCIO- 

LETTA —  Venir  per  V  dcqua  verso 
noi  IN  QUELLA.     (Dant.  Inf.  8.) 

Passdndo  per  QUELLO  DI  PE- 
RUGIA. (Stor.  Pist  50.) 

QUESTI  i:  IL  MIO  SIGNORE, 
qnesti  veramente  e  Messer  Torello. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

QUEGLI  E  CACO — Che  sdtto  il 
sdsso  di  monte  Jlventino, — Di  sdn- 
guefece  spesse  volte  Idco.  (Dant. 
Inf.  25.) 

COTESTI,    CHE    ANCOR   VIVE,    e 

non  si  noma, —  Guardare     w  per 
veder,  s'  il  condsco.     (Dant.  Par. 

QUEGLINO  rivoleano  i  loro  strdc- 
ci.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  2.) 

E  disse  cose — IncredibiliaQVEi, 
CHE  FU  PRESENTE.  (Dant.  Par. 
17.) 

.    QUE'  RISPOSE  :  "  To  sono  cadu- 
to  in  una  fossa." .    (Nov.  ant.  36.) 

Non  solamente  il  popolo,  ma  i 
n6bili,  e  i  sacerdoti :  QUESTI  si 

CREDONO     AVER    DAGLI     IDDIl     IL 
MINISTERO,  QUELLI   IL    SEGRETO. 

(Dav.  Germ.) 


Of  this  of  this  morning  I  am  in- 
debted to  you. 

This  morning  I  was  a  boy,  and 
now  I  am  an  old  man. 

There  came  this  evening  one 
of  her  brothers. 

Drunkard,  troublesome  man, 
thou  wilt  not  enter  there  to-night. 

Having  heard  this. 

My  daughter,  that  ought  not  to 
be  done. 

At  this  very  instant  her  servant 
came  in. 

As  I  saw  at  that  very  moment 
coming  through  the  water  towards 
us  a  rather  small  bark. 

Passing  through  the  territory  of 
Perugia. 

This  is  my  master,  this  is  truly 
Master  Torello. 

That  is  Cacus,  who  oftentimes 
shed  lakes  of  blood  under  the  rock 
of  Mount  Aventine, 

I  should  like  to  look  at  that  one, 
who  is  still  alive  and  does  not  tell 
who  he  is,  to  see  whether  I  know 
him. 

Those  ones  wanted  again  their 
rags'. 

And  said  things  incredible  to  him 
who  was  present. 

That  one  answered  :  '« I  have 
fallen  into  a  ditch." 

Not  only  the  people,  but  the  no- 
blemen, and  the  priests  :  the  latter 
think  to  derive  their  ministry  from 
the  gods,  the  former,  their  secret. 


DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


143 


QUEGLI  VUOL.E,  CHE  1O  TI  PER- 

DONI,  E  QUESTI  CHE,  contro  a  mta 
natura,  IN  TE  INCRUDELISCA. — 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

Ji  voUrvene  dire  cio  CH*  10  NE 
SEJVTO.  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  3.) 

Va  via,  figliudlo,  CH'  E  cio, 
CHE  TU  DI' ?  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  1.) 

Cio  UDITO  si  addolordvano  gli 
aiutij  efremevano  i  nostri.  (Dav. 
Stor.  1.  2.) 

Tu  sdi  ben  cio  CHE  TU  HAI  A 
FARE.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.) 

L*  oste  udendo  quello  che  la 
donna  diceva,  e  QUEJLLO  CHE  DI- 
CEVA ADRIANO  ;  comincid  a  cre- 
dere, che  Pinuccio  sogndsse. — 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  6.) 

AL  COSTTJI  TEMPO.  (Giov.  Vill.) 

PER  LO  COLUI  CONSIGLIO. 
(Bocc.) 

PER  LE  COSTOROOPERE.  (Bocc. 
g.  5.  n.l.) 


The  former  demands  that  I 
should  pardon  thee,  and  the  latter 
that,  against  ruy  nature,  I  should 
be  cruel  with  thee. 

To  tell  you  that  which  I  think 
of  it. 

Away  with  thee,  my  son,  what 
is  that  which  thou  sayest  ? 

Having  heard  this  the  auxiliary 
troops  were  grieved,  and  our  own 
were  in  a  rage. 

Thou  knowest  well  what  thou 
hast  to  do. 

The  host  hearing  what  the  lady 
said,  and  what  Adrian  said,  began 
to  believe  that  Pinuccio  was 
dreaming. 

In  the  time  of  this  one. 
By  the  counsel  of  that  one. 

For  the  deeds  of  those. 


EXERCISE    XIII. 


This     sin       is     that    which     (the)     divine    justice      has 
peccdto    e  divino    giustizia     Ao2 


not    wished    to    leave      unpunished. 
non1  voluto          lascidre          impunito. 


May     God     grant 
Dio        dia2 


you  that      joy,       and     that     good     which     you        desire. 
1  allegrezza,  e  benc  desiderate. 

you     speak  ? 
parldte? 


allegrez 
What    is     that    secret    of    which    you     speak?        At  this 


secreto 


none     dared 
niuno    ardi 


to 
\di 


answer.          That      was       a      trifling 
rispondere.  fu        —      picciolo 


144 


ANALOGY. 


thing,    and    thou    didst  well  to      do  with  it  what    thou 

cosa,        e        face'sti  bene  a     fdr^     ne                     

didst    (with  it).      There  was  in    that    court  this     us^age. 

facesti*       ne1.           Era  corte  usdnza. 


Passing      by    the     cell    of    this    one,    he     heard    the 
Passdndo  davdnti         cilia  ,    —     sentl 

noise        which  they — (these  ones)    made     together.  He 

schiamdzzo  facevano2  insieme1. 

I  did     not     work  I    at     all,     but     a    thousand     times    I  a  I 
non    lavordva    \     punto,      ma     -  volta      \  il  \ 

day,    he    would     run    to    the     window      I  to         see     this 
di,        —         correva  finestra      \  per      vedere 

woman.        It    appeared    to    him    to    be      safe,    and      out 
—    pdrve3  2        6ssere    sicuro,      e       fuor 

of     the      hands      of     those    who      had          taken        him. 
tndno  avevano3    pr6sol 


Those     ones      make      me      enter      here 
fdnno3      1        entrdre*    ci2 


to   I    deceive 
per  I  inganndr^ 


Having    departed    from     that  one   with   (the)  whom 
Partitosi 


he     had     been     so    long, 
—      era2    stdto3    lungamente1 


he     came 
sene     v6nne 


to  I      England. 
in  I    Inghilterra. 


I      will      pay    thee 
paghero2          l 


for        this     time,     and        for  I 
di  volta,      e  di  j 

that.         I  have    heard     what    you    have     spoken        of  me. 
ho        inteso  avete4    ragiondto3      l        2 

that     he     had  I 


And    on    this     occasion    I  he     perceived 


a    very    beautiful 
Ullo 

woman     for 
donna 

Cxlxl// 

a 

ac                | 

wife. 
moglie. 

UUCI  t/ 

Dost    thoi 
Non      odi 

not    hear 
tu 

what 

he     says  ? 
dice  1 

This    one     is 

the     arch 
arci 

bishop     Ruggeri. 
vescovo 

That    one 

is 
e 

Brutus. 
Bruto. 

Conceiving 
Prendendi 

a    sudden    hope     of    being     able      to    return     once    ^more 
-     siibita    sperdnza  potere  ritorndreb  ancora1 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


145 


in    the    royal    state, 
2     reale*    stdto3, 


by 

per 


the    counsel    of  that    one. 
consiglio2  —  i 


All    those    who    believe     so    are     deceived.  In    Cyprus 
Tutti                           credono2  cosl1  sono    inganndti.  Cipri 

and      the  disturbances 

e4         5  turlamento* 


and     in      Rhodes      the      rumors 
e  Rodi  2        rumore3 


were     great,     and    lasted    a    long     time      I  through  I      the 
furono1 grdnde7 j  e        -    lungo   tempo    \     per 

deeds    of    these     ones. 
opera2    —  J  . 

^rf,X.'- 

*       OF  THE 

[UNIVE;ESITT 


INDEFINITE       PRONO1 


Of  indefinite  pronouns, 
the  singular,  and  cannot 
plural  number  : 


the  following  are  used  only  in 
be   put   before  nouns  in   the 


qualche,  m.  &  f. 

some,  any  ; 

ogni,  m.  &  f. 

all,  every  ; 

chiunque,  m.  &  f. 
chisivo'glia,  m.  &  f. 
chi  che,  m.  &  f. 
chicchessia,  m.  &  f. 

/  whoever,  whosoever  ; 

che  che,  m.  &  f. 
checchessia,  m.  &  f. 

>  whatever,  whatsoever  ; 

qualunque,  m.  &  f. 
qucdsii'ogtiaj  m.  &  f. 
qualsisia,  m.  &.  f. 

nulla,  m.  &  f. 
niente,  m.  &  f. 


V  whosoever,  whatsoever ; 


>  nothing. 


wno,  m. 


una,  f.  one  ; 

oj  m.          unallra,  f.  another  ; 

qualcuno,  m.        qualcuna,  f.        >  some,   some    one,  some 
qualchvduno,  m.  qualcheduna,  f.  ^      body  ; 

13 


146 


ANALOGY. 


ciascuno,  m.        ciascuna, 
ciascheduno,  m.  ciascheduna,  f. 


ognuna,  f. 
ciascuna,  f. 


veruno,  m. 

veruna,  f. 

nessuno,  m. 

nessuna,  f. 

or  russwno,  m. 

nissuna,  f. 

neuno,  m. 

neuna,  f. 

or  niuno,  m. 

niuna,  f. 

nulloj  m. 

?iw#a,  f. 

every  one,  every  body ; 


no  one,  nobody. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


iy  before  numeral  adjectives,  as  in  the  phrases  (%m  dwe  mesi, 
'  eveiy  two  months  ' ;  ogni  sei  pdgine,  l  every  six  pages  ' ,  ogni  died 
sold&ti, '  every  ten  soldiers ' ;  and  in  the  word  ognissdnti,  <  the  day  of 
All-saints  ' ;  is  used  with  nouns  in  the  plural. 

Qudlche  has  been  used,  by  some  writers,  with  nouns  in  the  plural,  as, 
qudlche  verdi  boschi,  *  some  green  woods ' ;  but  such  examples  are  not 
to  be  imitated. 


The  following  are  used  in  both  numbers : 


Singular. 

tcde,  m.  &  f.        such  ; 

S  such,   such 


colale,  m.  &  f. 

alcuno,  m. 
alcuna,  f. 
talunOj  m. 
taluna,  f. 

c^rfo,  m. 
a,f. 


•  certain ; 


sttsso,  m.          1 

medtemo,!*.    rsame5 
medesima,  f.      7 


Plural. 

^dZi,  m.  &  f.        such ; 
IL  m.  &  f.  < 


talune,  f. 

c^r/i,  m. 
ctrte,  f. 


^  some,  some 
' ones ; 


•  certain  ; 


st&sse,  f. 

medtsimi,m.     £s5 
mtdisime,  f.       j 


INDEFINITE 

PRONOUNS. 

147 

a/fro,  m. 
dltra,  f. 

V  other  ; 

Altri,  m. 
ctltre,  f. 

>  others  ; 

tutto,  m. 
tutta,  f. 

jail; 

tutti,  m. 

>  all,  every  one, 
£  every  body  ; 

alqudnto,  m. 
alqudnta,  f. 

?  a  little, 
$  somewhat; 

alqudnti,  m. 
alqudnte,  f. 

?  a  few,  not 
$  many  ; 

tanto,  m. 

^ 

tdnli,  m. 

^ 

frbita,  f. 
coldnto,  m. 

>  so  much  ; 

fcircte,  f. 
cotdnti,  m. 

>  as  many  ; 

cotdnta,  f. 

J 

cotdnte,  f. 

) 

altrettdnto,  m. 
altrettdnta,  f. 

?  as  much, 
S  as  much  more  ; 

altrettdnti,  m. 
altrettdnte,  f. 

?  as  many,  as 
J  many  more  ; 

^o'co,  m. 

?  a  little, 
J  a  few  ; 

pochi,  m. 

>  few; 

mo'fto,  m. 
mdtta,  f. 

>  much  ; 

molti,  m. 
wo'/^e,  f. 

V  many  ; 

trdppo,  m. 
troppa,  f. 

>  too  much  ; 

troppi,  m. 
troppe,  f. 

>  too  many. 

Chiunque,  chisivoglia,  chi  che,  chicchessia,  qualcuno, 
qualcheduno,  ognuntf,  taluno,  are  applied  to  persons  only; 
the  others  may  be  applied  both  to  persons  and  things. 


N&lla,  niente,  £  nothing,'  mean  also  '  some  or 
any  thing,'  and  nessuno  or  nissuno,  neuno  or  niuno, 
veruno,  '  nothing,  no  one,  nobody,'  mean  also  *  some  or 
any  thing,  any  one,  any  body ' ;  as, 


57  Hid  VUOl  NTJLLA, 

se  tgli  si  sentisse  NIENTE, 
non  rimarrebbe  a  sosientr 

ptna  NESSTJNA, 
se  va  in  NIUN  luogo, 
s'  tgli  ha  bontdte  VERONA, 


if  she  wants  any  thing  ; 
if  he  felt  any  thing  ; 
there  would  not  remain  any  pun- 
ishment to  suffer; 
if  he  goes  to  any  place  ; 
if  he  has  any  good  quality. 


148  ANALOGY. 

Alcuno,  'some,'  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  nihno, 
<  nothing,  no  one  ' ;  as, 

che  ALCUNA  gloria  avrebbero,  for  they  would  derive  no  glory  ; 
che  ALCUNA  via  darebbe,          which  would  afford  no  way. 


A'ltro  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  altra  cosa,  '  some 
or  any  thing  else  '  ;  as, 

avresti  detto  ALTRO  ;  thou  wouldst  have   said   some- 

thing else  ; 

hdifatto  ALTRO  ?  hast  thou  done  any  thing  else  ? 

Ji'ltn  is  often  used  in  the  singular,  in  speaking  of  per- 
sons ;  and  then  it  is  equivalent  to  altr'  uomo,  '  another 
man,'  or  '  another  person,'  '  others  '  ;  as, 


ne  vdi,  ne  faTRipotra  dire  ch>    neither  you  nor  any  other  man 
io  non  V  abbia  veduta,  can  say  that  I  have  not  seen 

it; 
per  nonfidarmene  ad  ALTRI,      not  to  trust  to  other  persons. 

When  altri  is  thus  used,  in  any  other  relation,  than  the 
subjective  or  the  objective,  it  is  changed  into  altrui;  as, 

ho  detto  male  d'  ALTRUI,  I  have  spoken  ill  of  another  ; 

le  presterei  ad  ALTRUI,  I  would  lend  them  to  others  ; 

che  io  da  ALTRTJI   non  sia    that  I  should  not  be  heard  by 
nditOy  any  other  person, 

A'ltri  is  also  used  in  a  distributive  sense,  and  then  it 
corresponds  to  the  English  pronouns  one  —  another; 
the  one  —  the  other  ;  some  —  others  ;  as, 

ALTRI  fa  remi,  ed  ALTRI  vo'Z-  the  one  makes  oars,  the  other 

ge  sarte,  twists  ropes  ; 

ALTRI  sen  vdda  errando^  AL-  let  some  go  wandering,  let 

TRI  rimanga  ucciso,  ALTRI  some  be  killed,  let  others 

idol  si  fdccia  un  dolce  place  their  happiness  in  a 

sguardo,  sweet 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  149 

Altrui  is  sometimes  used  with  the  article,  and  then 
the  words  avere,  sostdnza,  '  property ',  £  patrimony ',  are 
understood,  and  V  altrui  is  equivalent  to  c  another's  pro— 
perty  ', i  patrimony ',  &c. ;  as, 

domandar  L'  ALTRUI,  to  demand  another's  property 

logordr  DELL'  ALTRUI,  to  use  the  property  of  others. 


U'no  and  altro  are  sometimes  used  with  the  article, 
V  uno,  V  altro ;  and  then  V  uno  corresponds  to  the  one, 
the  former,  and  V  altro  to  the  other,  the  latter.  U'no 
and  altro,  when  so  used,  in  the  plural  make  gli  uni,  gli 
altri,  for  the  masculine ;  and  le  une,  le  dltre,  for  the 
feminine ;  as, 

V  etct  L'  UNO,  e  L'  ALTRA  avta  age  had  changed  the  one  and 

trasformati,  the  other ; 

e  DELL'  UNE,  e  DELL'  ALTRA  and  with  the  one  and  with  the 

fdcci  quello  che  cridi,  other  do  what  thou  thinkest. 

GLI  UNI  tem&nti  Jlnnibale,  GLI  the  former  fearing  Annibal,  the 

ALTRI  Filippo,  latter  Philip. 

The  expressions  V  uno  e  V  altro,  V  una  e  V  altra ;  gli 
uni  e  gli  altri,  le  une  e  le  dltre,  correspond  to  the  Eng- 
lish pronouns  both±  both  of  them  ;  as, 

L'  UNO  E  L'  ALTRO  corno,          both  horns ; 
L'  UNA  E  L'  ALTRA  stella,  both  stars. 

L?*un  V  altro,  V  una  V  altra  ;  gli  uni  gli  altri,  le  une 
le  dltre,  are  equivalent  to  the  English  pronouns  one 
another,  each  other ;  as, 

si  AMAVANO  L'  UN  L'  ALTRO,    they  loved  one  another  ; 
L'  UN  L'  ALTRO  inttnti  a  ri-    intent  to  look  at  each  other. 
guarddrsi, 

Jn  uno,  is  equivalent  to  the  English  expression  at  the  same  time  ;  as, 

Mesta  mi  vdde,  ma  IN  UN  fug-        he  sees  me  sad,  but  at  the  same 
gir  dal  suo  cospetto,  time  to  flee  from  his  presence. 


150  ANALOGY. 

Senz*  dltro  sometimes  corresponds  in  English  to  without  doubt,  cer- 
tainly, &c. ;  as, 

6gli  SEKZ'  ALTRO  sara  col  re,  he    without  doubt  is  with  the 

king. 

Per  dltro  means  otherwise,  this  excepted,  as  for  the  rest,  &c.;  as, 
PER  ALTRO  sdviOy  e  avveduto,  as  for  the  rest,  wise  and  prudent. 


Tale  in  the  singular  often  drops  the  e  and  makes  tal ; 
and  in  the  plural  is  contracted  into  tai,  and  sometimes 
written  to?  ;  as, 

TAL/W  mia  stella,  such  was  my  star  ; 

TAI  dimostrazioni,  such  demonstrations  ; 

TA*  paldgi,  such  palaces. 


Indefinite  pronouns  are  generally  varied  with  the  pre- 
positions only  ;  except  stesso,  medesimo,  dltro 9  which  are 
varied  with  the  prepositions  and  articles. 

The  prepositions  di,  a,  are  elegantly  suppressed  before  the  pronoun 
altrui ;  and  sometimes  the  preposition  di  is  suppressed,  and  altrui  placed 
between  the  article  and  the  noun  with  which  it  is  connected ;  as, 

le  pidghe  [di]  altrui,  the  wounds  of  others  ; 

lafortuna  si  fa  [a]  altrui  incontro,  fortune  goes  to  meet  others; 
bagndto^  nelV  ALTRUI  sdngue,  [for    bathed  in  another's  blood, 
nel  sdngue  di  altrui] , 


To  the  above  pronouns  may  be  added  chi,  quale,  pia, 
meno,  parecchi,  parecchie,  and  si,  which  are  also  used  as 
indefinite  pronouns. 

Chi  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  alcuno ;  as, 

in  questo  loco  pub  arrivdr  cm    in  this  place  may  arrive  some 
ti  frastorni,  one  who  will  disturb  thee  : 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  151 

and  somstimes  instead  of  nessuno;  as, 

quivi  non  e  CHI  l<*gga,  ne  CHI     there  is  no  one  there  who  reads, 
scriva,  and  none  who  writes. 

Chi  is  also  used  in  a  distributive  sense,  and  then  it  is 
equivalent  to  the  English  pronouns  one  —  another;  the 
one  —  the  other  ;  some  —  others  ;  as, 


O)  CHI  Juki,  CHI  erbe  carrying,  some  flowers,  some, 
odorifere,  e  CHI  diverse  ma-  sweet  herbs,  and  others,  dif- 
niere  di  spezierie,  ferent  kinds  of  spices. 

Quale  is  used  in  a  distributive  sense,  and  corre- 
sponds to  one  —  another;  as, 

QUAL  se  ri>  andb  in  contddo,  e    one  went  into  the  country,  and 
QUAL  qua,  e  QUAL  la,  another  here,  and    another 

there. 

Piu  and  parecchi,  parecchie*  as  indefinite  pronouns,  are 
equivalent  to  the  English  pronoun  several  ;  as, 

PIU  giorni,  several  days  ; 

PARECCHI  dltri,  several  others  ; 

PARECCHIE  ore,  several  hours. 

Piu  and  meno  sometimes  take  the  article,  —  il  piu,  il 
meno  ;  i  piu  or  le  piu,  i  meno  or  le  meno  ;  and  then  il 
piu,  i  piu  or  le  piu,  are  equivalent  to  the  most,  the 
greater  part  ;  and  il  meno,  i  meno  or  le  meno,  to  the  least, 
the  smaller  part  ;  as, 

IL  PIU  del  tempo,  the  greater  part  of  the  time  ; 

i  PIU  morivano,  the  most  of  them  died  ; 

LE  PiO  si  trovdvano  in  Ber-     the  greater    number  of  them 

linzone,  were  found  in  Berlinzone  ; 

il  Paradiso  e  DEI  MENO,  Paradise   is    for  the    smaller 

number. 

Si  is  used  for  both  genders  and  both  numbers  in  the 
objective  only,  and  corresponds  to  the  English  words 
one,  we,  people,  they,  &c.  ;  as, 


152 


ANALOGY. 


si  v£de, 

si  e  detto, 

si  videro. 

si  promettono  [molte]  cose, 


one  sees ; 

we  have  said  ; 

people  saw ; 

they  promise  many  things. 


Si  and  the  verb,  in  these  and  similar  expressions, 
hold  the  place  of  a  passive  proposition,  and  may  be 
equally  well  rendered  in  English  by  the  verb  to  be  ;  as, 

si  rendessero  gli  onori  a  Gal-  honors  should  be  rendered 
6a,  e  si  ceifbrdsse  la  me-  to  Galba,  and  the  memory 
m&ria  di  Pisone,  of  Piso  should  be  celebrated. 


When  si  is  followed  by  the  particle  we,  we  change  the 
i  of  si  into  e  ;  as, 

non  SE  NE  trovertbbe  uno,          they  would  not  find  one. 


EXAMPLES. 


Tu  le  dirdij  s'  ELLA  VUOL  NTJL- 
LA.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.) 

//  domando  SE  EGLI  si  SENTIS- 

SE  NIENTE.       (BOCC.  g.  2.  D.  3.) 

Che  NON  RIMARREBBE  A  SOS- 
TENER  PENA  NESST^NA  nel  pUTgCL- 

torio  per  gli  peccati,    (Pass.) 

SE  Filippo  VA  oggi  in  NI^S 
LUOGO.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  3.) 

Per   le  tentazioni  si  prova  T 

U6m0,    S*  EGLI    HA    BONTATE    VE- 

RTJNA.     (Pass.  p.  47.) 

CH'      ALCUNA       GLORIA     i      TCI 

AVREBBER  rf'  clll     (Bant.  Inf.  3.) 

Ch'    ALCTJNA    VIA     DAREBBE    fl 

chi  su  fosse.     (Bant.  Inf.  12.) 

ALTRO  AVRESTI  DETTO,  se  tu 
m*  avtssi  vediito  a  Bologna. — 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 


Thou  wilt  ask  her,  whether  she 
wants  any  thing. 

He  asked  him  whether  he  felt 
any  thing. 

That  there  would  not  remain  in 
purgatory  any  punishment  to  suffer 
for  sins. 

If  Philip  goes  to-day  to  any 
place. 

By  temptations  it  is  proved 
whether  a  man  has  any  good  qual- 
ity. 

For  the  guilty  would  derive 
no  glory  from  them. 

Which  would  afford  no  way 
to  him  who  should  be  above. 

Thou  wouldst  have  said  another 
thing,  if  thou  hadst  seen  me  in  Bo- 
logna. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


153 


0,  ALTRO  HAI  tU  FATTO  ?  (BoCC. 

n.  1.) 

NE  voi,  NE  ALTRI  con  ragione 
mipotra  piu  DIRE  CH'  io  NON  L' 

ABBIA   VEDUTA.    (BOCC.  g.  1.  D.  8.) 
PER  NON  FIDARMENE  ad  ALTRI, 

10  med6sima  tel  son  veriuta  a  si- 
gnified™.    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  2.) 

To  ho   DETTO    MAL    DJ  ALTRUI. 

(Bocc.) 

CHE  io  DA  ALTRUI  che  da  lei 
UDIJO  NON  SIA.  (BOCC.  g.  3.  D.  5.) 

ALTRI  FA  REMI,  ED  ALTRI 
VOLGE  SARTE.  (Dant.  Inf) 

ALTRI    disperse  —  SEN    VADA 

ERRANDO  :      ALTRI    RIMANGA    UC- 

ciso  :  —  ALTRI,  in  cure  d'  amor 
sodve  immerso,  —  IDOL    si  FAC- 

CIA,  UN  DOLCE  SGUARDO,  im/is0. 

(Tass.  Ger.  4.  18.) 

Con  le  voci  umili,  e  mansuete 

nel  DOMANDAR  L'  ALTRUI.  (BOCC, 

g.  4.  n.  2.) 

Si  dispose  a  voler  LOGORAR 
DELL'  ALTRUI.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  10.) 

TantO  L5  ETA  Ls  UNO  E  L*  AL- 
TRO, da  quello  che  esser  solbano, 

gli    AVEA  TRASFORMATI.        (BOCC. 

g.  2.  n.  6.) 

Che  le  mie  cose  ed  ilia  ti  sieno 
raccomanddte,  E  QUELLO  DELL' 
U\NE  E  DELL'  ALTRA  FACCI,  CHE 
CREDI,  che  sieno  consolazlCne 
delV  dnima  mia.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n. 
7-) 

Immagindi  di  voUr  fare,  sic- 
come  fecero  i  Saguntini,  o  gli 
Jlbidei,  GLI  UNI  TEMENTI  ANNI- 
BALE  CartagMse,  E  GLI  ALTRI 
FILIPPO  Macedonico.  (Bocc. 
Fiamm.  5.  53.) 

Scalddva  il  sol  gia  L'  TJNO  E  L' 
ALTRO  CORNO  —  Del  Tduro.  (Petr, 
cap.  1.) 


Oh,  hast  thou  done  any  thins 
else  ? 

Neither  you,  nor  others  can  any 
longer  say  rightly  that  I  have  not 
seen  it. 

Not  to  trust  to  others,  I  myself 
have  come  to  inform  thee  of  it 


I  have  spoken  ill  of  others. 

That  1  should  be  heard  by  no 
other,  but  by  her. 

Some  make  oars,  and  others 
twist  ropes. 

Let  some  of  them  go  dispersed, 
and  wandering :  let  some  be  killed  : 
let  others,  plunged  in  the  cares 
of  pleasing  love,  place  their  hap- 
piness in  a  sweet  look,  a  smile. 

With  humble  and  mild  words  in 
demanding  the  property  of  others, 


She  disposed  herself  to  use  the 
property  of  others. 

So  much  had  age  changed  the 
one  and  the  other  from  what  they 
were  used  to  be. 


Let  my  things  and  her  be  re- 
•commended  to  thee,  and  with  the 
one  and  with  the  other  do  what 
thou  thinkest  would  be  of  any  con- 
solation  to  my  soul. 


I  thought  of  doing  as  the  Sagun- 
tines  and  the  Abydeans  did,  the 
former  fearing  Annibal  the  Cartha- 
ginian, the  latter  Philip  the  Mace- 
donian. 


The  sun   was  already  warming 
both  the  horns  of  Taurus, 


154 


ANALOGY. 


Otf  e  n  bel^ciglio,  e  L'  UNA  E 

L*  ALTRA    STELLA CA'  Ctl   COTSQ 

del  mw  viver  liime  denno  ?  (Petr. 
s.  258.) 

L*  tJN    L'    ALTRO    di    egudle 
amore  si  AMAVANO.    (Bocc.) 

L*  UN  L*  ALTRO  A  RI GUARD AR- 

si  INTENTI.     (Tass.  Ger.) 

MESTA  ognor  MI  VEDE,  mesta 

&  VCro,  MA  IN  UN  DAL  StJO  COS- 
PETTO  FUGGIR  mi  vede.  (Alf. 
Filip.  1.  1.) 

EOLI     SENZ*    ALTRO    SARA    COL 

RE.     (Maff.  Mer.  2.  3.) 

RlCCO,  e     SAVIO,    E    AVVEDtJTO 

PER  ALTRO,  ma  avarissimo. — 
(Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  2.) 


Where  is  the  beautiful  brow  and 
both  those  stars  which  gave  light 
to  my  life  ? 


They  loved  oiie  another  with  an 
equal  love. 

Intent  to  look  at  each  other. 


He  sees  me  always  sad,  sad  it  is 
true,  but  at  the  same  time  he  sees 
me  flee  from  his  presence. 


He  without  doubt  is  with    the 
king. 

Rich,  and   wise,    and    prudent 
otherwise,  but  very  avaricious. 


LE  PIAGHE  ALTRtii.     (Petr.  8.        The  wounds  of  others. 


6.) 

Ricdrdati  che  una  votia  senzd 
piii,  suole  avvemre,  che  LA  FOR- 

TTJXA  SI     FA    ALTRVI     INCQNTRO 

col  viso  lieto,  e  col  grembo  aperto. 
(Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  10.) 

NELL*  ALTRUI  SANGUE  gid 
BAGNATO  e  tmto.  (Petr.  s.  29.) 

TAL  FU  MIA  STELLA,  e  tal  niia 
cruda  sorte.  (Petr.  s.  182.) 

Queste  TAI  dolorose  DIMOSTRA- 
ZIONI  sow  troppo  vedute,  e  cono- 
sciute.  (Castigl.  Cort.  1.  3.) 

E  fecer  TA'  PALAGI,  e  td'  ma- 
raviglie,  che  non  si  potr6bbe  dire. 
(Fr.  Gior.) 

Ix  QUESTO  LOCO  di  leggier  PUO 

ARRIVAR    CHI    TI    FRASTORNI.  

(Maff.  Mer.  3.  4.) 

QUIVI  ivox  E  chi  ragioni  —  Di 
Cristo,  ne  CHI  LEGGA,  NE  CHI 
SCRIVA.  (Dant.  Par.  12.) 


1  Remember"  that  Ottee  and  no 
more,  it  is  wont  to  happen,  that  for- 
tune goes  to  meet  others  with  joy- 
ful countenance,  and  open  bosom. 


Already  bathed  and  stained  with 
another's  blood. 

Such  was  my  star,  and  such  my 
cruel  fate. 

Such  painful  demonstrations  are 
too  often  seen  and  known. 


And  they  made  such  palaces, 
and  such  wonderful  things,  that 
cannot  be  described. 

In  this  place  may  easily  arrive 
one  who  will  disturb  thee. 


There  is  no  one  there  who  talks 
of  Christ,  no  one  who  reads,  no 
one  who  writes. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


155 


Molti  anddvano   attorno,  POR- 
TANDO  nelle  mdni,  CHI  FIORI,  CHI 

ERBE  ODORIFERE,  E  CHI  DIVERSE 
MANIERE    DI    SPEZIERIE.       (BOCC. 

Introd.) 
E  le  lor  donne,  e  i  figliuoli  pic- 

itttti,  QUAL  SE  N'  ANDO  IX  CON- 
TADO,  E  QUAL  QUA,  E  QUAL  LA, 

poveramente  in  arnese.      (Bocc. 
g.  2.  n,  3.) 

PIU  GIORNI  felicemente  navigd- 
rono.    (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 


Many  went  about  carrying  in 
their  hands,  some,  flowers,  some, 
sweet  herbs,  and  others,  different 
kinds  of  spices. 

And  of  their  wives,  and  young 
children,  one  went  into  the  coun- 
try, and  one  here,  and  another 
there,  poorly  provided. 

They  sailed  happily  several  days. 


Con  PARE c CHI  ALTRI.     (Petr.)         With  several  others. 


Duro  per  lo  spdzio  di  PAREC- 
CHIE  ORE.  (Giov.  Vill.) 

IL     PIU     DEL     TEMPO,     SI     Stdn- 

no  a  mangidre,  e  poltrire.     (Dav. 
Germ.) 

I  PIU  senza  alcunafebbre,  o  61- 
tro  accidente  MORIVANO.  (Bocc. 
Introd.) 

Mdso   rispose,   che   LE   PIU   si 

TROVAVANO     IN     BERLINZOJVE. 

(Bocc.  g.-8.  n.  3.) 

IL    PARADISO    E    DEI    MENO,    6 

non  del  piii.    (Seem.  Mann.  Marz. 
31.) 

Come  si  VEDE.  (Bocc.  g.  10. 
n.2.) 

Come  s'  E  DETTO.  (Dav.  Ann.)         As  we  have  said. 


It  lasted  for  the  space  of  several 
hours. 

The  greater   part  of  the  time 
they  pass  in  eating  and  dozing. 

The  most  of  them  died  without 
any  fever,  or  any  other  symptom. 


Maso  replied,  that  the  greater 
number  of  them  were  found  in 
Berlinzone. 

Paradise  is  for  the  smaller  num- 
ber, and  not  for  the  larger. 

As  one  sees. 


VIDERSI  in  quello  esercito-  sol- 
ddti  v  cchi,  che  non  avevanofdtto 
mdi  gudrdia.  (Dav.) 

Qudnto  COSE  gli  si  PROMETTO- 
NO  tutto  '/  di.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 

Propose,  che  si  RENDESSERO 
GLI  ONORI  A  GALBA  :  che  anche 

SI    CEI.EBRASSE    LA    MEMORIA    DI 

PISONE.     (Dav.  Stor.  1.  4.) 

NON     SE     NE     TROVEREBBE    UN 

maggior  mdi.     (Bocc.  g.  2.  fin.) 


People  saw  in  that  army  old  sol- 
diers, who  had  never  been  on 
guard. 

How  many  things  they  promise 
him  the  whole  day. 

He  proposed,  that  honors  should 
be  rendered  to  Galba,  and  that  the 
memory  of  Piso  should  also  be  cel- 
ebrated. 

They  would  never  find^  one 
greater. 


156  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE    XIV. 

Whoever    does      otherwise      sins.        There     must    be 
fa2         altrimenti1     pecca.  Vi       deve  essere 

some     deception.         Let    us    give     this  bread  to     eat  ^     to 
ingdnno.  Didmo  pane    a    mangidre 

some     one.        He     commanded      that     every      one      should 
—        Comandd  andds- 

go    to    rest      himself.           That     we      I  might   not   cause  I 
se2     a4  riposdre5      si1.  Jlcciocche  non    dessimo 

(to)       any        one        I     to    I        think       of       us.  Each 

3  4          I    da1   I      pensdre2      —        —  . 

one*     of    us     knows,     that     the      greater      part      of     (the) 
sa,  4  5      pdrtt? 


her     friends  —  (hers)     are     dead. 
2        sono3    motto."7 


You    will      receive 
riceverete 


hundred     for    every     one.          Every     mother     is     a    nurse 

mddre       e      -       bdlia 

of    her      children.        Without     any     delay,     he     did     what 
figliuolo.  Senza  indugio,    —    fece 

the     king     ordered.          No  f     body      perceived 


re    commanddva.  persona      accorse2 


it. 

sene.1 


Here  it  seemed  to  me  that  I  saw — (to  see)  noj  sanctity,  no  | 
jQuivi  —  pdrveu  13 veder12        l      santita2,      3 

devotion,       no  J       good       deed,       or       example       of      life. 
divozione4,        5          buonoQ    opera7,      os        esempio9        10      vita11. 

Where      every      word,      every     phrase,      every     mode      of 
O've  parula,  frdse,  modo       — 

expression     is     explained     with    clearness.         To-morrow     I 
men    spiegdto'3      con1     chiarezza2.  domani2 

shall     dine     with     some      friends.         Some      companies      of 
Pranzerd1          con  amico.  compagma 

Belgians  collected     in     haste,     and     a    band     of    Vitellians. 
Belgi  fdtto  furia,       e  mdno  Vitellidni. 

*  Each  one,  in  the  feminine  gender. 

t  No,  here  in  the  signification  of  not  one,  none. 

J  JVo,  in  the  signification  of  not  any. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  157 

Now    I    have    nothing    more         to        fear.        Who  —  (to 
Omdi    -     ho*  l         piu3  da       temere.        

(the)    whom)*  I  had  been    obliged  to    live  I     for  several 

era  convenuto  vwere1   *  * 

years      j        like        I      a    deaf    and    duml)  person.  I    never 
anno2       j  a  guisa  di3  \       -    sordo4- .  e5  mutolo6.  non 


should    come 


days. 
di. 


to     the     end  I      of    it       j  for  |       severttl 
a    capo*     \         nel     «  \  in 


Said      the     bafterer*   I  "Must     I    say]      more  —  (any 
Disse  barattiere :      "  Ho    w    a    dir          -— - 


H 

other    thing)."          Not        being     able  I      to    be     seen    l,y 


Won 


potendo  esser3     veduto* 


"any     other,    he    threw    himself   I  on    his    knees  I       beforo 
2      —     gittd7  si?  ginocchione9      \ 

lier,     and    said.        I    determined    (myself) 


e       disse.        -        Deliberdi^,        mi 


tell 


it    rather    to    you    than  to    others.        With  (the)  humble, 

piuttosto  umile2, 

and      mild      words      in  (the)     asking      the    property    ci 

€3    tnansueto*   voce1  domanddre  —      — 

Bothers  —  (the    others').  He    will    be    with    him    without 
sard3            4         & 


—  (any    other    thing    to   the    contrary).        He    sees 

at    the        (one.)    same  time    fly     from  his  presence. 
in  fuggire  cospetto. 

Some    make    oars,    and    others    twist  ropes.        Suppose 
fa         remo,     e  volge    sdrta.  Fingete 

Ion        the    contrary,    that    that    be     not    a  comedy,    but 
a  ^ontrdriO)  sia2  non1        commedia^  mci 


a    tragedy,    and    that    of    the    actors    some    should  speak 
tragedia,     e  recitdnte  favelli 

Bolognese,    others    Venetian,    that    one    Bergamasque,  this 

Bergamdsco, 


*  PPhom,  in  the  feminine  gender. 

14 


158  ANALOGY. 

one     Neapolitan,  and    that    one     Milanese.         (The)  one* 
Napoletdno, 

of     them      had  a      beautiful      and      large      mattress      of 

—      avea  bello*  eb        grdnde5  materdsso1 


cotton        I  on 
bambdgia?  \  in 


her      head,      and      the      other  *      a    very 
capo,         e 


large     basket  full  of    things.          Some     went 

grdnde  paniere  pieno            cosa.                        sen9  ando 

the     country,  and  some     here,  and     some    there. 
contddo,  e                   qua,        e                      la. 


into 
in 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
OF  THE  PARTICLES   JVE,  CJ,  VI. 

WITH  pronouns  are  generally  classed  the  particles 
ne,  ci,  vi,  f  which  never  vary,  and  always  refer  to  some 
person,  thing,  or  place,  which  has  been  spoken  of 
before. 

Ne  may  refer  to  one  person  or  thing,  or  to  more 
than  one,  according  to  the  number  of  the  objects,  which 
have  been  mentioned  ;  and  then  it  is  rendered  in  Eng- 
lish by  —  of  him,  of  her,  of  it  ;  of  them  ;  with  him, 
with  her,  &c.;  at  him,  &c.  ;  some  of  it,  some  of  them  ;  as, 

NE  pare  innamorato,  he  seems  enamoured  of  her  ; 

a  qudnti  NE  giacevano  taglib    he  cut  off  the  hair  of  as  many 
i  capelli,  of  them  as  slept  ; 


*  The  one,  the  other,  in  the  feminine  gendef. 

t  These  particles,  in  orthography,  appear  to  be  the  same  Words  as  the  conjunctive 
pronouns  ne,  ci,  vi  ;  their  difference  in  signification,  however,  is  easily  ascertained 
by  the  moaning  of  the  sentence  in  which  they  are  used. 


PARTICLES  WE,  CI,  VI.  159 

won  NE  poteva  pagdre  i  cal-     I  could  not  pay  for  my  shoes 

zdn",  with  it ; 

se  NE  maraviglib)  he  wondered  at  it ; 

NE  ho  preso,  I  have  taken   some   of  it,   or 

some  of  them. 

Ne  may  also  refer  to  the  place,  which  one  comes 
from,  or  goes  to ;  and  then  it  corresponds  to  the  Eng- 
lish adverbs  —  hence,  thence  ;  as, 


E  vennij  I  came  thence  ; 

qudndo  NE  andrete  ?  when  shall  you  go  hence  ? 

and  sometimes  to  an  indeterminate  place ;  as, 

NE  e  portdta  dal  vento,  it  is  thence  carried  away  by  the 

wind. 

Ci,  vi,  refer  to  a  place,  ~and  correspond  to  the  Eng- 
lish adverbs  —  here,  there  ;  hither,  thither ;  as, 

ci  era  venuto,  I  had  come  hither  ; 

won  vi  pole  entrdre,  he  could  not  enter  thither. 

Ci,  properly,  refers  to  a  place  near  the  person 
speaking,  and  vi,  to  a  place  at  a  distance ;  as, 

ci  50710  stdto  dltre  volte, '  I  have  been  here  formerly ; 

<se  tu  mdi  vi  tdrni,  if  thou  shalt  ever  return  there. 

This  distinction,  however,  is  not  observed  when  the 
particles  ci,  vi,  and  the  conjunctive  pronouns  ci,  vi9- 
would  be  brought  together,  as  in  io  vi  vi  condurro, — 
voi  ci  ciavete  condotti  ;  in  which  case,  to  avoid  the  harsh 
sound  produced  by  the  repetition  of  the  same  word,  * 
we  say,  without  regard  to  the  distance  of  the  place, 

io  vi  cr  condurrb,  I  will  conduct  you  thither; 

voi  vi  ci  avete  condotti,  you  have  conducted  us  hither. 

*  An  instance  nevertheless,  is  met  with  in  Boccaccio,  in  which  ci  is  used 
instead  of  vi,  without  the  occurrence  of  the  repetition  of  the  word  on  account 
-of  the  conjunctive  pronoun: 

JVbn  ci  s6no  in  nfan  lutfgo  abit&nie  There  aro  nowhere  dwellings  so  near  , 
si  presso,  die  tu  di  gitirno  YI  potessi  that  you  could  arrive  there  before  sun- 
arriv'are.  (G.  5.  n.  3.)  set. 


160  ANALOGY. 

Ci,  vi,  may  refer  also  to  persons  or  things,  and  then 
they  take  the  signification  of  the  persons  or  things, 
which  they  refer  to  ;  as, 

-pensaste  a  me  ?  —  ci  pensai,     did    you    think    of   me  ?  —  I 

thought  of  you. 

baderete  a  ci'6,  or  a  questo?     will  you  attend  to  this?  —  yes, 
—  sij  vi  bQderb)  I  will  attend  to  it. 


Ci,  vi,  are  used  sometimes  instead  of  questo,  quello. 
title,  &c.  in  the  signification  of — -  to  it,  in  it,  from  it, 
&LC.  ;  as, 

ci  troverimo  buon  compenso,      we  shall  find  in  it  a  good  com- 
pensation ; 

ascoltai   queste  parole  senza    I  listened  to  these  words  with- 
rispondervi,  out  replying  to  them  ; 

io  non  vi  consentii,  I  did  not  consent  to  it. 

When  the  particles  ci,  vi,  are  followed  by  the  pro- 
nouns To,  la,  li,  gli,  le,  they  are  generally  united  to 
them  so  as  to  form  a  single  word  ;  as, 

VELO  avea  condotto,  he  had  conducted  him  there  ; 

ingegnati  di  ritenercE.i+o,  contrive  to  keep  him  there. 

The  particle's  ne,  ci,  vi,  are  often  used  as  expletives  ; 
as, 

NE  andb  per  la  camera,  he  went  through  the  room  ; 

ciascun  che  ci  nasce,  every  one  who  is  horn  ; 

dove  vi  mori,  where  [there]  died. 

EXAMPLES. 

J£gU,pianamente^ajidando,  A  He,  walking  softly,  cut  off  tKe 
QUANTI  in  quella  casa  NE  GIACE-  hair  of  as  many  of  them  as  slept  in 

VANO  TAGLJO  1  CAPELLI.       (BoCC.       that  llOUSC. 

g,3.n.2.) 

Mi  ddvan  si  poco  saldro,  che  They  gave  me  so  small  a  salary, 
io  NON  NE  POTEVA  appena  PAGA-  that  I  could  hardly  pay  for  my 
B£  i  CALZARI.  (Bocc.  g.  2,  D.  1.)  shoes  with  it. 


PARTICLES  JVE,  C7,   VI. 


101 


Quand'    w    MENE    VENNI.  —         When  I  came  thence. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 

La  cenere  posta  in  alto,  NE  K 

PORTATA    DAL    VENTG.       (PaSS.   tf. 

Hu.  c.  4.) 


The   ashes   placed   on   high,  is 
thence  carried  away  by  the  wind. 


Nay,  I  had  come  hither  in  order 
to  admonish  him. 


ERA  VENUTO  per  do- 
vergli  ammonire.     (Bocc.  g.  1.  n. 

Si  tardi  m  giunse,  che,  essendo 
le  parte  serrate',  e  i  ponti  levdti, 

ENTRAR    NOJV   VI    POTE    dentrO. — 

{Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

Veramente  ci  SONO  w  ALTRE 
VOLTE  STATO  ;  ma  si  m*  avea  la 
paura  di  me  tratio,  che  cosi  cdme 
se  mdi  non  ci  fossi,  d*  esserci 
stato  mi  ricordava.  (Lab.) 

Se  igli  avviene,  che  TU  MAI  vi 
TORNI,  fa  che  tu  non  sii  mdi  piu 
geloso.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  8.) 

V6l     VI     CI     AVETE      CONDOTTI. 

(Fr.  Sacch.) 

PENSASTE  A  ME  ?  —  si  ci  PEN- 
SAI.  (Bemb.) 

Per  avventura  P  opera  nostra 
potra  essere  anddta  di  modo,  che 
n6i  ci  TROVE  RE  MO,  coll'  aiuto  di 

DlO,  BUON  COMPENSO.       (BOCC.  g. 

2.  n.  7.) 

QUEST  E  PAROLE,  non  una  vol- 
ta,  e  SENZA  RISPONDERVI  alci'i- 
na  cosa,  ASCOLTAI  con  grave  d~ 
nimo.  (Bocc.  Fiam.  1.  5.') 

Ringranzidndo  Iddio,  CHE 
CONDOTTO  VEL'  AVEA.  (Bocc.  g. 
2.  n.  4.) 

Sappi  se  egli  s<i  lavordre,  ed  Learn  whether  he  knows  how 
JNGEGNATI  DI  RiTENERCELO.  —  to  work,  and  contrive  to  keep  him 
(Bocc.)  there. 

Chetamente  NE   ANDO  PER  LA        Gently  he    went    through    the 
CAMERA  infino  alia  finestra.  —    room  as  far  as  the  window. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 

14* 


He  arrived  there  so  late,  that, 
the  gates  being  shut,  and  the 
bridges  raised,  he  could  not  enter 
thither. 

Truly  I  have  been  here  former- 
ly ;  but  fear  had  in  such  a  manner 
deprived  me  of  my  senses,  that  I 
recollected  as  little  of  having  been 
here,  as  if  I  never  had  been  here. 

If  it  happens  that  thou  shaltever 
return  there,  take  care  that  thou 
be  no  more  jealous. 

You  have  conducted  us  hither. 

Did  you  think  of  me  ?  —  yes,  I 
thought  of  you. 

Perchance  our  business  may 
take  such  a  turn,  that  we  shall 
find  in  it,  with  the  assistance  of 
God,  some  compensation. 


To  these  words,  more  than  once, 
and  without  replying  to  them  any 
thing,  I  listened  with  a  serious 
mind. 

Thanking  God  that  had  con- 
ducted him  there. 


162  ANALOGY. 

Natural  ragione  &  di  CIASCUN  It  is  a  natural  thing  to  every  onej 

CHE  ci  NASCE,  la  sua  vita,  quanta  who  is  born  to  help^preserve,  and 

pud,  aiutdre,  e  conservdre,  e  di-  defend  his  life,  as  much  as  he  can. 
fendere.     (Bocc.  Introd.) 

Costui  disfece  Jerusalem,  DOVE  This  one   destroyed  Jerusalem, 

vi  MORI,  tra  d1  drWi  e  di  fame,  where  there  died,  both  by  arms  and 

centindia  di  miglidia  di    Giudei.  of  hunger,  hundreds  of  thousands 

(Petr.Uom.ill.  28.)         .  of  Jews. 


EXERCISE    XV. 

The    miserable     Landolfo,    although      the     day    before 
misero  ,     ancorache          3     di*     davdntv* 

had       called       (the)  death    many    times,    seeing-       it  near, 
avesse9    chiamdto8      6    morte1    molto1    volta,2    ved&ndo^,      pr£sta, 

was      afraid      of     it.        He      wished     that    I    should    see 
Me2     paura3  l.        Voile  vedessi 

all    the      holy    relics,      and    they    were     so    many,    that, 
sdnto    reliquia,    e        furon        tdnto,  r 

if    I    wished     to    relate    them    to    you,    I    never     should 
se          voldssi3      contdre4-  l,  non  ver- 

come     to      an      end      (of   them).         "Oh,    my     master !'V 
r^j2         3        __    C£p04,  i     .          "Oh,    mio*  maestro  !'n, 

said      Bruno,      "  I        do    not        wonder      (myself)    at      it, 


diceva 


non 


maraviglicP 


for    I      have      heard      say,      that     they  say      nothing  — 

ch&  ho         udito       dire,  — 

I  (do    not        say     anything)    of    it."  But    yet    coming 

non          dicono2                               1."  Ma     pure  uscito^, 

out    thence,    he    began        to      wonder^  (himself)    I  more 

,    —    incomincid3   4    maraviglidre5          si2  an- 

and     more.  I 
cora  piu.1 


Cause      (the)      generosity        1  to     he    painted 


cortesia*  dipmgere3 


here. 


2 


PARTICLES  A'jE,  C7,  VL 


163 


Pretending 
Sembidnte  facendo 


have 


returned     there 
tomato*        -    * 


with     a      great      deal      more      merchandise      than      before. 
con  mercanzia  prima. 


I      I  cannot 
I  non  so 


well    relate     how    I   entered    there. 
ben      ridire      come         entrap  1. 


The 


church    is     so    full,    of     people,    that     no  *    person      can 
chiesa       e      si    plena  gente    ,  persona    pud3 


any      more 


enter    there. 
entrdre4'          2. 


Andreuccio,   fearing,     entered 
,   teme"ndo,      entrd2 


there,    and     entering     there     he    thought     within    himself. 


If    I 

Se 


entrdndo. 

can      affect 
so  far  vista 


—     penso 

be      d  unify      I    shall     bei 
esser    mutolo,     2          sard* 


received     there    surely. 
ricevuto5  3     per 


They  f    replied:    "It  is 
risposero :  "  -     e2 


very 
Bene1 


true,    since     thou 
vero>     perchb 


art    the     one    who    makes    us     stay    here.      Alas!  Z<§ppa, 
s6i  fdi3  2    stare4-          l.       Ohime !  r 


what    does     this    mean  ?     Have 
vuol          2        dir?1        avcte* 


you      then      made 
"  5       Dunque1  fdtto* 


me 

2 


come      here      for    this  ? 


I 


painted 
gere* 


here, 


will      cause 
fard3 

in    such     a      manner, 
di        maniera. 


it* 


you    nor    any    other    one 

ne     — 


will    be     able 
potra2 


I  to    be 
j    dipin- 

that      neither 
ne 

to    tell    me 
dire4'       l 


l 


any    longer,    that    I    have    not    seen    it.|  These  persons  § 
piii,3  5        ff     dbbia9  nori*  veduta10  8. 


make    me    enter    here    fto 
fdnno3        l    entrdre4       2     \  per 


deceive    me. 
inganndr^, 


We      wish 
voglidmo 


*  JVo,  here  in  the  signification  of  wo  one.        t  They,  in  the  feminine  gender. 
|  It  [the  generosity — la  cortes'ia],  in  the  feminine  gender. 
§  These  persons,  for  these  men  near  me. 


164  ANALOGY. 


to     go 
anddre 


and 


see     this     holy  man  ;    but     I,    for    myself, 
veddre  santo ;          ma        ,  me. 


do     not    see     how     we       can        get        there. 
non        vedo    come    —   possiatno*  jpervenire3        J. 


CHAPTER   IX. 

VERBS. 

ALL  Italian  verbs  are  classed  in  three  different  conju- 
gations, which  are  distinguished  by  the  termination  of 
their  infinitive. 

The  first  conjugation  comprehends  those  verbs, 
which  in  the  infinitive  end  in  are ;  as,  awARE,  '  to 
love.' 

The  second  comprehends  those  verbs,  which  in  the 
infinitive  end  in  ere  ;  as  terrtERE,  '  to  fear.' 

The  third  comprehends  those  verbs,  which  in  the 
infinitive  end  in  ire  ;  as,  sentiRE,  '  to  hear,'  or  ;  to 
feel.' 

All  the  verbs  of  these  three  different  conjugations, 
whether  regular  or  irregular,  are  conjugated  or  varied 
with  one  of  the  auxiliary  verbs,  avere,  i  to  have, '  or 
essere,  '  to  be  '. 

VARIATION    OF    VERBS. 

Verbs  may  be  varied  in  four  different  ways  ;  viz. 
affirmatively,  negatively,  interrogatively,  and  interroga- 
tive-negatively. 

In  the  variation  of  Italian  verbs,  the  personal  pronouns 
are  generally  suppressed,  the  persons  being  sufficiently 


AUXILIARY  VERBS.  16S 

indicated  by  the  different  terminations  ;  but  when  dif- 
ferent persons  have  the  same  termination,  the  pronouns 
are  expressed,  to  avoid  the  confusion  which  might  thence 
arise. 

The  pronouns  are  also  expressed  in  the  imperative 
mood ,  and  also  when  verbs  are  varied  in  the  interrogative 
form,  since  then  the  transposition  of  the  pronoun  distin- 
guishes, in  conversation,  that  form  from  the  affirmative* 

In  varying  the  following  verbs,  we  have  given,  between 
parentheses,  the  poetical  forms,  or  the  peculiar  inflexions 
to  which  poets  have  submitted  some  of  the  persons  of  cer- 
tain tenses  of  these  verbs.  Some  of  these  are  elegantly 
used  even  in  prose,  and  some  are  entirely  confined  to 
verse  ;  in  order  to  distinguish  the  latter  from  the  former,: 
the  latter  are  printed  in  Roman  characters. 


AUXILIARY      VERBS., 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Avere  affirmatively. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tenses.     - 

1.  —  Present, 
rfvere,  to  have. 


Compound  Tenses. 

2.  —  Past, 
avere  avuto,        to  have  had- 


3.—  Future. 


avere  ad  avere,     ") 

essere  per  avere,   >     to  ™ve  to  have,  or 

dovere  avere,         5     to  be  about  to  have- 


4.  —  Present, 
avendo,  having.. 


5.  —  Past. 
avendo  avuto ,        having  had. 


V 

166 


ANALOGY. 


PARTICIPLE. 


avtnte,  s. 
aventi,  p.* 


6.  —  Present. 
?  having. 


7.  —  Past. 

avuto,  m.  s.,  avuti,  p.    > 
avula,  f.  s.,     avute,  p.*  5 


had. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.    ho    or    6  I  have; 


, 

2d  p.  7iai  or  ai,    'thou  hast; 
3d  p.ha  or  a(ave),  he,  she,  or  it  has  ; 


abbiamo  (avemo), 


avete, 


j  or  anno, 


we  have  ; 

you  have ; 
they  have. 


.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w     av6va 
[or  «u^a,t 
2d  p.  avevi, 
Sd  p.  ^of/i  ore^a 
[avdva  or  a- 
[t^a  (avia), 

I    had,    or    did 
[have  ; 
thou  hadst  ; 
he  or  she  had  ; 

\mo,  ;we  had  ; 

avevate,  you  had  ; 

avevano   or    ave-  they  had. 
[cwo  (avieno), 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  6bbi, 
2d  p.  avesti, 
3d  p.  <£W>e, 

I  had; 
thou  hadst; 
he  or  she  had  ; 

avtmrnoj 
aveste, 
ebbero, 

we  had  ; 
you  had  ; 
they  had. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  avro, 

2d  p.  avrdi, 
3d  p.  arra, 

I    shall    or    will  ; 
[have  ; 
thou  wilt  have  ; 
he    or    she     will 
[have  ; 

avremo, 

avrete, 
avrdnno, 

we  shall  have  ; 

you  will  have  > 
they  will  have. 

*  The  present  participle  of  the  verb  avere  agrees  with  the  subject  of  the  proposi- 
tion in  gender  and  number.  The  past  participle  agrees,  sometimes,  with  the  object 
in  gender  and  number. 

•f  Some  say  az'cro,  ero,  amd??o,  &c.  instead  of  orpra,  '  I  had';  era,  'I  was'; 
arndt-a,  '  I  loved  '  ;  &c.,  but  this  usage  which,  indeed,  presents  the  advantage  of 
distinguishing  the  first  from  the  third  person  of  the  imperfect  of  verbs,  is  contrary 
to  the  authority  of  the  best  classics. 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


167 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Singular.  *  Plural. 

5.  —  Compound  of  the  Present,  or  —  Second  Perfect. 


1st  p.  ho  avuto,    |I  have  had ; 
2d  p.  hdi  avuto,  thou  hast  had  ; 
3d  p.  ha  avuto,    he   or   she    has 
!  [had ; 


abbidmo.  avuto, 
avete  avuto, 
hdnno  avuto, 


we  have  had ; 
you  have  had ; 
they  have  had. 


6.  —  Compound  of  the  Imperfect,  or  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  10  aveva  avuto,  \  I  had  had,||  avevdmo  avuto,  \  we  had  had. 

7.  —  Compound  of  the  Perfect,  or  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  ebbi  avuto,   \    I  had  had. 

8*  —  Compound  of  the  Future,  or  —  Future  Anterior. 
1st  p.  avro  avuto,    \    I  shall  or  will  have  had. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1 .  —  Present. 


1st  p.    io    dbbia 
2d  p.  tu  abbia  or 

that  I  have,  or 
[may  have  ; 
that  thou  have  ; 

abbidmo, 
abbidte, 

that  we  have  j 
that  you  have  ; 

3d  p.  egli  or  el- 
\la       dbbia 

that  he  or  she 
[have  ; 

dbbiano,    (aggia- 
[no), 

that  they  have. 

•\ 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  io  avdssi, 

2d  p.  tuavessi, 
3d  p.  avesse, 

if  I  had,  or  should 
[have  ; 
if  thou  hadst  ; 
if  he  or  she  had  ; 

avessimo, 

aveste, 
avessero  (aves- 
[sino), 

if  we  had  ; 

if  you  had  ; 
if  they  had. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.  —  Compound  of  the  Present,  or  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  io   dbbia    I  that  I  have  had 

r/7iMi#/>     '          Tnr   mav  liavf 


[or  may  have 
[had; 


abbidmo  avuto, 


that  we  have  had, 


168 


ANALOGY. 


4.  —  Compound  of  the  Imperfect,  or  —  Pluperfect. 

1st  p.  io  avessi  avuto,    \  if  1  had  had,  or  should  have  had. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


Singular. 


SIMPLE    TENSE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p»  avrei    (a 
[vrfa), 

2d  p.  avresti, 

3d  p.  avrebbe 
[(avria), 


I  should,  would,: 

[or  could  have  ; 

[or  might  have; 

thou       wouldst 

[have  ; 

he  or  she  would 
[have  ; 


Plural. 


avreste, 

avrebbero  {avri- 
[ano   or  avr'i-  \ 
[eno), 


we     should      of 
[would  have ; 

you  would  have  ; 
they  would  have. 


COMPOUND    TENSE, 


2.  —  Compound  of  the  Present,  or  —  Past. 


1st  p.  cwrdi  avu' 


I  should,  would.; 
[or  could  have 
[had  ;  or  might 
[have  had  ; 


avremmo  avuto, 


we     should      or 
[would  have  had. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p  

ft 

dbbidnio  not. 

let  us  have  « 

2d   p»  dbbi    (ag- 
[gi)  fw, 
3d  p.  a66ia  (ag- 
[gia)  egli  or 
[d//a, 

have  thou  ; 

let  him   or  her 
[have  ; 

abbidte  voi, 

dbbiano  (aggia- 
[rio)  eglino  or 
[elleno, 

have  ye  ; 
let  them  have. 

*  The  first  person  of  the  imperative  in  all  verb*  is  wanting. 


AUXILIARY  VERBS.  169 

Variation  of  the  Perb  Avere,  negatively. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present. 
Non  avere         \  not  to  have. 


Compound  Tenses. 

2.  —  Past, 
non  avere  avuto ,  \  not  to  have  had. 


3.  —  Future. 

non  avere  ad  avere. )  , 

non  avere  per  avere, Y°r  bf  n^  to  have    or 

non  dovere  avere,     $    [not  to  be  about  to  have. 


GERUND. 


4.  —  Present, 
non  avendo,        \  not  having. 


5.  —  Past. 


non  av6ndo   •     I  not  having  had. 
[avutof     I 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  [io]nonho,\l  have  not; 
2d  p.  non  hdi,       thou  hast  not ; 
3d  p.  non  ha,       'he  or  she  has  not; 


non  abbidmo, 
non  avete, 
non  hdnno, 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w  non 

[aveva, 
2d  p.  non  avevi, 


\non  aveva, 


Jstp.  non  ebbi, 
2d  p.  non  avesti, 
3d  p.  non  dbbe. 


I  had  not,  or  did 
[not  have ; 
thou  hadst  not ; 


3d  p.  egli  or  ilia  he  or  she  had  not; 


Inon  avevdmo, 

non  avevdte, 
non  avevano, 


3.  —  Perfect. 


I  had  not ; 

thou  hadst  not ; 
he  or  she  had  not; 


non  avemmo, 
non  aveste, 
non  ebbero, 


we  have  not ; 
you  have  not ; 
they  have  not. 


we  had  not ; 

you  had  not ; 
they  had  not 


we  had  not ; 
you  had  not ; 
they  had  not. 


15 


170 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  non  avrd, 
2d  p.  non  avrdi, 
8d  p.  non  avrd:, 

I  shall  or  will  not 
[have  ; 
thou     wilt     not 
[have  ; 
he    or    she    will 
[not  have  ; 

non  avremo, 
non  awete, 
non  avranno, 

we   shall  or  will 
[not  have  ; 
you  will  not  have; 

they     will     not 
[have. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 

1st.  p.  \io~\  non  ho  aviito,      I  have  not  had. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1  .  —  Present. 

1st  p.  w  non 
[Mia, 
2d  p.  tu  non 
[abbia, 

3d  p.   egli  or  ella 
{non  dbbia. 

that  I  have  not,  or 
[may  not  have  ; 
that    thou    have 
[not; 
that    he    or    she 
[have  not  ; 

non  abbidmOj 
non  abbidte, 
non  dbbiano, 

that  we  have  not} 

that     you    have 
[not; 
that    they     have 
[not. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w  non 

[avessi, 
2d  p.  tu  non 
[avessi, 
3d  p.  non  aves- 
[se, 

if  I  had  not,  or 
[should  not  have; 
if  thou  hadst  not  ; 

if  he  or  she  had 
[not; 

non  avessimo, 
non  avdste, 
non  avesseroy 

if  we  had  not  ; 
if  you  had  not  ; 
if  they  had  not. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  non  avrei, 

2d  p.  non   avre- 
[fit, 
3d  p.  non  avreb- 
[be, 

I  should,   would, 
[or    could    not 
[have  ;  or  might 
[not  have  ; 
thou  wouldst  not 
[have  ; 
he  or  she  would 
[not  have  ; 

\non  avr6mmo, 

non  avre"stet 
non  amebbero, 

we     should      or 
[would  not  have; 

you    would    not 
[have  ; 
they    would   not 
[have  ; 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


171 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1st  p.    , 

V.    IMPE 

RATI7E. 

non  abbidmo 
[noi, 
non  abbidte  voi, 

non      dbbiano 
[eglino  or  elleno  j 

let  us  not  have  ; 
have  not  ye  ; 

let     them      not 
[have. 

2d  p.  non  avere* 
[tu, 
3d  p.  non  dbbia 
[egli  or  ella, 

have  not  thou  ; 

let  him  or  let  her 
[not  have  ; 

Variation  of  Avere,  interrogatively. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p. 
2dp. 
3d  p. 

ho  w  ? 
Mi  tu  ? 
ha  egli  or 
[ella  ? 

have  I  ? 
hast  thou  ? 
has  he  or  she  ? 

abbidmo  noi  ? 
avete  voi  ? 
hdnno  eglino  or 
[elleno  1 

have  we  ? 
have  you  ? 
have  they  ? 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  aveva  w? 
2d  p.  avevi  tu  1 
3d  p.  aveva  6gli 
[or  tola  1 


had  I  ? 
hadst  thou  ? 
had  he  or  she  ? 


avevdmo  n6i  ? 
avevdte  voi  1 
avevano     eglino 
[or  elleno  ? 


had  we  ? 
had  you  ? 
had  they  ? 


.—  Perfect. 


1st  p.  ebbiio? 
2d  p.  avesti  tu  ? 
3d  p.  ebbe     egli 
[or  ella  ? 

had  I? 
hadst  thou  ? 
had  he  or  she  ? 

avemmonoi  ? 
aveste  voi  ? 
ebbero  eglino  or 
[elleno  ? 

had  we  ? 
had  you  ? 
had  they  ? 

*  The  second  person  of  the  imperative  of  Italian  verbs,  preceded  by  the  nega- 
tive particle  non,  is  changed  for  the  present  of  tho  infinitive  of  the  same  verbs :  as, 
non  avere  (instead  of  non  dbbi),  'have  not  [thou].'  Poets,  however,  and  Anoito 
and  Alfieri  in  particular,  have  used  both  forms  indiscriminately. 


172 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  avrd  w  ?  jshall   or    will    I  ! !  avremo  noi  ? 
[have? 

\avrete  voi  1 


Plural. 

shall  or  will  we 
[have  ? 
will  you  have  ? 


2d  p.   avrditu?  wilt  thou  have  r     \u.v§  c**,  w*  i  »»"-  j-- 

Sd  p.  <M>ra    e^ii  will    he    or    she  Warano     eglino  will  they  have  ? 
[or  ilia  ?  [have  ?  j  [or  elleno  ?\ 

COMPOUND    TENSES^ 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 

1st.  p.  ho  w  avuto,  or  I      have  I  had  ? 
[ho  avuto  w  ?! 

III.     CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  avrei  w  ? 
2d  p.  avrestitu? 

3d  p.  avrebbe 
[egli  or  ilia  ? 

should,  would,  or 
[could  I  have  ? 
wouldst         thou 
[have  ? 
would  he  or  she 
[have  ? 

\avremmo  noi  1 
avrdste  voi  ? 

avrebbero  eglino 
[or  elleno  ? 

should  or  would 
[we  have  ? 
would  you  have  ? 

would  they  haver 

Variation  of  Avere,  interrogative-negatively. 


I.    INDICATIVE. 

SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  non  ho  w? 
2d  p.  wo/I      hdi 
\tu? 
3d  p.  non       ha 
[egli  or  ilia  ? 

have  I  not  ? 
hast  thou  not  ? 

has    he    or    she 
[not  ? 

'non  abbidtno  ndi? 
lnon  avete  voi  ? 

non  hdnno  egli- 
[no  or  elleno  ? 

have  we  not  ? 
have  you  not  ? 

have  they  not  ? 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  non  auevalhad  I  not  ? 


[noi  ? 


had  we  not  ? 


3.  —  Perfect. 
1st.  p.  non  ebbi  w  ?  \  had  I  not  ? 


AUXILIARY  VERBS.  173 

»  „ 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  non  avrd  io  ?  \  shall  or  will  I  not  have  ? 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 


1st  p.  non  ho  w  avuto, 


have  I  not  had  ? 


[or  non  ho  avitto  w  ? 

IV.     CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  non  avrei  w  ?  I  should,    would,   or 
[could  I  not  have  ? 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Essere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Simple  Tenses.                                                 Compound  Tensea. 

1.  —  Present.                                   2.  —  Past. 

\  to  be. 

essere  stdto,  m.  s.  1 

[stdti,  p.  f  *0  havp 

,          .  ,  ~         _    *     ^  iw  Have 

essere^stata,  f.  s.i 
[state,  p.*^ 

been. 

JSssere, 


3.  —  Future. 

•':     '-, 

GERUND. 

4.  —  Present.  5.  — 

e55endo(sendot),|  being.  II  essendo  stdto,m.  )  jiavin 


,  ,  . 

t  Some  authors,  and  Machiavelli  in  particular,  have  used  this  form  constan  tly  in 
prose. 

15* 


ANALOGY. 


PARTICIPLE. 


6.  —  Present. 


7.  —  Past. 


(essente,  s., 
essenti,p.,*) 


stdto,  m.  s. 

[stdti,  p. 
stdta,  f.  s. 

[state,  p. 


been. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


Singular. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  to  so'no, 
2d  p.  sei  or  se', 
3d  p.  *, 


1st  p.  w  era, 

2d  p.  en, 

3d  p.  dg-fo'  era, 


lam; 
thou  art ; 
he  is; 


\\sidmo  (semo), 
(sete), 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


I  was; 


thou  wast ; 
he  was ; 


eravdmo      (era- 
[ino),t 
eravate, 
erano, 


Plural. 


we  are ; 
you  are ; 
they  are. 


you  were ; 
they  were. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  /wi, 
2d  p.  fosti, 
3d  p.  /M  (fue), 


I  was; 
thou  wast ; 
he  was ; 


fummo, 

foste, 

furono     (funnOj 

[furnp,  furo,  fur, 

[0r  foro), 


4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  sard  (fia),  I  shajl  or  will  be  ;j  saremo, 


2d  p.  sardi, 
3d  p.  sard    (fia, 
[fie), 


thou  wilt  be ; 
he  will  be ; 


sarete, 

sardnno  (fiano, 
[fieno), 


we  were ; 
you  were ; 
they  were. 


we  shall   or  will 
[be; 
you  will  be ; 
they  will  be. 


*  These  forms  are  obsolete. 

|  Old    writers  have  used  eramo  even  in  prose,  and  Alfieri  has  followed  their 
usage  in  his  Vita.. 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


175 


Singular. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 


1st  p.     io   sono 
[stdto,m., 
[stdta,  f., 
2d  p.  sei    stdto, 
[-a, 
3d  p.  e  stdto,  -a, 

I  have  been  ; 

thou  hast  been  ; 

he   or    she    has 
[been  ; 

sidmo  stdti,  m. 
[stdte,  f. 

siete  stdti,  -e} 

eglino  sono  stdti, 
[or  elleno  state, 

Plural. 


we  have  been  j 


you  have  been ; 
they  have  been. 


6.  —  Pluperfect. 


1st  p.  w  era  std- 
[to,  -a, 


I  had  been  j 


I  eravdmo  stdti,  -e,]we  had  been. 


7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 

1st  p.  fui  stdto,  I  had  been ;          \\fummo  stdti,  -e,  I  we  had  been. 
.[-«, 

8.  —  Future  interior. 


1st  p.  8ardstdto,\l    shall    or    will  II  saremo  stdti, -e 
[-a,|        [have  been; II 


we  shall  or  will 
[have  been. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  io  sia, 

2d  p.  tu  sia  or 
[lit, 

3d  p.  egli  sia, 

that    I     be,     or 
[may  be  j 
that  thou  be  ; 

that  he  be  ; 

sidmo, 
sidte, 
siano  or  sieno, 

ihat  we  be  ; 
that  you  be  ; 
that  they  be. 

2.—  -Imperfect. 

1st  p.  io  fossi 
[(fussi),* 
2d  p.  tu  fossi, 
3d  p.  fosse, 

if   I    were  ;     or 
[should  be  ; 
if  thou  wert  ; 
if  he  were  ; 

fossimo, 

foste, 
fossero  (fossino), 

if  we  were  ; 

if  you  were  ; 
if  they  were. 

*  This  form,  as  well  as/Usse,  and  fbssero  used  by  Villani,  Machiavelli,  Guicciar- 
dini,  even  in  prose,  has  become  obsolete. 


176 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 


3.  —  Perfect 
1st  p.  io  sia  std-  that  I  have  been,!!  sidmo  stati,  -e, 


[to,  -a, 


[or  may  have  | 
[been  ', 


4.  —  Pluperfect. 


Plural. 


that     we     have 
[been. 


1st  p.  w     fossi  if  I  had  been  ;     M/ossimo  stdti,  -e. 
[stdto,  -a, 


if  we  had  been. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  sarei  £sa- 
[ria,  fora), 

2d  p.  saresti, 
3d  p.  sarebbe 
[(saria,  fora), 

I  should,   would, 
[or  could  be; 
[or  might  be  ; 
thou  wouldst  be  ; 
he  would  be  ; 

saremmo, 

sareste, 
sarebbero    (sari- 
[ano  or  sarieno, 
[forano), 

we     should     or 
[would  be, 

you  would  be  ; 
they  would  be. 

COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  —  Past. 

1st  p.  sarci  std- 
[to,  -a, 

I  should,  would, 
[or  could  have 
[been  ;  or  might 
[have  been  ; 

saremmo     stdti, 
A-e, 

we    should, 
[would,  or  could 
[have  been. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Istp 

2d  p.  sia   or   sii  be  thou ; 

[**; 

3d  p.  sia  egli,      let  him  be ; 


sidmo  not,  ilet  us  be  ; 

state  voi,  jbe  ye; 

siano    or     sieno  let  them  be. 
[eglino, 


REGULAR  VERBS.  177 

REGULAR       VERBS. 

Variation  of  Active  Verbs. 

Active  verbs,  in  the  compound  tenses,  are  varied  with 
the  auxiliary  verb  avere,  '  to  have.' 

FIRST    CONJUGATION. 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Am  are. 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  are.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present. 

i 

Am-dre  to  love. 


Compound   Tenses. 

2.  —  Past, 
avere  amato,         to  have  loved. 


3.  —  Future. 


GERUND. 

±.  —  Present.  „  5.  —  Past. 

am-dndo,  loving.  \\avendo  amdto,     having  loved. 

PARTICIPLE. 

6.  —  Present.  V.  —  Past. 


am-dnte,  s..  am- 
' 


am-dto,    m.    s,,  ") 

.["'"-^.IP-  Cloved. 
am-ata,      f.    s.,  i 

[am-dte,  p.  j*  ) 


*  The  present  participle  of  active  verbs,  like  that  ofavtre,  agrees  with  the  subject  of 
the  proposition  in  gender  and  number.  The  yos«  participle  agrees,  sometimes,  with 
the  06/ec£  in  gender  and  number. 


178 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


II.  INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


1.  —  Present. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  am-0, 

2d  p.  dm-i, 
3d  p.  am-a, 

I     love,    or    do 
[love,    or    am 
[loving; 
thou  lovest  ; 
he  loves  ; 

am-iamOy 

am-dte, 
dm-anOj 

we  love  ; 

you  love  ; 
they  love. 

1st  p.  10  am-ava, 

2d  p.  am~dvit 
3d  p.    egli    am- 
[-dva, 

I    loved,    or  did 
[love,    or  was 
[loving  ; 
thou  lovedst  ; 
he  loved  ; 

am-avamo, 

am-avdte, 
am-dvano, 

we  loved  ; 

you  loved  ; 
they  loved  ; 

3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  am-di, 

2d  p.  am-dsti, 
3d  p.  am-d, 

I  loved,   or    did 
[love  ; 
thou  lovedst  ; 
he  loved  ; 

am-dmmo, 

am-dstef 
am-drono     (am- 
\-aro  or  am-dr), 

we  loved  ; 

you  loved  ; 
they  loved. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  am-erd,* 

2d  p.  am-erdij 
3d  p.  am-era, 

I    shall    or    will 
[love  5 
thou  -wilt  love  ; 
he  will  love  ; 

am-eremo, 

am-erite^ 
am-erdnno, 

we  shall  or  wil 
[lovej 
you  will  love  ; 
they  will  love  ; 

*  The  rerbs  of  this  conjugation  in  the  future  and  the  conditional,  change  the  a  oi 
their  terminations  for  e,  and  make  am-erd,  &c.;  am-erei,  &c.j  instead  of  am-ard,  &c.| 

nm-n-rpi.  Xrt*. 

REGULAR  VERBS. 


179 


Singular. 


Plural. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 


5.  —  Second  Perfect. 


1st  p.  ho*  amdto, 
2d  p.  hdi  amdto, 
3d  p,  ha  amdto, 


I  have  loved  ; 
thou  hast  loved  ; 
he,  she,  or  it  has 


j  abbidmo  amdto, 
avete  amdto, 
hdnno  amdto, 


we  have  loved  ; 
you  have  loved ; 
they  have  loved. 


[loved  ; 

6.  —  Pluperfect. 

1st  p.    to   aveva  I  had  loved  ;        ll&umfcmo  amdto,  I  we  had  loved. 
[amdto, 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p,  ebbi  amdto,  \  I  had  loved. 

8.  — •  Future  interior. 
1st  p.  avrd  amdto,  \  I  shall  or  will  have  loved. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES* 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.      to    dm-i 
[(am-e), 
2d  p.  tu  am-i, 
3d  p.    egli  dm-i 
[(am-e), 

that    I   love,  .or 
[may  love  ; 
that  thou  lovest  ; 
that  he  loves  ; 

am-idmo, 

am-idte, 
dm-ino, 

that  we  love  ; 

that  you  love  ; 
that  they  love. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  to  am-dssi, 

2d  p.  tu  am-dssi, 
3d  p.  am-dsse, 

if   I     loved,    or 
[should  love; 
if  thou  lovedst; 
if  he  loved  ; 

am-dssimo, 

am-dste, 
am-dssero    (am- 
[-assino), 

if  we  loved  ; 

if  you  loved  ; 
if  they  loved. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  to  dbbia  amato, 


that  I  have  loved,  or 
[may  have  loved ; 


180  ANALOGY. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  to  avessi  amdto,  \  if  I  had  loved. 


Singular. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


SIMPLE    TENSE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.       am-erei 

I  should,  would, 

am-er6mmo, 

we  should,  would 

[(am-eria), 

[or  could  love, 

[or  could  love  ; 

2d  p.   am-eresti, 

[or  might  love  ; 
thou         wouldst 

am-ereste, 

you  would  love  ; 

[love  ; 

3d  p.  am-erebbe 
[(am-  ma), 

he  would  Jove  ; 

am-erebbero(am- 
[-eriano,    am- 

they  would  love. 

[-erieno), 

[COMPOUND  TENSE. 

2.  —  Past. 

1st  p.  avrei  amato, 


I   should,  would,  or  could   have 
[loved  ;  or  might  have  loved. 


V.     IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.  . 

2d  p.  dm-a  tu, 
3d  p.  dm-iedi, 

love  thou  ; 
et  him  love  ; 

am-idmo  noi, 
am  ate  voi, 
dm-ino  dglino, 


let  us  love ; 

love  ye ; 

let  them  love. 


Besides  the  foregoing  changes  of  termination,  there 
are  some  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  which  undergo 
in  some  persons  and  tenses  a  change  of  orthography  : 
Thus,  verbs  ending  in  care,  gare,  in  order  to  preserve 
the  hard  sound  of  c,  g,  in  all  their  inflections,  take  an 
h  after  those  consonants  whenever  they  are  followed  by 
6,  i  •  as,  cercare,  '  to  search  '  ;  pregare,  c  to  entreat.' 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


183 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Cercare. 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  care.) 

II.   INDICATIVE. 

Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  cdrc-o, 

2d  p.  cercH-i, 
3d  p.  cere-  a, 

I  search,  or    do 
[search,  or  am 
[searching  ; 
thou  searchest  ; 
he  searches  ; 

cercH-idmo, 

cere-ate, 
cerc-anO) 

we  search  ; 

you  search  ; 
they  search. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  cercn-erd,\I    shall    or  will 
[search  ; 
2d  p.  cercH-erdi,  thou  wilt  search  ; 
3d  p.  cercH-ero;,  |he  will  search  ; 

\  cercH-eremo, 

cei'cis-erete, 
I  cercH-erdnno. 

we  shall  or  will 
[search  ; 
you  will  search  ; 
they  will  search. 

III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  io  cercu-i  that  I  search,  or 


[(cercH-e), 


2d  p.  tu 

3d  p.  egli  cercH-i 
[(cercH-e), 


1st  p.  cercu-erei 
[(cercH-eria), 


2d  p. 


[may  search ; 
that  thou  search ; 

that  he  search ; 


cerciz-iamo, 
cercu-idte, 


cercn-ino, 


that  we  search ; 
that  you  search ; 
that  they  search. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


1.  —  Present. 


[sti, 


, 

3d  p.  cercH-ereb- 
[be  (cercH-eria)  , 


I  should,  would, 
[or          could 
[search  ;       or 
[might  search  ; 
thou        wouldst 
[search  ; 
he  would  search  ; 

cerc*L-eremmo9 

cercn-ereste, 

cercu-erebbero 
[(cercH-enano, 
[cercH-erieno), 

we  should,  would, 
[or  could  search  ; 

you  would  search  ; 
they  would  search. 

16 


182 


ANALOGY. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular.  \ 


Plural. 


2d  p.  cerc-a  tu, 
3d  p.  cercH-i 
[**, 

search  thou  ; 
let  him,  her,  or  it 
[search  ; 

cercB-idmo  noi, 
cerc-6.te  voi, 
cercH-ino  egli- 
[no} 


let  us  search ; 

search  ye ; 

let  them  search. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Pregare. 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  gare.) 


II.     INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  preg-o, 

2d  p.  pregTL-i, 
3d  p.  preg-a, 

I  entreat,  or  do 
[entreat,  or  am 
[entreating  ; 
thou  entreatest  ; 
he  entreats  ; 

pregR-idmo, 

preg-ate, 
preg-ano, 

we  entreat  ; 

you  entreat  ; 
they  entreat. 

4.  —  Future. 

Istip.pregii-erd, 

2d  p.  pregn-erdi, 
3d  p.  pregn-era, 

I  shall  or  will  en- 
[treat  ; 
thou  wilt  entreat; 
he  will  entreat  ; 

pregu-eremo, 

pregK-erete, 
pregu-erdnno, 

we  shall  or  will 
[entreat  ; 
you  will  entreat  ; 
they  will  entreat. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.—  Present. 


1st  p.  10  pregu-i 
[(pregn-e), 
2d  p.  tu  pregu-ij 
3d  p.  eglipregK'i 
[(pre'gH-e), 

that  I  entreat,  or 
[may  entreat  ; 
that  thou  entreat  ; 
that  he  entreat. 

pregH-idmo 

pregH-idte, 
pregu-ino, 

that  we  entreat ; 

that  you  entreat ; 
that  they  entreat. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


183 


Singular. 


IV.     CONDITIONAL. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  pregu-erei 
[(pregH-eria), 

2dp.  pregu-ere- 
[sti, 
3d  p.pregH-ereb- 
[be    (pregn- 
[-eHa), 

I  should,  would, 
[or    could    en- 
[treat  ;  or  might 
[entreat  ; 
thou  wouidst  en- 
[treat  ; 
he     would    en- 
[treat  ; 

pregu-ertmmo, 

pregu-ereste, 

pregu-er6bbero 
[(pregu-eriano, 
[pregH-erieno), 

we  should,  would, 
[or    could    en- 
[treat; 

you    would    en- 
[treat; 
they  would    en- 
[treat. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


2d  p.  preg-a  tu, 
3d  p.  prtgu-i 
tfgli, 

entreat  thou  ; 
let  him,  her,  or  it 
[entreat  ; 

pregH-idmo  noi,  let  us  entreat ; 
preg-dte  voi,         entreat  ye  ; 
pregn-ino    egli-  let  them  entreat, 
[no, 


Verbs  ending  in  ciare,  giare,  drop  the  i,  which  follows 
c,  g,  whenever  a,  gi,  precede  e,  I ;  as,  baciare,  c  to 
kiss ' ;  fregiare,  c  to  adorn.' 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Baciare. 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  dare.) 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  oaci-o, 

2d  p.  6ac-i, 
3d  p.  bdci-a 


I  kiss  or  do  kiss, 
[or  am  kissing ; 
thou  kissest  j 
he  kisses  ; 


bac-ldmo, 

baci-dte, 
bdci-ano, 


we  kiss ; 

you  kiss ; 
they  kiss. 


L84 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  bac-erd, 

2d  p.  bac-erdi, 
3d  p.  bac-era, 

4.  —  j 

I  shall,    or  will 
[kiss  ; 
thou  wilt  kiss  ; 
he  will  kiss  ; 

Future, 
bac-eremo, 

bac-erete, 
bac-erdnno, 

we  shall,  or  will 
[kiss; 

you  will  kiss ; 
they  will  kiss. 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p,   io  bdc-i 
[(bac-e), 
2d  p  tu  bac-i, 
3d  p.  egli   bdc-i 
[(bac-e), 

that  I    kiss,    or 
[may  kiss  ; 
that  thou  kiss  ; 
that  he  kiss  ; 

bac-ldmo, 

baccate, 
bdc-ino, 

that  we  kiss  j 

that  you  kiss  ; 
that  they  kiss. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
1,  •—  Present. 


1st  p.   bac-erti 
[(bac-eria), 

2d  p.  bac-eresti, 

3d  p.  bac-er^bbe 
[(faxoena), 

I  should,  would,] 
[or  could  kiss  ; 
[or  might  kiss  ; 
thou         wouldst 
[kiss  ; 
he  would  kiss  ; 

bac-eremmo, 

bac-ereste, 

bac-erebbero 
[(5ac-mano, 
[bac-erieno), 

we  should,  would, 
[or  could  kiss  ; 

you  would  kiss  ; 
they  would  kiss. 

Istp  

V.    IMP 
1 

ERATIVE. 

\bac-'idmo  noi, 
\baci-dte  voij 
\bdc-ino  dgZina, 

let  us  kiss  ; 
kiss  ye  ; 
let  them  kiss. 

2d  p.  bdci-a  tu, 
3d  p.  bdc-i  egli, 

kiss  thou  ; 
let  him  kiss  ; 

REGULAR  VERBS. 


]85 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Fregiare. 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  giareS) 


II.   INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 

1st  p./reci-o, 

2d  p./hjG-i, 
3d  p./reoi-a, 

I  adorn,  do  adorn, 
[or  am  adorning; 
thou  adornest  ; 
he  adorns  ; 

freG-tdmo, 

freGi-dte, 
freGi-ano, 

4.—  Future. 

1st  p./rgG-erc), 

2d  p./rea-erdi, 
3d  p.freG-erd,, 

I    shall    or  will 
[adorn  ; 
thou  wilt  adorn  ; 
he  will  adorn  ; 

\freG~eremo, 

\freG-er6te, 
\freG-erdnno, 

III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  w  freG-i   ithat  I  adorn,  or 
[(freo-e),          [may  adorn; 
2d  p.  tufr6G-i,     that  thou  adorn ; 
3d  p.  egli  fr€G-i  that  he  adorn ; 


egl 
[( 


freG-e),l 


freG-ldmo, 

freG'-iate, 
frfa-ino, 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


1.  —  Present. 


we  adorn ; 

you  adorn ; 
they  adorn. 


we  shall  or  will 
[adorn ; 
you  will  adorn ; 
they  will  adorn. 


that  we  adorn ; 

that  you  adorn ; 
that  they  adorn. 


1st  p.  freG'erei 

[(freo-eria), 

2d  ]>.freG-eresti, 

3d  p.  freG-erebbe 
[(freG-eria, 

I  should,  would, 
[or  could  adorn  ; 
[or  might  adorn  ; 
thou   wouldst  a- 
[dorn  ; 
he  would  adorn  ; 
• 

freG-erfmmo, 

freG-ereste, 

freG-er6bbero, 
[(freG-eriano, 
[frec-erieno), 

we  should,  would, 
[or  could  adorn  ; 

you  would  adorn  ; 
they  would  adorn. 

16* 


186 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Istp | 

2d  p.frdGi-a  tu,  adorn  thou  ; 
3d  p.frfa-i  egli,  let  him  adorn; 


frcG-ldmo  noi, 
freoi-dte  voi, 
freG-ino  eglino, 


let  us  adorn ; 

adorn  ye  ; 

let  them  adorn. 


Verbs  ending  in  rare,  in  which  ia  form  one  syllable, 
drop  the  i  whenever  it  is  followed  by  another  i ;  as, 

Noiare,  'to  annoy.' 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  iare.) 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  noi-o, 

2d  p.  no-i, 
3d  p.  noi-a, 

I  annoy,  do  an- 
[noy,  or  am 
[annoying  ; 
thou  annoyest  ; 
he  annoys  ; 

no-'idmo, 

noi-dte, 
noi-ano, 

we  annoy  ; 

you  annoy  ; 
they  annoy. 

III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 


1. —  Present. 


1st  p.  10    no-i 

[(noi-e), 
2d  p.  tu  no-i^ 
3d  p.  egli   no-i 
[(noi-e), 


that  I  annoy  or 
[may  annoy  ; 
that  thou  annoy ; 
that  he  annoy ; 


no-ldmo, 

no-tdte, 
no-ino. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 

no-idmo, 


Istp.   .   .   .   .     j uno-ldm 

2d  p.  noi-a  tu,     annoy  thou ;        I \noi-dte, 
3d  p.  no-i  egli,    [let  him  annoy ;    ||  no-ino, 


that  we  annoy  ; 

that  you  annoy ; 
that  they  annoy. 


let  us  annoy ; 

annoy  ye; 

let  them  annoy. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


187 


Verbs  ending  in  tare,  in  which  ia  form  two  syllables, 
drop  the  i,  only  when  it  would  be  followed  by  the  vowels 
ta;  as, 

lyiviare,  '  to  send.' 

II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  invi-o, 

2d  p.  invi-if 
3d  p.  invi-a, 

I  send,  do  send, 
[or  am  sending  ; 
thou  sendest; 
he  sends  ; 

inv-idmo, 
invi-dte, 

Plural. 


we  send ; 

you  send ; 
they  send. 


SECOND     CONJUGATION. 


The  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  commonly  divided 
into  two  classes,  those  ending  in  ere  (long),  and  those 
ending  in  ere  (short)  :  both  of  these  in  the  perfect  have 
two  terminations,  ei  and  etti  ;  except  a  few  which  have 
the  termination  ei  only. 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Temere. 

(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  ere  (long)  ;  and  of 
those  which  in  the  perfect  end  in  ei  and  etti.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tenses. 

1. —  Present. 
Tem-ere,  jto  fear. 


Compound  Tenses. 

2.  —  Past . 
||  avtre  temuto,      |to  have  feared. 


188  ANALOGY. 

3.  —  Future. 

SSSM^rc. 


GERUND. 


4.  —  Present. 
tem~6ndo,  [fearing; 


5.  —  Past . 
11  avendo  temuto,  lhaving  feared. 


PARTICIPLE. 


6.  —  Present. 


7.  — Past. 


tem-ente,  s., 
tern-tnti,  p., 


>  fearing ; 


tetn-utOj  m.  s.}  "J 
[tem-uti,  p.,  ( 

tem-uta,  t.  s.,  / 
[<cm-wfe,p.,  ) 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  tem-o, 

I    fear,      or    do 

tem-idmo   (tera- 

we  fear; 

[fear,     or    am 

[•emo), 

[fearing  ; 

2d  p.  tem-i, 

thou  fearest  ; 

tem-ete, 

you  fear  ; 

3d  p.  tem-e, 

he  fears; 

'•  tem-ono9 

they  fear. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  io  tem-eva 

I    feared,   or  did 

tem-evdmo, 

we  feared  ; 

[or  tem-ea, 

[fear,   or    was 

[fearing  ; 

2d  p.  tem-evi, 

thou  fearedst  ; 

tem-evdte, 

you  feared  ; 

3d  p.  egli     tem- 

he  feared  ; 

tem-evano   or 

they  feared. 

[•eva  or  tem-ea, 

[tem-6ano, 

[(tem-ieno), 

REGULAR  VERBS. 

Singular.  Plural. 


189 


3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  fem-Ei  or 
[fem-ETTi, 
[(tem-e'), 
2d  p.  tem-esti, 
3d  p.  tem-E  or 

[tem-ETTE 

[(tem-e-o), 

I  feared,   or  did 
[fear; 

thou  fearedst  ; 
he  feared  ; 

tem-emmo, 

tem-este, 
fem-ERONO    or 

[Jem-ETTERO 

[(tem-ero,  tem-er) 

we  feared  ; 

you  feared  ; 
they  feared. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  tem-erd) 

2d  p.  tem-erdi, 
3d  p.  tem-erb, 

I    shall    or   will 
[fear; 
thou  wilt  fear  ; 
he  will  fear  ; 

tem-eremo, 

tem-erete, 
tem-erdnnOy 

we  shall  or  will 
[fear; 
you  will  fear  ; 
they  will  fear. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5. —  Second  Perfect. 
1st  p.  ho  temutOj]  I  have  feared ;     ||  abbidmo  temuto^we  have  feared. 

6.—  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  10  aveva  temuto,         \  I  had  feared, 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  ebbi  temuto,  \  I  had  feared. 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 
1st  p.  avrd  temuto,  \   I  shall  or  will  have  feared. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE, 


that  we  fear  5 
that  you  fear ; 
that  they  fear. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  10  tem-a, 

3d  p.  tu  t6m-a  or 
\tem-i, 
3d  p.  6gli  tem-a, 

that  I    fear,    or 
[may  fear  ; 
that  thou  fear; 

that  he  fear  ; 

tem-idmo, 
tem-idte, 
tem-ano. 

190 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


-Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w  tem-essi, 

2d  p.  tu  tem-essi, 
8d  p.  tem-6sse, 


if    I    feared,     or 

[should  fear  ; 

if  thou  fearedst  ; 

if  he  feared  ; 


tem-este, 
tem-essero  (tem- 


[-essino),| 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  w  dbbia  temuto,  Ithat  I  have  feared,  or 
\       [may  have  feared. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  w  avessi  temuto <t  \  if  I  had  feared. 


if  we  feared  > 

if  you  feared ; 
if  they  feared. 


I  should,  would, 
[or  could  fear ; 
[or  might  fear  > 


1st  p.  tem-erei 
[(tem-eria), 

2d  p.  tem-eresti, 

[fear ; 

3d  p.  tem-er6bbe  he  would  fear; 
[(tern-era), 


thou 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 

tem-ertmmo, 


wouldst 


tem-ereste, 

tem-erebbero 
[(tem-erianO) 
[tem-erieno), 


we  should,  would, 
[or  could  fear ; 

you  would  fear; 
they  would  fear. 


COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  —  Past. 


1st  p.  avrei  temuto, 


I  should,  would,  or  could  have 
[feared  >  or  might  have  feared. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.  .  .  .  . 
£d  p.  t6m-i  tu 
8d  p.  t6m-a  egli, 


fear  thou ; 
let  him  fear ; 


tem-idmo  noi,      ilet  us  fear ; 
tem-ete  voit          fear  ye ; 
tem-ano  6glino,  Jlet  them  fear. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


191 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Tessere. 

igm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  ere  (short)  ;  and  of 
those  which  in  the  perfect  end  in  ei  only.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Simple  Tenses.  Compound  Tenses.    &,%••$ 

I. —  Present.  2.—  Past. 

Ttss~ere,  |to  weave.  j|  avere  tessuto,     jto  have  woven. 

3.  —  Future. 


GERUND. 

4.  —  Present.  5.  —  Past. 

tess-endo,  |  weaving.  J|  avendo  tessuto,  [having  woven. 

PARTICIPLE. 

6.  —  Present.  7.  —  Past. 


less- Bute*  s.,     '    7 
tess-enti,?:,         Reaving. 


„._,  m.  s., 

[tess-utij  p., 

tess-uta,  f.  s., 
[tess-ute,  p., 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  ttss-o, 


I  weave,  or  do 
[weave,  or  am 
[weaving ; 


tess-idmo  (tess- 


we  weave. 


192  ANALOGY. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w  tess-eva  or  tess-ea,    \  I   wove,  or  did  weave,  or 

[was  weaving. 


Singular.  Plural. 

3,  —  Perfect . 


1st  p.  tess-£i9 
2d  p.  tess-esti, 


I    wove,  or  did 
[weave ; 
thou  wovest ; 


3d  p.  tess-£(tess-  he  wove ; 


tess-emmo, 
tess-este, 


we  wove  ; 

you  wove ; 
they  wove. 


[-eo), 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  tess-erd,          \  I  shall  or  will  weave. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 
1st  p.  ho  tessuto,       |  I  have  woven. 

6.—  Pluperfect. 

1st  p.  10  aveva  tessuto,    \  I  had  woven. 
7. —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  Mi  tessuto,    \  I  had  woven. 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 
1st  p.  avrd  tessitto,  \  I  shall  or  will  have  woven. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 
1st  p.  10  tess-at  \  that  I  weave,  or  may  weave. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  w  tess-essi)  \  if  I  wove,  or  should  weave. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.  —  Perfect. 
1st  p.io  tiblia  tessuto9        \  if  I  wove,  or  should  weave. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  193 


4.—  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  io  av6ssi  tessuto,        \  if  I  had  woven. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1. — Present. 


1st  p.  tess-erei  (tess-eria),   i  I  should,  would,  or  could  weave  ; 

[or  might  weave. 


COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.—  Past. 


1st  p.  avrei  tessiilo,  1 1  should,  would,  or  < 

I   [woven ;  or  might  h; 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 

1st  p I  ..... 

2d  p.  tess-i  tu,  \  weave  thou. 


could  have 
iave  woven. 


[For  a  list  of  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation,  that  in  the  perfect  end  in  #,  or 
in  ei  and  etti,  see  APPENDIX,  F.J 


Verbs  ending  in  cere  (long),  in  order  to  preserve  the 
soft  sound  of  c  in  all  their  inflections,  take  an  i  after 
that  consonant,  whenever  it  is  followed  by  a,  o,  u ;  as, 

Tacere,  '  to  be  silent.' 
(Paradigm  of  verbs  ending  in  cere  (long)*.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 
PARTICIPLE. 

7.  —  Past. 

taci-utot  in.  s,,  taci-uli,  p.,  \  .          .,     t 
taci-uta,  f.  s.,  taci-ute,?.,  5  b<  'nt' 

*  These  verbs  are  subject,  also,  to  some  irrtgularitiis,  which  will  be  noticed  i 
treating  of  Irregular  Verbt. 

17 


194                                    ANALOGY. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular. 

1.  —  Present. 

lstp.faci-o*(tac- 

I  am  silent  ; 

tac-ldmo, 

[ci-o), 

2d  p.  tac-i, 

thou  art  silent  ; 

tac-ete, 

3d  p.  tdc-e, 

he  is  silent  ; 

tdci-ono 

(tacci- 

[-ono), 

Plural. 


we  are  silent ; 

you  are  silent ; 
they  are  silent. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1. —  Present. 


1st  p.   io    tdci-a 
[(tacci-a), 
2d  p.   tu    tdci-a 
[or  tac-i  (tacci- 
[-a,) 
3d  p.  egli  tdci-a 
[(tacci-a), 

that  I  be  silent,  0r 
[may  be  silent  ; 
that  thou   be  si- 
[lent; 

that  he  be  silent  ; 

tac-'idmo, 
tac-ldte, 

tdci-ano    (tacci- 
[-ano), 

that  we  be  silent  ; 

that  you  be  si- 
[lent  ; 

that  they  be  si- 
[lent. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.  .  :  .   . 

tac-lamo  noi,       let 

us  be  silent  * 

2d  p.  tac-i   tu, 
3d  p.  tdci-a  (tac- 
[ci-a)  egli, 

be  thou  silent  ; 
let  him  be  silent  ; 

tac-ete  voi,           be 
tdci-ano    (tacci-|let 
[-ano)  eglino,}\ 

ye  silent  ; 
them  be  si- 
[lent 

Verbs  ending  in  cere  (short)  take  an  i  after  c,  in  the  past  participle 
only  ;  as,  I.  pdsc-ere,^  to  feed  ' ;  7.  — pasci-ulo,  m.  s.,pasci-uti,  p. ; 
pasci-uta,  f.  s. ;  pasci-iite,  p., «  fed.' 


Verbs  ending  in  iere  drop  the  i,  whenever  it  is  fol- 
lowed by  another  i  ;  as3 

Empiere,  '  to  fill.' 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  iere.) 


1st  p. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

j .  —  Present. 

|I  fill,  or  do  fill,  or  \\emp-idmo  (emp-  we  fill; 
[am  filling;"  [-'iemo), 


*  Tdcio,  pronounce  both  the  Romans  and  Florentines,  following  the  orthography 
«>f  the  best  prose  writers  (and  not  tdccio,  as  poets  have,  sometimes,  been  obliged  to 
say),  to  distinguish  this  from  t'accio,  a  form  of  the  verb  taccidre,  c  to  blame.' 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


195 


Singular. 


Plural. 


2d  p.  6mp-i, 
3d  p.  empi-e, 


thou  fillest; 
he  fills, 


\empi-ete, 
\empi-ono, 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.    .    .    . 
2d  p.  emp-i  tu, 
3d  p.  empi-a 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


fill  thou  ; 
let  him  fill ; 


emp'iamo, 
empi-6te} 
empi-ano  j 


you  fill ; 
they  fill. 


1st  p.  w  empi-a 
[(empi-e), 
2d  p.  tu    empi-a 
[or  emp-i, 
3d  p.  egli  empi-a 
[(empi-e), 

that   I     fill,     or 
[may  fill  ; 
that  thou  fill  ; 

that  he  fill  ; 

emp-ldmo, 
emp-late, 
empi-ano, 

that  we  fill  ; 
that  you  fill  ; 
that  they  fill. 

let  us  fill  j 

fill  ye  J 

let  them  fill. 


THIRD     CONJUGATION. 

The  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  divided  into  three 
classes,  those  which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative, 
end  in  o  ;  those  which  end  in  isco  ;  and  those  which 
have  both  of  these  terminations. 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Sentire. 

(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  which, 
in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  end  in  o  only.) 


Simple  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present. 
Sent-ire,  |to  hear. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Compound  Tenses. 

2.  —  Past. 
|j  avere  sentitOj       (to  have  heard. 


196 


ANALOGY. 


3 — Future. 


avere  a  sentire, 
essere  per  sentire, 
dovere  sentire, 


4.  —  Present, 
sent-endoj  |hearing. 


to  have  to  hear,  or 

to  be  about  to  hear. 

j 

GERUND. 

5.  —  Past. 
\\  avendo  sentitot   |having  heard. 

PARTICIPLE. 


6.  —  Present. 

(sent-6nte,  s.,       ) ,       . 
sent-enti,?.,)       Bearing. 


sent-ito,  m.  s., 
[sent-iti,  p., 

sent-ita,  f.  s., 
[sent-ite,  p., 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


Singular.                                                           Plural. 
1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  sent-o, 

2d  p.  s6nt-i, 
3d  p.  sent-E, 

I     hear,    or    do 
[hear,  or  am 
[hearing  ; 
thou  hearest  ; 
he  hears  ; 

sent-idmo, 

sent-ite, 
sent-oxo, 

we  hear  ; 

you  hear  ; 
they  hear. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


[or  sent-ia, 

2d  p.  sent-ivi, 
3d  p.   egli  sent- 
[•iva  or  sent-ia, 


1st  p.  sent-ii, 

2d  p.  sent-istiy 
3d  p.  sent-i(sent- 


1    heard,   or  did 
[hear,  or  was 
[hearing  ; 
thou  heardst  ; 
he  heard  ; 

sent-ivdmo, 

,. 
sent-ivdte, 
sent-ivano     or 
\sent-\ano 
[(sent-ieno), 

3.  — Perfect. 


I   heard,   or    did 
[hear ; 

thou  heardst ; 
he  heard  ; 


sent-immo, 

sent'iste, 
sent-irono  (sent- 
[-iro,  sen-tir), 


we  heard ; 


you  heard ; 
they  heard. 


we  heard ; 

you  heard ; 
they  heard. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


197 


Singular. 
4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  sent~ird, 

2d  p.  sent-irdi, 
3d  p.  serit-irti, 

I    shall    or  will 
[hear  ; 
thou  wilt  hear  ; 
he  will  hear  ; 

sent-iremo, 

sent-irete, 
sent-irdnno, 

Plural. 


we  will  hear ; 

you  will  hear ; 
they  will  hear. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  __  Second  Perfect. 
1st  p.  ho  sentitOj  \  I  have  heard. 

6.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  io  aveva  sentito,    \  I  had  heard, 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  6boi  sentito,  \  I  had  heard, 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 
1st  p.  avrd  sentito,  \  I  shall  or  will  have  heard. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  w  sent-Aj 

2d  p.  tu  sent-A. 
[or  sent-i, 
3d  p.  egli  sent-A  , 

that   I    hear,   or 
[may  hear  ; 
that  thou  hear  ; 

that  he  hear  ; 

sent-idmo, 
sent-idte} 
$e"nt-Axo, 

that  we  hear  ; 
that  you  hear  ; 
that  they  hear. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  io  sent-issi, 

2d  p.  tu  sent-issi, 
3d  p.  sent-isse, 


if    I    heard,    or 
[should  hear  ; 
if  thou  heardst  ; 
if  he  heard  ; 


sent-issimo, 

sent-iste, 
sent-issero  (sent- 


[-fssino),l 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 


if  we  heard  ; 
«iik 

if  you  heard; 
if  they  heard. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  10  dbbia  sentito, 
IT* 


that  I  have  heard,  or 
[may  have  heard. 


198  ANALOGY. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  w  avessi  sentito,     \  if  I  had  heard. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


Singular. 


SIMPLE    TENSE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.   sent-irei 
[(sent-iria), 

2d  p.  sent-ir6sti, 

3d  p.  sent-irebbe 
[(sent-iria)  , 

I  should,  would, 
[or  could  hear  j 
[or  might  hear  j 
thou         wouldst 
[hear  ; 
he  would  hear  ; 

sent-iremmo, 

sent-ireste, 

sent-irebbero 
[(sent-iriano), 

we  should,  would, 
[or  could  hear  j 

you  would  hear  ; 
they  would  hear. 

COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  —  Past  . 

1st  p.  avrdi  sentito, 


I  should,  would,  or  could  have 
[heard ;  or  might  have  heard. 


V.     IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p    ... 

ll  sent-idmo  noi. 

let  us  hear  5 

2d  p.  sent-i  tu, 
3d  p.  sent-A.  6gli, 

hear  thou  ; 
let  him  hear  ; 

sent-ite  voi, 
\\  sdnf-ANO  eglinoy 

hear  ye  ; 
let  them  hear. 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Esibire. 

(Paradigm  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation, 
which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  have  the  termin- 
ation isco  only.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tensei. 

1.  _  Present. 
Esib-ire,  |to  offer. 


Compound   Tenses. 

2.  —  Past. 
||  avere  esibito,       |to  have  offered. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


199 


3.  —  Future. 

avere  ad  esibire,      )  .     ,  „ 

iner*  peresMre,  I  *  ^ave    o  offer    or 


dovere  esibire, 

4.  —  Present, 
esib-endo,  |offering. 


to  be  about  to  offer. 

j 

GERUND. 

5.--  Past. 
||  avtndo  esibito,    |having  offered. 


PARTICIPLE. 


6.  —  Present, 
esib-ente,  s., 


7.  —  Past. 


esib-ito,  m.  s.,    J 

eslb-ita^l'S  [  offered- 
[esib-ite,  p.,  } 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

SIMPLE    TENSES. 

Singular.                                                        Plural. 
1.  —  Present. 

1st  p. 

2dp. 
3d  p. 

esib-iscoj 

esib-isci, 
esib-iscE, 

I     offer,    or    do 
[offer,   or  am 
[offering  ; 
thou  offerest  ; 
he  offers  ; 

esib'idmo, 

esib-ite, 
esib-iscoxo, 

we  offer  ; 

you  offer  ; 
they  offer. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w  esib-wa  or  esib-ia,  \  I  offered,  or  did  offer,  or 

[was  offering. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  esib-ti,  \  I  offered,  or  did  offer. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  esib-ird,  \  I  shall  or  will  offer. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 
1st  p.  ho  esibito,        \  I  have  offered. 


200 


ANALOGY. 

6.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  10  aveva  esibito,  \  I  had  offered. 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  ebU  esibito,         \  I  had  offered. 

8.  —  Future  Anterior.. 
1st  p.  avrd  esibito,        \  I  shall  or  will  have  offered. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 


Singular. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  10  esib- 
[-fscA, 
2d  p.  tu  esib- 
[-ISCA,  or  esib- 

[-1SCHI, 

3d  p.   egli  esib- 
r-iscA. 

that    I   offer,   or 
[may  offer  j 
that  thou  offer; 

that  he  offer  ; 

esib-idmo, 
esil-idte, 

esi6-iscAN 

Plural.    *  * 

that  we  offer  ; 
that  you  offer ; 

that  they  offer. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  w  esib-issij         \  if  I  offered,  or  should  offer. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

*    ! 

3.  —Perfect. 

1st  p.  w  dbbia  esibito,  i  that  I  have  offered,  or 
[may  have  offered. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  w  avessi  esibito,  \  if  I  had  offered. 

IV.     CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  esib-irdi  (esib-iria),    1  I  should,  would,  or  could  offer ; 

[or  might  offer. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  201 

Singular.  Plural. 

COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.—  Past. 

1st  p.  avrei  esib'ito,  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  have 

I    [offered;  or  might  have  offered. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Istp 

2d  p.  esib-isci, 
3d  p.  esil 


offer  thou  ;  ||  esib-ite, 

let  him  offer ; 


let  us  offer ; 

offer  ye ; 

let  them  offer. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Abborrire. 

(Paradigm  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation, 
which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  end  both  in  o 
and  isco.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Simple  Tenses.  Compound  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present.  2.  —  Past . 

Jlbborr-ire,         |to  abhor.  ||  av6re  abborritot  |to  have  abhorred. 

3.  —  Future. 

avere  ad  abborrire,      }  ,     ,  , , 

issere  per  abborrire t     <  fto  ,hav°  S^SS  ** 
dovtre  abbornret          )  t0  be  ab°Ut  tO  abh°r> 

GERUND. 

4.  —  Present.  5.  —  Past. 

abborr-endo,       {abhorring,  \\av6ndo  abborritot  [having  abhorred. 

PARTICIPLE. 

6.  —  Present.  7.  —  Past. 

abborr-ente,  s.,   >   K,      .  abborr-ito,  m.  s., 

abborr-enti,  p.,     Jab«o"ing.  [abborr4ti,  p.,  ^  abhorred. 

abborr-ita,  f.  s., 
P-» 


202 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


1.  —  Present. 


l8tp.a&&orr-o,or  I    abhor,    or  do 


[abborr-iscoj 


3d  p.  a&60Vr-E,or 
[aooorr-fscE, 


[abhor,  or  am 


abborr-idmo, 


[abhorring; 

2d  p.  abborr-i,  or  thou  abhorrest ;       abborr-ite, 
[abborr-faci, 


he  abhors  ; 


abborr-ovo,  or 


[a&0orr-fscoNO, 
2.  —  Imperfect. 


Plural. 


we  abhor ; 


you  abhor ; 
they  abhor. 


1st  p.  io  abborr-wa  or  abborr-ia,<  I  abhorred,  or  did  abhor,  or 

[was  abhorring. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  abborr-ii,  \  I  abhorred,  or  did  abhor. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  abborr-ird,          \  I  shall  or  will  abhor, 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 
1st  p.  ho  abborrito,        \  I  have  abhorred. 

6.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  io  at>eea  abborritot  \  I  had  abhorred. 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  ebbi  abborrito,     \  I  had  abhorred. 

8.  —  Future  interior. 
1st  p.  avrd  abborrito,    \  I  shall  or  will  have  abhorred. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


203 


Singular. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


Istp.t0a00<5rr-A,ithat  I  abhor,  or 
[may  abhor  ; 
that  thou  abhor ; 


that  he  abhor  ; 


[or  abborr-i',  or 
[a&00rr-iscA,or 
[«000rr-iscHi, 
3d  p.  egli  abborr- 
~-A,  or  abborr- 


[-A,  or  c 

[-fsCA, 


abborr-idmo, 
abborr-idte, 


TO,ora-&- 
[oorr-iscANO,, 


that  we  abhor ; 
that  you  abhor ; 


that  they  abhor. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  10  abborr-issij     \  if  I  abhorred,  or  should  abhor. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  10  dbbia  abborrito, 


that  I  have  abhorred,  or 


[may  have  abhorred. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  io  avessi  abborrito,     \  if  I  had  abhorred. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  abborr-irei  (abborr-iria). 


I  should,  would,  or  could  abhor ; 
[or  might  abhor. 


COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  —  Past . 


1st  p.  avrei  abborritot 


I  should,  would,  0r  could  have  ab- 
[horred  5  0r  might  have  abhorred. 


204 


ANALOGY. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singi 
1st  p.    ... 

ilar, 

i 

Plur 

abborr-idmo^noi, 
abborr-ite  voi, 

«&5orr-ANo,    or 
[a&&orr-fscANO 
[eglino, 

al. 

let  us  abhor  ; 
abhor  ye  ; 

let  them  abhc 

2d  p.  abborr-i,  or 
\abborr-i  sci  tuy 
3d  p.  a65Jrr-A,or 

[egli, 

abhor  thou  ; 
let  him  abhor  ; 

[For  a  list  of  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation,  that  in  the  present  of  the  indicative 
end  in  0,  in  tsco,  or  in  o  and  *isco:  see  APPENDIX,  G.] 


Verbs  ending  in  cire,  in  order  to  preserve  the  soft 
sound  of  the  c  in  all  their  inflections,  take  an  i  after  that 
consonant,  whenever  it  is  followed  by  a,  o  ;  as, 

Cucire,  c  to  sew.' 
(Paradigm  of  the  verbs  ending  in  are.) 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  cuci~o, 

2d  p.  cuc-ij 
3d  p.  cwc-e, 

I  sew,  do  sew,  or 
[am  sewing  ; 
thou  sewest  ; 
he  sews  ; 

cuc-ldmo    (cuc- 
[-imo), 
cue-lie  , 
cuci-ono, 

we  sew  ; 

you  sew  ; 
they  sew. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  w  cuci-a, 

2d  p.  tu  cuci-a 

[or  cuc-i, 
3d  p.  egli  cuci-a, 


that    I    sew,    or 
[may  sew  ; 
that  thou  sew  ; 

that  he  sew  ; 

cuc-ldmo, 
cuc-idte, 
cuci-ano, 

that  we  sew  ; 
that  you  sew  ; 
that  they  sew. 

REGULAR  VERBS.  205 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 


1st  p.   .    .    . 
2d  p.  cuc~i  tUj 
3d  p.  cwci-i 


sew  thou ; 
let  him  sew ; 


^ 

cuc-ite  voi, 
cuci-ano  eglino, 


let  us  sew ; 

sew  ye  ; 

let  them  sew. 


REMARKS    ON    THE    FOREGOING    VERBS. 

There  are  some  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  that 
belong  also  to  the  second ;  having  two  terminations  in 
the  infinitive,  one  in  ire,  the  other  in  ere  ;  as, 

appetire,  appttere,  to  desire ; 

inghiottire,         inghiottere,          .    to  swallow : 

some,  that  belong  also  to  the  first  conjugation;  having 
the  two  terminations  ire  and  are  ;  as, 

impazzire,  impazzare,  to  grow  mad ; 

incoraggire,        incoraggiare,        to  encourage : 

and  some  others,  that  belong  to  all  three  of  the  conju- 
gations ;  as, 

ruggire,    ruggere,    rugghiare,       to  roar  ; 
olire,         olere,         olezzare,  to  be  fragrant. 

These  verbs  are  differently  varied,  according  to  the 
conjugation  to  which  their  different  terminations  re- 
spectively belong. 

The  verbs  of  the  second  and  third  conjugation,  in 
the  first,  second,  and  third  persons  singular  of  the 
present  of  the  indicative  and  conjunctive,  and  in  the 
second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  imperative, 
have  constantly  the  accent  on  the  penultimate  syllable ; 
as,  temo,  temi,  teme,  —  tema ;  sento,  senti,  sente,  — 
senta,  &c.  Of  those  of  the  first  conjugation,  some 
have  the  accent  on  the  penultimate  syllable ;  as,  amo, 
ami,  ama,  —  ami  ;  and  others,  on  the  antepenultimate  ; 

18 


206  ANALOGY. 

as,  mormoro  ('I  murmur  '),  mormori,  mormora, — mor- 
mori, &tc. 

[For  rules  for  determining  when  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  in  the  present 
of  the  indicative,  conjunctive,  and  imperative,  have  the  accent  on  the  penultimate  or 
the  antepenultimate  syllable,  see  APPENDIX,  H.] 

JLmbire,  c  to  crave,'  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the 
present  of  the  indicative,  conjunctive,  and  imperative  ; 

—  and  in  the  second  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the 
conjunctive,  makes  abbiamo  ambizione,  —  abbiate  ambi- 
zione, to  distinguish  these  persons  from  the  correspond- 
ing ones  of  the  verb  ambiare,  '  to  amble.5 

Jlrdire,  c  to  dare,'  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the 
present  of  the  indicative,  conjunctive,  and  imperative  ; 

—  in  the  second  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the  con- 
junctive,  —  and  in   the  gerund  makes,  abbiamo  ardire 
or  ardimento, —  abbiate  ardire,  &c.,  —  avendo  ardire  ; 
and   not  ardiamo,  —  ardiate,  —  ardendo,   which   come 
from  ardere,  'to  burn.' 

Bollire,  '  to  boil,'  in  the  first  person  plural  of  tHe 
present  of  the  indicative,  conjunctive,  and  imperative, — 
and  in  the  second  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the 
conjunctive,  changes  II  into  gl,  and  makes  bogliamo,  — 
bogliate,  to  distinguish  these  persons  from  the  corre- 
sponding ones  of  the  verb  bolldre,  '  to  stamp,'  <  to  set  a 
seal.' 

Gioire,  '  to  rejoice,'  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the 
present  of  the  indicative,  conjunctive,  and  imperative, 

—  in   the  second  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the 
conjunctive,  —  and  in  the  past  participle,  borrows  the 
corresponding   forms  of  the    verb  goder^  and   makes 
godiamo,  —  godiate,  —  goduto. 

Smaltire,  'to  digest,'  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the 
present  of  the  indicative,  conjunctive,  and  imperative, — 
and  in  the  second  person  plural  of  the  present  of  the 
conjunctive,  makes  proccuriamo  di  smaltir e,-*-pr occur i- 
dte  di  smaltire  ;  and  not  smaltidmo,  —  smaltidie,  which 
come  from  smaltdre,  '  to  enamel.' 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


207 


Suggere,  '  to  suck,'  in  the  past  participle  borrows 
that  of  succhiare,  and  makes  succhiato,  '  sucked.5 

Many  regular  verbs,  in  some  tenses,  have  also  an 
irregular  formation,  which  will  be  noticed  in  treating  of 
Irregular  Verbs. 


EXAMPLES. 


Egli  e  il  vero,  ch*  w  ho  AMATO,  It  is  true,  that  I  have  loved, 

ed    AMO     Guiscdrdo,    e.  quanta  and  do  love  Guiscard,  and  I  will 

viverd   w   V  AMERO  ;    e  se   ap-  love  him  as  long  as  I  live  ;  and  if 

presso  la  morte  s'  AMA,  non  mi  we   love   after   death,  I  will  not 

rimarrd  d'  AMARZo.    (Bocc.  g.  4.  cease  to  love  him. 


Qu6l  che  noi  CERCHIAMO  di 
fuggire.  (Bocc.  Introd.) 

Che  noi  non  PREGHIAMO  cose 
sozze,  e  non  le  lascldmo  PRE- 
GARE.  (Albert.  2.  10.) 

BACERETE  il  pib  a  Nostro 
Signore  a  nome  mw.  (Bernb. 
Lett.) 

Bonta  non  b  che  sua  mem6ria 
FREGI.  (Dant.  Inf.  8.) 

Guardate,  che  '/  venir  su  non 
vi  NOI.  (Dant.  Purg.  9.) 

TEMETTE  di  non  dovervi  6s- 
sere  ricevuto.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 


£ssi  ruppero  le  uova  degli 
dspidi,  e  TESSERONO  le  tele  de3 
rdgnoli.  (Mor.  S.  Gregor.) 

Le  leggi,  cos},  le  divine  come 
le  umdne,  TACIONO.  (Bocc.  g.  6. 
n,  1.) 


•  That  which  we  endeavour  to 
avoid. 

For  we  do  not  ask  for  vulgar 
things,  nor  let  others  ask  for 
them. 

You  will  kiss  the  feet  of  Our 
Lord  [the  Pope]  for  me. 

No  virtue  Jends  its  lustre  to  his 
memory. 

Take  heed  that  your  coming  up- 
ward does  not  harm  you. 

He  feared  he  should  not  be  re- 
ceived there. 

They  broke  the  eggs  of  the 
asps,  and  wove  spider's  webs. 


The    laws,  divine   as  well    as 
human,  are  silent. 


208 


ANALOGY. 


JSssa,  che  la  sera  davdnti  ce- 
ndto  non  avea,  da  fame  costretta3 
a  pdscere  V  Me  si  diede,  e  PAS- 
CIUTA  come  pote,  piangdndo,  a 
vdrj  pensieri  della  sua  futura 
vita  si  diede.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  6.) 

Sostien  persona  tu  di  capitdno, 
—  E  di  mm  lontandnza  EMPI  il 
difetto.  (Tass.  Ger.  11.,  56.) 

Esser  non  pud,  che  quell*  an- 
gelic* a/ma,  —  Non  SENTA  'I  suon 
dell'  amorose  note.  (Petr.  c.  38.) 

Vdssi  per  tdnto  a  Giac6bbe,  e 
si  ESIBISCONO  le  soddisfazioni 
maggiori,  che  darsi  pdssano  a 
uomini  forestidri.  (Segn.  Pred. 
25.) 

E  lo  sveglidto  cid  che  x&de 
ABBORRE.  (Dant.  Par.  26.) 


She,  that  the  evening  before 
had  not  supped,  compelled  by 
hunger,  began  to  feed  herself  on 
herbs,  and  after  she  had  fed  her- 
self as  well  as  she  could,  weeping 
abandoned  herself  to  the  various 
thoughts  of  her  future  life. 

Do  thou  support  the  office  of 
captain,  and  supply  the  want  of 
my  absence. 

It  cannot  be  possible,  that  that 
angelic  soul  does  not  hear  the 
sound  of  the  amorous  notes. 

They  go  therefore  to  Jacob, 
and  offer  him  the  greatest  satis- 
faction, which  could  be  given  to 
strangers. 

And  the  upstartled  abhors  what 
he  sees. 


Jlblorrente,  [doe]  che  ABBOR-        Abhorring,  [that  is  to  say]  that 
RfscE.     (Crusca.)    "  abhors. 


Con  tal  cura  viene,  —  Che 
la  pidga  da  sezzo  si  RICUCIA. 
(Dant.  Purg.  25.) 

Tu  ancora  non  s6i  ben  tempe- 
rdto  in  qudsta  virtu  di  APPETIRE 
gli  onori.  (Casa,  lett.  70.) 

La  meditazione  le  mostrdva, 
che  ella  dovesse  APPETERE,  e  do- 
manddre.  (Seal.  S.  Agost.) 

E  non  par  mica  vergogna,  — 
Tra  i  bicchidri  IMPAZZIR  tre 
volte  r  anno.  (Red.  Ditir.  37.) 

La  donna  sentiva  si  fdtto  do- 
lore,  che  quasi  ri>  era  per  IM- 
PAZZARE.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  10.) 

E  9n  sul  cor  quasi  fero  leon 
r  IE,  —  La  nolte  allor,  quand' 
posdr  dovrei.  (Petr.  s.  228.) 


It  is  with  such  care,  that  the 
wound  finally  heals. 

Thou  hast  not  yet  moderated 
thyself  in  the  virtue  of  desiring 
honor. 

Meditation  taught  her  what  she 
ought  to  desire  and  ask. 

And  it  does  not  seem  to  be  a 
shame  to  get  crazy  among  glasses 
three  times  a  year. 

The  woman  was  so  much  af- 
flicted, that  she  came  near  being 
crazy. 

And  in  my  heart,  like  a  fierce 
lion,  it  roars  in  the  night  when  I 
ought  to  repose, 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


209 


Va  come  Ii6ne,che  RUGGISCE,        It  goes,  like  a  lion  that  roars, 

cercdndo     cui    possa     divordre.  seeking  whom  he  may  devour. 
(Cavalc.  Med.  cuor.) 

Posciache  'Ifuoco  alqudnto  ebbe        After  that  the  fire  had  roared 

RUGGHIATO.   (Dant.  Inf.  27.)  awhile. 


EXERCISE   XVI. 

[Let  the  learner  change  the  terminations  dre^  ere,  ire,  of  the  infinitive  mood  of 
the  following  Italian  verbs,  for  the  particular  terminations  t"hey  respectively  take 
in  the  person  and  tense  indicated  by  the  English,  according  to  the  foregoing 
Paradigms.] 


FIRST    CONJUGATION. 


J.     1.*  —  To    love. 
Jlmdre. 


4.  —  loving.        7.  —  loved  __  II. 
am-dre.  am-dre. 


1.  —  I  love,    thou  speakest,    he  sings,    we  play,   you   dance, 
am-dre,  parl-dre,        cant-are,        son-are,          ball-are, 

they  study.        2.  —  I   walked,      thou   passedst,    he     called, 
studi-dre.  cammin-dre,       pass-dre,  chiam-dre, 

we     prattled,      you     confessed,     they     ordered.         3.  —  I 
ciarl-dre,  confess-dre,  ordin-dre. 

confirmed,    thou  didst  deliver,    he  considered,   we  preserved, 
conferm-dre,  consegn-dre,          consider-dre,         conserv-dre, 

you    advised,     they    disputed.         4.  —  I    will    expect,    thou 
consigli-dre,  contrast-are.  aspett-dre, 

wilt  imagine,    he  will  assault,    we    will   dedicate,     you  will 
immagin-dre,  assalt-are,  dedic-dre, 

assure,       they  will^  seek.        5.  —  I    have  praised.f  -  —  IIL 
assicur-dre,         cere-are.  lod-dre, 

1.  —  I   may  fast,    thou   mayest  besiege,    he    may  ride,    we 
digiun-dre,  assedi-dre,  cavalc-dre, 

may    punish,     you  may  prove,    they  may    practise,        2.  — 
castig-dre,  prov-dre,  pratic.-dre. 


*  To  facilitate  reference,  we  use,  in  this  and  the  following  exercises  on  verbs,  the 
numbers,  which  we  have  affixed  to  the  moods  and  tenses  in  the  Paradigms. 

•f  The  learner  can  form  the  compound  tenses  of  any  of  these  verbs  by  joining 
their  past  participle  to  the  simple  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verb  avere,  '  to  have.' 

18* 


210  ANALOGY. 

I  might  refuse,   thou  mightest  invent,   he   might   accept,  we 
rifiut-are,  invent-dre,  accett-dre, 

might   accompany,  you   might    experience,    they   might  ad- 
accompagn-dre,  speriment-dre,  amministr- 

mim'ster. IV.     1. — I  would  prolong,    thou  wouldst  ven- 

-dre.  prolung-dre,  arrisic- 

ture,     he    would    eat,    we    would    pray,     you  would   envy, 
-are,  mangi-are,  preg-dre,  invidi-dre, 

they    would    tire. V.  —  ask    thou,    let   him   judge,    let 

annoi-dre.  domand-dre,         giudic-dre, 

us  change,    carry  ye  back,    let    them    wait. 
cambi-drc,        riport-dre,  aspett-dre. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


I.     1.  —  To  fear.        4.  —  fearing.        7.  —  feared  __  II. 
Tem&re.  tern-ire,.  tem-ere. 

1.  —  I  believe,    thou   feceivest,    he  sells,    we   repeat,    you 
cred-ere,  ric6v-ere,     vend-ere,         ripet-ere,* 

enjoy,    they  depend.        2.  —  I  wove,    thou  didst  beat  down, 
god-tire,        dip£nd-ere.  tess-erc,  abbdtt-ere, 

he    rivaled,    we    debated,     you    exacted,      they   consented. 
comp6t-ere,  dibdtt-ere,  esig-ere,  accdd-ere. 

3.  —  I  mowed,    thou  didst  beat,    he  groaned,    we  sheared, 
miet-ere,  bdtt-ere,.  gem-ere,  tond-ert, 

you    reflected,    they    turned.         4.  —  I    will    provide,    thou 
riflett-ere,  intess-ere. 


wilt  fill,    he  will  rage,    we  will  feed,    you  will  lose,    they 
etnpi-ere,  frdm-ere,  pdsc-ere,  ptrd-ere, 

will  press.  -  III.     1.  —  I  may  cleave,  thou  mayest  render, 
prem-ere.  jend-ere,  rtnd-ere, 

he    may    resolve,    we    may    re-enjoy,    you    may    unweave, 
risolv-ere,  rigod-6re,  st&ss-ere, 

they    may    succeed.        2.  —  I    might  yield,    thou    mightest 
succed-ere.  c6d-ere,  assolv- 

absolve,   he  might  grant,    we  might  dissolve,    you  might  fill 
-ere,  conc6d-ere,  dissolv~eret  ridmpi- 


REGULAR  VERBS.  211 

again,     they    might    suck. IV.      1.  —  I  would   combat, 

-ere,  sugg-ere.  combatt-ere, 

thou  wouldst   precede,    he   would  hang  up,    we   would  sell 
prec6d-ere,  append-ere,  rivend- 

over  again,    you  would  proceed,    they   would  succumb. 

-ere,  proc6d-ere,  soccomb-ere. 

V.  —  desist  thou,    let  him  drink,    let  us  accomplish,    recede 
desist-ere,  b^v-ere,  compi-ere,    ricdd-ere, 

ye,    let  them  pour  out.* 
mesc-ere. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

I.    1.  —  To  hear.        4.  —  hearing.        7.  —  heard. II. 

Sentire.  sent-ire.  sent-ire. 

1.  —  I  sleep,    thou  consentest,    he  understands,    we  rejoice, 
dorm-ire,  consent-ire,  cap-ire,  gio-iret 

you  transfer,  they  serve.        2.  —  I  fled,  thou  embellishedst, 
trasfer-ire,  serv-ire.  fugg-ire,  abell-ire, 

he  animated,  we  weakened,  you  attacked,   they  admonished. 
anim-ire,        indebbol-ire,  assal-ire,  ammon-ire. 

3.  —  I    constructed,     thou    conceivedst,     he    banished,     we 
costru-ire,  concep-ire,  band-ire, 

assisted,    you  supplied,    they   finished.        4.  —  I  will  favor, 
accud-ire,          suppl-ire,  Jin-ire.  favor-ire, 

thou  wilt   differ,    he   will  cure,    we    will  hinder,    you    will 
differ-ire,  guar-ire,  imped-ire, 

infer,    they  will  grow  proud.  III.    1.  —  I    may    assent, 

infer-ire,  insuperb'ire.  assent-ire, 

thou     mayest     furnish,       he    may    chide,      we     may     boil, 
forn-ire,  garr-ire,  boll-ire, 

you    may    crave,      they    may    establish.  2.  —  I    might 

amb-ire,  stabil-ire.  un~ 

unite,     thou    mightest     betray,      he     might     nurish,     we 
-ire,  trad-ire,  nutr-ire, 


Irregular  Verbs. 


212  ANALOGY. 

might  warrant,    you.  might   encourage,    they    might  ^  plead. 
•  garant-ire,  incoragg-ire,  piat-ire. 

IV.    1.  —  I  would  restore,    thou  wouldst  quench,    he 

restitu-irej  sop-ire, 

would    exhaust,     we    would    define,     you    would    ascertain, 
esaur-ire,  defin-ire,  chiar-ire, 

they   would   season. V.  —  act  thou,    let  him  hear,     let 

cond-ire.  ag-ire,  sent-ire, 

us    dare,     obey    ye,    let    them    punish. 
ard-ire,      obled-ire,  pun-ire. 


VARIATION    OF    PASSIVE    VERBS. 

Passive  verbs  are  formed  by  joining  the  verb  essere, 
6  to  be,'  to  the  past  participle  of  active  verbs. 

Passive  verbs,  therefore,  through  all  their  tenses,  are 
varied  with  the  auxiliary  verb  essere. 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Essere  Amato. 
(Paradigm  of  the  passive  verbs.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present. 

famdto,  m.  s.,  \ 
3             H>  P->  I  to  he 
^  amdto,  f.   s.,  |  loved. 

Compound  Tenses. 
2.  —  Past. 

f  stdto  amdto.  m.s..  \  .    , 
esse-)  stdti  amdti*  p.,     (  J°have 
re)  s^aam^a,f.s.,   (,een, 
v  stofea?na^,p.,     ^  1( 

3.  —  Future. 

avere  ad  tssere  ^  am&i     m       ^      C  to  have  to  be  loyed  or 
^sere  per  essere   >amdta  f  <  to  be  about  to  be  loved, 

doudre  Essere       >  '  ^    ( 


*  The  past  participle  of  passive  verbs,  like  that  of  essere,  agrees  with  the  suljett 
of  the  verb  in  gender  and  number. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


213 


4.  —  Present. 
f  amdto,  m.  s., 


5.  —  Past. 


amto,  m.  s.,  \ 

^1.ps:;  Ltl 

[-e,P.,J 


s,  f 

s*n- \stdtaamdta, 
do      I  **ife  om&e,  p.. 


II.  INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  to  sono 
[amdto,  m., 
[amdta,  f., 
2d  p.  sei  amdto, 
[-a, 
3d  p.  e  amdto, 

I  am  loved  ; 

thou  art  loved  ; 

he  is  loved,  she 
[is  loved  ; 

sidmo  amdti,  m,, 
[amdte,  L, 

siete  amdti,  ~e, 

eglino  sono  amd- 
[ti,  elleno  -e, 

we  are  loved; 

you  are  loved  ; 
they  are  loved. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  Co  era  ama- 

I  was  loved  ; 

eravdmo    amdti, 

we  were  loved  ; 

[to,  -a, 

[-e, 

2d  p.  en  amdto, 

thou  wast  loved  ; 

eravdte      amdti, 

you  were  loved  ; 

i-a, 

[-e, 

3d  p.  egli  era 

he  was  loved,  she 

erano  amdti,  -e, 

they  were  loved. 

[amdto,  ilia  -a, 

[was  loved  ; 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  fui  amdto, 

I  was  loved  ; 

fummo  amdti,  -e, 

we  were  loved  ; 

[-a, 

2d  p.  fosti  amd- 

thou  wast  loved  ; 

fbste  amdti,  -e, 

you  were  loved  ; 

\to,  -a, 

3d  p.  fu  amdto, 

he  was  loved,  she 

furono  amdti,  -e, 

they  were  loved. 

[•«; 

[was  loved  ; 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  sard  amd- 

I  shall  or  will  be 

saremo  amdti,-e, 

we  shall  or  will 

[to,  -a, 

[loved  ; 

[be  loved  ; 

2d  p.  sardi  amd- 

thou  wilt  be  lov- 

sarete  amdti,  -e, 

you  will  be  lov- 

\to,  -a, 

[ed; 

[ed; 

3d  p.  sard  amd- 

he  will  be  loved, 

sardnno    amdti, 

they  will  be  lov- 

\to,  -a, 

[she   will   be 

[-e, 

[ed. 

[loved  ; 

214 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 


5.  —  Second  Perfect. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  w  sono  std- 
[to    amdto, 
[stdta  amdta, 


I  have  been  lov- 
[ed; 


sidmo  stdti  amd- 
[ti,  state  amdte, 


we    have    been 
[loved. 


6.—  Pluperfect. 


1st  p.  w  e"ra  stdto  amdto,  std- 


I  had  been  loved. 


[ta  amata, 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 

1st  p./wi  stdto  amdto,  stdta   I  had  been  loved. 
[amdta, 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 

1st  p.  sard  stdto  amdto,  stdta}  I  shall  or  will  have  been  loved. 
[amdta, 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  Co  sia  amd- 

that  I  be  loved, 

pidmo  amdti,  -e, 

that  we  be  loved  ; 

[to,  -a, 

[or  may  be  lov- 

[ed; 

2d  p.  tu  sia  amd- 

that  thou  be  lov- 

sidte  amdtij  -e, 

that  you  be  lev- 

Ito,  -a, 

[ed; 

fed  ; 

3d  p.    egli  sia 

that  he  be  loved  ; 

siano  amdti,  -e, 

that  they  be  lov- 

[amdto,  ella  -a? 

[she  be  loved; 

[ed. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w    fossi 

if  I  were  loved, 

fossimo  amdti,-e,  if  we  were  loved  ; 

[amdto,  -a, 

[or  should  be 

[loved  ; 

2d  p.   tu     fossi 

if  thou  wert  lov- 

^ 
foste  amdti,  -e, 

if  you  were  lov- 

[amdto,  -a, 

[ed; 

[ed; 

Sd  p.  fosse  amd- 

if  he  were  loved, 

fossero  amdti,  -e, 

if  they  were  lov- 

l*o,  -a, 

[she  were  loved  j 

[ed. 

REGULAR  VERBS. 


235 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  10  sia  stdto  amdto,  stdta     that  I  have  been  loved,  or 
[amdta,  [may  have  been  loved, 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 


1st  p.  iofossi  stdto  amdto,  stdta 
[amdla, 


if  I  had  been  loved. 


IV.     CONDITIONAL. 


Singular. 


SIMPLE    TENSE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  sarei  amd- 
[to,  -a, 

2d  p.  saresti 
[amdto,  -a, 
3d  p.  sarebbe 
[amdto,  -a, 

I  should,  would, 
[or  could  be  lov- 
[ed  ;  or  might  be 
[loved  ; 
thou  wouldst  be 
[loved  ; 
he  would  be  lov- 
[ed,  she  would 
l~hf»  lovftrl  : 

saremmo  amdti, 


sareste  amdtij  -e, 
sarebbero  amdti, 


we  should,would, 
[or  could  be 
[loved ; 

you    would     be 
[loved ; 

they    would     be 
[loved. 


COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  —  Past. 


1st  p.  sam  stdto  amdto,  stdta 
[amdta, 


I  should,  would,  or  could  have 
[been  loved ;  or  might  have  been 
[loved. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


2d  p.  sii  amdto  , 
[-a,tu, 
3d  p.  sia  amdto  , 
[egli,  -a  ilia, 

be  thou  loved; 

-  -ift  .!  >     -.  •             1 
let  him  be  loved  ; 
[her  be  loved  ; 

sidmo  amdti,  -e, 
[noi, 

sidte  amdti ,  ~e, 
~voi, 


let  us  be  loved ; 
be  ye  loved ; 


siano  amdti  egli-  let  them  be  lov- 
[no9  -e  elleno, 


216  ANALOGY. 

Many  active  verbs  become  passive  by  taking  the 
particle  si :  —  domandarsi,  *  to  be  asked  ' ;  but  then 
they  are  used  in  the  third  person  only,  —  as,  si  domandk, 
6  it  is  asked '  ;  si  E  domandato,  cit  has  been  asked ' ;  &c. 


VARIATION  OF  NEUTER  VERBS. 

Neuter  verbs  are  generally  varied  with  the  auxiliary 
verb  essere,  '  to  be,'  according  to  the  conjugation  to 
which  they  belong. 

Variation  of  the  Perb  Par  tire. 
(Paradigm  of  the  neuter  verbs.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Simple  Tenses.  Compound  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present.  2.—  Past. 

Partire,  |to  depart.         \\6sserepartito,  m.s.-z,p.,  to  have  de- 

[partita,  f.  s.  -c,  p.,*        [parted. 

3.  —  Future. 
av6re  a  partire, 


,    , 

essereper  partire,        °  ^ave,  to  f, 
doverepartire,        5  part> 


.  GERUND. 

4.  —  Present.  5.  —  Past  . 

partendo,  |departing.  ||  ess6ndo  partito,  \  having  departed. 

*  The  past  participle  of  the  neuter  verbs  that  are  varied  with  tssere,  agrees  with 
the  subject  of  the  verb  in  gender  and  number.  . 


pariito,  m.  s.,       \ 
partiti,  p., 

partite,  p.  J 


REGULAR  VERBS.  217 

PARTICIPLE. 

6.  —  Present.  7.  —  Past. 

J^J3?,'£;'''   }**^S'        j>r^'m's'> 

partite 

II.   INDICATIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  pdrto,  I  depart,  or  do  depart,  or 

[am  departing. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  io  partiva,  I  departed,  or  did  depart,  or 

[was  departing. 

3.  —  Perfect. 
1st  p.  partii,  |  I  departed,  or  did  depart. 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  partirdj  \  I  shall  or  will  depart. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 

££o,-a,|  I  have  departed. 


6.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  10  erapartito,  -a,|  1  had  departed. 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.fuipartito,  -a,     \  I  had  departed. 

8.  —  Future  Anterior,, 

1st  p.  sard  partito,  -a,  \  I  shall  or  will  have  departed. 
19 


218  ANALOGY. 

III.  CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  -—  Present. 

1st  p.  10  pdrta,  |  that  I  depart,  or  may  depart. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  io  partissi,  \  if  I  departed,  or  should  depart. 

COMPOUND    TZNSES. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

lBtp.iosiapartitot-a,      that  I  have  departed,  or 
[may  have  departed. 

4.  • —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  wfossipartito,  •«,[  if  I  had  departed. 

IV.  CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  partireij  j  I  should,  would,  or  could  depart ; 

[or  might  depart. 

COMPOUND    TENSE.  ^ 

2.  —  Past. 


1st  p.  sarei  partita,  -a, 


I  should,  would,  or  could  have  de- 


parted j  or  might  have  departed. 
V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Istp 

2d  p.  parti  tu, 


depart  thou. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  219 

There  are  some  neuter  verbs  which  require  to  be 
varied  with  avere  ;  as,  vivere,  '  to  live ' ;  dormire,  c  to 
sleep  ' ;  tacere,  £  to  keep  silent ' ;  parldre,  '  to  speak  '  ; 
gridare,  <  to  cry  out ' ;  ridere,  '  to  laugh  ' ;  scherzare, 
6  to  sport ' ;  pranzdre,  '  to  dine  '  ;  cenare,  '  to  sup ' ; 
passeggiare,  '  to  walk ' ;  cavalcare,  '  to  ride  ' ;  navigare, 
1  to  sail ' ;  tardare,  '  to  retard  ' ;  indugiare,  '  to  delay  ' ; 
&c.:  —  ho  vivuto,  £  I  have  lived  ' ;  ho  dormito,.'  I  have 
slept ' ;  ho  taciuto,  '  I  have  kept  silent ' ;  &c. 

Others  are    indifferently  varied    with    the    auxiliary 

avere,  or  essere  ;  as,  durare,   '  to  last ' ;  succombere,  '  to 

sink  under';  ammutire,  'to  become  dumb';  impallidire, 

'*  to  grow  pale  ' ;  &c.:  —  e  durato  or  ha  durato,  '  it  has 

lasted  '  ;  &c. 

Others  may  be  varied  with  either  avere,  or  essere ;  as, 
morire,  guarire  ;  but  the  change  of  the  auxiliary  alters 
their  signification:  —  avere  morto,  '  to.  have  killed'; 
essere  morto,  '  to  be  killed,'  or  c  to  be  dead ' ;  avere  gua- 
rito,  l  to  have  cured  ' ;  essere  guarito,  '  to  be  cured,'  or 
*  to  have  recovered.' 


Dovere,  '  to  be  obliged  ' ;  potere,  '  to  be  able  ' ;  voUre, 
i  to  be  willing,'  '  to  will,'  '  to  wish  ' ;  when  joined  to  a 
pronominal  verb ;  as,  arrendersi,  '  to  surrender  one's 
self ' ;  frenarsi,  c  to  restrain  one's  self ';  perdersi,  'to 
lose  one's  self ' ;  require  to  be  varied  with  essere  :  — 
si  e  dovuto  arrendere,  '  he  has  been  obliged  to  surrender 
himself ' ;  non  mi  son  potato  frenare,  '  I  have  not  been 
able  to  restrain  myself;  ti  sei  voluto  perdere,  '  tbou 
wishedst  to  lose  thyself.'* 


*  Many  of  the  foregoing  verbs  are  irregular,  as  will  be  shown  in  their  proper  plae«. 


220 


ANALOGY. 


VARIATION    OF    PRONOMINAL    VERBS. 


Pronominal  verbs  are  varied  with  the  auxiliary  essere, 
6  to  be,'  according  to  the  conjugation  to  which  their 
termination  belongs. 

Variation  of  the  J^erb  Pentirsi. 
(Paradigm  of  the  pronominal  verbs.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Simple  Tenses.  Compound  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present.  2.  —  Past. 

Pentir-si,  Ito  repent  one's  \\esser-sipentito,  I  to  have  repented 

[self.  I'  [one's  self. 

3.  —  Future. 


to  have  to  repent  one's  self,  or 
e'      *>  be  about  toP  repent  one's  self. 


GERUND. 

4.  —  Present.  5.  —  Past. 

pent6ndo-si, 


repenting    one's  \\essendo-sipenti-  having    repented 
[self.  II  \to,  [one's  self. 


PARTICIPLE. 


6.  —  Present. 


7.  —  Past. 


pentente-si,  s.,     )  repenting  one's 
pententi-si,  p.,     5     se^- 


pentito-si,m.s.j 


lennto-si,  m.s.,  j 

[pentiti-si,  p.,  f  [having]  repent- 

ientita-si.  f.  s.,  ^      ed  one's  self. 


pentita 
[penti<e-si,  p., 


Singular. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 

II.    INDICATIVE, 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 


221 


Plural. 


1st  p.  10  mi  pen- 
[to, 
Z^y.tipenti, 

3d  p.  si  pe'nte, 

I  repent  myself; 

thou       repentest 
[thyself; 
he  repents  him- 
[self; 

noi  ci  pentidmo, 
vi  pentitej 
si  pentono, 

we    repent     our- 
[selves  ; 
you   repent  your- 
[selves  ; 
they  repent  them- 
[selves. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  mipentiva,  j  I  repented  myself. 

3.  —  Perfect. 
1st  p.  mi  pentiij  \  I  repented  myself. 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  mipentird,  \  I  shall  or  will  repent  myself. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 
1st  p.  mi  sono  pentito,  -a,  \  I  have  repented  myself. 

6.—  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  mi  era  pentito ,  -a,      |  I  had  repented  myself. 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  mifuipentzto,  -a,      \  I  had  repented  myself. 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 

1st  p.  mi  sard  pentito,  -a,    II  shall  or  will  have  repented 

[myself. 


222  ANALOGY. 

III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  mi  penta,  that  I  repent  myself,  or  may 

[repent  myself. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  mipentissij  I  if  I  repented  myself,  or  should 

[repent  myself* 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3,  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  mi  sia  pentito,  -a,       I  that  I  have  repented  myself,  or 

[may  have  repented  myself. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
1st  p.  mifossi  pentito,  -a,    |  if  I  had  repented  myself. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  mi  pentirdi,  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  repent 

I     [myself ;  or  might  repent  myself. 

COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  _  Past. 


1st  p.  w  sareipentito,  -a, 


I  should,  would,  or  could  have  re- 
[pented  myself;  or  might  have 
[repented  myself. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


223 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular.                                                           Plural. 

1st  p.     ... 

pentidmo-ci  noi, 

let  us  repent  oui- 

fselves  ; 

2d  p.  penti-ti  tu, 

repent  thyself  ; 

pentite-vi  voi, 

L             •"  } 

repent      your- 

[selves  j 

3d  p.sip6nta,or 
[p£nta-si  egli, 

let    him     repent 
[himself; 

si  pentano    or 
[pJntan-si 
[eglino, 

let   them    repent 
[themselves. 

A  great  number  of  active  and  neuter  verbs  may  become 
pronominal  by  the  addition  of  the  conjunctive  pronouns 
mi,  ti,  si,  &c.  either  in  the  objective  or  in  the  relation 
of  attribution ;  and  then  these  verbs  are  varied  with 
the  auxiliary  essere,  '  to  be  ' ;  as,  loddre,  '  to  praise  ' ; 
dare,  '  to  give  ' ;  tacere,  c  to  keep  silent '  : 

mi  sono  ddto  un  colpo,  I   have   given  [to]   myself  a 

blow ; 
ti  sii  ddto  per  vinto,  thou  hast  given  thyself  up  as 

conquered  ; 

si  &  loddtOj  he  has  praised  himself; 

ci  sidmo  taciuti,  we  have  kept  ourselves  silent. 


Usage,  however,  in  some  instances  allows  us  also 
to  employ  the  auxiliary  avere,  c  to  have  '  ;  but  then  the 
conjunctive  pronouns  mi,  ti,  si,  &c.  are  always  in  the 
relation  of  attribution  ;  as, 


melo  sono  or  weT  ho  goduto, 
Ulo  s6i  or  teV  hai  creduto, 
seV  b  or  seV  ha  bevuto, 


I  have  enjoyed  it ; 
thou  hast  believed  it ; 
he  has  drunk  it. 


224  ANALOGY. 

VARIATION    OF    UNIPERSONAL    VERBS. 

Unipersonal  verbs  are  generally  varied  with  the  aux- 
iliary ayere,  '  to  have,'  according  to  the  conjugation  to 
which  they  belong. 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Piovere. 
(Paradigm  of  the  unipersonal  verbs.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Simple  Tenses.  Compound  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present.  2.  —  Past. 

Piovere,  jto  rain.  ||  avere  piovuto  9    jto  have  rained. 

3.  —  Future. 

avere  a  piovere,       >  to  have  to  rain,  or 
essereper  piovere,   $  to  t>e  about  to  rain. 

GERUND. 

4.  —  Present.  5.  —  Past . 

piovJndo,  [raining.  ||  avendo  piovuto ,  (having  rained. 

PARTICIPLE. 

6.  —  Present.  7.  —  Past. 

piov6nte,  [raining.  |j  piovuto,  trained. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 

Id  p.  piove,  I  it  rains,  it  does  rain,  or  it  is  rain- 

[ing. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  225 

2.  — Imperfect. 

3d  p.  pioveva,  or  piovea,  I  it    rained,  it  did  rain,   or  it   was 

[raining, 

3.  — Perfect. 

3d  p.piove,  piove'tte,  or  piovve     I  it  rained,  or  it  did  rain, 
[(piobbe),     I 

4.  —  Future. 

3d  p.  pioverci,  \  it  will  rain. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 
3d  p.  hapiovuto,  \  it  has  rained. 

6.  —  Pluperfect. 
3d  p.  av6va  piovuto ,      |  it  had  rained. 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 
3d  p.  e'5&e  piovuto,        \  it  had  rained. 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 
2d  p.  avrti  piovuto,       \  it  will  have  rained. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
SIMPLE    TENSES. 

1.  —  Present. 
3d  p.  piova,  \  that  it  rains,  or  may  rain. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
3d  p.  piovesse,  \  if  it  rained,  or  should  rain. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

3d  n.  dboia  piovuto,        that  it  has  rained,  or  may  have 

[rained. 


226  ANALOGY. 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 
3d  p.  avesse  piovuto,  \  if  it  had  rained. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
SIMPLE    TENSE. 

1.  —  Present. 

3d  p.  pioverdbbe  (pioveria),|  it  would  or  could  rain,  or  might 

[rain. 

COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  — Past. 

3d  p.  avrebbe  piovuto,          \  it  would  or  could  have  rained,  or 
\  [might  have  rained. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 

3d  p.piova,  \  let  it  rain. 


The  following  are  the  unipersonal  verbs  most  in  use : 

aggiorndre,        to  be  day  ;  I  gelare  v  ?  t    f          . 

annottare,  to  grow  night ;  i  ghiaccidre,  $ 

balendre  ?  .    i:^ut«  rdighiacciare  ?  ,     ., 

tO  h-hten  5  I  dimoidre,  to  thaw  5 


tupnare,  to  thunder;        \farfreddo,          to  be  cold  ; 

pidvere,  to  rain  ;  [far  chidro,          to  be  light ; 

f,  to  rain  very  hard  ,\far  buio,  to  be  dark; 


nevicdre,  to  snow ; 

grandindre 

tempestdre 


e      I  to  hail ; 

>        3 


far  vento,  to  be  windy  ; 

far  buon  tempo,  to  be  good  weather ; 
far  cattivo  tempo^Q  be  bad  weather. 


The  following  verbs,  though  not  unipersonal  in  them- 
selves, are  often  used  unipers anally,  and  may  have  the 
third  person  plural,  as  well  as  singular  ;  and  are  varied 
with  the  auxiliary  essere,  c  to  be  '  : 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


227 


accaddre, 

i  inci^scere, 

avvenire, 

to  happen  ; 

displace™. 

to  displease  ; 

occorrere, 

spiactre, 

aggraddre, 
piacere, 

to  please  ; 

partre, 
sembrdre, 

to  seem  ; 

appartenere,        to  belong  ; 
bastdre,               to  be  enough  ; 

speitart, 
toccdre, 

to  belong  ; 

bisogndre         j>  to  be  needful  . 

far  uopo, 

convenire,        $ 
importdre,          to  be  important; 
dipendere,          to  depend  ; 

far  d'  uopo, 
far  mestieri, 
far  di  mestieri, 

to  be  necessary. 

To    these    may  be  added   all 
passive    by    taking    the    particle 


after  them 


verbs  which  become 
si,    either    before    or 
which  are  varied  in   the  third   person  both 


singular  and  plural,  and  with  the  auxiliary  essere  ;  as, 
vedersi,  '  to  be  seen  '  :—  si  vede,  c  it  is  seen  ' ;  si  sono 
veduti,  'they  have  been  seen';  biasimarsi,  '  to  be 
blamed  ' ;  si  sono  biasimali,  '  they  have  been  blamed  ' ; 

fee, 


E'ssere,  c  to  be,'  is  also  used  unipersonally,  both  in 
the  singular  and  plural,  when  it  is  joined  to  the  particles 
ci  or  vi  ;  as,  esserci  or  esservi,  c  to  be  here,'  or  *  to  be 
there.'  It  is  varied  as  follows  : 

Variation  of  the  Verb  Essere,  unipersonally  used. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


Simple  Tenses. 

1.  —  Present. 

esser-ci  or  esser-  1  to  be  here  or 
[-t»,  I    [to  be  there. 


esser-ci 

orlsser 
>r  esser- 

~m> 


Compound  Tenses. 

2.  —  Past. 
stdtOjm.s.j 


(  stto>m's->  ) 

I  *tdti>  P-«      (  to 
<  stdtajtS     (be 

I  stdte,  p.,    > 


have 
been  there. 


3.  — Future. 


6sser-ci  or  &sser-m  per  tssere,  >  t  h  t  be  ther  QT 
a^r-ci  or  avtr-m  adtssere,  S  be  about  to  be  ^^ 
ao^Jer-c^  or  aover-w  essere,  3 


228 


ANALOGY. 


4.  —  Present. 


5.  —  Past. 


^re  being. 


f8tdto,m.8.9  /  h 
essendo-ci  or  1    [staft,  p.,  1  h     . 
essendo-vij     A  stata,  f.  s.,  1  ,         5 


PARTICIPLE. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

SIMPLE    TENSES. 
Singular.  Plural. 

1 .  —  Present. 

3d  p.  c'  £  or  u'  £,ihere  is,  or  thereiicisonoormsdnoJthere  are. 
[is;  II 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
3d  p.  c'  ^ra  or  v'  there  was ;  lie'  erano   or  t>' 


3.  —  Perfect. 

3d  p.  ci  fu  or  m  there  was ;  I  lei  furono  or  vi 

[furono, 


there  were. 


there  were. 


4.  —  Future. 


3d  p.  ci  sarva;  orlthere  shall  or  will  I  lei  sardnno  or  m 
Fm  «or^J  The:''  \saranno. 


there  shall  or  will 
[be;"  [saranno,  [be. 

COMPOUND    TENSES. 

5.  —  Second  Perfect. 

3d  p.  c'  £  or  t>'  £|there  has  been  ;  II  ci  sono  or  vi  sonolthere  have  been. 
[S^o,m.,-a,f.,| 


*  Wanting. 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


229 


Singular. 


Plural. 


6.  —  Pluperfect. 


3d  p.  cj  ira  or  u'lthere  had  been ;  lie'  irano  orw'  era-lthere  had  been. 
[6ra  stdtOj  -a,\  II         [no  stdti,  -e,\ 

7.  —  Second  Pluperfect. 

3d  p.  d  fu  or  wlthere  had  been  ;  \\ci  furono   or  wlthere  had  been. 
[fu  stdto,  -a,|  II  [/zmmosfafve,! 

8.  —  Future  Anterior. 


3dp.cisarcL.orvi 
[sard  stdto, -a, 


there  will  have 
[been ; 


ci  sardnno  or  «i  there  will  have 


[sardnno  stdti 


[been. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


SIMPLE    TENSES. 


1.  —  Present. 


3d  p.  ci  sia  or  vi  that  there  be,  or 


[sia, 


[may  be ; 


ci  stano,  vi  sia- 
[no,  or  ci  sieno, 
[vi  sieno, 


that  there  be,  or 
[may  be. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


3d  p.  ci  fosse  orjif  there  were  ;  orllci  fossero   or  vzlif  there  were;  or 
[vi fosse, \          [should  be; H  [ fossero ,1  [should  be. 


COMPOUND    TENSES. 

3.— Perfect. 

3d  p.  ci  sia  or  vi  that   there  has    11  ci  siano  or  vi  sia- 
[sia  stdto,  -a,  been  ;  [no  stdti,  -e, 

4.  —  Pluperfect. 

3d  p.  ci  fosse  orlif  there  had  been;!  lei  fossero  or  vi  if  there  had  beea. 
—*       -^    '  [/Sssero    "- 


that  there  have 
[been,  or  may 
[have  been. 


d  p.  cijosse  orii 
[vi/osse  s^o, 
[-a, 


20 


230 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


SIMPLE    TENSE. 


1.— Present. 


Plural. 


3d  p.  ci  sartbbe 
[or  vi  sarebbe, 


there  should, 
[would,  or  could 
[be  ;  or  might 
[be; 


ci  sarebbero  or  vi 
[sardbbero, 


there  should, 
[would,  or  could 
[be  ;  or  might 
[be. 


COMPOUND    TENSE. 

2.  —  Past. 


3d  p.  ci  sarebbe 
[or  vi  sarebbe 
[stato,  -a, 


there  should,; 
[would,  or  couldj 
[have  been;  or 
[might  have 
[been; 


ci  sarebbero  or#t|there         should, 
[sardbbero  std-  [would,  or  could 
[have  been ;  or 
[might        have 
[been. 


3d  p.  ci  sia,  vi 
[sia,  or  sia-ci) 
[sia-vi, 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 

let  there  be  ;  \\ci  smno,  vi  sie- 
[no,  or  sian-ci, 
\sitn-m, 


let  there  be. 


The  verb  avere,  *  to  have,'  is  often  substituted  for 
the  verb  essere  when  unipersonally  used,  and  then  it  is 
varied  after  the  same  manner ;  as,  averci  or  avervi,  f  to 
be  here  '  or  '  to  be  there';  ci  ha  or  vi  ha,  *  here  is  '  or 
1  there  isj  ;  ci  hanno  or  vi  hanno,  '  there  are  ';  &tc. 

The  verb  avire,  not  only  may  be  used  with  propriety  for  the  verb 
6ssere,  but  is  also  elegantly  used  in  the  singular,  although  the  noun  to 
which  it  is  joined  is  in  the  plural ;  as,  qudnte  miglia  ci  HA?  '  how  many 
miles  is  it  ? '  EBBEVI  molti  uomini,  l  there  were  a  great  many  men 
there';  &c. 


To  express  in  Italian  here  or  there  is  some  of  it,  here 
or  there  are  some  of  them,  we  join  the  particle  ne,  '  of 
it,  of  them,'  to  ci  or  vi,  and  say,  essercene  or  esservene, 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


231 


avercene  or  avervene  ;  as,  cen'  e  or  ven'  e,  cen5  ^a  or 
ven*  ha,  '  here  is  some  of  it,'  or  £  there  is  some  of  it '  ; 
cene  sono  or  vine  sono,  cen'  hanno  or  verf  hanno,  '  there 
are  some  of  them  '  ;  &c. 


EXAMPLES. 


Per  certo  chi  non  v'  dma,  da 
voi  non  desidera  d*  ESSERE  AMA- 
TO.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

N6i    ERAVAM    PARTITI    gltt    da 

illo.    (Dant.  Inf.  32.) 

DORMITO  HAI,  bella  donna,  un 
brtve  so}ino.  (Petr.  s.  284.) 

Fu  accusdto  falsam6nte  che 
dovea  AVER  MORTO  un  nomo,  col- 
la  moglie,  e  con  tutta  lafarmglia. 
(Vit.  S.  Franc.) 

Tarquinio  alia  fine  FU  MORTO 
per  gli  figliuoli  del  sopradetto 
Marco  Mdrzio.  (Giov.  Vill.  1.  1. 
c.  2.) 

Lascidie  costui  dlle  mie  muse 
che  LO  GUARISCANO.  (Varch. 
Boez.  1.1.) 

Mwfratello  per  raira  grdzia  di 
Dio  E  GUARITO.  (Red.  lett.  1.) 

E  '/  PENTIRSI,  e  7  conoscer 
chiaramcnte,  —  Che  quanta  place 
al  mondo  e  un  breve  sonno. 
(Petr.  s.  1.) 

Dalle   qudli  facilmente   tu  TI 

SARESTI          POTUTO         ASTENERE. 

(Mach.  Com.) 

Se  io  ddlla  veritd  del  fatto  MI 

FOSSI     SCOSTARE      VOLUTA,     OVI'^l 

ben  saputo  sotto  dltri  nomi  rac- 
contdrla.     (Bocc.) 


Surely  he  who  does  not  love 
you,  does  not  desire  to  be  loved 
by  you. 

We  had  already  departed  from 
him. 

Thou  hast  slept,  beautiful  wo- 
man5  a  short  sleep. 

He  was  falsely  accused  to  have 
tilled  a  man,  with  his  wife,  and 
all  his  family. 

Tarquin  at  length  was  killed  by 
the  sons  of  the  above  mentioned 
Marcus  Martius. 


Let  him  be  cured  by  my  muses. 


My  brother  has  recovered  through 
the  mere  mercy  of  God. 

And  to  repent  and  to  know 
clearly,  that  what  pleases  the 
world  is  a  short  dream. 

From  which  thou  wouldst  have 
easily  abstained. 

If  I  had  wished  to  depart  from 
the  truth  of  the  fact,  I  should  have 
known  how  to  relate  it  under  dif- 
ferent names. 


232 


ANALOGY. 


rfcciocche  male  e  scdndalo  non 
ne  nascesse,  ME  ne  SONO  TACIUTA. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

^  Ella  fa  sdvia  certo,  e  di  grand' 
ammo, —  Uh'  dltra  si  SAKE* 
[sarebbe]  DATA  sul  pidngere. 
(Cecch.  Inc.  1.  1.) 

Egli  &  notte  buia,  e  piovigginaj 
e  par  che  sia  per  PIOVER  piu  for- 
te. (Sacch.  nov.  28.) 

Ci  SOJVQ  delle  dltre  donne  assdi. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

Cavdlca,  e  qudndo  ANNOTTA  e 
qudndo  AGGIORNA.  (Ariost.  Fur. 
27.  12.) 

Non  altramdnti  a  lui  AVVENNE, 
che  al  Duca  AVVENUTO  ERA. 
(Bocc.  9.  2.  n.  7. 

E  che  i  vizj  d6bbano  da  tutti 

BIASIMARSI.       (PaSS.) 

QUANTE       MIGLIA      CI      HA  ?  — 

HACCENE  piu  di  milldnta.   (Bocc. 
g.  8.  n.  3.) 

La  dove  CEN'  E  una,  che  e 
molto  corta.  (Bocc.  g,  3.  n.  4.) 


That  no  evil  or  scandal  should 
arise  from  it,  I  have  kept  silent. 

She  was  wise  surely,  and  of  a 
great  mind ;  for  another  would 
have  given  herself  to  weeping. 

It  is  a  very  dark  night,  and  it 
drizzles,  and  seems  as  if  it  would 
rain  harder. 

Here  are  many  other  ladies. 


He  rides  botn  when  it  grows 
night,  and  when  it  is  day. 

It  happened  to  him  not  other- 
wise than  it  had  happened  to* the 
Duke. 

And  that  vices  ought  to  be 
blamed  by  all. 

How  many  miles  is  it?  It  is 
an  infinite  number. 


Where  there  is  one  [way]  which 
is  very  short. 


EXERCISE    XVII. 


PASSIVE    VERBS. 


I.      1.  —  To    be    loved. 
JEssere     umdto. 

4.  —  being     believed. 
essere    creduto. 


2.  —  to    have    been    feared. 
dssere    stdto     ternuto. 

5.  —  having-     been     heard.  

essere   stdto    sentito. 


REGULAR  VERBS.  233 

II.     1.  —  I   am  praised,     thou    art    invited,     he  is   expected, 
loddto,  invitdto,  aspettdto, 

we  are  called,    you  are  assured,    they  are  punished.        2. 

chiamdtOj  assicurdto,  cdstigdto. 

I    was   sought,    thou    wast    advised,    she    was    prayed,    we 
cercdto,  consiglidto,  pregdto, 

were   accompanied,    you  were    envied,    they  were   assured. 
accompagndto,  invididto,  assicurdto. 

3.  —  I  was   assailed,    thou  wast  besieged,    he  was   ordered, 
assaltdtOj  assedidto,  ordindto, 

we    were     confirmed,      you     were     delivered,      they     were 
confirmdto,  consegndto, 

accepted.        4.  —  I   shall  be  proved,    thou  wilt  be         asked, 
accettdto.  provdto,  domanddto, 

she    will     be    admired,    we    shall    be     paid,    you    will     be 
ammirdto,  pagato, 

honored,      they    will     be     blamed.         5.  —  I    have     been 
onordtOj  biasimdto, 

robbed.*  — —  III.      1.  —  I   may    be    believed,     thou    mayest 
rubbdto.  creduto,       .     ; 

be    received,    he    may   be     beatenj    we    may   be    preceded, 
ricevuto,  battuto,  preceduto, 

you    may    be     provided,      they    may    be      sold.          2.  —  I 
provveduto,  venduto. 

might    be    punished,      thou    mightest     be     furnished,      she 
punitot  formto, 

might    be    hindered,     we    might    be    attacked,     you    might 
impedito,  assalito, 

be     betrayed,      they    might     be     supplied.  IV.      1.  — 

tradito,  supplito. 

I    should    be    admonished,     thou    wouldst    be    wounded,    he 
ammonitOj  ferito, 

would  be  banished,     we   would  be   encouraged,    you  would 
bandito,  incoraggito, 


*  The  learner  can  form  the  compound  tenses  of  any  of  theso  verbs  by  joining  the 
past  participle  to  the  compound  tenses  of  the  verb  essere. 

20* 


234  ANALOGY. 

be    obeyed,      they    would    be    invested.  V.  —  Be   thou 

obbedito,  investito. 

allured,    let  her  be    listened  to,    let    us  be    employed,     be 

allettdto,  ascoltato, 

ye    trusted,  let    them    be    saved. 

fiddtot  salvdto. 


NEUTER  AND  PRONOMINAL  VERBS. 

I.      2.  —  To    have     departed.          5.  —  having    repented 
partita.  ^        pentito3 

one's    self.          II.     5.  —  I    have    delayed,     thou    hast    kept 
si.2  indugidto,  2      taciu- 

silent    (thyself),     he    has    gone    out,     we    have    cured,      you 
to3  li,1  uscito,  guarito, 

have   praised    yourselves,     they    have    lived.        6.  —  I    had 
2         loddto3  vLl  vivuto. 

wounded      myself,      thou     hadst      become   dumb,      she     had 
ferito3  mi,1  ammutito, 

corrected     herself,      you    had     grown      childish,      they    had 
ricreduto3        si,1  rimbambito, 

seized        (themselves).     7.  —  I  had   dined,  thou   hadst     soiled 
impadronito3    si1.  .  pranzdto,  2  imbrottdto3 

thyself,     he  had   grown  mad,     we    had     lost      ourselves,  you 
ft1,  impazzito,  2    smarrito3        cil, 

had     spoken,     they     were     dismayed     (themselves).         8.  — 
parldto,  2          sbigottito3  si1. 

I    shall    have    sailed,     thou    wilt    have   complained    (thyself), 
navigate,  2        lamentdto3          ti1, 

she     will    have     recovered,       we     will     have     taken     leave 
guarito,  licenzidto3 


(ourselves),    you   will  have  walked,     they  will   have   married 
ci1,  passeggidto,  2      maritdto3 

(themselves).  III.     3.  —  I    may    have    rejoiced    (myself), 

si1.  2        rallegrdto        mi1, 

thou    mayest    have   sported,    he   may  have    colored    himself, 
scherzdto,  2        incolorito3      si1, 


REGULAR  VERBS.  235 

we   may   have  gone    near,   you  may  have   risen   (your  'selves  ), 
avvicindto,  2      alzdto3          tul, 

they   may    have    arrived.         4.  —  I    might    have    enriched 
arrivdto.  2     arricchito3 

myself,       thou     mightest    have      slept,       she      might    have 
mi1,  dormito,  2 

instructed     herself,      we     might     have      sunk     under,      you 
istruito3         si1,  succombuto, 

might      have     assembled      yourselves,       they     might      have 
2  riunito3  vil, 

grown    pale.  -  IV.    2.  —  I    should    have    married    myself, 
impallidito.  2    ammoglidto3    mi1, 

thou  shouldst  have   grown  proud,     he  would    have    rejoiced 
insuperbito,  2     rallegrdto3 

himself,      we     would     have     cried    out,      you     would     have 
si1,  griddto, 

enamoured    yourselves,      they    would     have     become    cruel. 
innamordto3  vil,  jj£«s';  inferocito. 

-  V.  —  Defend  thyself,  let  her  imagine   herself, 

difendere^  ti,         -  immagindre2    si1,  or  immagindre^ 

let    us    help    ourselves,     ennoble    yourselves,     let    them 
si,       .    aiutdre^  ci,  annobilire^      vi,  rispet- 


respect      themselves. 
2      i1      or    risettdr 


tare2    si1,     or    rispettdre^,   si. 

UNIPERSONAL    VERBS. 

I.     1.  —  To  rain.          4.  —  raining.          7.  —  rained.         To 
Piovere.  piovere.  piovere. 

have     rained.  -  II.     1.  —  It     is     day.         2.  —  it     grew 
piovuto.  aggiorndre.  annot- 

night.        3.  —  it   lightened.        4.  —  it  will  thunder.        5.  — 
tare.  balendre.  tuondre. 

it    has    snowed.         6.  —  it    had    happened,        7.  —  it    had 
nevicdto.  avvenuto. 

frozen.        8.  —  it    will      have      seemed.  -  III.     1.  —  it 
geldto.  sembrdto. 


236  ANALOGY. 

may    freeze.        2.  —  it    might    thaw.        3.  —  it    may    have 
geldre.  dimoidre. 

been   cold.        4.' — it  might  have  displeased.- IV.     1. — 

fdtto   cdldo.  dispiaciuto. 

it    would    be     important.        2 it  would  have      belonged. 

importdre.  appartenuto. 

V.  —  let  it  be  sufficient. 

bastdre. 


ESSERCI    Or   ESSERVI,    AVERCI    OT   AVERVI. 

I.    4.  —  There  being. II.     1.  —  here   is,  or  there  is, 

ci2         JEsser1^,.  ci    essere,  or  vi  averc, 

there          are.  2.. —  there    was,     there    were.        3.  — 

ci    essere  or  avere.  vi      6ssere,      ci     *  avere. 

there  was,    there  were.        4.  —  there  will  be,  sing.,    there 
vi    essere,       ci    essere.  vi        avere,  ci 

will  be,   plur.        5.  —  there     has   been    some    of  it,    sing., 
avere.  vi          essere*  nel, 

there  has  been  some  of  them,  plur. III.     1.  —  that  there 

ci          avere2  ne}  vi 

may    be,    sing.,    that  there    may  be,   plur.        2.  —  if  there 
ave"re,  ci        essere.  vi 

were  some  of  it,  sing.,    if  there   were   some  of  them,  plur. 
avere2  nel,  ci        dssere2  nel. 

IV.     1.  —  there    should    be,     sing.,    there    should     be 

vi  essere,  ci  avere2 

some    of  them,  plur. V.  —  let        there       be,        sing., 

nel.  ci    avere,  or  6ssere^  ci, 

let    there    be    some   of   them,  plur. 
vi    essere2    nel,  or  avere^  vi^,  ne. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  237 

CHAPTER  X. 
IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

THE  irregularities  of  Italian  Verbs  are  chiefly  confined 
to  the  perfect  tense  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  the  past 
participle. 

Some  verbs,  however,  are  also  irregular  in  the  present 
of  the  indicative  ;  and  then  they  are  irregular  likewise 
in  the  present  of  the  conjunctive  and  in  the  imperative. 

When  verbs  are  contracted  in  the  infinitive  mood, 
they  are  contracted  also  in  the  future  tense,  and  in  the 
conditional  mood. 


In  those  tenses  in  which  verbs  are  irregular,  the 
irregularity,  generally,  does  not  extend  to  all  the 
persons :  thus,  with  very  few  exceptions,  in  the  perfect 
of  the  indicative,  the  second  person  singular  and  the 
first  and  second  persons  plural ;  —  and  in  the  present  of 
the  indicative  and  conjunctive,  and  in  the  imperative, 
the  jirst  and  second  persons  plural,  —  are  regular. 


In  the  variation  of  these  verbs,  we  will  give  only  those 
tenses  in  which  they  depart  from  the  paradigms  already 
given,  to  which  we  must  refer  for  the  formation  of  the 
other  tenses.  The  persons  which  are  irregular  are 
here  printed  in  small  capitals. 

For  the  assistance  of  learners,  we  have  added  to  each 
verb,  the  auxiliary  with  which  it  is  varied  in  its  com- 
pound tenses. 


238 


ANALOGY. 


VARIATION    OF    THE    IRREGULAR    VERBS    OF    THE    FIRST 
CONJUGATION. 

There    are   but  four  sim.ple  verbs  in  the  first  conju- 
gation, which  are  not  varied  like  aware,  viz. 


dare, 


to  go  ; 
to  give  ; 


fare,       to  do  or  to  make  ; 
stare,      to  be,  to  dwell,  to  stand, 
[or  to  stay.. 


Andare. 
(Varied  with  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Andare,          \  to  go. 


GERUND. 

anddndo,  Igoing ; 


PARTICIPLE. 

anddtOj  (gone. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  vo,  or  VA- 


2d  p.  VAI, 
3d  p.  VA, 


[DO,* 


I  go,  or  am  go- 


thou  goest ; 
he  goes  ; 


[ing; 


andidmo, 

anddte, 
VANNO, 


we  go; 

you  go ; 
they  go. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  andrd  [by  contraction  for     I  shall  or  will  go. 
\ander 6~\ , 


*  Anddre  is  also  a  defective  verb,  and  borrows  these  forms  from  the  Latin  verb 
vftdere. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


239 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


Singular 


Plural. 

that  we  go ; 
that  you  go ; 
that  they  go. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  andrei  (andria)  [by  contrac-  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  go;  or 
[tion  for  anderei  (anderia)],  |  [might  go. 


1st  p.  10  VADA, 
2d  p.     tU    VADA 

[(vddi), 
3d.  p.  egli  VADA, 

1.—  1 
that  I  go  or  may 

[go; 

that  thou  go  ; 
that  he  go  ; 

^resent, 
andidmo, 
andidte, 

VADANO, 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Istp  

2d  p.  VA  (««')  lu, 
3d  p.  VADA  egli, 

go  thou  ; 
let  him  go  ; 

I  andidmo  noi, 

anddte  voi, 
\  VADAHO  eglino, 


let  us  go  ; 

go  ye  ; 

let  them  go. 


Andare  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  conjunctive  pro- 
nouns mi,  ti,  siy  ci,  vi,  si,  and  the  particle  ne  ;  thus,  ME 
NE  vo,  c  I  go  hence  '  ;  TE  NE  vai,  '  thou  goest  hence  ' ; 
&tc.  Me,  te,  &e.  are  then  mere  expletives. 

The  compounds  of  andare,  as  riandare,  signifying 
Ho  go  again',  &c.  have  the  same  irregularities. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


Riandare 
trasanddre 


are,    signifying  *  to  examine '  or  '  to   go  over  again ' ;    and 
re,  '  to  go  beyond ' ;  are  regular  and  varied  like  amdre. 


The  verbs  manddre,  c  to  send  ' ;  rimandare,  '  to  send 
back  again';  tramandare,  Mo  transmit';  comandare, 
6  to  command  ' ;  dimandare,  '  to  ask ' ;  &c.  are  not 
derivatives  of  andare,  and  are  varied  like  amare. 


240 


ANALOGY. 

Dare. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

|  to  give. 


GERtfND. 

dando,  |giving. 


PARTICIPLE. 

da.to,  |given. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  do, 

I   give,    or     am 

diamo, 

we  give  ; 

[giving  j 

2d  p.  DAI, 

thou  givest  ; 

date, 

you  give  ; 

3d  p.  dd, 

he  gives  ; 

DANNO, 

they  give. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.    DETTl,     OF 

[DIEDI  (diei), 

I   gave  ;    or   did 
[give  ; 

DEMMO, 

we  gave  ; 

2d  p.  DESTI, 

thou  gavest  ; 

DESTE, 

you-  gave; 

3d  p.   DETTE,  or 
[DIEDE  (dieo, 

he  gave; 

DETTERO,OrDIE- 

[DERO  (dierono, 

they  gave. 

Idle), 

[didro,di6r,3er- 

[no,dienno,den- 

[rio), 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  DARO,  |  I  shall,  or  will  give. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  10  DIA, 

2d  p.  tu  DIA,  01 

[D1I, 

3d  p.  egli  DIA, 

that  I    give,   or 
[may  give  ; 
that  thou  give  ; 

that  he  give  '; 

didmo, 
didte, 

DIANO,OrDfEXO, 

that  we  give  ; 
that  you  give  ; 
that  they  give. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS.  241 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  w  DESSI,  |  if  I  gave  or  should  give. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  DAREI  (darfa),     I  I  should,  would,  or  could 
[give  ;  or  might  give. 

V.     IMPERATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 


1st  p.    ... 
2dp.  db(dtf)tu, 
3d  p.  DIA  egli, 


give  thou  ; 
let  him  give  ; 


diamo  ndi, 
date  voi, 

DIANOjOl1  DIENO 

[eglino 


let  us  give ; 

*ive  ye ; 

let  them  give. 


The  compounds  of  dare,  as  ridare,  c  to  give  again  ' ; 
addarsi,  c  to  devote  one's  self ' ;   &c.,  have   the   same 


irregularities. 


The  verbs  abbondare,  c  to  abound ' ;  accommodare, 
c  to  mend  ' ;  badare,  '  to  mind  ' ;  accordare,  f  to  grant ' ; 
circonddre,  c  to  surround  ' ;  jidare,  c  to  trust ' ;  freddare, 
i  to  cool ' ;  gridare,  '  to  cry  out ' ;  guardare,  '  to  look  '; 
guidare,  c  to  guide  ' ;  lodare,  *  to  praise ' ;  predare,  c  to 
prey  5  ;  ricordare,  '  to  remember ' ;  rimediare,  c  to  reme- 
dy'  ;  scaldare,  l  to  warm' ;  secondare,  c  to  second  ' ;  &c., 
are  not  derivatives  of  ddre,  and  are  varied  like  amare. 


21 


242 


ANALOGY. 


Fare. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.  INFINITIVE. 

FARE  (facere),*  |  to  do,  or  to  make. 

GERUND.  PARTICIPLE. 

facendo,  \  doing.  .;  Jj  FATTO,  (done. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1. —  Present. 


1st  p.fo(fdccio), 

2d  p.  FAI  (faci), 
3d  p.  fa  (face), 


I  do  or  am   do-| 

[in 

tnou  doest; 
he  does ; 


FACCIAMO, 

fdte, 

FANNO  (fan), 


we  do ; 

you  do  ; 
they  do. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  iofaceva  orfacea  (fea),  |   I  did  or  was  doing. 

3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  FE 


2d  p.    FACESTI 

[(festi-), 

3d  p.  FECE  (/e', 

[feo), 


I  did; 
thou  didst ; 
he  did  ; 


facemmo     (fem- 
[mo)r 
faceste  (feste), 

FECERO  (ferono, 
[ferno,  fero,  fer, 
[fenno,  fen), 


we  did  j 
you  did ; 
they  did. 


4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  FARO,  I  I  shall  or  will  do. 


*  This  verb  belongs  properly  to  the  second  conjugation,  it  being  but  a  contrac- 
tion offdcere,  now  become  obsolete,  of  which  it  retains  many  of  the  forms. 


Singular. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


243 


Plural. 


1st  p.  W  FACCIA, 

2d  p.  tu  FACCIA, 
3d  p.   egli 


that  I  do,  or  may 
[do; 
that  thou  do  ; 
that  he  do  ; 

FACCIAMO, 

FACCIATE, 
FACCIAJVO, 

that  we  do  ; 

that  you  do  ; 
that  they  do. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  wfacessi  (fessi),      |  if  I  did  or  should  do. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  FAREI  (faria,  far6J),  1  I  should,  would,  or  could 

[do  ;  or  might  do. 


2d  p./a  (fd')tu, 

3d  p.    FACCIA 

do  thou  ; 
let  him  do  ; 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


FACCIAMO, 

fate, 

FACCIANO, 


let  us  do  ; 

do  ye; 

let  them  do. 


The  compounds  of/are,  as  assuefare,  '  to  accustom  '; 
confare,  £  to  suit,'  ;  to  agree  '  ;  contraffare,  {  to  mimic,' 
'  to  imitate '5  disfare,  '  to  undo';  mis/are, '  to  do  wrong  ' ; 
liquefare,  £  to  melt ' ;  sopraffare,  c  to  overpower  ' ;  stu- 
pefare,  '  to  stupefy,'  '  to  astonish  ' ;  Sic.,  have  the  same 
irregularities. 

Sodisfdre  or  soddisfdre, ( to  satisfy,'  is  both  regular  and  irregular. 


The  verbs  olfare,  <  to  smell'  ;  schifare,  '  to  shun  ' ; 
trionfdre,  c  to  triumph,'  are  not  derivatives  of  fare,  and 
are  varied  like  amdre. 


344 


ANALOGY. 


Stare. 
(Varied  with  essere.) 


stdndo, 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


Stare, 

GERUND. 

jstanding. 


to  stand,  to  stay, 
to  dwell,  or  to  be. 


stato, 


PARTICIPLE. 

[stood. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  sto, 

2d  p.  STAI, 
3d  p.  sta, 


1st  p.     STETTI 


stand    or    am 
[standing: 
thou  standest ; 
he  stands  ; 


state, 
STANNO, 


3.  —  Perfect. 


I  stood ; 


2d  p.     STESTI, 
3d  p.     STETTE 

[(ste), 


thou  stoodst ; 
he  stood  ; 


Plaral. 


STESTE, 
STETTERO(sterO, 

[ster,   stiero, 
[stier), 


we  stand ; 

you  stand ; 
they  stand. 


we  stood  ; 

you  stood  ; 
they  stood. 


1st  p.  STARO, 


4.  —  Future. 

\  I  shall  or  will  stand. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  w  STIA,      fthat    I    stand  or 

[may  stand  ; 

2d  p.  tu  STIA,  or  that  thou  stand  ; 

['STII, 


3d  p.  egli  STIA, 


that  he  stand  ; 


stidmo, 


STIANO,  or  ST!E- 
[NO, 


that  we  stand ; 
that  you  stand ; 
that  they  stand. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  w  STESSI,  ^    |  if  I  stood  or  should  stand. 

IV.      CONDITIONAL. 

• 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p,  STAREI  (staria),     I  should,  would,  or  could 
[stand;  or  might  stand. 

V.     IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


2d  p.   sta   (sta'} 
[tu, 
3d  p.  STIA  egli, 

stand  thou  ; 
let  him  stand  ; 

stidniOj 


STIAJVO,  Or  STIE- 

[NO  eglino, 


let  us  stand ; 
stand  ye"; 

let  them  stand. 


Stare,  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  conjunctive  pro- 
nouns, mi,  li,  si,  &,c.,  and  the  particle  ne  :  thus,  ME  NE 
sto,  '  I  remain  here ' ;  TE  NE  stai,  '  thou  remainest 
here';  &c.  —  Me,  te,  &c.  are  then  mere  expletives. 

The  compounds  of  stare,  as  contrastare,  signifying 
fi  to  stand  against ' ;  distare,  '  to  be  distant ' ;  instare,  '  to 
entreat ' ;  ristare,  e  to  stop  '  ;  soprastdre  or  sovrastdre, 
signifying  c  to  delay,3  cto  differ'^  &c.  have  the  same 
irregularities^ 


EXCEPTIONS. 


Contrastare,  signifying  '  to  deny,'  '  to  dispute  ' ;  soprastare  or  so- 
vrastdre,  signifying  l  to  stand  over,'  { to  threaten ';  ostdre,  '  to  oppose J; 
restare,  '  to  remain  ';  are  regular,  and  are  varied  like  amdre. 

The  verbs  accostare,  e  to  approach  ' ;  acquistare,  ( to 
acquire' ;  costare,  '  to  cost ';  manifestare,  *  to  manifest '; 
pestare,  « to  pound,'  are  not  derivatives  of  stare,  and  are 
varied  like  amare. 


21* 


246  ANALOGY. 

The  foregoing  verbs,  andare,  dare,  fare,  and  stare, 
in  all  those  forms  in  which,  when  they  are  simple,  they 
form  but  one  syllable,  have  in  their  compounds  the  ac- 
cent on  the  last  syllable  ;  as,  vo,  da,  fe',  sta  :  —  rivo, 
c  I  go  again  '  ;  rida,  c  he  gives  back  again  '  ;  disfe', 
c  he  destroyed  '  ;  insta,  '  entreat  thou' ;  &c. 


EXAMPLES. 

VA    il  cavdl   per   Gio,  —  Per  The  horse  goes  by  Gid,  the  ox 

Anda  VA  il  bd,  —  E  V  dsino  per  by  rf'nda,  and  the  ass  by  JL'rri.* 
Arri.     (Fran.  Sacch.,  rime,  9.) 

Or  VA'^  ch*  un   sol    voUre   &  Now  go,  for  one  only  will  is  in 

d'  amendue.     (Dant.  Inf.  2.)  both  of  us. 

Qutsto.udito  dal  sdnto  vecchio  Having  heard  this  he  went  to 

SE    NE    ANDO    molto    consoldto.  the  holy  man  quite  consoled. 
(Vit.  S.  Ant.) 

Prima  ch'  dltri  dindnzi  li  RI-  Ere   any   one    repassed    before 

VADA.     (Dant.  Inf.  28.)  him. 

RIANDA  le  cose,  che  tu  gli  hdi  Examine  the  things,  which  thou 

ddtte  di  me.  (Salv.  Granch.  2.,  5.)  hast  said  to  him  of  me. 

Sono  molti  di  s\  lieve  fantasia.  There  are   many  of  so  light  a 

che  in  tutte  le  loro  ragioni  TRA-  mind,  that  in  all  their  reasonings 

sANDANo.t     (Dant.  Conv.  178.)  they    [go    beyond    the    question] 

wander  from  the  subject  of  them. 

La  sente'nza  la  qudle  San  Pi6-  The  sentence  which  saint  Peter 

tro  DETTE  coniro  Jlnania.      (Ca-  gave  against  Ananias. 
vale.  Pungill.  97.) 

Al  cdnte  pidcque  molto  qu6sta  This  request  pleased   the  count 

domdnda,  e  prestam6nte  rispose  much,  and  he  immediately  replied 

di  si,  e  gliele  DIEDE.     (Bocc.  g.  that  he  would,  and  gave  them  to 

2.  n.  8.)  him. 

*  Different  interjections  used  by  the  Italians  in  driving  those  animals. 
|  We  are  awate  that  some  copies  of  the  Convivio  have  trasvdnnoj  Irasdndano, 
however,  is  the  better  reading. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


247 


E  il  buon  maestro  del  parldr 
proprio  [Dante]  disse  :  io  mi 
FECI  al  mostrato  innanzi  un  poco; 
e  Ver  me  si  FECE,  ed  io  ver  lui 
mi  FEI.  (Dep.  Decarn.  99.) 


AlV  inferno  non  SODISFANO 
eziandw  le  preziose  cose.  (Fr. 
Giord.) 

E  qu\  convien,  ch*  V  questo 
peso  porti  —  Per  lei,  tdnto  ch1  a 
Dw  si  SODDISFACCIA.  (Dant. 
Pur.  11.) 

VeggSndo  che  da  niun  cono- 
sciuto  v*  6ra,  si  STETTE.  (Bocc. 
g.  5.  n.  6.) 

Posso  favellare,  s'  w  voglio  ;  e 
se  nd,  s\  ME  NE  posso  STARE. 
(Fr.  Giord.  S.  Fred.  32.) 

Ma  paura  e  pietade  CONTRA- 
STETTE  —  JLl  mw  crudel  ardire. 
(Ovid.  Pist.) 

Rdde  volte  addividn,  che  air  al- 
te  irnpr6se  —  Fortuna  ingiuri- 
6sa  non  CONTRAST  i.  (Petr. 
c.  11.) 

Martuccio,  vegg&ndo  la  gio- 
vane,  maraviglidndosi^  SOPRA- 
STETTE.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  2.) 

Sdnza  montdre  al  dosso  — 
Deir  drcOj  6ve  Io  scoglio  piu  so- 
VRASTA.  (Dant.  Inf.  18.) 


And  the  good  master  of  correct 
speaking  [Dante]  said:  /  [made 
myself]  drew  a  little  nearer  to 
him  who  had  been  shown  me; 
and  He  drew  near  me,  and  I  drew 
near  him. 

In  hell  even  precious  things 
give  no  satisfaction. 


And  here  I  must  bear  for  it  this 
weight,  till  satisfaction  be  made  to 
God. 


Seeing  that  he  was  known  by 
none,  he  stayed  there. 


I  can  speak,  if  I'wish;  if  not,  I 
can  refrain  from  it. 


But  fear  and  pity  stood  against 
my  fierce  desire. 


Seldom  it  happens  that  Fortune 
does  riot  oppose  great  undertak- 
ings. 


Martuccio,  seeing  the  lass,  won- 
dering at  it,  tarried. 


Without  ascending  on  the  top 
of  the  arch  where  the  rock  is  more 
jutting. 


248  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE    XVIII. 


fin  this  and  the  following  exercises  on  Irregular  Verbs,  have  been  introduced  many 
those  verbs,  which,  although  they  are,  or,  from  the  similarity  of  their  termina- 
tions, seem  to  be,  derived  from  the  simple  iiregular  verbs  here  given,  are  yet  regular. 
This  has  been  done  whh  a  view  of  early  accustoming  the  learner  to  make  the  neces- 
sary discrimination.] 


I.  1.  —  Togo*    4. —  giving.     7. —  made. — —II.  1.  —  I  stay, 
Jlnddre.  dare.  fare.  stare, 

thou    sendest,     he     gives     again,      we    melt,    you     entreat, 
manddre,  riddre,  liquefdre,  instdre, 

they    go    over    again.        2.  —  I     gave,     thou     accustomedst, 
rianddre.  dare,  assuefdre, 

he  stood  against,     we  asked,     you  granted,     they  triumphed. 
contrastdrej        dimanddre,        accorddre,  trionfdre. 

3. —  I  stayed,  thou  sendedst  back,     he  devoted  himself,     we 
stare,  rimanddre,  adddre2          si1,        con- 

imitated,   you  delayed,  they  transmitted.        4.  —  I  will  make, 
traffdre,        soprastdre,  tramanddre.  fare, 

thou  wilt  oppose}    he   tvill  go  again,   we  will  trust,    you  will 
ostdre,  rianddre,  fiddre,  so- 

stand    over,     they   will   praise.        5.  —  I     have     gone,     thou 
vrastdre,  loddre.  anddto, 

hast    made    over   again,     he  has  remained,     we    have  given, 
rifdtto,  restdto,  ddto, 

you   have   commanded,     they  have   manifested.         III.     1.  — 
comanddto,  manifest  dto. 

that  I   deny,     that    thou    mayest    go   beyond,     that  he   may 
contrastdre,  trasanddre,  soddis- 

satisfy,    that   we  may    pound,     that    you    may    attend,     that 
far  ey  pe  stare,  baddre, 

they     may     cost.        2. —  I    might    astonish,     thou     mightest 
costdre.  stupefdre,  pre- 

pray,     he   might    approach,     we    might     disdain,     you   might 
dare,  accostdre,  schifdre,  seal- 

warm,  they  might  abound. IV.     J.  —  I  would  do  wrong, 

ddre,  abbonddre*  misfdre, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


249 


thou  wouldst  acquire,     he  would  command,    we  would  scold, 
acquistdre,  comanddre,  ,        gridare, 

you  would  smell,    they   would    cost. V.  —  go  thou,    let 

olfdrej  costdre.  anddre, 

him   give,    let    us    make,     stay    ye,    let    them    dispute. 
fddre,  fdre,      stdre,  contestdre. 


VARIATION  OF  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  SECOND 
CONJUGATION. 


Variation  of  the  Irregular  Verbs  in  ere  (long). 

The  simple    irregular   verbs  in    ere   (long)    are  the 
following  ;  viz. 


cadtre, 


to  fall ; 


dissuadere,  to  dissuade  ; 

doUre,  to  grieve ; 

dovtre,  to  owe ; 

giactre,  .to  lie  down  ; 

pardre,  to  seem ; 

ptrsuaddre,  to  persuade  ; 

piactre,  to  please  ; 

poUre,  to  be  able  ; 


rimantre. 

to  remain  ; 

sapere, 

to  know  ; 

sedtre, 

to  sit  down  ; 

tactre, 

to  be  or  keep  si- 

tentrc, 

to  hold  ;    [lent  ; 

valtre, 

to  be  worth  ; 

vedtre, 

to  see  ; 

volere, 

to  wish,  to  will, 

[or  to  be  willing. 

Cad  ere. 
(Varied  with  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 
Cadire,  |to  fall. 


PARTICIPLE. 

|  cadulo,  (fallen. 


250 


ANALOGY. 


II.   INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  cddo  (cag- 


2d  p.  cddi, 
3d  p,  cade, 


1st  p.  CADDI  (ca- 

[dei,cadetti), 

2d  p.  cadesti, 

3d  p.  CADDE  (ca- 

[deo,  cadette, 


I  fall; 


thou  fallest ; 
he  falls ; 


cadidmo  (caggid-  we  fall ; 

[mo,  cademo), 
caddie, 


3. 


I  fell ; 


thou  fellest ; 
he  fell ; 


cddono  (cdggio- 
[no), 

—  Perfect, 
caddmmo, 


\  cadeste, 

CADDERo(cadero, 

[cader ;  cadero- 

[no,  cade'ttero), 


you  fall ; 
they  fall. 


we  fell ; 

you  fell ; 
they  fell. 


4.— 


1st  p.  caderd  (cadro), 


Future. 
|  I  shall  or  will  fall. 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  io  cdda 


2d  p.   tu  cada 
[(caggia), 

3d  p.   egli  cdda 
[(cdggia), 


that    I    fall     or 
[may  fall  ; 
that  thou  fall  ; 

that  he  fall  ; 

cadidmo  (caggia- 
[mo), 

cadidte    (caggia- 

cddano  (cdggia- 

that  we  fall  ; 
that  you  fall  ; 
that  they  fall. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  caderei  (cadrei,  caderia,    I  should,  would,  or  could  fall ;  or 
[cadria),  [might  fall. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.    ;     .    . 
2d  p.  cadi  tu, 


fall  thou. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  «251 

The  compounds  of  cadere,  as  accadere,  '  to  happen  '; 
decadere,  c  to  decline  ' ;  ricadere,  '  to  fall  again  ' ;  &c., 
have  the  same  irregularities.  The  poetical  forms,  how- 
ever, aggio,  aggia,  aggiamo,  aggiono,  aggiano,  are  pe- 
culiar to  cadere  and  not  met  with  in  its  compounds.* 


Dissuadere. 
(Varied  with  either  avere  or  essere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

|to  dissuade.  H  DISSUASO,  [dissuaded. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 


Singular,  Plural. 

3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  DISSUASI,  |I  dissuaded;         II  dissuademmo, 
2d  v-dissuadestilthou  dissuadest;     dissuadeste, 
3d  p.  DISSTJASE,  |he  dissuaded  ;      ||  DISSUASERO, 


we  dissuaded ; 
you  dissuaded  ; 
they  dissuaded. 


Dissuadere^  properly  speaking,  is  a  compound  of  the 
Latin  verb  suadere,  as  well  as  persuadere,  c  to  persuade,' 
which  has  the  same  irregularities. 


Dolere. 

» 

(Varied  with  essere,  and  the  conjunctive  pronouns,  mi, 
ti,  si,  &c.) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Dol6r-si,  to  grieve.  ||  doluto-si,  [grieved. 

*  Of  ricadere,  Galileo  has  used  ricdggia. 


252 


ANALOGY. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  mi  DOLGO 

[(doglio) 

2d  p.    ti  DUOLI, 

3d  p.   si   DUOLE  he  grieves  ; 

[(dole), 


I  grieve ; 
thou  grievest; 


Cl  DOGLIAMO  (do- 


[lemo), 
vi  dolete, 

Si    DOLGONO    (d6- 

[gliono), 


3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  mi  DOLSI,  jl  grieved  ;  1 1  ci  dolemmo, 

2d  p.  ti  dolesti,    (thou  grievedst ;       vi  doleste, 
3d  p.  si  DOLSE,   |he  grieved  ;          l|  si  DOLSERO, 

4.  —  Future. 


we  grieve ; 

you  grieve ; 
they  grieve. 


we  grieved  ; 
you  grieved; 
they  grieved. 


1st  p.  dorrd  [by  contraction  fon  I  shall  or  will  grieve. 
[dolerd*],\ 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  mi  DOLGA 
[(doglia), 

2d  p.  ti  DOLGA 
[(doglia), 

3d  p.  si  DOLGA 
[(doglia'), 


that  I  grieve    or 
[may  grieve  ; 
that  thou  grieve  ; 

that  he  grieve  ; 

ci  DOGLIAMO, 

VI  DOGLIATE, 
Si  DOLGANO  (d6- 

[gliano), 

that  we  grieve  5 
that  you  grieve  ; 
that  they  grieve. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  dorrii  (dorria)   [by  contrac- 
[tion  for  dolerei  (doleria)t], 


I  should,  would,  or  could  grieve; 
[or  might  grieve. 


V.     IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p     .    .    .    . 

;  DOGLIAMO-  Ci, 

let  us  grieve  ; 

2d  p.  DUOLI-fi, 

3d  p.   si   DOLGA 
[(ddglia), 

grieve  thorj  ; 
let  him  grieve  ; 

dolete-vi, 

Si    DOLGANO  (d6- 

[gliano), 

grieve  ye  ; 
let  them  grieve. 

*  To  distinguish  it  from  dolerd,  future  of  the  verb  dolttre,  « to  defraud.' 
t  To  distinguish  them  from  dolerti  (doleria),  forms  of  the  conditional  of  the  verb 
doldre,  «  to  defraud.' 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


253 


The  compounds  of  dolere,  as  condoUre,  'to  condole  ' ; 
.  have  the  same  irregularities. 


Dovere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 
Dove"  re  (devere*),|to  owe. 


PARTICIPLE. 

dovuto,  |owed. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.                                                         Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.   devo,    or 

I  owe  ; 

DOBBIAMO  (deb- 

we  owe  ; 

[DEBBO  (deg- 

[bidmo,  deggid- 

[gio), 

[mo,  devemo), 

2d  p.  devi  (dei), 

thou  owest  ; 

dovete, 

you  owe  ; 

3d  p.    deve,   or 

he  owes; 

dovono*  or  DEB* 

they  owe. 

[DEBBE    (dee, 

[BONO    (dtggio- 

[rfej), 

[noj  deono,  den- 

t 

[no), 

3.  — Perfect. 
1st  p.  dovei  or  dovttti,         \  I  owed, 

4  —  Future. 
1st  p.  doverd  or  dovrd,         \  I  shall  or  will  owe. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
1. — Present. 


1st  p.    W    DEBBA 

[(dtggia), 

2d    p.    tU    DEBBA 
OJ            [(7^^«)5 

3d  p.  egh  DEBBA 
[(Mggia), 

that    I    owe,   or 
[may  owe; 
that  thou  owe  ; 

that  he  owe  ; 

- 

DftBBIAMO  (deg- 

[(gidmo), 

DOBBIATE     (deg- 

[gidte), 

DEBBANO      (d6g- 

[giano), 

that  we  owe  ; 
that  you  owe  ; 
that  they  owe. 

*  The  Latin  debere,  from  which  dovcre  derives  some  of  its  forms. 


254  ANALOGY. 

IV.     CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  doverei  or  dovrei  (doveria     I  should,  would,  or  could  owe  ;  or 
[or  dovria),  [might  owe. 

V.    IMPERATIVE.* 


Giacere. 
(Varied  with  either  avere  or  essere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Giacere,  |to  lie  down.         ||  giaciuto,  jlain  down. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  GIACCIO, 

2d  p.  giacit 
3d  p.  gidce, 

I  lie  down  ; 
thou  liest  down  ; 
he  lies  down  ; 

GIACCIAMO, 

giacete, 

GIACCIONO, 

we  lie  down  ; 
you  lie  down  ; 
they  lie  down. 

3.—  Perfect. 

1st  p.  GIACQUI, 

2d  p.  giacesti, 
3d  p.  GIACQUE, 

I  lay  down  ; 
thou  layest  down; 
he  lay  down  ; 

giacemtno, 
giac6ste, 

G1ACQUERO, 

we  lay  down  ; 
you  lay  down; 
they  lay  down. 

III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 

Istp.lOGIACCIA, 
2d  p.  fttGIACCIA, 

3d  p.  egli  GIAC- 

[CIA, 

that  I  lie  down  or 
[may  lie  down  ; 
that    thou    lie 
[down  ; 
that  he  lie  down  ; 

GIACCIAMO, 

giacldte, 

GIACCIANO, 

that  we  lie  down; 

that    you    lie 
[down  ; 
that    they   lie 
[down. 

*  "  Strictly  is  wanting."  —  Teor.  Verb.  Ital.,  Part.  II.,  $.  48. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


255 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singula 
1st  p.     ... 

r. 

Plu 

GIACCIAMO  noi, 
giacete  voi, 

GIACCIANO     6gll- 

\no, 

al. 

let  us  lie  down  ; 
lie  ye  down  ; 
let    them    lie 
[down. 

2d  p.  gidci  tu, 
3d  p.  GIACCIA 

E4*$ 

lie  thou  down  ; 
let  him  lie  down; 

The  compounds  of  giacere,  as  soggiacere,  £  to  be 
subject';  &c.,  as  well  as  piacere,  and  its  compounds 
compiacere,  '  to  please  ';  dispiacere,  *  to  displease  ' ;  &c. 
have  the  same  irregularities. 

Piacire  and  its  compounds  compiacere,  &c.,  in  the  second  person 
plural  of  the  present  of  the  conjunctive,  and  in  the  second  person 
plural  of  the  imperative  mood}  make  PIACCIATE,  &c. 


Par  ere. 
(Varied  with  ess  ere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Pare" re,  |to  seem. 


||  paruto 
II.    INDICATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 

t  |seemed. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  PAIO, 

2d  p.  pdri, 

3d  p.  pare  (pdr), 


1st  p.   PARVI 

[(parsi), 
2d  p.  paresti, 
3d  p,   PARVE 

l(pdrse), 


I  seem ; 

thou  seemest; 

he  seems ; 


paridmo, 
parete, 
pdrono,  or  PAIO- 
[NO, 


3.  —  Perfect. 


I  seemed ; 

thou  seemedst ; 
he  seemed  j 


paremmo, 

pariste, 
PARVERO  (parse- 


we  seem ; 
you  seem  ; 
they  seem. 


we  seemed ; 

you  seemed; 
they  seemed. 


256 


ANALOGY. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  parrd  [by  contraction  for 
[parerd*], 


I  shall  or  will  seem. 


Singular. 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  W  PAIA, 

2d  p.  tu  PAIA, 
3d  p.  egli  PAIA, 


that  I   seem    or\  pariamo, 


[may  seem  jl 
that  thou  seem ; 
that  he  seem ; 


PAIATE, 

PAIANO, 


Plural. 


that  we  seem  ; 

that  you  seem  ; 
that  they  seem. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  parrei  (parria)  [by  contrao 
[tion  for  parerei  (pareria)f], 


I  should,  would,  or  could  seem  ;  or 
[might  seem. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.    ... 

paridmo  noij 

2d  p.  pdri  tu, 
3d  p.  PAIA  egli, 

seem  thou  ; 
let  him  seem  ; 

parete  voi, 
PAIAJVO  eglino, 

let  us  seem ; 

seem  ye ; 

let  them  seem. 


Persuadere. 
(  See  dissuadere,  p.  251 .) 


Placer  e. 
(  See  giacere,  pp.  254  and  255.) 


*  To  distinguish  it  from  parerd,  future  of  the  verb  pardre,  '  to  parry,' £  to  adorn.' 

t  To  distinguish  them  from  parerei  (pareria),  corresponding  forms  of  the  verb 
pardre,   c  to  parry  '  5  &c. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


257 


Potere. 
(Varied  with  either  avere  or  essere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Potere,  |to  be  able.  H  potuto,      "         |been  able. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


1st  p.  POSSO, 
2d  p.   PUOI 


3d  p.  FUO  (puote, 
[p6te), 


I  am  able  ; 
thou  art  able  ; 
he  is  able  ; 


Plural. 
Present. 

POSSIAMO  (pote-  we  are  able  ; 


(pote- 
[mo), 
potete, 

POSSONO  (ponnOj 
[pon), 


you  are  able ; 
they  are  able. 


4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  potrd  [by  contraction  for       I  shall  or  will  be  able. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  FOSSA, 


I  that  I  be  able  or  may 
[be  able. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL, 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  potr6i  (potria)  [by  contrac- 
[tion  for  poterci  (poteria,tj 
[poria), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  be  able ', 
[or  might  be  able. 


*  To  distinguish  it  frompoterb,  future  of  the  vetbpotbre,  *  to  prune.' 
t  To  distinguish  them  from  poterei  (poteria),  corresponding  forms  of  the  verb  potdrt, 
*  to  prune.' 

22* 


258 


ANALOGY. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


1st  p  

2d  p.  POSSA  tu, 
3d  p.  POSSA  6gli9 

be  thou  able  ; 
let  him  be  able  ; 

Plural. 


POSSIAMO  noij 

POSSIATE  VOl, 

POSSANO  6glino, 


let  us  be  able  ; 

be  ye  able ; 

let  them  be  able. 


Rimanere. 
(Varied  with  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Rimanere,  |to  remain. 


PARTICIPLE. 

HRIMASTO  (n'waso), [remained. 


II.     INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st   p.      RIMANGO 

[(rimagno), 
2d  p.  rimdni, 
3d  p.  rimdne, 


1st  p.  RTMASI, 
2d  p.  rimanestij 
3d  p.  RIMASE, 


I  remain  ; 

thou  remainest ; 
he  remains  ; 


rimanete, 

RIMANGONO, 


3.  —  Perfect. 

I  remained  ;         11  rimanemmo, 
thou  remainedst;    rimaneste^ 
he  remained  ;       ||  RIMASERO, 


4.  —  Future. 


we  remain ; 

you  remain ; 
;they  remain. 


we  remained  ; 
you  remained  ; 
ihey  remained. 


1st  p.  rimarrd  [by  contraction  for 
[rimanerd], 


I  shall  or  will  remain. 


*  "  Observe  that  grammarians  believe  that  this  verb  has  no  imperative  j  because, 
they  say,  we  cannot  command  any  one  to  have  a  power  which  he  has  not.  But  they 
have  not  reflected  that  one  can  give  power,  when  he  is  able  to  do  so  j  as  in  the  case 
with  God  in  relation  to  all  things  j  and  us,  to  a  smaller  extent,  may  be  the  case  with 
man  and  certain  relations  of  man.  Which  ideas  being  susceptible  of  being  express- 
ed also  in  the  imperative  mood,  reason  requires  that  this  verb  should  not  be  so  easily 
deprived  of  it."  —  Teor.  Verb.  Ital.,  Part.  If.,  $.  120. 

Besides,  the  verb  potere  does  not  mean  only  "  aver  possa  o  virtd,  ma  volontd  anc6- 
ra,  e  satisfazi6ne,  e  contento  ',  ch&  non  i  sempre  il  verbo  del  portatori,  e  degli  bsini."  — 
Dep.  Decam.,  104. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


259 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  __  Present. 


lstp.t0RiMA.NGA  that  I   remain  or 


[(rimagna), 
2d  p.  tu  RIMANGA 

[( rimagna), 

3d  p.  egli  RIMAN- 

[GA, 


[may  remain ; 
that  thou  remain ; 

that  he  remain ; 


rimanidmo, 
rimanidte, 

RIMANGANO, 

that  we  remain  ; 
that  you  remain]; 
that  they  remain. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  — Present. 

1st  p.  rimarrei  (rimarria)  [hy  con-  I  should,  would,  or  could  remain ; 
[traction  for  rimanerei  (rimane-  [or  might  remain. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 

rimaniamo  noi,  Slet  us  remain ; 
rimanete  voi,       j remain  ye  ; 

RIMANGANO 

[eglino, 


2d  p.  rimdni  tu, 
3d  p.  RIMANGA 

•remain  thou  ; 
let  him  remain  ; 

Sapere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Sapere  (savere*),|to  know. 


PARTICIPLE. 

|  saputo,  [known. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.— 

Present. 

1st  p.  so, 
2d  p.  SAI, 

3d  p.  SA  (sape), 

I  know  ; 
thou  knowest  ; 
he  knows; 

jlsAPPIAMO, 

lisaptte, 

||SANNO, 

we  know  ; 
you  know; 
they  know. 

*  This /cm,  met  with  in  Dante,  Alamanni,  and  other  poets,  has  become  obsolete. 


260 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  SEPPI, 

2d  p.  sapesti, 
3d  p.  SEPPE, 


I  knew; 
ihou  knewcst ; 
he  knew; 


\sapemmo, 

\sapeste, 

ISEPPERO, 


we  knew ; 
you  knew ; 
they  knew. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  saprd  [by  contraction  for  I  I  shall  or  will  know, 
[sqpero],  I 


III.  CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  ' —  Present. 
1st  p.  w  SAPPIA,  |  that  I  know,  or  may  know. 

IV.  CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  saprti  (sapria)  [by  contrac-  |  I   should,  would,  or  could  know ; 
[tion  for  saperei  (saperia)],  |  [or  might  know. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


2d  p.  SAPPI  tu, 
3d  p.  SAPPIA  tgli, 

know  thou  ; 
let  him  know  ; 

j 

SAPPIATE  VOi, 


let  us  know; 

know  ye ; 

let  them  know. 


The  compounds  of  sapere^  as  risapere,  c  to  learn,5  or 
6  to  come  to  know  ' ;  follow  the  same  irregularities. 


Sedere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Sedere  (seggere*),     |     to  sit  down. 


*  This  verb,  now  become  obsolete,  is  still  used  in  many  of  the/oms  of  the  modern 
verb  sedtre* 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


261 


GERUND. 

sedendo  (seggendo), [sitting. 


PARTICIPLE. 

sedutOj  |seated. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.   SIEDO,  or 

[sEGGo(seggio), 

2d  p.  SIEDI, 
3d  p.  SIEDE   (se- 
[de), 

I  sit  ; 

thou  sittest  } 
he  sits  ; 

sedidmo  or  SEG- 
[GIAMO  (sede- 
fmo), 

sedete, 

SIEDONO,Or  SEG- 

EGONO  (seggio- 
no), 

we  sit  ; 

you  sit  ; 
they  sit. 

3.  —  Perfect. 
1st  p.  sedei  or  sedetti,          \    I  sat. 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  sederd*  (sedro),          |  I  shall  or  will  sit. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  io  siEDA,or 
[sEGGA(seggia), 
2d  p.  tu  siEDA,or 
[SEGGA  (seggia 
[orseggi), 
3d  p.  egli  SIEDA, 

[or  SEGGA, 

that  I  sit,  or  may 
[may  sit; 
that  thou  sit  ; 

that  he  sit  ; 

sedidmo  or  SEG- 
[GIAMO, 
sedidte    (seggia- 
[te), 

SIEDANO,  OrSEG- 

[GANO  (seggia- 
[no), 

that  we  sit ; 
that  you  sit ; 


that  they  sit. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


1.  _  Present. 


1st  p.  sederei  (sedrei,  sederia), 


I  should,  would,  or  could  sit ;  or 
[might  sit. 


*  Mastrofini  proposes  siederd,  and  in  the  conditional  siederei;  but  this,  which 
indeed  would  present  the  advantage  of  distinguishing  these  forms  from  the  coire- 
sponding  ones  of  the  verb  sedare,  'to  appease,'  has  not  been  adopted  by  the  generality 
of  Italian  writers. 


262 


ANALOGY. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 
Istp  . 

Plu 

sedidmo  (seggia- 
[mo)  noi, 
sedete  voi3 

SlEDANO,OrSEG- 

[GAJVO  eglino, 

ral. 
let  us  sit  ; 

sit  ye  ; 
let  them  sit. 

2d  p.  SIEDI  tu, 
3d  p.  SIEDA,  or 
[SEGGA  e'gH, 

>it  thou  ; 
let  him  sit  ; 

Sedere  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  pronouns  mi, 
ti,  si,  &c.,  and  then  it  requires  the  auxiliary  essere  ;  as 
mi  siedo,  £  I  sit  (myself)  '  5  ti  sei  seduto,  '  thou  hast  sat 
(thy  self)5  -fee. 

The  compounds  of  sedere,  as  possedere,  c  to  possess  ' ; 
risedere,  {  to  reside  ' ;  soprassedere,  <  to  supersede  ' ; 
have  the  same  irregularities. 


Tacere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 


Tacere,  Ito  be  or  keep  si- 1 1  taciuto, 

[lent  J I 


II.     INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 
1st  p.  tdcio  (taccio),  |  I  am  silent. 


PARTICIPLE. 

been  silent. 


3,  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  TACQUI,     IT  was  silent ; 
2dp.  tactsti 


3d  p.  TACQUE, 


thou  wast  silent ; 
he  was  silent ; 


tacemmo, 

taceste, 

TACQUERO, 


we  were  silent ; 
you  were  silent  5 
they  were  silent. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


263 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 
1st  p.  10  tdcia  (taccia),  |  that  I  be  silent  or  may  be  silent. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 

1st  p.     ...  I     

2d  p.  tdci  tUj  I  be  thou  silent. 


Tacere  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  pronouns  mi, 
ti,  si,  &c.,  and  then  it  requires  the  auxiliary  essere ; 
mi  tacio,  <I  keep  silent ';  si  e  taciuto,  'he  has  kept 
silent' ;  &c. 

The  compound  of  tacfre,  —  ritacere,  '  to  become 
once  more  silent ' ;  follows  the  same  irregularities. 


Tenere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Tenere,  |to  hold. 


Singular. 


PARTICIPLE. 

||  tenuto,  jholden. 


1st    p.    TENGO 

[(tegno), 
2d  p.   TiENi  (te- 


3d  p.  TIENE, 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 

I  hold  ; 

tenidmo   (tegna- 

we  hold  ; 

[mo), 

thou  boldest  ; 

tenete, 

you  hold  ; 

he  holds  ; 

TENG050, 

they  hold. 

264 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  TENNI, 

2d  p.  tencsti, 

3d  p.  TENNE, 


I  held  ; 
thou  heldest; 
he  held ; 


I  tenemmOf 
\\  teneste, 

TENJVERO, 


we  held ; 
you  held  ; 
they  held. 


4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  terro  [by  contraction  for    i  I  shall  or  will  hold, 
pcnerd],    | 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.    10    TENGA 

[(tegna), 

2d  p.     tU  TENGA, 

3d  p.  egli  TENGA 
[(tegna), 

that   I   hold     or 
[may  hold  ; 
that  thou  hold  ; 
that  he  hold  ; 

tenidmo   (tegna- 
[mo), 
<em'^^e(te2;nate), 
TENGANo(tegna- 
[no), 

that  we  hold  ; 

that  you  hold  ; 
that  they  hold. 

IV.     CONDITIONAL. 

1. —  Present. 

1st  p.  terrei  (terria)  [by  contrac-  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  hold ;  or 
[tion  for  tenerei  (teneria)],  |  [might  hold. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


2d  p.  TIENI  (tej) 
[tu, 

3d  p.     TENGA 

[(tegna)  egli, 

hold  thou  ; 
let  him  hold  ; 

[mo)  noi, 
tenete  voi, 

TENGANO  (tegna- 
[no)  eglino, 

hold  ye  ; 
let  them  hold. 

Tenere  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  pronouns  mi, 
ti,  si,  &c.,  and  then  it  requires  the  auxiliary  essere ; 
as,  mi  sono  tentito,  '  I  have  holden  or  restrained  myself; 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


265 


The  compounds  of  tenere,  as  appartenere,  c  to  be- 
long '  ;  astenere,  '  to  abstain  ' ;  attenere,  <  to  attain  ' ; 
contenere,  c  to  contain,'  '  to  refrain  '  ;  detenere,  '  to  de- 
tain ' ;  mantenere,  '  to  maintain  ' ;  ottenere,  c  to  obtain  ' ; 
rattenere,  '  to  stop,'  c  to  restrain  ' ;  sostenere,  '  to  sup- 
port,' c  to  sustain '  $  &c.  have  the  same  irregularities. 


Valere. 
(Varied  with  either  avere  or  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Fattre, 


to  be  worth,  or \\valuto  (valso), 
[to  avail.  1 1 

II.     INDICATIVE. 


been  worth. 


Singular, 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.   VAL£O       I  am  worth  ; 


J(vaglio), 
lij 
3d  p.  vale  (vdl), 


1st  p.  VALSI, 
2d  p.  valesti, 
3d  p.  VALSE, 


thou  art  worth ; 
he  is  worth ; 


validmo, 
vaUte, 

VALGONO,  Or  VA- 

[GLIONO, 


3.  —  Perfect. 

I  was  worth  ;       \\val6mmo, 
thou  wast  worth;  va/dste, 
he  was  worth ;     |  VALSERO, 


4.  —  Future. 


we  are  worlh  ; 

you  are  worth ; 
they  are  worth. 


we  were  worth  ; 
you  were  worth  ; 
they  were  worth. 


1st  p.  varrd  [by  contraction  for 
' 


23 


I  shall  or  will  be  worth. 


266 


ANALOGY. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  io  v  ALGA  5 

that  I  be   worth 

valiamo, 

that    we    be 

[OF   VAGLIA, 

[or    may   be 

[worth  ; 

[worth  ; 

2d  p.    tU    VALGA, 

that     thou     be 

validie, 

that    you    he 

[OF   VAGLIA, 

[worth  ; 

[worth  ; 

3d  p.  egli  VALGA, 

that  he  be  worth; 

VALGANO,  OF  VA- 

that    they    be 

[Or  VAGLIA, 

[GLIANO, 

[worth. 

IT.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  varrei  (varria)  [by  contrac-  | 
[tion  for  valerei  (Valeria)],  I 


I  should,  would,  or  could  be  worth  j 
£or  might  be  worth. 


1st  p.    .    .    . 
2d  p.  vali  tu, 
3d  p.  VALGA 
[(vaglia)  eg 


V.     IMPERATIVE. 


be  thou  worth ; 
let  him  be  worth 


validmo  no'?, 
valete  voi, 

VALGANO,  Or  VA- 

[GLIANO  eglino, 


Tet  us  he  worth  ; 
be  ye  worth  ; 
let    them    be 

f  worth. 


The  compounds  of  valere,  as  disvalere,  '  to  hurt ' ; 
equivaUre,  ( to  be  equivalent ' ;  invatere,  '  to  lose  worth 
or  strength  5 ;  prevalere,  c  to  prevail '  ;  rivaUre,  '  to  re- 
cover worth  or  strength  ' ;  have  the  same  irregularities. 
Of  the  two  forms  of  the  present,  however,  that  in  algo 
is  better  adapted  to  them;  and  disvalgo,  'I  hurt'; 
equivalga,  '  let  it  be  equivalent ' ;  invdlgano,  c  that  the)r 
lose  strength '  ;  &c.,  are  oftener  met  with  in  books  than 
disvaglio,  &c. 

The  poetical  form  prevdlso,  <  prevailed,5  of  the  past  participle  of 
prevalere,  has  been  used  by  good  writers  even  in  prose.  Invalere, 
in  the  same  participle  has  invdlso, l  [having]  lost  strength ' ;  only. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


2G7 


Vedere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Vedere,  \  to  see. 


GERUND. 


vedendo,  or  vEG-lseeing. 
[GENDO,| 


PARTICIPLE. 

\\veduto  (visto),    Iseen. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  t?ed!0,vEG- 

I  see; 

vedidmo,  or  VEG- 

we  see  ; 

[GO,  or  VEGGIO, 

[GIAMO, 

2d  p.  vedi  (ve'), 

thou  seest; 

vedete, 

you  see; 

3d  p.  v6de, 

he  sees  ; 

vedono,    -VEGGO- 

they  see. 

[NO,  or  VEG- 

[GIONO, 

/3.  _  Perfect. 

1st  p.  VIDI  (vid- 

I  saw; 

vedemmOf 

we  saw;] 

[di), 

3d  p.  vedesti, 

thou  sawest; 

vedeste, 

you  saw  ; 

3d  p.  VIDE, 

he  saw  ; 

VIDERO  (vider), 

they  saw. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  vedrd  [by  contraction  for  L I  shall  or  will  see. 
[vederd],  \ 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.   w  veda, 
[VEGGA,    or 

[VEGGIA, 

2d  p.   tu   v6da, 

[VEGGA,      Or 

[VEGGIA, 
3d  p.  igli  veda, 
[VEGGA,   or 
[VEGGIA, 


that  I  see  or  may 
[see ; 

that  thou  see ; 


that  he  see  ; 


vedidmo,  or  VEG-  that  we  see ; 
[GIAMO, 

vedidte,  or  VEG- that  you  see ; 

[GIATE; 

vedano,  VEGGA-  that  they  see. 
[NO,    or   VEG- 
[GIANO, 


268 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  vedrdi  (vedria)  [by  contrac-l  I  should,,  would,  or  could  see  ;  or 
[tion  for  vederei  (vederia)],)  [might  see. 


V.     IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p  

vedidmOjOT  VEG- 

2dp.»&K(v6')fci, 
3d  p.  veda,  VEG- 
[GA,  or  VEGGIA 

te$ 

see  thou  ; 
let  him  see  ; 

[GIAMO  noi, 
vedete  voi, 
vedano,  VEGGA- 
[NO,    or     VEG- 
[GIANO  eglino, 

let  us  see  > 

see  ye; 

let  them  see. 


The  compounds  of  vedere,  as  antivedere,  &  to  fore- 
see ' ;  avvedere,  c  to  perceive  ' ;  divedere,  '  to  be  sen- 
sible of ' ;  prevedere,  £  to  foresee  ' ;  provvedere,  '  to  pro- 
vide ' ;  ravvedere,  c  to  amend  ' ;  rivedere,  '  to  see  again  ' ; 
travedere,  c  to  see  one  thing  for  another';  &c.3  have 
the  same  irregularities. 

JUntiveddre,  avvedere,  divedere^  travedere,  in  the  past  participle 
make  only  antiveduto, l  foreseen ';  avvedittOj  4  perceived';  diveduto, 
1  been  sensible  of ;  traveduto,  '  [having]  seen  one  thing  for  another ' : 
and  dived6re,  prevedere,  provvedere,  ravvedere,  travedere,  in  the  future 
and  conditional  are  sever  contracted,  and  make  divederd,  f  I  will  be 
sensible  of;  prevederti,  *  I  would  foresee  '  j  &c. 


Vo  lere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


Vottre, 


to  wish,  to  will, II  voluto,  been  willing 

for  to  be  willing J' 


[or  to  be  willing. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


269 


Singular. 


II.   INDICATIVE. 


1.  — Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  VOGLIO,  or 
[vo', 

2d  p.  vuoi  (vuo- 

[li,  vuo9^ 

3d  p.  VUOL.E  (vo- 

tie), 


1st  p.  VOLLI 

[(volsi*), 
2d  p.  vottsti, 

3d  p.  VOLLE, 


I  am  willing ; 
thou  art  willing ; 
he  is  willing ; 


VOGLIA.MO  (vole-  we  are  willing; 


volete, 

VOGLIONO    (von- 
[no,  von), 


3.  —  Perfect. 


I  was  williijg ; 

thou  wast  wil- 
ling; 
he  was  willing ; 


vottmmo, 
voUste, 

VOLLERO, 


you  are  willing  j 
they  are  willing. 


we  were  willing; 
you     were     wil- 


they    were    wil- 
[ling. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  vorrd  {by  contraction  fo 
[voler '()t] 


I  shall  or  will  be  willing. 


1st  p.  w  VOGLIA, 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

1. —  Present., 


that  I  be  willing  or  may 
[be  willing. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  vorrii  (vorria)  [by  contrac-  I  I  should,  would,  or  could   be  wil- 
[tion  for  volerei  (voleria)J],  |  [ling  ;  or  might  be  willing. 


*  Foist,  as  well  as  vtilse  and  volsero,  has  become  obsolete ;  and  tho  few  examples 
we  find  in  Dante,  Ariosto,  Berni,  and  Tasso,  ought  not  to  authorize  the  use  of  these 
forms,  which  properly  belong  to  the  perfect  of  vdlgere,  '  to  turn ' ;  and  not  ofvolere, 
1  to  be  willing.' 

\  To  distinguish  it  from  the  future  of  the  verb  volftre,  '  to  fly.' 

J  To  distinguish  them  from  the  corresponding  forms  of  voldre,  '  to  fly.' 


270 


ANALOGY. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 
1st  p*     . 

PlQ 

VOGLIAMO  noij 

VOGLIATE  v6iy 
VOGLIANO 

[eglino, 

ral. 

let  us  be  willing  j 
be  ye  willing  ; 
let  them  be  wil- 
[lin£. 

2d  p.  VOGLI  tUj 

3d  p.  VOGLIA 

be  thou  willing  ; 
let  him   be   wil- 
[ling; 

The  compounds  of  volere,  as  disvolere,  c  to  desire  the 
contrary  of  what  one  has  wished  ' ;  rivoUre,  £  to  wish 
again,'  or  c  to  be  once  more  willing';  have  the  same 
irregularities. 


EXAM  PLE  S. 


E  CADDI,  come  corpo  mdrto 
CADE.  (Dant.  Inf.  5.) 

11  timore,  molto  piu  che  la  for- 
za  dille  ragioni,  lo  DISSUASE. 
(Fra.  Gior.) 

L&  dove  piu  MI  DOLSE  [dolsi] 
altri  si  DUOLE,  e  DOLENDO  addol- 
cisce  il  mw  dolorc.  (Petr.  c.  22.) 
i 

Di  niuna  cosa  durdr  DOBBIA- 
MO,  la  quale  dbbiaforza  d1  offen- 
ders. (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  10.) 

Questi  e  colui,  che  GIACQUE 
sopra  n  petto— Del  nostro  Pelli- 
cdno.  (Dant.  Par.  25.) 


And  I  fell,  as  a  dead  body  falls. 

Fear  dissuaded  him  a  great  deal 
more  than  the  power  of  reason. 

Others  grieve  for  what  I  most 
grieved,  and  grieving  they  assuage 
my  grief. 

We  ought  to  endure  nothing 
that  has  the  power  of  offending. 

This  one  is  he,  who  lay  upon 
the  bosom  of  our  Pelican. 


*  It  has  been  asserted  that  volere  has  no  imperative,  but  the  slightest  acquaint- 
ance with  our  classic  writers  might  convince  any  one  to  the  contrary : 

VoGLifcne  venir   con  meco.      (Bocc.     Be  thou  willing  to  come  with  me. 
g.  2.  n.  10.) 

VOGLI  avert  caritd.    (Gr.  S.  Gir.  13.)      Have  charity. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


271 


Or  ti  PIACCIA  gradir  la  sua 
venuta.     (Dant.  Purg.  1.) 


Now    may   his  coming    please 
thee. 


Non  so,  se  a  voi  quello  se  ne  I  do  not  know,  whether  it  will 

PARRA,  che  a  me  ne  PARREBBE.  appear  to  you  so  as  it  would  ap- 

(Bocc.  Introd.)  pear  to  me. 

Cosi  veloci  seguono  i  suoi  vi-  Thus   swift  follow  their  hoops, 

mi,  —  Per  simiglidrsi  al   Punto  approaching    in    likeness    to   the 

quanta     PONNO,  —  E      POSSON,  Point  as   near  as  they  can ;  and 

quanta     a    vedfr    son     sublimi.  they    can   the    more,  Jhe    loftier 

(Dant.  Par.  28.)  their  vision  is. 

I'o   non  mori',  e  non  RIMASI  I  did  not  die,  neither  remained  I 

vivo.     (Dant.  Inf.  34.)  alive. 


O'nde,  ben  SEPPE  che  dirsi 
Ddnte,qudndo,nel  Canto  Dtcimo 
deir  Inferno,  indusse  Farindta 
a  dirgli  quelle  parole.  (Salviat. 
Avvert.  1.  2.  12.) 


Che  SEGGENDO  in  piume  in 
fdma  non  si  vie"n,  ne  sotto  coltre. 
(Dant  Inf.  24.) 

E  giammdi  poi  la  mia  lingua 
non  TACQUE, —  Mdntre  poteo. 
(Petr.  c,  4.) 

Morto  che  ebbero  Costantmo 
loro  fratdllo,  loro  due  TENNERO 
r  imperio.  (Petr.  Uom.  ill.) 

JV^  V  un  mi  VARREBBE,  ne 
V  altro  VOGL.IO  che  mi  VAGLIA. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 

./Voi  eravdm  partiti  gia  da  £llo 
—  Ch'  i*  VIDI  duo  ghiaccidti  in 
una  buca.  (Dant.  Inf.  32.) 

Iddio  VOLLE,  in  questa  vita, 
privdre  ndi  di  questa  luce. 
(Dant.  Conv.  114.) 


Therefore,  Dante  knew  well 
what  he  said,  when,  in  the  Tenth 
Canto  of  the  Inferno,  he  induced 
Farinata  to  say  to  him  those 
words. 

For  neither  by  reposing  on 
feathers,  nor  under  a  coverlet,  is 
fame  won. 

And  never  afterwards  was  my 
tongue  silent,  whilst  it  could 
[speak]. 

After  they  had  killed  Constan- 
tine  their  brother,  both  of  them 
held  the  empire  for  themselves. 

Neither  the  one  could,  nor  I 
wish  that  the  other  should,  avail 


We  had  now  left  him,  when  I 
saw  two  spirits  by  the  ice  pent  in 
one  hollow. 

God  wished  to  deprive  us,  in 
this  life,  of  this  light. 


272  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE    XIX. 


I.     1. —  To    fall.          4. —  lying    down,         7. —  remained. 
Cadere.  giacere.  rimane're. 

— —  II.     1.  —  I   grieve,     tbou    art    able,     he    sits,     we  seem, 
dolere,  potdre,  sedere,  parere, 

you    owe,     they    know.        2.  —  I    dissuaded,     thou    heldest, 
dov6re,  sapere.  dissuadere,  tenure, 

he    wished,      we     pleased,      you    saw,      they    were    worth. 
voUre,  piacere,  vedtre,  valere. 

3.  —  I    fell    again,     thou    pleasedst,     he    was    subject,     we 
ricad&re,  compiac6re,  soggiacere,  ri- 

learned,     they  sustained. I  prevailed,     thou  maintainedsf, 

sap6re,  sosten6re.  prevaUre,  mantenere, 

he    was    silent    again,      we    declined,      you    foresaw,     they 
ritacere,  decdddre,  antivedere,  ri- 

wished    again. 1    condoled,     thou    possessedst,    he    ab- 

volere.  condoUre,  possedere,  aste- 

stained,        we      provided,       you         hurt,         they        super- 
were,  provvederej  disvaUrej  soprasse- 

seded.        4.  —  I   will   grieve,     thou    wilt   seem,    he    will  be 
dire.  dolere,  par6re,  pote- 

able,     we    will    remain,      you    will    know,     they    will    hold. 
re,  rimanire,  sap6re,        .  tenere. 

III.     1.  —  I    may   entertain,     thou  mayest  lose  strength,     he 
trattendre,  invalere,  raw- 

may    amend,      we    may    displease,     you    may    reside,    they 
vedere,  dispiacdre,  riseddre,  con- 

may  contain.        2.  —  I   might   foresee,    thou  mightest  please 
tenere.  antivedere,  ripiace- 

again,     he  might  see  again,     we  might  preside,     you    might 
re,  rivedere,  presedere,  appar- 

belong,      they    might    hate. IV.     1.  —  I    should    grieve 

tenure,  malvedere.  ridoU- 

again,      thou    wouldst    come    to    know,      he    would     attain, 
re,  risapere,  attendre, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  JJ73 

we  would   be   sensible  of,    you   would   provide,  they  would 

divedere,                            _    provveddre,  rav- 

amend.  -. V.  —  Know    thou,     let    him    seem,  let    us    see, 

vedere.                      sapere,                              par6ret  vedtre, 

please   ye,    let    them    be    able. 
piace're,  potdre. 


Variation  of  the  Irregular  Verbs  in  ere  (short)* 

There  are  about  four  hundred  verbs  in  ere  (short), 
that  are  irregular  ;  but,  as  their  irregularity,  generally, 
depends  on  the  letters  which  precede  that  termination, 
they  may  be  reduced  to  the  following  forty-one;  viz. 

Verbs  ending  in 


$re,  preceded  by  a  vowel 

;  as,  ^T-AERE, 

to  draw.      (Class  4th.*) 

btre, 

"      ttSSOrBERE, 

to  absorb. 

(2d.) 

c$re,   preceded  by  <{  ^  j 
[r; 

"      CWOCERE, 
"      fORCERE, 

to  cook.             >  /<1U  v 
to  allege.           ^4th'> 
to  conquer.        >  ,^  ,1  \ 
to  twist.             5 

Cd; 

"      inVA.DEREt 

to  invade. 

e; 

ts      /EDERE, 

to  offend. 

"     TIDERE, 

to  laugh. 

6  ; 

tl      rODERE, 

to  gnaw. 

•(1st.) 

U  ' 

;      a//UDERE, 

to  allude. 

dere,  preceded  by  <j  ^. 

'      ^RDERE, 
*      GCCENDERE, 

to  burn, 
to  kindle. 

in; 

c      5CINDERE, 

to  cut  asunder. 

(3d.) 

on; 

'      mjpONDERE, 

to  answer. 

(5th.) 

iu; 

{      cftlUDERE, 

to  shut. 

(1st.) 

it; 

'      C/^IEDERE, 

to  ask. 

(5th.) 

>; 

4      COttCEDERE, 

to  grant. 

(3d.) 

&• 

'!,  fc™™; 

to  direct.            7  /u,  x 
to  read.              \  (4th>> 

gere,  preceded  by  <  ™£  , 

tl      VOL.GERE, 

"      SjOARGERE, 
"-      WIERGERE, 

to  turn.               >(2d) 
to  arrive.            }  v 
to  spread.           >  (lgt  } 
to  dive.              5 

or; 

"     JOORGERE, 

to  offer. 

(2d.) 

I4ff3 

«      ^njGGERE, 

to  destroy. 

(4th.) 

*  For  the  convenience  of  learners,  and  the  purpose  of  rendering  more  simple  the 
variation  of  these  verbs,  they  have  been  arranged  .in  classes.  To  facilitate  rewt- 
ence,  we  here  indicate  the  class  in  which  they  will  be  found. 


274 


ANALOGY. 


gliere, 

as, 

COGLTERE, 

to  gather. 

-j 

gnere, 
guere, 

M 

£S»O*"M, 

to  extinguish, 
to  distinguish. 

K2d.) 

/ere, 

« 

SVf/LERE, 

to  root  up. 

j 

mere,  preceded  by  < 

f<? 

>w; 

cj 
it 

OSSUMERE, 

to  express, 
to  assume. 

(3d.) 
(2d.) 

nere, 

tt 

BONERS, 

to  put. 

(5th.) 

reret 

it 

COrRERE, 

to  run. 

(1st.) 

1 

f*« 

it 

5CWOTERE, 

to  shake. 

^ 

tere,  preceded  by  •< 

1:4; 
|:-H 

tt 

dl.SCUTERE, 

to  discuss, 
to  return. 

(1st) 

1 

l«i 

it 

conne'xTERE, 

to  connect. 

(3d.) 

I 

r*; 

n 

SC/'IVERE, 

to  write. 

(4th.) 

vere,  preceded  by   < 

to 

it 

m«OVERE, 

to  move. 

(3d.) 

\ 

I*; 

ti 

VOL  VERE, 

to  turn. 

These  verbs  are  chiefly  irregular  in  the  perfect  of  the 
indicative,  which  ends  in  si  or  ssi ;  and  in  the  past 
participle,  which  ends  in  so  or  sso,  in  to  or  tto,  or  in  sto. 
We  shall,  therefore,  first  classify  them  according  .to  the 
termination  of  their  perfect  and  participle,  and  then  we 
shall  vary  one  of  each  class,  and  such  of  the  same  class 
,as  may  be  otherwise  irregular,  and  note,  by  way  of  ex- 
ceptions, those  verbs  which  depart  in  any  respect  from 
their  paradigm. 

[The  letters-  a,  e,  ae,  between  parentheses,  prefixed  to  the  following  verbs,  denote 
the  auxiliary  with  which  they  are  varied:  — (a),  avere;  (e),  essere}  (ae),  either 
avere  or  essere.] 

FIRST    CLASS. 


Infinitive. 
A  -dere, 
6  -dere, 
i  -dere, 
6  -dere, 
h  -dere, 
-dere 


Perfect.  Participle. 


Infinitive. 


iu  -dere, 
dr  -gere, 
er  -gere, 
-rere, 
r  -tere, 


'a)  ZE-DERE, 

(a)  ri-DERE, 

(a)  ro-DERE, 

(a)  a7Zu-DERE, 

7      -u-c/c,     i  t  i    (ae)  (IR-DERE,  U./-0*, 

en -dere,    \  ' '  ~Si' ' '  "so'  ' '     '^  (a)    accEJV-DERE,   acce-si,     occ^-so. 

(a)    C/JIU-DERE,      chiu-si,     chiu-so. 
(a)    S/7AR-GERE,      spdr-si, 
(ae)  ???ER-GERE; 
(ae)  cor-RERE, 


Perfect. 

invd-si, 

le-si, 

ri-si, 

ro-si, 

allu-si, 

ar-si, 


Participle. 

invd-so. 

16-so. 

ri-so. 

ro-so. 

allu-so. 

dr-so. 


cor -si, 
river-si , 


spar-so, 
mer-so. 
cor-so. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


275 


SECOND    CLASS. 

Infinitive. 

Perfect.  Participle.                   Infinitive. 

Perfect.        Participle. 

-bere, 

"(ae)  assor-BERE, 

assor-si,   assdr-To. 

n  -cere,. 

(a)   WIN-CERE, 

vin-si,       vin-To. 

r  -cere, 

(a)     £6>R-CERE, 

tor-si,       tor-TO. 

-gere, 

(a)     t'OL-GERE, 

vol-si,       vol-To. 

n  -geret 
or-gere, 
-gliere, 

-.  .  -51,  .  .-to-,  .  .  as,< 

(e)    gmN-GERE, 
(a)    ^OR-GERE, 
(a)     CO-GLIERE, 

giun-si,    giun-To, 
por-si,      por-To. 
col-  si,       edZ-To. 

-gnere, 

(a)     S/?d-GNERE, 

spen-si,     spen-io. 

-guere, 

(ae)  rfzs/m-GUER] 

v,,distin-&i,  distin-TO. 

;  -lere, 

(a)     Sud/-L.ERE. 

sv6l-si,     svel-To. 

'i>  -mere, 

(a)    ttSStJ-MERE, 

assun-si,  assun-TQ. 

I   -vere, 

^)     WL-VERB, 

vol-si,       vol-TO. 

THIRD    CLASS. 

ce  -dere,  ~\ 

f  (a)  COttCE-DERE, 

conce-ssi,  conc^-sso. 

\n-dere, 

1   (a)  SCIN-DERE, 

sci-ssi,      sc^-sso. 

\    -mere,  \ 

1  (a)  esjori-MERE, 

espre-ssi,  espresso. 

d  -tere, 

>  .  .  -ssi,  .  .  -sso',  .  .  as,-(  (a)  SCMO-TERE, 

sco-ssi,     scd-sso. 

u  -tere, 

1    (a)  ^Z5CU-TERE, 

discu-ssi,  discu-sso. 

t    -tere, 

1  (a)  conne'T-TERE 

,  conne-ssi,conne-sso. 

6  -vere,  J 

|^(a)  7HWO-VERE, 

mo-ssi,     md-sso. 

FOURTH    CLASS. 

d    -cere,']                                   ((a)  CWO-CERE, 

cd-ssr,       ed-TTo. 

u   -cere,  \ 

(a)  addu-CERE, 

addu-ssi,  addo-TTo. 

i    .geteA 
g   -gere,  J>  .  .-MI,  .  .-tto  ;  .  .  as,« 
ug-gtre,  I 

(a)  Z^G-GERE, 

(a)  distrUG-GER] 

dire"  -ssi,   dire1  -TTO. 
le-ssi,        16-TTO. 
:,  distru-ssi,distru-wo. 

*    -vere, 

(A)  seri-vERE, 

scri-ssi,    scri-TTo. 

-ere,  ^ 

L(a)^-ERE, 

trd-BSi,     trd-TTO. 

FIFTH    CLASS. 

on  -dere, 

}f(a)  m^ON'-DERE 

,   nspo-si,    rispo-sTO. 

ie  -dere, 

.  .  -st,  .  .  -sto;  .  .  asX  (a)  C^IE-DERE, 

chie-si,     chie-STO. 

-nere, 

^(a)^?0-NERE, 

po-si,       pd-STO. 

276  ANALOGY. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Invadere. 

(Paradigm    of  the    First    Class  of  the  verbs   in 
ere  (short).) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

|to  invade.  {]  invd-so,  |invaded. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

3.__  Perfect. 


1st  p.  invd-sit       II  invaded  ; 
2d  p.  invaddsti,    thou  invadest ; 
3d  p.  invd-SE}      |he  invaded  ; 


invade  ste, 


we  invaded ; 
you  invaded ; 
i  they  invaded. 


The  verbs  evadere,  '  to  evade  '; —  ledere,  '  to  offend  '; 
—  ridere,  '  to  laugh  ' ;  dividere,  c  to  divide  '  ;  conqui- 
dere,  c  to  conquer  '  ;  int  rider  e,  '  to  temper  ' ;  uccidere, 
c  to  kill';  —  rodere,  cto  gnaw'; — alludere,  '  to  allude'; 
deludere,  '  to  delude  ' ;  iUudere,  c  to  illude  ' ;  —  ardere, 
c  to  burn  '  ;  mordere,  '  to  bite  ' ;  —  accendere,  c  to  kin- 
dle ';  incendere,  '  to  set  on  fire  ';  offendere,  ;  to  offend  '; 
scendere,  '  to  descend  '  ;  spenders,  '  to  spend  ' ;  tendere, 
6  to  stretch  ' ;  mlipendere,  <  to  vilify  ' ;  —  chitidere,  c  to 
shut '  ;  —  spargere,  '  to  spread'  ;  —  mergere,  '  to  sink'; 
tergere,  '  to  wipe  ' ;  aspergere,  c  to  sprinkle  ';  —  correre, 
6  to  run  ' ;  —  rivertere,  c  to  turn  ' ;  and  their  compounds, 
have  the  same  irregularities. 

The  compounds  of  correre,  —  occorrere, { to  occur ' ;  soccorrere,  <  to 
succour ' ;  in  ihe  future  and  the  conditional  are  often  contracted  ;  and 
make  accorra, i  it  will  occur ' ;  soccorrebbe,  l  he  would  succour.' 

Difendere, '  to  defend  ' ;  pdrdere,  t  to  lose  ' ;  and  rendere, f  to  ren- 
der,' are  both  regular  and  irregular;  and  make  in  the  perfect,  difendei 
or  difesi,  '  I  defended  ' ;  and  in  the  participle,  difenduto  or  difeso, 
1  defended  ' ;  &c. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  277 

Fendere,  <  to  cleave ' ;  is  both  regular  and  irregular ;  and  makes 
in  the  perfect,  fendei  or  fessi,  l  I  cleaved ' ;  and  in  the  participle, 
fenduto  and  /esso, «  cleaved.' 

Prdnderc,  *  to  take  ' ;  and  rddere, '  to  shave  ' ;  are  both  regular  and 
irregular  in  the  perfect ;  but  in  the  participle  are  irregular  only,  and 
make  prdso, '  taken  ' ;  and  r^so, '  shaven.' 


The  verbs pendere,  'to  hang' ;  spUndere,  fito  glitter'; 
venders,  '  to  sell';  stridere*  c  to  shriek';  and  their 
compounds,  are  regular,  and  are  varied  like  tessere. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Assorbere. 

(Paradigm   of  the    Second    Class    of  the   verbs    in 
ere  (short).) 


1.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

|to  absorb.  ||  assor-xo,  [absorbed. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

3.  — -Perfect. 


1st  p.  assor-sij 
2d  p.  assorbe'stij 
3d  p.  assdr-sE, 


I  absorbed ;          II  assorbdmrno, 
thou  absorbedst;     assor&e'ste, 
he  absorbed  ;        ||  assor-sERO, 


we  absorbed ; 
you  absorbed ; 
they  absorbed. 


Verbs  ending  in  gliere,  gnere,  and  ttre,  besides  the  above,  have  alao 
other  irregularities,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  following  Paradigms  : 


*  Alfonso  Varano  has  written  strlse,  «  he  shrieked  » }  and  strisero,  l  they  shriektd.' 

24 


278 


ANALOGY. 


Cogliere. 
(Paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  gliere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 


COGLIERE,    or     ito  gather. 
[CORRE  (cor),' 


HCOLTO, 


[gathered. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


] .  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  coglio,  or 
[COL.GO, 
2d  p.  cogli, 
3d  p.  coglie, 


1st  p.  COL.SI    (co- 
[Shei), 

2d  p.  cogJi&sti, 
3d  p.  COLSE    (co- 
[glie,cogliette), 


[    gather  or  am 
[gathering  ; 
thou  gatherest ; 
he  gathers ; 


cogllamo, 
cogliete, 


y  or  COL,- 
[GONO, 


3.  —  Perfect. 


T  gathered  ; 

thou  gatheredst ; 
he  gathered  ; 


cogliemmo, 

coglitste", 
COLSERO  (coglie- 
[rono,  cogliette- 


we  gather  j 

you  gather ; 
they  gather. 


\ve  gathered  ; 

you  gathered ; 
they  gathered. 


4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  c0GLiEROj  or  C0RRO,  |  I  shall  or  will  gather. 

III.   CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  10  coglia, 

[orCOLGA, 

2d  p.  tu  cdglia, 
[or  COLGA  (cogli 
[or  colghi), 
3d  p.  egli  coglia, 

PorCOLGA. 

that  I  gather  or\ 
[may  gather  ; 
that  thou  gather;! 

that  he  gather  ; 

cogliamo, 
coglidte, 

\cogliano,  or  COL,- 
[GANG, 


| that  we  gather; 

i 

that  you  gather ; 


that  they  gather. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


279 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

\  •  • ,__  x 

J.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  COGLIEREI,  or  coRREi  (?o-  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  gather; 
[glieria,  or  conia),  |  [or  might  gather. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1st  p.    ... 

2d  p.  cogli  (co9) 
[tu, 
3d  p.  cogliat'»r 
[c^JLGA  egli, 

gather  thou  ; 
let  him  gather  ; 

coglldmo  noij     \ 
cogliete  voi, 

cogliano,  or  COL,- 
[GANO  tglino, 


let  us  gather ; 
gather  ye ; 

let* them  gather. 


Spegnere. 
(Paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  gnere.) 

PARTICIPLE. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 


[SINCERE, 


to  extinguish. 


(extinguished. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  sptgno,  01 


2d  p.  spegniy 
3d  p,  spegne, 


I  extinguish  or 
[am  extinguish- 

[i«g; 

thou  extmguisn- 

[est; 

he  extinguishes; 


i  spegrrtdmo, 
spegnete, 


nonoy     or 


we  extinguish  ; 

you  extinguish  ; 
they  extinguish. 


1st  p. 


3.  _  Perfect. 

|  I  extinguished. 


280 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  w  spegna, 
[or  sp^NGA, 

8d  p.  tu  spegna, 
[or    spe$GA 
[(spegni), 
Sd  p.  egli  spegna, 

that  I  extinguish,' 
[or  may  extin- 
[guish  ; 
that   thou   extin- 
guish ; 

that    he     extin- 
[guish  ; 

spegnldmo, 
spegnidte, 
spegnano     or 

that    we    extin- 
[guish  ; 

that    you  extin- 
guish; 

that   they  extin- 
guish. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.    ... 

spegnlamo  noit 

2d  p.  spegni  tu, 
8d  p.  spegna,  or 
[sjpeKGA  egli, 

extinguish  thou  ; 
let     him     extin- 
guish ; 

spegnete  vdi, 
spegnano,    or 

[5-/)^NGANO 

[eglino, 

let  us  extinguish  j 
extinguish  ye  ; 
let    them   extin- 
guish. 


Svellere. 
(Paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  lere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

,  [to  root  up.  ||  sve/xo,  |rooted  up. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  svello,  or 
[svelco, 
2d  p.  svtlli, 
8d  p.  svelle, 


I  root  up  ; 

thou  rootest  up  ; 
he  roots  up  ; 


svellidmo, 

svelttte, 

svellono,  or  svel- 
[GONO, 


we  root  up  ; 

you  root  up ; 
they  root  up. 


1st  p. 


3,  —  Perfect. 

I  I  rooted  up. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


281 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


**\                       1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  w  svella, 
[or  svelGA, 
2d  p.  tu  svella,  or 

that  I  root  up,  or 
[may  root  up  ; 
that  thou  root  up; 

svellidmo, 
svellidtet 

that  we  root  up  ; 
that  you  root  up  ; 

[or  svelghi), 
3d  p.  e'gli  svellay 
[or  svelGA, 

that  he  root  up  ; 

svellano,  or  svel- 
[GANO, 

that  they  root  up. 

1st  p  

V.   IMPE 

RATIVE. 

svellidmo  noiy 
svellete  voi, 
svellano,  or  svel- 
[GANO  eglino, 

let  us  root  up  ; 
root  ye  up  ; 
let  them  root  up. 

2d  p.  svelli  tu, 
3d  p.  svella,  or 
[sue/GA  eg/i, 

root  up  thou  ; 
let  him  root  up  ; 

The  compounds  of  assorbere,  '  to  absorb  ' ;  cogliere, 
6  to  gather  ' ;  and  the  verbs  vincere,  '  to  conquer  '  ;  — 
torcere,  c  to  twist '  ; —  volgere,  '  to  turn  ' ;  rifulgere, 
c  to  shine  ' ;  —  giungere,  '  to  arrive  '  ;  mungere,  6  to 
milk '  ;  pungere,  fi  to  prick  ' ;  ungere,  c  to  anoint ' ;  — 
pidngere,  '  to  weep  ' ;  frangere,  £  to  break  ' ;' —  cingere, 
6  to  gird  '  ;  finger e,  £  to  fain'  5  pingere,  '  to  paint'; 
spingere,  '  to  push  '  ;  tingere,  '  to  tinge  ' ;  — porgere, 
6  to  offer  '  ;  accorgere,  { to  perceive  ' ;  sorgere,  {  to  rise  ' ; 
— scegliere,  'to  choose';  sciogliere,  £to  untie';  togliere, 
(  to  take  away  ' ;  —  distinguere,  ;  to  distinguish  ' ;  estin- 
guere,  '  to  extinguish  ' ;  —  avellere,  •'  to  pull  by  force  ' ; 
divellere,  c  to  pluck  up  ' ;  —  assumere,  '  to  assume  ' ;  — 
volvere,  £  to  turn ' ;  and  their  compounds,  have  the  same 
irregularities. 

Rifulgere  has  no  participle. 

Sorgere  has  been  by  poets  changed  into  surgere,  and  so  throughout 
its  inflexions  :  —  sursi, c  I  rose ' ;  surto, '  risen  ' ;  &c. 

Strmgere,  l  to  bind ' ;  and  its  compounds,  as  astringere,  t  to  con- 
strain ' ;  &c.,  in  the  participle  makes  strilio^  *  bound  ' ;  astrettoy '  con^ 
strained  '  ;  &c. 

24* 


282  ANALOGY. 

Espellere, f  to  expel ' ;  impellere,  '  to  impel ' ;  repellere, l  to  repel ' ; 
in  the  perfect  make  espulsi,  '  I  expelled  ' ;  impulsi,  t  I  impelled ' ; 
repulsi,  l  I  repelled  ' ;  and  in  the  participle,  espulso,  l  expelled ' ; 
impulso,  *  impelled  ' ;  repulso,  *  repelled.' 

Involvere,  '  to  involve  ' ;  and  devolvere, '  to  devolve  ' ;  in  the  parti- 
ciple make  involuto,  l  involved  ' ;  devoluto, l  devolved.' 

Presumere, l  to  presume  ' ;  and  riassitmere, ( to  re-assume  '  5  assol- 
vere,  *  to  absolve  ' ;  dissolvere,  '  to  dissolve  ' ;  and  riaolvere,  *  to  re- 
solve ' ;  in  the  perfect  are  both  regular  and  irregular ;  and  make 
presumti  or  presunsi, 1 1  presumed  ';  assolvdi  or  assolsi,  1 1  absolved  '; 
&c. 

Assolvere,  diss6lvere,  and  risolvere  in  the  participle  make,  assoluto 
1  absolved  ' ;  dissoluto*  *  dissolved  '  \  risoluto,  *  resolved/ 


The  verb  solvere,  { to  untie/  '  to  solve,'  is  regular 
and  is  varied  like  tessere. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Concedere. 

(Paradigm  of  the    Third    Class   of  the   verbs    in 
ere  (short).) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

[to  grant.  ||  conc6- sso,  [granted. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  concd-ssi, 
2d  p.  concedestij 
3d  p. 


I  granted ; 
thou  grantedst; 
he  granted ; 


concedemmO) 
concedeste, 


we  granted  ; 
you  granted ; 
they  granted. 


The  verbs  scindere,  '  to  cut  asunder  '  ;  —  esprimere, 
4  to  express  ' ;  —  scuotere,  c  to  shake  ' ;  percudtere,  i  to 

*  For  this  participle  we,  generally,  substitute  discidlto,  a  corresponding  form  of  the 
verb  discitigliere,  '  to  dissolve7 ;  to  distinguish  it  from  the  word  dissoluto,  'dissolute.* 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  283 

strike  ' ;  —  discutere,  '  to  discuss ';  concutere,  *  to  shake ' ; 
—  connettere,  '  to  connect '  ;  —  muovere,  '  to  move  ' ; 
and  their  compounds  have  the  same  irregularities. 

Redimere, ( to  redeem ' ;  in  the  perfect  makes  redtnsi, 1 1  redeemed ' ; 
and  in  the  participle)  redento,  '  redeemed.* 

Me'ttere,  '  to  put ' ;  and  its  compounds  ammettere, t  to  admit ' ;  com- 
mette.re, '  to  commit ' ;  &c.,  in  the  perfect  make  misi,  *  I  put J  j  ammi- 
sit '  I  admitted ' ;  &c. 

Conci&ere, '  to  grant '  >.  interce'dere, '  to  intercede7 ;  precedere,  f  to 
precede ' ;  and  succederej l  to  succeed/  are  both  regular  and  irregular, 
and  make,  in  the  perfect,  concdssi  or  conced£i,  *  I  granted ';  and  in  the 
participle,  concesso  or  conceduto, '  granted  ' ;  &c. 

Conn6ttere,  signifying  c  to  reason/  is  regular,  and  makes,  in  jthe 
perfect,  connettdi,  « I  reasoned  ';  and  in  the  participle,  connettuto, 
f  reasoned.' 


The  verbs  cedere,  '  to  yield  ' ;  accedere,  c  to  accede '; 
eccedere,  fi  to  exceed  ' ;  procedere*  '  to  proceed  ' ;  — 
prescindere,  '  to  prescind  ' ;  —  premere,  c  to  press  ' ; 
spremere,  i  to  squeeze  ' ;  —  riflettere,  '  to  reflect ' ;  and 
battere,  '  to  beat ' ;  and  its  compounds,  are  regular,  and 
are  varied  like  tessere. 

Riflettere,  when  applied  to  *  light/  '  sound/  &c.,  in  the  participle 
makes  riflesso,  '  reflected.' 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Cuocere. 

(Paradigm  of  the  Fourth   Class  of  the  verbs  ending  in 
ere  (short).) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

CWO-CERE,  |to  cook.  ||  cd-Txo,  |cooked. 


*  Of  this  verb,  Castiglione  hai  used  proctssc,  <  he  proceeded.1 


284 


ANALOGY. 


II.  INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

3.  —  Perfect. 


Istp.  c<5-ssi, 
2d  p.  cocesti, 
3d  p.  CO-SSE, 


[  cooked  ;  1 1  cocemmo, 

thou  cookedst ;       cocdste, 
he  cooked  ;          ||  CO-SSERO, 


we  cooked ; 
you  cooked ; 
they  cooked. 


Adducere. 
(Paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  ucere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

or  [to  allege. 


PARTICIPLE. 

[alleged. 


1st  p. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


3.  —  Perfect. 
1st  p.  addussij         \  I  alleged. 

4.  —  Future. 


[by  contraction  I  I  shall  or  will  allege. 
[for  adducero],  \ 


1st  p. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


1 .  —  Present. 


(addurria)   [by 


[contraction  for  adducerei  (ad- 
[duceria)], 


I  should,  would,  or  could  allege ;  or 
[might  allege. 


Rilucere,  *  to  shine  ' ;  and  tralucerey  f  to  shine  through  ' ;  are  never 
contracted  in  the  infinitive,  and  make,  in  the  future,  rUucerci, '  it  will 
shine '  ;  tralucera,  *  it  will  shine  through ' ;  and  in  the  conditional 
rilucerebbey  l  it  would  shine J ;  &c. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  285 

Distruggere. 

I.   INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

,  orjto  destroy.  \\distruTTO,  [destroyed. 

II.   INDICATIVE. 

3.  —  Perfect. 
1st  p.  distr&asi,       \  I  destroyed. 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  distrvGGERo,  or  distruRRo,  \  I  shall  or  will  destroy, 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.—  Present. 

1st  p.  disfruGGEREi,  or  distruR-  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  destroy ; 
[REI  (distruggeria  or  distrurria),  |  [or  might  destroy .. 


StHtggere,  e  to  melt ' ;  is  never  contracted  in  the  infinitive,  and 
makes,  in  the  future,  only  struggerd,  *  I  will  melt ' ;  and  in  the  con- 
ditional, struggerei,  *  I  should  melt.' 


Trdere* 

I.   INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 


TraERE,  or  trdn- 
[RE, 

to  draw. 

\\trdTiot 

1  drawn. 

*  Fr&m  the  Latin  trahere,  converted  also  by  the   Italians  into  trdggert, 
become  obsolete,  but  of  which  it  retains  many  of  the  forms. 


286 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st 

2d 
3d 

p.  trdGGO, 

p.  trdi, 
p.  trde   (trag- 
[ge), 

I  draw  ; 

thou  drawest  ; 
he  draws  ; 

tr  alamo  j  or  trao- 
[GIAMO. 
i  traete, 
trdoGOso    (tran- 
[no), 

we  draw  > 

you  draw  ; 
thjy  draw. 

3.  —  Perfect  . 

1st  p.  frassi, 

|  I  drew. 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p.  traiiRo  [by  contraction  for  I  I  shall  or  will  draw. 
[traerd],  \ 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  to  trace  A., 


2dtp.  tu 


3d  p.  egli    trdo- 
[GA, 


that  I  draw  or 
[may  draw  ; 
that  thou  draw  ; 

that  he  draw  ; 


traidmo,  or  trao- 

[GIAMO, 

tra'idte  or   trao- 

[GIATE, 


that  we  draw ; 
that  you  draw ; 
that  they  draw. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  fraRREi  (trarria)  [by  contrac-j  I  should,  would,  or  could  draw  ;  or 
[lion  for  traerei  (traeria)],!  [might  draw. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p  

tratdmo  or  trctG- 

let  us  draw  j 

2d  p.  trdi  tuy 
3d  p.  trdGGA. 
[t§H, 

draw  thou  ; 
let  him  draw  ; 

[GIAMO. 
traete, 
iracGANO, 

draw  ye  ; 
let  them  draw. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS/  287 

The  compounds  of  cuocere,  '  to  cook  ' ;  traere,  *  to 
draw  ' ;  and  the  verbs  inducere,  '  to  induce  ' ;  conducere, 
Mo   conduct';  deducere,   { to   deduct ';  producers,  'to 
produce  ';  riducere,  '  to    educe  '  ;  seducere,  '  to  seduce  '; 
traducere,  '  to  translate  '  ;  —  dirigere,  '  to  direct ' ;  m* 
gere,*  6  to  erect ' ;  negllgere,  '  to  neglect ' ;  prediligere, 
'  to   have    a   predilection    for  ' ;  —  Uggere,   '  to  read  ' ; 
reggere,    c  to   support';   proteggere,   'to   protect'; 
striiggere,  '  to  melt ' ;  —  scrivere,  l  to  write  ' ;  and^li 
compounds,  have  the  same  irregularities.        ^^Xv^* 

jpv*'     or  THE 

Figgere,\  l  to  fix ' ;  infiggere,  Mo  infix  ' ; 


thrust  into  ' 

*  to  fry  ' ;  ajftigvere,  «  to  afflict ' ;  infliggere, '  to  inflict '  ;  end   in 
and  make  confliTTO,  <•  thrust  into  ' ;  friTro, '  fried  } ;  if^mro, f  inflict- 
ed ' ;  &c. 

Rilucere, l  to  shine  ' ;  tralucere,  l  to  shine  through  ' ;  are  both  regu- 
lar and  irregular,  and  make  rilucei  or  rilussi, 1 1  shone  ' ;  trained  or 
tralusse, t  it  shone  through  '  j  but  they  have  no  participle. 

Esigere,  « to  exact  * ;  in  the  perfect  is  both  regular  and  irregular, 
and  makes  e^gdi  or  csdssi,  *  1  exacted  ' ;  arid  in  the  participle  makes 
esdtto,  '  exacted.' 

Vivere, l  to  live  ';  in  the  participle  makes  vivuto  or  tnsstifo, '  lived  J; 
and  in  the  future  and  conditional,  is  often  contracted  into  tuun), '  I 
will  live  ';  and  vivrei  (vivria),  *  I  would  live.' 


*  Erigere  is  often  by  poet?  contracted  into  trgere,  but  then  bas  no  participle. 
The  4rto  raentioAed  by  Mastrofini,  notwithstanding  its  derivation  from  erttto,  parti- 
ciple of  er'igerC)  is  used  in  Italian  as  a»  adjective,  but  not  as  a  participle. 

t  Figgcre,&nd  some  of  its  compounds,  as  affiggere,  &c.,  are  sometimes  spelt  with 
one  ff  only :  — figere,  affigere  j  and  then  make,  in  the  jper/ec£,/isi,  affisi  j  and  in  the 
participle,  fiso,  qffiso  ;  &c. 


288 


ANALOGY. 


Variation  of  the  Verl  Rispondere. 

(Paradigm    of  the   Fifth   Class  of  the   verbs   in 
ere  (short).) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

,      jto  answer. 


PARTICIPLE. 

|j  rispo-sTO,  |answered. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  mp-6si, 
2d  p.  rispondesti, 
3d  p.  ri 


I  answered  ; 


I  rispondemmO) 


thou  answeredst;i   rispondeste, 
he  answered;       ||  rtsp-6s£RO, 


we  answered ; 
you  answered  ; 
they  answered. 


Chiedere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

,  |to  ask. 


PARTICIPLE. 


II.   INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  chiedo 

I  ask  or  am  ask- 

chiediamo(chieg- 

we  ask  ; 

[(chieggio), 

[ing; 

[gidmo,  chiede- 

[mo), 

2d  p.  chiedi, 

thou  askest; 

chiede'te, 

you  ask  ; 

3d  p.  chiedej 

he  asks  ; 

chiedono  (chidg- 

they  ask. 

[giono,  chieg- 

[gono), 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  chicsi, 

I  asked. 

IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


289 


Singular. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


3. —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.    io   chieda 
[(chiezgia, 

that    I    ask,     or 
[may  ask  ; 

chiedidmo  (chieg- 
[gidmo), 

that  we  ask  ; 

2d  p.   tu  chirda 
[(chiecrgia, 
[chidgga, 
[chie'gghi),. 
3d  p.  egli  r.hieda 
[(chitggia, 
[chiegga), 

that  thou  ask  ; 
that  he  ask  ; 

chiedidte  (chieg- 
[gidte), 

chiedano  (chieg- 
[gianOj  chieg- 
[gano), 

that  you  ask  5 
that  they  ask. 

1st  p  

V.    IMP! 

•  RATIVE. 

chiedidmo  noi, 
chiedete  voi, 
chiedano  (chieg- 
[gano)  6glino: 

let  us  ask  ; 
ask  ye  ; 
let  them  ask. 

2d  p.  chiedi  tu, 
3d  p.  chieda 
(.(chiegga)  egli, 

ask  thou  ; 
let  him  ask  ; 

Ponere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

PONERE,  or^ORRE,|to  put. 


j]  jposxo, 


PARTICIPLE. 
|PUt. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.—  Present. 

1st  p.  ponoo 
J(pono), 
2d  p.  pom, 
3d  p.  pone  }      . 

I  put; 

thou  puttest  ; 
he  puts  ; 

ponidmoy             we  put  ; 

pone"te,                you  put  ; 
ponoosoy              they  put. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

1st  p.  JEWS  i,                |  I  put. 

i 

4.  —  Future. 

1st  p. 


O  [by  contraction  for   1  I  shall  or  will  put. 
Iponerd],   \  -^ 

25 


290 


ANALOGY. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


Singular, 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  w  ponGA 
[(pogna), 

that  I  put  ; 

ponidmo, 

2d  p.  tU  pOHGA. 

that  thou  put  j 

ponidte, 

3d  p.  egli  pone  A 

that  he  put  ; 

pOMGANO, 

[(pogna), 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  J90RREI  (porria)  [bycontrac- 
[tion  for  ponerei  (poneria), 


that  we  put ; 
that  you  put ; 
that  they  put. 


I  should,  would,  or  could  put;  or 
[might  put. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


2d  p.  poni  tu, 
3d  p.ponoA.  tgli, 

put  thou  ; 
let  him  put  j 

\\ponidmo  noi, 
\\pon6te  voi, 


let  us  put ; 

put  ye  ; 

let  them  put. 


The  verbs  corrispondere,  c  to  correspond  '  ;  ascondere, 
c  to  conceal  '  ;  nascondere,  '  to  hide  '  ;  —  richiedere,  *  to 
request  '  ;  —  and  all  the  compounds  of  ponere,  '  to  put  '  ; 
have  the  same  irregularities. 

Jlscdndere  and  nascdndere,  in  the  participle,  end  also  in  so,  making 
j  l  concealed'  ;  and  nascoso,  *  hidden.' 


Fondere,  l  to  melt,'  and  its  compounds  confondere,  l  to  confound  '  ; 
&c.  in  the  perfect  make  fusi,  1  1  melted  '  ;  con/usi,  *  I  confounded  '  ; 
&c.;  and  in  the  participle,  fu  so,  l  melted  '  ;  confirso,  *  confounded  '  ;  &c. 

Fondere  is  also  regular,  making  also,  in  ihe  perfect,  fondei,  and 
in  participle,  fonduto. 


Tondere,*  c  to  shear ' ;  and  scernere,  c  to  distinguish '  ;f 
discernere,  c  to  discern  ' ;  concernere,  '  to  concern  ' ;  are 
regular,  and  varied  like  tessere. 

*  The  participle  t6so,  erroneously  attributed  to  ttindere,  is  a  contraction  oftosdto, 
participle  of  the  verb  tosdre,  *  to  shear.' 

t  Manzoni  has  written  scerse,  'she  distinguished'  ;  and  scerserOj « they  distin- 
guished.' 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


291 


Variation  of  other  Irregular   Verbs  in  ere  (short),  not 
included  in  any  of  the  preceding  classes. 

To  the   above   five   classes   of  verbs   in  ere  (short) 
must  be  added  the  verbs, 


conoscere,  to  know ; 
crescere,  to  grow ; 
nuocere,  to  hurt ; 


nascere, 
rompere, 


to  be  born  ; 
to  break ; 


which,  in  the  perfect,  end  in  bbi,  cqui,  ppi;  and  in  the 
participle,  in  uto,  to,  tto :  thus, 


Infinitive. 

Perfect. 

Participle. 

COnOSCERE, 

cono'-BBi, 

COH05CI-UTO  J 

CT^SCERE, 

cr^-BBi, 

cresci-tJTo  ; 

ntlo'cERE, 

no-cqui, 

TlOCl'-UTO; 

WffSCERE, 

na-cqui, 

rwi-To; 

rOMPERE, 

rw-ppi, 

ro-TTO. 

Conoscere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Conoscere,          |to  know. 


PARTICIPLE. 

TOj        (known. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  C0WO-BBI 

[(conoscei), 
2d  p.  conosce'sti, 
3d  p.  £<WO-BBE 
[(conosce), 

I  knew  ; 

thou  knewest  ; 
\\e  knew  ; 

conoscdmmo, 
conosceste, 

C0/10-BBERO, 

we  knew; 

you  knew  ; 
they  knew. 


ANALOGY. 


The  compounds  of  conoscere,  —  and  the  verb  crescere, 
'to  grow,'  and  its  compounds,  —  have  the  same  irregu- 
larities. 


Nuocere. 
(Varied  with  avere.y 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Nuocere,  |to  hurt.  ||  noci-uxor  jhurt 

»      II.    INDICATIVE. 

SlnguTar.  Plurat 

3.  —  Perfect. 

I  hurt ;  ||  nocemmo,  [we  hurt  ~, 

thouhurtest;          ?i<?ces<e,  [you  hurt ; 

he  hurt;  ||no-cQUERO,         fthey  hurt 


1st  p. 

2d  p.  nocesli, 
3d  p. 


Rinuocere,  c  to  hurt  again, '— and  the  verb  naseere? 
f  to  be  born '  ;  and  its  compound  rinascere,  '  to  be  boro 
again,' — in  the  perfect,  have  the, same  irregularities. 

Ndscere,  and  its  compound  rinascere,  in  the  participle  make  nd-TO> 
'  been  born'  j  rind-To,  *  been  born  again.". 

The  verb pdscere,  'to  feed/  although  it  has  the  same  termination  as 
conoscere,  crdscere,  nascere,  is  regular.  The  verb  mescere,  signity- 
ing  c  to  pour,'  is  regular,  but  signifying  '  to  mix/  in  the  participle^  is 
irregular,  and  makes  misto,  l  mixed/ 


Rompere. 
(Varied  with  awe.) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Rompere,  |to  break.  [j  TO-TTO,  [broken. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


293 


Singular. 


Plural. 


3.—  Perfect. 


1st  p.  rw-ppi 
[(roppi,rompei), 
2d  p.  rompesti, 
3d  p.  rw-ppE 
[(roppe,rompe), 

I  broke  ; 

thou  brokest  ; 
he  broke  ; 

rompenunc 
rompiste, 

fW-PPERO, 

we  broke ; 

you  broke ; 
they  broke. 


The  compounds  of  rompere,  as  corrompere,  '  to  cor- 
rupt ' ;  dirompere,  *  to  break ' ;  &c.,  have  the  same 
irregularities. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Severe. 

Severe,  c  to  drink,'  is  a  regular  verb  ;  but,  as  it  has 
been  by  poets  so  contracted  as  to  give  it  the  appear- 
ance of  an  irregular  one,  we  will  here  give  its  variation. 

Bevere. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Severe)  bere,  \  to  drink. 

GERUND.  PARTICIPLE. 


bevendo  (beendo), [drinking. 


|  bevuto, 


jdrunk. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st 

2d  p.  be'vi  (b6i), 
3d  p.  beve  (bee), 


I  drink ; 
thou  drinkest; 
he  drinks ; 

25* 


I  bevidmo,  |we  drink  ; 

bevete  (beete),      you  drink; 

I  bevono  (beono),  (they  drink. 


294 


ANALOGY, 


2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w  beveva  or  bevta,  \  I  drank. 
Singular. 

3,  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  bevei  or 
fbevetli,  BEVVJ 

[(W&«), 

2d  p.  btvesti, 
3d  p.  6ev£  or  6e- 

[vette,  BEVVE 

[(bebbe), 


I  drank  ; 


thou  drankest; 
he  drank  ; 


PJural. 


bev6mmot 


beveste, 

beverono  or  be- 
[vettero,  EEV- 
[VERO  (bebbe- 
\ro,  bevvono), 


we  drank  ; 


you  drank  ^ 
they  drank. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  (beverdj 
[bevro)  berd, 

2d  p.  (beveiai) 

[beraiy 

3d  p.  (beverd, 
[bevra)  bera, 


I    shaH    or    will 

[drink  : 

thou  wilt  drink ;  ' 

he  will  drink ; 


(beveremo,  be- 


(beverete)  berete, 

(beverdnno)  be- 
[rdnno, 


we  will  drink ; 
you  will  drink } 
they  will  drink. 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  w  beva 

[(bea), 
2d 


tu   beva 


[(bevi}bea,bei), 

3^  p.    egli    beva 

[(bea), 


that  I  drink  or 
[may  drink  ; 
that  thou  drink ; 

that  he  drink ; 


levidmo, 
bevidte, 
bevano  (beano), 


that  we  drink  ; 
that  you  drink ; 
that  they  drink. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w  bevessi  jif  I  drink ; 

[(beessi)J 
2d  p.  tu  bevessiit thou  drinkest ; 

[(beessi), 
3d  p.  bevesse  if  he  drinks  ; 

[(beesse),! 


bevessimo  (bees- 

[sinao), 

beveste  (beeste), 

bevessero  (bees- 
I  [sero,beessono), 


if  we  drink  ; 
if  you  drink ; 
if  they  drink. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


295 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

Singular.  Plaral. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.    (beverei 
[(beveria))  berei 
[(beria), 
2d  p.    (beveresti) 
[btrtsti, 
3d  p.   (bevertbbe 
[(beveria))  be 
[rebbe  (beria), 

I   should,  would, 
[or  could  drink  ; 
[or  might  drink; 
thou     wouldst 
[drink; 
he  would  drink  ; 

(beveremmo)  be- 
[remmo, 

(bevereste)  ber6- 
[ste, 
(beverebbero  (be- 
[veriano,  beveri- 
[e?io))  berebbero 
[(beriano,  beri- 
[eno),     . 

we  would  drink  ; 

you  would  drink  ; 
they  would  drink. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Istp 

2d  p.    btm  (bei)  drink  thou ; 

[fw, 
3d  p.  b6va  (bea)  let  him  drink; 


bevidmo  noi, 
bevete  (beete]  voi, 

bevano     (beano) 
[dglino, 


let  us  drink; 
drink  ye ; 

let  them  drink. 


The  compounds  of  bevere,  as  imbevere,  '  to  imbibe  ' ; 
ribevere,  *  to  drink  again  ' ;  have  the  same  irregularities. 


REMARKS    ON    THE    FOREGOING    VERBS. 

All  verbs  ending  in  ucere,  as  adducere,  '  to  allege  '  ; 
inducere,-  £  to  induce  '  ;  &LC.  in  the  participle,  besides 
changing  cere  into  tto,  change  also  the  u  into  o  ;  and 
make  addotto,  '  alleged  '  ;  indotto,  ;  induced  '  ;  &c. 


Rilucere, 
participle. 


e  to  shine  '  ;  and  tralucere,  «  to  shine  through  '  ;  have  no 


Verbs  ending  in  gliere,  as  cogliere,  6  to  gather  '  ; 
togliere,  '  to  take  away  *;  &c.,  in  the  perfect  and  parti- 
ciple retain  the  Z  of  their  termination  ;  and  make  COLSI, 


296  ANALOGY.  i 

6  I  gathered  ';  coiJo,  '  gathered  ' ;  toLsi,  <  I  took  away  ' ; 
&c. 

All  verbs  ending  in  ndere,  as  accendere,  6  to  kindle  ' ; 
scindere,  '  to  cut  asunder  '  ;  rispondere,  '  to  answer  '^ 
&c.,  in  the  perfect  and  the  participle  lose  the  n  ;  and 
make  accesi,  '  1  kindle ';  acceso,  '  kindled ';.  scim",  '  I 
cut  asunder  ' ;  &c. 

Verhs  ending  in  ngere  may  end  also  in  gnere,  and 
wee  versa;  thus,  giungere  or  giugxere,  '  to  arrive  *£ 
spegwere  or  speygere,  6  to  extinguish  '  ;  &ic.  When 
they  end  in  gnere',  in  the  perfect  and  participle  they 
retain  the  w  of  their  termination  ;  and  make  spexsi, 
6 1  extinguished  ';  spento,  t  extinguished  ' ;  &c. 

The  transposition  of  the  n  in  verbs  in  ngere  ought  not  to  be  made  ex- 
cept in  those  inflexions  in  which  ng  is  followed  by  e  or  i  ;  as,  giungo, 
1  1  arrive,'  giuGxi,  '  thou  arrives! ' ;  gnt&jRe,  '  he  arrives  ' ;  giuGitidmo, 
1  we  arrive  '  ;  giucNdte,  *  you  arrive  ' ;  giiingono,  l  they  arrive  J ;  and 
vice  versd  in  verbs  in  gnere,  it  ought  not  to  be  made  but  in  those  inflex- 
ions in  which  gn  is  followed  by  o  or  a;  as,  S/^NGO,  5 1  extinguish  '; 
sptgni, l  thou  exlinguishest ' ;  &c.,  spexGa,  *  that  I  extinguish7 ;  &c. 


Verbs  ending  in  igere  and  imere,  as  dirigere,  { to  di- 
rect ' ;  esprimere,  '  to  express  ' ;  &c.,  in  the  perfect  and 
participle  change  the  i  into  e  ;  and  make  dirvssi,  '  I 
directed  ' ;  dirvtto,  '  directed  ' ;  esprvssi,  '  I  expelled  '  ; 
e^prE.sso,  c  expressed  ' ;  &c. 

The  verb  redtmere,  c  to  redeem  ' ;  and  verbs  ending 
in  wmere,  as  assumere,  c  to  assume  '  ;  &c.,  in  the  joer- 
fect  and  participle,  change  the  m  of  their  termination 
into  n,  and  make  redexsi>  '  I  redeemed  ' ;  assuxsi,  '  I 
assumed  ' ;  assuxto,  '  assumed  ' ;  &c. 

The  verbs  traere,  l  to  draw  * ;  ponere,  c  to  put,'  and 
their  compounds  ;  and  all  verbs  ending  in  gliere,  ucere, 
uggere  ;  as  cogliere,  '  to  gather  ' ;  adducere,  '  to  allege  ' ; 
distruggere,  6  to  destroy ' ;  are,  in  the  infinitive  con- 
tracted into  trdrre,  porre,  corre,  addurre,  distrurre  ; 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  297 

and  make,  in  the  future,  —  trarrd,  c  I  will  draw'  ;  porro, 
*  I  will  put '  ;  &tc.,  and  in  the  conditional,  —  trarrei,  c  I 
would  draw  ' ;  &c. 

Rilucere, *  to  shine  ' ;  tralucere, l  to  shine  through  ' ;  and  struggere, 
'  to  melt' ;  are  never  contracted  in  any  of  the  above  inflexions. 


All  verbs  ending  in  ere  (short),  preceded  by  the 
diphthong  wo  (accented),  as  cubcere,  '  to  cook  ' ;  scuo- 
tere,  '  to  shake  '  ;  mvbvere,  c  to  move ' ;  nubcere,  '  to 
hurt '  ;  &o»,  in  the  perfect  and  participle,  —  and  in  all 
the  inflexions  in  which  the  diphthong  loses  the  accent, 
drop  the  u ;  and  make,  cossi,  '  1  cooked  ' ;  cotto, 
6  cooked  '  ;  scossi,  '  I  shook  '  ;  &c.  —  cociamo,  (  we 
cook  '  ;  scoteie,  l  you  shake  ' ;  movero,  '  I  will  move  '  ; 
nocerebbe,  { it  would  hurt ' ;  &,c. 


EXAMPLES* 


JLd  ambidue  questi  fini  ha  qui  To  both  these  objects  has  the 

ALLTJSO  parimente  il  Signore  con  Lord    here  equally    alluded    with 

un  tal  ditto.     (Segn.  Mann.  Nov.  such  words. 
16.) 

Non  ist6tte  gudri,  che  egli  PER-  It  was  not  long  before  he  lost 

DE  la  vista,  c  La  parola.     (Bocc.  both  his  sight  and  speech, 
g.  4.  n,  7.) 

Qu6sta  volta  w  dird,  come  si  This  time  I  will  say,  as  we  are 

dice,  ~ /)'  essermi  PERSA  ancW  wont  to  say,  that  I  have  missed 

\o  la  liscialura.  (Buon.  Fier.  2. 4.)  the  object  in  view. 

Taglidndo  il  FENDE  quasi  in-  With   a   cut  he  clove  him    as 

fino  a  denti.     (Bocc.  Filoc.  1,)  far  as  the  chin. 

Colui  FESSE  in  grdmbo  a  Dio  That  one  smote  in  the  bosom  of 

^-  Lo  cuor  che  in  sul  Tanrigi  an-  God  the  heart  which  is  yet  hon- 

cor  si  cola.     (Dant.  Inf.  12.)          •  ored  on  the  Thames. 

Che,  per  V  effetto  d&  suoi  mtf  That,  through  the  effect  of  fas 

pensieri,  —  Fiddndomi  di  lui,  10  evU  thoughts,  I,  trusting  m  mm, 


298 


ANALOGY. 


fossi  PRESO,  —  E  poscia  morto, 
dir  non  £  mestieri.  (Dant.  Inf. 
33.) 

Prdsa  la  pidstra,  la  RADEI  da 
tutte  e  due  le  bdnde.  (Benv. 
Cell.  Oref.  85.) 

E  seco  avere  una  procella  AS- 
SORT o  —  Tdnti  principi  illustri. 
(Ariost.  Fur.  14.  6.) 

Voi  troverete  lo  spezidle  per 
la  ma,  che  andrd  a  CORRE  la 
misura  de'  confetti.  (Fir.  Trin. 
1.2.) 

Ne  poeta  ne  COLGA  mdi,  ne 
Gidve — La  privilegi.  (Petr.  s. 
46.) 

Se  egli  [il  vino]  sdppia  di  sec- 
co  o  dbbia  odor  cattivo,  cdccinvisi 
dentro  fidccole  accese,  e  vi  si 
SPENGANO.  (Sod.  Colt.  99.) 

Sempre  la  prossimdna  6rba 
dattorno  si  SVELGA.  (Cresc.  5. 
1.) 

Che  Cristo  appdrve  d'  due  ch*  6- 
rano  in  via, —  Gid  SURTO  fuor 
d6lla  sepulcrdl  buca.  (Dant.  Purg. 
21.) 

In  onordre  altrui  ten6va  la  bor- 
sa  STRETTA.  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  8.) 

Del  lei  nido  di  L6da  mi  divelse, 
—  E  nel  del  velocissimo  m*  IM- 
PULSE. (Dant.  Par.  27.) 

Cft'  e  di  torbidi  nuvoli  INVO- 
LTJTO.  (Dant.  Inf.  24.) 

Clddio  diede  moneta  d'  giudici, 
efu  ASSOLUTO.  (Sen.  Pist.  97.) 

Questo  possente  mw  nobile  ar- 
dor e  —  Mi  solleva  da  terra,  e  por- 
ta  il  core  —  Dov'  ir  per  sua  virtu 
non  gli  e  CONCESSO.  (Buon.  Rim. 
50.) 


was  taken  and  afterward  put  to 
death,  there  is  no  need  that  I 
should  tell. 

Having     taken     the     metal,    I 
shaved  it  on  both  sides. 


And  that  along  with  him  one 
storm  had  swallowed  up  so  many 
illustrious  princes. 

You  will  find  the  apothecary  on 
the  way,  going  to  take  the  meas- 
ure of  the  confections. 


Never  may  a  poet  gather  of  it, 
nor  Jupiter  give  it  any  privilege. 


If  it  [the  wine]  tastes  too  dry  or 
has  a  bad  odor,  let  lighted  torches 
be  thrown  into  it,  and  be  extin- 
guished in  it. 

Let  the  grass  always  be  pulled 
up  around  it. 

That  Christ  appeared  unto  the 
two  upon  their  way,  new-risen 
from  his  vaulted  grave. 

He  kept  his  purse  close  in  hon- 
oring others. 

From  the  fair  nest  of  Leda  rapt 
me  forth,  and  wafted  me  on  fnto 
swiftest  heaven. 

Which  is  wrapt  in  turbid  mists. 

Clodius  gave  money  to  the 
judges  and  was  acquitted. 

This  powerful  ardor  of  mine 
elevates  me  from  the  earth,  and 
carries  my  heart,  where  by  its 
own  power  it  is  not"  permitted  .to 
ascend., 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


JL  che,  e  come  CONCEDETTE 
JLmore  —  Che  conosceste  i  dub- 
biosi  desiri  ?  (Dant.  Inf.  5.) 

REDENTO,  da  Redimere.  (Cru- 
sca.) 

M  ]\IISE  dentro  alle  segr6te 
cose  (Dant.  Inf.  3.) 


By  what  and  how  did  Love  grant 
that  you  should  know  your  uncer- 
tain wishes? 

Redeemed,  from  to  redeem. 


He  led  me  on  into  those  seclud- 
ed regions. 


Ne    dnche   ben   capisco  V  ilia-  Neither  can    I   understand   the 

zione  che  fa  Apelle,  del  doversi  inference    which  Apelles    makes, 

concedere  qualche  lume  RIFLESSO  that  some  reflected  light  must  be 

alia  terra.    (Gal.  Macch.  sol.  168.)  granted  to  the  -earth. 

Qudndo  Fetonte  abbandond  li 
freni,  —  Perche  V  del,  come  pare 
ancor,  si  COSSE.  (Dant.  Inf.  17,) 

Ddto  che  quest  a  ragione  si 
potesse  ADDUCERE.  (Borg.  Rip. 
30.) 

JYot,  sempre  che  verra  proposi- 
tOj  ADDURREMO  simili  antichi  e- 
sempj.  (Dav.  Stor.  3.) 

JE"  suono,  che  si  fa  nelle  selve 
ddi  cacciatori,  perche  li  cdni 
TRAGGANO  al  sudno.  (But.  Inf. 
31.) 

Via  corta  e  spedita  —  TRAR- 
REBBE  a  fin  quest'  dspra  penat  e 
dura.  .  (Petr.  c.  18.) 

Sono  FISO  in  un  limo,  che  non 
trovafondo.  (Vit.  SS.  Pad.) 

Lo  TRAFITTO  il  mird,  ma  nulla 
disse.  (Dant.  Inf.  25.) 

Libero  spirto  od  a'  suoi  mem- 
bri  AFFISSO.  (Petr.  s.  113.). 

Tento  di  trar  ddlla  profonda 
pidga  la  CONFITTA  saetta.  (Guar. 
Past.  Fid.  5, 7.) 

E  tdnta  grazia  sovra  me  RILUS- 
SE.  (Dant.  Par.  22.) 


When  Phaeton  abandoned  the 
reins,  whence  heaven,  as  it  yet 
appears,  was  wrapt  in  flames. 

Even  could  this  reason  be  al- 
leged. 

Whenever  it  shall  be  conven- 
ient, we  will  always  allege  similar 
ancient  examples. 

It  is  a  sound,  which  is  made  by 
hunters  in  the  woods,  that  the  dogs 
may  come  to  that  sound. 

A  short  and  expeditious  way 
would  bring  to  an  end  this  severe 
and  hard  pain. 

I  am  fixed  in  a  marshy  soil 
which  has  no  bottom. 

The  pierced  spirit  looked  on 
him,  but  did  not  speak. 

Free  spirit  of  still  confined  to 
its  limbs. 

He  tried  to  draw  from  the  deep 
wound  the  fixed  arrow. 


La  luce  nelle   tenebre    RILU- 
CETTE.     (Arr.  Vang.) 


And  so  much  grace  shone  over 
me. 

Light  shone  in  the  darkness. 


300 


ANALOGY. 


ESATTO,  da  Esigere.    (Crusca.)  Exacted,  from  to  exact. 

Che  gli  fusse  oscurdta  la  fdma  That  the  fame  of  the  beginning 

(Li"1  principj  delta  sua  milizia  da  of  his  military  life  should   be  ob- 

un  popolo  VIVUTO  in  lunga  pace,  scured  by  a  people  who  had  lived 

(Guicc.  Stor.  5.)  in  long  peace. 


Ma  il  ben  VISSUTO  vecchio  s'  in- 
gegndva  di  mostrdre  la  veritd  del- 
la  cosa.  (Firenz.  Asin.) 

VIVRO,  com'  io  son  visso.* 
(Petr.  s.  lib.) 

Jlllora  dimandd  come  si  chia- 
mdvaqueW  isola;fu  RISPOSTO  per 
li  marindri.  che  per  antico  si  chia- 
mdva  Jerusalem.  (Giov.  Vill,  1. 
4.  c.  18.) 

Ne  pud  grdzia  negdr  che  tu  gli 
CHIEGGIA.  (Alam.  Colt.  1.  10.) 

E  se  ne  venne  a  FONERE  oste  a 
Fiesole.  (Pecor.  g.  11.  n.  1.) 

Per  duo  fiammette,  che  vedem- 
mo  PORRE.  (Dant.  Inf.  8.) 

Chi  PORRA  ben  la  mente  e 
r  intelletto.  (Franc.  Barb.  15.8.) 

Lo  duca  ed  w,per  quel  cammi- 
no  ASCOSO, —  Entrammo  a  ritor- 
ndr  net  chidro  mondo.  (Dant. 
Inf.  34.) 

Lapietdde'  duo  eogndti, —  Che 
di  tristizia  tutto  mi  CONFUSE. 
(Dant.  Inf.  6.) 

Tutte  le  campdne  che  erano  in 
qutllo  trovdronsi  qudsi  tutte  FON- 
DUTE,  come  fossero  coldte  nella 
forndce.  (Matt.  Vill.  3.  42. ) 

n  Saladino  CONOBBE  costui  ot- 
timamente  essere  saputo  uscir  del 
Idccio,  il  qudle  davdnti  d'  piedi 
teso  gli  avea.  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  3.) 

Ben  ti  dee  ricorddr,  che  non  ti 
KOCQUE.  (Dant.  Inf.  20.) 


But  the  well-lived  old  man  en- 
deavoured to  show  the  truth  of 
the  thing. 

I  shall  live  as  I  have  lived. 


Then  he  asked  how  that  island 
was  called ;  he  was  answered  by 
the  sailors,  that  anciently  it  was 
called  Jerusalem. 


Nor  can  he  deny  any  favor  that 
you  may  ask. 

And  came  to  encamp  at  Fiesole. 


By  two  small  flames,  which  we 
saw  kindle. 

He  who  will  reflect  well. 


My  guide  and  I  entered  by  that 
hidden  way  to  return  to  the  bright 
world. 


Pity  for  the  kindred  shades, 
whence  grief  wholly  overcame 
me. 

All  the  bells  which  were  there, 
were  found  almost  all  melted  as  if 
they  had  been  put  in  a  furnace. 

Saladin  saw  that  he  had  known 
how  to  get  out  of  the  snare,  which 
he  had  spread  before  his  feet. 

Thou  oughtest  to  remember  well, 
for  it  did  thee  good  service. 


*  By  contraction  for  visstoto. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


301 


Jlndbnne  a  Pavia  per  una  dis- 
cdrdia  NAT  A  tra  qutlli  di  Becche- 
ria.  (Din.  Comp.  3.) 


He  went  to  Pavia  on  account  of 
a  dissension  sprung  up  among  the 
people  of  Beccheria. 


La  cittadindnza,  che  e  or  MISTA  The  citizens'  blood,  that  now  is 

—  Di   Cdmpi,  e  di  Certdldo,  e  di  mixed  from  Campi,  and   Certaldo, 

Figghine, —  Pura  vedcasi  nelV  ul-  and  Figghine,  ran  pure  through  the 

timo  artista.     (Dant.  Par.  16.)  last  mechanic's  veins. 

One  of  which  I  broke  some  few 
years  past,  to  save  an  infant  who 
was  drowning  in  it. 


U  un  de^lli  qudli,  ancor  non  & 
molV  dnni —  RUPP'  w  per  un> 
che  dtntro  «'  annegava.  (Dant. 
Inf.  13.) 

E  rndngia,  e  BEE,  e  dorme,  e        And  eats,  and  drinks,  and  sleeps, 
veste  pdnni.     (Dant.  Inf.  33.)  and  puts  raiment  on. 


EXERCISE    XX. 


I.    1. — To    gather,      to    allege,      to     destroy,      to    draw. 
Cogliere.  adducere.        distruggere.  trdere. 


to    put.      to  take  away. 
ponere.  togliere. 


7.  —  cloven.        taken.       shaven. 
ftndere.        prendere.    rddere. 

kindled.         devolved.        bound.        redeemed,      extinguished. 
accendere.       devolvere.       stringere.        redimere.        spegnere. 

cooked,      ^answered.       born.       directed.        lived.       broken. 
cuocere.        rispondere.     ndscere.      dirigere.        vivere.      rompere. 

alleged. II.      1.  —  I    gather,      thou     extinguishest,      he 

adducere.  cogliere,  spegnere,  ri- 

reduces,      we     ask,      you     draw,      they    take     away.  

ducere,  chiedere,  trdere,  togliere. 

I    absorb,      thou    choosest,       he    rises,      we    assume,       you 
assorbere,  scegliere,  sorgere,  assumtre,  a- 


compel,     they  root  up. 
string  ere,        svellere. 


3.  —  I    offended,      thou  vilifiedst, 
ledere,  vilipendere, 


he     ran,       we^    bite,       you     sprinkled,      they     kindled. 

correre,  mordere,  aspergere,  accendere. 


[     expelled, 


thou     invadedst, 
invddere, 

26 


he    knew,        we     wiped, 
conoscere,  tergere. 


302  ANALOGY. 

you     shut,       they     descended. 1     cut     asunder,      thou 

chiudere,  sc6ndere.  scmdere,  con- 

grantedst,      he    redeemed,    we  ^sheared,     you    chose,    they 
cddere,  redimere,  tondere,  scegliere,        mdt- 

put.        4.  —  I  will   succour,    thou  wilt  drink,     it  will  occur, 
tere.  soccorrere,  btvere,  occorrere, 

we    will     shake,     you    will   draw,      they   will    destroy. 

scuotere,  trdere,  distruggere. 

I  will    put,     thou  wilt  move,     he  will   turn,     we  will   untie, 
ponere,  muovere,  volvere,  sciogliere, 

you    will    reflect,       they    will     melt. III.      1.  —  I    may 

riflettere,  struggere.  dis- 

distinguish,     thou   mayest  milk,     he   may   know,     we    may 
tinguere,  miingere,  ndscere,  proUg- 


protect, 
gere, 

choose, 
gliere, 

you    may    cook, 
cuocere, 

thou    mayest   fry, 
friggere, 

they   may    conquer. 
vincere. 

he    may    request 
richiddere, 

,       we    may 
contrap- 

oppose,     you   may    hurt,     they    may    drink. IV.      1.  — 

ponere,  nuocere,  btvere. 

I    should     drink    again,      thou    wouldst     break,      he    would 
ribevere,  frdngere,  rilu- 

shine,     we   would    live,     you    would    produce,     they  would 
cere,  vivere,  producere,  cre- 

grow. V.  —  write  thou,     let  him  feign,     let  us  answer, 

scere.  scrwere,  flngere,  rispondere, 

pour    ye,       let    them    feed. 
mtscere,  pdscere. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  303 

VARIATION  OF  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  THIRD 
CONJUGATION. 

The  following  are  the  simple  irregular  verbs  of  the 
third  conjugation  ;  viz. 


dire, 


to  tell  ; 


morire,  to  die  ; 

satire,  to  ascend  ; 


seguire,  to  follow ; 

udire,  to  hear  ; 

uscire,  to  go  out ; 

venire,  to  come. 


Dire. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

DIRE  (dicere),*  |  to  say. 

GERUND.  PARTICIPLE. 

[saying.  J|  DETTO  (ditto),     jsaid. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  dicn, 
2d  p.  did  or  DI% 
3d  p.  dice, 

I  say  ; 

fhou  sayest  ; 
he  says  ; 

II  dicidmOj 

DITE, 

(I  dicono, 

we  say  ; 
you  say  ; 
they  say. 

2.— 

Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w 

dicdva  or  dic6a,  \  I  said. 

*  This  verb^belongs*,  properly,  to  the  second  conjugation,  it  being  but  a  contrac- 
tion of  dicere,  now  become  obsolete,  of  which  it  retains  many  of  the  forms. 


304 


ANALOGY. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  oissi, 
2d  p.  dicestij 
3d  p.  DISSE, 


I  said ; 
thou  saidest ; 
he  said ; 


t/icdmmo, 

dic^ste, 

DISSERO, 


we  said  ; 
you  said  ; 
they  said. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  DIRO  [by  contraction  for  I  I  shall  or  will  say. 
dicerd],  \ 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  _  Present. 

1st  p.  io  dica,  \  that  I  say  or  may  say. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w  dicessi,  \  if  1  said  or  should  say. 


IV.     CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  DIREI  (diria)  [by  contraction  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  say;  or 
[for  dicerii  (diceria)],  |  [might  say. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.     ...        |    

2d  p.  DI'  tu,         (say  thou ; 
3d  p.  dica  egli,    I  let  him  say  ; 


dic'idmo  not, 
DITE  <7oi, 
dicano  eglinO 


llet  us  say  ; 
pay  ye  ; 

tlet  them  say. 


The  compounds  of  dire,  as  ridire,  '  to  say  again ' ; 

contradire   or   contraddire,   '  to   contradict  '  ;   interdire, 

to  forbid  '  ;  bendire,  '  to  speak  well  of  ;  maldire,  *  to 


speak  il 


bave  tbe  same  irregularities. 


Bened'tre,  l  to  bless,'  and  maladire  or  maleflire,  t  to  cuise,'  in  the 
perfect,  are  boih  regular  and  irregular,  and  make  benedii  or  benedissi, 
'  I  blessed  '  ;  maledii  or  maledissi,  *  I  cursed.' 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


305 


Morire. 
(Varied  with  essere.*) 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Morire,  |to  die.  ||  MORTO,  [dead. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 


Singular.                                                             Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  MUORO,    Or 

I  die; 

moriaMQ) 

we  die  ; 

[MUOIO  (uioio). 

2d  p.  MUORI, 

thou  diest  ; 

inorite, 

you  die  ; 

3d  p.  MUORK 

he  dies; 

MUORONO.OrMUO- 

they  die. 

[(wwor). 

[IONO     (naoio- 

[no;, 

4.  —  Future. 
1st- p.  inorird  or  morro,  \  I  shall  or  will  die. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1st  p.  10   MUOR  A, 

[orMUOiA(m6iii). 

2d  p.  tu  MUOR  A, 
[or  MUOIA  (inora 
[ormoia,  nioii), 

3d  p.  egli  MUO- 
[RA,  or  MUOIA 
[(mora  or  moia), 


1.  —  Present. 

that    I    die,     orjj  moridmo, 

[may  die  ; 
that  thou  die ; 


that  he  die ; 


MUOR  \  NO,     or 
[MUOIA  NO     (mo- 
[rauo  ormoiano), 


that  we  die ; 
that  you  die  ; 

that  they  die. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 
1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  morirdi  or  morrei  (moriria  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  die ;  or 
[or  tnorria),  |  [might  die. 

*  Morire  may  be  varied  also  with  av6re.\  hut  then,  as  wo  have  already  observed 
(p.  219j,  it  takes  the  nature  of  uu  active  verb,  and  signifies  '  to  kill,'  and  uot  'to  die.' 

2G* 


306 


ANALOGY. 


V.     IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1st  p.     ...        i    

2d  p.  MUORI  tu,   die  thou  ; 
3d  p.  MUORA.  or  let  him  die  ; 

[MUOIA  (mora 

[or  inoia)  egli, 


\  moridmo  noi, 
morite  voi, 
MUORA  NO,    or 
[Mu6iANo(rn6- 
[rano  or  rnoia- 
[no)  dglino, 


let  us  die ; 

die  ye ; 

let  them  die. 


The  compounds  of  morire,  as  premorire,  c  to  die  be- 
fore';  &c.,  have  the  same  irregularities. 


Salire. 
(Varied  with  either  avere  or  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Salire  (saglire*),)to  ascend. 


PARTICIPLE. 

[ascended. 


II.     INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.     SAL.GO,  Ol 

I  ascend  ; 

salidmo,   or   SA- 

we  ascend  ; 

[sa/iscr>(saglio), 

[GLIAMO, 

2d  p.  sdli  or  sa- 

thou  ascendest; 

salite, 

you  ascend  ; 

[/iscit  (sagli), 

3d  p.  sale    or  sa- 

he  ascends; 

SALGONO,  or  sa- 

they  ascend. 

[lisce  (saglie), 

[liscono  (sd- 
[gliono), 

*  From  this  vorb,  now  become  obsolete,  are  derived  many  of  the  forms  of  the 
modern  verb  satire. 

{•  The  forms  soUsci  and  saglibmo,  of  the  present  of  the  indicative  and  of  the 
imperative  ;  and  sagliamo  and  saglidte,  of  the  present  of  the  conjunctive  mood,  are  to 
be  preferred  when  sali,  saliamo,  salidte,  might  be  confounded  with  s&li,  salidmc, 
and  satiate,  corresponding  tenses  of  the  verb  saldre,  '  to  salt.' 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


307 


Singular^ 


Plural. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  salii(sdlsi), 
2d  p.  salistii 
3d  p.  sail  (sdlse, 
[salio), 


I  ascended  ; 
ihou  ascendedst; 
he  ascended  ; 


saliste, 

salirono(sdlsero, 

[saliro,  salir), 


we  ascended ; 
you  ascended ; 
they  ascended. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.£0SAL,GA,Or 

[salisca(sdglia), 
2d  p.  iwsALGA,or 
[sa/isca(salghi), 
3d  p.  egli  SALGA, 
[or  salisca, 

that  I  ascend,  or 
[may  ascend  ; 
that  thou  ascend; 

that  he  ascend  ; 

salidmo,  or    SA- 
[GLIAMO, 
satiate,    or     SA- 
[GL.IATE, 
SALGANO,  or  sa- 
[liscano   (sa- 
[gliano), 

that  we  ascend  ; 
that  you  ascend  ; 
that  they  ascend. 

V.     IMPERATIVE. 


2d  p.  sdli,  or  sa- 
\lisci  tu, 
3d  p.   SALGA,   or 
[salisca  egli, 

ascend  thou  ; 
let  him  ascend  ; 

salidmo,  or   SA- 
[GLIAMO  ndi, 

salite  vdi, 

SALGANO,  or  sa- 
[liscano  eglino, 


let  us  ascend ; 

ascend  ye ; 

let  them  ascend. 


The  compounds  of  salire,  as  risalire,  '  to  reascend ' ; 
assalire,  '  to  assail';  &LC.,  have  the  same  irregularities. 


308 


ANALOGY. 


Scguire. 
(Varied  with  cither  avere  or  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Segmre,  |to  follow. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 


PARTICIPLE. 

seguito,  jfollowed. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  seguo,   or 

[SIEGUO, 

2d  p.    se^ui,   01 


3d  p. 


[SIEGUI. 

t6gw,   or 

[SIEGUE, 


I  follow  ; 
thou  followest ; 
he  fol'ows ; 


segU'.amo, 


seguono,  or 

[SIEGUONO. 


we  follow ; 
you  follow  ; 
they  follow. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p    w  s^gua. 
[or   SIEGUA 


2dp. 

[SIEGUA 

[siegui), 

3d  p.  egli  segua, 

[or  SIEGUA 


that  T  follow  ;  or 

[may  follow  ; 

that  thou  follow; 


that  he  follow  ; 


seguidmo, 
seguidte, 

s6guano,  or 

[SIEGUANO, 


that  we  follow ; 
that  you  follow  ; 

that  they  follow. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.          .    . 

2d  p.  sezui,    or' 
[SIEGUI  tu. 
3d  p.  segua,  o 
[SIEGUA  egli, 

follow  thou  ; 
let  him  follow  ; 

seguiamo^noi, 
seguite  voi, 

seguano,  or  SIE- 
[GUANO  6glino, 


let  us  follow  ; 
follow  ye ; 

let  them  follow. 


The  compounds  of  spguire,  as  conseguire,  f  to  obtain ' ; 
inseguire,  '  to  pursue  '  ;  proseguire,  e  to  prosecute  '  ; 
susseguire,  '  to  follow  immediately  after ' ;  have  the 


same  irregularities. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


309 


Udire. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Udire  (od 

ire*),  jto  hear;             ,:, 

|  udito,                   [heard. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.                                                             Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  ODO,             [  hear; 
2d  p.  ODI,             thou  hearest  ; 
3d  p.  ODE,             he  hears  ; 

udidmO)  we  hear  ; 
udite,  you  hear  ; 
ODONO,  they  hear. 

4.  —  Future. 
1st  p.  udird  or  udrd,      \  I  shall  or  will  hear. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  W  ODA, 

2d  p.  tu  ODA 
3d  p.  egli  ODA, 


that  I  hear  or 
[may  hear ; 
that  thou  hear ; 

that  he  hear ; 


udidmo, 

udidte, 

ODANO, 


that  we  hear ; 
that  you  hear ; 
that  they  hear. 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  • —  Present. 

1st  p.  udirei  or  iidrii  (udiria  or     I  should,  would,  or  could  hear; 
[udria),  [or  might  hear. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p  

udidmo  noi, 

let  us  hear  ; 

2d  p.  ODI  tu, 
3d  p.  ODA  egli, 

hear  thou  ; 
let  him  hear  ; 

udite  voi, 
ODANO  iglino, 

hear  ye  ; 
let  them  hear. 

*  From  this  form,  now  obsolete^  are  derived  6dot  <Jdit  &c.5  of  udire* 


310 


ANALOGY. 


The  compounds  of  u  !'ire,  as  riudire,  '  to  hear  again '5 
&,c.  have  the  same  irregularities. 

Esaudire,  '  to  grant ' ;  is  regular,  and  varied  like  esibire. 


TJscire. 
(Varied  with  essere.) 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Uscire  (escire*),|to  go  out; 


PARTICIPLE. 

uscito,  |gone  out. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 
J .  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  ESCO, 

2d  p.  ESCI, 
3d  p.  ESCE, 

T  go  out  ; 
thou  goest  out; 
he  goes  out  ; 

nsridmoj 
uscite, 

ESCOJVO, 

we  go  out  ; 
you  go  out  ; 
they  go  out. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  ZO  ESCA, 

2d  p.  tu  ESCA, 
3d  p.  igli  ESCA, 

that  I  go  out,  or 
[may  go  out  ; 
that  thou  go  out  ; 
that  he  go  out  ; 

uscidmo, 
uscidte, 

ESCANO, 

that  we  go  out  ; 

that  you  go  out  ; 
that  they  go  out. 

V.    IMPI 
1st  p  ..... 

:RATIVE. 

usciamo  noi, 
uscite  vdi, 
ESCAJVO  eglino, 

let  us  go  out  ; 
go  ye  out  ; 
let  them  go  out. 

2d  p.  ESCI  tu, 
3d  p.  ESCA  egli, 

The  compr 
the  same  irre 

2:0  thou  out  ; 
let  him  go  out; 

und  of  uscire,  —  riuscire,  'to  succeed,'  has 
^ularities. 

*  From  this  verb,  now  become  obsolete,  are  derived  the  forms  esco,  6sca,  &c.}  ot 
the  verb  uscire. 


IRRE&ULAR  VERBS. 


311 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Venire,  |to  come. 


Singular. 


Venire. 
(Varied  with  essere.} 

PARTICIPLE. 

|come. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  VENGO 

[(vegno), 
2d  p.  VIENI, 

3d  p.    VIENE, 


1st  p.  VENN  I, 

2d  p.  venisti, 
3d  p.  VENNE, 


I  come ; 

thou  comest ; 
he  comes ; 


venidmo  (vcgnd- 


vemte, 


[mo), 


YEN  GO NO(  vegno- 
[no), 


3.  —  Perfect. 


I  came ; 
thou  earnest ; 
he  came ; 


venwwio, 
veniste, 

VENNERO  (veni- 
[ro) 


we  corne; 


you  come ; 
they  come. 


we  came ; 
you  came ; 
they  carne. 


4.  —  Future. 


1st  p.  verro   [by  contraction   for     I  shall  or  will  come. 
[venird], 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 


1.  — Present. 


1st  p.  W  VENGA 

[(vegna), 

2d  p.  tU    VENGA 

[(vegni), 
3d  p.  egli  VENGA 
[(vegna), 

that   I   come  or 
[may  come  ; 
that  thou  come  ; 

that  he  come  ; 

venidmo  (vegna- 
[mo)r 
veniate   (vegna- 
[te), 

VENGANO        (VC- 

[gnano), 

that  we  come  j 
that  you  come  ; 
they  they  come. 

IV.     CONDITIONAL. 

i  ri 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  verrei  (verria)  [by  contraction  I  I  should,  would,  or  could  come  ; 
[for  venirei  (veniria)],  |  [or  might  come. 


312 


ANALOGY. 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1st  p  

veniumo  noit 

let  us  come  ; 

2d  p.  VIENI  tUj 

3d  p.  VENGA 

[(vegna)  6gli9 

come  thou  ; 
let  him  come; 

venite  voi, 
VENGANo(veg;na- 
[no)  4giino. 

come  ye  ; 
let  them  come. 

Venire  is  sometimes  varied  with  the  conjunctive 
pronouns  mi,  ti,  si.  &,c.  and  the  particle  ne ;  thus,  ME 
NE  vengo,  '  I  am  coming  thence '  ;  TE  NE  vieni,  '  thou 
art  coming  thence  ' ;  &ic.  —  Me,  te,  &tc.,  are  then  mere 
expletives. 

The  compounds  of  venire,  as  convenire,  '  to  agree'; 
divenire,  c  to  become'  ;  invenire,  '  to  find  ' ;  prevenire, 
'to  anticipate';  sovve  .1.  e,  '  to  assist';  &c.  have  the 
same  irregularities. 


Variation  of  the  Verb  Offerire. 

Offer  ire,  c  to  offer,'  is  both  regular  and  irregular ; 
and  it  has,  besides,  been  so  contracted  by  poets,  as  to 
render  it  important  to  give  here  its  variation. 

Offerire. 
(Varied  with  avere.) 

I.   INFINITIVE. 

Offerire  or  offrire,  \  to  offer. 


PARTICIPLE. 


offerindo    or       offering. 
[offrendo,i 


1 1  (offer! to)  OFFER- I  offered. 
[TO,| 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 
1st  p.  offerisco  or  offro,  \  I  offer. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 

1st  p.  w  offerwa  or  offriva,or  offeria  I  I  offered, 
[or  offria,  \ 


313 


Singular. 


Plural. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


1st  p.  offeni,  of- 
Ifrii,  or  OFFERSI, 
2d  p.  offensti  or 
[offnsti, 
3d  p.  offeri.nffri, 

[Or  OFFERSE, 


1st  p.  offerird  or  offrird, 


I  offered  ; 
thpu  offeredst  ; 
he  offered  ; 

offerimmo  or  of- 
[frimmo, 
offeriste  or  offri- 
Iste, 
offenrono  or  of- 
[frirono  (offeri- 
[ro    or    offiiro, 
[offeriroroffrir), 

[or  OFFERSERO, 

we  offered  ; 
you  offered  ; 
they  offered. 

4.  —  Future. 

I  I  shall  or  will  offer. 


III.  CONJUNCTIVE. 

1 .  —  Present. 
1st  p.  £0  offer'isca,  offrisca,  or  o/?ra,  |  that  I  offer,  or  may  offer. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  to  offerissi  or  offrissi,  \  if  I  offered,  or  should  offer. 

IV.  CONDITIONAL. 

1.  —  Present. 

1st  p.  offerirei  or  offrirei  (offeriria   I  I  should,  would,  or  could  offer  ; 
[or  offriria),  |  [or  might  offer. 

V.   IMPERATIVE. 


1st  p.     .     .    .  I     .... 

2d  p.  offerisci  or  offri  tu,     \  offer  thou. 
27 


314  ANALOGY. 

The  verb  sofferire,  *  to  suffer,'  has  the  same  irregu- 
larities. 

Conferire,  '  to  confer ' ;  differire,  '  to  differ ' ;  inferire,  '  to  infer ' ; 
profeiire,  Mo  proffer';  riferire,  Mo  refer';  trasferire,  '  to  transfer'; 
are  never  contracted  ;  and  in  the  perfect  and  participle  have  the 
terminations  in  li  and  ito  only  ;  and  make,  conferii,  1 1  conferred ' ; 
differii,  '  1  differed  ' ;  conferito}  *  conferred  ' ;  &c.* 


REMARKS  ON  OTHER  VERBS  IN  ire. 

The  verbs  convertire,  '  to  convert ' ;  sovvertire,  '  to 
subvert ' ;  are  both  regular  and  irregular,  and  in  the 
perfect  make  convertii  or  CONVE'RSI,  '  I  converted  ' ; 
sovvertii  or  SOVVE'RSI,  '  I  subverted  ' ;  and  in  the  parti- 
ciple, convertito  or  CONVE'RSO,  {  converted  ' ;  sovvertito 
or  SOVVE'RSO,  '  subverted.' 

Divertire,  l  to  divert ' ;  pervertire, '  to  pervert ' ;  have  the  termina- 
tions in  ii  and  ito  only ;  and  make  divertii, 1 1  diverted ' ;  pervertii, 
'  I  perverted  ' ;  divertito, i  diverted  ' ;  pervertito,  '  perverted.' 

Jlpparire  and  compar'ire,  6  to  appear ' ;  and  their 
compounds,  are  both  regular  and  irregular,  and  in  the 
perfect  make  apparii  or  APPAXRVI  (apparsi)  ;  comparii 
or  COMPA'RVI  (comparsi),  c  I  appeared  ' ;  &LC.,  and  in 
the  participle,  apparito  or  APPA'RSO  ;  (cornparito)  COM- 
PAXRSO,  c  appeared  ' ;  &c. 

Apnre,  c  to  open  ' ;  coprire,  '  to  cover  ' ;  and  their 
compounds,  in  the  perfect  are  both  regular  and  irregu- 
lar, and  make  opm*  or  APE'RSI,  '  I  opened,'  coprii  or 
COPE'RSI,  ( I  covered  ' ;  &c.,  but  in  the  participle  are 
irregular  only  ;  and  make  APE'RTO,  c  opened  ' ;  COPE'R- 
TO,  '  covered  ' ;  &c. 

*  A  few  instances  may  be  found  among  the  classics  in  which  rifersij  '  I  referred,' 
and  profersij  '  I  proffered  '  j  proferto,  '  proifered  '  j  have  been  used. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


315 


EXAMPLE  S. 


A  cui  il  frate  DISSE  :  "  DfZ/o 
sicurame'nte"  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  1.) 

E  MUOIONO  in  questa  folle 
sperdnza.  (Gr.  S.  Gir.  2.) 

D6esi  inttndere,  per  lo  padre  e 
per  lo  figliuolo,  tutti  coloro,  che 
SALGONO,  e  isc6ndono  per  retta 
linea.  (Maestruzz.  2.  28.) 

Ond'  w  per  lo  tuo  mi"1  penso, 
e  discerno,  —  Che  tu  mi  SEGUI, 
ed  w  sard  tua  guida.  -(Dant.  Inf. 


To  whom  the  friar  said :  "  Say 
it  frankly." 

And  die  with  this  foolish  expec- 
tation. 

For  father  and  son,  must  be 
understood,  all  those  who  ascend 
or  descend  in  a  direct  line. 


Wherefore  I,  pondering  for  thy 
profit,  devise,  that  thou  mayest 
follow  me,  and  1  will  be  thy  guide. 


Fiorentino  —  Mi  s6mbri  vera- 
mente  quand'  w  V  ODO.  (Dant. 
Inf.  33.) 

Qudl  ESCE  alcuna  volta  di 
galoppo  —  Lo  cavalier  di  schi6ra, 
che  cavdfchi.  (Dant.  Purg.  24.) 

Jlvendo  fdtto  fare  un  grandis- 
siino  fuoco  in  una  sua  cammind- 
ta,  in  quella  SE  NE  VENNE, 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

Dindnzi  agli  occhi  mi  si  fu 
OFFERTO  —  Chi  per  lungo  silen- 
zio  par&afioco.  (Dant.  Inf.  1.) 

Tali  cose,  PROFERITE  cos\  in 
astrdtto,  hdnno  qualche  difficoltcL 
all'  esser  comprise.  (Gall.  228.) 

Per  lo  qual  e  chi  crbda  —  Piu 
volte  Jl  mondo  in  Caos  CON  VER- 
SO. (Dant.  Inf.  12.) 

APPARI  una    gran   mortalitd, 
ec  ......    Stdndo   costui  nel 

principio  del  suo  capitandlo,  AP- 
PARVE   un    cdso,    ec.     ..... 

(Franc.  Sacch.  n.  158.) 

Gli  accorgimenti  e  le  COPERTE 
me  —  I'o  seppi  tutte.  (Dant.  Inf. 
27.) 


Florentine  thou  seemest  to  me, 
in  truth,  when  I  hear  thee. 

As  sometimes  one  knight  pricks 
forth  at  a  gallop  from  a  troop  of 
ranked  chivalry. 

Having  caused  a  large^fire  to  be 
made  in  one  of  her  halls,  there  she 
came. 


There  presented  itself  to  my 
sis;ht,  the  form  of  one,  whose  voice 
seemed  faint  through  long  disuse  of 
speech. 

Such  things,  spoken  so  in  ab- 
stract, are  difficult  to  be  compre- 
hended. 

Whereby,  there  are  some  who 
deem  that  the  world  has  often 
been  turned  into  chaos. 

There   came   a  great  mortality, 

&c He  being  yet  in  the 

beginning  of  his  captaincy,  an  ac- 
cident there  happened,  &c. 

I  knew  all  subtleties,  and  cov- 
ered ways. 


316  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE    XXI. 

I.     1.  —  To   say.      4.  —  contradict.      7. —  blessed,      come. 
Dire.  contradire.  benedire.      venire. 

died.       advised.       offered.       transferred. II.     1.  —  I    die, 

morire.    avvertire.       offerire.         trasferire.        .  morire, 

thou     ascendest,       he     follows,       we    hear,      you     go     out, 
salire,  seguire,  udire,  uscire, 

they    come.        2.  —  I    languished,      thou    saidst    again,      he 
venire.  languire,  ridire,  pre- 

anticipated,      we    contradicted,      you    re-opened,      they    re- 
venire.  contradire,  riaprire,  rin- 

covered   their  senses.        3.  —  I   cursed,     thou  reascendedst, 
venire  maledire,  risalire, 

he    became,     we   suffered,     you    diverted,     they   referred. — 
divenire,  sofferire,  divertire,  riferire. 

I    appeared,     thou    finishedst,     he    opened,     we   heard,     you 
apparire,  finire,  aprire,  setitire,        con- 

agreed,     they  covered.        4. — I  will  say,    thou   wilt    arrive, 
venire,  coprirc.  dire,  pervenire, 

he   will   die,    we   will    differ,     you   will   discover,     they  will 
morire,  differire,  scoprire,  as- 

assail. III.     1.  —  I  may  die  before,     thou  mayest  obtain, 

salire.  premorire,  conseguire, 

he    may    hear    again,      we    may    convert,      you    may    find, 
riudire,  convertire,  invenire, 

they  may  sufcceed.      2.  —  I  might  say,  thou  mightest  contra- 
riuscire.                              dire,  con- 
diet,  he  might  bless,  we  might  forbid,  you  might  say  again, 
tradire,        benedire,              interdire,  ridire, 

they  might  curse. IV.     1.  —  I  would  assist,  thou  wouldst 

maledire.  sovvenire,  sof- 

suffer,  he  would  forbid,   we  would  re-assail,   you  would  come 
feiire,         interdire,  riassalire.  riveni- 

again,  they  would  hear  one  thing  for  another. V.  —  con- 
re,                                     traudire,  pro- 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


317 


tinue  thou,     let   him  grant,    let  us   prevent,    proffer   ye,    let 
segmre,  esaudire,  prevenire,  proferire,     nor- 

thern subvert. 
vertire. 

[For  a  Table  of  Irregular  Verbs ^  see  APPENDIX.] 


CHAPTER  XL 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


Defective  verbs  ending  in  Ire  (long)  : 


CaUre,  to  care  for ; 

coiere  or  co7ere,  to  adore  ; 
lectre  &  lid-  ) 

re,  or  Ucert  >  to  be  lawful ; 

&  licere,      ) 


pavtre, 
silere, 

solere, 
stuptre, 


to  fear ; 
to  be,  or  keep, 
[silent ; 
to  be  wont ; 
to  be  astonished. 


Defective  verbs  ending  in  ere  (short)  : 


A'lgere, 

to  be  chill  ; 

riedere, 

to  return  ; 

dngere, 

to  afflict; 

serpere, 

to  creep  ; 

arrogere, 
cdpere, 

to  add  ; 
to  contain  ; 

soffolcere  or 
soffolgere, 

>  to  support  ; 

chtrere, 

to  ask  ; 

taiigere, 

to  touch  ; 

convellere, 

to  convulse  ; 

toller  6, 

to  take  away  ; 

fi&dere, 

to  wound  ; 

torptre, 

to  be  benumbed; 

lucere. 

to  shine  ; 

urgere, 

to  urge  ; 

molcere, 

to  assuage  ;       |  vigere, 

to  be  vigorous. 

/'re, 
gire, 


Defective  verbs  ending  in  ire  : 


to  go ; 


olire, 


to  smell. 


27* 


318 


ANALOGY. 


VARIATION    OF    DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

[These  verbs  are  used  only  in  the  tenses  and  persons,  which  are  here  given.] 

CaKn. 

I.  INFINITIVE. 

1.  —  Present.  2.  —  Past . 

CaUre,  |to  care  for.  ||  issere  caluto,      |to  have  cared  for. 

GERUND.  PARTICIPLE. 

|caring  for.  ||  caluto,  [cared  for. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


3d  p.  cale  or  cdl}\he  cares  for.         II 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


3d  p.  calevp  or  'he  cared  for. 
\caUa,  | 


3.  —  Perfect. 
3d  p.  CALSE,         I  he  cared  for.         II,   .   .    . 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


3d  p.  CAGLIA, 


that  he  care  for, 
[or  may  care  for.) 

4.  —  Imperfect. 


3d  p.  caUsse, 


if  he  cared  for,  or 
[should  care  for. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

Singular.  Plural. 

V.    IMPERATIVE. 

3d  p.  CAGLIA  cgli,*\\et  him  care  for. 


319 


CaUre  is  generally  used  with  the  conjunctive  pro- 
nouns mi,  1i)  ci,  vi,  gli ;  thus,  mi  cale,  '  I  care  for  '  ;  ci 
caleva,  '  re  cared  for  ' ;  &c. 


CoUre  or  colere. 


1st  p.  (colo), 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Colere  or  colere),  |  to  adore. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 
I  adore ; 


3d  p.  (cole), 


he  adores. 


Lecere  &  licere,  or  Ucere  &  licere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Lecere  &  licere,  or  1  to  be  lawful.  I  \essere  ttcito  or  1  to  be  lawful. 
[lecere  &  licere),  \  \licitoj  \ 

*  As  it  has  been  questioned  whether  calere  is  used  in  the  imperative,  we  cite  from 
the  classics  the  following  examples  to  prove  that  it  is  ao  used  : 

JVon  ve  ne  CA'GLIA  no,  io  so  ben  io  cid        Do  not  trouble  yourselves  about  it,  I 
che  mi/0.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  6.)  know  very  well  what  I  am  doing. 

Del  c6me  non  ti  CA'GLIA,  il  percM  ti        Do  not  trouble  thyself  about  the  how, 


dird.     (Bocc.  Filoc.  6  ) 


I  will  tell  thee  the  why. 


Or  se  frattdnto  —  Son  le  ndstre  castella  Now  if,  in  the  mean  time,  our  castles 
orpprtsse,  e  serve  —  Non  ce  ne  CA'GLIA.  are  oppressed  and  conquered,  let  us  not 
(Tass.  Ger.  6.  11.)  care  about  it. 

t  From  this  form  are  derived  e  lecito,  *  it  is  lawful ' ;  era  or  fu  Idcito, '  it  was  law- 
ful » ;  sard  lecito, '  it  will  be  lawful  '  ;  &c.,  which  are  used  to  supply  the  tenses  in 
which  lecere  is  defective. 


320  ANALOGY. 


If.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


8d  p.  Uce  or  lice,  jit  is  lawful. 


Pavere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Pavere),  |  to  fear. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present* 
3d  p.  (pave),       Ihe  fears.  »' 

SiUre. 

I.  INFINITIVE. 

(Silere),  |  to  be,  or  keep,  silent. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 
1. —  Present. 


2d  P.  (sili), 
3d  p.  (sile), 


thouart,  orkeep- 
[est,  silent ; 
he  is,  or  keeps, 
[silent ', 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS.  321 

SoUre.  . 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Solire,  |to  be  wont.  \\essere  solito,*       |to  be  wont 

GERUND. 

soUndo,  |  being  wont.         || 

II.     INDICATIVE. 


Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  SOGLIO, 
2d  p.  SUOLI, 


I  am  wont ; 
thou  art  wont; 


3d.  p.  SUOLE  (so-  he  is  wont; 


SOGLIAMO   (sole- 


soUte, 

SOGLIONO, 


[mo), 


we  are  wont ; 

you  are  wont  ; 
they  are  wont. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  io  soleva  or  solea,         \  I  was  wont. 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 
1st  p.  10  SOGLIA,  )  that  I  am  wont,  or  may  be  wont. 

2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  10  soUssi,  |  if  I  were  wont,  or  should  be  wont. 


Stupere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Stupere),  |  to  be  astonished. 


*  From  this  form  are  derived  s6no  sdlito,  '  I  nm  wont ' ;  dri  s6litot  *  thou  wast 
wont '  j  &c,,  which  are  often  used  instead  ofsoglio  j  solevi  j  &c. 


322 


ANALOGY. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular,  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 
3d  p.  (stupe),       heisastonished.il  .....  |.   . 


Mgere. 

I.  INFINITIVE. 

(Algere),  |  to  be  chill. 


Istp.(alsi), 
2d  p.  (algesti), 
3d  p.  (alse), 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

I  was  chill  ;          jj  (algemmo), 
thou  wast  chill  j 


he  was  chill  ; 


1  (alsero), 


we  were  chill ; 
you  were  chill ; 
they  were  chill. 


Jlngere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(^.ngere),  j  to  afflict. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 
1 .  —  Present. 


3d  p.  (ange),        |it  afflicts. 


2. — Imperfect. 


3d  p.  (angeva), 


it  afflicted. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


323 


Jlrrogere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

JLrrogere,         |  to  add. 

GERUND.  PARTICIPLE. 

arrogdndo,          jadding.  ||ARROTO;  or  ARRoso,|added. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p. 


3d  p.  arroge, 


he  adds ; 


I  arrog'idmo, 
I  arrogono, 


2.  —  Imperfect. 

let  p.  to  arrogeva  or  arrogea,\l  added. 
3.  _  Perfect . 


1st  p.  ARROSI, 

2d  p.  arrogesti, 
3d  p.  ARROSE, 


I  added ; 


arrogemmo, 


thou  addedst ;         arros;este, 


he  added ; 


|  ARROSERO, 


we  add; 
they  add. 


we  added ; 
you  added ; 
they  added. 


Capere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Capere),  |  to  contain. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


I. 


3d  p.  (cdpe),       lit  contains.  ".   .   .   . 

2.  —  Imperfect. 


8d  p.  (captva), 


it  contained. 


324 


ANALOGY. 


Cher  ere.  * 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Cherere),  |  to  ask. 

II.   INDICATIVE. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  < 


3d  p.  (chere), 


I  ask ; 


he  asks. 


Con  veil  ere. 

I.   INFINITIVE. 

Convellere,  \  to  convulse. 

GERUND.  PARTICIPLE. 

convellendo,        |convulsing.          jj  coNvtiLso,         [convulsed. 

II.     INDICATIVE. 
I.— Present. 


3d  p.  convelle,     Ihe  convulses ;      \\conv6llono,         [they  convulse. 
2.  —  Imperfect. 


3d  p.  convelleva  he  convulsed  ;        convellevano  or 


[or  convell6a,\ 


[convelle  ano, 
4.  —  Future. 


they  convulsed. 


3d  p.  convellerct,\he  shall  or  willi  convellerdnno, 
\  [convulse  ;|| 


they  shall  or  wi 
[convulse 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


325 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


3d  p.  convelldsse, 


if  he  convulsed,| 
or  should  con- 
vulse ; 


convell6sserp) 


if  they  convuls- 
[ed. 


IV.      CONDITIONAL. 

1.  — Present. 


3d  p. 

convelle- 
[rebbe, 

he  should,  would, 
[or  could   con- 
[vulse  ;  or  might 
[convulse  ; 

convellercbbero, 

they  should, 
[would,  or  could 
[convulse. 

Fiedere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Fiedere ,  *  |to  wound. 


GERUND. 

\\fiedendo,  [wounding. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  fi6do, 
2d  p.  fitdi, 
3d  p.  fiede, 


I  wound; 

thou  woundest; 

he  wounds;          \\Ji6dono, 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  lofiedeva  ovfiedea^        \  I  wounded. 


1st  p.fiedti, 


3.  _  Perfect. 

\  I  wounded. 


they  wound. 


*  Ancient  writers  said  also  feggcre,  '  to  wound,  to  strike  ';  from  wliich  aro  de- 
rived the  forms  fdggono,  '  they  strike ';  which  we  meet  in  tho  Jlminacstramenti  ; 
and  feggia,  «  it  strikes,'  in  the  Inferno  of  Dante. 

28 


326 


ANALOGY. 


III.     CONJUNCTIVE. 

Singular.  Plural 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  wfieda       jthat  I  wound  ; 
[(fieggia),j 

3d  p.  eglifieda    that  he  wound  ; 
[(fieggia)J 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
1st  p.  iofiedessiy  \  if  I  wounded. 


that  they  wound 


Lucere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Lucere,  |to  shine. 


GERUND. 

lucendo,  |shining, 


II.     INDICATIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  . 

luciamo, 
Incite, 

\  we  shine  ; 
lyou  shine. 

2d  p.  luci, 
3d  p.  luce, 

thou  shinest; 
he  shines  ; 

2.  —  Ii 

nperfect. 

1st  p.  '\o  luceva, 

I  shone. 

3.—1 

^erftct. 

|  lucemniOy 
\  Iuc6ste, 

we  shone  ; 
you  shone. 

2d  p.  luctsti, 
3do.  . 

thou  shonest  ; 

1st  p.  lucerd, 


4.  —  Future. 

I  I  shall  or  will  shir;e. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


327 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p 

2d  p 

3d  p.  6gli  (luca), 


....  1 1  lucldmo, 

....  I    lucidte, 

that  he  shine  ;      ||  (lucano), 


that  we  shine ; 
that  you  shine ; 
that  they  shine. 


2.  — Imperfect. 
1st  p.  to  lucessi)  |  if  I  shone  or  should  shine. 

IV.    CONDITIONAL. 

1.  • —  Present. 

1st  p.  lucerei  (luceria),        I  if  I  should,  would,  or  could 

[shine ;  or  might  shine. 


(Molcere), 


2d  p.  (molci), 
3d  p.  (molce), 


Molcere. 

I.  INFINITIVE. 

|  to  assuage. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


thou  assuagest  ; 
he  assuages. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w  (molc^- 
[va), 

2d     .  (raolcevi), 
3d  p.  egli  (mol- 
[ceva), 


I  assuaged  ; 

thou  assuagest  ; 
he  assuaged. 


328  ANALOGY. 

Riedere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

Riedere,  \  to  return. 


Singular. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


1st  p.  ritdo, 
2d  p.  riedi, 
3d  p.  riede, 


I  return ; 
thou  returnest ; 
he  returns  ; 


I  riedono, 


they  return. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p<  io  rie"deva\I  returned ; 
[or  riedea, 


2d  p.  riede'vi, 


3d  p.  egli  riedeva  he  returned  ; 
[or  riedea, 


thou  returnedst ; 


riedevano  or  rie- 
\deano, 


they  returned. 


III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


\  st  p.  to  rteda, 
2d  p.  tu  rieda, 


3d  p.  dgli  rieda,  that  he  return  ; 


that  I  return  ;  or  ' 
[may  return  ; 
that  thou  return  ; 


riedanoj 


that  they  return. 


Serpere. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Serpere),  |to  creep/j 


GERUND. 

|  (serpendo),          (creeping. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 


329 


Singular. 


Plural. 


1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  (s6rpo)j 
2d  p.  (serpi), 
3d  p.  (serpe), 


I  creep ; 
thou  creepest ; 
he  creeps ; 


I  (s6rpono), 


they  creep. 


2,  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w  (serpe- 
,[*a), 

2d  p.  (serpevi), 
3d  p.  egli  (serpe- 


thou  creptest  * 

he  crept  ; 

(serpevano), 

they  crept 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  io  (se'rpa). 
2d  p.  tu  (sirpa}, 


that  I  creep  ;    or 
[may  creep  ; 
that  thou  creep ; 
that  he  creep ; 


I  (serpano), 


that  they  creep. 


Soffolcere  or  Soffolgere. 

I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

(Soffolcere     or    to  support.  ||  (soffolto),  Isupported. 

[soffolgere, 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


3d  p.  (soffolce  or 
Isoffolge), 


be  supports. 


3.  —  Perfect. 


3d  p.  (soffol'se,)  I  he  supported. 

28* 


330  ANALOGY. 

Tangere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Tangere),  |  to  touch. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular. 

1,  —  Present. 

3d  p.  (tange),      Ihe  touches.          II 


Plural. 


Tollere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

(Tollere),  |  to  take  away. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


2d  p.  (tolli), 
3d  p.  (tolle), 

thou  takest  awa; 
he  takes  away. 

H  . 

11  

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


2d  p.  tu  (tolla),     that     thou    take 

[away ; 

3d  p.  egli  (tolla),  I  that  he  take  a  way. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


331 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 


3d  p.  (tolla)  egli, 


let     him     take 
[away. 


Estolhre,  '  to  lift '  ;  compound  of  tollere,  is  not  de- 
fective, but  in  the  participle,  and  in  all  the  persons  of 
the  perfect  of  the  indicative. 


Torpere. 

I.  INFINITIVE. 

(Torpere), .  |  to  become  numb. 

II.  INDICATIVE. 
1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  (torpo), 


3d  p.  (torpe), 


I  become  numb ; 


hebecomesnumb.il 

III.    CONJUNCTIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


1st  p.  w  (torpa), 
2d  p.  tu  (torpa), 
3d  p.egft(torpa), 


that     I 


become 

[numb ; 
that  thou  become 

[numb ; 
that  he  become 

[numb. 


332 


Singular. 


ANALOGY. 

/ 
Urgere. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

/ 
Urgere,  \  to  urge. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 


Plural. 


3d  p.  urge,          ]he  urges. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 


3d  p.  egliurgeva  he  urged  ;  urgevano  or  ur-  they  urged, 

[or  urgea,  [gtano, 

Vigere. 

j.  INFINITIVE. 

(Vigere),  |  to  be  vigorous. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

1.  —  Present. 

3d  p   (vige),        I  he  is  vigorous  ;    || 

4.  —  Future. 


3d  p    vigera), 


it  will  be  vigor- 
tons.) 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


333 


Gire. 


I.    INFINITIVE. 

Gire,  |  to  go. 


PARTICIPLE. 
|  gito,  |gone. 


1st  p. 
2dp. 


II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 
....  \\gidmo, 


1st  p.  gwa  or  gia, 


1st  p.  io  gii, 


1st  p.  gird, 


1st  p. 
2d  p. 


we  go; 
you  go. 


2.  —  Imperfect. 
|  I  went. 

3.  —  Perfect. 

|  I  went. 

4.  —  Fidure* 

|  I  shall  or  will  go. 

III.    CONJUNGTIVE. 

1.  —  Present, 
glamo, 
gldte, 


that  we    go,    or 
[may  go  ; 
that  you  go. 


1st  p.  io  gissij 


2.  —  Imperfect. 

|  if  I  went,  or  should  go. 


334 


ANALOGY. 


1st  p.  girei  (giria), 


1st  p. 

2d  p. 


V.     CONDITIONAL. 


I  should,  would,  or  could  go ;  or 
[might  go. 


V.    IMPERATIVE, 


gite, 


let  us  go  ; 
go  ye. 


Ire. 


I.    INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Ire,  |  to  go.  ||  ito,  Igone. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  —  Present. 


2d  p. 


lee, 
2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  10  iva, 


3d  p.  egli  wa, 


I  went ; 


he  went. 


wano, 


2d  p.  istit 
3d  p.   .    . 


3.  —  Perfect. 
thou  wentest ; 


(iro,  ir), 


you  go. 


l- 


we  went. 


they  went. 


1st  p. 


2dp. 
3d  p. 


3d  p. 


2dp. 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 
4.  —  Future. 


335 


Singular. 


ire  mo, 
irete, 


IV.    CONDITIONAL. 


(iriano), 


V.    IMPERATIVE. 


fce, 


Plural. 

we  shall  or  will 

you  will  go ; 
[they  will  go. 


they     should, 
[would,  or  could 
[go  ;    or  might 
[go- 


ye. 


Olire. 

I.    INFINITIVE. 

OZire,  |  to  smell. 

II.    INDICATIVE. 
2.  —  Imperfect. 


1st  p.  w  oliva, 

2d  p.  olivij 

3d  p.  egli  oliva, 


I  ymelied ; 
thou  smelledst ; 
he  smelled. 


I  olivano, 


they  smelled. 


336 


ANALOGY. 


EXAMPLES. 


CALEXDOGLI  vie  piu  la  salute 
propria  che  gV  inter6ssi  de*  Stmi- 
font6si.  (Stor.  Semif.  36.) 

Lo  cuor  che  'n  sul  Tamigi  an- 
cor  si  COLA.  Dant.  Inf.  12.  — 
COLA,  doe  COLE.  (Buti.  Com. 
Dant.) 

Quanlunque  alia  natura  umd- 
na  LECE  —  Jiver  di  lume.  (Dant. 
Par.  13.) 

E  dfr  nemwi  PATE  e  d6'  sog- 
gttti.  (Tass.  Ger.  1.  83.) 

Preso  dalnuovo  canto,  STUPE  e 
SILE.  (Boez.  Varch.  3.  12.) 

I'o  dubito  che  Vossignoria  non 
dblia  occupdto  il  primo  luogo 
nella  grazia  di  Siia  Beatitiidinc, 
il  qudle  SDLEVA  tssere  il  mio. 
(Cas.  lett.  19.) 

ALSI  ed  drsi  gran  tempo. 
(Varch.  Rim.  3.) 

Tdnta  paura  e  duol  V  alma 
trista  ANGE.  (Petr.  s.  236.) 

ARROSERO  gtrte  nuova  per  sei 
Priordti.  (Giov.  Vill.  9.  2.) 

Se  di  saper  ch'  w  siq,  ti  CAL, 
cotdnto.  (Dant.  Inf.  19.) 

Chi  sa  come  difende  e  come 
fere, —  Soccorso  d'  suoi  perigli 
dltro  non  CHERE.  (Tass.  Ger.  2. 
85.) 

Dopo  alcuni  strdni  avvolgimdn- 
ti  cased  morta,  CONVULSA  e  in- 
tirizzita.  (Red.  Vip.  1.  83.) 

"  O  figliuol,"  disse,  "  qudl  di 
qu6sta  greggia — 6"  arresta  pun- 
to,  gidce  poi  cent'  dnni  —  Sdn- 
za  arrostdrsi  qudndo  '/  foco  il 
FEGGIA."  (Dant.  Inf.  15.) 


Caring  more  for  his  own  safety 
than  for  the  interests  of  the  Seini- 
phontians. 

That  heart  which  is  yet  honored 
on  the  [bank  of  the]  Thames. 


Whatever  of  light  is  allowed  to 
human  nature. 


And  fears  both  his  enemies  and 
his  subjects. 

Transported  by  the  new  song, 
he  is  astonished  and  keeps  silent. 

I  doubt  whether  your  Lordship 
has  not  occupied  the  first  place  in 
the  favor  of  His  Holiness,  which 
was  wont  to  be  mine. 


I  was  chill  and  burned  for  a  great 
while. 

So  much  fear  and  grief  afflicts 
my  sad  soul. 

They  added  new  people  for  six 
successive  Piiorates. 

If  it  imports  thee  so  much  to 
know  who  I  am. 

He  who  knows  how  It  [the  hand 
of  God]  defends,  and  how  it  of- 
fends, asks  no  other  assistance  in 
his  perils. 

After  some  strange  whirlings,  she 
fell  down  dead,  convulsed  and  stiff 
with  cold. 

"  O  son,"  said  he,  "  whoever  of 
this  throng  stops  one  instant,  lies 
then  a  hundred  years,  without  any 
ventilation,  when  the  fire  smites 
him." 


DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 


337 


LUCE  VAN-  gli  occhi  suoi  piii 
the  la  Stella.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

E  gia  il  sole  a  mezza  t6rza 
RIEDE.  (Dant.  Inf.  34.) 

Chi  pud  dir  come  SERF  A,  o 
come  crdsca, —  Gia  da  piu  Idti  il 
foco  1  (Tass.  Ger.  12.  45.) 

Perche  la  vista  tua  pur  si  SOF- 
FOLGE —  Lag giii  tra  V  ombre  tri- 
ste  smozzicdte  ?  (Dant.  Inf.  29.) 

fo  sonfdtta  da  Dio,  sua  tnerce, 
tale  —  Che  la  vostra  miseria  non 
mi  TANGE.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

Che  dona  e  TOLLE  ogni  dltro 
benfortuna.  (Arios.  Fur.  27.  84.) 

S\  la  gran  front  e  e  le  gran  cor- 
na  ESTOJLLE.  (Tass.  Ger.  4.  7.) 

Jf  Greci  —  Ilfavellar  non  TOR- 
PE  infra  le  Idbbra.  (Buon.  Fier. 
2.5.5.) 

Che  V  una  pdrte  e  V  dltra  tira 
ed  URGE —  Tin  tin  sondndo  con 
s\  dolce  nota.  (Dant.  Par.  10.) 

Per  mostrdre  che  la  caritd  sent- 
pre  VIGERA  in  loro.  (But.  Par. 
7.) 

E  la  ingegnosa  pecchia^  al  pri~ 
mo  albore  —  GIVA  preddndo  or 
uno  or  dltro  fiore.  (Poliz.  St.  1. 
25.) 

ITE,  cdldi  sosp'iritalfreddo  core. 
(Petr.  s.  120.) 

Mescoldto  insi&me  con  quello 
di  molte  dltre  cose,  che  per  lo 
giardino  OLIVANO.  (Bocc.  g.  3.) 


Her  eyes  were  brighter  than  the 
star  [of  day]. 

And  now  the  sun  returns  within 
one  hour  and  a  half  of  noon. 

Who  can  say  how  the  fire 
creeps,  and  already  increases  on 
every  side. 

Why  dost  thou  fasten  thy  sight 
below  among  the  maimed  and 
miserable  shades  ? 

I  am  so  made  by  God,  thanks 
to  his  grace,  that  no  sufferance  of 
your  misery  touches  me. 

For  fortune  gives  and  takes 
away  every  other  good. 

So  high  he  raises  his  great  brow 
and  horns. 

To  the  Greeks  the  speech  does 
not  languish  in  their  lips. 

In  which  the  one  part  draws  and 
the  other  pushes,  sending  out  a 
tinkling  sound  of  note  so  sweet. 

To  show  that  charity  will  al- 
ways be  in  vigor  among  them. 

And  the  industrious  bee,  at  the 
first  dawn,  was  rifling  now  this 
and  now  the  other  flower. 


Go,  warm  sighs,  to  the  cold 
heart. 

Mingled  with  the  scent  of  many 
other  things,  which  through  the 
garden  spread  their  fragrance. 


As  most  of  the  foregoing  defective  verbs  are  of  rare  occurrence,  and 
can  be  used  with  propriety  only  in  verse,  an  Exercise  upon  them  has 
been  here  thought  needless. 
29 


338  ANALOGY. 


GENERAL    REMARKS    ON    ITALIAN    VERBS. 

Verbs,  which  in  the  infinitive  end  in  are,  ere  or  ere, 
ire  ;  as  /A'RE,  '  to  make  '  ;  tessvRE,  '  to  weave  '  ;  WC/I'RE, 
1  to  hear  '  ;  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, except  z  or  s  followed  by  another  consonant. 
often  drop  the  last  vowel  ;  as, 

FAR  mfesa,  to  make  defence  ; 

TESSER  Fiscette,  to  weave  baskets  ; 

UDIR  novella,  to  hear  news. 

Those  verbs,  which,  by  contraction,  end  in  arre,  orre, 
tirre;  as,  ^A'RRE  from  traere,  '  to  draw'  ;  imponnE  from 
imponere,  'to  impose';  tnfrWu'RRt  from  introducere, 
'  to  introduce  '  ;  drop  the  last  syllable  ;  as, 

TRAR  Non  puote,  he  cannot  draw  ; 

IMPOR  leggi,  to  impose  laws  ; 

INTRODU'R  costume,  to  introduce  a  custom. 

The  first  and  third  persons  plural  of  tenses  of 
verbs  ending  in  mo,  and  no,  ro  ;  as,  erai'aivio,  '  we 
were  '  ;  parlavaxo,  c  they  spoke  '  ;  caddeno  c  they  fell  '  ; 
often  drop  the  last  vowel  ;  as, 

ERAVAM  rartiti,  we  had  departed  ; 

PARLAY  AN  Rado,  they  spoke  seldom  ; 

they  fell  into  the  boiling  lake. 


Those  persons  which  end  in  nno;~  as,  saranno,  l  they 
will  be  '  ;  hanno,  c  they  have  '  ;  drop  the  last  sylla- 
ble ;  as, 

tutti  SARAN  serrdli,  they  shall  all  be  closed  ; 

V  HAN  prdprio  a  noia,  they  really  hate  him. 

Infinitives  of  verbs,  and  the  first  and  third  persons 
plural  of  their  tenses,  drop  constantly  the  last  vowel 


REMARKS  ON  VERBS.  339 

or  syllable,  when  they   are  followed  by  a   conjunctive 
pronoun  ;  as, 

FARLARne,  to  speak  of  it ; 

AND i AM vi,  let  us  go  thither  ; 

they  assisted  me  ; 

they  gave  him. 

The  third  person  singular  of  the  present  of  the  in- 
dicative of  the  verbs  calcre,  6  to  care  for ' ;  dolere,  '  to 
grieve  '  ;  rimanere,  '  to  remain  '  ;  solere,  '  to  be  wont ' ; 
tenere,  '  to  hold  ' ;  valere,  '  to  be  worth  ' ;  volere,  '  to 
be  willing  ' ;  venire  '  to  come  '  ;  and  the  second  person 
singular  of  the  imperative  of  the  verbs  rimanere,  tenere, 
venire;  drop  the  last  vowel,  especially  when  they  are 
followed  by  a  conjunctive  pronoun ;  as, 

se  vi  CAL  m"  me,  if  you  care  for  me ; 

vuoLti  ch?  10  ti  vinco  ?  does  it  grieve  thee  that  I  con- 

quer thee  ? 

suoLmi  abbaglidre,  it  is  wont  to  dazzle  me ; 

-    TIEN  DaZ  Cie/o,  she  holds  from  Heaven  ; 

RiMANfa*  con  n6i,  remain  with  us  ; 

non  si  VUOL  Dire,  it  must  not  be  said  ; 

viENwe  qua,  come  [thence]  hither. 

The  first  person  singular  of  the  present  of  the  indica- 
tive of  the  verb  e'ssere,  ;  to  be  '  ;  and  the  second  person 
singular  of  the  imperative  of  the  verb  ponere,  '  to  put '  ; 
drop  the  last  vowel,  and  \\henfollowed  by  the  conjunc- 
tive pronoun  mi,  they  change  n  into  m  ;  as, 

r  SON  colei,  I  am  she  ; 

poivmi  6ve  n  Sol  uccide  i    put  me  where  the  sun  kills  the 
fiori,  flowers. 

All  forms  of  verbs  followed  by  a  conjunctive  pronoun 
(as  we  have  already  observed,  p.  110,  and  the  foregoing 
examples  clearly  show,)  are  joined  to  them  so  as  to  form 
one  single  word.  Now,  if  the  form  of  the  verb  consists 


340  ANALOGY. 

of  one  syllable  ;  as,  c,  '  it  is  '  ;  ha  or  a,  '  it  has  ' ;  dV, 
1  tell  thou  '  ;/a', '  make  thou  ' ;  sa,  '  he  or  it  knows  ;  '$vo, 
*  I  go ' ;  &c. ;  or  if  it  bears  the  accent  on  the  last  sylla- 
ble ;  as,  diro,  '  I  will  tell ' ;  mostro,  '  he  showed  '  ;  &c.  ; 
in  being  joined  to  a  conjunctive  pronoun,  the  consonant 
of  the  pronoun  is  doubled^  and  the  accent  when  mark- 
ed is  suppressed ;  as, 

cvt>i  cadiUo  ddlla  memoria  ?       has  it  escaped  from  your  mind  ? 

haumi  a  tal  condutto,  she  has  reduced  me  to  such  a 

condition ; 

avvi  letti,  there  are  beds  ; 

ij  ma&stro  mio,  tell  me,  my  master ; 

ti  ben  sentire,  make  thyself  to  be  heard  well ; 

Iddio,  God  knows  it ; 

a  guisa  (ToV6o,  I  go  on  like  a  blind  man  ; 

diroTti  perch*  V  venni,  I  will  tell  thee  why  I  came  ; 

mostrocci  un1  6mbrar  he  showed  us  a  spirit. 


EXCEPTION. 


The  g  of  the  pronoun  glit  is  never  doubled,  although  the  accent 
of  the  verb  is  always  suppressed;  as, 

MANDOGLI  dicendo,  sent  him  word. 


The  forms  trai,  '  thou  d rawest '  or  i  draw  thou  ' ;  trae, 
6  he  or  it  draws  ' ;  of  the  verb  traere  or  trarre^  '  to  draw  ' ; 
when  joined  to  a  conjunctive  pronoun,  drop  the  last 
vowel,  and  require  that  the  consonant  of  the  pronoun  be 
doubled  ;  as, 

frawNe  lo  Scricca,  except  Scricca ; 

frctMMt  di  mortal  letdrgo,  it  draws  me  from  a  mortal  leth- 

argy. 

Finally,  infinitives  of  verbs,  like  present  participles  in 
English,  are  often  used  in  Italian  as  substantives ;  as, 
il parlare,  c  the  speaking' ;  /'  abbracciare,  «  the  embrac- 
ing' ;  il  favellare,  '  the  manner  of  speaking  ' ;  and  then 


REMARKS  ON  VERBS. 


341 


have   a  plural,   which   they  form   like  substantives,  by 
changing  e  into  i;  as, 

li  sdzzi  parldn,  immodest  [speakings  or]  con- 

versations ; 

gli  abbraccidn,  the  [embraeings  or]  embraces ; 

i  proprj  favelldri,  one's  own  manners  of  speaking. 


EXAMPLES. 


Dindnzi  a  lui  non  Me  — 
NASCONDER,  ne  FUGGIR,  ne  FAR 
DIFESA.  (Petr.  s.  203.) 

E  vede  un  uom  c.anuto  alV  om- 
bre amene —  TESSER  FISCELLE 
dlla  sua  greggia  accdnto.  (Tass. 
Ger.  7.  6.) 

Ed  ilia  —  Di  questa  cosa  UDIR 
Non  vuol  NOVELLA.  (Bern.  Oil. 
1.9.) 

TRAR  Motto  il  debit  fidnco  oltra 
NON  PUOTE.  (Tass.  Ger.  19.  28.) 


E  ttggi  imporre,  ed  i: 
COSTUME, —  Ed  drti  e  culto    di 
verdce  JVwme.     (Tass.  Ger.  1.  9.) 

Noi  ERAVAM  PARTITI  gid  da 
ello.  (Dant.  Inf.  32.) 

PARLAVAN  RADO  convoci  sodvi. 
(Dant.  Inf.  4.) 

E  amendue  —  GADDER  NEL 
mezzo  del  BOLLENTE  STAGNO. 
(Dant.  Inf:  22.) 

Tt/TTI  SARAN   SERRATI Qudll- 

do    di  JosaffoL    qu\    tornerdnno. 
(Dant.  Inf.  10.) 

Tdnto  L'^HAN  PROPRIO  i  suoi 
figliuoli  A  NOIA.  (Bern.  Rim.) 

29* 


Before  him  it  does  not  avail  to 
conceal,  to  fly,  or  to  make  defence. 

And  she  sees  a  hoary  old  man  in 
the  pleasant  shade,  weaving,  bas- 
kets by  the  side  of  his  flock. 

And  she  does  not  wish  to  hear 
speaking  about  this  thing. 

He  cannot  draw  his  feeble  frame 
much  further. 

And  to  impose  laws,  and  to  in- 
troduce customs,  and  arts,  and  the 
worship  of  the  true  God. 

We  had  already^  departed  from 
him. 

They  spoke  seldom,  but  withjme- 
lodious  voices. 

And  both  fell  into  the  middle  of 
the  boiling  lake. 

They  [the  sepulchres]  shall  all 
be  closed,  when  they  [the  spirits] 
shall  have  once  more  come  here, 
returning  from  Jehosaphat. 

So  much  his  own  children  hate 
him. 


ANALOGY. 


£gli  mi  pidte  di  PARLARNE. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

AND  i AM vi,  ben  mi  pidce  [di 
vederlo].  (Nov.  Ant.) 

AIUTARONMI  elle  bine.  (Bocc. 
g.  4.  Proem. ) 

DlEDERGLI  (BOCC.  g.    7.  D.  4.) 

SB  vi  CAL  DI  ME,  venite  meco 
bino  a  paldgio.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n  5.) 

Che  avesti,  Anichino  1  DUOLTI 
cos\  CH'  io  TI  VINCO  ?  (Boee.  g. 
7.  n.  7.) 

Morte  ha  spinto  qu&l  sol,  che 

ABBAGL1AR  SUOLMI.      (Petr.  S.  111. 

E  'I  nobile  ing£gno  che  DAL, 
CIELO  —  Per  grdzia  TIEN  deir 
immortdle  Apollo.  .  (Petr.  c.  5.) 

StdtTi  C  RIMANTI  CONKOl^Se  ti 

pidce.    (Vit.  SS.  PP.  2.  317.) 

Comdre,  egli  NON  si  VUOL  DIRE. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  2.) 

Jldridno  disse :  "  5i,  VIENJVE 
QUA."  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  6.) 

I'  SON  COLEI,  che  ti  die  tdnta 
guerra.  (Petr.  s.  261.) 

POMMI    OVE    'L     SOL     UCCIDE    I 

FIORI  e  n  erba.     (Petr.  s.  113.; 
Ora  EVVI  cosi  tosto  DALLA.  ME- 

MORIA     CADUTO  ?       (BOCC.    g.     10. 

n.  6.) 

E1  gita.  al  Cidlo  ;  ed  HAMMI  A 
TAL  CONDUTTO.  (Petr.  s.  247.) 

Ed  AVVI  LETTI,  che  vi  parrib- 
ber  piit  b6lli  che  quelli  del  Doge 
di  Vinegia.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

DlMMI,  MAESTRO  MIO  !    DIMMI, 

!     (Dant.  Inf.  4.,) 


It  pleases  me  to  speak  of  it. 

Let  us  go  [thither],  1  should  be 
glad  to  see  it. 

They  assisted  me  well. 

They  gave  him. 

If  you  care  for  me,  come  with 
me  as  far  as  the  palace. 

What  ails  thee,  Am'chino  ?  Does 
it  grieve  thee  thus  that  I  conquer 
thee  ? 

Death  has  extinguished  that  sun, 
which  is  wont  to  dazzle  me. 

And  the  noble  mind  which  he 
holds  from  Heaven,  through  the 
favor  of  the  immortal  Apollo. 

Stay  and  remain  with  us,  if  thou 
likest. 

Gossip,  it  must  not  be  said. 


Adrian  said :  "  Yes,  come  [thence] 
hither." 

I  am  she,  who  caused  you  so 
much  grief. 

Put  me  where  the  sun  kills  the 
flowers  and  the  herbage. 

Now  has  it  so  soon  escaped  from 
your  mind  ? 


She  is  gone  to  Heaven;  and 
has  reduced  me  to  such  a  condition. 

And  there  are  beds,  which  would 
appear  to  you  better  than  those  of 
the  Doge  of  Venice. 

Tell  me,  my  master  !  tell  me, 
my  sire  I 


REMARKS  ON  VERBS. 


343 


Grida  forte,  FATTI  BEN   SEN- 
TIRE.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  6.) 


Cry  out  loud,  make  thyself  to  be 
beard  well. 


SALLO  IDDIO.   (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  5.)         God  knows  it. 


VOMMENE  A  GUISA  D*  ORBO  SCTl- 

za  luce.     (Petr.) 

DIROTTI  PERCH'  £'  VENNI,  e 
quel  ch'  w  'ntesi.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

MOSTROCCI  UN*  OMBRA  dalV  UH 

canto  sola.     (Dant.  Inf.  12.) 

E  per  Uttera  MANPOGLI  DICEN- 
DO,  cne  da  Brandizio  si  dovesse 
levdre.  (Gio.  Vill.) 

TRANNE  LO  SCRICCA,  —  Che  sep- 
pe  far  le  moderate  spese.  (Dant. 
Inf.  29.) 

O'do  to  la  voce  —  Di  David  ? 
.  .  .  TRAMMI  DI  MORTAL  LETAR- 
GO.  (Alf.  Saul.  3.  4.) 

E  *I«    SUO    PARLARE,  e  'I  bel  VI' 

so>  e  le  chidme  —  Mi  pidcquer  si 
(Petr.  c.  7.) 

Non  hdnno  parole  ne  FAVELLA- 
RI  PROPRJ.  (Varch.  Ercol.  329.) 

Li  sozzi  PARLARI  corrompono 
li  buoni  costumi.  (Albert,  c.  10.) 

Le  ttnere.  Idgrime,  GLI  ABBRAC- 
CIARI,  e  gli  onesti  bdci.  (Bocc. 
g.  2.  n.  5!) 

O  elttti  di  Dio  /  gli  cui  SOFFRI- 
RI  —  E  giustizia  e  sperdnza  fdn 
men  durit  —  Drizzate  noi  verso 
GLI  ALTI  SALIRI.  (Dant.  Pur.  19.) 


I  go  on  like  a  blind  man  without 
light. 

I  will  tell  thee  why  I  came,  and 
what  I  heard. 

He  showed  us  a  spirit  by  itself 
retired  apart. 

And  send  him  word  by  letter, 
that  he  should  depart  from  Brun- 
dusium. 

Except  Scricca,  who  knew  how 
to  lay  out  his  fortune  temperate- 
ly- 

Do  I  hear  the  voice  of  David  ? 

It  draws  me  from  a  mortal 

lethargy. 

And  her  conversation,  and  her 
beautiful  countenance,  and  her  hair 
pleased  me  so  ..... 

They  have  neither  words  nor 
manners  of  speaking  of  their  own. 

Immodest  conversations  corrupt 
good  morals. 

The  affectionate  tears,  the  em- 
braces, and  the  chaste  kisses. 


O  ye  elect  of  God  !  whose  suf- 
ferings  both  justice  and  hope  rniti- 
gate,  direct  our  way  towards  the 
steep  ascents. 


344  ANALOGY. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

PARTICIPLES. 

ITALIAN  participles  may  be  considered  either  as  forms 
of  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived,  or  as  adjec- 
tives. 

Considered  as  adjectives,  'they  follow  the  same  rules 
as  adjectives  with  regard  to  gender  and  number. 

Present  participles  end  in  e,  are  of  the  common  gen- 
der, and  form  the  plural  by  changing  e  into  i  ;  as, 

{imperator^    trionfantE,  m.   s., 
*»*  tfiS*$Lf.3%& 
[ing  militia  ; 

[uomim    tempestdnti,    m.     p., 


[tost  ships. 

Present  participles  are  sometimes  used  substantively,  as,  amdnte, 
1  lover  '  ;  ascoltdnti,  '  listeners  '  ;  they  follow  however  invariably  the 
same  rule. 


Past  participles  end  in  o,  are  masculine,  and  become 
feminine  by  changing  o  into  a  ;  they  form  the  plural  by 
changing  o  into  t,  and  a  into  e  ;  as, 


fordto,  >    -0  „  ,1  .    S  mewbro  fordto,  m.  s.,  pierced  limb  ; 
fcrdtA,  5  P  ;    (  golA.  fordti,  f.  s.,  pierced  throat  ; 

acc6si,  )  .  •    .1   j  .   J  cwori  acc£si,  m.  p.,  kindled  hearts  ; 
access,  )    l          '   \fidmmE  access,  f.  p.,  kindled  flames. 

Some  verbs  have  a  future  participle  ;  as,  duraturo,  *  to  last  '  ; 
fatturo,  '  about  to  do  '  ;  futuro,  l  future  ',  or  '  to  be  '  ;  perituro,  l  about 
to  perish  '  j  venturo,  l  about  to  come  '  ;  which  follow  the  same  rul  es 
as  past  participles. 


Many  past  participles  of  verbs  of  ihe  first  conjugation 
are  frequently  contracted  ;  as,  cerco  for  cercato,  '  search- 


PARTICIPLES.  345 

ed  *  ;  desto  for  destato.  '  awakened  '  ;  mozzo  for  wiozzato, 
'cut  off'  ;  &c.  ;  these,  when  contracted,  are  alike  the 
first  person  of  the  present  tense  of  the  indicative  mood, 
and  are  subject  to  the  same  inflections  as  the  other  par- 
ticiples which  are  not  so  ;  as, 

[»o]  ctrco,  I  search  ;  cerco,  searched  ; 

[io]  ddsto,  I  awake  ;  desto,  awaken  ; 

[»o]  mozzo,  I  cut  off;  mozzo,  cut  off: 

dtsto,  awaken  ;  worno  dtsto,  m.  s.,  man  awakened  ; 

mozzji,  cut  off;  mdno  mozzA,  f.  s.,  hand  cut  off; 

c6rch.E,  searched  ;  provmcE  cdrc^E,  f.  p.,  provinces 

[searched. 

Italian  participles  agree  with  substantives    in  gender 
and  number;  as, 


mentE  avvtzzAi  *  mind  accustomed  ; 

rdggi  perduti,  rays  lost  ; 

COSE  saputE,  things  known  ; 

COSE  dtttE,  things  said. 

[For  a  List  of  Contracted  Participles,  see  APPENDIX  I.] 


Italian  participles  when  used  as  adjectives  form  their 
comparatives  and  superlatives,  according  to  the  rules 
already  given  ;  as, 

lucente,  bright;  PIUL  LUCENTE,  more  bright; 

nocente,  guilty ;  ME.VO  NOCE.VTE,  less  guilty  ; 

arndto,  loved ;  MOLTO  AMATO,  very  much  loved ; 

riverito,  revered  ;  IL  PIU  RI VERITO,  the  most  revered  j 

intend6nte,  versed ;  INTENDENTJSSIMO,      very     well 

[versed. 


346 


ANALOGY. 


EXAMPLES. 


Sicche  'I  tuo  cuor,  quantunque 
pud,  giocondo  —  S'  appresenti 

alia     TURBA     TRIONFANTE, Che 

lieta  men  per  questo  etera  tondo. 
(Dant.  Par.  22.) 

Una  ndveportdnte  UOMINI  TEM- 

PESTANTI,    PERICOLANTI,    SOGGIA- 

CENTI  a  tdnti  marosi.  (Giov.  Vill. 
1.  11.  c.  3.) 

Qudndo  leggemmo  il  disidto 
riso  —  Esuer  bad  at  o  da  cotdnto 
AMANTE.  (Dant.  Inf.  5.) 

do,  die  avvcnuto  era,  distmta- 
mente  narro,  con  gran  maramglia 

degH    ASCOLTANTI.       (BOCC.  g.   10. 

n.  4.) 

.  .  .  E  qual  FORATO  suo  MEM- 
BRO,  e  qudl  TA&LT.o  —  Mostrdsse, 
d'agguaglidr  sarebbe  nulla  —  // 
modo  del  la  nona  bolgia  sozzo. 
(Dant.  Inf.  23.) 

Un  dltro  che  FORATA  av6a  la 
COLA.  (Dant.  Inf.  28.) 

Superbia,  invidia,  e  avarizia 
sono  —  Le  tre  famlle  c'  hdnno  i 
CUORI  ACCESI.  (Dant.  Inf.  6.) 

E  vdde  presso  a  s&  le  FIAMME 
ACCESE.  (Dant.  Inf.  23.) 

E  che  il  principe  ne  nomindsse 
dodici,  DURATURI  cinque  dnni. 
(Dav.  Tac.  Ann.  2.  40.) 

Eat  to  avea  prima  e  poi  era 
FATTURO.  (Dant.  Par.  6.) 

Tempo  FUTTJRO  m9  e  gid  nel 
cospdtto.  (Dant.  Pur.  23.) 

Piu  ardentemente  cercano  i  se- 
coldri  le  cose  PERITVRE,  che  noi 
le  utili.  (Cavalc.  Espos.  Simb.  1.) 

Vigil  ate  d1  ogni  tempo,  sicche 
sidte  degni  di  fugg'ire  V  ira  VEN- 
TTJRA,  (Cavalc.  Frutt.  Ling.) 


So  that  thy  heart  should  present 
itself  as  joyful  as  it  can  to  the  tri- 
umphant militia  [church],  which 
joyfully  proceeds  through  this 
round  space. 

A  ship  carrying  men,  wrecked, 
endangered  and  subject  to  so  many 
storms. 

When  we  read  of  those  dear  lips 
so  rapturously  kissed  by  one  so 
deep  iii  love. 

He  related  distinctly  what  had 
happened,  to  the  great  wonder  of 
the  listeners. 

.  .  .  And  if  some  should  have  a 
limb  pierced,  and  some  cut  off,  they 
could  badly  equal  the  vile  mode  of 
punishment  of  the  ninth  bolge. 

Another  who  had  his  throat 
pierced. 

Pride,  envy,  and  avarice  are  the 
three  sparks  which  have  kindled 
their  hearts. 

And  sees  near  her  the  flames 
kindled. 

And  that  the  prince  should  ap- 
point twelve  of  them,  who  were  to 
las.t  [or  remain  in  office]  five  years. 

He  had  done  [that  sign],  and 
afterward  he  was  to  do  again. 

Future  time  is  already  in  my 
presence. 

Men  in  the  world  seek  with  more 
eagerness  perishable  things,  than 
we  do  useful  ones. 

Be  always  diligent  that  you 
may  deserve  to  avoid  approaching 
wrath. 


PARTICIPLES. 


347 


£,  essdndo  DESTO,  gli  pdr- 
ve  seniire  scdndere  nella  cdsa  per- 
sone.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

Uny  ch*  avea  V  una  e  V  6Ura 
MAN  MOZZA.  (Dant.  Inf.  28.) 

Av&ndo  CERCHE  molte  PROVINCE 
Cristidne.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

Lassdi  quil,  ch*  i'  piu  brdmo  ; 
ed  ho  si  AVVEZZA  —  La  MENTE  a 
contempldr  sola  costei.  (Petr.  s. 
93.) 

Avio.  la  luna  PERDUTI  i  RAGGI 
Bu6i.  (Petr.  c.  38.) 

I'o  non  ho  qu,6ste  COSE  SAPtJTE 
da*  vicini,  el  la  medesinia  niele  ha 
DETTE..  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

Ond*  6llaf6ssi  — LUCENTE  PIU 
assdi  di  quel  ch*  eW  era.  (Dant. 
Par.  5.) 

E'ssa  tdnto  piu  impazi&nte 
sosteneva  quista  noia,  qudnto 
MENO  si  sentiva  NOCENTE.  (Bocc. 
g.  7.  n.  5.) 

0  MOLTO  AMATO  cuore,  ogni 
mio  vfficio  verso  te  &  fornito. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

Tra  i  qndli  il  maggiore  e  IL  PIU 
RIVERITO  da  tutti,  a  quelle  stagio- 
ni,  6ra  Jdcopo  di  Carino.  (Matt. 
Vill.  1.  72.) 

Aristofane  &  persona  INTEN- 
DENTISSIMA  —  Delia  sci'ittura. 
(Cecch.  Spir.  5.  5.) 


Because,  being  awake,  he  seem- 
ed to  hear  people  descend  into  the 
house. 

One  who  had  the  one  and  the 
other  hand  cut  off. 

Having  searched  through  many 
Christian  provinces. 

I  left  what  I  desire  most,  and 
I  have  my  mind  so  accustomed  to 
contemplate  her  alone. 

The  moon  had  lost  her  rays. 

I  have  not  heard  these  things 
from  the  neighbours,  she  herself 
has  told  them  to  me. 

Whence  she  became  far  more 
bright  than  she  had  been. 

She  bore  this  vexation  so  much 
the  more  patiently,  the  less  she  felt 
guilty. 

O  very  much  loved  heart,  I  have 
done  towards  thee  all  that  I  could. 

Amongst  whom  the  greatest  and 
the  most  revered  by  all,  at  that 
time,  was  Jacopo  di  Carino. 

Aristophanes  is  a  person  very 
well  versed  in  writing. 


348  ANALOGY. 


EXERCISE    XXII. 

Before      (to    the)     his     eyes     they     slew    her     crying 
Presente  suo2    occkio1        svendre*        el(a?    griddre4 

for    mercy     and     assistance.    To    him,     residing1     in     Flan- 

—  mcrce5  .aiiito7.  6gli,      dimordre  Fidn- 

ders,     cnme     a     desire    I  to  I    hear.        Apollo    holding-    that 
dra,       venire    —    vogtia      \  di  \    senlire.  tenure     quello3 

part  of  the  Heaven,  which   he    nov/    traverses,   was    embel- 
pdrte4        1       Ciclo2,  —     6ra      trascurrere,  abbel- 

lishing  more  (the)  their    works.     In  a  book  which  I     intend 
lirt4        piu1  lavoro3.  libra  intendere 

I  to  I     make,      God     granting-     it,     on     vulgar        eloquence. 
di  I     /are,         Dio      concedere     — ,     di     volgdre        tloquenza. 

It    happened    that    durmg  the     war     the  queen   of   France 

—  Jlvvenire  durdre  guerra  reina  Frdncia 

I    fell    very     sick. 
I  ammalo    graveminte. 

After      that       the      lady      had      made      herself    to     be 
Poicchb  donna    avdre2  fdre*        si1  pre- 

besought    very    much.    They          had    I      all     their     heads 
gdre?  assdi3.  Esso  essere  \      tutto  

surrounded     I    with    I     oak      leaves  —  leaves     of     oak. 
inghirlanddre5  \      di1       \     fonda2       3      qu6rcia4. 

(The)     my     skin     is          bronzed      (  on       me  ),     and      (the) 
mio    pelie    essere    abbrunire  sopra  di    iot 

my     bones     are       dried     up    I   on    account    of  I    the     heat 
osso      essert4   diseccdre5  per1  \        2    cdldo3. 

Nor    were     the     faults     of    the     Vitellians      punished,     but 
JVd        esstre  fdlta  Vitellidno        pumre,  ma 

well    paid     I  on   I     the     other    side.       The    jealous      man 
ben       pagdre  \  da    \  dltro     pdrte.  2        gdoso*  Messer1 


had       put       some     little     stones    in    I  his 
averc5  mettert6  alciina7        pietra*  9     |  *'4 


mouth.    There 
bocca.        


is          a      tree       more     above,  I  whose    fruit  I    was        bitten 
essere9  —     Legno1  piu        sit,  che          \   essere    mordent 


ADVERBS. 


349 


by    Eve. 
Eva. 


How  many     versos     I     have     already       spread 
Quanta  verso     —     avere       gia  spar- 


verso 

about.     All     were     beaten     with  (the)  rods  in    the     middle 

gere.       Tulto   essere   Idttere  verga  mezzo 

of   the  square,  and     had  (the)  their  head  cut    off.      They 

piazza,  avtre      2      testa3  taglidre1.       

have      promised,     and      sold       me  to     a  merchant,  who 

avere2   promettere3,      4       vtndcre5    M'1  mercdnte, 


is        to 
de'5 


Let 


the 

3 


carry 
portdr3 

ages 
eta.* 


me 
mi4 


to    the     Sultan     in    the    Levant. 
1      Solddno2  —      Levdnte. 


to     come 
venire? 


judge       from      this    who 
estimdre2         Quinci1  6 


Otho  was.         The     present     (age     shall    hear)     and     the 

Ottone8  esserc1.         5        presente7       mondo6        udire*        —          9 

future  ages     shall     hear     (the)     my    protestations. 

6sserel°  —  udirv8  2       protesto3. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

ADVERBS. 

SIMPLE     ADVERBS     IN     COMMON     USE. 

Adverbs  of  Time. 


n~r»' 

Uggi, 

to-day  ; 

dianziJl 

^ 

iM*, 

yesterday  ; 

innanzi,\ 

>  before  ; 

domani,* 

to-morrow  ; 

prima, 

) 

dm, 

1 

teste, 

just  now  ; 

adisso, 

>  now  ; 

jodi,§ 

mo,f 

) 

ddpo,\\ 

>  afterwards  ; 

p6sciay 

5 

*  From  the  Latin  de  and  mane.  f  From  the  Latin  modo. 

I  From  <&,  in,  and  the  Latin  ante  :  —  the  Celtic  ant, l  opposite.' 
$  From  the  Latin  pone :  —  the  Celtic  bwo  or  6on,  changed  into  yon,  '  the  last.* 
j|  From  the  Celtic  do,  «  after,'  and  pan,  « the  last.' 

30 


350 

sempre,* 

mat, 

spesso, 

sovtvtej 

talvdlla, 

tcddra, 


tuitora, 
ognpra, 
allora, 
subito, 


ANALOGY. 

always  ; 

tosto, 

never  ; 

presto, 

often  : 

adagio, 

passo, 

sometimes  ; 

pertempo, 
tdrdi, 

c-till  • 

intdnto, 

always  ; 

frattdnto, 

then; 

mentre, 

immediately  ; 

soon ; 
quick  ; 

>  slow ; 

early ; 

late  ; 

already ; 
?  in  the  mean 
\      time; 

whilst. 


Adverbs  of  Place. 


aufc'                   here,  hither  ; 

altrove, 
altronde, 

>  elsewhere  ; 

£A                     there,  thither  ; 

ovunque, 
dovunque, 

>  wherever  ; 

co|                    there,  thither; 

su, 
giu, 

up; 
down  ; 

cofd                 there  near  you; 

sopra,** 

upon,  above  ; 
under,  below  ; 

lquivi,                1  lhere  ; 

dentro. 

>  within  ; 

indi,                   thence  ; 
quindi,                from  thence  ; 

fuora$§ 

>  without  ; 

quinci,^               from  hence  ; 

av&nti,\\\\ 

before  ; 

costinci,           \  fr°m  thence' 
}  where  you  are  ; 

dietro^ 
accanto, 

behind; 
aside  ; 

dtoe,                Swhere; 

attorno,*** 
rim  petto, 

around  ; 
opposite  ; 

dnrfe,                J     i 

vicino, 

near; 

donde,              J  W 

lungi, 

far; 

oltre, 

beyond. 

*  From  the  Latin  semper  :  the  Celtic  chemp  or  semp, '  without,'  and  ar  or  er,  'end.' 

I  From  the  Latin  svbinde.  |  From  the  Latin  hanc  koram. 

$  From  the  Latin  illic,  iliac.  \\  From  the  Latin  quo  and  istic,istac. 

IT  From  the  Latin  qui  and  hinc. 

**  The  Latin  super  :  —  the  Celtic  5wp,  <  upon.' 

ft  The  Latin  sub,  subtus  :  —  the  Celtic  sub,  *  under.' 

Jt  From  the  Celtic  particles  en  and  tre. 

$$  The  Latin/oris,/0r<w: — the  Celtic  for,  'out.' 

||  ||  From  the  Celtic  ab,  *  far,'  and  ant,  '  opposite.' 

HIT  From  the  Celtic  dre,  «  back.'  ***  From  the  Celtic  tor, « circle.' 


ADVERBS. 
Adverbs   of  Order. 


351 


Pr*a>                  first; 
prima, 

Pj?'                    then; 
dopo, 

Adverbs  of  Qwan 

Piu,                   more  ; 
mino,                >  ,       . 
mdnco,              $ 
wo«o,                        ,  . 
assai,           *       much  > 

itirfi,                ^ 
quindi,             >  afterwards  ; 
appresso,*        ) 
infine,                 finally. 

^i^y  and    Quality. 

troppoj               too  much  ; 
or?/ari,|                not  much  ; 
/an^o,                  so  much  ; 
jt?oro,                    little  ; 
qffdtto,                any  at  all. 

JSene,                 well;             "  ] 

Adverbs  of  Affirmation 

Si,                  I  yes, 
g-i&,                  $  indeed  ; 
certo,                  certainly  ; 
6ene,                   well  ; 

male,                  badly. 

,  Negation,  and  Doubt. 

davvero,           ?  indeed,  truly, 
difdtti,              J  in  truth  ; 
appunto,             exactly  so. 

JVb,                     no, 
non,                    not  ; 

J&*S,      never  ' 

mica,                *l 
punto,              >  not  at  all. 
affdtto,             ) 

Forse,                 perhaps  ; 
circa,                  about  ; 

Adverbs  of  Comparist 

cok                ^o,thus; 
come,                  as  ; 
siccome,              so,  as  ; 
/nw,                    more  ; 

presso,                about  ; 
quasi,                  almost. 

m  and   Interrogation. 

mcno,                  less  ; 
tdnto,                   so  much,  as  ; 
quanta^                as  ; 
a-guisa,           1  ljk 
a-mdrfo,            S  11J 

*  From  the  Celtic  prem,  *  near.' 

f  From  the  Celtic  tropa,  '  troop,' c  multitude.' 

J  From  the  Latin  gerra  t  —  the  Celtic  gcr, 


352  ANALOGY. 


Ove  ?  >  where, 

dove  ?  $  whither  ? 
donde?  whence? 

qudndo  ?  when  ? 


£!,      \*™> 

perche?  why? 

quanta  ?  how  much  ? 


Adverbs  of  Choice  and  Demonstration. 


Anzi, 
prlma, 

/ 
jEcco, 
eccoqui, 

eccoquu, 

(  rather; 

piuttosto, 
piupresto, 

>  sooner. 

>  there  is, 
\  there  are  ; 
when  lo. 

behold  ; 
)  here  is, 
J  here  are  ; 

tccoli, 
eccold, 
quand1  icco, 

The  adverbs  oggi,  l  to-day  ' ;  ieri,  '  yesterday  '  ;  and 
domani,  '  to-morrow ' ;  are  often  used  as  substantives ; 
as, 

questo  di  rf'  OGGI,  this  day  ; 

il  giorno  di  IERI,  yesterday  ; 

DOMANI  e  VmerdU,  to-morrow  is  Friday. 

Mai,  £  never,'  is  sometimes  used  in  the  signification  of 
'  ever  ' ;  as, 

qudi  bdrbarefur  MAI  ?  what  savage  women  were 

there  ever  ? 
cost  Mllo  comefu  MAI,  as  beautiful  as  ever  was. 

Qui,  qua,  '  here';  and  quinci,  '  from  hence  ';  indicate 
a  place  near  the  person  speaking  :  costi,  costd,  '  there 
near  you  '  ;  and  costinci,  i  from  thence  where  you  are '; 
indicate  a  place  near  the  person  spoken  to:  and  li,  la; 
coli,  cola;  ivi,  quivi,  '  tliere  ' ;  indi,  'thence',  and 
quindi,  '  from  thence ' ;  indicate  a  place  at  a  distance 
from  both  the  person  speaking  and  the  person  spoken 
to  ;  as, 

cost  qui  mi  disst^  so  he  said  to  me  here  ; 


ADVERBS. 


353 


QDINCI  nonpdssa  mdi  dnima 

buona,. 
tdnte  belle  giovani  che  COST! 

s6no, 

ditel  COSTING i, 
ne  LI  gudri  lontdno, 
vuolsi  cosl  COL!  dove  si  puote 

cid  che  si  vuole, 
QUIVI  51  pidngon  li  spietdti 

ddnni, 
comandolle  che  INDI  non  u- 

scisse, 

Si,  '  yes ' ;  and  no,  '  no ' 
used  as  substantives  ;  as, 

il  mio  NO, 

il  suo  si, 

si  e  NO  nel  cdpo  mi  tenzona9 


no  good  spirit  ever  passes 
hence ; 

so  many   beautiful  girls  as 
there  are  there  near  you  ; 
tell  it  from  where  you  are ; 
not  far  from  thence  ; 

so  it  is  willed  there,  where 
will  is  power ; 

here  they  wail  their  merci- 
less wrongs ; 

he  ordered  her  not  to  go  out 
from  thence. 

or   '  not ' ;  are   sometimes 


my  negative  ; 
his  affirmative  ; 

yes  and  no  struggle  in  my 
head. 


Si  is  used  sometimes  instead  of  the  conjunction  e, 
'  and,'  and  may  be  rendered  in  English  by  the  word 
both ;  as, 

si  per  la  sua  forma,  e  si  per  la    both  for  his  personal  heauty  and 
nobiltti,  del  pddre,  for  the  nobility  of  his  father. 

JVb  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  whole  sentence ; 
as, 

o  voUssero,  o  NO  [o  non  voles-  whether  they  wished,  or  not 

sero],  [or  they  did  not  wish]  ; 

quillo  che  io  avrd  fdtto,  e  quel  what  I  shall  have  done,  and 

che  NO  [e  quel  che  non  avr6  what  not  [and  what  I  shall 

fatto],  not  have  done], 

JVb  is  used  only  in  answering  a  question,  or  when 
used  absolutely  :  non,  in  all  other  instances,  and  par- 
ticularly when  the  negative  is  followed  by  a  verb  or 
another  adverb  ;  as, 

signor,  NO,  no,  sir  ; 

30* 


354  ANALOGY. 

NONfarnetico,  NO,  I  do  not  rave,  no  ; 

NO,  per  quello  NON  rimwrcl  il     no,  the   bargain   will  not   be 
mercdto,  broken  oft' on  this  account. 

O've,  '  where,'  in  poetry,   is  often  changed  into  u' ; 
as, 

u'  sono  i  vtrsi?  where  are  the  verses? 

uj  son  giunte  le  rime  ?  where  are  the  rhymes  gone  ? 

The  adverbs  lene,  gia,  mat,  mica,  punto,  non,  ecco, 
are  often  used  as  mere  expletives  ;  as, 

si  BENE,  yes  indeed  ; 

Gil  Dio  non  voglia,  may  God  forbid  ; 

sigidce  MAI  sempre  inghidccio,     lies  always  frozen  ; 

non  MICA  dipoco  ajfdre,  not  at  all  of  little  conse- 

quence ; 

non  e  PUNTO  morto,  he  is  not  at  all  dead  ; 

append  ancora  NON  ha,  he  has  hardly  yet; 

ECCO,  non  so  dir  di  no, .  I  cannot  say  no. 

E  X  AMP  L  E  S  . 


QUESTO  DI  D'  OGGI  e  stdto  ddto  This  day  has  been  given  to  kings, 

a  re,  e  a  solddni,  e  a  slfdtta  gen-  and  to  sultans,  and  to  similar  peo- 

te.    (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  10.)  pie. 

Quanta   mi  fu   IL    GIORNO    DI  What  was  ordered  to  me  yester- 

IERI  imposto  alia  sua  partenza.  day  at  your  departure. 
(Red.  Lett.) 

DOMANI  E  VENERDI,  e  il  se-  To-morrow  is  Friday,  and   the 

guente  di  Sdbato.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  following  day  Saturday. 
I-) 

QUAI  BARBARE  FUR  MAT,  qudi  _     What  savage  women,  what  Sara- 

Saracine  ?   (Dant.  Purg.  23.)  cens  were  there  ever  ? 

Cosi   e    oggi    BELLO   il  cielo  The  sky  is  as  beautiful  to-day  as 

COME  FD  MAI.   (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  10.)  it  ever  was. 

Qui  fui  con   Pamfilo.  e  cosi  Here   was  I   with     Pamphilus, 

etui  MI  DISSE,  e  cosi  quifacemmo.  and  so  he  said  to  me  here,  and  so 

(Bocc.  Fiamm.  4.)  we  did  here. 


ADVERBS. 


355 


QUINCI   NON    PASSA   MAI  ANIMA 

BUONA.     (Dant.  inf.  3.) 

Veggendo  TANTE  BELLE  GIO- 

VANI     CHE     COSTA     SONO.        (BOCC. 

J-iloc.  2.) 

DITEL  COSTINCI,  *e  won,  Z'  drco 
tiro.  (Dant.  Inf.  12) 

NE    Li  GUAKI  LONTANO  /HOT  di 

via  —  Un  suo  bcl  veto  lascidva 
fuggendo.  (Bocc.  Vis.  Am.  20.) 

VUOLSI  COSl  COLA  DOVE  SI 
PTJOTE —  ClO  CHE  SI  VUOLK,epiu 

non  dimandare.     (Dant.  Inf.  o.) 

QUIVI  SI    PIANGON  LI    SPIKTATI 

DANNI  :  —  Quivi  e  dlensdndro,  e 
Diomsio  feto  —  Che  f&  Sicilia 
av6r  dolorosi  anni.  (Dant.  Juf. 
12.) 

COMAND6LLE     CHE     INDI     NON 

USCISSE  infino  a  tantu,  che  cgli 
che  r  avea  rinckiuxa,  non  V  a- 
prisse.  (Passav.  78.) 

Tanto  vale  IL  MIO  NO  quanta 
IL  suo  si.  (Cecch.  Esalt.  cr.  2. 
3.) 

Che  Sl  E  NO  NEL  CAPO    MI    TEN- 

ZONA.*     (Dant.  Inf.  S.) 

Era    Cimone,  si    PER   LA  SXJA 

FORMA,  e    S1     PKR    LA     NOBILTA    e 

ricchdzza  del  padre,  quasi  nbto  a 
ciascuno.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

fo  vi  diro  QCELLO  CHE  10  AVRO 

FATTO,  E  QUEL  CHE  NO.       (BOCC. 

g.  2.n.  1.) 

llfamiglidre  rispose  : '  SIGNOR, 
NO.'  (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

Disse  allora  Pirro  :  *  NON  FAR- 
NETICO,  KO;  Signora.'  (Bocc.) 

No,  PER  QUELLO  NON  RIMAR- 
RA  IL,  MERCATO,  (BoCC.  g.  7.  n. 

2.) 


Hence  no  good  spirit  ever  pass- 
es. 

Seeing  so   many  beautiful  girls 
as  are  there  near  you. 

Tell  it  from  where  you  are,  or 
else  1  draw  my  bow. 

Not  far  from  thence  flying  out  of 
the  way,  she  left  a  beautiful  veil. 


So  it  is  willed,  there  where  will 
is  power,  and  ask  no  more. 

Here  they  wail  their  merciless 
wrongs  :  here  dwells  Alexander 
and  the  fierce  Dionysius,  who 
wrought  for  Sicily  many  years  of 
woe.  » v 

He  ordered  her  not  to  go  out 
from  thence  until  he,  who  had 
shut  her  up  there,  should  come  to 
open  for  her. 

My  negative  is  as  good  as  his 
affirmative. 


For  yes  and  no  struggle  in  my 
head. 

Cimon  was,  both  for  his  person- 
al beauty,  and  for  the  nobility  and 
wealth  of  his  father,  known  to  al- 
most every  one, 

I  will  tell  you  what  I  shall  have 
done,  and  what  not. 

The  domestic  replied  :  *  No,  sir.' 

Then  Pyrrhus  said  :  '  I  do  not 
rave,  Madam,  no.' 

No,  the  bargain  will  not  be  brok- 
en off  on  this  account. 


1  At  war  'twixt  will  and  will  not.'  —  SHAKSPEARE,  Measure  for  Measure. 


356 


ANALOGY. 


U'  SONO  I  VERSI,   U*  SON    GIUN- 
TB  LE  RIME  ?       (Petr.  C.  46.) 

Disse  Cnlandrino :  l  Si  BENE.' 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.) 

//  negromdnte  disse  : l  GIA  DIO 

NON  VOGLIA.'     (BOCC.  g.  10.  D.  5.) 

"U'na  part*  del  mondo  &,  che  si 

GIACE  —  MA.I     SEMPRE    IN  GH1AC- 

Cio.     (Petr.  c.  5.) 

U'na  ne  dird,  JVON  MICA  d'  uo- 

mO    Di    POCO    AFFARE.       (BOCC.    g. 

10.  n.  6.) 

Teddldo  NOIST  E  PTJJJTO  MORTO. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

Questo  nostrofanciullo,  il  qudle 

APPENA  ANCORA  KON   HA  qUdttOr- 

did  dnni.    (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  8  ) 

6cco,  io  NON  so  ora  DIR  DI  NO. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 


Where   are    the  verses,  where 
are  the  rhymes  gone  ? 

Calandrino   replied  :    «  Yes  in- 
deed.' 

The  necromancer  replied  :  'May 
God  forbid.' 

There    is   a  part  of  the  world 
which  lies  always  frozen. 

I  will  tell  you  one,  not  at  all  of 
a  man  of  little  consequence. 

Tedaldo  is  not  at  all  dead. 

This  hoy  of  ours,  who  is  hardly 
fourteen  years  old  yet. 


I  cannot  now  say  no. 


COMPOUND      ADVERBS. 


Compound  adverbs  are  formed  of  an  adjective,  and 
the  substantive  mente,*  '  manner.'  Mente  being  of  the 
feminine  gender  requires  that  the  adjective  be  of  the 
same  gender  ;  as, 


sdviA,  wise; 
onds^A,  honest; 
corttsE,  courteous; 


SAVIA-MENTE,  in  a  wise  manner,  or  wise- 

["y; 

ONESTA-MENTE,  in  an  honest  manner,  or 
[honestly; 

CORTESE-MENTE,  in  a  courteous  manner, 
[or  courteously ; 

prudentz,  prudent;        PRUDENTE-MENTE,  in  a  prudent  manner, 

[or  prudently ; 


*  From  the  Celtic  menf.,  *  minner.'  It  is  from  this  language  that  tho  Latins 
borrowed  their  mens,  and  formed  such  expressions  as  forti  mente,  clard  mente,  devo- 
id mente,  &c.,  which  afterwards  passed  to  the  Italians,  as  sana  mente  in  Boccac- 
cio (g.  9.  n.  9.)  ;  affettudsa  mente  in  Ariosto  (Orl.  Fur  );  eterna  mente  in  Monti  (Bassv.) 
may  prove;  ah  hough  they  are  now  generally  written  in  one  word  ;  as,/0r£ewzen£«, 
*  strongly  ';  chiaramentc,  '  clearly  '  ;  devotame'nte,  '  devoutly  ' ;  sanamentc,  '  wisely  '  j 
ttfettuosamente, l  affectionately  '  ;  eternamente,  '  eternally  '  ;  &c. 


ADVERBS. 


357 


If  the  adjective  ends  in  le,*  or  re,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony  the  final  e  is  dropped  in  the  formation  of  the 
adverb  ;  as, 

festevolE,  merry;  FESTEVOL-MENTE,  merrily  ; 

particoldrE,  particular ;          PARTICOLAR-MEJNTE,  particularly. 

Sometimes  the  adverb  is  an  adjective  only,  without 
the  addition  of  the  word  metite  ;  as, 

CHIARO   [for  chiaramdnte],  clearly  ; 
DOLCE  [for  dolcemcnle,]  sweetly. 


The  following  are  the 

Adjectives  commonly  used  as  Adverls.\ 


Forte, 

very  strong  ; 

tan  to, 

so  much  ; 

sodo, 

fast,  hard  ; 

rdro, 

rarely  ; 

alto, 

softly  ; 

solo, 

only; 

basso, 

low  ; 

tutto, 

all; 

certo, 

certainly  ; 

poco, 

little  ; 

triste, 

sadly  ; 

motto, 

much  ; 

lieto, 

merrily  ; 

troppo, 

too  much  ; 

dolce, 

sweetly  ; 

b'ello, 

handsomely  ; 

ckidro, 

clearly; 

buono, 

very  well  ; 

scuro, 

darkly  ; 

aperlo, 

openly  ; 

schietto, 

candidly  ; 

sicuro, 

surely  ; 

piano, 

low,  softly  ; 

dimesso, 

lowly  ; 

lento, 

slowly  ; 

sommesso, 

humbly  ; 

pronto, 

readily  ;    , 

vicino, 

rear  ; 

ratio, 

speedily; 

lontdno, 

far. 

*  This  ruin  with  regard  to  adjectives  ending  in  le  is  not  without  exceptions,  as 
may  be  seen  in  the  following  passages: 

SimiL-Ementc    it  mal    seme    rf'   Adamo.         In  like  manner  Adam's  evil  brood. 
(Dant.  Inf.  3.) 

I'o    la    rive<r<rio    stdrsi    umiL.K.mente.          I  see  her  remaining  humbly. 
(Petr.  a.  211.) 

UmiLEmcnte  vipriego.     (Bocc.)  I  humbly  entreat  you. 

C6sa  rdde,  iiolte  usdta  per  lo  carmine,  ma          A  thin?  seldom  used  by  the  community, 
1tlii.Emenlefdr.ia.     (AJutt.  Vill.  9.  28.)  but  usefully  done. 

fin  order  to  know  when  these  words  am  arfjectioes,  and  wh'-n  adverbs,  it  is  suf- 
ficient to  observe  whether,  in  the  discourse,  they  are  added  to,  or  used  for,  a  sub- 


358  ANALOGY. 

Adverbs    formed   of    an  adjective,  and   the   adverbs 

presto,  sovente,  pertempo,  adagio,  vohntieri,  affatto, 
may  be  used  in  a  comparative  and  superlative  degree, 
which  is  formed  thus  : 

tronqidllnmente,  tranquilly; 

pill  tranquiUamente,  more  tranquilly; 

tranquill-issiMA-mente,  very  tranquilly  : 

felicemente,  happily  ; 

ME\o/e/iceme7?fe,  less  happily  ; 

ftlic-issiMA-mvnte,  very  happily: 

schittto,  candidly  ; 

PIU  or  MENO  schitlto,  more  or  less  candidly; 

schutt-issiMA-mente,  very  candidly: 

lieto,  merrily  ; 

PI\\  or  MEN  lieto,  more  or  less  merrily  ; 

e/ite,  very  merrily  : 


volenlieri,  willingly  ; 

PIU  or  ME\O  volenlieri,  more  or  less  willingly; 

very  willingly. 


The  adverbs  kene,   'well';  and   male,  'badly5  5  in 
their  comparative  and  superlative,  make, 

M^GLIO,  better; 

OTTI  M  Amente  or  6enissiMO,  very  well  : 

PEGGIO,  worse  ; 

PES  SIM  Amente  or  mcrZissiMO,          very  badly. 

Jlssai,   in    the   superlative    makes   assaissuvio,   c  very 
much.' 


Btantive,  or  not ;  for,  if  so,  they  are  adjectives  j  otherwise  they  are  adverbs.  Thus, 
in  these  examples, 

S'  i'  werildi  di  voi  assdi  o  POCO.  If  I  deserved  of  you  either  much  or 
(Dant.  Inf.  26.)  little. 

Segno  manifesto  di  POCO  senno.  (Bocc.         A  manifest  sign  of  little  wisdom, 
g.  1.  n.  l.J 

E  per  POCO,  se  tu  mi  dicessi,  che  w  Howover  little  you  should  ask  me  to 
anddssi  di  qui  a  Peretola,  w  credo  cA'  w  go  to  Perctola,  I  believe  that  I  should 
vi  andrci.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.)  go  there. 

the  word  p6cn  is  an  adverb  in  the  first  instance,  where  it  modifies  the  verb  meritdi ; 
but  it  is  an  a>/jr.ctive  in  the  other  two,  where,  in  the  first,  it  is  added  to  the  sub- 
stantive .-•<»«/»«,  and,  in  the  second,  stands  for  a  substantive  ;  being  equivalent  loptica 
cosa, «  liitle  thing.' 


ADVERBS. 


359 


Bine,  poco,  adagio,  piano,  tanto,  as  we  have  already 
observed  at  p.  86,  have  also  a  diminutive, 


benixo, 
pockixo, 

J50COL1NO, 


pretty  well  ; 
>>  very  little  ; 


adagixo, 


very  slow ; 

i 

•  very  little. 


Bene,   has   also   an  augmentative   :    6enoNE,   *  very 
well.' 

ADVERBIAL  PHRASES  IN  COMMON  USE. 


Di  subito,  suddenly  ; 
di  lotto,  presently  ; 
in  un  bnltno,  in  an  instant ; 
in  un  batter  d*  occkio,  in   the 
[twinkling  of  an  eye  ; 
poco  fa,  a  little  while  ago; 
fra  poco,  in  a  short  time  ; 
un  pezzofa,  some  time  ago  ; 
delle  volte,  at  times  ; 
air  improvviso,  unexpectedly  ; 
alia  ventura,  at  random  ; 
al^  avvenire,  in  future  ; 
a  minuto,  in  detail ; 
avicenda,  by  turns;  - 
a  gdra,  emulously ; 
a  cdso,  by  chance  ; 
a  torto,  wrongly ; 
per  accidtnie,     } 
per  sorte,  >  by  chance ; 

per  avventura,  ) 
pur  troppo*  too  truly,  too  well ; 
di  fresco,  newly  ; 
di  buon  grddo,  willingly  ; 
suo  malgrddo,  a  gainst  one's  will; 
senza  meno,  positively  ; 
qudnto  prima,  very  soon  ; 
asuaposta,    /at  one's 
a  suo  senno,    $  pleasure  ; 
da  senno,  seriously  ; 


a  bello  studio, 
abMap6sta, 
a  meno  che,  unless  ; 
non  cha,\  except; 

dapertutto        )  everywhere; 

per  ogm  dove,    \ 

ad  un  trdtto,  at  once  ; 


infditi,       .    f    t  . 

j-fit  f    »*^  IdCL  , 

difatto,    \ 

di  gran  lungn,  by  far  ; 

a  tungo  anddre,  in   the   long 

[run,  in  time  ; 
a  piu  potere,  with   all  one's 

[might; 

di  mala  voglia,  unwillingly  ; 
a  un  di  presso,  almost  ; 
</'  allora  in  qua,since  that  time  ; 
d'  6ra  inndnzi,  henceforth  ; 
in  quel  mentre,  in  or  at  that  time  ; 
dipunto  in  punto,  exactly; 
di  punto  in  bianco,  point  blank; 
di  qudndo  in  qudndo,  }  now 
di  trdtto  in  trdtto,        >  and 
di  tdnto  in  tdnto,         )  then  ; 
it  piu  per  lo  piu,  on  the  whole, 

[at  the  utmost. 


*  An  elliptical  expression  for  the  phrases  e  PUR  TROPPO  vero,  *  it  is  too  true  1;  &  PUR 
TROPPO  6c/i<>,  'it  is  too  well.' 

f  An  elliptical  expression  for  the  phrase  SE  NON  f6sse,  or  fosse  stato,  CHE,  (  were  it 
not,'  or  '  had  it  not  been.' 


3GO 


ANALOGY. 


EXAMPLES. 


SAVIAMENTE  si  spuosono  loro 
ambasciata.  (Gio.  Vill.  I.  8.  c.  1  ) 

Mdngiano  co'  forestieri  FESJE- 
VOLMEME.  (Dav.  Germ.) 

V  dltre  dojme,  vdila  Pampinea, 
amen  gid  i- 1  u  PA  RTI  c  o  i.  A  K  M  E.\  T  K 
tra  s&  cotninciuto  a  trattdr  del 
modo.  (Bocc.  liitrod.) 

Jlssdi  la  V)C.e  lor  CHIARO  V  ab- 
bdia.  (Dant.  Int.  7.) 

Come  DOLCE  pdrlat  e  DOLCE 
ride.  (Petr.  s.  12(>.) 

Qudii do  pure  nianca  dcUe  cose 
nel  luogo,  dive  noi  siri/no,  ce 
ny  andidmo  in  vn  dltro  FEL.ICIS 

SIMAMErVTE.     (G.'ll.   ClrC.    1.31.) 

un  visse  giammdi  piu  di 
(Fetr.  s.  7.) 


Questa  grossezza  iwn  impeili- 
sec  il  riceviniento  del  mttdllo, 
anzi  V  acccVa  PIU  V<»LENTIEKI 
deW  dltra  terra.  (Ben.  Cell. 
Oref.) 

To  m'  asterrti  VOLENTIERISSI- 
MAMENTP:  da  cosi  fatta  prepaia- 
zione.  (Red.  Cons.) 

U  qudle  %ia  OTTIMAMENTE  la, 
lingua  sapta.  (LJocc.  g.  2.  n.  9.) 

Tu  ti  p'nti  MALISSIMO  con  co- 
lui  al  qudle  in  desideri  che  gli 
Dei  nocciuno.  (Varch.  Sen.  Ben. 
6.) 

Oh,  mi  rallegro  ASSAISSFMO  — 
Vedervi  vivo  e  prosperoso.  (Ainbr. 
Cof.  5.  6.) 

Egli  stan  pur  BENIN  con  quelle 
bdrse  —  Di  rdsu  al  collo.  (Buon. 
Fier.  lutiod.) 


Thus  wisely  they  delivered  their 
mess-age. 

They  eat  merrily  with  strangers. 

The  other  ladies,  having  heard 
Pampinca,  had  already  begun  more 
particularly  to  devise  the  means. 

Their  words  reveal  their  fault  too 
clearly. 

How  sweetly  she  speaks,  and 
how  sweetly  she  smiles. 

Whenever  things  are  wanting 
in  the  place  where  we  are,  we 
go  to  another  very  happily. 

None  ever  lived  more  happy 
than  I. 

This  richness  [of  this  earth] 
does  nqt  prevent  the  metal  being 
received  in  it;  on  the  contrary  it 
receives  it  better  than  the  other 
earth. 

I  would  abstain  very  willingly 
from  such  preparation. 

Who  knew  already  the  language 
very  well. 

Thou  conductest  thyself  very 
badly  with  him  whom  thou  wishest 
that  the  gods  should  injure. 

Oh,  I  rejoice  pretty  much  to  see 
you  alive  and  prosperous. 

They  look  pretty  well  with  those 
bags  of  satin  hung  to  their  necks. 


ADVERBS. 


361 


Pidcciavi  di  prestdre  un  POCO-  May  you  be  pleased  to  lend  to 

LINO — A  qutsta  pinna  lo  stan-  this    pen   for   a   very  little   while 

cdto  dito.    (Dant.  Rim.)  your  wearied  finger. 

Conviene  un  TANTINETTO    lo-  You  ought  to  praise  me  a  little. 
ddrmi.    (Salvin.  Pros.  Tosc.  1.) 

Assicurdtevi,  che  io  vi  porto  un  Be   assured,   that    I    love   you 

BENONE  grandone.     (Car.  lett.  1.)  hugely. 


EXERCISE    XXIII. 


Where 


wast 
fosti 


thou   yesterday  a  little   before    (to    the) 

gior- 


day?    Where     dost    thou    run  ?    What   fury      urges    thee 
no  ?  2     correre1  ?  furia  sospingere*     l 

on  ?    Where     dost    thou    go  ?         Wait         for    me.     Ah  ! 
2    anddre1  ?  Aspettdre^—  .    Deh  ! 


how          can        this       be  ? 

d6e  poier    qu6sto2  esser1 1 

to-day.     There  1    must      be 
4.        convidne2  esser3 


I    have     seen    him    here 
veddre3     1  6 


there  some  places  1  covered  I 


with     small     bushes     and     grass, 
virgulto  erba, 


1    -   luogo      nascoso 

where     the     hares     now 
lepre 


and    then    I    can 

I  possano3 


conceal      themselves. 
nascondere1  2. 


this    the     earth,    which     I    touched    before. 
terreno,  toccdre 

not      answering    him, 
1        rispondere2^,     3, 


he      began      to    call 
comincidre       chiamdre 


It      is       not 
—    essere*   l 

The        boy 
more  loud. 


You  ^are     now     already     old     and 
essere  vecchio 


can 
potete 


ill    endure 
durdr 


fatigue.       Without    I  thinking       at-all,     as     if    he      had     J 
fatica.          S6nza         \  pensdre*  *,       quasi3     —    av6sse6  \ 


thought    a    long    time — (much    time),     he  I  said. 
pensdre6  —  4    tempo5,    —  |  disse. 

31 


It 


M<i'»  ANALOt.'Y. 

i  .....        :•«'«.  II        I..         ri.U.Ml.T  All    '     \»-M, 

u 


for    ti"'    love    of  God     I    lot  it  bo  done     I     quick,       1 

IIKI-  ,1111,11  |  f,,,Y,,,.M  | 

received,     a    littlo    while     ago,     Jetton     from     Meatlna, 


who    erica    «bovo.      How    (much) 

I.,    . 


i»    nro     wo    from    (tKe)    our    quartor*  P      I   Boo 

•  ..,,/,,,/„  • 


knooka    below,     Ho    hoped     I   to    I   bo    able    to    havo 

\.-.  -..-.         I      ,/j         I          /.,..-,. 


ntv    oi    Luooa    oaaily.     Ho    I  goon   I   running    hort 

•    Wwft',  I  i-,i       I 


thorn    aa    if  ho    were    oraay.     The    good     woman 

/MMM 


if         —         dllfff          flflfO,  /MMM,'        ,'.    /JH/<J>|,| 


returned    I  urtor  |  fjtAfj    I..T    .-heiti  and    oarried    it    baok 

i  * 


Uieru  iroin-whenoe  the    had    taken    u.     r<  n    mo,    whence 
'  -     iNHlr«»  Itv4rt»  ».     XH1^ 

and     of      what     condition      art     thou? 


And    he   I  replied  1  :    u  I    am   I  from  I   Syria,  and  I     am 
..,»<•    |      ••    <atiftj  .1,     \ 


a    kipg.11     He    aeti    oareleialy.       And   I    having     been 
fiF  ^fNr4ff  liHit«vr<il§« 

put     I  in    pridon,  he  I   w«s   I   mu>i)y     treated     by    them. 
mtf«a*  I      jir^dnt  ,  —  |    /W     |    r  »i4iM(r    trfttfcto4       * 

Obnerve    it    more    particularly.       .A  M.I      living    departed 


fKim*r(/%j    from    tlienoe,    he   I  went    I   flAtntf)   t,      \ 

'f<  |t*J*1      I        Mr' 

lu>     I     h\c».\     I     most 


PREPOSITIONS. 

CHAl'TKIl     XJV. 
PREPOSITIONS. 

PREPOSITIONH     IN    COMMON    USE. 


Di* 

of  j 

accdnto,     \ 

ii:-:iil«',  nhoill, 

*t 

to,  in,  :«f  ; 

alUito,        ; 

i  near,  by  ; 

</«,! 
tn,§ 

from,  by,  on,  at  ; 
in,  on,  upon  ; 

tillnrno,      i 

about,  arouml  ; 

con, 

with  ; 

tti/<t<'>H80j 

on,  upon,  about  ; 

per, 

throiin-li,  by,  on  nr- 
[countor,inorder 

prfaao,       J 
(tpprtssO) 

;near,  almost  ; 

[to,  for  ; 

vicliiQ) 

9U, 

s6pra, 

j  on,  upon  5 

lungi,        I 
lontdno,     ( 

'  far,  from  j 

s6tto 

under  ; 

dppo,\\ 

at,  with,  in  com- 

£' 

>  amongst,  within  ; 

vtrsofft 

parison  with  ; 
towards  ; 

i£ 

>  in,  in  about  ; 

6ltrat         \ 

|  beyond,  beside*; 

prima, 

before  ; 

lun%o, 

along  ; 

ddpo, 

after  ; 

flno, 

) 

dnzi, 

\ 

slno, 

'  till,  untilf 

inn&nzi, 
din&mi, 

davdnti, 

f  before,  in  the 

)  prcsen<:e  °f  '  Mj 

inflno,      | 
inalno, 
c6ntra,** 
c6nlro, 

^Mftr  as  ; 

against  ; 

dtttro, 
didtttro, 

>  behind  ; 

(nnfS 

>  opposite  ; 

t$h 

>  in,  within  ; 

Ssff9! 

1 
without  ; 

fu6ra, 
fu6riy 

)  out  of,  without, 

Hldm, 
eccttto. 

>  except,  excepted  ; 

infu6ri, 

except,  excepted';     tranne, 

*  From  the  C«Itlo  rf«,  a  »\gn  ofqualiflcation.  J  From  the  Ccllic  4at  <  tt.' 

t  From  the  Celtic  a,  <  near/  'joining  with.'  $  From  the  Celtic  «n, '  in.' 

(I  From  the  Latin  «/m// /  — Celtic  ap,  'joint,'  'attached.' 
IT  From  the  Latin  vertui  i  —  Celtic  gwero,  *to  turn.' 
**  From  the  Celtic  con,  a  lign  ofoppoHition  ;  an4  trac/t,  '  iide.' 
tf  From  the  Latln/r«n«  /  — -Celtic /row,  '  before.' 

U  (And  «dnxa  and  »an,  uiod  by  old  writer*,)  from  the  Latin  tint  i  —  Celtic  «y, 
1  want.'  '  privation.' 


364  ANALOGY. 


circa,         } 

tncirca,      >  about,  almost ; 

intorno,     } 


secondo, 


S^sl.a*    £  according 

giusto,      t 

conforme, 


The  nature  of  most  of  the  foregoing  prepositions  is 
such  as  to  admit  of  no  other  significations  than  those 
which  have  been  given  ahove  ;  there  are  however  some 
which  are  made,  in  Italian,  to  express  so  many  different 
relations,  that  it  has  been  thought  indispensable  to  add 
the  following  remarks : 

The  preposition  di  may  express  a  relation  of  posses- 
sion, of  extraction,  or  of  qualification ;  as, 

il  dendro  DI  Lt5i,  his  own  money; 

figlio  DEL  FIGLIUOLO,  son  of  the  son  ; 

la  stdtua  DI  MARMO,  the  statue  of  marble  ; 

uomini  di  GROSSO  INGEGNO,  men  of  dull  understanding. 


Jl  may  express  a  relation  of  attribution,  of  end  or 
tendency  of  action,  or  of  proximity  to  a  place,  person, 
or  thing  ;  as, 

AL  TEMPO  deW  IMPERADORE     in  the  time   of  the   emperor 
FEDER!GO  PRI'MO,  Frederic  the  First ; 


*  From  the  Latin  justa  :  —  Celtic  ajustayl  to  adjust.* 

t  Some  of  the  foregoing  prepositions  are  the  same  as  the  adverbs  ;  as,  so- 
pra,  60«o,  pr'trna,  appresso,  dopo,  dentro,  difuori,  &c.,  which,  when  they  are 
followed  or  preceded  by  a  noun,  a  pronoun,  or  a  verb  which  they  govern,  are 
always  prepositions,  but  otherwise  are  adverbs.  Thus  in  the  following  ex- 
amples, 

Or  via  mettiti  avdnti,  to  TI  verrb  AP-  Now  go  before,  I  will  follow  after 

PRE'SSO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  5.)  thee. 

Dalla  mddre  delta  giovane  prima,  e  They  were  first  surprised  by  the  rno- 

APPRE  sso  da  Currddo  soprappresi  furo-  ther  of  the  girl,  and  afterwards  by  Cur- 

110.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  6.)  ratio. 

the  word  appresso^  in   the   first  instance  is  a  preposition  because  it.  governs  the 
pronoun  ti  ;  but  in  the  second  is  an  adverb  because  it  governs  no  other  word. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


365 


VENGA  A  VEDERLA, 

che  il  vostro   ligndggio   AN- 

DASSE  A  POVERTADE, 
TROVANDOSI  A  PARlGI, 
ALLATO  ALLA  DONNA, 
S?    AVVICINAVA    ALLE    TERRE 

del  Duca, 


let  him  come  to  see  her  ; 

that  your  lineage  should  be- 
come poor ; 

finding  himself  in  Paris  ; 
by  the  side  of  the  lady  ; 

he  approached  the  land  of  the 
Duke. 


Da  may  express  a  relation  of  derivation,  of  departure, 
of  separation,  of  dependence,  of  difference,  of  designa- 
tion, of  destination,  of  similitude,  of  fitness,  aptitude,  or 
capability,  of  presence,  of  passage  through  or  by,  of  un- 
certainty of  number,  of  time,  of  place,  of  loneliness,  or  of 
instrumentality  ;  as, 


Cino  DA  PISTOIA, 

le  grdzie  VENGONO  DA  Dio, 

TORNANDO  DA  PARlGI, 
PARTITI  DA  COTESTI, 
m'  ALLONTANA  DAL  VOLGO, 

DIPENDE  DA  QUEL  PTJNTO, 

ALTR'  UOMO  DA  QUELLO  che 
io  sono, 

Guglielmo  DAL  CORNO, 

C6se  DA  MANGIARE, 

uomo  DA  POCO, 
avdnti  DA  se, 

DALLA  CASA  dtllOL  doUUtt, 

DA  NoviNTA  M!LA  bocche, 

DA   GRAN    TEMPO, 
DA    qUESTA  PARTE, 

DA  me,  DA  per  vai, 
edificdto  DA  TARQUINIO, 

31* 


Cino  of  Pistoia  ; 

favors  come  from  God ; 

returning  from  Paris ; 

go  away  from  those  spirits  ; 

she   separates  me  from  the 

common  people ; 
it  hangs  upon  that  point ; 

a  different  man  from  what  I 
am  now ; 

William  [surnamed]  from  the 
Horn  ; 

eatable  things ; 

a  foolish  man ; 

before  himself  ^ 

before  the  house  of  the  lady  ; 

above  ninety  thousand  mouths  ; 

a  long  time  since  ; 

to  this  side ; 

of  me  ;  by  yourself;. 

built  by  Tarquin* 


366  ANALOGY. 

Besides  the  above  relations,  the  preposition  da  is 
often  used  to  express  with  brevity  the  habitation  of  a 
person  ;  and  is  equivalent  to  the  words  a  casa,  a  casa 
di,  '  to  one's  house  ' ;  *  as, 

DA  [or  a  casa,  di]  me,  to  me  [or  to  my  house] ; 

DA  [or  a  cdsa  di]  lui,  to  his  house ; 

DA  [or  a  cdsa  di]  lei,  to  her  house  ; 

DAL  [or  a  cdsa  del]  Cardindle,  to  the  Cardinal's. 


In  expresses  a  relation  of  inferiority,  or  a  relation 
between  two  objects  of  which  the  one  contains,  and  the 
other  is  contained  ;  as, 

dormiva  IN  UN  LETTICCIUO-  he  slept  in  a  little  bed; 

1*0, 

com  IN  MERCATO,  I  ran  to  the  market ; 

era  IN  PAIUGI,  IN  UN  ALBER-  there  were  in  Paris,  in  a  ho- 

GO,  tel. 

The  Italians  consider  as  containing-objects,  the  di- 
visions of  time,  the  parts  of  one's  body,  the  apparel  ive 
wear,  and  sometimes  even  the  surface  of  bodies  ;  as, 

cinto    noville    raccontdte    IN     one  hundred  stories  related  in 
DIECI  GIORNI,  ten  days  ; 

pudica  IN  FACCIA,  chaste  in  her  countenance ; 

la  corona  IN  FRONTE,  the  crown  on  the  forehead  ; 

IN  ABITO  di  peregrini,  in  pilgrim's  dress  ; 

gli  furono  straccidti  i  pdnni     all  the  clothes  he  had  on  were 

IN  DOSSO,  torn  ; 

IN  MARE,  e  IN  TERRA,  on  the  sea,  and  on  the  land. 


Con  expresses  a  relation  of  company ;  and  the  Italians 


*  The  Italian  has  derived  this  usage  from  the  Celtic  language,  in  which  the  word 
da  was  a  synonyme  of,  and  often  used  for,  the  word  cae  or  c/tae,  '  habitation ' ;  — 
the  cdsa  of  the  Italian. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


367 


generally  consider   as  companions   the  instruments,   the 
means,  or  the  manner  in  which  an  action  is  performed, — 


vengo  a  desindre  CON  voi, 
che  CON  lo  STJLE,  CON  la  PEN- 

NA,  0    COL    PENNELLO    71071 

dipignesse, 

facendogli  cenno  COLLA  MA- 
NO, 

incomincib  a  dire  CON  UMIL 

VOCE, 

CON  FATICA  gli  rispose, 


I  come  to  dine  with  you ; 

which  with  his  style,  with  his 
pen,  or  with  his  pencil,  he 
could  not  paint  ; 

making  him  a  sign  with  her 
hand  ; 

began  to  say  with  a  humble 

voice  ; 
with  difficulty  he  replied  to 

him, 


Per  expresses  the  way  through,  or  the  means  by,  which 
a  thing  is  done;  the  reason  why,  or  the  object  for  which, 
it  is  done  ;  it  expresses  also  a  relation  of  space  with 
regard  to  time  or  place  ;  and  a  relation  of  instrumentali- 
ty, of  qualification,  of  destination,  or  of  distribution  ; 
as, 

PER  ME  si  va  nella  citta  do- 
lente, 

PER     LI     CtTI    PRIEGHI     COStui 

sovvenni, 

non  PER  CRUDELTA  delta 
donna  amdta,  ma  PER  so- 
VERCHIO  FUOCO, 


vo  PE'  DOLCI  POMI, 
PER  piti  DI  dimordndo, 

PER    li    CAMPI,   PER    le   VIE,  C 

PER  le  CASE  morieno, 

promessi  a  me  PER  to  VERA- 
CE  DIJCA, 

e  riputdto  PER  SANTO, 
farei  PER  Currddo  ogni  cosa, 

died  ducdti.pER  uno, 


through  me  you  go  into  the 

city  of  woe  ; 
at  whose   entreaties   I   have 

aided  this  one  ; 
not  on  account  of  the  cruelty 

of  the  beloved  lady,  but  on 

account  of   an   excesssive 

flame ; 

I  go  for  the  sweet  fruit ; 
remaining  for  several  days ; 

through  the  fields,  through 
the  streets,  and  in  the  hous- 
es they  died ; 

promised  to  me  by  my  sure 
guide  ; 

he  is  reputed  a  holy  man  ; 
I  would  do  for  Currado  every 
thing ; 

ten  ducats  each. 


368 


ANALOGY. 


Per  is  also  used  to  entreat  or  to  swear  by  ;  as, 

PER  quelia  pace  che  per  voi  by  that  peace  which  is  pie- 
s' aspttti,  ditene  ,  .  .  . ,  pared  for  you,  tell  us  . .  .  .; 

TI  Gitf  RO,  PER  qutllo  amort  I  swear  to  thee,  by  that  love, 

che  io  tiporto,  che  .  .  .  .  ,  which  I  bear  thee,  that .... 


The  preposition  a,  as  it  was  mentioned  p.  37,  fol- 
lowed by  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  takes  a  d 
after  it,  and  su  followed  by  another  u  takes  an  r  ;fuora, 
fuori,  and  fino,  sino,  infino,  insino,  followed  by  a  word 
beginning  with  a  consonant  often  lose  the  last  vowel ; 
and  verso,  loses  the  last  syllable ;  as, 


CD  ud/no  c?'  intelletlo, 
SUR  un'  dsse, 
IN  FIN  DM  dm, 
volta  VER  MC, 


to  a  man  of  sound  judgment ; 
upon  a  board  ; 
henceforth ; 
turned  towards  me. 


EXAMPLES. 


E    COn     IL    DENARO     DI     LTJI    U 

pagd.     (Bocc.) 

FU   FIGLIO  DEL  FIGLTUOLO    del 

Conte  d>  Jlrtese.  (Gio.  Vill.  11. 
54.) 

LA     STATUA      DT     MARMO,     0     di 

Ugno,  o  di  metdllo,  rimdsa  per 
memoria  d'  alc.un  valente  uomo. 
(Dant.  Conviv.) 


UOMINI  e  femmine  DI 
GROSSO  INGEGNO.     (Bocc.  Intr.) 

AL  TEMPO  DELL'  IMPERADORE 
FEDERIGO  PRIMO.  (Bocc.  g.  10. 
n.  9) 

Chi  nol  cr6de,  VENGA  egli  A. 
VEDERLA.  (Petr.  s.  210.) 


And  paid  him  with  his  own 
money. 

He  was  son  of  thfr  son  of  the 
Count  of  Artois. 

The  statue  of  marble,  or  of 
wood,  or  of  metal,  remaining  there 
in  memory  of  some  great  man. 

They  were  men  and  women  of 
dull  understanding. 

In  the  time  of  the  emperor 
Frederic  the  First. 


He  who  does  not  believe  it,  let 
him  come  to  see  her. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


369t 


A  voi  noil  vi  sarebbe    onore 

CHE  JL  VOSTRO  LIGNAGGIO  ANDAS- 

SE  A  POVERTADE.  (Nov.  Ant.  46.) 

TROVANDOSI  egli  una  volta  A 
PARIGI  in  povero  stdto.  (Bocc.) 

ALLATO  ALLA  DONNA  la  pose. 
(Bocc.) 

ALLE  TERRE  DEL  DUCA  s'  AV- 
VICINAVA.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 

Ecco  GIN  DA  PISTOIA.  (Petr. 
Fr.  Am.  4.) 

DA    DlO    VENGONO    LE    GRAZIE. 

(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  3.) 

DA  PARIGI  a  Genova  TORNAN- 
DO.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

E  tu  che  s6'  costi,  dnima  viva, 
—  PARTITI  DA  COTESTI  che  son 
morti.  (Dant.  Inf.  3.) 

Questa  sola  DAL  VOLGO  M'  AL- 
(Petr.  c.  19.) 


DA     QUEL     PtTNTO  —  DlPENDE 

il  Ciilo  e  tutta  la  natura.    (Dant. 
Par.  28.) 

Quand9  era  in  pdrte  ALTR'  UOM 
DA  QUEL  CH'  i'  SONO.     (Petr.  s. 


It  would  not  be  honorable  to 
you,  that  your  lineage  should  be- 
come poor. 

Finding  himself  once  in  Paris  in 
poor  circumstances. 

By  the  side  of  the  lady  he  put  it. 

He  approached  the  lands  of  the 
Duke. 

Behold  Cino  of  Pistoia. 
Favors  come  from  God. 
Returning  from  Paris  to  Genoa. 

And  thou  who  standest  there, 
living  spirit,  go  away  from  those 
spirits  who  are  dead, 

She  alone  separates  me  from  the 
common  people. 

Heaven  and  nature  hangs  upon 
that  point. 

When  I  was  in  part  a  different 
man  from  what  I  am  now. 


II  qudle  av£a  nome  GUGLIELMO 
DAL  CORNO.  (Gio.  Vill.  9.) 

Le  COSE    DA    MANGIARE    WOW    si 

stimano  dalV  itso  o  dalV  affetto, 
ma  ddlla  consuetudine  .     (Varch.) 

Tu  se'  piii  DA  POCO  che  Maso, 
che  s\  lascidva  fuggire  i  pesci 
cotti.  (Lasc.  Spir.  5.  7.) 

POCO     AVANTI     DA     SE,    vide    le 

c6neri  rimdse  d'  A!ttila>  flagello 
diDio.     (Bocc.  Floe.  4.) 

Dal  f  rate  partitosi,  DALLA  CASA 
w'  ando  DELLA  DONNA.  (Bocc. 
g.  3.  n.  3.) 


Who  was  named  William  [sur- 
named]  from  the  Horn. 

Eatable  things  are  not  valued 
from  their  use  or  their  taste,  but 
from  habit. 

Thou  art  more  foolish  than  Ma- 
so,  who  let  the  cooked  fish  escape 
from  him. 

At  a  little  distance  before  him- 
self, he  saw  the  ashes  left  by 
Attila,  the  scourge  of  God. 

Leaving  the  friar,  he  passed  be- 
fore the  house  of  the  lady. 


370 


ANALOGY. 


Stimdvasi  av6re  in  Firinze  DA 

NOVANTA    MILA    BOCCHK,    tra    UO- 

mini,  fctnniine.  e  fanciulli.  (Gio. 
Vill.  11.  93.) 

Gid.   DA  GRAN  TEMPO  nilllo  pill 

ne  conosci.     (Alf.  Fil.  4.  2.) 

Si  dura  poca  fatica  a  fdrlo  in- 
chindre  DA  QUESTA  o  DA  QUEL- 
LA  FARTE.  (Mach.) 

Poscia  rispose  lui  :  "  DA  ME 
non  vtnni."  (Dant.  Pur.  1.) 

Voi  ve  ne  avvedrete  DA  PER 
v6i  nel  Uggere  quisto  frammin- 
to.  (Red.  lelt.) 

H  campidogHo  fu  EDIFICATO 
DA  TARQUINIO,  assedidto  DA 
Brenno,  e  libcrdlo  DA  Camilla. 
(Vanz.) 

Torna  qui  DA  ME.     (Mach.) 

ddunque,  andatevene  DA  i,th. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  6.) 

Essjindo  Salabattto  DA  LEI  an- 
dato  ima  sdra.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  10.) 

DAL  CARDINAL  di  Morone,  ap- 
P&na  ar rivet  to,  andarono  tiitli  gli 
ambasciaduri.  (Pall.) 

IN  UN  LETTICCIUOLO  assdi  plC- 

colo  si  DOKMI VA.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 

I'O  COR.SI    IN   MERCATO  per  dlT- 

telo.    (Mach.  Coin.) 

'  ERA  IN  PARIGI,  IN  UN  ALBER- 
GO,  alqudnti  mercatdnti  Italiani. 
(Bocc.) 

Initndo   di  raccontdre 

NOVELLE, RACCONTATE    IN 

GIORM.    (Bocc.  Intr.) 

PUDICA    IN    FACCIA,  6   TielV 

dvre  onista.     (Dant.  Puf.  3r) 


It  was  thought  that  there  were 
in  Florence  about  ninety  thousand 
mouths,  among  men,  women,  and 
children. 

It  is  already  a  long  time  since 
thou  forgottest  them  all  [thy  pangs 
of  remorse]. 

One  meets  with  very  little  diffi- 
culty in  making  him  lean  to  this 
or  to  that  side. 

Then  he  replied  to  him  :  "  I 
did  not  come  of  myself." 

You  will  perceive  it  by  yourself 
in  reading  this  fragment. 

The  capitol  was  built  hy  Tar- 
quin,  besieged  by  Brennus,  and 
delivered  by  Camillus. 

Return  here  to  me  [or  to  this 
my  house]. 

Go,  then,  to  his  house. 


Salabaetto  having  gone  one  eve- 
ning to  her  house. 

All  the  ambassadors  went  to  the 
Cardinal  of  Morone's,  as  soon  as 
he  arrived. 

He  slept  in  a  very  small  bed. 

I  ran  to  the  market  to  tell  it  to 
you. 

There  were  in  Paris,  in  a  hotel, 
a  number  of  Italian  merchants. 


I  intend  to  relate  one  hundred 
stories,  to  be  related  in  ten  days. 

Chaste  in  her  countenance,  and 
modest  in  her  carriage. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


371 


Fulgevami  gift  IN  FRONTE  LA 
CORONA.  (Dant.  Pur.  8.) 

IN  AB1TO  DI  PEREGRINI.  (BoCC.)   ' 

Tutti  i  PANNI  GL1  FURONO  IN 
DOSSO  STRACCIATI.  (BoCC.  g.  1. 

n.l.) 

Comandamento  dbbero  dal  lor 
comurte  d'  abbdttere  la  forza  d6J 
Viniziani  IN  MARE,  E  IN  TERRA. 
(Gio.  Vill.) 

Sign6re,  io  VENGO  A  DESINARE 

CON  VOI,  6  CON  LA  VOSTRA  BRIGA- 

TA.    (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  3.) 

Niuna  cosa  fu,  che   egli  CON 

LO  STILE,  CON  LA  PENNA, O  COL 
PENNELLO  NON  DIPIGNESSE  Simile 

a  quella.    (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  6.) 
E  V  invito  ad  avvicinarsi,  FA- 

CENDOGLI     CENNO     COLLA      MANO. 

(Bocc.) 

Incomincid  CON  TJMIL  VOCE  A 
DIRE  —  Qwe7  ch"  w  vo'  air  altro 
canto  differire.  (Arios.  Fur.) 

Tito,  non  restando  dipidngere, 

CON     FATICA     COSI     GLI      RISPOSE. 

(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

PER  ME  SI  VA  NELLA  CITTA 
DOLENTE, PER  ME  SI  VA  ntlF 

et6rno  dolore^  —  PER  ME  si  VA 
tra  la  perduta  g6nte.  (Dant. 
Inf.  3.) 

Donna  scese  dal  cielo,  PER  LI 
cui  PRIEGHI  —  D6lla  mm  com- 
pagnia  COSTUI  SOVVENNI.  (Dant. 
Purg.  1.) 

NON  PER  CRUDELTA  DELLA 
DONNA  AMATA,  MA  PER  SOVER- 

CHIO  FUOCO  ntlla  m&nte  CONCET- 
TO da.  poco  regoldto  appetito. 
(Bocc.  Proem.) 

Ldscio  lo  fele,  e  vo  PE*  DOLCI 
POMI  —  PKOMESSI  A  ME  PER  LO 
VKRACE  DUCA.  (Dant.  Inf.  16.) 


The  crown  shone  already  on  my 
forehead. 

In  pilgrim's  dress. 

All  the  clothes  he  had  on  were 


torn. 


They  were  ordered  by  their  com- 
munity to  destroy  all  the  forces, 
which  the  Venetians  had  on  the 
sea,  and  on  the  land. 

Sir,  I  come  to  dine  with  you, 
and  with  your  company. 

There  was  nothing,  that  he 
could  not  with  his  style,  with  his 
pen,  or  with  his  pencil,  paint  like 
it. 

And  she  invited  him  to  approach, 
making  him  a  sign  with  her  hand. 


He  began  to  tell  with  an  humble 
voice  what  I  choose  to  leave  for 
the  next  canto. 

Titus,  without  ceasing  from 
weeping,  with  difficulty  replied  to 
him  thus. 

Through  me  you  go  into  the 
city  of  woe,  through  me  you  go 
into  eternal  pain,  through  me  you 
go  amongst  the  damned  spirits. 

A  dame  descended  from  heaven, 
at  whose  entreaties  I  have  aided 
this  one  with  my  guidance. 

Not  on  account  of  the  cruelty 
of  the  beloved  lady,  but  on  ac- 
count of  the  excessive  flame  kin- 
dled in  his  mind  by  an  unruled 
passion. 

I  leave  the  gall,  and  go  for  the 
sweet  fruit  promised  to  me  by  my 
sure  guide. 


ANALOGY. 


Quivi  PER  piii  DI  DIMORANDO. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  1.) 


PI.K  le  VILLE,  c  PER  LI 

PER    LE    Vffi,  E    PER    LE    CASE,  dl 

di  e  di  n6tte,  moricno.  (Bocc. 
Iiitrod.) 

Essdndo  stdto  un  pdssimo  u6- 
mo  in  vita,  in  m6rte  i  RIPUT^TO 

PER  SA.NTO.      (BOCC.  g.   1.  n.  1.) 
fo    FAR]£l    PKR  CuRRji.DO  6GNI 

c6sA,  che  io  polessi.  (Bocc.  g.  2. 
n.  7.) 

E  die  I6ro  DIE"CI  DUC^TI  PER 

tfNO.    (BOCC.) 

O  spiriti  eUtti,  —  PER  QUE"LL  A 
P.ACE  —  Ch*  io  credo  CHE  PER  vox 
tutti  s'  ASP^TTI,  —  DfrENE  d6ve 
la  montdgna  gidce.  (Dant.  Pur. 
3.) 

I'o  TI     OIT^RO    PER    QU^LLO.   f/l- 

di$8olubile  AM^RE  CHE  io  TI 
nii;  r<>,  CHE  i7  qudrto  m6se  non 
uscira,  che  tu  mi  rivedrdi.  (Bocc. 
1-iaiu.  2.) 


JVbn  pare  inddgno    AD 
D'  INTELL^TTO.    (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

Battuti  in  SUR  UN'  ASSE  col 
coltdllo.  (Dav.  Colt.) 

O'gni  dUra  c6sat  sia  v6stra  li- 
beramdnte  iNFfN  DA  6RA.  (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  -I.) 

V<$LTA  VER  ME,  mi  disse.  (Fi- 
renz.  Asin.  ;  '2^.} 


There  remaining  for  several 
days. 

Through  the  villages,  and  through 
the  iu'lds  ;  through  the  streets,  and 
in  the  houses,  both  by  day  and  by 
night,  they  died. 

Having  been  a  very  bad  man  in 
his  life,  he  is  in  death  reputed  a 
holy  man. 

I  would  do  for  Currado  every 
thing  that  I  could. 

And  gave  them  ten  ducats  each. 


0  chosen  spirits,  for  that  peace, 
which,  as  I  deem,  is  for  all  of  you 
prepared,  tell  us  where  the  moun- 
tain low  declines. 


I  swear  to  thee  by  that  indisso- 
luble love,  which  I  bear  thee,  that 
the  fourth  month  will  not  pass, 
ere  thou  wilt  see  me  again. 

It  does  not  seem  undeserved  to 
a  man  of  sound  judgment. 

Beaten  upon  a  board  with  a 
knife. 

Let  every  other  thing  be  freely 
yours  henceforth. 

Turned  towards  me,  she  said. 


PREPOSITIONS.  373 

EXERCISE    XXIV. 


He     gave    us    the     key    of    his     house.       This     gentle 
—     dare2       1         3   chidve*  5        7      cdsa.6  2      gentiP 

lady      being    very     often    urged      by    the     messages     and 
donna3  JEssere1  stimoldre  ambascidta 

by    the     entreaties     of    each     one     of    them.        Both      in- 
priego  in- 

flamed   by   a   fierce     vengeance,   turned    towards  (to)  these 
fiammdre        —  feroce2      vendetta1,     rivolgere 

civil      blood. 
civile2  sdngue1. 


walls  (the)  their    sword    still    warm    I    with 
muro  f&rro  cdldo  di 


It    is    believed    that    he    is 
Si     cre'de  che         sia 


the    richest      prelate      that 
ricco          preldto 


there     is    in    I      has    1    the     church    of    God     (from) 

—    —  dbbia  \  chiesa  Dw 

the  Pope  excepted.     They    were    all    garlanded       1  with  I 
Pdpa  essere  tutto  inghirlanddre5  \   di1    \ 

leaves    of    oak.       We     will    give    thee     so    many    blows 
foglia?       3    quercia*.  dare2  l 


with 
d' 


one     of    these      iron    bars   bars    of    iron 

—        —  pdlo  f&rro 


upon    (the)    your    head,     that    we     will    make     thee      fall 

fdre*  l      cade- 

down    dead.     I    have     a    farm    very    near    to    the    bank 
re          morto.  av6re          podere  riva 

of    the    river.        Then    came      the     time      of    going    out 
fiume.  venire  tempo  uscire 

against      the     prince,      who      was     approaching      (himself) 
prence,  avvicindre3 

already    to    the    lands    of    the     Duke.     They    made    him 
terra  Duca.      — 

1  he    ;was      put     to    sit    down    just    opposite     to    the 
—  JEssere  me" Mere  seder e 

door      of     the    room,      whence    the    abbot     was    obliged 
uscio  cdmeraj  abate  dottre 

32 


374 


ANALOGY. 


to    come     out    into     the 
—  uscire 

seest     a    temple     by-the-side 
vedere          tempio 


dining     room 
sdla  a  mangidre 


of 
a 


the     sea. 
mare. 


Here    thou 

The     em- 
2        im- 

the 


peror       being  one     day    between    these     two  sages, 

peratore3  JEssere1            giorno  sdvio, 

one     stood     on    the     right      I    of    him    I ,  and  the     other 
stare2      a3      —       destra*    \       gli1          |  , 

on     the     left.  Having     gone     out    from     the  city      they 

«        —    sinistra.    Uscire  cittd      


put      themselves     on     the     way. 
metterc2  si1  —      via. 


the     finger  of 

—        dito2  a3 

face    at     him 


He     put       a     ring       on 
—    Mettcre  5    anello6      l 

Looking    fixedly     in     his 
Guarddre^ —    — 

fixedly     in    the     face,      in     order     to 
flso  mso, 


Torello. 

4 


see      whether 
vedere      se 


he      was    speaking      seriously. 
dire 


Having 


put        (himself)    on    a    great    black     pelisse,    he     arranged 
Mettere^,  nero2  l,    —  acconcidre4 

himself    in    that    in   such  a  manner,    that    he     looked    like 


gmsa, 


—  parere 


a    bear. 
orso. 


With     the     best      harmony    in    the    world      all 
miglior     pace  mondo  tutto 

(and)    four      dined      together.        He     began        with     the 
qudttro  desindre  insieme.  —    incomincidre2    3  4 

piece     of    wood     to     give     him    the      greatest     blows      in 
st6cca5  6    ddre7     GV1  maggiore      colpo 


the 


world,      now     on 
mondo, 


(the) 


his      head,     and      then     on 
—      ttsta,        e 

•(the)    his     sides.        I     wish     first    to    go      to     Rome,     and 

—  fidnco.  volere  —  anddre         Roma, 

there    to    see    him    (the)    whom    thou    sayest    to    be    — 

—  vedere  dire         —    — 


that    he     is  —  vicar     of   God    on    earth. 
6ssere     vicdrio          Dio  terra. 


There    sounded 
Suondre 


PREPOSITIONS.  375 

through     the     city     a     wonderful     report,  that  the  tombs 

cittd            mirdbile2        voce1,  3  5  tomla6 

of    the     Scipios         were     discovered    I  .  By  that  steep 


7  8 


Scipione9 


si  fossero  scoperte*    \  .  scosctso 


way     I     arrived      at     the     tombs      of    the     valorous      race. 
via      —   giungere  avello  valoroso2   stirpe1. 


Neither    by    letter     did    she    dare 
JY2  Uttera  —    ardire 


let    him    hear    it. 
fdre^,    2  sentire3  l^,. 


Not    seeing     through     the     wood     any    path.         You     will 
vedere  selva  sentiero.  ri- 

receive    a    hundred   (of  them)    for    every-one.    He    went    to 
c6vere2     —     cento5  3     ciascuno4.  anddre 

Ravenna    in-order-to    speak    to    the     army.      No,    I    never 
parldre  armdta.          ,  —    

will    mention    it  will    not    mention    it    ever.       With 

—  —         l     dire3  2  4. 

a    low      voice    he     replied     thus.        This     ferocious     man, 
—  basso     voce      —    rispondere2      l.  feroce2      uomo1, 

acts  of 


having     usurped     with   (the)    frauds    and    with  (the) 
<  -         usurpdre  frode 

violence   I    a    throne     not    his     own,     sought 

lenza         \          trono  —  ,        cercdre*      di9   \    man- 

serve        it      with     (the)     terror       and     with     (the)     cruelty. 
n  2      terrore3          4          5  6      crudeltd7. 


to  i       pre- 


Without    any      fail    I    promise     to  thee,    upon    (the)    my 

alcun  fdllo        promettere2  l}                               mio 

faith,    that    within  -    among      a  few     days     thou     wilt 

fe,                      -                                 —  poco     d/l                      tro- 

find     thyself    with     me.        I     wish  that     we     should      de- 

ware2            !            4          3.                volere  -       seen- 

scend    (until)    there     below. 
dere  giu. 


376  ANALOGY. 

CHAPTER    XV. 
CONJUNCTIONS. 

CONJUNCTIONS     IN     COMMON     USE, 


E, 

0, 

and  ; 
or,  either  ; 

non  gia, 

I  not  at  all,  not 
j      indeed  ; 

ne, 

nor,  neither  ; 

non  solo, 

'  not  only, 

se, 

if,  whether  ; 

non  eke, 

|  not  merely  ; 

ma, 

f  Vint  • 

pur  che, 

provided  ; 

perd, 

>   UU  L  , 

a  meno  che, 

unless  : 

che, 

that; 

dnzi  che, 

rather,  sooner; 

, 

Syet,  neverthe- 

( 

f  rather  than  not, 

pure, 

less  ; 

dnzi  che  no,     * 

rather  so  than 

gia, 

yet,  already  ; 

( 

;      otherwise  ; 

dnzi, 

inay,  rather,  on 
the  contrary  ; 

si, 
cost, 

so,  thus  ; 

dnche, 

^ 

come, 

ri 

dnco, 
eziandio, 

>  also,  even  ; 

siccome, 
sicche, 

as,  IIKG  ; 
so,  thus, 

altresl, 

N 

cosi  che, 

wherefore  ; 

ancora, 

(  also,   even,  a- 
l      gain  ; 

talche, 
giacche, 

so,  so  that  ; 
sine*  ; 

eppure, 
ossia, 

(  yet,  neverthe- 
l     less  ; 

doe, 
doe  a  dire, 
vale  a  dire, 

that  is  ; 
that  is  to  say  ; 

ovvero, 

>  or,  either  ; 

almeno, 

at  least  * 

oppure, 

) 

almdnco, 

nemmeno, 

] 

di  piu, 

moreover  ; 

nemmanco, 

inoltre, 

) 

neppure, 

!  neither, 

oltrecche,          1 

besides, 

nednche, 

}  not  even  ; 

oltracdb,          j 

'  besides  this  5 

tampoco, 

dj  altronde, 

nettampoco, 
se  mdi, 

?  if  ever, 

dunque, 
adunque, 

;  then, 
\  therefore  j 

se  pure, 

J  if  indeed  ; 

onde, 

|     ,       p 

se  perd, 

if  however  ; 

laonde, 

>  wnerefore, 

se  non, 

?  unless,  except, 

quindi, 

;     - 

se  non  che, 

I  but; 

percio, 

>  therefore,    for 
[     which  reason  \ 

CONJUNCTIONS. 


377 


accid, 

in  sdmma,        \ 

in  short, 

acciocche, 

in  order  that, 

in  fine,             ( 

'  in  conclusion  ; 

affine, 

to  the  end  that; 

sia  che, 

whether, 

ciffinchb, 

vuoi, 

or,  either  ; 

ch& 

for,  why  ? 

del  resto, 

otherwise, 

perchd, 

because  ; 

per  dltro, 

besides  ; 

poiche,             ?  because,  since, 

tdnto, 

as; 

posciache,         $  as,  after  ; 

qudnto, 

as  ; 

perocche, 

qudndo, 

when  ; 

imperocche,      \  because, 

quand*  dnche, 

even  when  ; 

perciocche,        [>  whereas, 

in  guisa  che,  ^ 

imperciocchb,    \  as,  since  ; 
conciosiacche,  \ 

in  modo  che, 
inmani&rache, 

so  that,  in  such 

quantunque,     \ 

di  modo  che, 

a  manner  ; 

sebbene, 

dimanierache,; 

benchd,              }>  although  ; 

intdnto 

1  in   the   mean 

comeche, 
avvegnache,    J 

frattdnto,         J 

time,      mean- 
'  while,  whilst  ; 

ancorche,         >            , 

mentre,             ] 

whilst, 

,  .    i  \       f  even  tliat  i 
contuttoche,      $ 

mentrecche,      ( 

'  whilst  that  ; 

nonostdnte, 

salvo, 

1 

nondimeno, 

eccetto,              \ 

>  save,  saving, 

nientedimeno, 

Qtill 

trdnne,              | 

>  except  ; 

con  tutto  cid, 
non  per  tdnto, 
non  per  questo, 
cid  non  ostdnte, 

bllil, 

nevertheless, 
notwithstand- 
ing, for  all  that; 

fuorchb, 
forse, 
6ra, 

perhaps  ; 
now.* 

cid  nondimeno, 

tuttavia,       *  J 

Many  of  these  conjunctions,  as  nondimeno,  cid  non  ostdnte,  &c. 
contain  in  themselves  &  pronoun,  &  preposition,  an  adverb,  &c.;  but, 
from  their  office  of  joining1  sentences  together,  they  are  commonly 
reckoned  amongst  conjunctions,  though  in  fact  they  are  but  conjunctive 
phrases. 

*  Some  of  these  conjunctions  might  be  mistaken  for  prepositions  or  adverbs,  and 
the  conjunction  CHE,  for  the  relative  pronoun  CHE,  'who,'  'which,'  'that';  their 
character  however  will  soon  be  ascertained  by  considering  the  office  which  they  per- 
form in  a  sentence.  Thus  in  the  following  examples  : 

Iddto  mi  ha  fatto  tdnta  gratia^  che  'to  God  has  granted  me  such  a  favor  as  to 
A'NZI  la  mta  morte  ho  veduto  alcitni  de'  enable  me  to  see  some  of  my  brothers 

before  my  death. 

She  was  a  little  advanced  in  years  and 
rather  proud. 

I  was  indeed  not  naturally  so,  but  by 


\  mta 
-m.iiifra.taii.    (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  5.) 

Attempattlla  era,  e  A'NZI  superba  che 
no.    (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  1.) 

To  £ra  ben  cosi,  ma  non  per  natitra. 


KI  u>  c/e/e  ci/ot,  ma,  nun,  per  /tan*/ it,  ws   n 

per  iina  infermitd.     (Bocc.  g.  3.      a  disease, 
n.  1.) 
tho  word  dnzi  is  a  preposition  in  the  first  instance  because  it  governs  la  mia  mdrtc : 

32* 


378  ANALOGY. 

The  conjunction  ne  is  sometimes  used  in  the  signifi- 
cation of  e,  '  and  ' ;  as, 

ddlci  NE  cdri,  sweet  and  dear  ; 

parldi  NE  scrissi,  I  spoke  and  wrote. 

Ma  is  often  used  in  the  signification  of  piu,  <  more  ' ; 
as,* 

MA  die  uriOj  more  than  one  ; 

non  MA  che  di  sospiri,  no  more  than  sighs, 

Che  is  sometimes  used  in  the  signification  of  fra  or 
tra,  '  between  ' ;  as, 

meglio  di  diecimila  ddbbre,  more  than  ten  thousand  pis- 
CHE  in  gioie,  e  CHE  in  toles  between  jewels  and 
dendri,  money. 

Pure  is  often  used  in  the  signification  of  ancora, 
i  also,'  <  even  '  y  solo,  solamente,  <  only ' ;  as, 

e  PURE  peccdto,  it  is  also  a  sin  ; 

s'  io  avessi  avuto  PURE  un  had  I  had  even  the  slightest 

pensieruzzo,  thought ; 

natura  non  avea  ivi  PUR  di-  nature  had  not  only  painted 

pinto,  there. 

The  conjunctions  quantunque,  sebbene,  bencke,  come- 
che,  avvegnache,  ancorche,  contuttoche,  are  generally 
followed  by  one  of  the  following  conjunctions,  pure, 

it  is  an  adverb  in  the  second  because  it  modifies  the  verb  era  :  and  it  is  a  conjunction 
in  the  last  because  it  connects  the  clause  (era)  per  natbra  with  ^era)  per  una 
infermitd. 

And  in  the  following : 

Comincidrono  a  dire,  CHE  quello,  CHE          They  began  to  say  that  what  he  had 
earli  av6oa  rispdsto,  non  ventva  a  dir  ntol-      replied  was  without  meaning 
la.     (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  9.) 

the  first  che  is  a  conjunction,  because  it  connects  dire,  with  what  follows  j  and 
the  second  is  a  relative  pronoun,  because  it  refers  to  quello,  its  antecedent. 

*  From  these  and  similar  examples  it  seems  as  if  the  Italian  ma  were  derived  from 
the  Latin  magis  :  —  the  Celtic  mai,  *  great.' 


CONJUNCTIONS.  379 

nonostante,  nondimeno,  nientedimeno,  con  tutto  do,  do 
non  ostante,  do  non  di  meno,  non  pertanto,  non  per 
questo  tuttavia  ;  as  their  correlatives  ;  as, 

COMECHE  vdrie  cose  gli  an-  although  it  passed  through  his 
ddsse  per  lo  pensiero  di  mind  to  do  various  things, 
/are,  PURE  deliberd  . .  .  .  ,  yet  he  determined 

Often  the  correlative  conjunction  is  suppressed ;  as, 

Jlrriguccio,      CONTUTTOCHE     Arriguccio,  although  a  mer- 
fosse  mercatdnte,  era  fnon-         chant,  was  a  proud  man. 
dimerio]  unfiero  uorno, 

Non  soloy  non  che>  are  followed  by  ma,  ma  ancora  ; 
as, 

sta  bene  di  coslfdtte  cose  NOW  it  is  well  to  reprimand  for 
CHE  gli  amici,  MA  gli  stra-  such  things, not  only  friends, 
nieri  di  ripiglidre,  but  even  strangers  ; 

il  vino  NON  SOLO  conforta  il  wine  not  only  assists  the 
natural  calore,  MA  ANCORA  natural  heat,  but  it  clears 
chiarifica  il  sdngue,  the  blood. 

JVbw  che  is  often  an  elliptical  expression  for  the 
phrase  NON  solamente  dico  CHE,  ma,  '  I  say  not  only 
that,  but ' ;  as, 

spero  trovdr  pieta  NON  CHE     I  hope  to  find  not  only  par- 
perdono  [NON  SOLAMENTE         don,  but  pity  ; 
rico  CHE  spero  trovdr  per- 
dono,  MA  pieta], 

avrebbero  potuto   muover    la    they   could    have    not  only 
guerra,  NON  CHE  difender-        defended  themselves,  but 
si  [D!CO  NON  SOLAMENTE        even  waged  war. 
CHE   avrebbero  potuto   di- 
fendersi,    MA     muover    la 
gutrra], 


Tanto  is  followed  by  quanto,  and  sometimes  by  che  ; 
corresponding  to  the  English  words  both  .  .  .  and  5  as, 

TANTO  crudi  QUANTO  c6tti,        both  raw  and  cooked  ; 
TANTO  mdschi,  CHE  feminine,    both  men  and  women. 


380 


ANALOGY. 


The  conjunctions  e,  o,  followed  by  a  word  beginning 
with  a  vowel  often  take  a  d  after  them ;  and  pure,  ep- 
pure,  oppure,  alrneno,  nemmeno,  ora,  ancora,  followed 
by  a  consonant  drop  the  last  vowel  ;  as, 

hard  and  severe  battles  ; 
whether  a  spirit  or  a  living 
man; 

which  to  think  of  oppresses 
rny  heart ; 

which  he  hopes  to  see  also 
there  in  heaven. 


diire,  CD  dspre  baltdglie, 
OD  ombra,  OD  uomo  certo, 

che  il  cuor  mi  preme  gia  PUR 

pe.nsdndo, 
ch*  AN  COR  lassu  vedere  spe- 

ra, 


Pure,  gid,  ora,  are  sometimes  mere  expletives ;  as, 

la  cosa  andd  PUR  cost,  the  thing  passed  just  so ; 

fossero  essi  pur  GI!  disposti,    would  that  they  were  disposed; 
6RA  le  parolefurono  assdi,        now  the  words  were  many. 


EXAMPLES. 


Se  gli  occhi  suoi  ti  fur  DOLCI, 
NE  CARI.  (Petr.  c.  40.) 

Qudnto  di  lei  PARLAI,NE  SCRIS- 
si.  (Petr.  s.  296.) 

Or  cui  chidmi  tu  Iddio  ?  JEgli 
non  b  MA  CHE  tfNo.  (Nov.  Ant. 
78.) 

Quivi,  secondo  che  per  ascol- 
tdre,  —  JVon  av6a  pianto,  MA  CHE 
DI  SOSPIRI  —  Che  V  aura  eterna 
facevan  tremdre.  (Dant.  Inf.  4.) 

Donolle  CHE  IN  GIOIE,  e  CHE 
in  vasellamenti  d'  oro  e  d'  ariin- 

tO,  E    CHE    IX    DENARI,  quillo    che 

vdlse  m6glio  D'  dltre  DIECIMILA 
DOBBRE.    (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  9.) 

E  pogndmo,  che  non  lo  faccid- 
mo  a  malizia,  pure  nienledime- 
no  E  PTJRE  PECCATO.  (Cavalc. 
Pungil.  195.) 


If  her  eyes  were  sweet  and  dear 
to  thee. 

How  much  I  spoke  and  wrote 
of  her. 

Now  whom   callest  thou  God  ? 
There  is  no  more  than  one. 


There,  as  well  as  my  ear  could 
note,  no  other  plaints  were  heard 
than  sighs,  which  caused  the  eter- 
nal air  to  tremble. 

He  gave  her  between  jewels, 
and  gold  and  silver  vases,  and 
money,  what  would  be  worth 
more  than  ten  thousand  pistoles. 


And  let  us  suppose,  that  we  do 
not  do  it  through  malice,  yet 
nevertheless  it  is  also  a  sin. 


CONJUNCTIONS, 


381 


0,    S*  fo    AVESSI    AVtTTO    PURE 

UN  PENSIERUZZO  di  fare  V  una 
di  quelle  cose,  che  voi  dite,  credete 
voi,  che  Iddio  m'  avesse  tdnto  so- 
stenuta  ?  (Bocc.  g,  1.  n.  1.) 

NON     AVEA     PUR     NATtJRA     1VI 

DIPINTO,  —  Ma  di  soavitd  di  mil- 
le  odori  —  Vi  facea  un  incdgnito 
indistmto.  (Dant.  Pur.  7.) 

COMECHE  VARIE  COSE  GLI  AN- 
DASSE  PER  LO  PENSIERO  DI  FA- 
RE, PURE,  vedendo  il  re,  DELIBE- 
RO (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

ERA  ARRIGUCCIO,  COWTUTTO- 
CHE  FOSSE  MERCATANTE,  UN  FIE- 

RO  UOMO.      (BOCC.  g.  7.  II.  8.) 

A  VOI  STA  BENE  DI  COS1  FATTE 
COSE,  NON  CHE  GLI  AMICI,  MA 
GLI  STRANIERI  DI  RIPIGLIARE. 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

IL  VINTO  NON  S6LO  CONFORTA 
IL  NATURAL  CALORE,  MA  ANCORA 
CHIARIFICA  IL  SANGUE  tOrbldo. 

<Cresc.  4;  48;  2.) 

SPERO  TROVAR  PIEXI,  NON  CHE 

PERDONO.     (Petr.  s.  1.) 

Tdnte  miglidia  armdti,  a  pie  e 
a  cavdllo,  AVREBBERO,  con  dltro 

Cdp0}  POTUTO  MUOVER  LA  GUER- 
RA,  NON  CHE  DIFENDERSI.  (DaV. 

Stor.) 
I  frutti  sono  samssimi  TANTO 

CRUDI,     QUANTO     COTTI.         (Red. 

Lett.  2.) 

Dimorano  salvfiremente  in 
queir  aria  di  collirta,  TANTO  MAS- 
em,  CHE  FEMMINE.  (Lib.  Cur. 
Malatt.) 

'Le  detle  nazioni  ebbero  DURE, 

ED  ASPRE  BATTAGLIE.     (Gio.  Vill. 

b.  6.  c.  29.) 

"  Miserere  di  me"  griddi  a  lui, 
?— "  Qudl  che  tu  sii,  OD  OMBRA, 
OD  UOMO  CERTO."  (Dant  Inf.  1.) 


Oh !  had  I  had  even  the  slight- 
est thought  of  doing  one  of  those 
things  which  you  say,  do  you  be- 
lieve that  God  would  have  assisted 
me? 

Nature  not  only  had  painted  there, 
but  of  the  sweetness  of  a  thousand 
smells  had  made  an  unknown,  un- 
distinguishable  fragrance. 

Although  it  passed  through  his 
mind  to  do  various  things,  yet, 
seeing  the  king,  he  determined 


Arriguccio,  although  a  mer- 
chant, was  a  proud  man. 

It  is  well  for  you  to 'reprimand 
for  such  things,  not  only  your 
friends,  but  even  strangers. 

Wine  not  only  assists  the  natu- 
ral heat,  but  it  clears  also  the 
turbid  blood. 


I  hope  to  find  not  only  pardon, 
but  pity. 

So  many  thousand  armed  men, 
on  foot  and  on  horseback,  would 
have,  under  another  captain,  not 
only  defended  themselves,  but 
waged  war. 

Fruits  are  very  wholesome,  both 
raw  and  cooked. 


In  that  mountain  air  both  men 
and  women  live  in  very  good 
health. 


Said  nations  had  hard  and  se- 
vere battles, 

"  Take  pity  upon  me,"  cried  I  to 
him,  "whatever  thou  be,  whether 
a  spirit  or  a  Hying  man." 


382  ANALOGY. 

Tu    vuoi  ch*  w    rinuovelli  —  Thou  wishest  that  I  should  re- 

Disperdto  dolor  che   il  cuor  mi  call   the  desperate  grief,  which  to 

prime  —  GIA  PUR  PENSANDO,  pria  think  of  oppresses  my  heart,  before 

eh'  w  nefavelli.     (Dant.  Inf.  33.)  I  tell  it. 

f  Per  mirdr  la  sembidnza  di  Co-  In  order  to   see   the  image   of 

luit  —  CH'  ANCOR  LASSU  nel  del  Him  whom  he  hopes  to  see  also 

VEDERE  SPERA.    (Petr.  s.  14.)  there  in  heaven. 

LA  COSA  AXDO  PUR  cosl.  (Bocc.  The  thing  happened  just  so. 
g.  2.  n.  5.) 

O'ra    FOSSERO    ESSI   PUR   Gil  Now  would  that  were  disposed 

DISPOSTI  a  venire.    (Bocc.  Int.  to  come. 

6RA  LE  PAROLE   FtjRoivo   AS-  Now  the  words  were  many,  and 

SAI,  ed  il  rammarichio  della  don-  the  sorrow  of  the  lady  great. 
na  grdnde.   (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  6.) 


EXERCISE    XXV. 


The    waters,     and    the     air,     and    the    branches,    and 
dcqua,  dura,  rdmo, 

the    little     birds,     and    the    fishes,     and     the     flowers,    and 
uccello,  pesce,  fiore, 

the     grass      speak    of    love.      |     I     do     not     go     away 
erba        parlare          arnore.    \    .  non10    mi11     allontdno12 

neither      from     (the)     Mount       Parnassus,      nor      from    the 
3      Monte4'        Parndsso? 

Muses.        And     it    appears     to     me     to     see     with-her    la- 
Musa9.  -^ardre4^  5        ved6r2  3        ddn- 


dies    and    damsels,    and    they   are    savins  and    beech-trees. 

na                  donzdlla,               —     essere  abete  f&ggio* 

Neither    by    message,     nor    by    letter    did  she     dare     to  I 

ambascidta,                     lettera  —    ardire      di  \ 

I  let    him     know    it.  1      Nimrod     was     the     first    king,     or 

fdrglielo         sapere.    \   Nembrotte  essere  re, 

ruler,     or    collector      (of    assemblage)     of  people.*    I     will 

rettore,         ragunatore           congregazidne  gente.                  di- 

*  People,  in  the  plural  —  peoples. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


883 


tell    perhaps   a  thing     not    credible,  but    true.      He     was 

re                              cosa                 credibile,  tiiro.        —  JEssere 

not    only      killed,       but      devoured  even    to    the     bones. 

ucciderej        l        divorare5  3       osso*. 

He     lost      every    hope,     not    only  of     ever    having    her 

—    perdere*  Ogni1  speranza2,  doverla       mdi 


again, 
riavere. 


but   even 


of   seeing 
vedere 


her. 


1  And    for    what    rea- 
ca- 


son  ?  "      said     Ferondo  :     "  Because     thou     wast     jealous.*' 
gione?"    dire  :      "  essere     geloso." 


Alexander      although 


Alessandro 

I   remained 
stette 


he     had 


great      fear,      yet 

•rd.n.tJ.pl     rtn.i'/.rnZ. 


he 


paura2, 


quiet. 
cheto. 


Surely,      although      thou     affirmest 
Certo,  affermdre* 


it,     I     do     not    believe,     that    thou 


believest 
credo? 


it. 


'Go 


then,"    said    the     lady,    "  and      call      him." 
,"     dire  donna,     "         chiamdre^      ." 


l.    "Anddre 
Since    you 


pardon     me,     I     will     tell     it     to     you. 
perdondre*^, 5,     6  dire9  7. 

Therefore     I      stop      (myself)  ;  but      why      goest      thou  ? 

_    nrroeirtre'*'  'l  2          fl.YldnrP  ?3  ! 


promise     me 
promettere2  l 


—  arrestdre 


Although     we   are   in   the     month  of    July  — -  be     of     July, 
—     —     —     essere3   1  Luglio2, 


I     thought 
mi  son  creduta 


this     morning     I     should     freeze     —    to 
mattina      —    as- 


freeze.        I    wish,    that    she    I  should  send  I    me     a    small 
siderdre.      —  Volire,  mdndi2  l 

lock     of    the     beard     of    Nicostratus.      Now    it    happened, 
cidcca  bdrba  Nico  strata.  —     avvenire, 

that    the    king    of  France He      was   guarding   I   the 

re  Frdncia —       Era  a  guarddre  \ 

passes    with   more  than    three    thousand    horsemen,   between 
ptisso  tremila  cavalierc, 

German     and     (between)     Lombards.        Provided    I  you^  have 
Tedesco  Lombardo.  \  a  voi  dia 


the     mind 
il       cuore 


to 

di 


keep    secret     what  —  that    which     I 
tener     secreto     


384 


ANALOGY. 


will    say    to    you. 
'     are2  ». 


have        I   only     one 
non  hdnno 


The     cranes 
gru 

leg      and     one     foot.        I     see,     that    he     wishes,     that    I 


vedere, 


volere. 


gamba  pie. 

should   do   I   what  —  that    which,    I     never  —  not   ever, 
fdccia       I   ,  3, 

should   relate 


wished     to     do,     that    is,    that     I 
volere*         fare,  , 

his     wickedness. 
»      cattivitci2. 


raccdnti 


(the) 


CHAPTER   XVI. 

INTERJECTIONS. 


INTERJECTIONS     IN     COMMON     USE. 


Ak! 

ah  !  ha  1  alas  ! 

ahime!  aime! 

\ 

eh  !  e  ! 
ih! 

eh! 
ih! 

chime!  eime! 
ohime!  oime! 

>alas  (me)  ! 

oh  !  o  ! 

oh  !  ho  ! 

[ome  ! 

\ 

uh! 

uh! 

oite  ! 

alas  (thee)  ! 

dhi! 

ah  !  alas  ! 

oise  ! 

alas  (him  or  her)! 

*/»-»*  / 

^  here  !  ho  hey  ! 

gudi  ! 

woe  ! 

em,  . 

I  ho  there  ! 

aiuto  ! 

help  ! 

old  !  6i  ! 

ah  !  oh  ! 

o  Dio  ! 

oh  Heavens  ! 

uhi! 

ah  !  alas  ! 

lasso  ! 

^ 

/fj>Ji  i 

Sah  !  alas  !  pray  ! 

lasso  me  ! 

>  alas  ! 

Utfi  I 

prithee  ! 

dhi  Idsso  ! 

^ 

doh! 
ah,  ah  ! 

oh  !  pshaw  ! 
ah,  ah  ! 

povero  me  ! 

(  wretched  that  I 
am  !    unfortun- 

eh,  eh! 
oh,  oh  ! 
poh  ! 

eh,  eh  ! 
oh,  oh  ! 
poh  ! 

misero  me  ! 
meschino  me  ! 
dolente  me  ! 

<  ate  that  I  am  ! 
wretched    me  ! 
l^poor  me  ! 

puh  !  pu  ! 

pu  !  pooh  ! 

o  me  bedto  ! 

eia  ! 

halloo  ! 

o  me  felice  ! 

happy  that  I  am! 

old! 

holla!  ho  there  !i  bedto  me  ! 

happy  me  ! 

\felice  me  ! 

INTERJECTIONS. 


385 


cost  ! 

so  !  thus  ! 

Alto  ! 

halt! 

si! 

>  yes,  certainly  ! 

sta! 
ohl  !                  j 

stop  ! 
take  care  ! 

pure  ! 

yet  ! 

gudrda  I 

.  have  care  ! 

f       I 

<  how!  how  then! 

largo  !              } 

i  beware  ! 

come  ! 
su! 

\  why  ?  why  so  ! 

piano,               } 
adagio,             \ 

softly  !  gently  ! 
slowly  ! 

orsu  ! 

f  up,  up  !   come  ! 

zl  !  zilto  ! 

st!  whist!  hush! 

su,  su  ! 

£  come  then  ! 

cheto  ! 

quiet  !  still  ! 

via! 
via,  via  ! 

away  ! 

non  piu  ! 

bdsta  ! 

enough  ! 

eh  via  ! 

fie  !  fie  upon  ! 

silenzio  ! 

silence  ' 

vergogna  ! 

for  shame  ! 

tacete  ! 

oibb  ! 

o  fie  !  o  fough  ! 

anddte  ! 

away  ! 

dnimo  ! 

•\ 

baddte  ! 

|  mind  ! 

cordggio  ! 
fate  cuore  ! 

(  courage  ! 
i  cheer  up  ! 

aW  erta  ! 
state  aW  erta! 

>  have  care  ! 
}  beware  ! 

bene  ! 

well  ! 

di  grdzia  ! 

pray! 

bravo  ! 

J  bravo  ! 
\  very  well  ! 

per  caritd  ! 

for  charity's 
[sake  ! 

buono  ! 

good  !     v 

per  amor  del  tie-  for    heaven's 

viva  ! 

long  live  ! 

lo! 

[sake  ! 

eh  viva  !  evviva  /huzza  ! 

mercl  ! 

>  mercy  ! 

cdpperi  ! 
cdppita  ! 
poffdre  ! 

t  ay  !  heyday  ! 
I  marry  ! 

misericordia  I 
possibile  ! 
appunto  ! 

£  mercy  upon  us  ! 
is  it  possible  ! 
exactly  !  just  ! 

oh  bella  ! 

fine! 

pensdte  ! 

just  think  !  * 

ecco  ! 

lo  !  behold  ! 

The  interjections  lasso,  povero,  misero,  meschino, 
beato  (me  ! ),  are  mere  adjectives,  and  when  used  by 
female,  take  the  feminine  termination:  —  lassa,  pove- 
ra,  miser  a  (me  I),  &c.  ;  and  in  the  plural  make,  lassi, 
poveri  (noil),  &tc.3  for  the  masculine;  and  lasse, pove- 
re  (noil),  &c.  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 

LASSA  ME  !  in  che  maV  6ra    alas  !  in  what  evil  hour  was  I 
ndcqui,  born  ; 

MisERi  NOI  !  che  sidm,  se  Id-     miserable  that  we  are  !  what 
dio  ci  Idscia  ?  becomes  of  us,  if  God  for- 

sakes us  ? 

*  It  in  important  to  observe,  that,  as  some  of  these  interjections  are  used  to 
express  different,  and  oven  contrary,  emotions  or  affections  of  the  mind,  their  exact 
signification  can  only  be  determined  by  the  sense  of  the  words  which  accompany  them, 
™  give  rise  to  the  exclamation. 

33 


386  ANALOGY. 

Bravo  !  zitto  !  cheto  !  are  also  adjectives,  and,  when 
used  in  speaking  to  a  female,  or  to  more  than  one  male 
or  female,  follow  the  same  rule  ;  as, 

BRAVA  !  come  qudndo  ?  bravo  !  as  when  ? 

ZITTI,  un  po'  I  hush,  a  little  ! 

Bravo  !  is  also  used  in  its  superlative,  and  makes 
bravissimo  !  bravissima  !  bravissimi !  bravissime,  l  bravis- 
simo  ! ' 


EXAMPLES. 


Oime  !  LASS  A  ME  !  doUnte  me  !  Alas  !   unfortunate  that   I   am  ! 

IN  CHE  MAL,'  ORA  NACQTJi.  (Bocc.  in  what  evil  hour  was  I  born. 
g.7.n.2.) 

MISERI  NOI  !  CHE  SIAM,  SB  ID-  Miserable  that  we  are  !  what  be- 

DIO  ci  L.ASCIA  ?    (Alf.  Saul.  1.  1.)  comes  of  us,  if  God  forsakes  us. 

BRAVA!  COME  QUANDO?   (Manz.  Bravo!  as  when? 
Prom.  Spos.  c.  1.) 

ZITTI,  -UN  PO'  !  ch*  elle  dormo-  Hush  a  little !  for  they  are  sleep- 
no.     (Buon.  Fier.)  ing. 


Many  of  the  foregoing  interjections  are  elliptical 
expressions  of,  and  equivalent  to,  perfect  sentences  ;  as, 
ola,  for  instance,  which  stands  for  O  [tu,  che  sei]  LA,  '  O 
thou,  who  art  there  ' ;  orsu,  for  6na  [levati  or  levatevi] 
su,  'now  rise  up';vvt«,  for  [va'  or  andate]  VIA  ;  cheto, 
for  [sta  or  state]  CHE'TO,  *  be  still ' ;  coraggio,  for  [abbii 
or  abbiate]  CORA'GGIO,  c  have  courage  '  ;  viva,  for  VIVA 
[egli  or  etla  lungamente,] l  may  he  or  she  live  long ';  bene, 
for  [sta  or  va]  BE'NE,  6  it  is  well ' ;  bravo,  brava,  for  [sei 
or  siete]  BRA'VO,  BRA'VA  ;  oh  bella,  for  OH  [questa  e]  BE'L- 
LA,  'oh  this  is  fine  ';  &c. ;  to  which  may  be  added  manco 
male,  or  meno  male,  '  less  evil,'  '  not  so  bad,'  c  better  so  '; 
which  is  often  used  as  an  interjection,  and  is  equivalent 
to  the  phrase  [il]  MAXLE  [e~\  MAXNCO,  or  MEXNO,  [che  non 


INTERJECTIONS.  387 

sarebbe  stato,  se  la  cosa  fosse  andata  altrimenti,~\  '  the 
evil  is  less  than  if  the  thing  had  happened  otherwise,' 
( it  is  not  so  bad  as  if  it  had  happened  otherwise,'  c  bet- 
ter so  than  otherwise.' 


EXERCISE    XXVI. 


Ah  !     how  many     steps     thou    Ipsest    through    the    for- 
pdsso      —      perdere*  *  2      sel- 

est !         "  Ah !  "    I    said     he,   I    " valiant     men,      ah  !     corn- 
ea3 /  I    dicea     — ,    I    "  valente     uomo,  com- 

panions,     ah  !     brothers,     keep     (the)    your     place."      Alas ! 
pdgno,  fratello,       tenure  ludgo." 

mercy  ;  for   heaven's    sake  !     Alas  !  blind    ungrateful   world  ! 

orbo      ingrdto'2       mondo1  ! 

0  !     happy    souls  !         Wretched    that    I     am  !        I      have 

felice2    dnima1  !  avere? 

loved     thee    more     than     (the)    my    own    life.      Fie  !       go 
amdre3        l  —       vita.  anddre 

on.        Is     it     possible,     that    thou    I    art     I    alive  ?    Marry ! 
oltre.  |     sii      \     vivo  ? 

1  recant    (myself.)      How     many      tears,      alas !     have      I 
ridire*  *.  Idgrima,  avere    — 

already     shed  !     Woe     to     you,     perverse       souls  ! 


sparger -e !  prdva?          dnima1 ! 


never 
non  is- 


hope 
perdte  mdi 


to    see    the    heaven    again.    Hush !   hush  !   other- 
veder  ci6lo        . 


wise    we    begin    again.    Holla !  where     art    thou  ?     Come  ! 

—     essere  da-capo.  essere           1 

let    us    see.     Up,  up !    citizens,  let    every-one    arm    himself 

vedere.                              cittadino,  —                   3  armdre2         ,  l 

speedily    to    the    defence.      Oh !    thou    art    in    great    haste 

veloce                         difesa.  avere  —    gran     fretta- 

Alas  !    how    miserable    is    (the)  our    fortune  !     "  The    cava- 

qudnlo  misero2     essere1  fortuna !             2      cava- 


388  ANALOGY. 

lier     said  :      "  I     wish     to    leave     thee,     and     serve     God." 
litre3  Dire1 :      '«        volere   —   lascidr^  servir     Dio." 

The     demon     replied  :      u  Pshaw  !      why     wishest    thou    to 
2    demonio3  Rispondere1:  "  vottre2 

leave     me  ?  "     O  poor  me  !  (that)  I   I   shall    never    be    good 
lasciare      l  ?  "  |  non   sard   mdi   piu   buo- 

again  I    I  for     any    thing.      Pray  !    my    friend,    why    wishest 
no        I    I   a  2    arnica1,  voltre 

thou       to   give    thyself  I   this   trouble  ?      "  Alas  ! "   said   the 
entrdre    in  \  fatica  ?         "  "    dire 

other,      "  what     is     that    which    thou    sayest  ? "        Come  ! 
"  essere  dire  ?  " 

go,      I    will    wait    for    thee     in    the    house.    Away  !     do 
anddre,        aspettdre2      —  —       cdsa.  — 

not    have     any     fear,     I     will     carry    thee     to     the     house 
av£r      —      paura,  ponere2  l  —       cdsa 

safe     and     sound.     Silence,       son,     do    I  not    make    noise  I  ; 
sdlvo3  sdno1.  .       ,    figliuolo,  —    |  non   far    romore    \  ; 

let    f  (the)    thy    father    sleep.      Oh !    you    make    me    laugh. 
lasciare    *       —    genitdre*  dor  mire1.  fare2        1      ridere. 


He     cried     out :     «  Oh,    oh  !  " 
—  Griddre  :       " 


at 
per 


(the)    which     cry    the 
grido 


cranes    began    to     fly.        Oh,     blind  !     oh,     wretched  !     oh, 
grit,        comincidre     fuggire.  cieco.  !  ! 

foolish    man  !     oh,     how     infirm     thou     art !        Alas  (him)  ! 
mdtto        —    !  qudnto  infermo*    —     tssere1  !  ! 

wretched    (him)  !     that    the     hog    had    been     stolen     from 
/  ,    *        pdrco         essere2      imboldre3   

him  —  to     him.      Heyday  !     how     well     in     tune     she     is  ! 
l.  —         3     tuono*     l  stare2 ! 

Courage,    youn^g     men,     let     us     assault    manly,     and    with 
,          giovane,  assaltdre  virile, 

cheerful     front,     these     drowsy    people.      Away,    stay    there 
allegro       fronte  dormiglidne.  ,     — 

with     the     other     dogs. 
cdne. 


PART    III, 

ITALIAN    SYNTAX 


CHAPTER    I. 
ORDER   AND   POSITION   OF  WORDS. 

WORDS  may  be  arranged  in.  Italian  either  in  the 
natural  order  of  the  ideas  which  they  are  used  to  con- 
vey ;  as,  io  son  r{cco,  e  spendo  il  mio  in  metier  tavola, 
'  I  am  rich,  and  spend;  my  money  in  keeping  a  good 
table  '  ;  or  in  a  somewhat  different  order,  in  which  eu- 
phony or  emphasis  is  consulted  ;  as,  in  quella  dimoran- 
do,  poco  o  niente  potrebbe  del  suo  valor  dimostrare 
[for  potrebbe  dimostrare  poco  o  niente  del  suo  valor, 
dimorando  in  quella],  c  He  could  show  little  or  nothing 
of  his  valor,  remaining  there*'  Hence  there  are  two 
different  constructions,  the  one  called  simple  or  direct, 
the  other  inverse  or  indirect. 

SIMPLE     CONSTRUCTION-.. 

In  the  simple  construction,  the  subjective  is  always  put 
before  the  verb.  It  is  generally  a  pronoun,  a  noun,  an 
adjective  or  a  verb  used  as  a  noun,  or  a  phrase  ;  as, 

io  Amo,,  1  love  ; 

PIETRO  fugge,  Peter  flies  ; 

IL  BKLLO  pidce,  the  beautiful  pleases; 
33* 


390  SYNTAX. 

IL  suo  PARLARE  mi  pidcque  [her  speaking]  her  conversation 

si,  pleased  me  so; 

CHE  TU  CON  NOI  Ti  RiMAN-  we  should  be  very  glad,i/*£/um 

<*A,  n'  e  caro,  wouldst  remain  with  us. 

The  objective  is  put  after  the  verb.     It  is  generally 
SL pronoun,  a  noun,  an  adjective,  a  verb,  or  a  phrase;  as, 

guardate  ME,  look  at  me  ; 

dmo  GUISCARDO,  I  love  Guiscard  ; 

perdono  IL  BELLO,  they   lose    [the    beautiful]    the 

beauty ; 

avendo  compiuto  IL  suo  CAN-     having  finished  her  ringing  ; 

TARE, 
signified  IL  FATTO  COME  STA-     declared  the  fact  as  it  was. 

VA, 

If  the  subjective   or   objective   have   an   article,   this 
article  is  put  before  them ;  as, 

GLI  uomini  sono   capo  delle  [the]  men  are  the  head  of  wo- 

femmine,  men ; 

IL  capitdno  cadde,  e  sconcios-  the  captain  fell,  and  sprained 

si  IL  piede,  [the  foot]  his  foot. 

The  adjectives  belonging  to  the  subjective  and   objec- 
tive are  put  immediately  after  them  ;  as, 

gli  scoldri  MORIGERATI  e  DI-     the   well-behaved  and    diligent 
LIGENTI  studiano,  scholars  study  ; 

U  maestro  primia  gli  scoldri     the  master  rewards  the  atten- 
ATTENTI  e  STUDIOSI,  tive  and  studious  scholars. 

Any  other  word  which  is  dependent  on  the  subjective 
or  objective  is  also  put  immediately  after  them  ;  as, 

la  virtu  DI   PAOLO  fa   rico-     the   virtue   of   Paul   was   ac- 
nosciuta,  knowledged ; 

nconosciva    nei    discendenti    it  acknowledged    in    the    de- 
la  virtu  DEL  PADRE,  scendants  the  virtue  [of  the 

father}  of  their  father. 

The  relative  pronoun  is  put  after  its  antecedent ;  as, 


ORDER  OF  WORDS.  391 

Lo  sco/are,  il  QUALE  nascdso    the  scholar,  who  had  concealed 
era,  himself. 

The  adverb  is  put  immediately  after  the  verb,  which 
it  modifies  ;  as, 

dma  ARDENTEMENTE  la  glo-    he  loves  glory  ardently. 
ria, 

The  preposition  is  put  before  the  word,  which  it  gov- 
erns ;  as, 

DI  selva  IN  silva  DAL  crudil    she  flies  from  wood  to  wood  to 
5'  invdla,  avoid  the  pursuit  q/*^e  fero- 

cious animal. 

The  conjunction  is  put  between  those  parts  of  a  sen- 
tence, which  it  connects  ;  as, 

gli  augelletti,  E  i  p&sci,  E  i    the  little  birds,  and  the  fishes, 
Jioriy  E  T  6r6a,  and    the    flowers,   anc?   the 

grass. 

The  interjection  has  no  fixed  place,  it  having  no  in- 
trinsic relation  to  the  other  words  ;  it  is,  however,  gen- 
erally put  at  the  beginning  of  the  phrase  ;  as, 

OIME  !   che   e  quello,   che  tu    alas  !  what  is  that  you  say  ? 


EXAMPLES. 

Io  SONO  RICCO,  E  SPENDO   IL  I  am  rich,  and  spend  my  money 

MIO  IN  METTER  TAVOLA,  ed  ono-  in  keeping  a  good  table  to  enter- 

ro  i  miei  concittadini.     (Bocc.  g.  tain  my  fellow-citizens. 

9.  n.  9.) 

IN  Q,UELLA  DiMORANDO,  poco  He  could  sbow  little  or  nothing 

o    NIENTE    POTREBBE    DEL   stjo  of  his  valor,  remaining  there. 

VALOR    DIMOSTRARE.       (BOCC.     g. 

10.  n.  1.) 

Io  ho  amdtOj  e  AMO  GUISCAR-  I   have  loved,  and  love  GUIS- 

DO.     (Bocc.  g.  n.  I.)  card. 

PiETRoBoccamdzzctFtiGGEcon  Peter  Boccamazza    flies   away 

/'   Jlgnoldlla,    e  truova    ladroni.  with  Agnolella,   and   meets  with 

(Bocc.  5.  n.  3.)  thieve3. 


392 


SYNTAX. 


IL  BIZLLO  PIACE  dgli  occhi,  e  si        The  beautiful  pleases  the  eyes, 
ammira.     (Vas.)  and  is  admired. 


E  'L  StJO  PARLARE,  fi  '/  6^/  01S0, 

e  le  chiome  MI  PIACQUER  si,  ch9 
io  Z'  7»o  dindnzi  dgli  occhi.  ( Petr. 
c.7.) 

CHE  TU  CON  NOI  TI  RIMAN- 
GA  per  questa  sera,  N'  E  CARO. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  3.) 

GUARDATE  ME,  eke  SOtl  dl  Vistd 

priva.     (Pign.  Fav.) 

Le  donne,  qudndo  arrivano  a 
quardnta  dnni,  PERDONO  IL  BEL- 
LO  dilla  gioventudine,  e  acqui- 
stano  il  billo  matrondle.  (Lib. 
Adorn.  Donn.) 

AVENDO  gid  COMPITJTO  la  J)6lla 
ninfa  IL  stro  CANT  ARE.  (Bocc. 
Am.) 

A  lui  si  raccomandd,  e  SIGNI-  He  recommended  himself  to 
nco  IL,  F^TTO  COME  STAVA.  him,  and  declared  the  fact  as  it 
(Ser.  Giov.  Fior.  Pecor.)  was. 


And  her  conversation,  and  her 
beautiful  face,  and  her  hair  pleas- 
ed me  so,  that  I  have  her  before 
my  eyes. 

We  should  be  very  glad,  if  thou 
wouldst  remain  to-night  with  us. 

Look  at  me,  that  am  deprived 
of  sight. 

Women,  when  they  arrive  to 
the  age  of  forty,  lose  the  beauty 
of  youth,  and  acquire  that  of  ma- 
trons. 

The  beautiful  nymph  having 
finished  her  singing. 


GLI   UOMINI    SONO  DELLE   FEM- 

MINE  CAPO,  e  senza  V  or  dine  loro 
rdde  volte  riesce  alcuna  nostra 
opera  a  laudevol  fine.  (Bocc. 
Intr.) 

IL    CAPITANO    CADDE,     E    SCON- 

ciossi  IL  PIEDE  in  forma,  che 
non  pote  stare  in  piedi.  (Matt. 
Vill.  9.  11.) 

GLI    SCOLARI    MORIGERATI    E         The  well-behaved  and  diligent 
DILIGENTI  STUDIANO.    (Cort.  Os-     scholars  study, 
serv.) 


Men  are  the  head  of  women, 
and  without  their  management  it 
seldom  happens  that  any  under- 
taking of  ours  succeeds  well. 

The  captain  fell,  and  sprained 
his  foot  in  such  a  manner,  that  he 
could  stand  no  more. 


IL  MAETSTRO  PREMIA  GLI  S COL A- 
RI  ATTENTI    E   STUDIOSI.       (BuOHl. 

Ling.  Tosc.) 

LA  VIRTU  DI  PAOLO  FU  debita- 
ininte  RICONOSCIUTA.     (Cavalc.) 

Ma  la  ricordtvol  pdtria  RICO- 

NOSCEVA      NE5     DISCENDENTI      LA 
VIRTU     DEL     PADRE.      (Bott.  StOf. 

Am.  1.  9.) 


The  master  rewards  the  atten- 
tive and  studious  scholars. 

The  virtue  of  Paul  was  duly  ac- 
knowledged. 

But  the  grateful  country  ac- 
knowledged in  the  descendants  the 
virtues  of  their  father. 


ORDER   OF   WORDS. 


393 


LO  SCOLARE,  IL  QUALE,  in    SUl 

fare  della  ndtte,  col  suo  fdnte, 
presso  della  torretta,  NASCOSO 
ERA.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

PietrO  AMA  ARDENTEMENTE  LA 

GLORIA.     (Cort.  Osserv.) 

Dl  SELVA  IN    SELVA    DAL  CRU- 

DEL  s'  INVOLA.  (Ariost.  Fur.  1. 
34.) 

V    deque  pdrlan  d'  amore,  e 
r  dura,  e  i  rdrni,  —  E  GLI  AUGEL- 

LETTI,    E     I    PESCI,    E    I     F1ORI,     E 

ERBA  ;  —  Tutti  insieme  pre- 
gdndo  ch'  i*  sempr*  ami.  (Petr. 
s.  239.) 

OlME  !      CHE     £    £tll!li.O,    CHE 

TU  DI'  ?     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 


The  scholar,  who,  when  it  grew 
night,  had  concealed  himself,  with 
his  servant,  near  the  small  tower. 

Peter  loves  glory  ardently. 

She  flies  from  wood  to  wood  to 
avoid  the  pursuit  of  the  ferocious 
animal. 

The  waters  speak  of  love,  and 
the  air,  and  the  boughs,  and  the 
little  birds,  and  the  fishes,  and  the 
flowers,  and  the  grass  ;  entreating 
all  together  that  I  should  always 
love. 

Alas  !  what  is  it  you  say  ? 


INVERSE     CONSTRUCTION. 


With  regard  to  inverse  construction  no  certain  rules 
can  be  established,  it  varying  according  to  the  taste  and 
ear  of  the  speaker  or  writer.  It  can  only  be  said,  that 
in  this  construction  the  subjective  may  be  put  after  the 
verb  ;  as, 

chiese   i/   IMPERATORE  dlla    the  Emperor  asked  of  the  Diet 
Dieta  tremila  cavdllr,  three  thousand  horses ; 

presemi  allora  LA  MIA  SCOR-     then  my  guide  took  me  by  the 
TA  per  mdno,  hand. 

The  objective  may  be  put  before  the  verb  ;  as, 

s^ingcgnano  IL  LORO  TEMPO  they  endeavour  to  pass  away 

di  consumdre,  their  time  ; 

GRANDI  BESTIE  hdnno  ntf  16-  they  have  large  beasts  in  their 

ro  boschi,  woods. 

The  adjectives  belonging  to  the  subjective  or  the 
objective,  may  be  put  before  them  ;  as, 


394 


SYNTAX. 


quantunque  fosse    TONDO   e     although  he  was  a.  foolish  man. 
GROSSO 


The  other  words  dependent  on   the  subjective  or  06- 
jective,  may  also  be  put  before  them  ;  as, 

il  [DI]  cui  nowie  era  Efige-     whose  name  was  Ephigenia. 
nia, 

The   adverb   may   be   put  before   the   verb,  which   it 
modifies  ;  as, 

PIETOSAMENTE  U  chiamdva,     she  did  call  him  with  a  lamen- 

table voice. 

• 

The  preposition  may  be  put  after  the  ivord,  which  it 
governs  ;  as, 

io  TI  vend  AFPRESSO,  I  will  come  after  thee. 


EXAMPLES. 


CHIESE  L*  IMPERATORE  ALLA 
DiETA,  per  tale  impresa,  TREMI- 
LA  CAVALLI,  e  seditimila  fanti. 
(Mach.  lett,) 

PRESEMI  ALLORA  LA  MIA  SCOR- 
TA  PER  MANO.  (Dant.  Inf.  13.) 

S*  INGEGiVANO    IL    LORO    TEMPO 

DI  CONSUMARE.   (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  8.) 

GRANDI  BESTIE  HANNO  NE'  LO- 
RD BOSCHI.  (Day.  Germ.) 

QUANTUNQUE     FOSSE     TONDO    E 

GROSSO  UOMO.    (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

IL    GUI    NOME    ERA    EriGENIA. 

(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

Assdi  volte,  la  notte,  PIETOSA- 

MENTE    IL    CHIAMAVA.       (BOCC.  g. 

4.  n.  5.) 

Or  via  !  mettiti  avanti,  io  TI 

VERRO     APPRESSO.       (BOCC.     g.    2. 

n,  5.) 


The  Emperor  asked  of  the  Diet, 
for  such  an  undertaking,  three 
thousand  horses,  and  sixteen  thou- 
sand foot-soldiers. 

Then  my  guide  took  me  by  the 
hand. 

They  endeavour  to  pass  away 
their  time. 

They  have  large  beasts  in  their 
woods. 

Although  he  was  a  foolish  man. 
Whose  name  was  Ephigenia. 


A  great  many  times,  during  the 
night,  did  she  call  him  with  a  la- 
mentable voice. 

Come  !  walk  before,  I  will  come 
after  thee. 


ORDER   OF   WORDS.  395 

These  inversibns  are  very  common  in  Italian,  and 
add  great  expression  and  beauty  to  the  phrase  ;  but  in 
using  them  we  must  always  consult  euphony.  A  learner 
ought  never  to  avail  himself  of  such  liberties,  until,  by 
a  competent  knowledge  of  the  language,  and  a  long 
perusal  of  the  classics,  he  be  able  to  appreciate  their 
value  and  to  make  use  of  them  with  propriety. 


EXERCISE    XXVII. 


Rome     was    full     of    funerals,    the     capitol     of    victims. 
Roma  pieno          mortorio,  campidoglio        vitiima. 

I    routed    three   legions,    and  three   lieutenants.     This  house 
atterrdre  legione,  legato.  cdsa 

is         built        1    on   I   a      high       situation  ;      it      has      gar- 
fabbricdre    \    in    \        emin6ntez    sito1  ;          —     av6re    giar- 

dens,     it    has     groves,     it    has     plains      and     hills.        The 
dino,     —  bosco,       —  pianura  collina. 

conversation     of     Montanus      pleased      so- much    the     sen- 
parldre  Montana        piacere  send- 

ate,    that    Elvidius     Priscus     hoped  to          be     able     to 

to,  Elvidio        Prisco       sperdre          di  pot&re        ab- 

conquer    even    Marcellus.        Many      wives      have     spoiled 
bdttere  Mar  cello.  moglie3  l    guastdre 

(the)    their      husbands.         He      made      him     dress       nobly. 
marito.  —       fdre*  l      vesttre4  nobile3. 

Fulvius,   who    had    been    consul,     and    had    already  I   tri- 
Fulvio,       —        —      6ssere   console,     —        —  |    tri- 


umphed  over  the 
onfatore         d6* 


Gauls,    the     most    illustrious    of    (the) 
Gdllo,  illustre 


thy    followers,    was    killed    by    the    Patricians  in     a     bath 

stgudce,               uccidere                       Padre  bdgno 

together    with    a    son    I  of    his  I  as   beautiful  as   innocent. 

figliuolo*  I  —        l    I  —    leggiddro  innocent^. 


396  SYNTAX. 


There     came     a    merchant    I    of    Cyprus, 
—         Venire         mercatdnte  \       Cipridno, 


much    beloved 
3        amdre4 


by     him.  Thou      seest,      that    it     is      useless      to     pray 

2.  ved6re,                               inutile       —      — 

and     to     weep    (the     praying      and    the      weeping.) 

pregdre  pidngere. 

Nothing  else     has      been      left      to     me     of    the     inherit- 

8  —    dssere11    —    rimanen?           10       *          2          eredi- 

ance     of  (the)    my     ancestors,     except    (the)     my    honor ; 

td3           4  56        dvolo1,                    12          13        —    onestci; 


and     that    I     intend    I    to 
2  intendere1       di 


guard,     and     I    to    I    preserve 
guarddre,  \    di    \      servdre 

as    long     as     I    live     (the     life     will     last    to     me). 

—     —  durdre*  l 

To    be    contented   (the    being   contented)  I  with        (the) 

essere        contento  \    di 

his    own     condition,     to     moderate    (the)    excessive     desires, 
proprio  stdto,  moderdre  soverchio2   desiderio1, 

not     to     allow     himself    neither     to     be     transported    1  by  I 
lascidre^^  —        trasportdre  \  ad  \ 

excessive    joy    in    (the)    prosperities,    nor    to    be    overcome 
eccessivo      gioia  prosperita,  —      abbdttere 

|  by      (the)   misfortunes,     form    the     character    of   a    wise 
I  in  disgrdzia,    formdre  cardttere  sdggio2 

man.       He     could     not    appease     the     angry     mother     with 
udrno1.    —      potereb        4    attutdre6        l      irdto2       mddre3 

any        act      of      generosity.         Plato        asserts,       that    in 
niuno      —        —        larghezza.  Platone2    "^ -  — f 


literary     disputes  (in    (the)     disputes     of    (the)  letters) 

disputazione  letter  a 

it    is     more     useful      to      be      conquered    (the  being 

—                        utile        —      —          essere 

conquered)    than     to     conquer. 
mncere  mncere. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS.        397 

CHAPTER  II. 
CONCORDANCE  OR  AGREEMENT  OF  WORDS. 

CONCORDANCE     OF     ARTICLES. 

ARTICLES  agree  with  nouns,  in  gender  and  number ; 
as, 

iisfratello,  LA  sorell^  the  brother,  the  sister  ; 

LI  pddn,  LE  mddrij  the  fathers,  the  mothers  ; 

LA  donnA,  IL  marlto9  the  wife,  the  husband  ; 

i  Jigliuoli,  the  children. 

EXAMPLES. 


L*  unfratello  V  altro  abbando-  One    brother    abandoned     the 

ndva,ei*A.  SORELLA  IL  FRATELLO,  other,  and  the  sister  the  brother, 

e  sptsse  volte  LA.  DONNA  IL  suo  and  oftentimes  the  wife  her  hus- 

MARITO.     (Bocc.  Intr.)  band. 

E  che  maggior  cosa  £,  LI  pi-  And  what  is  more,  the  fathers 

DRI  e  JLE  MADRI,  i   FiGi.iuoLi   di  and  the  mothers  shunned  to  visit 

visit  are  e  di  servire   schivdvano.  and  serve  their  children. 
(Bocc.  Intr.) 


CONCORDANCE     OF    ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives,  as  we  have  already  observed  at  p.  63, 
are  to  agree  with  their  substantives,  in  gender  and  num- 
ber 5  as, 

uomo  DOTTO,  buonA  GENTE,     a  learned  man,  good  people  ; 
BELLE    donnE,    LEGGIADRI      fair  women,  pretty  youths* 
fanciulli, 

34 


398  SYNTAX. 

Adjectives  are  also  to  agree  with  personal,  conjunc- 
tive, and  relative  pronouns^  in  gender  and  number  ;  as, 

10  (fern.)  son  VIVA,  I  arn  alive  ; 
voi  (masc.)  siite  LONTANI,          you  are  far  ; 

vi  (fem.)  Idscio   LIBE.RA   di  I  leave  you  at  the  disposal  of 

Nicoluccio,  Nicoluccio ; 

per  renderci   (masc.)   FORTI  to  make  us  strong  and  invin- 

ed  INVINCIBILI,  cible  ; 

qudndo  LA  videro  SOLA,  when  they  saw  her  alone ; 

11  QUALI  erano  motto  LTJNGHI,  which  were  very  long. 

When  two  or  more  substantives  singular  of  the  same 
gender  come  together,  the  adjectives  belonging  to  them 
are  put  in  the  plural,  agreeing  with  a  noun  of  the  same 
gender  understood  ;  as, 

LICTA  e  CALLIMACO  [quest!  Lycias  and  Callimachus  [these 

due  individui]  sono  RICCHI,  two  individuals']  are  rich  ; 

MAIUA  e  LuciA  [queste  due  Mary  and  Lucy  [these  two  girls] 

fanciiille]  sono  FOVERE,  are  poor. 

If  the  substantives  are  of  different  genders  or  different 
numbers,  the  adjectives  are  put  in  the  plural,  agreeing 
with  a  masculine  noun  understood  ;  as, 

IL  PADRE  e  LA  MAD  RE  del-  the  father  and  the  mother  of 
la  Lisa,  CONTE.NTI,  ftcero  Lisa,  both  glad,  expressed 
grandissimafestaj  very  great  joy  ; 

LA   CORTE  TUTTA,  I  SOVRAjNI       the      whole      COUrt,      the      SOV6- 

sono  sommamente  CONTEN-         reigns  are  well  satisfied. 


EXCEPTION. 

If,  however,  one  of  the  substantives  is  preceded  by  the  preposition 
con,  '  with,'  '  in  company  with  ' ;  then  the  adjective  or  participle  used 
as  an  adjective,  may  agree  either  with  the  other  substantive,  or  with  a 
noun  in  the  plural  understood ;  as, 

essendosi  PIONEO  con  gli  dltri  Dioneo  and  the  other  youths  hav- 

giovani  MESSD  a  giucdre,  ing  set  themselves  to  play  ; 

esse"ndosi  LA  DONNA  COL  GIO-  the  lady  and  the  young  man  hav- 

VANE  POSTI  a  tdvola,  ing  sat  down  to  table. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS. 


399 


When  there  are  in  a  phrase  several  substantives  of 
different  gender  and  different  number,  separated  from 
their  adjective  by  a  verb  either  expressed  or  understood; 
the  adjective  is  put  in  the  plural,  agreeing  with  a  mascu- 
line noun  understood 


as, 

LE  mie  CASE  ed  i  LUOGHI 
pubblici  di  Roma,  SON  PIE- 
NI  d*  antiche  immdgini, 

IL  PADRE  di  lei  e  LA  MAD  RE, 
[essendo]  DOLOROSI  di 
questo  accidente,  V  atdvano, 


my  houses  and  the  public  pla- 
ces of  Rome  are  filled  with 
ancient  images  ; 

both  her  father  and  her  mother, 
[being]  grieved  at  this  acci- 
dent, relieved  her. 


If  several  names  of  inanimate  beings  occur  in  the 
same  phrase,  and  they  are  not  separated  from  their' 
adjective  by  a  verb  ;  this  adjective  agrees  with  the  near- 
est noun  ;*  as, 


onori  e  GLORIA  NUOVA, 
con  bdrba  e  CRINI  BAGNATI, 
V  una  e  V  ALTRA  MAN  MOZZA, 


new  honors  and  glory ; 

with  a  dripping  beard  and  hair ; 

both  hands  cut  off. 


The  adjective  agrees  also  with  the  nearest  noun, 
when  there  are  in  the  same  phrase  several  substantives, 
and  the  quality  expressed  by  that  adjective  is  affirmed 
or  denied  to  belong,  successively  or  alternatively,  to 
either  of  them  ;  as, 

Pittro  o  MARIA  £  MORTA,        either  Peter  or  Mary  is  dead  ; 
ne  Francesco,  ne  GIOVANNI     neither  Frances  nor  John  has 


71071  &  PARTITO, 


gone  ; 


un   tizzo,   un   carbone,   TJNA     a  brand,  a  coal,  a  spark  might 
TAVILLA  e  ATTA  ad  appic-        set  fire. 
cdrfuoco, 


*  Contrary  to  this  rule  is  the  following  example  in  Boccaccio: 


Se  cosi  giidato  aveste,  ella  avrebbe  cost 
L?  A'LTRA  CO'SCIA,  e  V  tiltro  pi&  fudr 
MANDA'IA.  (G.  6.  n.  4.) 


If  you  had  cried  out  so,  it  (the  crane) 
would  have  likewise  put  out  the  other 
leg  and  the  other  foot. 


400  SYNTAX. 


EXCEPTIONS. 

An  adjective  accompanied  with  a  substantive  feminine  applicable  to 
a  man,  is  put  in  the  masculine  gender ;  as, 

LA  PERSONA  qudndo  e  TRIBOLA-     when  a  person  is  afflicted  ; 
TO, 

QUELL  A  BESTIA  [di  Tofano]  era    that  stupid  ass  [Tofano]  was  dis- 
pur  DISPOSTO,  posed. 

The   adjective  mezzo, l  half,'  when  it  precedes  a  substantive,  agrees 
with  it  in  gender ;  but  when  it  follows ,  it  remains  invariable  ;  as, 

in  sulla  MEZZA  NOTTE,  about  midnight; 

una  libbra  e  MEZZO  di  castrone,  one  pound  and  a  half  of  mutton  ; 

ventitre  e  MEZZO  cardti,  twenty-three  carats  and  a  half. 

The  adjective  salvo,  signifying  'except';  remains  invariable',  as, 

SALVO  la  Mdrca  Tnvigidna,  except  the  Trevisan  March ; 

SALVO  quelli  delle  case  eccettu-  except   those  of  the  families  ex- 
ate  per  Ghibellini,    '  eluded  as  Ghibellines. 


EXAMPLES. 


UOMO   DOTTO    delle   Scritture.  A  man  learned  in  Holy  Writ. 
(Cavalc.  Att.  Apost.  113.) 

Ndta    di     BUONA    e    virtuosa  Born  of  good  and  virtuous  peo- 

(Aiiost.  Fur.  18.  82.)  pie. 


Qvdnte  BELLE  DONNE,  quanti  How   many  fair  women,   how 

LEGGIADRI    FANCitiLLi,   la  s6ra  many  pretty  youths,  the   coming 

vegntnte,  nelV   dltro  mdndo  ce-  evening,    supped     in    the    other 

ndrono  con  li  loro  passdti!  (Bocc.  woild  with  their  departed  friends  ! 
Intr.)      . 

Io   SON   VIVA,   la  Dio   merce.  I  am  alive,  thank  God. 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  9.) 

Considerdndo,   che  voi   SI^TE  Considering,    that   you    are   far 

dalle     vostre     donne     LONTANI.  from  your  wives. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9  ) 

Madonna,  omdi  da  ogni  pro-  Madam,  I  free  you  from  all  your 

messa  fdttami  io  vi  assolvo.  e  LI-  promises  to  me,  and  I  leave  you  at 

BERA  vi  LASCIO  DI  NicoLuccio.  the  disposal  of  Nicoluccio, 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  4.) 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS. 


401 


jfcgli  mine  ad  unire  la  sua  pos- 
sanza  colla  ndstra  deboltzza,  PER 

RENDERCI  FORTI  ED  INVIJVClBILI. 

(Gang.) 

Li  quali,  QUAIVDO  LA  VIDERO 
SOLA,  dissero.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  3.) 

Jllessdndro,  levdtosi  presta- 
m6nte,  con  tutto  che  i  pdnni  del 
morto  avesse  inddsso,  LI  QUALI 
EUANO  MOLTO  LUNGHi,/?wre  andd 
via  altresl.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  1.) 

Messer  LICIA  E  CALLIMACO 
SON  RICCHL  (Mach.  Com.) 

Ma  MARIA  E  LUCIA  SONO  PO- 
VERE.  (Mach.  Com.) 

Perdicone,  e  'L   PADRE   E   LA 

MADRE  BELLA  LlSA,  ed  Hid  al- 
treSl  CONTENTI,  GRANDfsSIMA 
FESTA  FECERO.  (BOCC.  g.  10. 

n.7.) 

Dovevate  dirmi,  che  LA  CORTE 

TUTTA,  Che  I  SOVRANI  SONO  SOM- 
MAMENTE  CONTENTI,  (Metast. 

lett) 

ESSENDOSI  DlONEO  CON  GLI  AL- 
TRI  G1OVANI  MESSO  A  GIUCARE. 

(Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  10.) 

ESSENDOSI  LA  DONNA  COL  GIO- 
VANE  POSTI  A  TAVOLA  per  cendre. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.) 

LE  MIE  CASE  ED  I  LUOGHI  PUB- 
BLICI  DI  ROMA  SON  P1ENI  DJ  AN- 

TICHE  IMMAGINI  d&*  miH  mag- 
giori.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

TL  PADRE  DI  LEI  E  LA  MADRE, 
DOLOROSI  DI  QUESTO  ACCIDENTE, 

in  cid  che  si  pvtdva,  L,'  ATAVANO. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  7.) 

E  cosa  manifestissima,  che  6g- 
gi  non  mine  in  consulta  se  ha 
a  rifiutdre  V  oocasione  d*  acqui- 
stdre  ONORI  E  GLORIA  NUOVA. 
(Guicc.) 

34* 


^He  comes  to  unite  his  strength 
with  our  weakness,  to  make  us 
strong  and  invincible. 


Who,  when  they  saw  her  alone, 
said. 

Alexander,  getting  up  quickly, 
although  he  was  dressed  in  the 
clothes  of  the  deceased,  which 
were  very  long,  went  away  like- 
wise. 

Messer  Lycias  and  Messer  Cal- 
limachus  are  rich. 

But  Mary  and  Lucy  are  poos. 

Perdicone,  and  the  father  and 
the  mother  of  Lisa,  and  herself,  all 
glad,  expressed  great  joy. 


You  ought  to  have  told  me,  that 
the  whole  court,  and  the  sove- 
reigns are  well  satisfied. 

Dioneo  and  the  other  youths 
having  set  themselves  to  play. 

The  lady  and  the  young  man 
having  sat  down  to  supper. 

My  houses  and  the  public  places 
of  Rome  are  filled  with  ancient  im- 
ages of  my  ancestors. 

Both  her  father  and  her  mother, 
grieved  at  that  accident,  did  all  in 
their  power  to  relieve  her. 

It  is  a  manifest  thing,  that  none 
comes  now  to  a  consultation 
whether  he  is  to  refuse  the  oppor- 
tunity of  gaining  new  honors  and 
glory. 


402 


SYNTAX. 


V  Oceano  si  far  a  ddlla  destra, 
un  omaccione  CON  BARBA  E  CRI- 
NI  BAGNATI.  (Ann.  Car.  lett.) 

Ed  un,  che  avea   L'   UNA    E 

I/    ALTRA    MAN    MOZZA, DlSSC. 

(Daut.  Inf.  28.) 

PIETRO  o  MARIA  i:  MORTA. 
(Mach.  Com.) 

NE  FRANCESCA  NE  GIOVANNI 
NON  E  PARTITO.  (Buon.  Tanc.) 

UN  TIZZO,  UN    CARBONE,    UNA 

FAVILLA  E  ATTA  AD  APPICCAR 
FUOCO.  (Cavalc.) 

LA  PERSONA  QUANDO  E  TRIBO- 

LATO  si  dice  e  pinsa,  che  Iddw 
V  dbbia  in  6dio.  (Fra.  Giord. 
Pred.) 

Li  pritghi  non  giovdvano  al- 
cuna  cosa,  perchb  QUELLA  BES- 

TIA  ERA    PUR    D1SPOSTO    a   VoUfC 

(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  4.) 

VUntene  IN  SULLA  MEZZA 
NOTTE.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

TdgU  UNA  LIBBRA  E  MEZZO  DI 

CASTRONE.     (Burch.  p.  2.  s.  1.) 

LA  montta  di  VENTITRE  E  MEZ- 
ZO CARATI,.  (Giov.  Vill.  1.  8. 
c.  58.) 

Rendtgli  la  Signoria  di  Lorn- 
bardia,  SALVO  LA  MARC  A  TRIVI- 
GIANA.  (Giov.  Viil.  1.  3.  c.  5.) 

Fecero  ordine  e  decrito,  che 
ciascuno  potesse  uscire  dal  bdndo, 

SALVO  QUELLI  DELLE  CASE  EC- 
CETTUATE  PER  GHIBELL1NI. 

(Giov.  Vill.  1.  6.) 


As  for  the  Ocean,  it  is  to  be 
rej  resented  on  the  right,  as  a 
large  man  with  a  dripping  beard 
and  hair. 

And  one,  who  had  both  hands 
cut  off,  said. 

Either  Peter  or  Mary  is  dead. 

Neither  Frances  nor  John  has 
gone. 

A  brand,  a  coal,  a  spark  might 
set  fire. 


When  a  person  is  afflicted,  peo- 
ple say  and  believe  God  hates 
him. 


Entreaties  were  of  no  use,  be- 
cause that  stupid  ass  [Tofano] 
was  disposed  to  wish 

Come  about  midnight. 

Take  a  pound  and  a  half  of 
mutton. 

The  coins  of  twenty-three  ca- 
rats and  a  half. 


He  restored  to  him  the  Signo- 
ry  of  Lombardy,  except  the  Tre- 
visan  March. 

They  ordained  and  decreed,  that 
every  one  could  return  from  ban- 
ishment, except  those  of  the  fam- 
ilies excluded  as  Ghibellines. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS. 


403 


CONCORDANCE     OF     NUMERAL     ADJECTIVES. 


Numeral  adjectives  agree 
gender  and  number  ;  as, 

Plafond  vivttte  OTTANTUNO 
ANNO, 

pare  descenders  dltre  NO  VAN- 
TUNA  RUOTA, 

it  TERZO  GIORNO  dalV  appa- 
rizione  dti  sopradetti  se- 
gni, 

in  quei  PRIMI  GIORNI,  vi  vo- 
id sopra  la  testa  uri>  dqui- 


with  their  substantives,  in 

Plato  lived  eighty-one  years  ; 

he  seems  to  descend  ninety- 
one  more  circles ; 

the  third  day  after  the  appear- 
ance of  the  abovementioned 
symptoms ; 

in  those  first  days,  an  eagle 
flew  over  your  head. 


EXAMPLES. 


Jlbbidmo  di  PLATONE,  che  es- 

80     VIVETTE     OTTANTUNO     ANJVO. 

(Dant.  Conv.) 
Poi  per  la  medesima  via  PARE 

DESCENDERS    ALTRE    NOVA^TUNA 

RUOTA.     (Dant.  Conv.) 

JVnzi  quasi  tutti,  infra  IL  TER- 
ZO  GIORNO    DALL'   APPARIZIONE 

DEI  SOPRADETTI  SEGN I,m0rivan0. 

(Bocc.  Intr.) 

E  Che  IX   QUEI    PRIMI    GIORNI, 

di  sul    nwnte  dejla    Trinity,  vi 

VOLO    SOPRA    LA  TESTA  UN*  AQUI- 

LA.     (Bemb.) 


They  say  that  Plato  lived  eighty- 
one  years. 

Then  he  seems  to  descend  nine- 
ty-one more  circles  by  the  same 
way. 

Nay  almost  all  died  the  third 
day  after  the  appearance  of  the 
abovementioned  symptoms. 

And  that  in  those  first  days,  on 
the  mountain  of  the  Trinity,  an 
eagle  flew  over  your  head. 


CONCORDANCE     OF    PRONOUNS. 

Adjective  pronouns  agree  with  their  substantives,  in 
gender  and  number  5  as, 

teneie  QUEST o  DEN^RO,  take  this  money  ; 


404  SYNTAX. 

non    rimarrebbe    a    sostentr    there   would   not   remain  any 
NESSUNA  PENA,  punishment  to  suffer. 


EXCEPTION. 


The  pronoun  tutto,  preceded  by  the  preposition  per,  «  through  ' ;  re- 
mains invariable  j  as, 

per  TtfTTo  Rojna,  [through  all  or]  all  over  Rome  ; 

per  TUTTO  la  cdsa,  all  over  the  house. 


Possessive  pronouns  agree  with  the  thing  possessed, 
and  not  with  the  possessor  ;  as, 

Monna  Giovdnna  sen9  andd-  Monna  Giovanna  used  to  go 
va  con  questo  suo  FI-  with  this  son  of  hers ; 

GLIUOLO, 

Fresco  aveva  una  SUA  NEPO-     Fresco  had  a  niece. 

TE, 

The  relative  pronoun  quale,  c  which ' ;  agrees  with  its 
antecedent,  in  gender  and  number  \  as, 

quel  CUORE,  IL  QUALE  la  lie-  that  heart,  which  propitious 
tafortuna  non  avea  potuto  fortune  had  not  been  able  to 
aprire,  move. 

If  the  antecedent  consists  of  two  .or  more  nouns  of 
different  gender  or  number,  the  relative  quale  agrees 
with  the  nearest  noun  ;  as, 

la  virtu  e  I9  ONORE  DEL  QUA-  the  virtue  and  honor  with 

LE  e  dotdta,  which  she  is  endowed  ; 

i  QUALI  TEMPJ  e  cappelle  ri-  which  temples  and  chapels  he 

empie  di  paramentij  filled  with  ornaments. 

EXAM  PLES. 

Sig7i6ra,  TENETE  QUESTO  BE-        Madam,  take  this  money. 
NARO.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  1.) 

Che  NON  RIMARREBBE  A  sos-  That  there  would  not  remain 
TENER  PEN  A  NEssuNA  nel  purga-  in  purgatory  any  punishment  to 
torio  per  gli  peccdti.  (Pass.)  suffer  for  sins. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS. 


405 


Sono  stato  PER  TUTTO  ROMA. 
—  L'  ho  cercdf.o  PER  TUTTO  LA 
cisA.  (Salv.  Avvert.  vol.  1.  1.  3.) 


GlOVANNA  CON  QUESTO 
StJO-  FIGLIUOLO    SEN'  ANDAVA.   f» 

contddo.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 
£7/10,   cfte    si   chiamd    FRESCO, 

AVEVA  UNA  SUA  NEPOTE.       (BoCC. 

g.  6.  n.  8.) 

QUEL  CUORE,  IL  QUALE  LA  LIE- 
TA    FORTUNA    DI     GlllOLAMO     NON 

AVEA  POTUTO  APRIRE,  la  misdria 
V  aperse.     (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  8.) 

LA     VIRTU      E      L'     ONORE      DEL 
^UALE    E    DOTATA.       (BoCC.   g.  5. 

n.  6.) 

OUre  di  quest  o,  f^ce  fare  altdri 
e  cappelle  splendidissime,  i  QUALI 

TEMPJ    E     CAPPELLE    RIKMPIE     DI 

PARAMENTI.    (Mach.    Sior.   Flor. 
1.7.) 


I  have  been  all  over  Rome.  — 
I  have  looked  for  it  all  over  the 
house. 

Monna  Giovanna  used  to  go 
into  the  country  with  this  son  of 
hers. 

A  certain  man,  called  Fresco, 
had  a  niece. 


That  heart,  which  the  propitious 
fortune  of  Jerome  had  not  been 
able  to  open,  was  opened  by  his 
misery. 

The  virtue  and  honor  with  which 
she  is  endowed. 


Besides  that,  he  caused  very 
splendid  altars  and  chapels  to  be 
built,  which  temples  and  chapels 
he  filled  with  ornaments. 


CONCORDANCE     OF     VERBS. 


Verbs  are  to  agree  with  their  sutyectives,  either  ex- 
pressed or  understood,  in  number  and  person  ;   as, 


1O  ti    CONSOLER6, 

v6r  non  UDISTE, 
[io]  BRAMO  la  mdrte, 


I  will  gratify  thee  ; 
you  did  not  hear  ; 
I  desire  death. 


When  the  subjective  consists  of  several  nouns,  which 
all  concur  simultaneously  to  perf>rm  the  action  of  the 
verb,  the  verb  agrees  with  a  noun  in  the  plural  under- 
stood ;  as, 

CONSIGLIO  e   RAGIOIVE  [qu6-     advice   and   reason    [these  two 
ste  cMc  cose]  coNotfcoNO        things]  lead  to  viatory  ; 
la  vittoria, 


406 


SYNTAX. 


CALANDRISO,  BRTJNO,^  BUF- 
FALMACCO  [qu6sti  tre  sog- 
getti]  VANNO  cercdndo  di 
trovdr  V  elitropict, 

nt  LA  SUA  PARTITA,  716  LA 
St7A  LU.NGA  DIMORA,  7l£  LA 
SVE.NTURATA  SUA  MORTE, 

me  V  HA N NO  POTUTO  trdr- 
re  dal  cuore, 


Calandrino,  Bruno,  and  Buflfal- 
macco  [these  three  persons] 
go  in  search  of  the  helio- 
trope ;* 

neither  his  departure,  nor  his 
long  absence,  nor  his  la- 
mentable death,  has  been 
able  to  take  him  out  of  my 
heart. 


When  there  are  in  a  phrase  several  subjectives,  and  these  are  of  two 
or  more  different  persons  ;  as,  io  e  tu9 '  I  and  thou  ';  tu  ed  egli,  '  thou 
and  he  ' ;  £c.,  the  verb  agrees  with  a  personal  pronoun  in  the  plural 
understood. 

Thus,  if  one  of  the  subjectives  is  io,  ll  7;  the  pronoun  understood 
with  which  the  verb  will  agree,  is  not, l  we  ' ;  if  one  of  the  subjectives 
is  tUj  and  w  is  not  one  of  the  others,  the  pronoun  understood  is  voi, 
1  you  ' ;  and  if  the  subjectives  are  all  of  the  third  person,  the  pronoun 
understood  is  eglino,  ellenot  or  essi,  *  they  ' ;  as;t 

STECCHI     thou  on  one  side  and   Stecchi  on 


TU   dalV  un    Idto   e 

daW  dltro  [v6i].7wi  VERRETE 

SOSTENENDO, 

come  sdi  tu,  chi  MIO  MARITO  o 
io  [noi]  ci  SIAMO  ? 


the 

me 


other    [you]    will    support 


how  dost  thou  know  who  my  hus- 
band and  I  [we]  are  ? 


EGLI  e  ELLA  [essi]  CFNARONO  he  and  she  [they]  supped  on  a  lit- 

un  poco  di  cdrne  saldta,  tie  salt  beef; 

TU,  EGLI,  SfRO,  e  io  [noi]  PI-  thou,  he,  Cyrus,  and  I  [we]  will 

GLIERAMO  uno  per take  a  man  for 

vorrei  che  voi  o  EGLINO  mi  DI-  I  wish  that  eitfier  you  or  they 

CESTE,  would  tell  me. 


If  the  subjective  consists  of  several  nouns,  and  the  ac- 
tion of  the  verb  can  be  performed,  either -successively  or 


*  A  kind  of  precious  stone,  which  was  believod  to  possess  the  virtue  of  render- 
ing invisible  the  persona  who  carried  it  about  them.  —  See  Dant.  Inf.  24  ;  Bocc.  g.  8. 
n.  3j  Franc.  Sacch.  Op.  Div.  93. 

t  There  are  two  examples  in  Dante  in  which  this  rule  appears  to  have  been  dis- 
regarded for  the  sake  of  rhyme  : 

Tdsto  che    IL  DU'CA.  ed  i'o   net  leg-no 
FU'I.    (Daut.  Inf  8.) 

De>   quai    n£  i'o,  n&   IL   DU'CA   MI'O 
s'  ACCO'RSE.     (Dant.  Inf.) 

but  such  licenses  are  not  to  be  followed. 


As  soon  as  my  leader  and  I  entered  in 
the  boat ; 

Of  whom  neither  I  nor  my  leader  was 
aware : 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS.  407 

alternatively,  by  either  of  them,  the  verb  agrees  with  the 
nearest  noun  \  as, 

MUOVASI  LA  CAPRAIA  e  la  may  Capraia  and  Gorgona  rise 
Gorgona,  from  their  foundations  ; 

qudlforluna  o  DESTINO  quag-  what  fortune  or  destiny  brings 
giu  ti  MENA  ?  thee  here  below  ? 

non  Cinna,  non  SILLA  si-  neither  Cinna  nor  Sylla  ruled 
GNOREGGIO  lungamente,  long. 

Sometimes  one  of  the  nouns,  which  form  the  subjective 
of  the  verb,  is  a  word  which  in  itself  includes  the  signi- 
fication of  all  the  others,  and  then  the  verb  agrees  di- 
rectly with  this  word  ;  as, 

nl  voi,  ne  ALTRI  mi  POTRA  neither  you  nor  any  other  one 
piu  dire  ch?  io  non  V  dbbia  will  be  able  to  tell  me  any 
veduta,  longer  that  I  have  not  seen 

it; 

ne  piopgia'caduta,  nk  dcqua  neither  the  rain  which  had  fal- 
giitdta,n£  ALTRO  UMIDORE  len,  nor  the  water  which 
gli  SPEGNEVA,  they  threw  on  it,  nor  any 

other  wet  thing  extinguished 
them. 

If  the  subjective  .consists  of  two  nouns,  the  one  of 
which  is,  as  it  were,  a  part  of  the  other  which  expresses 
the  whole,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  whole,  and  not  with 
the  part ;  as, 

la  maggidr  pdrte  dP  suoi  so-  the  greater  part  of  his  friends 

NO  mortiy  are  dead  ; 

una  infinitti  di  STROMENTI  a  great  number  of  instruments 

FURONO  prepardti,  were  prepared. 

Sometimes  the  noun  expressing  the  whole  is  under- 
stood ;  as, 

la  maggior  partita  [di  indi-  the  greater  part  [of  the  indi- 
vidiii]  FURONO  morti,  viduals]  were  killed. 


408  SYNTAX. 

When  the  subjective  is  a  collective  noun,  the  verb  is 
put  in  the  singular ;  *  as, 

perche  QUEL  POPOLO  E  si  tm-  why  is  that  people  so  fell  ? 

pio? 

m' APPARI  tfNA  GENTE  rf'  <$-  a  troop  of  spirits  appeared  to 

nime,  rne  ; 

VENIA  MAGGIOR   FROTTA  di  there  came  a  greater  crowd  of 

Romdni,  Romans, 

If  the  subjective  is  a  verb  used  as  a  noun,  or  a  phrase, 
the  verb  is  put  in  the  singular ;  as, 

IL  VOLERE  SOTTOMETTERE  LE  the  wish  to  oppose  my  strength 

Mis  FORZE  A  GROSsisstMi  to  very  heavy  burdens  is  the 

PESI,  m'  E  tagione  di  que-  occasion  of  this  weakness. 
sta  infermitti, 

Sometimes  the  subjective  of  the  verb  is  represented 
by  the  relative  pronoun  che,  '  who,'  '  which ' ;  and  then 
the  verb  agrees  with  the  noun  or  pronoun,  represented 
by  che  ;  either  expressed  or  understood  ;f  as, 

i'  son  Beatrice  che  ti  FACCIO     I  am  Beatrice,  who  bids  thee 
an  dare,  to  go  ; 

*  Instances  may  be  quoted  from  tho  classics,  however,  in  which  the  verb  is  put  in 
the  plural ;  as, 

L'innoche  ^UE'LLA  GE'NTE  all6r  CAN-  The  hymn,  whith  those  people  then 
TA'RO.  (Dant.  Purg.  32.)  sung. 

Potetevedere  c6me  IL  COMU'PTE  PO'POLO  You  may  see  how  ignorant  of  the  true 

E'BANO  ignordnti  del  vero  Iddio.    (Giov.  God  the  common  people  were. 
Vill.  1.  1.  c.  26.) 

LA  SU'A  FAMI'GLIA  AVE'VANO  un  di  One  day  his  family  took  a  potter  for 

preso  un  pentoldio  per  malleveria.   (Nov.  bail : 
Ant.  83.) 

but  this  usage  is  carefully  avoided  by  modern  writers. 

t  Examples  may  be  found,  nevertheless,  in  which  the  verb  agrees  directly  with 
the  relative  pronoun  che,  without  any  reference  to  the  noun  or  pronoun,  which  it 
represenis  j  as, 

J'o  son  colei,  CHE  ti  Die  tdnta  guerra,  I  am  she,  who  caused  thee  so  much 

—  E  COMVIC  siia  giornala  inndnzi  aera.  trouble,  and  who  closed  her  day  before 

(Petr.  s.  3b'l.)  its  evening. 

Or  sP  tu  quclla  Cor'isca,  CHE  trad'ito  Now  art.  thou  that  Corisca,  who  has 

tn'  HA  in  tdntt  rn6dil —  Corisca  son  ben  betrayed  me  in  so  many  different  ways? 

io, —  CH'  dgli  occhi  tuoi  —  Un  tempo  — I  am  indeed  that  Corisca,  who  was 

FU  si  cdra.  (Guar.  Past.  Fid.  2.  6.)  once  so  dear  in  your  eyes. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS. 


409 


io  son  colui,  che  TENNI  dmbo 
le  chidvi, 

poeta,  [tu]  che  mi  GU!DI, 

O  frdti,  [voi]  che  SIETE 
giunti  all*  occidente, 

uno  de*  sette  REGJ,  che  Assi- 
SI^RO  Tebe, 

uno  di  QUEGLI,  cheil  POSERO 
in  croce. 


I  am  he,  who  held  both  the 
keys; 

poet \  [thou]  who  art  my  guide  ; 

O  brothers  !  [you]  who  have 
now  reached  the  west ; 

one  of  the  seven  kings,  who  be- 
sieged Thebes  ; 

one  of  those,  who  put  him  on 
the  cross. 


EXAMPLES. 


IO  TI  CONSOLERO  dl  COsl    lllHgO 

desio.  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  7.) 

Graziose  donne,  voi  NON  UDI- 
STE  forse  mdi  dire.  (Bocc.  g.  3. 
n.  10.) 

Che  per  minor  martir  LA  MOR- 
TE  BRAMO.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  Canz.) 

CONSIGLIO  E  RAGIONE  CONDtJ" 
CONO  LA  VITTORIA.  (DaV.  St.) 

CALANDRINO,  BRUNO,  E  BUF- 
FALMACCO  VANNO  CERCANDO  DI 

TROVAR    L'    EL1TROPIA,     6     Cdlan- 

drino  se  la  crede   aver  trovdta. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  3.) 

NE  LA  SUA  PARTITA,  NE  LA 
SUA  LUNGA  DIMORA,  NE  LA  SVEN- 
TTJRATA  StJA  MORTE,  ME  L'  HAN- 
NO  POTUTO  TRARRE  DAL  CUORE. 

(Bocc.) 

Tu  DALL'  UN  LATO,  E  STECCHI 
DALL'  ALTRO,  MI  VERRETE  sos- 

TENENDO.       (BOCC.  g.  2.  D.  1.) 

"  COME,"  disse  la  donna, c<  SAI 

TU  CHI    M£O    MARITO  O    IO   CI    SIA- 
MO  ?  " 

EGLI  E  ELLA  CENARONO  UN 
POCO  DI  CARNE  SALATA.  (BOCC. 

g.  7.  n.  1.)    ^ 

35 


I  will  gratify  thee  in  so  long  a 
desire. 

Charming  ladies,  perhaps  you 
never  heard  say. 

I  desire  death  to  lessen  my  suf- 
ferings. 

Advice  and  reason  lead  to  vic- 
tory. 

Calandrino,  Bruno,  and  Buffal- 
macco  go  in  search  of  the  helio- 
trope, and  Calandrino  believes  he 
has  found  it. 


Neither  his  departure,  nor  his 
long  absence,  nor  his  lamentable 
death,  have  been  able  to  take  him 
out  of  my  heart. 

Thou  on  one  side,  and  Stecchi 
on  the  other,  will  support  me. 

"  How  dost  thou  know,"  said 
the  lady,  "  who  my  husband  and 
I  are  ?  " 

He  and  she  supped  on  a  little 
salt  beef. 


410 


SYNTAX. 


Tu,  EGH,  SlRO,  E  IO  PIGLIE- 
REMO  TJNO  PER  .....  (Mach. 

Mandrag.) 

VORREI  CHE    VOI    O  &GL18O   MI 

DICESTE.     (Ben.  Varch.) 

MUOVASI  LA  CAPRAIA  E  LA 
GORGONA,  —  E  fdccian  siepe  ad 
A'rno  in  su  la  foce.  (Dant.  Inf. 
c.  33.) 

QUAL    FORTTJJVA  O  DESTINO,  — 

A'nzi  V  ultimo   di,  QUAGGIU  TI 
MENA  ?     (Dant.  Inf.  15.) 

NON  ClNNA,  NON  SfLLA,  81- 
GNOREGGIO  LUNGAMENTE.  (DaV. 

Stor.) 

"  Fated  dipmgere  la  Cortesia." 
— "  I'o  cela  faro  dipmgere  di 
maniira>  die  mai  NE  voi,  NE 
ALTRI,  con  ragione,  MI  POTRA 

PIU    DIRE,    CH'  10     NON    I/  ABBIA 

VEDUTA,  ne  conosciuta."    (Bocc.  , 
g.  1.  n.  8.) 

NE  PIOGGIA  CADTJTA,  iXE  AC- 
QUA  GITTATA,  NE  ALTRO  UMIDO- 

RE  GLI  SPEGWEVA.    (Dav.  Ann.) 
Ciascuna  di    noi    sa  che   PEJ 

SUOI      SONO     LA     MAGGIOR    PARTE 

MORTI.     (Bocc.  Intr.) 

UNA    IJVFINITA    DI     STROMENTI 

da   dar  martorio    FI^RONO   PRE- 
PARATI.     (Fir.  As.  71.) 

LA  MAGGIOR  PARTITA  FURONO 

MORTI    e  taglidti,  e  pdrte  presi. 
(Giov.  Vill.  1.  7.  c.  19.) 

Dimrni,  PERCHE  Q.UEL  POPOLO 
i;  si  EMPIO  —  Incontr*  6}  mici  in 
ciascuna  zua  l&gge?  (Dant.  Inf. 
10.) 

Da    man  sinistra    M'   APPARI 

UNA  GEXTE D^  ANIME,  Che  mO- 

vieno  i  pie  ver  noi.     (Dant.  Purg. 
3.) 


Thou,    he,    Syrus,  and   I,    will 
take  a  man  for 


I  wish  that  either  you  or  they 
would  tell  me. 

May  Capraia  and  Gorgona  rise 
from  their  foundations,  and  dam  up 
the  mouth  of  Arno. 


What  fortune  or  destiny  brings 
thee  here  below,  before  thy  last 
day? 

Neither  Cinna,  nor  Sylla  ruled 
long. 

"  Cause  Liberality  to  be-  paint- 
ed there."- — "  I  will  cause  it  to 
be  painted  there  in  such  a  manner, 
that  neither  you  nor  any  other 
one,  will  be  able  to  tell  me  any 
longer,  that  I  have  never  seen  it, 
or  known  it." 

Neither  the  rain  which  had  fal- 
len, nor  the  water  which  they 
threw  on  it,  nor  any  other  wet 
thing  extinguished  them. 

Every  one  of  us  knows,  that 
the  greater  part  of  our  friends  are 
dead. 

A  great  number  of  instruments 
of  torture  were  prepared. 

The  greater  part  were  killed 
and  cut  to  pieces,  and  some  taken. 

Tell  me,  why  is  that  people  so 
fell  against  my  kin  in  all  their 
laws  ? 


On  the  left  hand  appeared  to 
me  a  troop  of  spirits,  that  moved 
their  steps  towards  us. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS. 


411 


P6lj    VENfA     MAGGIOR     FROTTA 

DI  ROMANI.  (Franc.  Sacch.  Rim.) 
Signor  ?nio,  IL  VOLERE  w  LE 

MIE  FORZE  SOTTOMETTERE  A 
GROSSISSIMI  FESI  M'  E  CAGIONE 
DI  QUESTA  INFERMITA.  (BoCC.  g. 

10.  n.  7.) 

I*  SON  BEATRICE,  CHE  TI  FAC- 
cio  ANDARE.  (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

lO  SON  COLtjI,  CHE    TENWI    AM- 

BO  LE  cHiAvi  —  Del  cuor  di  Fe- 
derigo.  (Dant.  Inf.  13.) 

Ifo  comincidi :  "  POETA,  CHE 
MI  GUIDI, —  Gudrda  la  mia  vir- 
tu s'  eW  &  possdnte."  (Dant.  Inf. 
2.) 

"  0  FRATI,"  dissi,  "  CHE  per 
c6nto  milia  —  Perigli  SIETE 
GIUNTI  ALL'  OCCIDENTS."  (Dant. 
Inf.  26.) 

Dicendo  :  "  Qu&l  fu  I9  UN   DE' 

SETTE    REGI, —  CH'  ASSISER   TE- 

BE."     (Dant.  Inf.  14,) 

Se  tu  fossi  stdto  TJNO  DI  QUE- 

GLI,     CHE     IL     POSERO     IN    CROCE. 

(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  1.) 


Then,  there  came  a  greater  crowd 
of  Romans. 

My  lord,  the  wish  to  oppose  my 
strength  to  very  heavy  burdens  is 
the  occasion  of  this  weakness. 


I  am   Beatrice,  who  bids  thee 
to  go. 

I  am  he,  who  held  both  the  keys 
of  the  heart  of  Frederick. 


I  began  :  "  Poet !  thou  who  art 
my  guide,  consider  well  if  there  is 
sufficient  virtue  in  me." 


"  O  brothers  !  "  said  I,  "  who 
through  perils  without  number 
have  now  reached  the  west." 


Saying  :  "  That  was  one  of 
the  seven  kings,  who  besieged 
Thebes." 

If  thou  had  been  one  of  those, 
who  put  him  on  the  cross. 


CONCORDANCE     OF     PARTICIPLES. 


Participles,  a&  it  has  been  already  mentioned  p.  345, 
when  used  as  adjectives,  agree  with  substantives  in  gen- 
der and  number,  and  follow  in  this  respect  the  rules 
already  given  with  regard  to  the  concordance  of  that  part 
of  speech  ;  as, 

LEI,  in  vdno  merci  ADDO-  he  killed  her,  while  begging 

MANDANTE,  uf else,  in  vain  for  mercy  ; 

dlle  DONNE  ASPETTANTI  si  he  addressed  himself  to  the  la- 

rivolse,  dies  [who  were]  waiting ; 


412 


SYNTAX. 


il  cavaliere,   UDITA   LA   DO- 

MANDA     €     LA     PROFERTA, 

propose, 

poiche  il  giardino,  e  LA 
CAS  A  di  Messer  Neri  ebbe 
VEDUTA, 

le    DONNE    e   I    CAVALIERI    fid 

paldgio  RADUNATI, 

L'      ANELLA      €      LA      CORONA 

AVUTE  dal  nuovo  sposo, 

IL     RE     C(5'     SUOI      COMPAGNI 

RIMONTATI  a  cavdllo, 


the  gentleman,  having  heard 
the  request  and  the  proposal, 
resolved  ; 

after  having  viewed  the  gar- 
den and  the  house  of  Messer 
Neri ; 

the  ladies  and  gentlemen  [that 
had]  collected  in  the  palace  ; 

the  rings  and  the  garland, 
[which  she  had]  received 
from  her  new  husband  : 

the  king  with  his  attendants 
having  mounted  their  horses. 


[For  Rules  how  to  determine  when  Participles  are  used  as  adjectives  and  when  not,  ice 
CHAPTER  on  PARTICIPLES.] 


EXAMPLES. 


Folco,  da    dolor  vinto,    tirdta 
fitori  iina   spdda,   LEI,  IN  VANO 

MERGE    ADDOMANDANTE,    TJCCISE. 

(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  3.) 


DONNE  ASPETTANTI  si 
RIVOLSE,  e  dissc.  (Bocc.  g.  9. 
n.  10.) 

IL     CAVALIERE,    UDITA    LA    DO- 
MANDA      E      LA     PROFERTA      dilld 

donna,  seco  PROPOSE.  (Bocc.  g. 
10.  n.  5.) 

n  qudle,   POICHE   IL  GIARDIN 

tuttO,  E  LA  CASA  DI  MESSER  NE- 
RI EBBE  VEDtJTA.  (BOCC.  g.  10. 

n.  6.) 

E  sentdndo  LE  DONNE  E'  CAVA- 

LIERI NEL  PALAGIO  del  COnte  RA- 
DUNATI. (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  9.) 

La  donna  e  L'  ANELLA   E  LA 

CORONA  AVtJTE  DAL  NUOVO  SPOSO 

quwi  lascid.     (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

IL    RE    CO*  SUOI    COMPAGNI,  RI- 

MONTATI A  CAVALLO,  al  redle 
ostidre  se  ne  torndrono.  Bocc. 
g.lO.n.  6.) 


Folco,  overcome  by  grief,  hav- 
ing drawn  a  sword,  killed  her  while 
begging  in  vain  for  mercy. 

He  addressed  himself  to  the 
ladies  who  were  waiting,  and  said. 

The  gentleman,  having  heard 
the  request  and  the  proposal  of 
the  lady,  resolved. 

Who,  after  having  viewed  the 
garden  and  the  house  of  Messer 

Neri. 


And  hearing  that  the  ladies  and 
gentlemen  had  collected  in  the 
palace  of  the  count. 

The  lady  left  there  the  rings 
and  the  garland  which  she  had 
received  from  her  new  husband. 

The  king  with  his  attendants, 
having  mounted  their  horses,  re- 
turned to  the  royal  palace. 


CONCORDANCE  OF  WORDS.  413 


EXERCISE    XXVIII. 

Then    that    magnanifnous    Pompey,   who (the  which) 

magndnimo        Pompeo,     — 

boasted    (himself)    continually,    that    where  he  I     struck 
vantdre2               l        contmuo,  \percuotesse 

the      earth      with    (the)      his      foot    (the)  entire      legions 

tdrra  —      pid         4  intiero^      legione9 


would        come    out 
sar6bbero2      usctie3 


from    it    I  ,  fled      not    only    from 
nel        \jfuggire 


Rome,    but    from    (the)    Italy    also.      He     is     of    a    won- 
—  Itdlia     — .  mara* 


derful      agreeableness     _and      (of    a    wonderful)      vivacity. 
viglioso6    piacevoUzza1  2         '3      4        brio5. 

And    the      preparation,      and     the      joy,      and    the     other 
appar&cchio,  allegrezzay  dltro 

things    were     described     to-him     beyond     (of)    the    truth. 
cosa  2      dipingere3  1     maggiore  vero. 

(The)      my      guide      and      I      descended      the      mountain. 
—        duca  scendere  m6nte. 

The     greatest    part    of    (the)    men     are     ambitious.        He 
maggior    pdrte  uomo  ambizioso. 

commanded      that      all      (the)    his    family     should     appear 
Comanddre  tutto  famigUa  venire2 

before    him.          Know,    that    I     am      Bertrand     de     Born, 
l.          Sapere,  Bertram    dal    Bornio, 

he     who     gave      (to    the)    King      John      the     mischievous 
ddre  re        Giovdnni  mdlo 

counsels.          The      filial      respect      and    (the    filial)    love. 
conforto.  l     filidle6   riverenza2        34        —       amor5. 

Great,*    small,*    rich,*  and  poor,*    no    one     can          escape 
Grande,  piccolo2   ricco,1  povero,    ne.ssuno  potere  sottrdrre^ 

(himself  to  the)    death.       Many    were     accused     this    year. 
morte.        Molto  3     accusdre*       l    anno2. 


Great,  small,  rich,  poor,  are  here  used  in  the  plural  number. 

35* 


414  SYNTAX. 

And    she     embracing    (the)    her    infant.       I     have    looked 
abbraccidre  figliuolo.  cercdre 

all     over    the     street.        Callimachus    and     Ligurius    have 
tutto*  per1  strdda.  Callimaco  Ligurio 

told     me,     that    the     doctor    and    the    ladies     are    coming 
dire3        19  dottore  donna        venire 

to     (the)    church.        Neither     thou     nor    I     am    rich.        I 
chiesa.  ricco. 

am    the     ghost    of    Capocchio,    who     falsified    (the)    metals 
ombra  ,  falsdre  metdllo 

I  by    the     power    of       alchemy.       He    I    fell     in    love    I 


con 


alchimia.         —  s'  innamoro4 


I  with   I    a      noble-lady,      held      in    (the)    his      time  *    for 
I    J9'1    I     2     gentildonna*   tenere8  6        tempo7      — 

one     of    the     most    beautiful,    and    of    the     most    amiable 
b6lla,  leggiddra 

that    were     in     Florence.        Pride,      envy,      and       avarice 
3        1       Firdnze2.          Superbia,  invidia,  avarizia 

are      the      three      sparks,       which       have       inflamed       all 
favilla,  accendere3      — 

(the)     hearts.         I      saw      a     man,     who     had     both     (the) 
1        cuore2.        —   Vedere         uomo,  dtnbo 

his     hands       cut-off,      and     another     who     had     (the)      his 
—       mdno        mozzo,  23  — 

throat      pierced.        For    (the)    which,    reasons,      (the)    our 
gola*        fordto1.  cosa, 

supper    having      been      disturbed,    I     not     only    have     not 
etna  —  sturbdrej 

eat  it,    but    not    even     (have)      tasted      it.          Nor 

trangugidre*    2,  32    assaggidre*  l. 

the     excessive       maternal     pity     and      joy         permitted     it. 
soprabbonddnte  materna4    pieta1        2  allegrezza3  permtttere6    5. 


*  Time,  in  the  plural. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS.  415 

CHAPTER   III. 
REGIMEN   OR   GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS. 

REGIMEN    OF     SUBSTANTIVES. 

A  substantive  may  be  dependent  on,  or  in  relation 
with,  another  substantive  ;  and  this  dependence  or  rela- 
tion, which  may  be  expressed  in  different  manners, 
forms  what  is  called  the  regimen  or  the  complement  of 
the  signification  of  substantives. 

When  of  two  substantive  nouns  the  second,  which  is 
dependent  on  the  first,  conveys  an  idea  of  possession, 
extraction,  or  qualification,  (as  when  it  expresses  prop- 
erty ;  paternity,  or  filiation;  the  material,  the  place,  or 
the  quantity  of  a  thing  ;  a  family  name  ;  or  similar  cir- 
cumstances ;)  it  requires  to  be  preceded  by  the  preposi- 
tion di ;  as, 

V  occhio  DEL  CUORE,  the  eye  of  the  heart ; 

gli  dnni  dtlla  Incarnazione     the  years  of  the  Incarnation  of 

del  Figliuolo  DI  Dio,  the  Son  of  God  ; 

vergogna  e  mddre  DI  ONESTA,     shame  is  the  mother  of  modes- 
ty ; 
unafontana  DI  MARMO  bian-     a  fountain  of  very  white  mar- 

chissimo,  ble ; 

Certdldo    e    un    casttllo    DI     Certaldo  is  a  castle  of  Valdel- 

VALDELSA*  sa  ; 

torchietti  DI  LIBBRA,  e  tor-    wax-tapers  of   a   pound,   and 

chittti  DI  M,EZZA  LIBBRA,  wax-tapers  of  half  a  pound 

each; 

fu  salvdto   da   certi  di  cdsa    he  was  saved  by  some  people 
DE'  BARDI,  belonging   to  the   house  of 

the  Bardi. 


416  SYNTAX. 

There  are  some  adjective  pronouns,  which  when  used  substantively 
follow  the  same  rule  ;  as, 

factva  un  POCO  DI  BANCO,  he  kept  a  little  bank; 

spalancdndo  TANTO  DI  GOLA,        opening  his  throat  [rnouth]  wide. 

The  preposition  di  is  often  elegantly  suppressed  after  the  word  cdsa 
followed  by  a  family  name  ;  as, 

in  CAS  A  [di]  Messdr  GUASPAR-    in  the  house  of  Messer  Guaspar- 
RINO,  ririo  ; 

me  ASA  [de]  gli  ALBIZZI,  in  the  house  of  the  AlbiSzi. 


When  the  second  substantive  expresses  the  form  or 
similitude  of  the  first,  it  requires  to  be  preceded  by  the 
preposition  a  ;  as, 

dtnti  A  BiscHERi,  teeth  like  pegs  ; 

berettdccia  A  GRONDA,  a  cap  like   the  '  eaves   of   a 

house  ; 

bdrba  A  LUCIGNOLI,  a  heard  like  two  wicks  of  a 

candle. 

When  the  second  substantive  expresses  suitableness, 
convenience,  or  derivation  as  to  one's  country,*  it  re- 
quires to  be  preceded  by  the  preposition  da  ;  as, 

etcL  DA  MARITO,  an  age  suitable  for  marriage  ; 

tempo  DA  CONFORTO,  time  of  consolation ; 

Guidotto  DA  CREMdNA,  Guidotto  of  Cremona  ; 

Giacomin  DA  PAviA,  James  of  Pavia. 


*  Thte  is  limited,  however,  to  the  case  when  the  substantive  is  a  proper  name  of 
a  city,  town,  village,  or  castle  ;  for,  when  the  substantive  is  a  proper  name  of  a  king- 
dom, province,  or  island,  it  is  always  preceded  by  the  preposition  di ;  as, 

Disse  il  mdnaco  :  "  Fo  s6no  anche  m6r-  The  monk  replied  ;  "  I  am  dead  also, 
to,  efui  DI  SABDIGNA.."  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  8.)  and  I  was  of  Sardinia." 

Instances  are  also  met  with  amongst  the  classics,  in  which  the  preposition  di  is 
used  even  in  the  case  when,  according  to  the  rule,  da  ought  to  be  used  j  as, 

Lo  pr'tmo  Podestd  flie  Messer  Pazzino          The  first  Podesta  was  Messor  Pazzino 

d&  Pdzzi  DI  FIRE'NZE.    (Stor.  Pist.  50.)  de'  Pazzi  of  Florence. 

Cdlla  forza  de>  detti  Ors'ini  DI  RdMA.          With  the  assistance  of  the  said  Orsini 

(Gio.  Vill.  1.  9.  c.  39.)  of  Rome. 

n  Signtir  Oismdndo  Malatesta  DI  Ri-          Gismondo  Malatesta  of  Rimini. 
MINI.     (Car.  lett.  3.) 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS. 


417 


EXAMPLES. 


L'  amore  private  chiude  LS  6c- 
CHIO  DEL  CUORE.  (Amm.  Ant.  d. 
5.  r.  3.) 

Gid  irano  GLI  ANNI  BELLA 
frultifera  INCARNAZIONE  DEL  Fi- 
GLIUOLO  DI  Dio  al  nitmero  per- 
venuti  di  1348.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

VERGOGNTA  35;  MADRE  DI  ONE- 
STA,  e  maestro,  d1  innocenza. 
(Amm.  Ant.  d.  5.  r.  7.) 

Nel  mezzo  del  qudl  prdto  era 

UJVA    FONTANA    DI     MARMO    BIAN- 

CHISSIMO.    (Bocc.  g.  3.  Intr.) 

CERTALDO  E  UN  CASTELLO  DI 
VALDELSA,  il  qudle  quantunque 
picciol  sittj  gid  di  molti  uomini  ed 
agidti  fu  abitdto.  (Bocc.  g.  7. 
n.  10.) 

Una  grand9  area  tutta  fornita 

di    TORCHIETTI    DI     L1BBRA,  E    la 

chiesa  e  le  cappelle  d'  intorno 
piene  di  TORCHIETTI  DI  MEZZA 
LissRA,  e  spesso  di  que*  DI  LIB- 
BRA.  (Borgh.  Arm.  Fam.  23.) 

Fu  scampdto   e   SALVATO    DA 

CKRTI  DI  CASA  DEJ  BARDI.       (Gio. 

Vill.  1.  12.  c.  17.) 

VI  era,  un  certo  Ludovico,  il 
qudle  avea  di  molti  dandriy  e 

FACEVA       UN       POCO      DI      BANCO. 

(Firenz.  As.  d'  Or.) 

E SPALANCANDO  p6i   TANTO   DI 

GOLA.     (Lip.  Malm.  7.  85.) 

Stettero  piit  dnni  i  due  giovani 
IN  CASA  MESSER  GUASPARRINO. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  6.) 

Con  grdnde  paura  e  pericolo 
si  fuggl  IN  CASA  GLI  ALBIZZI. 
(Gio.  Vill.  1.  12.  c.  17.) 


Selfishness  shuts  the  eye  of  the 
heart. 


The  years  of  the  fruitful  Incar- 
nation of  the  Son  of  God  had 
reached  the  numher  of  1348. 


Shame  is  the  mother  of  modesty, 
and  the  mistress  of  innocence. 


In  the  middle  of  which  field 
there  was  a  fountain  of  very  white 
marble. 

Certaldo  is  a  castle  of  Valdelsa, 
which,  although  small,  was  for- 
merly inhabited  by  many  and 
wealthy  people. 

A  great  coffin  surrounded  with 
wax  tapers  of  a  pound,  and  the 
church  and  the  chapels  full  of 
wax-tapers  of  half  a  pound,  and 
often  of  some  of  a  pound  each. 

He  was  rescued  and  saved  by 
certain  people  belonging  to  the 
house  of  the  Bardi. 

There  was  a  certain  Ludovico, 
who  had  a  great  deal  of  money, 
and  kept  a  little  bank. 


And  opening  his  mouth  wide. 

The  two  youths  remained  for 
several  years  in  the  house  of  Mes- 
ser  Guasparrino. 

In  great  fear  and  danger  he  took 
refuge  in  the  house  of  the  Albizzi. 


418 


SYNTAX. 


Con  qudi  suoi  DEXTI  A  BIS- 
CHERI.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  2.) 

Con  qMla  BERETTACCIA  A 
GRONDA,  e  con  quella  BARBA  A 
LUCIGNOLI.  (Buon.  Fier.  2.  3.) 

Essdndo  ella  gib  di  ETA  DA 
MARITO.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  4.) 

La  donna  a  cut  piit  TEMPO  DA 
CONFORTO,  che  DA  ripreiisione 
par£a.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.) 

GTJIDOTTO  DA  CREMONA  Idscia 
a  'GiAcoMiN  DA  PAVIA  itna  sua 
fanciuUa.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  5.) 


With  those  teeth  of  his  like 
pegs. 

With  that  cap  of  his  like  the 
eaves  of  a  house,  and  that  beard 
like  two  wicks  of  a  candle. 


age 


She  being  already  of   an 
suitable  for  marriage. 

The  lady  to  whom  this  appeared 
more  a  time  of  consolation,  than  of 
reprehension. 

Guidotto  of  Cremona  leaves  a 
daughter  of  his  to  James  of  Pavia. 


REGIMEN     OF     ADJECTIVES. 

The  regimen  or  complement  of  adjectives  is  generally 
a  substantive,  a  pronoun,  a  verb,  or  a  phrase  preceded 
by  a  preposition. 

Adjectives  signifying  knowledge  or  ignorance,  praise 
or  blame,  possession  or  privation,  abundance  or  scarcity, 
require  that  their  complement  be  preceded  by  the  prepo- 
sition di;  as, 

learned  in  the  Scriptures  ; 
very  ignorant  of  medicine  ; 


dotto  DE#e  SCRITTTJRE, 

ignorantissimi  DE//«  MEDICI- 


NA, 

giovine    DI    ETA,   bellissima    of  youthful  age,  of  very  beau- 
DI   FORMA,  chidra  DI  sA^-         tiful  form,  and  of  distinguish- 

GUE  €  DI  COSTUMI, 

prdde    DE//C   ARMF,   ma   DE' 

,  COSTUMI  vizioso, 
abbonddnte  DI  GRANO,  DI  6R- 

ZO,      DI      BESTIAME,      €      DI 
PESCI, 


ed  birth  and  manners  ; 

brave  in  arms,  but  of  vicious 
habits  ; 

abundant  in  grain,  barley,  cat- 
tle, and  fish. 


Adjectives  signifying  similitude,  inclination,  suitable- 
ness, advantage,  tendency,  or  thereon trary,  require  their 
complement  to  be  preceded  by  the  preposition  a  ;  as, 


GOVERNMENT   OF  WORDS. 


419 


the  beard  like  his  locks  ; 


things  more  becoming  to 
drunkards,  than  to  sober  la- 
dies ; 

provinces  addicted  to  arms  ; 

nothing  is  so  unfavorable  to  a 

speaker ; 

odious  to  men  of  wicked  habits. 


la   bdrba  A'    suoi    CAPEGLI 
simiglidnte, 

cdse  piu   dtte   A'   BEVITORI, 
die  klle  SOBRIE  DONNE, 

province  dedite  ALLE  ARMI, 
niuna  cosa  e  cosl  contrdria 
AL  DICITORE, 

grave  AGLI  UOMINI  di  perver- 
si  costumi, 

Jldjectives  signifying  departure,  distance,  separation, 
equire  that  their  complement  should  be  preceded  by  the 
Deposition  da  ;  as, 

esuli  vLlle  LORO  PATRIE,  exiles  from  their  countries  ; 

/e'  disgiunto  DA//'  ANIMO  il  made  the  soul  disjoined  from 

passibile  intelletto,  his  passive  intellect  ; 

una    navicella    di  pescatori  a  small    fishing  boat    distant 

separata  vLW  ALTRE  NA-  from  the  other  vessels. 


Some  adjectives,  as  contento,  '  contented,'  '  satisfied  ' ; 

presto,  'prompt,'  ; ready  ';  acconcio,  '  disposed,'  fi  in- 
clined '  ;  may  have  a  complement  preceded  by  either  the 
Deposition  di  or  a;  as, 

CONTENTO   DI  QUELLO,  che  content  with  what  was  given 

glieraddto,  to  him  ; 

state  CONTENTI  fdla  VOLON-  be   satisfied  with   the   will  of 

TA  di  Dio,  God  ; 

PRESTA  DI   FARE   FESTA   al  prompt    to   greet    his   fellow- 

suo  cittadino,  citizen  ; 

PRESTI    A    MORDERE    ogui  ready  to  slander  every  praise- 

laudevol  cosa,  worthy  thing  ; 

sono  ACCONCIA  D'  IMPEGNAR  I  am  disposed  to  pav^  these 

queste  robe,  garments ; 

piit,  ACCONCIA  A  CREDERE  il  more   inclined  to  believe  the 

male,  evil. 


420 


SYNTAX. 


EXAMPLES. 


Essindo  mdlto  DOTTO  DELLE 
ScRiTTURE,ed  ammaestrdto della 
fede  di  Cristo.  (Cav.  At.  ap.  113.) 

Molti  vi  sono  DELLA  MEDIC  IN  A 
IGNORANTISSIMI.  (Lib.  Cur.  mal.) 

U'na  di  loro  DI  ETA  GIOVINE, 

DI  FORMA  BELLISSIMA,  CH1ARA 
DI  SANGUE  E  DI  COSTtJMI.  (BOCC, 

Fiam.  1.  1.) 

Cavaliere  PRODE  DELLE  ARMI, 
MA  DE'  COSTTJMI  vizioso.  (Pass. 
Spec.  Ver.  Penit.) 

Hpa6se  k,  grandissimo,  e  molto 

ABBONDANTE  DI  GRANO,  DI  OR- 
ZO,  DI  BESTIAME,  E  DI  PESCI. 

(Giamb.  1.  5.) 

Lunga  LA  BARB  A,  e  di  pel 
bidnco  mista,  —  Portdva,  A'  suoi 

CAPEGLI      SIMIGLIANTE.         (Dant. 

Pur.  1.) 

COSE  PIU  ATTE  A'  BEVITORI 
CHE  ALLE  SOBRIE  ed  Gn6ste  DON- 
NE. (Bocc.  Intr.) 

PROVINCE    naturalmdnte    DE- 

DITE  ALLE  ARMI.       (Giatllb.  1.  3.) 
NlTJNA  COSA   E  COS1  CONTRARIA 

AL  DICITORE,  come  il  manifesto 
acconciamento.  (Amm.  Ant.  d. 
11.  r.  3.) 

La    vita  d6*   buoni  &   s&mpre 

GRAVE  AGLI    UOMINI  DI   PERVERSI 

COSTUMI.  (Amm.  Ant.  d.  14. 
r.  I.) 

Coloro,  che  sono  ESULI  DALLE 
LORO  PATRIE,  desiderano  di  tor- 
ndrvi.  (Fra  Giord.  Prei!.) 

Siccht,  per  sua  dottrma,  FE' 
DISGITJNTO  —  DALL'  ANIMO  IL 

PASSIBILE    INTELLETTO.       (Dant. 

Pur.  25.) 


Being  very  learned  in  the  Scrip- 
tures, and  well  instructed  in  the 
Christian  faith. 

There  are  many  very  ignorant 
of  medicine. 

One  of  them  of  youthful  age,  of 
most  beautiful  form,  and  of  distin- 
guished birth  and  manners. 

A  cavalier  bfave  in  arms,  but  of 
vicious  habits. 


The  country  is  very  vast,  and 
very  abundant  in  grain,  barley, 
cattle,  and  fish. 

His  beard,  mixed  with  hoary 
white,  like  his  locks,  descended 
low  down. 


Things  more  becoming  to  drunk- 
ards, than  to  sober  and  modest  la- 
dies. 

Provinces  naturally  addicted  to 
arms. 

Nothing  is  so  unfavorable  to  a 
speaker  as  the  evident  dressing  up 
of  language. 

The  life  of  the  good  is  always 
odious  to  men  of  wicked  habits. 


Those,  who  are  exiles  from  their 
countries,  are  desirous  to  return 
there. 

So  that,  by  his  wisdom,  he  made 
the  soul  disjoined  from  his  passive 
intellect 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS.  421 

Trovd  per  avventiira,  alquanto  He  found  by  chance,  a   small 

SEPA«RATA    DALLE    ALTRE    NAVI,  fishing  boat  somewhat  distant  from 

UNA    NAVICELLA   Di   PESCATORi.  the  other  vessels. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  2.) 

CONTENTO  DI  DUELLO,  CHE  DA-  Content  with  what  was  given 

TO   GI.I   ERA,  piu  non  chiedea.  to  him,  he  asked  no  more. 
(Vit.  S.  Ant.) 

E  perb,  padre  e  mddre  mia,  Therefore,  my  parents,  be  satis- 

STATE  CONTENTI    ALLA    VOLONTA.  fied  With  the  will  of  God. 

DI  Dio.     (Vit.  S.  Gio.  Batt.) 

Quell9    anima   gentil  fu   cosl  That  gentle  spirit  was  so  prompt 

PRESTA —  Di  FARE  AL  ciTTADfN  to  greet  there  his  fellow-citizen, 
suo  quivi  FESTA.    (Dant.  Pur.  6.) 

Dar    matiria     dgV    innidiosi,  To  give  occasion  to  envious  per- 

PRESTI  A  MORDERE   OGNi  LAU-  sons,  ready  to  slander  every  praise- 

DEVOL  COSA.     (Bocc.  Intr.)  worthy  thing. 

Per  me  soisro  ACCONCIA  D'  IM-  As  for   me,  I   am  disposed  to 

PEGNAR   per  te   QUESTE    ROBE,  pawn  for  thee  these  garments. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  10.) 

Let  gknte  &  PIU   ACCONCIA  A  People  are  more  inclined  to  be- 

CREDERE  IL  MALE,  che  il  bene.  lieve  the  evil,  than  the  good. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  6.) 


REGIMEN     OF     VERBS. 


Verbs  may  govern,  or  have  for  a  complement,  a  noun, 
a  pronoun,  another  verb,  or  a  phrase. 

The  nouns  and  pronouns  governed  by  the  verb  may 
be  in  the  subjective,  in  the  objective,  or  in  any  other  re- 
lation preceded  by  a  preposition. 

The  verbs  governed  by  another  verb  may  be  in  the 
indicative,  in  the  conjunctive,  or  in  the  infinitive  mood, 
either  in  the  objective  or  in  any  other  relation,  except 
the  subjective,  preceded  by  a  preposition. 

The  verb  essere  governs  a  noun  in  the  subjective,  and 
is  consequently  construed  with  two  subjectives,  called,  the 
36 


422  SYNTAX. 

one,  the  subjective  before,  and,  the  other,  the  subjective 
after ',  the  verb  ;  as, 

io    sono     LA    SVENTURATA     I  am  the  unfortunate  Ginevra : 

GlNEVRA, 

i  veri  amici  sono  TJ.NA  COSA    true    friends    are    one    thing 
insieme,  together. 


Active  verbs  govern  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  in  the  objec- 
tive ;  as, 

io  ho  amdto  ed  dmo  GUIS-  I  have  loved  and  love  Guis- 

CARDO,  card ; 

m6lti  sdnno  MOLTE    COSE,  e  many  know  many  things,  and 

non  sdnno  SE  MEDESIMI,  do  not  know  themselves. 

Many  active  verbs,  besides  having  a  noun  or  a  pronoun 
in  the  objective,  or,  what  is  the  same,  a  direct  regimen, 
may  govern  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  in  any  other  relation, 
except  the  subjective,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  and 
thus  have  also  an  indirect  regimen  ;  as, 

io  non  la  vendei  LORO,  ma  I  did  not  sell  it  to  them,  but 
tssi  ME  L'  avrdnno  imbold-  they  must  have  stolen  it 
ta,  from  me ; 

per  premidre  il  cavaliere  in  order  to  reward  the  gentle- 

DELL'  ONORE  riceviito,  man  for  the  honor  received  ; 

s£  AD  OGNI  suo  sERvicio  of-  he  -offered  himself  to  serve  her 

ftrse,  in  every  thing; 

5'  ingegno  di  rivolgerla  DA  he  endeavoured  to  dissuade  her 

PROPOJS JMENTO  sijitro,  from  so  cruel  a  proposal. 


Passive  verbs  govern  a  noun  or  a  pronoun  in  the  re- 
lation of  derivation  preceded  by  the  preposition  da  ;  as, 

tgli  DA  ME  tra   egualmente    he  was  equally  loved  by  me  ; 
amdto, 

Efigenia  DA  MOLTE  NOBILI     Iphigenia    was     received     by 
DONNE  di  Rodifu  ricevuta,        many  noble  ladies  of  Rhodes. 


GOVERNMENT  (fr  WORDS.  423 

Sometimes  instead  of  da  we  find  the  preposition  per  used  by  good 

writers ;  as, 

la  piu  bdlla  cosa,  che  giammdi    the  handsomest  object  that  was 
PER  ALCTJNO  veduta  fosse,  ever  seen  by  anybody ; 

PER  FALSA  LODE  di  stollo  essere    to  be  deceived  by  the  false  praise 
inganndto,  of  fools. 


Neuter  verbs,  strictly  speaking,  have  no  regimen;  but 
as  some  of  them  are  often  used,  in  Italian,  actively,  they 
follow,  when   so   used,  the  same  rules  as  q% 
as, 


cendrono  UN  POCO  ui  CARNE 

SAl/ATAj 

quantunque   Jlmore  i    LIETI     although    iX^e  Dwells  '  nJ 
PALAGI,  piu  vo'entieri  che         willingly     nK  gaiy    palaces, 
LE  POVERE  c  APANNE,  a6z7i,        than  in  poor  cottages. 


Pronominal  verbs  govern  the  pronouns  mi,  ti,  ci,  vi, 
si,  with  which  they  are  varied,  in  the  objective ;  as, 

io  MI  levdi  diritta,  I  stood  up  ; 

lo  scoldre  s'  esercitdva,  the  scholar  took  exercise. 

Many  pronominal  verbs,  besides  the  above,  which  is 
their  direct  regimen,  may  have  an  indirect  regimen,  or, 
what  is  the  same,  may  also  govern  a  noun  in  any  other 
relation,  but  the  subjective,  preceded  by  a  preposition ; 
as, 

?-  attristi  BELLA  M!A  DIMO-     thou  grievest  for  my^stay  ; 
RA, 

la  cittci,  5'  arrendeo  A   CE-    the  city  surrendered  to  Caesar. 
SAKE, 


Unipersonal  verbs,  generally,  have  no  regimen ;  there 
are  instances,  however,  in   which   some  of  them  govern 


424 


SYNTAX. 


a  word  in  the  relation  of  attribution,  preceded  by  the 
preposition  a  ;  as, 


come  accdde  A'  BUONI,  cosi 

accdde  A'  CATTIVI, 
questa  novella,  la  qudle  A  ME 

tocca  di  dover  dire, 


as  it  befalls  good  people,  so  it 
befalls  bad  people  ; 

this  novel,  which  I  am  to  re- 
late. 


EXAMPLES. 


Signor  nrio,  10  SONO  LA  misera        Sir, I  am  tbe  unfortunate,  wretch- 
SVENTURATA   GINEVRA.     (Bocc.     ed  Ginevra. 
g.  5.  n.  9.) 


I    VERI   AMfci    SONO    "UNA  COSA 

INSIEME.     (Am.  Ant.  d,  18.  r.  1.) 

lO     HO    AMATO     ED     AMO    GuiS- 

CARDO,  e  quanta  viverd  io  V  ame- 
rd.    (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

MOLTI  MOLTE  COSE  SANNO,  SE 
TOEDESIMI  NON  SANNO.  (Am,  Ant. 

d.  5.  r.  3.) 

lO    NON    LA    VENDEI    LORD,    MA 

ESSI  questa  ndtte  ME  L*  AVRANNO 
IMBOLATA.     (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  10.) 

PER   PREMIARE    IL    CAVALIERE 

DELL'  ONORE  RICEVUTO  da  lui. 
(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  6.) 

Soddisfece  alia  sua  domdnda, 

€    SE    AD    OGNI    SIJO    SERVIGIO    OF- 

FERSE.     (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

Con  parole  assdi  s'  INGEGNO 

DI    RIVOLGERLA  DA  PROPONIMEN- 

TO  si  FIERO.     (Bocc.  g,  2.  n.  6.) 

COSI  EGLI    DA   ME    ERA  EGUAL- 

MENTE  AMATO,  com'  6gli  me  amd- 
va.    (Bocc.  Fiam.  1.  6.) 

EFIGENIA  DA  MOLTE  NOBILI 
DONNE  DI  RODI  FU  RICEVtJTA. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n,  1.) 

Costei    esser    LA    PIU    BELLA 

COSA,  CHE    GIAMMAI  PER  ALCUNO 

VEDUTA  FOSSE.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 


True  friends  are  one  thing  to- 
gether. 

I  have  loved  and  love  Guiscard, 
and  I  shall  love  him  as  long  as  I 
live. 

Many  know  many  things,  and  do 
not  know  themselves. 

I  did  not  sell  it  to  them,  but 
they  must  have  stolen  it  from  me 
last  night 

In  order  to  reward  the  gentle- 
man for  the  honor  he  had  received 
of  him. 

He  complied  with  her  request, 
and  offered  himself  to  serve  her  in 
every  thing. 

With  a  great  many  words  he 
endeavoured  to  dissuade  her  from 
so  cruel  a  proposal. 

So  he  was  equally  loved  by  me, 
as  he  loved  me. 


Iphigenia  was  received  by  many 
noble  ladies  of  Rhodes. 


She  was  the  handsomest  object 
that  was  ever  seen  by  anybody. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS. 


425 


MtgUo  b  6sser  corritto  dal  sa- 

VIO,  Che  PER  FALSA  LODE  DI  STOL- 
TOESSER  INGANNATO.    (Am HI.  Ant. 

d.  3.  r.  6.) 

CENARONO  UN  poco  DI  CARNE 
SALATA.  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  1.)  , 

QUANTUNQUE  AMORE  i  LIETJU 
PALAGI  e  le  morbid?  cdmere,  PIU 

VOLENT1ERI    CHE   LE    POVERE  CA- 

PANNE,  ABIT*.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  10.) 

fo  MI   LEVAI    DIRITTA.       (BOCC. 

g.  7.  n.  6.) 

Lo      SCOLARE      S'      ESERCITAVA 

per  riscalddrsi.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n. 

*•>: 

.  DELLA     MIA    lunga     DIMORA 

T*  ATTRISTI.     (BOCC.  g.  4.  D.  5.) 
S*  ARRENDEO    LA    CITTA    A    Cfi- 

BARE.  (Gio.  Vill.) 

COME  ACCADE  A'  BUONI,  cosi, 
fratttlo,  mi  pare  che  accdggia 
A'  CATTIVI.  (Fra.  Guitt.  lett.) 

QUESTA  NOVELLA,  LA  QUALE  A 
ME  TOCCA  DI  DOVER  DIRE,  VOgllO 

ve  ne  renda  ammaestrdle.   (Bocc. 
g.  1.  h.  10.) 


It  is  better  to  be  corrected  by 
the  wise,  than  to  be  deceived  by 
the  false  praise  of  fools. 

They  supped  on  a  little  salt 
meat. 

Although  Love  dwells  in  gay 
palaces  and  sumptuous  apartments, 
more  willingly  than  in  poor  cot- 
tages. 

I  stood  up. 


The  scholar  took  exercise  to  get 
warm. 

Thou  grievest  for  my  long  stay. 
The  city  surrendered  to  Caesar. 

Brother,  I  think  that  as  it  befalls 
good  people,  so  it  befalls  bad  peo- 
ple. 

I  wi«h,  that  the  novel,  which  I 
am  to  relate,  may  make  you  wise. 


GOVERNMENT     OF     VERBS  -  Continued. 

A  verb  governs  another  verb  that  depends  upon  it,  in 
the  infinitive  mood,  whenever  the  subject  of  the  princi- 
pal (governing)  verb  is  the  same  with  that  of  the  rfe- 
pendent  (governed)  verb  ;  as  in  the  following  example 
of  Boccaccio,  Proem.  : 

assai  manifestamMe  pdsso     I  can  easily  believe,  that  that 
coMPRENDERE,<?we//oesser        is   really   true,  which   wise 

men  are  wont  to  say,  name- 
ly,  that  poverty  alone  is  not 
envied  ; 


o,  che  SOGLIONO  i  SAVJ 
DIRE,  CHE  SOLO  LA  MisE- 
RIA  e  senza  invidia, 


where  posso  and  sogliono  govern  comprendtre  and  dire 


426  SYNTAX. 

in  the  infinitive ;  because,  in  the  first  instance,  io,  which 
is  understood,  is  the  subject  of  posso  and  at  the  same 
time  of  comprendere,  that  depends  upon  it ;  and  in  the 
last,  savj  is  the  subject  of  sogliono  as  well  as  of  dire, 
that  depends  upon  it. 

The  infinitives,  depending  on  another  verb  which 
governs  them,  may  be  either  in  the  objective,  as  in  the 
foregoing  example  ;  or  in  any  other  relation,  except  the 
^subjective,  preceded  by  a  preposition  ;  as, 

niga  D'  AVER  RICEVTJTO  il  he  denies  to  have  received  the 

beneficio,  benefit ; 

dobbidmo  impardre  A  TACE-  we  must  learn   how   to   keep 

RE,  silent. 

If  the  subjects  of  the  two  verbs  be  different,  then  the 
principal  verb  governs  the  dependent  verb  in  a  tense  of 
the  indicative  or  conjunctive  mood,  preceded  by  the  con- 
junction che ;  as, 

so   io   bene,   CHE    EGLI    ne    I  know  well,  that  he  carried 
PORTO  (ind.)  V  dnima  mia,        away  my  soul ; 

io  CREDO,   CHE    LE   SUCRE     I    think,  that    the    nuns   are 
SIENO  (conj.)  a  dormire,  asleep. 

By  a  peculiarity  of  language  the  conjunction  che  is  sometimes  sup- 
pressed ;  as, 

credo,   [che]    egli  se  n9  ANDO  I  believe  that  he  went  away. 

(ind.), 

tem6ndo  [che]  non  gli  ATVE-  fearing  lest  it   should  happen  to 

NISSE  (conj.),  him. 


The  dependent  verb  is  put   in  the  indicative,  when 

the  principal   verb   implies  affirmation,  knowledge,    or 
certainty  of  action  ;  as. 

vi  DICO,  ck*  egli  E  morto,  I  tell  you,  that  he  is  dead ; 

so  ch*  tgli  E  cost,  I  know  that  it  is  so  ; 

egli  STA  Mne,  s6lvo  che  gU  he  is  well,  except  that  he  has 

DUOLE  il  cdpo,  the  headache. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS. 


427 


The  dependent  verb  is  put  in  the  conjunctive,  when 
the  principal  verb  implies  will,  desire,  entreaty,  com- 
mand, hope,  fear,  pleasure,  displeasure,  permission,  pro- 
hibition, negation,  shame,  blame,  adulation,  wonder, 
surprise,  supposition,  conjecture,  judgment,  belief,  ques- 
tion, doubt,  ignorance,  uncertainty,  or  future  action  ; 
as, 


io  vo'  che  SAPPI, 


I  wish  thatthou  shouldst  know ; 


che  SIA  posto  in    I  desire  that  it  should  be  put 
in  execution ; 

she  begged  him  to  come ; 

he  ordered  one  of  his  domes- 
tics to  bring  him  into  his 
house  ; 

dost  thou  hope  [or  believe] 
that  Nicostratus  would  ob- 
serve loyalty  ? 

I  fear  that  excessive  grief 
will  destroy  the  heart; 


esecuzidne, 
PREGAVA  che  ne 
COMANDO    ad    un    de'    suoi 

famiglidri    che    nella  sua 

cdsa  il  MENASSE,  * 
SPERI  tu  che  Nicostrato  AN- 

DASSE  la  lealtti  ritrovdn- 

rfo? 

TEMO  [che]  il  soverchio  af- 
fdnno  non  DISTRUGGA  il 
cor, 

DISPIACQUE  lorOj  che  i  Peru- 
gini  AVESSERO  roita  la 
lega, 

SUPPONGASI  che  Juppiter  si  A 
dnimo  di  qutsto  mondo, 

quello  che  V  dnimo  GIUDICA 
che  SIA  benfdtto, 

CREDO  [che]  mi  PORTASSE 
amore, 

DOMANDAVA,  che  db  FOSSE, 

non  so  che  mene  PEN  si,  o  che 
mi  DICA, 


it  displeased  them,  that  the 
Perugians  should  have  brok- 
en the  league ; 

let  us  suppose  that  Jupiter  be 
the  soul  of  this  world  ; 

that  which  the  soul  judges  to 

be  well  done ; 
I  believe  that  he  loved  me  ; 


he  asked,  what  that  was; 
I  know  not  what  to  think,  or 
what  to  say. 

The  verb  is  put  in  the  conjunctive,  when  it  is  depend- 
ent upon  a  unipersonal  verb,  such  as  sembrdre,  £to  seern '; 
parere,  6  to  appear  ' ;  mostrare,  '  to  show ' ;  bisognare, 

i  must '  or  c  to  be  obliged  ' ;  &tc. ;  as, 

SEMBRAVA,   che  AVESSE    it  appeared  to  me  as  if  he  had 


voglia  di  ridere, 


a  wish  to  laugh  ; 


428 


SYNTAX. 


e'  PAR  che  tu  si  A  morto, 


che.Roma  si  REG- 
GESSE  a  signoria  di  re, 

BISOGNAVA       Che       PART1SSE 

V  indomdni, 


it  seems  as  if  thou  wert 
dead; 

it  shows  that  Rome  was  under 
the  government  of  kings  ; 

it  was  necessary  that  he  should 
set  out  the  next  morning-. 


The  dependent  verb  is  put -in  the  conjunctive,  when 
preceded  by  a  comparative  or  a  superlative  ;  as, 


costei  fu   dal  padre 

AM  AT  A,       QUAKTO 

figliuola  da  padre  FOSSE 
giammdi, 

tra  IL  PIU  SAVIO  ed  IL  PIU 
AWEDUTO  uomOj  che  al 
mondo  FOSSE, 


this  young  woman  was  as  dear 
to  her  father,  as  any  other 
child  ever  was  to  a  parent ; 
% 

he  was  the  wisest  and  the 
most  prudent  man  that  there 
ever  was  in  the  world. 


quivi  non  bra  CHI  le  smarrite 
forze  RIVOCASSE, 

dicendoli  QUALE  VOLESSE, 


The  dependent  verb  is  likewise  put  in  the  conjunctive 
when  it  is  preceded  by  the  relative  pronouns,  chi,  'who'; 
and  qualej  6  which,'  '  what ' ;  as, 

there  was  no  one  there  who 
could  restore  to  her  her  lost 
spirits ; 

asking  him  which  he  would 
prefer. 

The  verb  is  also  put  in  the  conjunctive  after  the 
conjunction  se,  'if';*  the  adverb  quando,  used  in  the 
signification  of  '  if,'  '  provided '  ;  and  the  adverbs  ove, 
dove,  both  in  the  signification  of  '  if,'  '  when,'  '  in  case 
that,'  and  in  their  proper  signification  of  (  where ' ; 
as, 

SE  rf'  esser  mentovato  laggiu    if  thou  dost  not  disdain  to  be 

mentioned  there  below ; 


*  Instances  arc,  nevertheless;  to  be  found,  in  which  the  verb  is  put  in  the  indicative 
after  se ;  as, 


JVbn  so,  SE  a  v6i  quillo  se  ne  PAKR&, 
t,hi  a  me  ne  PARRE'BBE.     (Bucc.  Intr.) 


I  do  not  know,  whether  it  will  seem 
to  you,  as  it  would  seem  to  me. 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS. 


429 


io  voglio  porre  fine  dlle  tut 
angosce  QUANDO  TU  VOGLI, 

6vE  cosi  non  FOSSE, 

DOVE  tu  non  VOGLI  cosi  fare, 

vommene  in  guisa,  d?  oV&o, 
che  non  sa  OVE  si  VADA, 

io  non  so  DOVE  io  mifugga, 


I  wish  to  put  an  end  to  thy 
suffering,  if  [or  provided] 
thou  wishest  it ; 

if  [or  when]  it  will  not  prove 
so ; 

if  [or  when,  or  in  case  that] 
thou  dost  not  wish  to  do  so  ; 

I  move  along  like  a  blind  man, 
who  does  not  know  whither 
he  goes ; 

I  know  not  whither  I  should 
fly. 


[For  a  List  of  Verbs  governing  a  noun  or  another  verb,  either  in  the  objective,  or  in 
any  other  relation,  preceded  by  a.  preposition,  see  APPENDIX  K.J 


EXAMPLES. 


Ingrdto  e  chi  il  beneficio  NEGA 

D*     AVER    RICEVTJTO.      (Alll.   Ant., 

d.  17.  r.  2.) 

DOBBIAMO  pctrldndo  IMPARARE 
A  TACERE.  (Am,  Ant.  d.  7.  r.  3.) 

So  fo  BENE,  CHE  StCLUOtte  EGLI 
NE  PORTO  L'  ANIMA  MIA.  (BoCC. 

g.  4.  n.  2.) 

IO  mi  CREDO,  CHE  LE  SUORE 
SIEN  tiltte  A  DORMIRE.  (BoCC. 

g.  8.  n.  1.) 

I'O    CREDO,    EGLI     SE     N*    ANDO 

disperdto.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

TEMENDO,  NON  GLI  AVVENISSE 
quello,  che  gli  avvenne.  (Bocc. 
g.  5.  n.  6.) 

Vl     D1CO,    CH5    EGLI     E    MORTO. 

(Bocc.) 

So  CH'  EGLI  E  cosi,  ma  non 
ne  comprendo  la  ragione.  (Class.) 

EGLI  STA  BENE,  SALVO  CHE  GLI 

DUOLE  IL  CAPO.     (Barb.  Gr.  Gr.) 


He  is  ungrateful,  who  denies  to 
have  received  a  benefit. 

We  must,  in  speaking,  learn  how 
to  keep  silent. 

I  know  well,  that  last  night  he 
carried  away  my  soul. 

I  believe  that  the  nuns  are  all 
gone  to  sleep. 

I  believe,  he  went  away  in  de- 
spair. 

Fearing,  lest  it  should  happen 
to  him,  what  in  fact  happened  to 
him. 

I  tell  you,  that  he  is  dead. 

I  know  it  is  so,  but  do  not 
understand  the  reason. 

He  is  well,  except  that  he  has 
the  headache. 


430 


SYNTAX. 


Sennuccio,  fo  vo*  CHE  SAPPI 
in  qudl  maniera —  Traltdto  sono. 
(Petr.  s.  89.) 

Percid  DESIDERO  CHE  SIA  PO- 
STO  IN  ESECUZIONE.  (Cas.  lett. 
15.) 

II  chiamdva,  e  PREGAVA  CHE 

NE  VENISSE.      (BOCC.  g.  4.  D.  5.) 

COMANDO  AD  UN  DE*  SUOI  FA- 
MIGLIARI  CHE  NELLA^SUA  CASA 

IL  MENASSE,  e  gli  focesse  dar  da 
mangidre,  per  Dio.  (Bocc.  g.  2. 
n.  7.) 

SPERI  TU,  CHE  NlCOSTRATO  AN- 
DASSE  LA  LEALTA.  RITROVANDO, 

che  tu  servdr  vuoi  a  lui  ?  (Bocc. 
g.  7.  n.  9.) 

Ch1  io  TEMO,  lasso  !  KO  SL  so- 

VERCHIO    AFFANNO DlSTRUGGA 

IL  COR.    (Fetr.  s.  84.) 

DISPIACQTJE  LORO  grctndemente, 
CHE  i  PERUGINI  ROTTA  AVESSERO 
LA  LEGA.  (Gio.  Vill.) 

SUPPONGASI  pero,  CHE  JUPPI- 
TER  SIA,  a  modo  loro,  ANIMO  DI 

QDESTO     MONDO.       (St.     Allg.     Clt. 

Dio.) 

Che    tu    fdcci,    QUELLO    CHE 

L*  ANIMO  ti  GltJDICA  CHE  BEN 
SIA  FATTO.  (BOCC.  g.  1.  n.  6.) 

CREDO  MI  PORTASSE  AMORE, 
e  che  di  me  non  FOSSE  m6no  ar- 
dente.  (Ariost.) 

DOMANDAVA,    CHE      CIO     FOSSE. 

(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  4.) 

NON  SO  CHE  MENE  PENSI,  O  CHE 

MI  DICA.    (Petr.) 

Ml  SEMBRAVA,CHE  AVESSE  VO- 
GLIA  DI  RIDERE.  (BoCC.) 

E'  PAR  CHE    TU    SIA  MORTO.  che 

tistntitu?     (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  3) 


Sennuccio,  I  wish  that  thou 
shouldst  know  in  what  manner  I 
am  treated. 

Therefore  I  desire  that  it  should 
be  put  iii  execution. 

She  called  him,  and  begged  him 
to  come. 

He  ordered  one  of  his  domes- 
tics to  bring  him  into  his  house, 
and  cause  something  to  eat  to  be 
given  to  him,  for  God's  sake. 

Dost  thou  believe,  that  Nicos- 
tfatus  will  observe  the  loyalty  to- 
wards thee,  that  thou  dost  towards 
him  ? 

So  that  I  fear,  alas!,  that  ex- 
cessive grief  will  destroy  the  heart 

It  displeased  them  exceedingly, 
that  the  Perugians  should  have 
broken  the  league. 

But  let  us  suppose,  that  Jupiter, 
as  they  will  have  it,  be  the  soul 
of  this  world. 


That  thou  shouldst  do,  what 
thy  soul  judges  to  be  well  done. 

I  believe  that  he  loved  me,  and 
that  he  was  no  less  ardent  in  love 
than  I. 

He  asked,  what  that  was. 

I  do  not  know  what  to  think,  or 
what  to  say  of  it. 

It  appeared  to  me,  as  if  he  had  a 
wish  to  laugh. 

It  seems  as  if  thou  wert  dead, 
what  ails  thee  ? 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS. 


431 


JE  COSl  MOSTRA  CHE  ROMA  SI 
REGGESSE  A  SIGNORIA  DI  RE  c6n- 

to  cinquantaqudltro  dnni.  (Gio. 
Vill.  129.) 

E  Chf  BISOGNAVA  CHE  PARTISSE 
L*  INDOMANI.  (BOCC.) 

COSTEI    FU    DAL    PADRE    TANTO 

tencrarninie  AM  ATA,  Q.UANTO  AL- 

CtJNA  dltra  FIGLIUOLA  DA  PA- 
DRE FOSSE  GIAMMAI.  (BOCC.  g.  4. 

n.l.) 

EgH  ERA  IL  PIU  SAV1O  ED  IL 
PIU  AVVEDtTTO  UOMO  CHE  AL  MON- 

DO  FOSSE.   (Bocc.  g.  ]0.  n.  10.) 

QUIVJ  NON  ERA  CHI  con  dcqua 
frtdda  o  con  dltro  argomento 

LE    SMARRITE    FORZE    R1VOCASSE, 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  6.) 

DlCENDOLI    QUALE    VOLESSE,    0 

subito  restituirc  il  suo  porco,  o  che 
igli  anddsse  al  rettore.  (Franc. 
Sacch.  146.) 

Grdzie  riportero  di  te  a  Uit  — 

SE  D'  ESSER    MENTOVATO    LAGG1U 

DEGNI.     (Dant.  Purg.  1.) 

fp  VOGLIO  ALLE  TUB  ANGOSCE, 
QUANDO  xu  medtsimo  VOGLI, 

PORRE  FINE.       (BOCC.) 

6vE  cosi  NON  JFOSSE,  w  mi  ri- 
marro  giudeo  com9  io  mi  sono. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  2.) 

E    DOVE     TU     NON     VOGLI     COS1 

FARE,  raccomanda  a  Dio  V  dni- 
ma  tua.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  4.) 

VOMMENE     IN     GD1SA     D5    ORBO 

stnza  luce,  —  CHE  NON  SA  OVE 
si  vADA,,e  pur  si  pdrte.  (Petr. 
s.  16.) 


i  tutti  fuori  ;  io  NON  so 

DOVE    10    MI    FUGGA,    dOV6    IO   ml 

nasconda.     (Mach.  Com.) 


And  thus  it  shows,  that  Rome 
was  under  the  government  of  kings 
one  hundred  and  fifty-four  years. 

And  that  it  was  necessary  that 
he  should  set  out  the  next  day. 

This  young  woman  was  as  ten- 
derly loved  by  her  father,  as  any 
other  child  ever  was  by  a  parent. 


He  was  the  wisest  "and  most 
prudent  man  that  ever  there  was 
in  the  woild. 

There  was  no  one  there  who 
could  either  with  cold  water  or 
by  any  other  means,  restore  to  her 
her  lost  spirits. 

Asking  him  which  he  would 
prefer,  either  that  he  should  return 
him  immediately  his  hog,  or  that 
he  should  go  to  the  rector. 

I  will  return  thanks  to  her  for 
thy  favor,  if  thou  dost  not  disdain 
to  be  mentioned  there  below. 

I  wish  to  put  an  end  to  thy 
troubles,  if  thou  thyself  wishest 
it. 

If  it  will  not  prove  so,  I  will 
remain  a  Jew  as  1  am. 


And  if  thou  dost  not  wish  to 
do  so,  recommend  thy  soul  to 
God. 

I  move  along  like  a  blind  man, 
deprived  of  light,  who  does  not 
know  where  he  goes,  and  yet  he 
departs. 

Here  they  are  all  out ;  I  know 
not  whither  1  should  fly,  where  I 
should  conceal  myself. 


432 


SYNTAX. 


REGIMEN     OF    PREPOSITONS. 

The  regimen  or  complement  of  prepositions  is  gen- 
erally a  noun,  a  pronoun,  or  a  verb,  either  in  the  objec- 
tive, or  in  any  other  relation,  except  the  subjective, 
preceded  by  another  preposition ;  as. 


io  non  ddva  loco  PER  LO  aiio 
CORPO  al  trapassdr  d&  rag- 
& 

volgeansi  CIRCA  JNOI  le  due 
ghirldnde, 

un  giorno,  DIETRO  MANGIA- 
RE,  laggiit  venutone, 

comincio  a  pidgnere  SOFRA 
DI  LEI, 

assdi  PRESSO  A  SALERNO  e 
ima  costa, 

DA  OGNI  UOMO, 


I  gave  no  way  for  the  rays  to 
pass  through  my  body ; 

the  two  garlands  [of  unfad- 
ing roses]  wreathed  about 
us; 

one  day  having  come  there  be- 
low, after  dinner ; 

he  began  to  mourn  over  her  ; 

very  near  Salerno  there  lies 

a  coast ; 
far  from  every  man. 


[For  a  List  of  Prepositions  governing  the  objective  or  any  other  relation  preceded 
by  a  preposition^  see  APPENDIX  L.] 


EXAMPL  ES. 


Qudndo  s'  accorsdr  ch'  io  NON 

DAVA  LOCO PER  LO  MIO  CORPO 

AL  TRAPASSAR  DE5  RAGGI.  (Dant. 

Purg.  5.) 

Co  si  di  quille  sempit6rne  rose 
—  VOLGEANSI  CIRCA  NOI  LE  DUE 
GHIRLANDE.  (DantvParad.  12.) 

IJjY  G10RNO,  DIETRO  MANGIARE, 
LAGGIU  VENUTONE,  in  UH  CCLHtO 

sopra  un  carcllo  si  pose  a  seder e. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

COMINCIO    A    PlAGNERE    SOPRA 

DI^  LEI,  non  altramente  -che  se 
morta  fosse.    (Bocc.  g.  8.  D.  7.) 


When  th«y  perceived,  thai 
through  my  body  I  gave  no  waj 
for  the  rays  to  pass. 


Thus  about  us  wreathed  the 
two  garlands  of  unfading  roses. 

One  day  having  come  there  be 
low,  after  dinner,  he  seated  himsel 
in  a  corner  upon  a  cushion. 

He  began  to  mourn  over  her 
not  otherwise  than  if  she  had  beei 
dead. 


GOVERNMENT   OF   WORDS. 


433 


ASSAI    PRESSO   A  SALERNO   E  Very   near   Salerno  there  lies  a 

TJNA  COSTA  il  mare  riguarddnte,  coast  looking  upon  the  sea,  which 

la  qudle  gli  abitdnti  chidmano  la  the  inhabitants  call   the  coast  of 

costa  di  Mdlfi.   (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  4.)  Amalfi. 

Da  una  pdrte  della  sdla,  assdi  In  one  corner  of  the  hall,  very 

I/ONTANO  DA  oGNi  uoMO,  co//a  don-  far  from  every  man,  he  sat  down 

na  si  pose  a  sedere.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  with  the  lady, 
n.  5.) 


REGIMEN     OF     CONJUNCTIONS. 


There  are  some  conjunctions,  in  Italian,  which  have 
a  ver6  for  their  regimen,  which  they  require  to  be  put 
either  in  the  indicative,  or  the  conjunctive  mood. 

The  following  are  those,  which  require  the  verb  to 
be  put  in  the  conjunctive  mood  : 


ajSf'        §  -  order  that; 

comunque, 
conciosiachb, 

however  ; 
whereas,  since  ; 

abbenche, 
ancorche, 

cdso  che, 
in  cdso  che, 

>  in  case  that  ; 

avvegnache, 

ddto  che,            ( 

suppose, 

benche, 
comeche, 
contuttoche, 

though, 
"  although  ; 

supposto  che,    | 
Jinche, 
Jintdntoche, 

'  grant  that  ; 

quantunque, 

injino  che, 

>  till,  until  ; 

sebbene, 

insino  che, 

tuttochc,           , 

sinche, 

avdnti  che9       ^ 
dnzi  die,           f  before, 

nonostdnteche,  < 

j  notwithstanding 
\      that  ; 

inn&nzi  che,     £  sooner  than  ; 
prima  che,        J 

per  tema  che, 

for  fear  that, 
lest; 

a  meno  che,         except,  unless  ; 
a  condizione    J 

qualora, 

if,  when, 
whenever  ; 

che,               f  on  condition, 

quand'  dnche, 

'  even  when  ; 

con  patio  che,  ^  provided  that  ; 

se, 

if; 

purche,              ) 

stnza  che, 

without  ; 

come  se,               as  if; 

solo  che, 

only  that.* 

*  The  following  instances  are,  nevertheless,  met  with  in  the  classics,  in  which 

37 


434  SYNTAX. 

To  which  may  be  added  the  conjunction  perche,  used 
in  the  signification  of  '  although,'  and  '  in  order  that ' : 
also  the  conjunctions  che,  'that';se,  '  if ' ;  quando,  in 
the  signification  of  '  if,'  ( in  case  that,'  c  provided  ' ;  and 
the  adverbs  ore,  dove,  both  in  their  own  signification  and 
that  of  the  conjunctions  '  if,'  '  when,'  (  provided  '  ;  as 
has  been  already  mentioned  at  p.  428,  in  treating  of  the 
regimen  of  verbs. 

Se  requires  the  verb  in  the  conjunctive,  when  it  expresses  something 
contingent  or  doubtful :  but  when  it  expresses  a  sure,  natural,  or 
expected  circumstance,  or  when  the  action  of  the  verb  is  entirely  past, 
the  verb  is  put  in  the  indicative  ;  as, 

SE  tu  ti  CALI  w  non  ti  verrd    if  thou  do  cast  thee  down,  I  can- 
dietro  di  galoppo,  not  chase  thee  on  foot ; 

dimmi  SE  w   POSSO  adoperdre    tell    me  whether  I   can   do   any 
alcuna  cosa,  thing  for  thee  ; 

noi  glidlo  farem  fare,   SE    tu  we  will   make  her  do  it,  if  thou 

VORRAI,  wishest  it ; 

s'   w   MERITAI   di   voi    vnlntre  if,  living,  I  merited  aught  of  you, 

ch'  w  vissi,  non  vi  movete,  move  ye  not ; 

SE  gli  occhi  suoi  ti  FUR  dolci    if  her  eyes  were  dear  and  sweet  to 
nh  cariy  thee ; 

s'  w  DISSI  fdlso,  e  tu  FALSASTI     if  I  spoke  false,  thou  falsely  stamp- 
il  conio,  edst  the  coin. 


the  conjunctions  avvegnacM,  benchd,  comeche,  contuttochd,  sebbenej  are  used  with  a 
verb  in  the  indicative  mood  : 

AVVEGNACHG  quel  di  niiino  E'RA  AN-  Since,  that  day,  no  one   had  gone  to 

DA'TO  a  lavordre.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.)  work. 

BENCHC  a  me  non  PA'RVE  mdi  chs  vdi  Although  I  never  thought  you  were  a 

gibdicefdste.    (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  10.)  judge. 

La  qudle  il  gidvanc  focosamente  dma,  Whom  the  young  man  ardently  loves, 

COMECHB  ella  non  se  ne  ACCORGE,  per  although  she  does  not  perceive  it,  for 

:jucllo  ch'  to  vegga.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.)  what  I  see. 

Si  ricomincib  la  guerra  c6ntro  gli  Are-  They  renewed  the  war  against  the 

tini,  CONTUTTOCHC  iiel  segreto  RIMA'-  Aretines,  although  in  secret  the  Aretines 

BERG  gli  Aretini  in  trattdto  d*  accdrdo  remained  on  terms  of  peace  with  the 

c6>  Fiorentini.  (Gio.  Vill.  1.  11.  c.  58.)  Florentines. 

Perchi  SEBBE'NE  i  giovani  V  AOME'N-  For,  although  young  men  enlarge  them 

TANO,    6*  non  sdnno  di  poi  mantenerle.  (the  cities),  they  know  not  how  to  gov- 

Gell.)  ern  them  afterwards. 


GOVERNMENT   OF  WORDS. 


435 


EXAMPLES. 


ACCIOCCHE  piu  avdnti  non 
POTESSE  il  prince  venire.  (Bocc. 
g.  2.  n.  7.) 

Perocche  Jlmor  V  avea  giaferi- 
ta, —  ABBENCHE  le  PARESSE  £s- 
ser  tradita.  (Bopc.  Ninf.  Fies.) 

•Alessdndro,  ANCORCHE  gran 
paura  AVESSE,  stette  pur  cheto. 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  1.) 

JViuno  dltrOjper  QUANTUNQUE 
AVESSE  aguto  r  avvedimdnto, 
potrebbe  chi  w  mifossi  conoscere. 
(Bocc.  Fiam.) 

TUTTOCHE  questa  gente  ma- 
ladetta  in  vera  perfezion  giain- 
mdi  non  VADA.  (Dant.  Inf.  6.) 

I'D  non  ti  concederd  quello  che 
seguita,perche,  DATOCHE  noi  ce 
li  DIAMO,  non  percio  restidmo 
debitori.  (Varch.  Sen.  ben.  5.  9.) 

Dico,  che  COMUNQUE  si  si  A, 
egli  ha  tdnte  6re  la  notte  qudnte 
il  di.  (Ser.  Brun.  Tes.  2.  44.) 

La  medicma  da  guarirlo  so  io 
troppo  bene  fare,  PURCHE  a  voi 
DIA  il  cudre  di  segreto  tenure  cid 
che  w  vi  ragionerd.  (Bocc.  g.  3. 
n.  8.) 

NONOSTANTE  CHE  fosse pregd- 
to  da  tutti  i  cittadmi,  che  gli  do- 
vesse  perdondre.  (Zibald.  Andr. 
3.  3.) 

Or  vo'  che  sdppit  INNANZI  CHE 
piu  ANDI,  —  Ch'  ei  non  peccdro. 
(Dant.  Inf.  4.) 

Seguiro  r  6mbra  di  quel  dolce 
Iduro,  —  FINCHE  /'  ultimo  di 
CHitJDA  quest'  occhi.  (Petr.  c.  7.) 

Ch*  io  spero  —  Far  mi  immor- 
tal, PERCHE  la  came  MUOIA. 
(Petr.  c.  18.) 


In  order  that  the  prince  should 
not  approach  any  further. 

Because  Love  had  already 
wounded  her,  although  she  thought 
she  was  betrayed. 


Alexander,    although    he 
great  fear,  remained  quiet. 


had 


No  one  else,  however  acute 
perception  he  may  have,  could 
know  who  I  am. 

Though  this  accursed  race  never 
can  reach  true  perfection. 


I  will  not  grant  thee  what  fol- 
lows, because,  suppose  we  should 
give  them  to  them,  we  shall  re- 
main no  less  debtors. 

I  say,  that  however  it  may  be, 
there  are  as  many  hours  in  the 
day  as  in  the  night. 

The  medicine  to  cure  him,  I 
know  well  how  to  apply,  provided 
you  have  a  mind  to  keep  secret 
what  I  shall  tell  you. 

Notwithstanding  he  was  begged 
by  all  the  citizens  to  pardon  him. 


Now  I  wish  thou  mayst  know, 
before  thou  passest  any  farther,  that 
these  did  not  sin. 

I  will  follow  the  shade  of  that 
sweet  laurel,  until  death  close 
these  eyes. 

So  that  I  hope  to  make  myself 
immortal,  though  the  body  die. 


436 


SYNTAX. 


La  'ncomincid   a  bdttere  PER- 

CHE     '/    PASSASSE.       (BoCC.    g.    9. 

n.9.) 

SE  TU  TI  CALI,  IO  NON  TI  VER- 
HO  DIETRO  DI  GALOPPO.  (Dant. 

Inf.  22.) 

Cdccia  via  la  paura,  e  DIMMI 

SE    IO    POSSO    ADOPERARE    ALCTJ- 

NA  COSA.     (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.) 

Noi     GLIELO     FAREM     FARE,     0 

voglia  ilia  o  no,  SE  TU  VORRAI. 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.) 

O  Viii  che  siete  due  dentro  ad 
unfuoco, —  S'  io  MERITAI  DI  voi 
MENTRE  CH'  io  vissi,  —  S'  io 

MERITAI  DI    VOI    ttSSdi    0  pOCO, 

Qudndo  nel  mondo  gli  alii  versi 
scrissi,  —  NON  vi  MOVETE.  (Dant. 
Inf.  26.) 

Alnzi  la  voce  al  suo  nome 
rischidrij  —  SE  GLI  OCCHI  sudi  TI 

FUR  DOLCI  NE  CARI.     (Petr.  S.  40.) 
S'  IO    DISSI    FALSO,  E    TU     FAL- 

SASTI  IL  CONIO,  —  Disse  Sinone. 
(Dant.  Inf.  30.) 


He  began  to  beat  her  in  order 
to  cure  her. 


If  thou  do  cast  thee  down  (into 
the  pitch)  I  cannot  chase  thee  on 
foot. 

Drive  away  fear,  and  tell  me 
whether  I  can  do  any  thing  for 
thee. 

We  will  make  her  do  it,  whether 
she  is  willing  or  not,  if  thou  wish- 
est  it. 

O  ye,  who  dwell  two  spirits 
within  one  fire,  if  living  I  merited 
aught  of  you,  whatever  may  have 
been  the  measure  of  that  desert, 
when  in  the  world  I  wrote  my 
lofty  verses,  move  ye  not. 

Nay  let  thy  voice  celebrate  her 
name,  if  her  eyes  were  ever  dear 
and  sweet  to  thee. 

If  I  spoke  false,  thou  falsely 
stampedst  the  coin,  said  Sinon. 


EXERCISE    XXIX. 


A    good    man,   destitute    of   money,    and    of   poor    mind. 
buon    uomo,  povero  montta,  2  strdtto1  dnimo. 

Deprived     of     every    virtue,      and     full      of    every      pride. 
Voto  valor,  pieno  orgoglio. 

Of     ancient      blood,      and     (of)     noble      manners.        The 
2       Antico1      sdngue,3        4        6         nobileb      costume. 

Marquis    of     Monferrato    was     a    man     of     great       valor. 
Marchese  uomo  alto        valore. 

With      some      good    wine,  and     some     preserves    she     re- 
alquanto    buon     vino,  alqudnto   confetto         —  ricon- 


.GOVERNMENT   OF  WORDS.  437 

cruited     him.       (The)     pride     is     hated     by (is    odious 

fortdre2     l  superb  la   —       —          —  odioso 

to)   God   and   by (to)  (the)   men.      They    foment     that 

Dw  uomo.        —       Fomentdre 

i  bad     disposition        of     theirs,      inclined      to     (the)      evil. 


genidccio 

Ready     to     do      virtuously 
Pronto1      *  operdre7  virtuoso6 


to 


inclindre  mdle. 

others     that,    which    she 


would   (that)   should    be     done     I   to     her.        In    exchange 

"\  cdmbio 


vol6r en       12            6ssere13  operdreu  j  m9 

for    that,      which     I     received.  She       left       at      liberty 

,                            ricevere.  —   conctdere9    10      liberta? 

e  very-one     until     (to)    the     hour  of    (the)    supper.       This 

11            i        27        3      Ora4  5 


young-woman    is    neither    from    Cremona,    nor    from    Pavia, 
giovane  2        non1  ,  , 

nay    she    is    from    Faenza (a     Faentine).      He    wished, 

—  —         —    Faentino.         —      VoUre, 

that    I    should     see     all    the     holy       relics.        Show      me 
vedere  sdnto     reliquia.    Mostrdre^, 

the     way,      that     goes    to     Rome.      I    myself     know     not, 
cammino,  anddre  Roma.         medesimo  sapere2       *, 

what (that     which)     I     wish      (for    myself).        I     know 

4        5    volere7      —  6.  sapdre2 

not,   who   thou   mayst   be,   nor   by    what   means   thou     hast 
1.  ,  modo        —  6ssere2 


come       here-below. 


Being     much     pleased 
Piacendogli          molto 


with    the 


manners      of     the       boy,       he       asked  who      he      was. 
m6do                            fanciullo,   —    domanddre 

He     began      pleasantly     to      speak,       and  to      ask      who 

—  Comincidre  piacevole  ragiondrc,  —  domanddre 

he    was,    whence     he     came,     and    where  he    was-going. 

—  ,  —    venire,  —        anddre. 

He    was    disposed     to      go      wherever    it    was    (to)    her 
disposto  anddre  3        l 

37* 


438 


SYNTAX. 


I  pleasure   I   to    go.      As    I    arrived      on    the    other  side,  f 
a  grddo*   \   —    — .  giungere  di  la, 

there     was     one    who      seemed      to      know   (that    he 

parere        —        — 

Do     thou 


knew)      all      (the)      my      sins 
3  peccdto* 


by     heart 
a    mente 


sapere0 

stay        (thyself),    whom       by   1   the    fashion     of    thy     garb 
Sostdre1^,  a      \  —      —       dbito 

we    deem    to  be (seemest    to-us    to    be)    some     native 

—        —        sembrdre2        l  —         

(some    one)    of     our      evil      land.        If    I     had     this 

prdva2  terra1. 

money,*    I     would    lend     it*  to    thee     immediately.     Who 
dendro,  prestdre3  1      incontanente . 

would  fare  better    than    I,    if    that    money  f    were     mine  ? 
stare  ,  dendro  ? 

Whenever    you    wish,     I     will    take     you     a     great      part 
—      volere,  portdre2  l      —    gran     pdrte 

He     might     govern     such 
—  rcggere6          qudle3 


of   the    way   I  on    horse-back 
via        a        cavdllo 


a    pjart    (of  it)    as    he    should    wish.      He     asked      of  the 
1  pdrte2  volere'1.  —  Domanddre  — 

host    where     he      could      sleep.        (The)    virtue     will    not 
oste  esso    potere    dormire.  virtu 


be        conquered 
essere    vincere 

come    into    m 


by       (the)       misery. 
miseria. 


mi    si    paran 


ly     m 
d*   av 


mind 
avdnti* 


to 


be 


|  perdovereesser1 


Many       novels 
•     novella 

related      by  me. 
raccontdre*    2         3. 


God     feeds     the     angels     and     (the)    his     servants    I  with 
Iddio  pdscere  dngelo  2        servo1        \    di 


love      and    I  (with) 
amort  di 


eternal 
sempiterno 


joy. 

»2  crAiirJin^ 


Let     there     be     this 


law      in     (the)     friendship,      that 
legge2    3          4 


of 
da8 


(the)     friends      we 
9       amico10       — 


*  This  money  —  it, —  to  be  used  in  the  plural. 
t  That  money,  in  the  plural 


GOVERNMENT  OF  WORDS.  439 

should  ask  but  an    honest   thing.      Deliberate    all  (the)    thy 

domanddre13   —    —    onesto11  cosa12.       Deliberdre'1      l  *       — 

things    with    (the)    thy    friend,    but    always  before  (of)   him. 

cosa3            45        —    amico6,                 • —  -  . 

I  A       friend     who     is     a     time-server (according      to 

L'       amico        —       —    —  — 

the    time)     will    not    be      constant    in    the     day  of    (the) 
tempo                       stare       fermo                          di 

tribulations.          I      refrained      (myself)         from  speaking 

tribolazidne.          —        trdrre9                    7              dib  parldr6 


until     we     reached     (to)     the     river.        The     flatterer    is 
1      —         3    flume*.  adulatore 

I   (even)   I   like     that    voice,     which     replies    1    from    I    the 
I     dnco     I  voce,  rispdndere  \    dopo     \ 

mountains      and     the     walls      to     him-who      cries-out.        In 
monte  muro  griddre. 

order    that    the     world     should   know    her    and    love     her. 
mondo        conoscere2  l  amdre  — . 

Although    positively     it     displeases  her.  And     what    dif- 
stretto        —    dispiactre2  l.  dif- 
ference   there     is    between    these  and  the    other    visions, 
ferenza        —      av6re  visione, 

since    the    learned^ men    speak     of   it,    I    will    not      write 
dottore         parldr e?          l,  —     —         3  scrwere5 

it    here.       In    order   to    prevent,     I     say,     in    case    that 
4  .  salvdrej      —     dire, 

we     should     do  I   otherwise,    that    this   I   should     be   I   the 


facendo2     \  altramente1,      —        —    |  fora6 

cause    of     blame    and     ignominy   to    us.       Whereupon    he 
—        —    bidsimo3        4     ignominia*    —    — . 

said     to     me  :      "  Although     thou     rendest     away     all     my 
"  ,  dischiomdre2  mi1 

hair,      I     will     neither    tell     (thee),     nor      show      (it     to) 
3     dire5          4  ,         9  ?nostrdre10^  n^  — 

thee,    who    I    am." 

12  67  8  » 


440  SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER    IV. 

USE    OF    ARTICLES. 

Articles  are  used,  in  Italian,  before  all  common  nouns 
employed  in  a  determinate  sense. 

Nouns  may  be  employed  in  a  determinate  sense  in 
three  different  ways  : 

First,  when,  in  naming  an  object,  we  intend  to  desig- 
nate the  whole  species  or  kind,  to  which  that  object 
belongs ;  as,  gli  UOMINI,  <  [the]  men  ' ;  the  noun  uomini 
being  taken  in  the  whole  extent  of  its  signification,  the 
article  gli  shows  that  all  the  individuals  composing  the 
human  kind  are  here  spoken  of. 

Secondly,  when  we  intend  to  designate  a  class  of  ob- 
jects of  any  kind  ;  as,  gli  UOMINI  virtuosi, '  [the]  virtuous 
men  ' ;  here  the  noun  uomini,  expresses  only  a  certain 
number  of  men,  its  signification  being  restricted  by  the 
adjective  virtuosi. 

Thirdly,  when  we  intend  to  designate  one  particular 
object  of  a  kind  or  of  a  class;  as,  /'  UOMO  di  cui  vi 
pdrlo,  '  the  man  of  whom  I  speak  to  you  '  ;  the  noun 
uomo  being  taken,  in  this  case,  individually,  and  the 
article  used  to  express  the  man  spoken  of  : 

GLI  UOMINI  sono  rfeLLE  FEjvi-     men  are  the  head  of  women ; 
MINE  capo, 

GLI  udiviiNi  di  questa  terra  the  people  of  this  land  will  rise 
si  leverdnno  a  romore,  in  an  uproar  ; 

se  L'  UOM  [con  cui  tu  parli]  if  the  man  [with  ivhom  thou 
ti  faccia  liberamente  do,  speakest]  will  do  for  thee 
che  H  tuo  dir  prega,  ancor  freely,  what  thou  entreatest, 
ti  pidccia  di  dime,  do  thou  further  be  pleased 

to  declare  to  us. 


USE  OF   ARTICLES. 


441 


When  the  noun  is  sufficiently  determined  by  the 
nature  of  the  thing,  or  by  the  circumstances  of  the  case, 
the  article  is  generally  suppressed  ;  as, 

cosl    CAVALLI,    UOMINI  fur    thus  horses  and  men  were  vic- 


vittime, 

quivi    SOSPIRI,    PIANTI,    ed 
ALTI  GUAI  risondvan, 

SONI,  CANTI,    VEST1R,    GIUO- 

CHI,  VIVANDE,  quanta  pub 
cuor  pensdr,  pud  chieder 
bocca, 


tims ; 

there  sighs,  lamentations,  and 
loud  moans  resounded  ; 

music,  singing,  dresses,  games, 
viands,  all  that  the  heart  can 
think  of,  and  all  that  the  pal- 
ate can  desire. . 


The  article  is  also  suppressed  when  the  noun  is  used 
as  a  mere  sign  of  qualification  of  the  objects  expressed. 
This  is  generally  the  case, 

First,  when  the  noun  is  preceded  by  the  verb  essere, 
6  to  be  ' ;  as, 


ERANO     UOMINI    6     FEMMINE 

di  grosso  ingegno, 
tu9  che  SE'  UOMO,  dovresti  sa- 
pvre  delle  cose  del  mondo, 


they  were  men  and  women  of 
dull  understanding  ; 

thou,  who  art  a  man,  ought  to 
be  acquainted  with  the  af- 
fairs of  the  world. 


Secondly,  when  the  noun  is  preceded  by  one  of  the 
prepositions,  0,  di^  da,  con,  in,  per,  senza  ;  as, 


uscirono  fuochi  di  sotterra, 
che  si  appresero  A  CAMPI, 

viLLE,  CASALI, 

si  nutrlsce  DI  PANE  e  D'  Ac- 

QUA, 

morsi  DA  PULCT,  DA  MOSCHE, 

0  DA  TAFANI, 

CON  BE'  MOTTI,  €  CON  RI- 
SPOSTE  PRONTE, 

venne  crescendo  IN  ANNI,  IN 

PERSONA,  ed  IN  BELLEZZA, 

PER  PAURA  d'  altrui)  e  per 
servdre  la  miafdma, 


there  issued  flames  from  under 
the  earth,  which  set  fields, 
villas,  and  hamlets  on  fire  ; 

he  feeds  on  bread  and  water ; 

bitten  by  fleas,  by  flies,  or 
gadflies  ; 

with  witty  sayings,  and  prompt 
replies  ; 

grew  up  in  years,  in  stature, 
and  in  beauty ; 

for  fear  of  other  people,  and 
also  to  preserve  my  fame  ; 


442 


SYNTAX. 


cosl  penserd  di  fare,  SENZA     I  shall  do  so,  without  fail. 
FALLO, 

Thirdly,  in  comparisons  of  equality,  when  the  noun  is 
preceded  by  the  adverb  come,  '  as,'  'like ' ;  as, 

non  COME  UOMINI,  ma  quasi    they  died   not  like   men,  but 


COME  BE  s  TIE  morivano, 
pareva  che  ruggisse  COME 
LEONE,  e  beldsse  COME  PE- 
CORA,  e  ragghidsse  COME 
ASINO, 


almost  like  beasts ; 
he  appeared  to  roar  like  a  lion, 
to  bleat  like  a  sheep,  and  to 
bray  like  an  ass. 


When  a  noun  is  employed  in  an  indeterminate  sense 
the  article  is  never  used  ;  as, 

qudl  che  tu  sii,  od  OMBRA  od    whatever  thou  art,  whether  a 

shadow  or  a  living  man ; 

now  I  am  not  a  man,  man  I  was 

formerly ; 

pdrmi  vedere  DONNE  e  DON-  I  seem  to  see  ladies  and  dam- 
sels, and  they  are  firs  and 
beeches. 


UOMO    CERTO, 

?? on  UOM,  UOMO  giafui, 


ZELLE,     6 
FAGGI, 


50710      ABETI      6 


The  article  is  also  never  used  when  a  noun  is  preceded 
by  a  demonstrative  or  indefinite  pronoun  ;  as, 

this  little  boy  began  to  be  fa- 
miliar ; 

how  do  you  say  those  words  ? 


QUESTO    GARZONCELLO  5    IU- 

comincio  a  dimesticdre, 

come  dile  voi   COTESTE  PA- 
ROLE? 


INFER- 
MITA  trasporldre, 

COn      OGNI       SOLLECITtfDINE, 
COn     OGNI    INGEGNO,    C    COH 

OGNI  ARTE  si  proccdcciano 
di  riducere  a  nulla  la  Cri- 
stidna  religione, 


it  appeared  to  communicate 
that  same  sickness  ; 

they  strive  with  all  their  zeal, 
and  their  power,  and  their 
skill,  to  overthrow  the  Chris- 
tian religion. 


USE   OF   ARTICLES.  443 


EXCEPTION. 

When  a  noun  is  preceded  by  the  indefinite  pronoun  tittto,  the  article 
is  used  after  the  pronoun ;  as, 

Tt/TTi   i   PENSIERI,   TUTTO   Lo    all  the  thoughts,  all  the  attentions, 
STUDIO,  e  TUTTE  i,E  OPERE,          and  all  the  actions. 

The  article,  however,  is  omitted  when  tutto  is  used  as  a  mere  sign 
of  qualification ;  as, 

noi  sidm  TUTTE  FEMMINE,  we  are  all  women  ; 

tinne  il  ponte  contra  TUTTA    kept    possession    of   the   bridge 
TOSCANA,  against  all  Tuscany. 


When  several  nouns  come  together  before  or  after 
the  verb,  and  the  article  is  used  or  omitted  before  the 
first  of  them,  this  article  is  to  be  repeated  or  omitted 
before  every  other  noun  in  the  sentence  j  *  as, 

Lucio  Silla  vinse  LA  VIRTU.,  Lucius  Sylla  surpassed  Caius 
e  i  TRIONFI,  e  i  SETTE  Marius  in  courage  and  in  the 
CONSOLATI  di  Cdio  Mario,  number  of  his  triumphs  and 

consulships ; 

nt>  VECCHIEZZA,   ne  INFER-  neither  age,  nor  sickness,  nor 

MITA,  n&  PAURA  di  morte,  the  fear  of  death,  could  deter 

ddlla  sua  malvagita  V  han-  him  from  his  wicked  course. 
no  potuto  rimuovere, 

*  Examples  are  found  in  the  classics,  nevertheless,  in  which  this  rule  is  not 
rigorously  observed  j  as, 

AMORE,  e  L'  IRA.  del  re.    (Bocc.  g.  5.          Tho  love  and  anger  of  the  king, 
n.  6.) 

Crepdta  per  LO  LU'NGO  e  per  TRAVE'R-         Broken  lengthwise  and  breadthwise, 
so.     (Dant.  Pur.  9.) 

Fra  FOLTI  BOSCHI,  e  LE  RioiDE  A'LPI,         In   the  thick  woods,  and  among  the 
e  DISE'RTE    SPELONCHE.     (Bocc.    g.  3.     rugged  Alps,  and  in  lonely  caves. 
n.  10.) 

In  the  following  examples  : 

Sopravvennero  i  CONFORTI  cd  OFFE'R-  There  arrived  the  encouragements  and 
TE  de>  Ve.neiia.rn.  (Guicc.  Stor.  Ital.)  the  offers  of  the  Venitians. 

Se,  COL  NOME  su'o  e  RIPUTAZIO'NE  del  Whether,  with  his  name  and  the  rep- 
padre,  ritomdre  negli  stdti  sudi  di  Pe-  utation  of  his  father,  he  could  not  return 
ritgia  poteva,  (Mach.  Stor.  Fior.)  to  his  own  estates  at  Perugia: 

the  omission  of  le  before  offerte,  and  of  la  or  COLLA  before  ripulazidne,  are  manifest 
errors  of  grammatical  concordance. 


444 


SYNTAX. 


EXAMPLES. 


GLI  yoMiNi  SONO  DELLE  FEM- 
MINE  CAPO,  e  senza  V  or  dine  loro 
rdde  volte  riesce  alcuna  nostra 
opera  a  laudevol  fine.  (Bocc. 
Intr.) 

GLI  UOMINI  DI  QUESTA  TERRA, 

vedendo  cid,  si  LEVERANNO  A  RU- 

MOKE.       (BOCC.) 

SE  L*  UOM  TI  FACCIA  —  LlBE- 
RAMENTE  CIO,  CHE  *L,  TUO  DIR 

PREGA, — fSpirito  'ncarcerdto,  AN- 

COR  TI  PlACCIA Dl  D1RNE  COTTie 

r  dnirna  si  lega  —  In  questi  noc~ 
chi.     (Dant.  Inf.  13.) 

COSI       CAVALLI,     UOMINI      FUR 

VITTIME.     (Dav.  Ann.) 

Quivi  SOSPIRI,  FIAIVTI,  ED  ALTI 
GUAI — RISONAVAN  per  r  dere 
sinza  sttlle.  (Dant.  Inf.  3.) 

SONI,  CANTI.   VESTIR,    GIUOCHI, 

VIVANDE,  QUANTO     PUO    CUOR 

PENSAR,      PUO      CH1EDER     BOCCA. 

(Ariost.  Fur.  4.  32.) 
ERANO  UOMINI  E  FEMMINE  DI 

GROSSO  INGEGXO.      (BoCC.  Intf.) 

Tu,  CHE  SE*  UOMO,  DOVRESTI 
SAPERE  DELLE  COSE  DEL  MOJVDO. 

(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  2.) 

USCIROIV  FUOCHI  DI  SOTTERRA, 
CHE  SI  APPRESERO  A  CAMPI,  V1L- 

LE,  CASALI.    (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

Si  NUTRISCE  DI  PANE    E  D*    Ac- 

QUA.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

Non  altrimenti  fan  di  state  i 
cdni  —  Or  col  ceffo  or  c(?  pie, 
quando  son  MORSI —  0  DA  PULCI, 

O     DA      MOSCHE,      0      DA      TAFANI. 

(Dant.  Inf.  17.) 

CON  BE*  MOTTI,  E  CON  RISPOSTE 

PRONTE.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  fin.) 


Men  are  the  head  of  women, 
and  without  their  management  it 
seldom  happens  that  any  under- 
taking of  ours  succeeds  well. 

The  people  of  this  land,  seeing 
this,  will  rise  in  an  uproar. 

If  he  [this  man]  will  do  for 
thee  freely,  what  thou  entreatest, 
O  imprisoned  spirit  I  do  thou  fur- 
ther be  pleased  to  declare  to  us, 
how  in  these  gnarled  joints  the 
soul  is  tied. 

Thus  horses  and  men  were  vic- 
tims. 

There  sighs,  lamentations,  and 
loud  moans  resounded  through  the 
starless  air. 

Music,  singing,  dresses,  games, 
viands,  all  that  the  heart  can  think 
of,  and  all  that  the  palate  can  de- 
sire. 

They  were  men  and  women  of 
dull  understanding. 

Thou,  who  art  a  man,  ought  to 
be  acquainted  with  the  things  of 
the  world. 

There  issued  flames  from  under 
the  earth,  which  set  fields,  villas, 
and  hamlets  on  fire. 

He  feeds  on  bread  and  water. 


Thus  use  the  dogs  in  summer 
to  ply  now  with  their  jaws  and 
now  with  their  feet,  when  bitten 
by  fleas,  or  flies,  or  gadflies. 

With  witty  sayings,  and  prompt 
replies. 


USE    OF   ARTICLES. 


445 


La  Violdnte  VENNE  CRESCEN-  Violante  grew  up   in  years,  in 

DO  ed  IN  ANNI,  ed  IN  PERSONA,  stature,  and  in  beauty. 

ED    IN    BELLEZZA.       (BOCC.     g.    2. 

n.  8.) 

Cosi  m?  &  convenuto  fdre,   e  I  have  been  obliged  to  do  so, 

PER   PAURA   D;   ALTRUI,    E   PER  for  fear  of  other  people,  and  also  to 

SERVARE    LA    FA&iA    delta    mm  preserve  my  character. 
onesta.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  5.) 

Sol  tdnto  m  dire,  che  come  im-  I   only  tell   you  that    I    shall, 

pdsto  w*  avete,  cosl  PENSERO  DI  without  fail,   do  what  you   have 

FARE  SENZA  FALL©.    (Bocc.  g.  3.  ordered, 
n.  5.) 


They   died  riot  like   men,  but 
almost  like  beasts. 


NON    COME     COMINI,    MA    QUASI 
COME  BESTIE    MORIVANO.       (BOCC. 

Intr.) 

PAREVA   CHE   RUGGISSE  COME  He  appeared  to  roar  like  a  lion, 

LEONE,  E  BELASSE  COME  PEcoRA,  and  to  bleat  like  a  sheep,  and  to 

E  RAGGHIASSE  COME  AsiNo.  (Dial,  bray  like  an  ass. 
S.  G;eg.  m.) 


"  Miserere  di  me"  griddi  a  luit 

—  "  QUAL    CHE  TU    SII,  OD  OMBRA 

OD  VOMO  CERTO."  —  Risposemi  : 

u  NON     UOM,     UOMO       GIA      FUI." 

(Dant.  Inf.  1.) 


Ch'  io  r  ho  negli  occhi,  e  VEDER 
seco  PARMI  —  DONNE  E  DONZEL- 

LE,  €  SONO  ABETI  E  FAGGI.     (Petr. 

s.  143.) 

QUESTO      GARZONCELLO     S5     IN- 
COMINCIO      A      DIMESTICARI      COH 

questo  Federico.      (Bocc.   g.   5. 
n.  9.) 

Voi  mi  parete  uomo  di   Dio, 

COME  D1TE  VOI  COTKSTE  PAROLE  ? 

(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  1.) 

Ma  ancora  il  toccdre  i  pdnni 
ddgli  infdrmi  adoperdti  PAREVA 

siCQ  QUELLA    COTALE    INFERMITA 

neJtoccaforTRASPORTARE.  (Bocc. 
Intr.) 

38 


((  Have  mercy  on  me,"  cried 
I  to  him,  "  whatever  thou  art, 
whether  a  shadow,  or  a  living 
man."  He  answered  me  :  (i  Now 
I  am  not  a  man,  man  I  was  for- 
merly." 

Whom  I  have  before  my  eyes, 
and  I  seem  to  see  ladies  and  dam- 
sels with  her,  and  they  are  firs  and 
beeches. 

This  little  boy  began  to  be  fa- 
miliar with  this  Frederic. 


You  appear  to  me  to  be  a  man 
of  God,  how  do  you  say  those 
words  ? 

But  even  to  touch  the  clothes 
used  by  the  sick  appeared  to  com- 
municate with  it  the  same  sickness 
to  the  one  who  had  touched  them. 


446 


SYNTAX. 


E  per  qucllo  che  io 

OGNI  SOLLECITI^DINE,  CON  OGNI 
INGEGNO,  K  CON  OGNI  ARTE,  mi 

pare  che  si  PROCACCIANO  DI  RIDU- 
CERE  A  wtfLLA,  e  di  caccidre  del 
mondo  LA  CRISTIANA  RELIGIOSE. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  2.) 

TUTTI  i  PENSIERI   delle  fern- 
mine^   TtJTTO   LO   STUDIO,   TUTTE 

LE  OPERE,  a  niuna  dltra  tosa 
tiranOj  se  non  a  signoreggidre 
gli  uomini.  (Bocc.  Lab.) 

Ricordivi  che  NOI  SIAM  TtJTTE 
FEMMINE.     (Bocc.  Intr.) 

E    qu^l,  chet   solo,  —  CONTRA 

TtfTTA  TOSCANA  TENNE  IL  PONTE. 

(Petr.  Trionf.  Fam.  c.  1.) 

O'nde  LTJCIO  SILLA,  che  VINSE 

LA  VIRTU,  E  I  TRIONFI,  E  I  SETTE 
CONSOLATI  DI  CilO  MARIO,  SI 

f<?  chiamareil  Felice.     (Davan.) 
Che  uomo  e  costui,  il  qudle  NE 

VECCHIEZZA,  NE  INFERMITA,  NE 
PAURA  DI  MORTE  DALLA  StJA 
MALVAGITA.  L'  HANNO  POTUTO 
RIMUOVKRE  ? 


And  by  what  I  can  judge,  it 
seems  that  they  strive  with  all 
their  zeal,  and  their  power,  and 
their  skill  to  overthrow  the  Chris- 
tian religion,  and  to  drive  it  from 
the  face  of  the  earth. 


All  the  thoughts,  all  the  atten- 
tion, and  all  the  actions  of  women 
tend  to  nothing  but  to  rule  over 
men. 

Remember  that  we  are  all  wo- 
men. 

And  he,  who  alone  kept  pos- 
session of  the  bridge  against  all 
Tuscany. 

Therefore  Lucius  Sylla,  who 
surpassed  Caius  Marius  in  cour- 
age, and  in  the  number  of  his 
triumphs  and  consulships,  made 
himself  to  be  called  the  Happy. 

What  a  man  is  this,  whom  nei- 
ther age,  sickness,  nor  the  fear  of 
death,  could  deter  from  his  wicked 


It  has  been  said,  that  articles  are  used  before  nouns 
employed  in  a  determined  sense  ;  adjectives,  verbs,  ad- 
verbs, and  prepositions,  therefore,  when  used  as  nouns, 
in  that  sense,  require  the  article  before  them  ;  as, 

from  the  same  clear  fountain 
springs  the  bitter  and  the 
sweet ; 

to  be  born  in  high  life  is  a 
chance  and  not  merit ; 

I  should  be  happy  to  know 
[the]  when ; 

I  have  already  thought  [of  the] 


sol  d1  una  chidra  fonte  muo- 

Ve  IL  DOLCE  e   L'  AMARO, 

IL  NASCER  grdnde  e  cdso  e 

non  virtu, 
sarei  contento  di  sapere  IL 

QUANDO, 
IL  DOVE  io  ho  gib  pensdto, 


IL  COME  ho  io  ben  veditio, 


where ; 
I  have  already  seen  [the]  how  ; 


USE  OF  ARTICLES. 


447 


I.L  FERCHE  ti  diro, 

ci  e  IL  PRO,  e  'L  CONTRO, 

son  certa  deL  si, 
ciascuno  rispose  dei,  NO, 


I  will  tell  you  [the]  why  ; 
there  is  something  to  say  for 
and  against ; 

I  am  certain  of  the  affirmative  ; 
every   one    answered    in  the 
negative. 


EXAMPLES. 


COS\    SOL   D'  UNA   CIIIARA    FON- 
TE     Viva MUOVE     IL     DOLCE     E 

L'  AMARO.  (Petr.  s.  131.) 

IL      NASCER      GRANDE     E     CASO 

E   NON    VIRTU.       (Metast.   Artas. 
1.1.) 

SAREI  CONTENTO  DI  SAPERE  IL 
QUANDO.     (Petr.  s.  306.) 

IL    DOVE   lo    HO    GIA    PENSATO. 

(Bocc.  g..2.) 

IL    COME     HO    10    BEN    VEDUTO. 

(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  6.) 
Del    come  non    ti   caglia,    IL 

PERCHE    Tl    DIRO.       (BOCC.    FHOC. 

6.) 

Sicche  ci  E  IL  PRO  E  'L  CON- 
TRO.    (Gio.  Vill.) 

SON     CERTA     DEL     SI.         (BOCC. 

g.  7.  n.  7.) 

CIASCUNO    RISPOSE    DEL    NO. 
(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 


Thus,  from  the  same  clear,  living 
fount,  springs  the  bitter  and  the 
sweet. 

To  be  born  in  high  life  is  a 
chance  and  not  merit. 


I  should  be  happy  to  know  [the] 
when. 

I  have  already  thought  [of  the] 
where. 

I  have  already  seen  [the]  how. 

Do  not  trouble  thyself  about 
[the]  how,  I  will  tell  you  [the] 
why. 

So  that  there  is  something  to 
say  for  and  against. 

I  am  certain  of  the  affirmative. 


Every    one    answered    in    the 
negative. 


The  names  of  abstract  substances,  and  those  of  gems, 
metals,  liquids,  and  provisions,  require  the  article  before 
them,  when  used  in  a  generic  sense ;  as, 

laudevol  c6sa  e  ne*  principi    prudence    is    praiseworthy   in 
LA  PRUDENZA,  rulers ; 

L' 6RO,  e  LE  PERLE,  e  i  fior    the  gold,  and  the  pearls,  and 
vermigli  e  bidnchi,  the  red  and  white  flowers  ; 


448 


SYNTAX. 


meppiu  dolce  si  trova  L'  Ac-     water  and  bread  are  sweeter 
quA    e  'L    PANE,   che   LE        than  gems  and  gold. 

GEMME    e  L9  ORO, 

EXAMPLES. 


LAUDEVOL  COSA,  e  necessaria 
molto  E  NE'  PRINCIPI  LA  PRU- 
DENZA.  (Bocc.  Filoc.) 

L*  ORO,  E  LE  PERLE,  E  I  FTOR 
VERMIGLI  E  BIANCHI,^ —  Son  per 

me     acerbi    e    velenosi     stecchi. 
(Petr.  s.  38.) 

VlEPPIU  DOLCE  SI  TKOYA  L'  AC- 

QUA  t  'L   PANE,  —  CHE  LE  GEM- 
ME E  L'  ORO.    (Petr.  Trionf.  c.  6.) 


Prudence  is  praiseworthy,  and 
very  necessary  to  rulers. 

The  gold,  and  the  pearls,  and 
the  red  and  white  flowers,  are  to 
me  sharp  and  poisonous  thorns. 

Water  and  bread  are  sweeter 
than  gems  and  gold. 


The  names  of  heaven,  the  earth,  and  the  sea  ; 
of  the  cardinal  points  ;  of  the  four  quarters  of  the 
world ;  also  of  kingdoms,  provinces,  mountains,  and 
rivers,  when,  in  speaking  of  them,  we  consider  their 
whole  extent,  take  the  article  ;  — but  when  we  speak  of 
any  indeterminate  part  of  them,  they  refuse  it ;  as, 

era  stdto  tdnto  timpo  senza  he  had  been  so  long  without 

vedere  IL  CIELO,  seeing  the  heavens  [the  sky] ; 

LA  TERRA  efredda  e  secca,  the  earth  is  cold  and  dry  ; 

anddvi  super  LO  MARE, 

era    gia    L'    ORIENTE    tutto 

bianco, 
non  solamente  IL  LEVANTE, 

ma  quasi  tutto  IL  PONENTE, 

il  conosceva, 
tutta  L'  EUROPA  e  ripututa 

stretto  confine, 


thou  didst  walk  on  the  sea ; 
the  east  was  already  bright ; 


L'   ITALIA  e  stdta  piu  volte 

soggiogdta  da*  bdrbari, 
salvo  LA  MA  RCA   TRIVIGIA- 

NA, 

inghiottita  da  una   eruzione 
dei,  VESUYIO, 


not  only  the  east,  but  also  the 

freatest    part  of  the   west, 
new  him ; 
all  Europe  is  considered  to  be 

a  narrow  limit ; 
Italy  has  been  several  times 
subdued  by  barbarians  ; 

except  the  March  of  Trevigi ; 

overwhelmed   by   an  eruption 
of  Mount  Vesuvius ; 


USE  OF  ARTICLES.  449 

ilia  &  taglidta  dai^iS  ADIGE,      it  is  intersected  by  the  Adige  : 


Visse  sdnto  in  TERRA  ed  ora  He  lived  a  saint  on  earth  and 

£  in  CIELO,  now  is  in  heaven  ; 

il  cdmpo  Cristidno  passb  in  the  Christian  camp  passed  to 

ORIENTE,  the  east ; 

le  glorie  d'  ITALIA,  the  glories  of  Italy  ; 

cdme  fdlde  di  neve  in  ALPE  like    flakes   of   snow   on    the 

sinza  vento,  summit  of  the   Alps,  when 

the  wind  is  hushed  ,• 

mi  dissetdi  con  dcqua  di  SEN-  I  quenched  my  thirst  with  the 

NA,  water  of  the  Seine. 


H  LdziOj  l  [the]  Latium  ' ;  whicfe   always   takes  the   article :  and 
I' da, '  Ida  ' ;   O'ssa,  '  Ossa  ' ;  which  always  refuse  it. 


Names  of  seas  take  the  article  ;  as, 

IL  MEDITERRANEO,  L'  ADRI-    the  Mediterranean,  the   Adri- 
ATICO,  atic ; 

L'  EGEO,  the  Egean  ; 

L'  ATLANTICO,  IL  PACIFICO,    the  Atlantic,  the  Pacific. 

Names  of  cities,  islands,  and  lakes  take  no  article  ;  as, 
FIRENZE,     ROMA,     MARSI-     Florence,  Rome,  Marseilles ; 

GLIA, 

CipRO,  Scio,  CRETA,  Cyprus,  Scio,  Crete  ; 

Idgo  MAGGIORE,  di  LUGANO,    lake  Maggiore,  of  Lugano,  of 
di  COMO,  Como. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

The  following  names  of  cities  and  is/ands,  however,  take  the  article  ; 
viz.  IL  Cairo,  '  Cairo  ' }  LA  Mirdndola,  '  Mirandola ' ;  LA  Roccella, 
1  Rochelles  ' ;  L'  A'ia,  «  Aix ' ;  —  IL  Giglio,  « Giglio  ' ;  LA  Caprdia, 
1  Capraia  ' ;  LA  Gorgona,  l  Gorgona ' ;  and  perhaps  a  few  more  :  ajso 
the  names  of  those  islands  which  are  spoken  of  in  the  plural ;  as, 
LE  Baledri,  l  the  Balearic  islands ' ;  LE  Filippme,  l  the  Philippine 
islands ' ;  LE  Molucche,  *  the  Molucca  islands  ' ;  &c. 

The  names  of  the  following  islands,  may  or  may  not  take  the 
article ;  viz.  £lba  or  L'  Elba,  '  Elba ' ;  Sardegna  or  LA  Sardegna, 

38* 


450 


SYNTAX. 


*  Sardinia  ' ;  Corsica  or  LA  Corsica,  l  Corsica ' ;  Sicilia  or  LA  Sicilia, 
'  Sicily  ' ;  Inghilttrra  or  L'  Inghilttrra,  <  England ' ;  Irldnda  or 
L'  Irldnda, l  Ireland.' 

Names  of  cities,  &c.,  always  take  the  article  when  preceded  by  an 
adjective ;  as,  la  b6lla  Firinze, '  [the]  beautiful  Florence ' ;  &c. 


EXAMPLES. 


TAN-TO  TEMPO  ERA  STATO  SEN- 
ZA  VEDERE  IL  CIELO.  (BOCC, 

g.  3.  n.  8. 

LA    TERRA    E     FREDDA    E^    SEC- 

CA, —  U  acre  e  cdldo  e  umido. 
(Brun.  Tes.  1.) 

Per  la  qudl  tu  su  PER  LO  MARE 
ANDAVI.  (Dant.  Par.  24.) 

ER\     GIA     L'     ORIEN/TE     TUTTO 

BIANCO.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

NON  SOLAMENTE  IL  LEVANTE, 
MA  GIA  QUASI  TUTTO  IL  PONENTE 

perfdma  IL  CONOSCEVA.     (Bocc. 
g.  10.  n.  3.) 

TUTTA  L'  EUROPA  E  RIPUTATA 
STRETTO  CONFINE.  (Buom.) 

Voi    sapdte   che  L'   ITALIA    E 

STATA  PIU   VOLTE   SOGGlOOATA 

DA  molti  BARBARI.     (Buom.) 

Rendegli  la  Signoria  di  Lorn- 
bardia,  SALVO  LA  MARCA  TRIVI- 
GIANA.  (Gio.  Vill.  1  3.  c.  5.) 

O've  restd  un  tempo  INGHIOT- 
TITA  la  citta  d'  Ercoldno  DA  TJNA 
ERUZIONE  DEL  VESUVIO.  (Gang, 
lett.) 

ELLA  i;  TAGLIATA  DALL'  ADI- 
GE,  fiume,  come  sdij  amenissimo. 
(Algar.  lett.) 

VlSSE  SANTO  IN  TERRA,  ED  ORA 

E  IN  CIELO.     (Tass.  Ger.) 

Gia  '/  sdsto  anno  voJgea  che  'N 
ORIENT*  —  PASSO  IL  CAMPO 
CRISTIANO  all9  dlta  imprtsa. 
(Tasg.  Ger.) 


He  had  been  so  long  without 
seeing  the  sky. 

The  earth  is  cold  and  dry,  and 
the  air  warm  and  damp. 

By  which  thou  didst  walk  on 
the  sea. 

The  east  was  already  bright. 

Not  only  the  east,  but  also  the 
greatest  part  of  the  west,  knew 
him  by  reputation. 

All  Europe  is  considered  to  be 
a  narrow  limit. 

You  know  that  Italy  has  been 
several  times  subdued  by  many 
barbarians. 

He  restored  to  him  the  signiory 
of  Lombardy,  except  the  March 
of  Trevigi. 

Where  the  city  of  Herculaneum 
was  overwhelmed  by  an  eruption 
of  Mount  Vesuvius. 


It  is  intersected  by  the  Adige, 
a  very  pleasant  river,  as  thou 
knowest. 

He  lived  a  saint  on  earth,  and 
now  is  in  heaven. 

It  was  already  six  years  since 
the  Christian  camp  passed  to  the 
East  on  their  great  undertaking. 


USE  OF  ARTICLES. 


451 


LE  sotntne  GLORIE  D'  ITALIA.        The  very  great  glories  of  Italy. 
(Buom.) 

Piov6an  difuoco  dilatdtefdlde, 
—  COME  DI  NEVE  IN  ALPE  SENZA 
VENTO.  (Dant.  Inf.  14.) 


There  fell  down  dilated  flakes 
of  fire,  as  flakes  of  snow  on  the 
summit  of  the  Alps,  when  the 
wind  is  hushed. 


Ml     DISSETAI     CON     ACOJJA     DI 

SENNA.     (Vanz.) 

Ma  L*  EGEO,  ma  L'  ATLAN- 
TICO,  non  cerca  di  comprinde- 
re,  e  sa  b£ne  che  ei  non  pud. 
(Da  van.) 

Perche  FIRENZE  e  citta  domi- 
ndnte,  e  imitatrice  di  ROMA. 
(Davan.) 

MARSEILLES  [MARSIGLIA],  sic- 
come  voi  sapete,  e  antica  e  nobi- 
lissima  citta.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  3.) 

Guiscdrdo,  re  di  CIPRO.  (Eriz. 
Giorn.) 

Che  le  bidde  —  Ogri  isola  di 
Gricia  a  lui  sol  miita,  —  E  Scio 
pietrdsa  gli  vendemmi  e  GRETA. 
(Tass.  Ger.  1.  78.) 

Vidggio  a?  tre  Idghi :  MAG- 
GIORE,  DI  LUGANO,  e  DI  COMO. 
(Amor.) 

II  conte  Guido  dem*.  MIRAN- 
DOLA,  mosso  ddlla  munificenza 
di  Lorenzo,  pose  la  sua  abita- 
zione  in  Firenze.  (Mach.  S(or. 
Fior.  1.  8.) 

Muovasi  LA  CAPRAIA  «  LA 
GORGONA.  (Dant.  Inf.  33.) 


I  quenched  my  thirst  with  the 
water  of  the  Seine. 

But  he  does  not  try  to  compre- 
hend the  Egean  sea;  and  the 
Atlantic  ocean,  and  he  knows  he 
cannot. 

Because  Florence  is  a  powerful 
city,  and  the  rival  of  Rome. 

Marseilles  is,  as  you  know,  an 
ancient  and  very  noble  city. 

Guiscard,  king  of  Cyprus. 

That  every  island  of  Greece 
should  reap  corn,  and  stony  Scio 
and  Crete  should  make  wine  for 
him  alone.  . 

A  journey  to  the  three  lakes  : 
Maggiore,  of  Lugano,  and  of  Co- 
mo. 

Count  Guido  of  Mirandola, 
pleased  with  the  munificence  of 
Lorenzo,  fixed  his  residence  in 
Florence. 


May  Capraia  and  Gorgona  rise 
from  their  foundations. 


Dio  or  Iddio,  l  God  ' ;  and  names  of  persons,  when 
used  in  their  full  meaning,  never  take  the  article  ;  but, 
when  we  limit  their  signification  to  designate  a  particu- 
lar object,  they  always  take  the  article  ;  as, 

Dio  ct  mdndi  bene,  God  help  us  ; 


452  SYNTAX. 

IDDIO  dispdse  altramente,  God  ordained  otherwise  ; 

APOLLO  fu  veduto  saetlare  il  Apollo  was  seen  shooting  the 

Pitdne,  serpent  Python ; 

ov'   ERCOLE    segno    li   suoi  where  Hercules  fixed  his  boun- 

rigudrdi,  daries ; 

OMERO,  VIRGILIO,  e  DANTE,  Homer,  Virgil,  and  Dante: 


IL  Dio  dttla  guerra,  The  God  of  war; 

L'  APOLLO  del  Belvedere,  the  Apollo  of  Belvedere  ; 

L'  ERCOLE  Farnese,  the  Farnese  Hercules  ; 

L'  OMERO  Ferrarese,  the  Ferrarese  Homer  [Ariosto]. 

Agreeably  to  this  principle    the  nouns  Diot   Iddw,  in  the  plural, 
when  speaking  of  the  deities  of  the  heathens,  take  the  article ;  as, 

se  fdsse  piaciuto  dGLi  DEI,          if  it  had  pleased  the  Gods  ; 
GL'  iDofi,  lif  qudli  governano     the  Gods,  who  govern  our  affairs. 
le  nostre  cose, 


They  take  also  the  article,  when  they  are  preceded 
by  an  adjective  ;  as, 

L'  onnipotente  Dio,  the  almighty  God  ; 

IL  grdnde  ACHILLE,  the  great  Achilles; 

L'  infelice  PRIAMO,  the  unhappy  Priamus. 

They  take  the  article  when  they  are  used  to  desig- 
nate persons  familiarly  or  publicly  known  ;  as, 

ckiamdto  IL  GERBINO,  having  called  Gerbino  ; 

aveva  amdta  LA  NINETTA,        he  had  loved  Ninetta ; 
LA  MADDALENA,  LA  MARI-     Magdalen,  Marianna. 

ANNA, 

But  when  names  of  persons  are  preceded  by  one  of 
the  nouns  Sere,  '  Sir ' ;  Messere,  '  Master '  ;  maestro, 
'  master  ' ;  Don,  ;  Don  ' ;  Donna,  '  Donna  ' ;  Frate, 
'  Friar  or  Brother  ' ;  Santo  or  Santa,  '•  Saint ' ;  they  re- 
fuse  the  article  ;  as, 

SER  Brunitto,  Sir  Brunetto  ; 


USE  OF  ARTICLES.  453 

MESBER  Gugliilmo,  Mr.  William  ; 

MAESTRO  Mdmo,  master  Adamo  ; 

DON  Pietro,  Don  Pedro; 

.  FRATE  AlUrlo,  Friar  Albert; 

SAN  Maurizio,  Saint  Maurice  ; 

SANTA  Verididna,  Saint  Veridiana. 

Names  of  persons,  preceded  by  the   nouns   Papa,  '  Pope ' ;   Re, 
1  King,'  are  better  used  without  the  article ;  as, 

Papa  Giovdnni,  Re  Carlo,  Pope  John,  King  Charles. 


Surnames  or  family  names  take  no  article,  when  pre- 
ceded by  names  of  persons ;  but  when  they  are  used  to 
specify  a  person  of  such  a  family,  also  when  we  speak 
of  celebrated  men,  and  when  they  are  preceded  by  a 
title,  the  article  is  used  ;  as, 

Guglielmo  Rossiglidne,  Gu-    William  Rossiglione,  William 
glielmo  Guardastdgno,  Guardastagno ; 

IL  GUARDASTAGNO,  IL  Ros-     Guardastagno,  Rossiglione  ; 

SIGLIONE, 
IL  PETR^RCA,  IL  BOCCAC-    Petrarch,  Boccaccio; 

CIO, 

IL  cardindl  MAZZARINI,  cardinal  Mazzarini. 

Names  of  the  months  take  no  article  ;  as, 

il  sesto  di  GENNAIO  fu  V  dsce,    the  sixth  of  January  was  for 

the  axe  ; 

il  primo  e  JZ  secondo  di  AGO-     the  first  and  second  of  August 
STofuron  le  marietta,  were  for  the  hammers. 

Names  of  the  days  may  be  used  with  or  without  the 
article ;  as, 

MERCOLEDI,  dopo  desindre,       Wednesday,  after  dinner  ; 
IL  SABATO  mattina  si  parti    on  Saturday  morning   he  left 
di  Firenze,  Florence. 


454 


SYNTAX. 


EXAMPLES. 


Entrdndo  dentro  disse  :  "  Dio 
ci  M!NDI  BENE  ;  chi  e  qu&?" 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  2.) 

IDDIO,  giusto  riguarddtore  de- 
gli  altrui  m6riti,  ALTRAMENTE 
DISPOSE.  (Bocc.  g.  2  n.  8.) 


Chi    FU    verame'nte 
APOLLO    SAETTARE    IL    velenoso 
PITONE.     (Davan.) 

foei  compdgni  eravdm  vecchi 
e  tdrdi,  —  Qudndo  venimmo  a 
quella  foce  stre'tta,  —  Ov'  ERCO- 

LE      SEGNO      LI      SUOI      RIGUARDI. 

(Dant.  Inf.  26.) 

OMERO,  VIRGILIO,  E  DANTE 
han  lascidto  n6lle  pitture  loro 
molto  di  che  fare  alV  immagina- 
tiva  del  leggitore.  (Fosc.) 

IL    Dfo   DELLA  GUERRA.       (Ce- 

sar.) 


L'  APOLLO  DEL  BELVEDERE. 
(Miliz.  Art.  Dis.) 

LJ  OMERO  FERRARESE.  (Me- 
last,  lett.) 

SE    AGLI    DEI  FOSSE    P1ACIUTO. 

(Bocc.  Filoc.) 

GL'  IDDII,  LI  QUALI  dispongo- 
no  e  GOVERNAN  noij  e  LE  NOSTRE 
COSE.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

L'  ONNIPOTENTE  Dio,  e  mise- 
ricordioso  giudice,  nasconde  dal 
suo  giudicio  i  nostrifdlli.  (Pass. 
Ver.  Pen.) 

E   Vldi  5L  GRANDE    ACHILLE,  - 

Che  con  amore  alf'ine  combattto. 
(Dant.  Inf.  5.) 

//  qudle  mdlto    AMATA    AVEVA 

LA    NlNETTA.      (BOCC.  g.  4.  D.  3.) 


On  entering  said  :  "  God  help 
us  ;  who  is  here  ?  " 

God,  the  just  rewarder  of  peo- 
ple's merit,  ordained  otherwise. 

For  Apollo  was  really  seen 
shooting  the  venomous  serpent 
Python. 

I  and  my  companions  were  tar- 
dy with  age,  when  we  came  to 
the  strait  pass  where  Hercules 
fixed  his  boundaries. 


Homer,  Virgil,  and  Dante  have 
left  in  their  pictures  much  to  do 
for  the  imagination  of  the  reader. 

The  God  of  War. 

The  Apollo  of  Belvedere. 

The  Ferrarese  Homer  [Ariosto]. 

If  it  had  pleased  the  Gods. 

The  Gods,  who  dispose  of,  and 
govern,  us  and  our  affairs. 

The  almighty  God,  and  merciful 
judge,  conceals  our  sins  from  his 
judgment. 

And  I  saw  the  great  Achilles 
who  fought  with  love  to  the  end. 


Who  had  ardently  loved  Niuet- 


ta. 


USE  OF  ARTICLES. 


455 


E  chindndo  la  ruano  dlla  sua 
fdccia  —  Risposi :  l(  Siete  v6i  qulj 
SER  BRUNETTO  ?  "  (Darit.  Inf. 
15.) 

MESSER  GUGLIELMO  Rossiglio- 
ne  dcL  a  mangidre  dlla  moglie  sua 
il  cuore  di  ME^SER  GUGLIELMO 
Guardastdgno.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  9.) 

Di88*  egli  a  noi :  ««  Guarddte, 
ed  attendee  —  Alia  miseria  del 
MAESTRO  ADAMO."  (Dant.  Inf. 
30.) 

Torto  farei  dlla  infinita  virtu 
delV  eccellentissimo  DON  PIETRO 
de  Toledo.  (Bern.  Tass.  lett.) 

FRATE  ALBERTO  d&  a  vedere 
ad  una  donna,  che  V  dgnolo  Ga- 
bricle (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  2.) 

Con  una  bolla  istitui  V  ordine 
di  SAN  MAURIZIO.  (Den.  Riv. 
Ital.) 

Pareva  pur  SANTA  VERIDIANA, 
che  da  a  beccdre  dlle  serpi.  (Bocc. 
g.  5.  n.  10.) 

Morto  PAPA  GIOVANNI,  e  non 
avendo  potuto  RE  CARLO  otteni- 
re  che  si  fosse  rifdtto  un  Pdpa 
Franzese.  (Gian.  Stor.  Giv.  Nap. 
1.  20.  c.  5.) 

IL  GUARDASTAGNO  rispose,  che 
senzafdllo  il  di  seguente  andrdb- 
be  a  cendr  con  lui.  IL  Rossi- 
GLIONE,  udendo  questo,  pensd  il 
timpo  esser  venuto  di  poterlo  uc~ 
cidere.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  5  ) 

U  esquisitezza  dei*  PETRARCA, 
dltro  nume  dilla  nostra  volgdr 
poesia.  (Buom.) 

U  Decameron  dei,  BOCCACCIO 
e  di  gran  lunga  il  miglior  libro, 
che  abbidmo  infdtto  d*  eloqucnza 
Italidna.  (Den.  Sag.  Letter.) 


And  inclining  my  hand  towards 
his  face,  I  answered  :  {<  Sir  Bro- 
netto,  are  you  here  ?  " 

Mr.  William  Rossiglione  give? 
to  his  wife  the  heart  of  Mr. 
William  Guardastagno  to  eat. 

And  he  said  to  us  :  "  Regard 
attentively  the  woe  of  master 
Adamo." 


I  should  do  wrong  to  the  im- 
mense merit  of  the  most  excellent 
Don  Pedro  de  Toledo. 

Friar  Albert  gives  a  woman  to 
understand,  that  the  angel  Gabriel 

With  a  bull  he  instituted  the 
order  of  Saint  Maurice. 


She  seemed  Saint  Veridiana, 
feeding  the  serpents. 

Pope  John  having  died,  and 
King  Charles  having  not  been 
able  to  obtain  that  a  French 
Pope  should  be  re-elected. 

Guardastagno  answered,  that  he 
would  without  fail  sup  with  him 
the  following  night.  Rossiglione, 
hearing  this,  thought  the  time  of 
murdering  him  was  come. 

The  exquisite  elegance  of  Pe- 
trarch, another  god  of  our  Italian 
poetry, 

The  Decameron  of  Boccaccio 
is  by  far  the  best  book  which  we 
have  in  point  of  Italian  elequence. 


45(5 


SYNTAX. 


IL  CARDINAL  MAZZARINI,  Itali- 
dno  ancor  esso.  (Den.  Riv.  Ital. 
I.  23.  c.  12.) 

Se  IL  SESTO   DI  GENNAIO  ru 

L'  ASCE,  €  IL  PRIMO  E  IL  SECONDO 
D*  ACOSTO  FtTRONO  LE  MARTELLA. 

(Davan.  Stor.) 

MERCOLEDI,  DOPO  DESINARE, 
assalirono  da  piii  pdrti  qutgli  del 
Idto  dtgli  Mimari.  (Gio.  Vill. 
c.  20.) 

Venuta  in  Firdnze  la  novella 
il  Venerdi  s6ra,  IL  SABATO  MAT- 
TINA  Mess6r  Giambertdldo  si 
PARTI  DI  FIREISTZE.  (Gio.  Vill. 
1.  7.  c.  31.) 


Cardinal  Mazzarini,  an  Italian 
also. 

If  the  sixth  of  January  was  for 
the  axe,  and  the  first  and  second 
of  August  were  for  the  hammers. 

Wednesday,  after  dinner,  they 
assailed  from  different  quarters 
those  who  sided  with  the  Adimari. 


The  news  having  reached  Flor- 
ence on  Friday  evening,  Messer 
Giambertaldo  left  Florence  on  Sat- 
urday morning. 


A  noun  preceded  by   an   adjective  takes  the   article 
before  this  adjective  ;  as, 

IL  GRAN  mdle,  IL  GRAN  pec-  the  great  evil,  the  great  sin, 
cdto,  IL  GRAN  fdtto  adopt-  the  great  crime  committed 
rdti  da  Gisippo,  by  Gisippus. 

Nouns  also   take   the  article  when  preceded  by   an 
ordinal  number,  or   a  possessive  pronoun  ;  *  but  they 


*  This  rule  with  regard  to  possessive  pronouns  has  not  been  strictly  followed  by 
the  early  writers,  as  may  be  seen  by  the  following  examples : 

Com'  c'  vedrdnno  quel  volume  aperto,  As  soon  as  they  shall  see  that  book 
—  JYel  qual  si  scrivon  tittti  suoi  DISPRE'-  open,  in  which  all  their  sins  are  written. 
01.  (Dant.  Par.  19.) 

Pdssan  VOSTRI  TRIONFI  e  VOSTRE 
POMPE.  (Petr.  Trionf.  Temp.) 

Quesla  tra  di  D'to  a  NOSTRA  CORREZI- 
ONE  manddta  sdpra  i  mort&li.  (Bocc. 
Intr.) 


Your  triumphs  and  your  pomp  pa»s 
away. 

This  wrath  of  God  sent  down  upon 
mortals  for  our  correction. 


Besides  there  are  in  Italian  several  modes  of  expression,  such  as  a  mia  posta,  '  at 
r  pleasure  ' ;  in  sito  ndme,  *  in  his  name  ' ;  cdntra  sua  vdglia,  '  against  his  will '  ; 
;.,  in  which,  by  a  peculiarity  of  language,  the  article  is  elegantly  suppressed;  as, 

fo  non  posso  far  caldo  e  freddo  A  M!A         I  cannot  make  warm  and  cold  weather 
POSTA.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  4.)  at  my  pleasure. 

Qutsti  sgrida,  IN  so'o  NOME,  il  trdppo         This   one   blames,  in  his   (Godfrey's) 
ardire.     (Tass.  Ger.  3.  53.)  name,  their  excessive  daring. 

"J'jo,  CONTRA  SU'A  VOGLI A,  altrdnde  'I         And  I  guide  him  elsewhere  against 

his  will. 


y 
men*.    (Petr.  8.  39.) 


USE  OF  ARTICLES.  457 

refuse   it  when  they  are  preceded  by  a   demonstrative, 
interrogative,  or  indefinite  pronoun  ;  as, 

IL  VENTESIMO  Canto,  the  twentieth  Canto  ; 

LA  PRIMA  canzone,  the  first  song  ; 

LA  MIA  pdtria,  my  country  ; 

IL  VOSTRO  amico,  your  friend  : 


QUESTI  sospiri,  these  sighs  ; 

QUAL  paura  ?  what  fear  ; 

QUALUNQUE  ^LTRA  fdnte,  any  other  woman  ; 

UNA  COT!L  mezzanita,  such  a  middling  course. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


When   the  nouns  are  preceded  by  the  indefinite  pronouns,  uno, 

'one';   dltro,  'other';  st6sso  or  meddsimo,  'same';  they  are  used 
with  the  article  ;  as, 

L'  UNA  e  L'  ALTRA  mdno,  the  one  and  the  other  hand  ; 


MEDESIMA  citth,  neL  ME-     in  the  same  city,  in  the  same  day. 
DESIMO  giorno, 


Sometimes  the  noun,  which  is  preceded  by  an  ordinal 
number  or  a  possessive  pronoun,  is  understood  ;  as, 

non  stringendosi  nelle  vi-  not  confining  themselves  in 
vdndc  quanta  i  pRiMi,  ne  eating  like  the  former,  nor 
nel  here  quanta  i  SECONDI,  in  drinking  like  the  latter ; 

soma  d?  altri  omeri  che  ddi  a  burden  for  stronger  shoul- 
TUOI,  ders  than  thine. 

When  the  noun,  which  is  preceded  by  a  possessive 
pronoun,  is  one  of  those  which  express  kindred  or  rela- 
tion, quality  or  rank,  and  this  noun  is  in  the  singular 
number,  the  article  is  suppressed  ;  *  but,  if  the  noun  is 
in  the  plural,  the  article  is  always  used ;  as, 

*  Notwithstanding  this,  instances  are  often  found  in  excellent  writers,  in  which 

39 


458  SYNTAX. 

MIO  FIGLIO  ovj  £?  where  is  my  son? 

suo  PADRE  cijece  mdlti  dan-  his  father  did  us  many  injuries : 

ni, 

MIA  MADRE,  un  frdtello  mi-  my  mother,  a  younger  brother, 

ndre,  ed  io,  and  I ; 

mtna  teco  TUA  MOGLIE,  take  thy  wife  with  thee  ; 

il  nobile  dtto  di  Filippo,  usdto  the  noble  action  which  Philip 

a  salute  di  suo  MARixo,  had   done  for  the  safety   of 

her  husband  ; 

il  diro  a  MIO  FRATELLO,  I  will  tell  it  to  my  brother  ; 

VOSTRA    SORELLA,    VOSTRA  your  sister,  your  aunt ; 

Z1A, 

SUA  ECCELLENZA  It  bacio  la  His     Excellency    kissed     her 

raano,  hand ; 

stidmo  assdi  btne   con  SUA  we  stand  very  well  with  His 

ALTEZZA,  Highness ; 

gV  interessi  di  SUA  MAESTA,  His  Majesty's  interests  : 


Guarded  nel   viso  di    MIEI    I  looked  upon  the  countenance 
FIGLIUOLI,  of  my  sons; 

ringrdzio  LE  LORO  SIGNORIE,    I  thank  your  Lordships. 

EXCEPT 
When  the  noun  is  separated  from  the  pronoun  by  an  adjective 


the  article  is  used  before  nouns  of  kindred  and  quality  in  the  singular,  preceded 
bj  possessive  pronouns  j  as, 

E'cco  IL  TU'O   FiGLio.    (Guar.  Past.  Behold  thy  son. 
Fid.  1.) 

Arete  Cirendica,  che  dopo  la  morte  dei.  Arete  of  Cyrene,  who,    after  her  fa- 

su'o  PA'DRE,  resse  la  scudla.     (Firenz.  thor's  death,  directed  the  school, 
lett.) 

Veder   pudi   con  quanta  affetto,  —  La  Thou  mightest  see  with  what  affection 

vtte  s'  avviticchiaaL  su'o  MAKiro.  (Tass.  the  vine  entwines  itself  round  her  hus- 

Amint.  1.  1.)  band  [the  oak]. 

Jtcendo  riguardo  <ILLA  VOSTRA  ECCEL-  Paying  regard  to  your  Excellency. 
LE'WZA.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 

jJrrfiro  di  p6rgere  i  prieghi  miei  <ILLA  I  will   take   the  liberty  of  advancing 

VOSTRA  ALTE'ZZA.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  5.)  my  prayers  to  your  Highness. 

LA  SU'A  MAESTa.     (Dav.)  His  Majesty. 


USE   OF   ARTICLES.  459 


placed  between  them  ;  and  when  it  is  preceded  by  the  pronoun  lore, 
1  their ' ;  in  which  cases  the  article  is  used  even  in  the  singular ;  as, 

AL,  mio  DISPIETATO  pddre,  to  my  cruel  father ; 

LA   LORO  figlia,  LA  LORO  so-     their  daughter,  their  sister. 
rella, 


The  article  is  also  suppressed,  when  the  noun,  pre- 
ceded by  a  possessive  pronoun,  is  also  preceded  by  a 
numeral  adjective,  or  a  demonstrative  or  indefinite  pro- 
noun ;  as, 

con  QUESTO  suojigliuolo,  with  this  son  of  hers  ; 

QTJALCHE  suo  amico,  some  of  his  friends; 

OGNI  mio  ufficio,  all  my  obligations  ; 

NITJN  vostrofdtto,  none  of  your  business; 

CERTI  suoi  amid,  certain  friends  of  his. 

The  relative  pronoun  quale,  c  which,'  when  preceded 
by  its  antecedent,  requires  the  article  ;*  but  it  refuses  the 
article  when  it  is  used  in  the  signification  of  chi,  '  he 
who ' ;  when  it  expresses  doubt,  or  when  it  expresses 
similitude  ;  as, 

SETTE  GIOVANI  DONNE,  i  no-    seven   young    women,  whose 
mi  deLLE    quAn   raccon-        names  I  would  relate ; 
terei, 

QUAL  piu  ginte  possiede,  he  who  has  most  people  [sol- 

diers] ; 

QUAL  guerriero  Cristidno,         like  a  Christian  warrior ; 
quAL  piu  vi  place  dtlle  due,      which  of  the  two  you  like  best. 

The  words  signore  or  signora,  when  used  substan- 
tively  in  the  signification  of  the  master  or  mistress  of  a 

*  In  poetry,  however,  the  article  is  often  suppressed ;  as, 

0  oivA  LU'CS,  Q.UA'LE,  in  tre  persdne  O  divine  light,  who,  one  substance  in 

—  Ed  iina  essenza,  il   del  governi  e  'I  three  persons,  governest  Heaven  and  the 

mtndo.     (Bocc.  Amet.  98.)  world. 

E  quei  ;  "  Di   rado  —  Incdntra,"  mi  And  he  replied   to  me  :    "  It  seldom 

risptfse,  "  che  di  wUi  —  Fdccia  'L  cAjMMi-  happens,  that  any  one  of  us  makes  the 

NO  alciin,  per  O^UA'LE  io  vddo."     (Dant.  journey  which  I  am  going." 
Inf,  9.) 


460 


SYNTAX. 


thing,  take  the  article;  but  when  used   adjectively  as 

titles  or  epithets,  they  take  the  article,  when  we  jpeofc 

o/,  and  they  refuse  it,  when  we  speak  to,  a  person  ;  as, 

IL  SIGNORE  [di  qu6sta  casa]  the  master  [of  this  house]    is 

e  uscito,  gone  out; 

LA  siGtftfRA  £  occupdta,  the  mistress  is  engaged  ; 

v6i  qul  siite  IL  siowdRE,  you  are  the  master  here  ; 

IL  siGNdR  Cdrlo  Ddti  ed  IL  Mr.  Charles  Dati  and  Mr.  An- 

SIGN^R  Andrea  Cavalcdnti,  drew  Cavalcanti ; 

IL    siGNdR    Cardindle   Spl-  Cardinal  Spinola ; 

nola, 

IL    siGN6R    marchese  e   LA  the  marquis  and  the  countess  : 

SIUNOKA  contdssa, 


O  Mr.  Achilles ! 

vedtte,     siGNdRi,    com?    igli  see,  sirs,  how  he  had  left  me  ; 

m'  avea  lascidto, 

SIGNORI  e  d6nne,  v6i  dovite  gentlemen    and     ladies,    you 

sapere,  must  know. 


Agreeably  to  this  rule,  the  words  signore  and  signdra,  take  the 
article ,  when  used  to  express  '  our  Lord'  [God],  and  *  our  Lady' 
[the  Virgin]  ;*  and  refuse  it,  when  used  with  the  adverbs  si, «  yes  ' ; 
and  no  or  non, f  no  ' ;  in  affirmative  and  negative  phrases ;  as, 


IL  SIGNORE,  Jesu, 

LA  SIGWORA  delle  Grdzie, 

SlGNOR  81, 
NON  SlGNORA, 


our  Lord,  Jesus  ; 
our  Lady  of  the  Graces  ; 
yes,  Sir ; 
no,  Madam. 


*  In  the  following  instances   the  article  is  suppressed  before  the  word  signdre, 
preceded  by  the  possessive  pronoun  ndstro  ; 

i:  iii.-(  'ni  le  chidvL 


To  whom  our  Lord  [Christ]  loft  the 
keys. 

What  treasures  did  our  Lord  demand 
of  $t.  Peter,  before  he  put  the  keys  into 
se  le  chitivi  in  sua  balla  1   (Dant.  Inf.  19.)      his  charge  ? 

Si  d&e  6ssere  lo  cavaU6re  astindnte,  e  A  knight  ought  to  be  abstinent,  and 
digiun&re  il  fencrdi,  in  rimem.brd.ma  di  ought  to  fust  on  Friday,  in  commemora- 
WOSTUO  SiGwdKJB.  (Nov.  Ant.  51.)  tion  of  [the  death  of  J  our  Lord, 


A  cui  N6sTRO  S 
(Dant.  Par.  24.) 

Qudnto  tesdro  v6lle  —  N^STRO  Siowd- 
:  ///  /ir'nnu  da  San  Pidtro —  Che  ponds- 


USE  OF   ARTICLES. 


461 


Finally,  there   are  several   expressions  in  Italian,  in 
which  the  article  is  always  suppressed ;  as, 

anddre  A  C^SA,  A  PALAGIO     to    go    home,  to  court,  to  a 

wedding,     to     a     feast,    to 
church  ; 

to  live  or  to  be  at  home,  in  the 
shop,  in  the  square,  in  the 
city,  in  the  country  ; 


Or  A  CORTE,  A  NOZZE,  A 
FESTA,  A  CHIESA, 

stare  or  essere  IN  CASA,  IN 

BOTTEGA,  IN  PIAZZA,  IN 
CITTA,  IN  CAMPAGNA  Or 
CONTADO, 

uscire  DI  CASA,  DI  CITTA,  DI 

CONTADO, 

aver    FAME,    SETE,    C!LDO, 

FREDDO, 

avere   IN  MA.NO,  mettere    IN 
BOCCA, 


to  go  out  of  the  house,  of  the 
city,  of  the  country  ; 

to  be  hungry,   thirsty,  warm, 
cold  ; 

to  have  in  hand,  to  put  into 
one's  mouth  ; 


mendre  A  SPAS  so,  tenir  TA-  to  take  one  to  walk,  to  give  a 

VOLA,  dinner ; 

correr  Riscmo, render  CONTO,  to  run  a  risk,  to  give  account ; 

dare  ORDINE,  prestdr  FEDE,  to  give  orders,  to  give  credit. 


EXAMPLES. 


Questo    e    dunque    IL    GRAN 

MALE,  IL  GRAN  PECCATO,  IL  GRAN 
FATTO  ADOPERATO    DA     GlSIPPO? 

(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

Di  nuova  pena  mi  convien  far 
versiy  —  E  dar  materia  CL  VEN- 

T^SIMO     CANTO  —  D^LLA     PRIMA 

CANZONE,    ch'    e   dey  sommersi. 
(Dant.  Inf.  20.) 

LA  MIA  PATRIA  mi  ha  nutri- 
cdto  saviamente.  (Am.  Ant.  d. 
2.  r.  6.) 

Fo  vi  voglio  dire  ciocche  IL 
VOSTRO  AMICO  mi  fecc  stamdne. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

Che  fdnno  omdi  meco  QUEST i 
SOSPIRI  ?  (Petr.  c.  33.) 

Qudli     leggi,    qudli     mindcce, 

QUAL  PATERA  ?    (BoCC.  g.  10.  D.  8.) 

39* 


Is  this,  then,  the  great  evil,  the 
great  sin,  the  great  crime  com- 
mitted by  Gisippus  ? 

I  must  write  verses  respecting 
new  torments,  to  be  the  subject  of 
the  twentieth  canto  of  the  first 
song,  which  treats  of  those  who 
are  sunk  in  woe. 

My  country  has  brought  me  up 
wisely. 

I  wish  to  tell  you  what  your 
friend  did  to  me  this  morning. 

What  do  these  sighs  do  with 
me  ? 

What  laws,  what  threats,  what 
fear  ? 


462 


SYNTAX. 


S6*  tu  piu  che  QUALUNQUE 
ALTRA  dolorosetta  FANTE.  (Bocc. 
g.  8.  n.  7.) 

Per  UNA     COTAL    MEZZANITA,  6 

per  contentdre  il  popolo,  elessero 
due  cavalitri  Frdti  Gaudenti. 
(Gio.  Vill.  1.  7.  c.  13.) 

Ed  un,  ch'  avea  L'  UNA  E  L'  AL- 
TRA MAN  mozza.  (Dant.  Inf.) 

E  NELLA  MEDES1MA  CITTA,  WfiZ 

inese  medesimo  di  Mprile,    NEL 

MEDESIMO    GIORNO    s6l,  UelV  aniW 

mille  trecento  quarantotto^da 
questa  luce  quella  luce  fu  tolta. 
(Petr.  lett.) 

Molti  dltri  servdvano  una  mez- 
zdna  via,  NON  STRINGENDOSI  NEL- 

LE  VIVAlVDE  QUANTO  I  PR1MI,  NE 
NEL  BERE  QUANTO  I  SECONDI. 

(Bocc.  Intr.) 

Che  farle  onore  —  E  D'  ALTRI 
OMERI  SOMA,CHE  DA' TUOI.  (Petr. 
s.  5.) 

Mio  FIGLIO  ov5  E,  e  perche 
non  e  teco  ?  (Dant.  Inf.  10.) 

StJO      PADRE     CI      FECE      MOLTI 

DANNI.     (Dav.  Stor.  4.) 

MlA      MADRE,     UN      FRATELLO 

MINORE,  ED  io,  sidmo  restdti 
neir  estrema  miseria.  (Soav. 
Nov.) 

To   voglio   che   tu    ti    vdda,   e 

MENI  TECO  TUA  MOGLIE.     (BOCC.) 

InteSO  IL  NOB1LE  ATTO  DI 
FlLIPPO,  USATO  A  SALUTE  DI  SUO 

MARITO.     (Giral.  lett.) 

I'O    IL    DIRO    A  Mio    FRATELLO. 

(Bocc.) 

VOSTRA  SORELLA  mi  mandd 
a  cdsa  Monna  Lessdndra,  VO- 
STRA ZIA.  (Cecch.  Dot.  2.  2.) 

E   SlJA  ECCELLENZA  LE  BACIO 

LA  MANO.     (Car.  lett.) 


Art  thou  more  than  any  other 
weeping  woman. 

To  observe  such  a  middling 
course,  and  to  satisfy  the  people, 
they  elected  two  knights  [of  the 
order  of]  Joyous  Friars. 

And  one,  who  had  the  one  and 
the  other  hand  cut  off. 

And  in  the  same  city,  in  the 
same  month  of  April,  on  the  same 
sixth  day,  in  the  year  one  thou- 
sand three  hundred  and  forty- 
eight,  that  light  (Laura)  was 
taken  from  this  light. 

Many  others  chose  a  method 
between  the  two,  not  confining 
themselves  in  eating  like  the  for- 
mer, nor  in  drinking  like  the  latter. 

For  to  do  her  honor  is  a  burden 
for  stronger  shoulders  than  thine. 

Where  is  my  son,  and  why  is  he 
not  with  thee  ? 

His  father  did  us  many  inju- 
ries. 

My  mother,  a  younger  brother, 
and  I,  have  remained  in  extreme 
misery. 


I  wish  that  thou  shouldst  go, 
and  take  thy  wife  with  thee. 

Having  heard  of  the  noble  ac- 
tion, which  Phillip  had  done  for 
the  safety  of  her  husband. 

I  will  tell  it  to  my  brother. 


Your  sister  sent  me  to  Monna 
Lessandra's,  your  aunt. 


And  His  Excellency  kissed  her 
hand. 


USE  OF  ARTICLES. 


463 


N6i    due,  secondo    che   a  me  We   two,   as  it   seems   to  me, 

pare,   STIAMO   ASSAI    BENE    CON  stand  very  well  with  His   High- 

STJA  ALTEZZA.    (Firenz.  disc.  an.  -ness. 
14.) 


GL'    INTERESSI     DI    StJA    MAE- 

STA.     (Bent,  lett.) 

Ond*  io  GUARD Ai —  NEL  viso 
A'  MIE'  FIGLIUOLI  senzafar  mot- 
to. (Dant.  Inf.  33.) 

A  che.  rispondoi  prima  che  w 

RINGRAZII      LE     LoRO     SlGNORIE. 

(Bemb.  lett.) 
Pose  Iddio  nell-  dnimo  AL  MIO 

DISPIETATO  PADRE.      (BOCC.) 

Sentendo  gli  Jlmidei,  die  Mes- 
ser  Buondelmonte  av^va  tolta 
un*  dltra  mogUe,  e  non  voUva 
LA  LORO  [FIGLIA,  SORELLA],  fu- 
rono  insieme.  (Gio.  Fior.  Pecor.) 

Monna  Giovanna  CON  QUESTO 
stjo  FIGLIUOL.O  sen*  anddva  in 
contado.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 

Per  consiglio  di  Q.UALCHE  STJO 
AMIGO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  1.) 

O  molto  amdto  cuore,  OGNI 
BIIO  UFFICIO  v6rso  te  £  fornito. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

j&SSl    di    NltJN     VOSTRO     FATTO 

s'  impdcdano.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

Gli  venne  un  messo  da  CERTI 
suoi  grandisshni  AMICI.  (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  10.) 

SETTE  GIOVANI  DONNE,  i  NOMI 
DELLE  QUALI  w  in  proprid  forma 
RACCONTEREI.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

QUAL  Pill    GENTE    POSSIEDE, 

Colui  e  piu  dd'  suoi  nemici  av- 
volto.     (Petr.  c.  29.) 

Vivesti  QUAL    GUERRIERO    CRI- 

STIANO,  e  sdnto.     (Tass.  Ger.  3. 
68.) 


His  Majesty's  interests. 

Whence  I  looked  upon  the  coun- 
tenances of  my  sons  without  say- 
ing a  word. 

To  which  I  reply,  before  thank- 
ing your  Lordships. 


God  put  into  the  mind  of  my 
cruel  father. 

The  Amidei  hearing,  that  Mes- 
ser  Buondelmonte  had  taken  an- 
other wife,  and  wished  no  longer 
for  their  [daughter,  sister]  met  to- 
gether. 

Monna  Giovanna  used  to  go 
into  the  country  with  this  son  of 
hers. 

By  the  advice  of  some  friend 
of  his. 

O  beloved  heart  [object],  all 
my  obligations  towards  thee  are 
satisfied. 

They  do  not  meddle  with  any 
of  your  business. 

He  received  a  message  from 
certain  very  great  friends  of  his. 

Seven  young  women,  whose 
names  I  would  relate  in  due  form. 


He  who  has  most  people  [sol- 
diers], is  surrounded  by  most  ene- 
mies. 

Thou  livedst  like  a  Christian 
and  holy  warrior. 


464 


SYNTAX. 


Nella  vostra  elezione  sta  di 
torre  QUAL  PIU  vi  PIACE  DELLE 
DUE,  o,se  volete,  amendue.  (Bocc. 
g,  7.  n.  2.) 

IL  SIGNORE  E  USCITO.  (Gram. 
Gram.) 

LA       SIGNOBA       E       OCCUPATA. 

(Vanz.) 

V6l     QUl     SIETE      IL      SIGNORE. 

(Bocc.) 

IL  SIGNOR  CARLO  DATI,  IL 
SIGNOR  AGOSTINO*  NELLI,  ED  IL 
SIGNOR  ANDREA  CAVALCANTI  vi 
salutano  cara?n6nte.  (Red.  lett.) 

IL  SIGNOR  CARDINALE  SPINO- 
LA,  nostro  legdto.  (Bent.  lett.  1.) 

IL  SIGNOR  maestro,  IL  SIGNOR 

MARCHESE,    E    LA     SIGNORA     CON- 
TESSA.      (Gram.  Gram.) 

O  SIGNOR  ACHILLE  !     (Guid.) 

E  d'  villdni  rivolto,  disse  : 
11  VEDETE,  SIGNORI,  COM'  EGLI 
M'  AVEA  LASCIATO  nelV  albergo 
in  arndse."  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  4.) 

SlGNORI   E  DONNE,  VOI   DOVETE 

SAPERE,  che (Bocc.  g.  6. 

n.  10.) 

Jlndctrono,  e  pensomi  che  tro- 
vdrono  IL  SIGNORE;  GESU.  (Vit. 
S.  G.  Bat.) 


E  dal  buon  uomo  furono 
SIGNORA  DELLE   GRAZIE   racco- 
manddte.     (Vit.  S.  Cater.) 

"  SIGNOR  si,  da  cavalttre" 
gridd  il  conte.  (Manz.  Prom. 
Spos.) 

NON  SIGNORA  ;  £  in  compagnia 
d1  unforesti&re.  (Gold.  Avvent.) 

Giunti  A  CASA  del  padre  d6lla 
fanciulla.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  10.) 


It  is  at  your  option  to  take 
which  of  the  two  you  like  best, 
or,  if  you  wish,  both  of  them. 

The  master  is  gone  out. 
The  mistress  is  engaged. 
You  are  the  master  here. 

Mr  Charles  Dati,  Mr.  Augustine 
Nelli,  and  Mr.  Andrew  Cavalcanti 
salute  you  affectionately. 

Cardinal  Spinola,  our  legate. 


The   master,  the'  marquis,  and 
the  countess. 


O  Mr.  Achilles ! 

And  turning  to  the  rustics,  he 
said  :  "  See,  sirs,  in  what  condi- 
tion he  had  left  me  at  the  inn." 


Gentlemen  and  ladies,  you  must 
know,  that 

They  went,  anl  I  imagine  that 
they  found  our  Lord,  Jesus. 

And  by  that  good  man  they 
were  recommended  to  our  Lady 
of  the  Graces. 

"Yes,  sir,  [it  is  the  act]  of  a 
nobleman,"  cried  out  the  count. 

No,  madam  ;  she  is  accompa- 
nied by  a  stranger. 

Having  arrived  at  the  house  of 
the  father  of  the  girl. 


USE   OF  ARTICLES. 


465 


Benche  i  cittadini  non  dlbiano 
a  far  cosa  del  mondo  A  PAL  AGIO, 
pur  talvolta  vi  vdnno.  (Bocc. 
g.  8.  n.  5.) 

N&^giti  aresti  amico  si  caro, 
per  cui  mallevadore  tu  anddssi 
A  CORTE.  (Senec.  Pist.) 

Che    A    NOZZE,  O     A    FESTA,  0  A 

CHIESA   anddr  potesse.      (Bocc. 
g.  7.  n.  5.) 

Gli    sbanditi    uscirono    quasi 

tuttl     DI     CITTA,     e    DI     CONTADO. 

(Gio.  Vill.) 


The  citizens  sometimes  go  to 
court,  though  they  have  nothing 
in  the  world  to  do  there. 


You  would  not  have  so  dear 
a  friend,  for  whom  you  would  go 
into  court  as  bail. 

That  she  might  go  to  wedding, 
or  to  a  feast,  or  to  church. 

Almost  all  the  outlaws  went 
out  of  the  city,  and  out  of  the 
country. 


When  we  wish  to  designate  a  portion  or  a  number 
of  the  objects  in  a  class,  this  may  be  done  in  four  differ- 
ent ways  : 

First,  by  naming  only  the  objects  of  the  class  ;  as, 
ho  buon  vino,  or  buoni  vini,  '  I  have  good  wine,'  or 
6  good  wines.' 

Secondly,  by  using  the  preposition  di,  cof;  as,  ho 
DI  buon  vino,  or  DI  buoni  vini,  £  I  have  [of]  good  wine,' 
or  '  [of]  good  wines.' 

Thirdly,  by  using  the  same  preposition  and  the  arti- 
cle ;  as,  ho  DEL  buon  vino,  or  DEI  buoni  vini,  *  I  have 
[of  the]  good  wine,'  or  i  [of  the]  good  wines.' 

Fourthly,  by  using  the  indefinite  pronoun  uno,  una, 
6  a'  or  £  an,'  in  the  singular;  akuni,  alcune,  '  some,'  in 
the  plural;  as,  ho  UN  buon  vino,  or  ALCUNI  buoni  vini, 
c  I  have  a  good  wine,  or  (  some  good  wines.'  Thus, 

great  beasts ; 


GRANDI  BESTIE, 
VIE  AM  Pis  SI  ME, 

DI  belli  gioitlli, 

pi  buone  merende, 

DELLE  canzoni,  e  DEJ  sonetti, 


very  extensive  walks  ; 
[of]  beautiful  jewels ; 
[of]  good  luncheons  ; 

[of  the]    songs   and   [of  the] 
sonnets  : 


466 


SYNTAX. 


DEGLI  amid,  e  DE'  servidori,     some  [of  the]  friends,  and  some 

[of  the]  servants  ; 

lor  sorella,  a  sister  of  theirs  ; 

suoi  vicini,  some  of  his  neighbours. 


EXAMPL  ES. 


GRANDI  BESTIE  hdnno  ne'  loro 
boschi.  (Dav.  Ann.) 

JEsso  av6a  VIE  AMPISSIME. 
(Bocc.) 

I'O      ho      DI       BELLI       GIOIELLI. 

(Bocc.) 

Jlvevan  da  lui  DI  BUONE  ME- 
RENDE.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

Comincid  a  fare  DELLE   CAN- 

ZONI,      E      DE'      SONETTI.        (BoCC. 

g.  7.  n.  3.) 
Fdtli    prestamente     chiamare 

DEGLI    AMICI,    E    DE*   SERV1DORI, 

(Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

Jjv6vano  TJNA  LOR  SORELLA, 
chiamdta  Lisabttta.  (Bocc.  g.  9. 
n.  5.) 

Trovollo  con  ALCUNI  suoi  vici- 
NI.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  8.) 


They  have  great  beasts  in  their 
woods. 

It  had  very  extensive  walks. 
I  have  beautiful  jewels. 


They  had  from  him  good  lun- 
cheons. 

He  began  to  write   songs  and 
sonnets. 


Having  caused  some  friends  and 
some  servants  immediately  to  be 
called. 

They  had  a  sister  of  theirs, 
called  Elizabeth. 


He  found  him  with  some  of  his 
neighbours. 


The  English  make  use  of  the  article  before  an  or- 
dinal number  joined  to  a  proper  name  ;  as,  Leo  THE 
Tenth,  &c.  ;  before  a  noun  in  apposition,  or  imme- 
diately following  another,  of  which  it  expresses  a 
quality  ;  as,  Mr.  Grant,  THE  son  of  John,  &e. ;  also 
in  speaking  of  quotations,  or  of  the  division  of  a  book  ; 
book  THE  first,  chapter  THE  second,  &c. :  in  Italian, 
however,  the  article  is  suppressed ;  as, 

il  cardindle  Richelieu,  primo  cardinal  Richelieu,  THE  prime 
ministro  di  Luigi  Decimo-  minister  of  Louis  THE  Thir- 
terzo,  teenth ; 


USE   OF  ARTICLES.  467 

giorndta  nona,  novtlla  ottdva,    the  ninth  day,  novel  the  eighth. 

In  speaking  of  buying  and  selling  any  thing,  the 
English  article  a  or  an,  used  with  nouns  of  number, 
measure,  or  weight,  is  expressed  in  Italian  by  the  arti- 
cles il,  lo,  la  ;  as, 

il  frumento    si  vendeva   ad    the  wheat  was  sold  at  eighty 
ottdnta  lire  IL  moggio,  livres  A  bushel. 

The  same  article,  a  or  an,  in  Italian  is  suppressed  : 

First,  after  the  verbs  to  be,  to  become,  with  a  noun 
expressing  the  country,  profession,  dignity,  or  any  other 
quality  of  the  subject  of  the  verb  ;  as, 

Vittorio  Siri,  Italidno,  Vittorio  Siri,  AN  Italian; 

fui  poita,  I  was  A  poet ; 

sarete  capitano,  you  will  be  A  captain  ; 

diverra  cardindle,  he  will  become  A  cardinal. 

Secondly,  with  a  noun  of  the  same  kind  after  the 
verbs  to  make,  to  create,  to  appoint,  to  elect,  to  choose, 
to  declare,  to  proclaim,  whatever  may  be  the  subject  of 
the  verb  ;  as, 

fecelo  maliscdlco,  he  made  him  A  marshal ; 

10  dichiarb  mdtto,  she  declared  him  A  madman. 

Thirdly,  before  a  noun  in  apposition,  or  qualifying 
another  which  precedes  it ;  as, 

11  Tamigij  fiume  d'  Inghil-    the  Thames,  A  river  in  Eng- 
ttrra,  land. 

Fourthly,  before  the  title  of  a  work  ;  as, 

discorso  di  Luigi  Guicciar-    A  discourse  of  Luigi  Guicciar- 
dini,  dini. 

EXAMPLES. 

IL  CARDIJVALE  RICHELIEU,  Cardinal  Richelieu,  the  prime 
PRIMO  MINISTRO  DI  LUIGI  DECi-  minister  of  Louis  the  Thirteenth, 
MOTERZO.  (Den.  Letter.) 


468 


SYNTAX. 


The  ninth  day,  novel  the  eighth. 

He  fixed  the  price  of  bread,  as 
if  the  wheat  were  sold  at  thirty- 
three  livres  a  bushel ;  and  it  was 
selling  as  high  as  eighty. 


GlORNATA  NONA, NOVELLA  OT- 
TAVA.  (BOCC.) 

Fissd  la  tneta  del  pdne  al 
prezzo  che  il  pdne  avrebbe  avuto, 
se  IL  FRUMANTO  si  fosse  venduto 
a  L!RE  trcntatre  IL  MOGGIO  ;  e 

SI    VENDEVA    FINO    AD    OTTANTA. 

(Manz.  Prom.  Spos.) 

VITTORIO  SIRI,^  ITALIANO,  fu 
storiografo  della  corte  di  Frdncia. 
(Den.  Letter.) 

POETA  FIJI,  e  contdi  di  quel  I  was  a  poet,  and  sang  of  that 
giusto  —  Figliuol  d*  Jlnchise,  che  just  son  of  Anchises,  who  came 
venne  da  Troia.  (Dant.  Inf.  1.)  from  Troy. 

In  luogo  di  quello  che  morto  He  substituted  him  for  the  one 
era,  il  sostitm,  e  FECELO  siio  who  had  died,  and  made  him  his 
MALISCALCO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.)  marshal. 


Vittorio    Siri,   an    Italian,  was 
historian  to  the  court  of  France. 


SUL  TAMIGI,  FITJME  D'  INGHIL- 
TERRA.     (Bocc.  Com.  Dant.) 


On  the  Thames,  a  river  in  Eng- 
land. 


DISCORSO  DI  LUIGI  GUICCIAR-        A  discourse  of  Luigi  Guiccardini 
DINI  di  magistrdti.     (Mach.)  to  the  magistrates. 


EXERCISE    XXX. 


The     good,     which    man    can     derive     from    a    thing, 
giovamentOj  uomo  potere   cavdr  cosa, 

consists    either    in    (the)    its    utility,   or    (in  the)    pleasure. 
consistere  —      utile,  piacere. 

He    advised    the    king   to    wish    for    peace,   and   not    war. 
—     Confortdre  re  volere    —      pace,  guerra. 

I     know  (of)   many     fine    things,    and   (of)    beautiful     little- 
sapere  molto    bello      cosa,  bello  can- 

wish 


songs,     and     I 
zone,  — 


to    tell    thee     one*     of     them. 
dire3  1VX         4  2. 


One,  in  the  feminine  gender. 


USE  OF  ARTICLES. 


469 


The    queen     having     turned      (herself)    to    Filomena,    or- 
regina        torndre^  im- 


dered     her 
porre2          l 


to  I    continue. 
1    seguitdre. 


Now    you      say,      that    if. 
2      dire\ 


of    I     all      things      created    for    man,    the    faculty    of 
fra    I   tutto       cosa         credte        —        — , 

speech  (speaking)     is  that    which    properly    and  par- 

parldre,  proprio  par- 
ticularly   belongs    to (is    for)    man,    speaking    I  may 

ticoldre          —  uomo,      parldre  si 


be    said 
pud    dir 


with      reason      to    be     an       excellent       thing. 
ragione      —     —     —         ottimo2  cosa1. 


And    being      asked      by  her  (of)  the  reason (why),  he 

—     domanddre  ,   — 


related      to    her 
raccontdre3  2 


word    for    word 
ordinatamente1 


his     whole      dream. 


not    say    how,    nor    if    the    effect    is    true  ;    but 
1     dire  ,  effetto  vero  ; 

I    believe     it    for    certain.        I      hope,      (that)    you    will 
credere*       l  certo.         —   Sperdre, 

not     permit,    that    I,    for    I    the      great        love     I    bear 
sofferire,  ,  |   tdnto    e    tale        amore    —      — 

you,   should    receive     death    I    as        a     reward.         It    ap- 
— ,  ricevere2  mdrte1    \  per       —  guiderdone.      —    pa' 

peared      to    him,    that      he      gave     away,    now     to     one, 
rere2  l,          3     esso*        dondre12,  5        6  7, 

and    then (now)    to    another,      castles,      cities,      and 

8       —  9        10  i\9       castello,       cittd, 


baronies.        We     have     arms,      men,     and 
baronia.  drme,     uomot 


well-fortified 
ben     muniti 


quarters,       and  provisions   for  a    long    war.        Speak        to 


him    of    past     and    present    things,  and     of    new     fears. 

—  passdto2      3      presente4^      cosa1,  5     —  nuovo7  paura6. 

Weakness,      fear,      melancholy,      and  ignorance     are     the 

Debolezza,      timore,    rnalinconia,  ignordnza 


40 


470  SYNTAX. 

sources      of     superstition.        The     Romans    were  inured 

sorgente              superstizione.                     Romano  assuefdre 

to    hardship,      fatigue,     and     a     military     life.  Italy    is 

disdggio,        fatica,                 —     militdre*    vita1.  Italia 

situated      between    two     seas.          Cane     della    Scala    was 
situdre  mare. 

one    of   the       greatest         lords,    that    from    the  time     of 
piii  notdbile      aignore, 


the     emperor    Frederic     the      Second 
—    imperadore    Federigo 


to    this 
in    qua 


has 


been    known   I    in    Italy.        The     Tiber    washes     a    great 
sapesse        \  Italia.  Tevere    bagndre    —    gran 

portion    of    the    state    I   of  the     Pope    I  .       King     Charles 
pdrte  Stdto    \       Pontificio          \  .        Re          Carlo 

died,    when    (the)    his      son          was         still    in    Burgundy 
morire,    —  3        —  figliuolo*    essendo1  £orgogna 

I   under  the  care  of  I     the     Duke      Philip.          The      Arno 
appresso    a  Duca       Filippo.  3  4 

separates    it,*    which,    as     you     know,     flows    from     east 
divider ez        19  —      sapere,    cdrrere  oriente 

to      west.        Rinieri      king     of     Cyprus.        Three    younjj 
ponente.  re  Cipro.  gio- 

men    love     three      sisters,      and      elope      (themselves)    with 
vane    amdre  sorella,  fuggire* 

them    to    Crete.        I    see    Fracastoro,    Bevazzano,    Trifon 
elleno*  Creta.  vedere 

Gabriel,     and    farther    on (more     far)      I     see     Tasso. 

—  2  lontdno3—    —  l. 

The     Greeks     attributed     them    to    their    Gods,      and    to 
Greco        attribute*  l  Iddio, 

those     who    performed      those      great      deeds,     which     are 
colui  fare  gran        cosa, 

recorded      of     Hercules     and     Theseus,    of     Hector     and 
tcrivere  Ercole  Teseo,  Ettore 


*  It,  in  the  feminine  gender- 


USE  OF  ARTICLES.  471 

Achilles.        He   has   thy  sister  for  his   wife.        Thou  wilt 

Achille.                                      sorella           —  moglie.         —  Hi- 

remember      (thyself)       to   I   tell    to    thy    father,     that  thy 


corddre. 


di    \    dire  padre, 


children,    and    his   and    my   nephews,    are    not   descendants 
figliuolo,  nepote,  1        ndscere6 

of  I   a    pal  try- fellow.       She 
da   I  —        paltoniere. 


|  on    their    mother's    side 
per3  mddre* 


made     (to)    her    brother,     and    (to)    her     sisters,     and    (to) 
Fare  fratello,  sorella, 

every   other  person,    believe,    that    by  the      power      of  de- 
persona,    crddere ,  —  indozzamento      de- 
mons   this    had    appeared     to    them.  Have     you     heard 
monio             issere    accaddre2                   *.  —        udire 

how    your    good    brother-in-law     treats     your    sister.     This 
buono        cogndto  tr  attar  e         2    sorella1. 

is   my  master.       Without    preserving    faith    to    his    friend 
signore.  serbdre       fede*       l        2    amico3 

and    to    his     master.        Gentlemen,    it    is    well    to     taste 
456      signore7.          Signore,        egli         buono    —      — 

(that    we    should    taste)    (some  of)    the     wine     of   this 

assaggidre  vino 

able      man.          Shall     I    tell      it    to    the     master     or    to 
valenV  uomo.  —  dire2     *  signore 

the      mistress  ?        O,     my      Lord,     when     shall      I     ever 
signora  ?          0,  *,    qudndo3 

be    happy  ?        A    treatise        on     I   painting     and 


lieto  1  Trattuto 


di      I    pittura 


on 

di 


sculpture    I  by 
scultura  di 


Leon-Battista   Alberti.       Guided    by 


(with    the     guidance     of)    Ulamane,    a    Persian.        Having 
guida  ,        Persid.no. 

left  Tauris,     a    royal     city.       In   the    times    of    the 

abbandondre  Tduri.de,         redle*   cittd1.  tempo 

emperor    Frederic    the     Second.        Under     the     pontificate 
mperatore  Federigo  .  pontificdto 


472  SYNTAX. 

of     Pope      Clement      the     Seventh.         Tasso,      Jerusalem 
Pdpa      Clemtnte  •  ,  Gerusatemme 

Delivered,      Canto      the     fourth,     stanza     the     third,    the 
Liberdta,  ,  > 

first    verse. 
2      verso1. 


CHAPTER    V. 
POSITION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

ADJECTIVES  in  Italian,  as  we  have  already  observed 
at  pp.  390  and  393,  may  be  placed  either  before  or 
after  the  substantives,  which  they  are  to  qualify  ;  as, 


[new  spouse]  bride; 

vini  BUONI,  good  wines  ; 

BUONE  vivdnde,  good  meats. 

The  adjective  is  often  separated   from  its  substantive  by  another 
word;  as, 

un  monastero  di  donne    assdi  a  convent  of  nuns  very  much  re- 

FAMOSO,  nowned  ; 

due  cose  molto  ai  miei  costumi  two  things  very  much  contrary  to 

CONTRARIE,  my  habits. 


/There  are,  however,  some  adjectives  which  are  to  be 
placed  after  their  substantives,  and  others  which  are  to 
be  placed  before  them  ;  as, 

Jiera  CRUDELE,  cruel  monster  ; 

inclinazione  BISBETICA,  extravagant  disposition  ; 

BEGLI  occhi,  beautiful  eyes  ; 

GRAN  mdle,  great  evil. 


POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


473 


Adjectives  of  nations ;  adjectives  expressing  taste, 
smell,  or  hearing  ;  denoting  shape  or  form  ;  expressing 
colors ,*  the  state  of  the  elements,  and  physical  or 
mental  qualities ;  adjectives  that  may  be  wsed  as  sw6- 
stantives  ;  that  are  formed  of  participles  ;  that  govern, 
or  are  connected  with,  any  other  part  of  speech  ;  are  to 
be  placed  after  the  substantives  ;  as. 


dbito  ARABESCO, 
favilla  LATiNA, 
vino  DOLCE, 
6rbe  ODOIUFERE, 
voci  so  AVI, 
t6rri  RITONDE, 
rosdi  B  i  AN  CHI, 

TEMPESTOSO, 
INFERM1CCIO, 

persone  DOTTE, 

[un  gob  bo],  sdrto  GOB  BO, 


Arabian  dress ; 

Latin  tongue ; 

sweet  wine ; 

sweet  herbs ; 

sweet  voices ; 

round  towers ; 

white  rose-bushes ; 

stormy  weather  ; 

sickly  old  man ; 

wise  persons  ; 

[a  hunchback],  a  hunchbacked 

tailor ; 
[acc^so,  da  accendere],  lam-     [lighted,  from  to  light],  a  light- 


pada ACCESA, 
tdzze  PIENE  di  vino, 


ed  lamp ; 
cups  filled  with  wine : 


To  which  may  be  added  the  following  adjectives,  which, 
generally,  are  put  after  the  substantives  ;  viz. 


l&ngo, 

long; 

Idnguido, 

languid  ; 

corto, 

short  ; 

importuno, 

importunate  ; 

pigro, 

lazy; 

vizioso, 

vicious  ; 

lento, 

slow  ; 

virtuoso, 

virtuous  ; 

neutro, 

neuter  ; 

pauroso, 

fearful  ; 

intiero. 

entire  ;                  coraggioso, 

courageous  : 

*  Instances  are  found,  notwithstanding,  among  the  poets,  in  which  adjectivea  of 
colors  are  put  before  the  substantives  j  as, 

Colddir'ttto  sopra'l  VE'RDE  SMA'LTO,—         Thereon  the  green  enamel  [verdure] 
Mi  far  ruostrdti  gli  spiriti  mdgni.   (Dant.      were  soon  shown  me  the  great  spirits. 


V  6sser  covtrto  pdi  di  BIA'NCHB  PIU'- 
ME.     (Petr.  c.  4.) 

40* 


To  be  then  covered  with  white  feathers. 


474  SYNTAX. 

And  adjectives  ending  in  e/e,  and  He ;  as, 
crwc?ELE,  cruel ;  |  CIVILE,  civil. 


Numeral  adjectives,  both  cardinal  and  ordinal,  and 
the  adjective  pronouns  questo,  '  this  ' ;  quello,  '  that ' ; 
cotesto  or  codesto,  6  that  near  you ' ;  are  to  be  placed 
before  the  substantives ;  as, 

Dtf  E  dnnij  two  years  ; 

6TTO  miglia,  eight  miles  ; 

il  TERZO  giornoy  the  third  day  ; 

la  SETTIMA  COSA,  the  seventh  thing  ; 

QUESTO  castello,  this  castle  ; 

QUELL'  anno,  that  year ; 

COTESTE  Zagrime,  those  tears. 


When  the  ordinal  numeral  adjectives  are  joined  to  a  proper  name, 
or  are  used  in  speaking  of  the  division  of  a  work  ;  in  which  case  they 
are  put  after  the  substantives ;  *  as, 

Urbdno   OTTAVO,  LEONE   DE-    Urban    the    Eighth ;    Leo    the 
CIMO,  Tenth ; 

pdrte  PRIMA,  canzone  QUARTA,    part  the  first ;  song  the  fourth  : 

And  the  cardinal  numeral  adjectives  ventuno,  *  twenty-one  ' ;  trentu- 
no, '  thirty-one  ';  quarantimo, '  forty-one  *;  &c. ;  which  may  be  put 
either  before  or  after  the  substantives. 

Numeral  adjectives,  as  we  have  already  observed  at  p.  403,  agree 
with  their  substantives  in  gender  and  number.  Now,  by  a  peculiarity 
of  language,  if  the  numeral  adjectives  ventuno,  trentuno,  &,c.,  precede 
the  substantive,  this  substantive  is  put  in  the  singular ;  but  if  the 


*  But,  when,  in  speaking  of  books,  the  article  is  used,  we  find  them,  in  good 
writers,  both  before  and  after  the  substantives  j  aa, 

JVeL  VENTE'SIMO  CA'NTO  del  Purgatd-  In  the  twentieth  canto  of  the  Purgato- 
rio,  egli  ricdrda  la  genealog'ia  dp  Cape-  ry,  he  [Dante]  traces  the  genealogy  of 
tingi.  (Fosc.)  the  Capets. 

Machiavelli,  neL  L!BRO  PR!MO  dtlle  Machiavel,  in  the  first  book  of  the 
Isttirie  Florentine.  (Den.)  History  of  Florence. 


POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES.  475 

numeral  adjectives  follow  the  substantive,  then  the  substantive  is  put 
in  the  plural ;  as, 

novantuna  RUOTA,  ninety-one  circles  ; 

ANNI  ventuno9  twenty-one  years. 

If  there  is  any  other  word  connected  with  the  substantive,  and  this 
word  precedes  the  adjectives  ventimo,  &c.,  it  is  put  in  the  plural, 
though  the  substantive  following  the  adjectives  be  in  the  singular ;  but, 
if  the  word  follows  the  adjectives,  it  is  put  in  the  plural  if  it  comes 
after  the  substantive,  and  in  the  singular  if  it  comes  before  ;  as, 

ALTRE  novantuna  ruota,  ninety- one  circles  more  ; 

anni  trentuno  INTERI,  thirty-one  whole  years  ; 

ventuna  PICCOLA  STELLA,  vici-     twenty-erne  small  stars,  very  near 
NISIME  tra  di  I6ro*  to  each  other. 


To  which   may   be  added   the  following  adjectives, 
which,  generally,  are  put  before  the  substantives  ;  viz. 


•  buono,  good ; 

cattivo,  bad ; 

grdnde,  great ; 

picciolooT  ?         n 

piccolo,  $ 


7/77  $  handsome, 

m°>  ]  fine  ; 

brutto,  ugly,  bad  ; 

ricco,  rich  ; 

poor. 


There    are    some    adjectives   which  may  be   placed 
either   before  or  after  the  substantives,  but  whose  posi- 


*  This  usage  may  appear  contrary  to  reason  ;  but  it  is  to  be  observed  that  these 
and  similar  expressions  are  elliptical  and  stand  for, —  A'LTRE  NOVA'NTA  rudte,  e  U'NA 
RUOTA,  *  ninety  cirdes  and  one  circle  more  ' ;  VE'NTI  piccole  stelle,  ed  U'NA  PICCOLA 
STE'LLA,  tutte  viciNissiME  TRA  DI  LORO,  'twenty  small  stars,  and  ono  small  star,  all 
very  near  to  each  other';  &c.,  which  sentences  were  first  abbreviated  into, — 
A'LTRE  NOVA'NTA,  e  u  NA  FUOTA,  '  ninety  and  one  circle  more  ' :  VE'NTI  ed  U'NA 
piccoLA  STE'LLA,  ViciNissiME,  &c.,'  '  twenty  and  one  small  stars,  very  near,  &c.J 
and  afterwards  into, —  A'LTHE  NOVANTU'NA  RUOTA; —  VENTU'NA  piccoLA  STE'LLA, 
viciNissiME,  &c. 

Notwithstanding  this,  there  are  instances  of  some  writers  using  the  substantive  in 
the  plural,  even  when  preceded  by  the  numeral  adjectives  ventuno,  &c. ;  as, 

Enta,  eddscanio,  suo  figliudlo,  e  ttiita  ^Eneas,  and  Ascanius  his  son,  and  all 

sba  ginte  DE'LLE  VENTU'NA  NA'VI,  la  the  crews  of  the  twenty-one  ships,  were 

d6tta  reina  accdlse  con  grande  ondre.  received  by  the  said  queen  with  great 

(Vill.)  honors. 

Troverete  V  O'pera  delV  Alessdndro  You  will  find  the  Opera  of  Alexander 

nell*  1'ndie  piti  edrta  di  qudllo,  chefindra  in  India  561  lines  shorter,  than  it  has 

i  stdta,  di  561  VE'RSI.  (Metast.  lett.)  been  hitherto. 


476 


SYNTAX. 


tion  affects  the  signification  ;  as,  galante,  gentile,  solo, 
certo,  doppio,  semplice.     Thus, 


un  GAL  ANT'  wdmo, 
un  uomo  GALANTE, 

un  GEN  TIL'  uomo, 
un  uomo  GENTILE, 

un  SOLO  u6mo, 
un  uomo  SOLO, 

una  CERTA  notizia, 
una  notizia  CERT  A, 
un  DOPPIO  amico, 
un  amico  DOPPIO, 
un  SEMPLICE  contadino, 
un  contadino  SEMPLICE, 


a  good,  an  honorable  man  ; 
a  courteous,  a  galant  man ; 

a  gentleman,  a  nobleman  ; 
a  civil,  gentle,  courteous,  kind 
man  ; 

a  single  man  [one  only] ; 
a   single    man    [not    married, 
without  family] ; 

certain  [not  well  ascertained] 

news; 
certain  [undoubted]  news ; 

a  double  friend  [two  or  equal 

to  two  friends]'; 
a  double  [false]  friend  ; 

a  single  [no  more  than  one] 
countryman ; 

a  simple  [inexperienced]  coun- 
tryman. 


Two  or  more  adjectives,  qualifying  the  same  substan- 
tive, may  be  placed  before  or  after  the  substantive  ;  as, 

VARIE  e  DIVERSE  novita,  various     and      different    new 

things  ; 

conpdnni  LARGHI  e  LUNGHI,     with  garments   full  and   long, 
e  voci  UMILJ  e  MANSUETE,         and    language    humble  and 

meek. 

Sometimes  they  are  separated  by  putting  one  of  them 
before  and  the  other  or  others  after  the  substantives, 
which  adds  grace  and  elegance  to  the  phrase  ;  as, 

NOBILE  giovane  e  BE 


a  noble  and  beautiful  young 
woman  ; 

NOBILI  vestimenti  e  RICCHI,       rich  and  elegant  clothes. 


POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


477 


EXAMPLES. 


Di*  da  mia  pdrte  alia  NUOVA 
SPOSA,  che  nelle  mie  contrdde 
s'  usa,  qudndo  alcun  forestiere 
mdngia  al  convito  della  SPOSA 
NUOVA  ....  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

Ma  V  6ra  del  mangidre  venuta, 
V  abate  e  tutti  gli  dltri  e  di  BUONE 
VIVANDE  e  di  VINI  BUONI  sermti 
furono.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  2.) 

In  queste  nostre  contrdde  fu, 
ed  &  ancora,  UN  MONASTERO  DI 

DONNE  ASSAI    FAMOSO    di    Sttntltd. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 
Mi    converra    far    DtiE    COSE 

MOLTO  AI  MIEI  COSTtJMI   CONTRA- 

RIE.     (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  8.) 

Cerbero,  FIERA  CRUDELE  e  di- 
v6rsa, —  Con  tre^gole  canina- 
m&nte  Idtra  —  Sovra  la  gdnte, 
che  quivi  g  sommersa.  (Dant, 
Inf.  6.) 

Gli  storpidti  capricci  della  sua 
naturaJe  INCLINAZIONE  BISBETI- 
CA.  (Alleg.  157.) 

EW  e  de'  suoi  BEGLI  OCCHI 
ved6r  vdga.  (Dant.  Purg.  27.) 

Questo  e  dunque  il  GRAN  MALE, 
il  GRAN  peccdto,  il  GRAN  fdtto 
adoperdto  da  Gisippo  ?  (Bocc. 
g.  10.  n.  8.) 

U  abdte,  con  tutto  che  egli  in 
ABITO  ARABESCO  fosse,  dopo  al- 
qudnto  il  rajffigwd.  (Bocc.  g.  10. 
n.  9. 

La  giovane  udendo  la  FAVELLA 
LATINA,  dubitd,  non  fbrse  dltro 
vento  r  avisse  a  Lipari  ritorndta. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  2.) 

U  uve  troppo  mature  fdnno  il 
VINOJOIW  DOLCE,  ma  meno  potin- 
te.  (Gr.  4.  22.) 


Tell  the  bride  from  me,  that  it 
is  a  custom  in  my  country,  when 
any  foreigner  goes  to  the  banquet 
of  the  bride 


But  when  the  hour  of  dinner  was 
come,  the  abbot  and  all  the  others 
were  helped  to  good  meats  and 
good  wines. 

In  this  neighbourhood  of  ours 
there  was,  and  there  is  still,  a  con- 
vent of  nuns  very  much  renowned 
for  sanctity. 

I  shall  be  obliged  to  do  two 
things  very  much  contrary  to  my 
habits. 

Cerberus,  cruel  and  strange 
monster,  through  his  threefold 
throat  barks  as  a  dog  over  the 
multitude  which  is  immersed  there. 


The  lame  caprices  of  his  natural 
extravagant  disposition. 

She  is  charmed  to  behold  [in 
the  glass]  her  beautiful  eyes. 

Is  this,  then,  the  great  evil,  the 
great  sin,  the  great  crime  com- 
mitted by  Gisippus  ? 

Although  he  had  on  an  Arabian 
dress,  the  abbot  soon  recognised 
him. 


The  young  woman,  hearing  the 
Latin  [Italian]  tongue,  feared,  lest 
a  contrary  wind  had  brought  her 
back  to  Lapari. 

Grapes,  when  too  ripe,  make 
more  sweet  wine,  but  less  power- 
ful. 


478 


SYNTAX. 


Mdlti  anddvano   attorno,  por- 
tdndo  nille  mdni,  chi  fiori,  chi 

ERBE    ODORIFERE,    €    chi     diverse 

maniere  di  spezierie.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

Parldvan  rddo  con  voci  soAvi. 
(Dant.  Inf.  4.) 

Sopra  le  mura  d6lla  cittd  edi- 
fied TORRI  RITONDE    ni6ltO  Sp6sS6. 

(Gio.  Vill.  1.  1.  c.  38.) 


/  Idti  delle  qudli  vie,  tutti  di 
ROSAI  EIANCHI  e  vermigli,  e  di 
gelsomini  6rano  chiusi.  (Bocc. 
g.  3.  n.  1.) 

Con  6ssa  surse  un  TEMPO  fie- 
rissimo  e  TEMPESTOSO.  (Bocc. 
g.5.n.  1.) 

Fo  non  vorrei,  che  noi  piglids- 
simo  un  grdnchio,  e  ch*  6'  fosse 
qudlche  VECCHIO  debole  o  IN- 
FERMICCIO.  (Mach.  Mandr.  4.  9.) 

Ma  dopo  se  fa  le  PERSOJVE 
DOTTE.  (Dant.  Pur.  22.) 

Costui  fu  uno  de*  piu  infdmi 
nwstri  di  quella  corte,  allidvo  di 
un  SARTO  GOBBO.  (Dav.  Ann.  15.) 

Nelle  mdni  le  si  ponga  una 
LAMPADA  ACCESA.  (Ann.  Car. 
leti.) 

Con  alcune  TAZZE  in  mdno 
PIENE  DI  VINO.  (Car.  lett.) 

La  VESTA,  chi  vuol  che  sia 
LT^JVGA  fino  a?  pi6di,  chi  CORTA 
/ ino  dlle  ginocchia.  ( Car.  lett.) 

Del  lungo  60 10  CIVIL  ti  pregan 
fine.  (Petr.  c.  41.) 

JVel  ditto  anno  si  comincidj  e 
fu  DUE  ANNI  seguenti,  grdnde 
cdro  di  srdno  in  Firenze.  (Gio. 
Vill.) 


Many  went  about  carrying  in 
their  hands,  some,  flowers,  some, 
sweet  herbs,  and  others,  different 
kinds  of  spices. 

They  spoke  seldom,  but  their 
words  were  sweet. 

Upon  the  walls  of  the  city  he 
built  round  towers  very  frequent. 

The  sides  of  which  ways  were 
all  lined  with  white  and  red  rose- 
bushes, and  jasmine. 

With  it  [the  night]  arose  stormy 
and  very  severe  weather. 

I  should  not  wish,  that  we 
make  a  mistake,  and  that  he  is 
some  feeble  and  sickly  old  man. 

But  make  the  persons,  that  fol- 
low them,  wise. 

This  one  was  one  of  the  most 
infamous  monsters  in  that  court, 
and  a  pupil  of  a  hunchbacked 
tailor. 

Let  a  lighted  lamp  be  put  into 
her  hands. 


Holding  some  cups  filled  with 
wine. 

As  for  her  dress,  some  will 
have  it  to  reach  to  her  feet,  others 
to  her  knees. 

They  beg  that  you  will  put  an 
end  to  the  long  civil  hatred. 

In  the  said  year,  began  in  Flor- 
ence a  great  scarcity  of  corn, 
which  lasted  for  the  two  following 
years. 


POSITION   OF   ADJECTIVES. 


479 


E  QUESTO  CASTELLO  pOStO  prO- 

pinquo  a  Firenze  ad  OTTO  MIGLIA. 
(Mach.  Stor.) 

Quasi  tutti,  infra  il  TERZO 
GIORNO,  monvano.  (Eocc.  Intr.) 

LA  SETTIHA  COSA  che  c'  induce 
afar  penitenza,  £  .  .  .  .  (Pass.) 

Le  viti  facevano  gran  vista  di 
dovere  QUELL,*  ANNO  assdi  uve 
fare.  (Eocc.  g.  1.  n,  2.) 

Al  qudle  la  donna  disse:  "  Tan- 
cr6dij  serba  COTESTE  LAGRIME  a 
meno  desiderata  fortiina."  (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  1.) 

1  pittori,  gli  scultori,  e  gli 
architetti  del  tempo  di  Paolo 
QUINTO,  e  di  URBANO  OTTAVO, 
non  cedevano  quasi  per  dltro  ri- 
gudrdo  a  quelli  che  vissero  sotto 
LEONE  DECIMO,  e  Paolo  TERZO, 
fuorchi  nel  merito  di  avire  aper- 
ta  e  disegndta  la  strdda.  (Den. 
Riv.  Ital.  1.  23.  c.  12.) 

Petrdrca,  PARTE  PR£MA,  CAN- 
ZONE QUARTA.  (Crus.) 

Poi  per  la  medisima  via  pare 
des<:e"ndere  AL.TRE  NOVANTUNA 
RUOTA.  (Dant.  Conv.) 

Tennemi  amor  ANNI  VENTUNO 
ardendo.  (Petr.  s.  312.) 

Cantdndo  ANNI  TRENTUNO  IN- 
TERI  sp6si.  (Petr.) 

La  nubilosa  d*  Orione  gli  ap- 
pari  formdta  da  VENTUNA  PIC- 
COLA  STELLA,  VICINfsSIME  TRA 

DI  LORD.     (Tris.  Elog.  Galil.) 

n  Signor  Giovanni  Corvino 
richi^dea  d*  esser  fdtto  GENTILE 
UOMO  Vinizidno.  (Bemb.Stor.4.) 

DONNA ^  GENT|L  nel  ciil>  che 
si  compidnge  —  Di  questo  im- 
pedimento. 


This    castle    is    situated   eight 
miles  from  Florence. 


Almost  all  died  within  the  third 
day. 

The   seventh   thing  which  in- 
duces us  to  do  penance,  is 


The  vines  seemed  as  if  they 
would  produce  an  abundance  of 
grapes  that  year. 

To  whom  the  lady  said  :  "  Tan- 
cred,  save  those  tears  against 
worse  fortune  than  this." 

The  painters,  the  sculptors,  and 
the  architects  of  the  times  of  Paul 
the  Fifth  and  Urban  the  Eighth, 
were  not  inferior,  perhaps,  to  those 
who  lived  under  Leo  the  Tenth, 
arid  Paul  the  third,  in  any  other 
respect  than  the  merit  of  having 
opened  and  marked  the  way. 

Petrarch,  part  the  first,  song  the 
fourth. 

Then  he  seemed  to  descend 
ninety-one  more  circles  by  the 
same  way. 

Love  kept  me  in  a  flame  twenty- 
one  years. 

I  consumed  thirty-one  years  in 
the  study  of  the  Muses. 

The  nebula  of  Orion  showed 
itself  to  him  to  be  formed  of 
twenty-one  small  stars,  very  near 
to  each  other. 

Mr.  John  Corvino,  asked  to  be 
made  a  Venetian  nobleman. 


There  is  a  courteous  lady  in 
Heaven  who  mourns  this  hin- 
drance. 


480 


SYNTAX. 


Jlvendo  stco  Tancredi  VARIE  E 
DIVERSE  NOVITA,  pensdtc.  (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  1.) 

II  qudle  dmpia  materia  mi 
presto,  a,  dimostrdre  quanta  e 
qudle  sia  la  ipocresm  de*  religiosi, 

CO5    PANNI    LARGHI    E    LtJ^NGHI,  6 

co*  visi  artificialmente  pdllidi,  E 

VOCI     UMILI      E     MANSUETE 


nel  domanddr  V  altrui.    (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  2.) 

Ormisda,  stdto^  in  lungo  trat- 
tdto  di  dover  torre  per  moglie 

Una    NOBILE     GIOVANE    E    BELLA, 

chiamdta  Cassdndra.     (Bocc.  g. 
5.  n.  1.)  *. 

Maestro  Mazzio>  av6ndo  presa 
per  miglie  una  bella  e  gentil 
giovane,  di  NOBILI  VESTIMENTI  E 
RICCHI  la  tentvafornita.  (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  10.) 


Tancred  having  revolved  in  his 
mind  various  and  different  new 
things. 

Which  [proverb]  affords  me  am- 
ple matter  to  show  how  great  is 
the  hypocrisy  of  the  religious, 
who  have  garments  full  and  long, 
and  faces  made  pale  artificially, 
and  language  humble  and  meek 
for  the  purpose  of  getting  men's 
property  from  them. 

Ormisda,  who  had  been  long 
talked  of  as  about  to  marry  a 
noble  and  beautiful  young  woman, 
called  Cassandra. 


Master  Mazzeo,  having  married 
a  beautiful  and  noble  woman,  kept 
her  well  provided  with  rich  and 
elegant  clothes. 


EXERCISE    XXXI. 


There    was    once (one    time)  a    man    of  a    ben- 

—        JEssere    —  volta          uomo  be- 

eficent    heart.        This     courtier    had     the    misfortune 

nefico*      cuore1.  2    cortigidno3       l  

(bad    fortune)    of    losing  the  favor  (falling  in    dis- 

fortuna  —  —  —  cadere  dis- 
grace) of  his  master.  The  astrologer  of  the  Caliph, 
grdzia  signore.  astrologo  Califfo, 

after    various     observations,    said.       I    have     been    writing 
vdrio        osservazione,      dire.      —      — 

so    long (it    is    so    long      that    I      write),      that     my 

tdmpo  scrivere, 

hand    I   ought    to    be   I    accustomed    to    it.       The    affairs 
mdno      dovrebbe  essere^,        avvdzza?  l.  2        c6se* 


POSITION   OF   ADJECTIVES.  481 

of  the    Lombards    being    prosperous.        No*    sinful    woman 
4    Lombdrdo5  l        prospero.  ,         rto     femmina 

was    ever    more    deserving    (of)  the     fire     than    I (a? 

degno3  l    fuoco2     —      —  * 

I   should    be).      People    really     pious,    are    wise.     Although 
5.      Persona     vero        pio,  sdvio. 

he     had     a    very    long     beard  (the      beard      great). 

—  —      —          —  —  barba       grdnde. 

Having,     I     from     I     a    very     rich     and     great      merchant, 
JEssej'e,       \       di        \  ricco  gran      mercatdnte, 

become     a    nobleman.        He     showed     to     him     a     noble- 
divenire2  cavali6rel.          —    Mostrdre^,  cava- 

man,     called     Philip     Argenti,    a     man    large     and     robust, 
litre,  chiamdre  Fillppo  ,  uom    grdnde         nerboruto, 

and     very      disdainful,      irascible,     and     passionate.        She 
forte       sdegnoso,        iracondo,  bizzdrro. 


is    to    hold 
Tens  a 


her 
la 


hands    up,     and    I   in 
mdno     dllOj  \  da 


(the)    one 


hand      a      white      child      asleep (that  sleeps),  I    to    1 

bianco  fanciullo     —  dormire,   \  per  \ 

represent    sleep ;     in       the   other  a    black  onef    seemingly 
significdre   sonno ;     da                                 nero 


asleep  — -  (that    seems     to    be     asleep), 
parere     —    —      dormire, 


to     represent 
sigmfichi 


death.         Immediately     he     collected      a    large,     fine,     and 
morte.  Presto  —    congregdre          grdnde,    bello, 

powerful     army.'       Some       (of    the)      cherries     are     sweet, 
poderoso        oste.  certo3  1        ciriegid2  dolce, 

and    some    sour.      I    have    many    valuable    precious    stones. 
—       certo     dgro.  mdlto        ricco        prezioso      pietra. 

The    Pope    had     kept    in    the    college    of   Pisa (Pisan 

2       Papa3        l     tenere  Pisdno 

college),     to      learn      Divine     letters,     Raphael    of   Riario, 
studio,  impardre  Ponlificio  lettera,    Raffaello  , 

a    nephew       of     Count      Jerome.        The     first    and    most 
nipoie  Conte      Girolamo. 

*  JVo.  for  no  one.  t  O/w,  for  another. 

41     • 


482  SYNTAX. 

essential     advantage,     which        ought     to     have    been     do- 

•  S,  f      '  At  '-  i  i  n  .  t          mt 

essenziale       jrutto, 
rived 


si5       dovtva?       ricavdre7 


from   I   the     new    studies,      was     the     knowledge 
dil  2    nudvo3    studio*,  cognizidne 

of  the  ancient    Latin    and    Greek    authors.      The    Academy 
antico     Latino  Greco       autdre.  Accademia 

of    (the)    Inscriptions     and      Belles      Lettres      is      posterior 
Iscrizidne  E6lla         L6tttra  postcridre 

to    the     Florentine     Academy,    and     that    of    the     Crusca. 
Fiurentmo      rfccademia, 

Lulli   was   the    father    and    creator    of   the    French     music. 
padre  creatdre  Francise  musica. 

A    certain        kind         and     charitable    little-woman.      Com- 
c6rto  compassiontvole  carit&tivo  doruia.  Com- 

punction     does    a    great    pood,    and    renders    man    humble, 
punzione     fare  gran    bene,  r&ndere    uoino      umile, 

and     charitable.         He     was     tall,     and     of    very     pleasing 
caritativo.  grdnde,  piacevote 

and    graceful  deportment,  and    (a  young  man)    of   a    middle 
graziuso     maniira^  giooant  mizzo 

age.      (The)    their    conversation*    having    been    long,     and 
etd.  3      ragionamdnto*  2     lungo, 

the    heat    excessive.       Giving  her    to       eat  ^     some     roots 
caldo    grdnde.  Ddre^_,  da   mangidre  radice 

of    herbs,     and    wild      fruits,     and     dates, 
er&a,  salvdtico  pfano,  ddttero. 


*  Conversation  in  the  plural. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS.          483 


CHAPTER    VI. 

USE  AND  POSITION   OF  CERTAIN   PRONOUNS. 

PERSONAL     PRONOUNS. 

ITALIAN  personal  pronouns,  as  it  has  been  already  men- 
tioned at  pp.  105,  164,  165,  when  they  form  the  subject 
of  the  verb  may  be  either  expressed  or  understood ;  as, 

io  vidi  wn'  area  non  troppo    I  saw  a  good-sized  chest ; 
grdnde, 

Marsilia,  come  VQI  sapete,  e    Marseilles,  as  you  know,  is  an 
antica  t  nobilissima  cilia,          ancient  and  famous  city  : 


wVe   a  negdre,  ne  a  pregdre    I  am  neither  inclined  to  deny, 
[io]  son  disposta,  nor  to  pray  ; 

il  che  littamtnte  [voi]  com-     which   thing  you  will  take  in 
porterete,  good  part. 

When  personal  pronouns  are  expressed,  they  are  gen- 
erally put  before  the  verb  ;  hut  they  may  also  be  placed 
after  it ;  as, 

EGLI  avea  V  anello  assdicdro,    he  held  the  ring  very  dear : 

JVe  voglio  [io]  qul  tralascidr    nor  do  I  wish  to  omit  saying 
di  dire  una  cosa,  one  thing. 

When,  however,  a  command  is  given,  or  a  question  is 
asked,  or  when,  in  narrations,  the  sayings  or  doings  of 
a  person  are  mentioned,  the  pronouns  are  always  put 
after  the  verb  ;  as, 

mdngi  [EGLI]  del  suo,  s'  egli    let  him  eat  of  his  own  proper- 
ne  ha,  ty,  if  lie  has  any. 

che    vdi    [TU]   factndo    per  what  art  thou   doing   in   this 

quista   contradat  street? 

"  dimmi  il  perche,'  diss"  io,  "  tell  mo  the  cause,"  said  I. 

io  non  piangiva  ;  piangevan  I  wept  not ;  they  wept. 

ELLI, 


484  SYNTAX. 

When  personal  pronouns  are  preceded  by  the  adverbs 
come,  siccome,  '  as  ' ;  quanta,  '  so  much',  '  as  ' ;  they  are 
put  in  the  objective ;  and  consequently  io,  '  I  '  ;  tu, 
i  thou  ' ;  egli, '  he  '  ;  ella,  £  she  '  ;  eglino,  elleno, '  they  ' ; 
are  changed  into  me,  c  me  ' ;  te,  '  thee  ' ;  lui,  '  him  ' ;  lei, 
i  her  ' ;  loro,  '  them  ' ;  if  the  verb  of  which  they  are  sub- 
jects is  not  expressed] — but  they  remain  in  the  subjec- 
tive, and  are  never  changed,  if  the  verb  of  which  they  are 
subjects  is  expressed  ;  as, 

irano  SICCOME  LUI  maliziosi,    they  were  as  malicious  as  he  ; 

QDANTO  ME,  puote  issere  al-     any  one  may  be  as  afflicted  as 
cun  dolente,  I : 

Se  10  fossi  nellavia  COME  E    If  I  were  in  the  street  as  he 
EGLI,  is ; 

se  tgli  fosse  in  cdsa  COME    if  he  were  within  the  house  as 
SONO  io,  I  am. 

When  two  of  these  pronouns  come,  one  before,  and 
the  other  after,  the  verb  essere,  i  to  be  ' ;  or  credere, 
( to  believe';  and  these  verbs  imply  an  idea  of  transmu- 
tation from  one  to  the  other  of  the  two  pronouns  ; 
that  which  precedes  the  verb,  is  put  in  the  subjective,  and 
that  which  follows  it,  is  put  in  the  objective  ;  as, 

credtndo,  c/t'  io  FOSSI  TE,          believing  me  to  be  thee  ; 
maravigliossi,     che      [EGLI]     wondered  much  that  he  should 
FOSSE  CREDtfTO  Lui,  be  taken  for  him. 

If  the  pronouns  io,  tu,  egli,  ella,  eglino,  elleno  occur 
with  an  infinitive,  and  this  infinitive  follows  the  pro- 
nouns, the  pronouns  are  put  in  the  objective  ;  but  if  the 
infinitive  precedes  the  pronouns,  the  pronouns  remain  in 
the  subjective  ;  as, 

uddndo  Lth  con  gli  altri  ES-  hearing  that  he  and  his  com- 

SER  morto,  panions  were  dead  ; 

conosctndo  LEI  non  ESSERE  knowing  that  she  was  not  of  a 

di  buon  legndggio,  good  condition  : 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


485 


Non    bastdndogli    cT   ESSER 
EG  LI  divenuto  riccJussimo, 

dispose  di  A.NDARE 
desima  per  6sso9 


He   not    being  satisfied   with 
having  become  very  rich  ; 

she  determined  to  go  herself 
after  him. 


EXAMPLES. 


Madonna,  fo  vfoi  questa  sera 
al  i£rdi  UN'  ARCA  NON  TROPPO 

GRANDE.       (BOCC.  g.  4.  II.   10.) 

MARSILIA,  COME  voi  SAPETE, 
E  in  Proven za  sopra  la  marina 
sitvdta,  ANTICA  E  NOBILISSJMA 
CITTA.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  3.) 

Tancredi,  NE  A  NEGARE  NE  A 

PREGARE    SON    DlSl'6sTA.       (BoCC. 

g.  4.n    1.) 
IL   CHE,  se  sdvj  siete,  LIETA- 

MENTE     COMPORTERETE.        (BoCC. 

g.lO.n.8.) 

ECU    AVEA    L'    ANELLO     ASSAI 

CARO  per  alcuna  virtu,  che  stdto 
gli  era  ddto  ad  intendere,  che 
egii  avca.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  9.) 

N£  VOGLIO  QUl  TRALASCIAR  DI 

D!RE  TJNA  COSA,  la  quale  mi  par 
molto  vera.  (Bott.  Stor.  Airier. 
).  6.) 

Or  MANGI  DEL  StJO,  S*  EGLI  NE 

HA,  che  del  nostro  non  manger  & 
egli.  (Boec.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

O  figliuola,  CHE  VAI  TU  a 
quest'  urttj  cosi  sola,  FACENDO  PER 

QUESTA  CONTRADA  ? 

"  DlMMI  JL  PERCHE,"  DISS'  10  J 

tf  per  tal  convegno, —  Che  se  tu 
a  ragion  di  lui  ti  pidngi,  —  Sap- 
piendo  c/ii  voi  siete^  e  la  sua  p6c- 
ca,  —  JW/  mondo  suso  ancor  w  te 
ne  cdngi."  (Dant.  Inf.  32.) 

io  NON  PIANGEVA,  si  dentro 
impietrdi  :  —  PIANGEVAN  ELLI  ; 
ed  Anselmuccio  nuo  —  Di&sn  : 
"  Tu  gnardi  si, padre  !  cht  hdi  ?  " 
(Dant.  Inf.  33.) 

41* 


Madam,  I  saw  late  in  the  even- 
ing a  good-sized  chest. 

Marseilles,  as  you  know,  is  an 
ancient  and  famous  cily  in  Prov- 
ence, situated  on  the  sea  coast. 

Tancred,  I  am  neither  inclined 
to  deny  nor  to  pray. 

Which  thing,  if  you  be  wise, 
you  will  take  in  good  part. 

He  held  the  ring  very  dear,  on 
account  of  some  virtue,  which 
they  had  made  him  believe  it  pos- 
sessed. 

Nor  do  I  wish  to  omit  mention- 
ing here  one  thing,  which  appears 
to  me  to  be  very  true. 

Let  him  eat  of  his  own  prop- 
erty, if  he  has  any,  for  he  will  not 
eat  of  ours. 

Daughter,  ;vhat  art  thou  doing 
in  this  street,  alone,  at  this  hour  ? 

"  Tell  me  the  cause,"  said  I, 
"  on  such  condition,  that  if  right- 
fully thou  giievest  for  him,  know- 
ing who  you  are,  and  his  sins,  I 
may  repay  thee  in  the  world 
above." 

I  wept  not ;  so  petrified  was  I 
within  :  they  \vept ;  and  my  little 
Anselrn  cri»d  :  '*  Thou  lookest  so, 
father!  what  ails  thee  ?  " 


486 


SYNTAX. 


Costoro,  che  dair   dltra  pdrte 

ERANO    SICCOME    Ltll    MALIZIOSI. 

(Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  4.) 

SlCChe,  QUANTO  ME,  PUOTE  ES- 
SERE  ALCTJN  DOLENTE.  (BoCC. 

Filoc.) 

Che   difdste  voi,   SE   10  FOSSI 

NELLA  V!A  COME  £  EGLI,^0d! 
EGLI  FOSSE  IN  CASA  COME  SONO 

fo? 

CREDENDO  dsso,  CH'  io  FOSSI 
TE,  m'  ha  con  un  lastone  tutto 
rdtto.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  7.) 

MARAVIGLIOSSI  forte  Tedaldo, 
che  alcuno  in  tdnto  il  somiglidsse, 

CHE  FOSSE  CREDUTO  Lth.    (BoCC. 

g.  3.  n.  7.) 

La  giovane,  UDENDO  LUI  CON 
GLI  ALTRI  ESSER  MORTO,  lunga- 
mintc  pidnse.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  2.) 

CONOSCENDO  LEI  NON  ESSERE 
DI  LEGNAGGIO  che  dlla  SUtt  710- 

biltd  bene  st6ssej  tutto  sdegndso 
disse.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  9.) 

Ma    NON    BASTANDOGLl    D'    ^S- 

«ER  EGLI  e'  suoi  compdgni  in 
brieve  tempo  DivENtrxi  Riccnfs- 
SIMI.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  2  ) 

Seco  DISPOSE  di  non  manddre, 

ma    D*  ANDARE    ELLA    MEDESIMA 

PER  ESSO.    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 


These,  who,  on  the  other  side, 
were  as  malicious  as  he. 


So  that,    anybody  may   bexas 
afflicted  as  I. 


What  would  you  say  if  I  were 
in  the  street  as  he  is,  or  he  within 
the  house  as  I  am  ? 


Believing  me  to  be  thee,  he 
has  broken  all  my  bones  with  a 
cudgel. 

Tedaldo  wondered  much,  that 
any  one  should  be  so  much  like 
himself,  as  to  be  taken  for  him. 

The  young  woman,  hearing, 
that  he  and  his  companions  were 
dead,  was  very  much  grieved. 

Knowing  that  she  was  of  a 
condition  that  did  not  well  com- 
port with  his  nobility,  he  said  with 
disdain. 

But  he  and  his  friends  not  being 
satisfied  with  their  having  become 
very  rich  in  a  short  time. 

She  determined  hot  to  send, 
but  to  go  herself  after  him. 


CONJUNCTIVE      PRONOUNS. 


We  observed  (p.  109),  that  conjunctive  pronouns  are 
used  instead  of  personal  pronouns,  when  these  pronouns 
are  in  the  objective  or  in  the  relation  of  attribution, 
and  are  closely  connected  with  a  verb,  of  which  they 
are  the  direct  or  indirect  regimen. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


487 


This  is  always  the  case  when  there  is  but  one  per- 
sonal pronoun  in  the  phrase  in  the  afrovementioned  rela- 
tions^ when  the  emphasis  does  not  fall  upon  this  pro- 
noun, and  when  this  pronoun  is  not  in  apposition  with 
the  subject  of  the  verb  ;  as, 

MI  potele  torre  qudnlo  tengo     you  can  take  away  from  me 
[for,  A    ME    potete   torre,         all  I  have  ; 
&*.], 

pieiosamente     IL     chiamava    she  called  him  with  a  piteous 
[for,  chiamava  LUI],  voice  ; 

ci  faceste  la  leffa  [for,  A  NOI     you   should   put  a  trick  upon 
faceste,  &c.],  us; 

LE  vi  donerd  [for,  A  voi  do-    I  will  give  them  to  you. 
ner6  LORO], 

But,  if  there  are  more  than  one  personal  pronoun  in 
the  phrase,  in  the  objective  or  in  the  relation  of  attribu- 
tion; if  the  emphasis  falls  upon  the  pronouns;  and  if  the 
pronouns  are  in  apposition  with  the  subject  of  the  verb, 
or  in  apposition  with  each  other;  the  conjunctive  pro- 
nouns are  not  used  and  the  personal  pronouns  retain 
their  places  ;  as, 

thou  shalt  not  murder  me  ; 

I  am  wont  to  say  that  he  is, 
another  self; 

you  might  console  both  your- 
self and  me  ; 

offesi    ME  per  non   offender    I  injured  myself  not  to  injure 
Ltf  i,  him ; 

it  was,  to  both  her  and  me, 
given  as  a  punishment,  to 
her  to  flee  before  me,  and  to 
me  to  pursue  her. 


ME  non  ucciderdi  tu, 

uso  dire,  che  E'  sia  un  dltro 

ME, 
potreste  voi  e  ME  consolare, 


ne  fu,  ed  A  LEI  ed  A  ME,  per 
p<?na  dato,  A  LEI  di  Jug- 
girmi  dav&nti,  ed  A  ME  di 
seguitdrla, 


Conjunctive  pronouns  are  commonly  put  before  the 
verb,  but  may  also  be  placed  after  it.  When  before 
the  verb,  they  are  placed  immediately  after  the  personal 
pronouns ;  and  when  after,  they  are,  as  it  has  been 


488 


SYNTAX. 


already  stated  at  p.  110,  always  joined  to  the  verb,  so 
as  to  form  a  single,  word ;   as, 

he  loves  you ; 

he  gave  him  his  benediction  ; 

they  will   run  to   our   houses, 
and  rob  us  of  our  property  ; 

to  send  him  out  of  our  house 
would  be  in  us  a  great  fault ; 

they  assisted  me  well  ; 


6gli  vi  ama, 

dMeoL}  la  siia  benedizione, 

cprrerannoci  dlle  case,  e  V  a- 

vtre  ci  ruberdnno, 
U  manddrLO  fuor  di  cdsa  NE 

SAKEBBE  gran  bidsimo, 

ajuldronwi  bene, 
^TTI  uscito  di  infaite  ? 
moslrocci  un'  ombra, 


has  it  escaped  thy  mind  ? 
he  showed  us  a  spirit. 


We  have  already  observed  (pp.  338-340),  that  infinitives  and  some 
other  forms  of  verbs,  when  joined  to  conjunctive  pronouns,  drop  their 
last  vowel,  and  that  the  consonant  of  conjunctive  pronouns  (gli  only 
excepted)  must  be  doubled  when  joined  to  those  forms  of  verbs, 
which  either  consist  of  one  syllable,  or  end  with  an  accented  vowel. 


When  the  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  in  the  gerund,  in 
the  participle,  or  in  the  imperative  mood,*  the  con- 
junctive pronouns  are  always  to  be  put  after  the  verb  ; 
as, 


ricomincio  a  fdrGL.1 
gior  piaceri, 

trovdndosi  egli  una  volta  a 

Parigi, 
son  venula  a  ristordrTi   dP 

ddnni  avuti, 


mag-     she  began  to  do  him  again  the 
greatest  kindnesses  ; 

he  finding  himself  once  in 
Paris ; 

I  am  come  to  make  thee  some 
amends  for  the  evils  sus- 
tained ; 


*    Notwithstanding  this  rule   the    following  examples   may  be   cited  from   the 
classics,  in  which  the  conjunctive  pronoun  is  put  bfjorc  the  imperative-.       v 


Famuli  ritornare  alia  prigidne,  e  quivi 
quanio  ti  place  MI  fa  ujjliggere.  (Bocc. 
g.  2.  n.  6.) 

jQuddfe  v6i  e  Siro  a  Irovar  Callimaco, 
e  GLI  dite  die  la  cdsa  &  proccdiua  bcne. 
(Much.  Coinm.) 

FA  in  a  liii:  "  Con  ]>iangere  e  con  Hitto, 
—  Spirito  malcdcltOj  TI  riindni."  (Dunt. 
Inf.  8.  ) 


Cause  me  to  be  carried  back  to  my 
pri-on,  and  there  cause  me  to  be  tor- 
mcnted  as  much  as  thou  pleascst. 

Co  you  and  Syrus  to  find  Callimnchus, 
and  tell  him  that  the  affair  went  on 
well. 

And  T  said  to  him  :  "  In  mourning  and 
ia  woe,  cursed  spirit,  do  thou  remain." 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRON017NS.          489 

ricordandoTi  della  tua  pre-     bringing  to  thy  mind  thy  past 
Urita  vita,  life ; 

muovaTi  questo  solo  mio  dtto,    let  this  act  of  mine  alone  move 

thee  ; 

salutatoio,  il  domando  se  egli     after  he  had  saluted  him,  he 
si  scntisse  nitrite,  asked     him,     whether    any 

thing  ailed  him ; 

sidleMi  ludn  amico,  be  my  good  friend ; 

fdttdLA.  pi'tndere,  having  caused  her  to  be  taken. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

When  the  adverb  non, '  no,'  or '  not ' ;  precedes  the  verb  in  the  im- 
perative, the  conjunctive  pronouns  must  be  put  before  the  verb  ;  as, 

non  si  renda  ridicola,  do  not  make  yourself  ridiculous ; 

non  LE  date  rttta,  do  not  mind  her. 

Conjunctive  pronouns  are  sometimes  put  before,  even  when  the 
verb  is  in  the  infinitive  and  in  the  gerund,  preceded  by  the  adverb 
non  ;  as, 

mi  avea  prome'sso  di  non  s*  al-    she  had   promised  me,  that  she 

lontandre,  would  not  depart ; 

non  MI  vedtndo  giungere,  not  seeing  me  arrive. 


The  conjunctive  pronoun  76ro,  c  to  them,'  or  'them  '5 
is  always  to  be  put  after  the  verb ;  as, 

veduti  LORO  in  slpoveracon-    having  seen  them  in  so  mis- 

dizione,                                        erable  a  condition  ; 
mando  LORO  dicendo  . . ,  .  ,        sent  to  them,  saying 

When  loro  is  in  the  objective,  the  pronouns  gli  or  Li,  for  the  mascu- 
line gender,  and  le  for  the  fern inine,  sometimes  take  its  place,  but  then 
they  follow  the  general  rule  ;  as, 

faccndoGi.1   [or,  facendo    LORO  causing   them    [her   children']    to 
(i  suoi  figli)]  da  buoni  mae-         be  instructed  by  good  masters; 
slri  insegndre, 

GLI  fece    [or,  fece  LORO]  irn-  she    made    them    learn   all   good 
pard.re  tutte  le  buone  drti,  arts. 


When  more  than  one  conjunctive  pronoun  occur  with 


490  SYNTAX. 

the  same  verb,  they  follow  the  same  rules,  as  when  they 
occur  with  it  singly  ;  as, 

cd'    compagni    suoi     SEGLI  he    ate   them   with    his   com- 

mangib,  panions ; 

deliberdrono    di    rfdroLiELA  they  determined  to  give  her  to 

per  mogiie,  him  as  his  wife. 

Conjunctive  pronouns  occurring  in  the  same  sentence 
with  two  verbs,  one  of  which  is  in  the  infinitive,  are 
generally  put  before  the  other  verb.;  as, 

to  TI  voglio  dire,  I  wish  to  tell  thee ; 

non  GLIELO  voliva  dire,  she  would  not  tell  it  to  him. 


When  the  other  verb  is  in  the  imperative,  for  then  they  must  be  pot 
after  it;  as, 

faTTi  sentire,  make  thyself  heard ; 

ZdsciaMiTi  vedere,  let  me  look  at  thee. 


When  conjunctive  pronouns  occur  with  the  indefinite 
pronoun  si,  this  is  always  put  after,  and  sometimes 
joined  to  them  ;  as, 

il  bel  che  mi  si  mostra,  the  good  which  shows  itself  to 

me  ; 
qudnte  cose  gli  si  promittono,    how  many  things  they  promise 

to  him; 
attribuiscecisi  a  ndstrofdllo,     it  is  attributed  to  our  fault. 

Conjunctive  pronouns  occurring  with  the  adverb  ecco  ; 
and  the  pronoun  lo  occurring  with  the  adverh  non  ; 
are  put  after  them  ;  and,  as  it  has  been  already  stated 
at  p.  116,  form  with  them  one  single  word.}  as, 

&COMI,  here  I  am  ; 

noL  niego,  I  do  not  deny  it. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


491 


The  particles  ne,  t  of  him,' '  of  her,'  {  of  it ' ;  'of  them'; 
and  ci,  '  here,  hither  '  ;  vi,  ;  there,  thither  '  ;  follow  the 
same  rules  as  the  conjunctive  pronouns.  They  may  be 
put  either  before  or  after  the  verb,  except  when  the  verb 
is  in  the  infinitive,  in  the  gerund,  in  the  participle,  and 
in  the  imperative ;  in  which  cases  they  are  always  put 
after  it ;  as, 

it  pleases  me  to  speak  of  it ; 
seeing  no  one  of  them  ; 
having  taken  out  her  beautiful 
robe  ; 

i  fondamenti  il   re     King  Tarquin  laid  the  founda- 
tions of  it ; 

I  am  disposed  to  go  there  ; 
the     cook     having     employed 
there  [or  in  it]  all  his  art ; 


mi  place 

niuno  veggendo N  E, 

la  sua  bella  rqba, 


Tarquinio, 
son  disposto  ad  anddrvi, 
il  cudco  postovi  tiitta  V  Me, 


fdteci  diplngere  la  Cortes'ia, 


cause  Liberality  to  be  painted 
there. 


If  the  particles  ci,  vi,  occur  with  one  of  the  conjunc- 
tive pronouns  mi,  ti,  ci,  vi,  usage  strictly  requires  that 
the  particles .  should  be  placed  after  the  pronouns;  but 
they  are  sometimes  put  before  them,  particularly  if  eu- 
phony demands  it;  as, 

costoro  mi  ci  fanno  entrdre 


io  ti  ci  vtdo  simpre, 


they  make  me  enter  there  [or 

into  it] ; 
I  see  you  here  always: 


Vi  ti  porro  iina  tavoluccia,         I  shall  place  for  thee  there  a 

small  table ; 

diro  che  vi  ci  ablia  fdtta  ve-     I  will  say  that  he  has  caused 
nlre  per  dcndri,  you  to  come  here  for  money. 

When  the  particles  ci,vi,  o-ccur  with  the  pronouns,  Io, 
la,  li,  gli:  le,  they  are  generally  put  before  the  pronouns, 
and,  as  has  been  mentioned  at  p.  160,  form  with  them 
a  single  ivord  ;  but  they  may  be  placed  also  after  them, 
separately  ;  as, 

ingtgnati  di  rilentrcEio,  contrive  to  keep  him  there ; 


492 


SYNTAX. 


ringrazidndo  Iddio  che  con- 
ddtto  VEL'  aieva, 


thanking  God  that  he  had  con- 
ducted him  there : 


sua  camera  il  mise,  e    she  put  him  in  her  room,  and 
dentro  IL  vi  serrb,  there  she  locked  him  in. 


EXAMPLES. 


V6i   MI    POTETE  TORRE  QUANTO 

TEN  GO,  e  dondrmi,  siccume  vostro 
uomo,  a  chi  vi  pidce.     (Bocc.  g. 

3.  n.  9.) 

Assdi  volte,  la  nittey  PIETOSA- 

B1ENTE    IL,    CHIAMAVA.       (BOCC.  g. 

4.  n.  5.) 

Ma  guarddte  che  voi  non   ci 

FACESTE     LA     BEFFA.       (BOCC.     g. 

8.  n.  1.) 

S'  elle  m  pidcciono,  w  LE  vi 
DONERO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  9.) 

J3  udendo  che  egli  av6a  morti 
due  confessori,  disse  fra  se  me- 
desimo  :  "  ME  KON  UCCIDERAI 
TU."  (Pass.) 

Tdnto  posso  disporre  di  lui, 
che  io  uso  DIRE,  CHE  certo  E' 
SIA  UN  ALTRO  ME.  (Firenz. ) 

Ma,  dove  voi  voUste,  per  av- 
ventura.  voi  POTRESTE  voi  E  ME 
COKSOLARE.  (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  9  ) 

OFFESI  ME  PER  NON  OFFENDER 
Ltfi.  (Petr.) 

COSI  NE  FU,  ED  A  LEI  ED  A 
ME,  PER  PENA  DATO,  A  LEI  DI 
FUGGIRMI  DAVANTI,  ED  A  ME, 

che  gid  cotdnto  /'  amai,  DI   SE- 
GUITARLA.    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  8.) 

I'o  so  che  EGLI  vi  AHA.  (Bocc. 
g.S.n.7) 

DlEDEGLI  LA  stTA  BENEDIZI- 
6NE.  (EOCC.  g.  I.  n.  1.) 

CORRERANNOCI  ALLE  CASE,  E 
L*  AVERE  CI  RUBERANNO.  (BOCC. 

g.  1.  n.  1.) 


You  can  take  away  from  me 
all  I  have,  and  give  me,  like  one 
of  your  men,  to  whomsoever  it 
pleases  you. 

A  great  many  times,  during  the 
night,  did  she  call  him  with  a 
piteous  voice. 

But  beware  putting  a  trick  upon 


If  you  like  them,  I  will  give 
them  to  you. 

And  hearing  that  he  had  mur- 
dered two  confessors,  he  said  to 
himself:  "  Thou  shall  not  murder 
me" 

I  can  so  much  depend  on  him, 
that  I  am  wont  to  say,  that  he 
is  certainly  another  self. 

But,  if  you  wishe<),  you  might 
perhaps  console  both  yourself  and 
me. 

I  injured  myself  not  to  injure 
him. 

Thus  it  was,  to  both  her  and 
me,  given  as  a  punishment,  to  her 
to  flee  before  me,  and  to  me,  who 
loved  her  so  much,  to  pursue  her. 

1  know  that  he  loves  you. 
He  gave  him  his  benediction. 

They  will  run  to  our  houses,  and 
rob  us  of  our  property. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


493 


IL     MANDARLO     FUOR    DI     CASA 

nostra,  cwsl  infermoy  NE  SAREB- 

BE    GRAN    BIASIMO.       (BOCC.    g.  1. 

n.  1.) 

AJUTARONMI  elle  BENE.    (Bocc. 
g.  4.  Proem.) 

ETTI  igli  da  stamdne  USCITO 

DI    MENTE  ?       (BOCC.  g.  7.  D.  8.) 

MOSTROCCI  UN'  OMBRA  doll'  un 
cdnto  sola.    (Dant.  Inf.  12.) 

RlCQMINCIO    A    FARGLI    I  MAG- 
GIOR     PIACERI.       (BOCC.     g.     8.    D. 

10.) 

TROVANDOSI  EGLI  TJNA  VOLTA 
A  PARIGI.     (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  7.) 

10  SON    VENTJTA  A    RISTORARTI 

DE'   DANNi,  U  qudli   tu  hdi  giti 
AM^Tiper  me.    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 

Federigo,  RICORDANDOTI  DEL- 
LA  TIJA  PRETERITA  VITA.     (BOCC. 

g.  5.  n.  9.) 

MUOVATI  alqudnto  QUESTO  SO- 
LO MIO  ATTO.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

SALUTATOLO,  IL  DOMANDO  SE 
SI  SENTISSE  NIENTE.    (BOCC.) 

SIATEMI,  adunque,  sdmpre  BUON 
AMICO.     (Gang,  lett.) 

FATTALA  prestamente    PREN- 
DERE.     (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 

NON  SI    RENDA    RIDlcOLA    CWCd 

le  usdnze  del   mondo.     (Gang, 
lett.) 

NON    LE    DATE    RETTA,   U&  plU 

lafrequentdte.    (Vanz.) 

NON     MI     VEDENDO     GltJNGERE 

in  t6mpo,  se  ne  ritornd,  benchb 

MI  dVtsse  PROMESSO  DI  NON  s'  AL- 
L.ONTANARE   flUO    ttl    miO    CLTr'lVO. 

(Vanz.) 

42 


To  send  him  out  of  our  house, 
so  sick  as  he  is,  would  be  in  us 
a  great  fault. 

They  assisted  me  well. 

Has  it,  since  this  morning,  es- 
caped thy  mind  ? 

He  showed  us  a  spirit  by  itself 
apart. 

She  began  to  do  him  again  the 
greatest  kindnesses. 

He  finding  himself  once  in 
Paris. 

I  am  come  to  make  thee  some 
amends  for  the  evils  thou  hast 
sustained  on  my  account. 

Frederic,  bringing  to  thy  mind 
thy  past  life. 

Let  this  act  of  mine  alone  move 
thee  at  least. 

After  he  had  saluted  him,  he 
asked  him,  whether  any  thing 
ailed  him. 

Be,  then,  always  my  good 
friend. 

Having  caused  her  immediately 
to  be  taken. 

Do  not  make  yourself  ridicu- 
lous respecting  the  customs  of  the 
world. 

Do  not  mind  her,  nor  visit  her 
any  longer. 

Not  seeing  me  arrive  in  time, 
she  went  back,  although  she  had 
promised  me,  that  she  would  not 
depart  before  my  arrival. 


494 


SYNTAX. 


VEDUTI  LORD  IN  si  POVERA 
CONDIZIONE  ridotti.  (Pecor.) 

E  MANDO    LORD    DICENDO    .... 

(Bott.  Stor.  Amer.) 

/  quali  [i  suoi  figli]  facevano 
stupire  chi  GLI  conoscdva,  e  la 
mddre  FACENDOGLI  DA  BUONI 

MAESTRI     INSEGXARE,    GLI    FECE 
IMPARARE  TtJTTE  LE  BUONE  ARTI. 

(Pecor.  g.  10.  n.  1.) 

Comprdti    i    capponi   insidme 

CO*    COMPIGNI   SUOI     SEGLI    MAN- 

GIO.     (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  3.) 
DELIBERARONO   DI   DARGLIE- 

LA     PER     MOGLIE.         (BOCC.     g.     2. 

n.  8.) 

Mendi  quello  che  10  TI  VOGLIO 
DIRE.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

La    ddnna    rispose,   che    NON 

GL.IELO     VOLEVA     DIRE.        (BOCC. 

g.  7.  n.  5.) 

Grtda  forte,  FATTI  ben  SENTIRE. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  6.) 

LASCIAMITI  VEDERE  a  mio 
senno.  (Bocc.) 

IL    BEN,  CHE  MI  SI    MOSTRA   171- 

torno.    (Petr.  c.  7.) 

QUANTE  COSE    GLI  SI    PROMET- 

TONO   tiitto   Jl  dl.     (Bocc.  g.  3. 
n.  1.) 

ATTRIBUfsCESI  A  NO3TRO    FAL- 

LO.    (Cavalc.) 

Lo  s^coldre^accostdtosi  alV  u- 
scio,  disse:  *  ECCOMI  qu\t  Madon- 
na.' (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

In  drmi  egli  6ra  prode,  —  NOL 
NIEGO  io9  no.  (Alf.  Saul.  2.  1.) 

Egli    MI    PIACE    DI    PARLARNE. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

NltJNO    VEGGiNDONE.      (BOCC. 

g.  2.  n.  2.) 


Having  seen  them  reduced  to 
so  miserable  a  condition. 

And  sent  to  them,  saying  .... 

Who  [her  children]  astonished 
all  those,  who  knew  them  ;  and 
their  mother,  causing  them  to  be 
instructed  by  good  masters,  made 
them  learn  all  good  arts. 

Having  bought  the  capons,  he 
ate  them  with  his  companions.  » 


They  determined  to  give  her  to 
him  as  his  wife. 


Listen  to  what  I  wish   to  tell 
thee. 

The  lady  replied,  that  she  would 
not  tell  it  to  him. 


Speak  loud,  make  thyself  heard. 

Let  me  look  at  thee  at  my  plea- 
sure. 

The  good,  which  shows  itself 
about  me. 

How  many  things  they  promise 
to  him  all  day. 

It  is  attributed  to  our  fault. 


The    scholar,    coming    to    the 
door,  said  :  (  Here  1  am,  Madam." 

He  was  brave  in  arms,  I  do  not 
deny  it,  no. 

It  pleases  me  to  speak  of  it. 
Seeing  no  one  of  them. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


495 


TRATTANE  celatamente  LA  stf  A 

BELLA    ROBA.       (BoCC.  g.  8,  U.  9.) 

GETTONNE  i  FONDAMENTI  IL 
RE  TARQuimo.  (Dav.  Stor.  1.  3.) 

Fo  SON  del  tutto  Dfsposxo  AD 

ANDARVI.       (BOCC.  g.  1.  H.  2.) 

IL  cuoco^  presolo,  e  POSTOVI 
xtrxTA  L'  ARTE  ....  (Bocc.  g. 
4.  n.  5.) 

FATECI  DIPINGERE  LA  CORTE- 

SIA.     (Bocc.  g.  1.  n.  8.) 

COSTORO  MI  CI  FANNO  ENTRARE 

per  inganndrmi.      (Bocc.   g.   2. 
n.  5.) 

r  * 

lO  TI  CI  VEDO  SEMPRE.       (NOV. 

Ant.  67.) 

JPO  VI  TI  PORRO  T^NA  TAVOLtJC- 

CIA.     (Bocc.  g.  8.) 

VO  DIRO  CHE  VI  CI  ABBIA  FAT- 
TA  VENIRE  PER  DENARI.  (BOCC. 

g.  3.  n.  6.) 

INGEGNATI  DI  RITENERCELO. 
(Bocc.  n.  5.) 

RlNGRAZIANDO  IDD1O  CHE  CON- 
DOTTO  VEL*  AVEVA.  (BOCC.  g. 

2.  n.  4.) 

NELLA   stfA  CAMERA  IL  MISE, 

E  DENTRO    IL  VI  SERRO.       (BOCC.) 


Having  taken  out  secretly  her 
beautiful  robe. 

King  Tarquin  laid  the  founda- 
tions of  it. 

I  am  entirely  disposed  to  go 
there. 

The  cook  having  taken  it,  and 
having  employed  in  it  all  his  art, 

Cause  Liberality  to  be  painted 
there. 

They  make  me  enter  into  it  [the 
chest]  in  order  to  play  Some  trick 
upon  me. 

I  see  thee  here  always. 

I  shall  place  for  thee  there  a 
small  table. 

I  will  say  that  he  has  caused 
you  to  come  here  for  money. 


Contrive  to  keep  him  there. 


Thanking  God  that  he  had  con- 
ducted him  there. 


She  put  him  in  her  room,  and 
there  she  locked  him  in. 


POSSESSIVE      PRONOUNS. 

Possessive  pronouns  rnay  be  placed  either  before  or 
after  the  nouns  expressing  the  things  possessed  ;  as, 

la  MIA  persdna,  i  MIEI  mdli,       my  person,  my  misfortunes  ; 
le    membra   MIE,  il    sdngue    my  limbs,  toy  blood  ;     </^ 


gli  6cM  suoi,  Vordine  L6no,    her  eyes,  their  management. 


496  SYNTAX. 

In  addressing  a  person,  however,  and  in  exclamations, 
possessive  pronouns  are  to  be  put  after  the  nouns  ;  as, 

padre  uioyJigUuM  MIO  !  my  father,  my  son  ! 

Italia  MIA,  Signdr  MIO  !  my  Italy,  my  Lord  ! 

Possessive  pronouns  are  always  to  be  repeated  before 
nouns  of  different  gender  and  number  ;  as, 

la  LOR  virtu,  i  LOR  costumi,    their  virtue,  their  customs,  and 
e  It  LORO  manie'rc,  their  manners. 

But  if  the  nouns  are  of  the  same  gender  and  number, 
they  may  be  used  only  once,  after  the  said  nouns  ;  as, 

It  sirocchie  e  It  mogli  LORO,       their  sisters  and  their  wives. 

We  have  already  observed  (p.  132),  that  possessive 
onouns  may  be  expressed  in  Italian,  by  the  conjunc- 
tive pronouns  of  that  person  to  which  the  possessor  be- 
longs. This  is  always  the  case  when  they  are  accom- 
panied by  a  noun  expressing  the  limbs  of  the  body  or 
denoting  a  part  of  one's  dress  ;  as, 

st   MI   caccidsser  gli  OCCHI     if   they   should    tear  out   my 

[for,  se  cacciasser  i  MIEI        eyes ; 

OCCHI], 
non  \ijiaccate  il  COLLO .[for,     do  not  break  your  neck. 

non     fiaccate    il    VOSTRO 

COLLO], 

The  English  possessive  pronouns  his,  her,  their,  when  they  refer  to 
one's  own  limbs  or  parts  of  dress,  are  expressed  in  Italian  by  the  con- 
junctive pronoun  si ;  but  when  they  refer  to  another  person's  limbs 
or  parts  of  dress,  they  are  expressed  by  the  conjunctive  pronouns  gli, 
le,  lorOj  according1  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  possessor ;  as, 

si  levd  r  anello  di  DITO  [for,  he    took   off   the   ring    from    his 

levo  P  anello  del  suo  DITO],  [own]  finger]  ; 

risolve   di    levdrzi    le    SCARPE  he  resolved  to  take  off  his  [own] 

[for,  di  levare  le  SUE  SCAR-  shoes  : 
PE], 

GLI  ruppe  tutto  il  viso   [for,    he  disfigured  all  his  [another  per" 
ruppe  tutto  il  suo  (or,  il  di        son's]  face ; 
lui)  vfso], 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


497 


straccidtaLE    la  CTJFFIA    [for, 
stracciata  la  stJA  (or,  la  di  Ui) 


having    torn    her    [another  per- 
son's]  headdress. 


Often  the  personal  pronouns  accompanying  a  noun 
expressing  the  limbs  of  the  body,  or  denoting  the  parts 
of  one's  dress,  are  entirely  suppressed  when  they  relate 
to  the  principal  subject  of  the  proposition  ;  as, 

c6rsi  a  cercdrmi  il  l&to  cdtta    I  laid  immediately  my  hand  on 
mdno  [for,  colla  MIA  ma-        my  side  ; 
no], 

asciug&ndosi  gli  occhi  col  bel    drying  her  eyes  with  her  beau- 
ve/o,  [for,  col  stfo  bel  v£-        tiful  veil, 
lo], 


EXAMPLES. 


E  siccome  LA  MIA  PERSONA 
cresce"va,  cosl  le  MIE  belldzze,  de1' 
MIEI  MALI  special  cagione,  multi- 
plicdvano.  (Bocc.  Fiam.) 

Non  son  rimdse  ac6rbe  ne  ma- 
ture —  LE  MEMBRA  MIE  di  la,  ma 
son  qui  me'co  —  COL  SANGUE  suo, 
e  con  le  stfE  giunture.  (Dant. 
Purg.  26.) 

Ed  tra.no  GLI  OCCHI  suoi  di 
qu6l  color  e  che  lo  grifone.  (Buti. 
com.  Inf.  4.) 

S&nza  L'  ORDINE  ^LORO  rdde 
v6He  riisce  alcuna  NOSTRA  opera 
a  Iaud6vol  fine.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

Gdddo  mi  si  gittd  dist&so  d' 
piedi,  —  Dic6ndo  :  "  PADRE  MIO, 
che  non  m'  aiuti  ?  J>  (Dant.  Inf. 
33.) 

O  FIGLIUOL  MIO  !  non  ti  dis- 
pidccia, —  Se  Erunitio  Luting  un 
poco  teco  —  Ritorna  indietro. 
(Dant.  Inf.  15.) 

42* 


And  as  [my  person  or]  I  grew 
up,  my  beauty,  the  first  cause  of 
all  my  misfortunes,  increased. 

I  have  not  left  yonder  my  limbs, 
either  crude  or  in  mature  age  ;  but 
they  bear  me  here,  fed  with  blood 
and  sinew-strung. 


And  his    [Caesar's]    eyes   were 
as  black  as  those  of  a  raven. 


Without  their  management  it 
seldom  happens  that  any  under- 
taking of  ours  succeeds. 

Gaddo  stretched  himself  at  my 
feet,  saying  :  "  My  father,  why 
dost  thou  not  assist  me  ?  " 


O  my  son  !  do  not  disdain  that 
Brunetto  Latini  should  turn  back 
a  little,  and  go  with  you. 


498 


SYNTAX. 


ITALIA  MIA,  benche  il  parldr 
sia  inddrno  —  Alle  pidghe  mor- 
tdli,  —  Che  nel  bel  corpo  tuo  si 
spesse  veggio.  (Petr.) 

O  SIGNOR  MIO  !  qudndo  sard 
w  liito  —  A  veder  la^  vendetta, 
che,  nascosa,  —  Fa  dolce  V  ira 
tua  nel  tuo  segreto  ?  (Dant.  Purg. 
20.) 

Rigudrda  tra  tutti  i  tuoi  no- 
bill  uomini,  ed  esdmina  LA  LOR 

VIRTU,  I  LOR  COSTUMI,  E  LE  LORO 
MANIERE.  (BOCC.  g.  4.  D.  1.) 

Jlppresso    costoro^  LE    SIROC- 

CHIE     E  LE  MOGLI    LORO  VenHCTO. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

O    SE    CSSi    MI    CACCIASSER    GLI 

OCCHI  o  MI  traessero  i  DENTI,  o 
mozzdsserMi  le  MANI,  a  che  sare* 
io  ?  (Bocc,  g.  9.  n.  1.) 

Egli  e  gran  peccdto  che  voi 
NON  vi  FIACC!TE  IL  COLLO. 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  6.) 

E  COS\    SI    LEVO    L'  ANELLO    DI 

DITO,  e  diello  al  giudice.  (Pecor.) 

Gudrda  se  dltri  lo  scorge,  ed 
alfine  si  RISOLVE  DI  LEVARSI  LE 
SCARPE.  (Lod.  Nov.) 

E  cost  diccndo  con  le  pugna 

TtJTTO  IL  V1SO  GLI  RtJPPE.    (BoCC. 

g.  9.  n.  8.) 

E    STRACCIATAL.E     LA     CUFFIA, 

diceva.     (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  8.) 

Di  che  io  sentiva  si  fdttc  dolo- 
re,  che,  desto,  COLLA  MANO  CORSI 
subitamente  A  CERCA.RMI  IL  LA- 
TO.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  6.) 

E  fdccia  forza   al     Cielo,  — 

ASCIUGANDOSI      GLI      OCCHI      COL 

BEL  V£LO.    (Petr.  c.  11.) 


My  Italy,  although  words  will 
have  no  power  to  heal  the  mortal 
wounds  which  I  see,  in  so  great 
a  number,  in  your  beautiful  body. 

O  my  Lord !  when  shall  I  re- 
joice to  see  the  vengeance,  which 
thy  wrath,  well  pleased,  broods  in 
secret  silence  ? 


Look  among  all  your  noblemen, 
and  examine  their  virtue,  their 
customs,  and  their  manners. 


After  these,  came   their  sisters 
arid  their  wives. 


If  they  should  tear  out  my 
eyes,  or  draw  out  my  teeth,  or 
lop  off  my  hands,  to  what  should 
I  be  reduced  ? 

It  is  a  great  pity  you  do  not 
break  your  neck. 

And  thus  he  took  off  the  ring 
from  his  finger,  and  gave  it  to  the 
judge. 

He  looked  around  lest  he  should 
be  seen,  and  at  last  he  resolved  to 
take  off  his  shoes. 

And  thus  saying  he  disfigured 
all  his  face  with  blows. 


And  having  torn  her  headdress, 
he  said. 

Which  gave  me  such  a  pain, 
that,  having  awaked,  1  laid  imme- 
diately my  hand  on  my  side. 

And  should  compel  Heaven  [to 
have  pity  upon  me],  drying  her 
eyes  with  her  beautiful  veil. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS.          499 


INDEFINITE      PRONOUNS. 

The  indefinite  pronouns,  stesso,  medesimo,  c  same  ' ; 
and  sometimes  tutto,  *  all,'  '  every';  are  put  either  be- 
fore  or  after  the  noun ;  as, 

quel  dl  STESSO  ;  in  quel  ME-    that  same  day  ;  in  that  same 

DESIMO  dbito,  dress ; 

TtiTTE  le  notti ;  le  qudli  cose    every  night ;  all  which  things. 

T1JTTE, 

Tutto,  followed  by  a  numeral  adjective,  takes  the 
particle  e  after  it ;  as, 

tutti  E  trt,  all  three. 

The  indefinite  pronouns  veruno,  nessuno  or  nissuno, 
neuno  or  niuno,  nullo,  i  no  one,'  *  nobody  ' ;  and  nulla, 
niente,  '  nothing  ' ;  as  we  have  already  mentioned  at 
p.  147,  may  have  also  the  signification  of  c  any  one,' 
c  anybody' ;  and  'some  or  any  thing';  according  to 
their  respective  position  in  the  sentence. 

They  have  the  first  signification, —  (of  '  no  one,'  *  no- 
body ' ;  and  c  nothing  '),  when  they  are  placed  before 
the  verb,  or  when  they  are  placed  after  a  verb  preceded 
by  the  adverb  non  ;  as, 

per  VERUN  modo  poteva,  she  could  do  it  in  no  manner  ; 

NON/a  cdldo  VERTJNO,  it  is  not  at  all  warm : 

NESSUN  si  dolse  di  servitii,  no   one  complained   of   servi- 
tude ; 

NON  si  pud  fare  NISSUNA  co-  no-thing  can  be  done  : 

sa, 

NEUNO  ebbe  gli  Dei  sifavore-  no  one  had  the  Gods  so  favora- 

voli,  ble ; 

NON  ve  n'  e  NI^NO  si  cattivo,    there  is  no  one  so  had  : 
N^LLO  martirio  sarebbe  do-    no  torment  were  a  well-pro- 
lor  compito,  portioned  pain  ; 


500  SYNTAX. 

NON  gli  mdnca  N#  LLA,  he  wants  nothing  i 

di  NTJLLA  fti  dispesi,  let  him  despair  of  nothing ; 

NON  nefard  NTJLLA,  I  will  do  nothing  about  it : 

NIENTE  dico  del  tuo  sldto,          I  say  nothing  about  thy  con- 
dition ; 

NON  gli  parribbe  NIENTE,          it  would  seem  to  him  nothing. 

But  when  they  are  placed  after  a  verb  not  preceded 
by  the  adverb  non,  and  when  the  phrase  in  which  they 
occur  implies  a  question,  or  expresses  a  doubt,  the 
abovernentioned  pronouns  have  the  last  signification,  — 
(of  *any  one,'  'anybody';  and  'some  or  any  thing ');* 
as, 

senzafdre  a  voi  VERTJN  pro,       without    doing    any   good    to 

yourself; 

se  VERUNO  vede  la  pena  mia,    whether  any  one  observes  my 

sorrow  ; 
qudndo  s'  accdmpano  in  NES-     when    they    encamp    in    any 

STJNO  Iu6go,  place  ; 

trovossi  NITJNO  che  contradi-    was  there  found  any  one  who 

dsse  alia  podestdde  ?  opposed  public  power  ? 

le  dirdi  se  vuol  NTJLLA,  thou  wilt  ask  her,  whether  she 

wants  any  thing ; 

*  There  are  instances,  however,  in  good  writers,  which  seem  in  contradiction 
with  these  rules ;  as  may  be  seen  by  the  following  examples  : 

E  qudndo  NESSU'NO  «'  era  preso,  sti-         And  when  any  one  was  taken,  he  was 
bito  era  impiccdto   per  la  gola.    (Stor.      directly  hung  by  the  neck. 
Pistol.) 

Che  NON  rimarrebbe  a  sostenere  pena  That  there  would  not  remain  in  pur- 
NESSU'NA  nel  purgattirio  per  gli  peccdti.  gatory  any  punishment  to  suffer  for  sins. 
(Pass.) 

NON  c'  i  ragione  NESSU'NA  per  la  There  is  no  [or  not  any]  reason  why  it 
quale  6'  debba  entrdre  in  un  tal  determi-  should  enter  in  such  a  determinate  de- 
ndto  grddo  di  velodtd.  (Gal.  Sist.)  gree  of  velocity. 

Mai  NON  menefardpid  NID'NA.  (Bocc.  He  will  never  do  me  an- [or,  any] 

g.  8.  n.  3.)  other  [thing  like  this.] 

C6me  ilia  vide  un  giovlnetto  di  fdrma  As  soon  as  she  sees  a  youth  somewhat 

NIE'NTE  riguardevolc,  tlla  s' accende  del-  handsome,  she  falls  in  love  with  his 

le  site  bellezze.  (Fir.  Asin.  40.)  beauty  : 

'In  whieh  the  pronouns  nessuno,  nessuna,  niitna  are  used  instead  of  alcuno,  alcii- 
na,  '  any,'  '  any  person,'  *  any  thing  ' ;  and  niente  instead  of  un  p6co,  alqudnto,  '  a 
little,' '  somewhat.' 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS. 


503 


il    domando    se    si    seniisse    he  asked  him  whether  he  felt 
NIENTE,  any  thing. 


EXAMPLES. 


Creduto    abbidmo     che    costei  We  supposed,  that  she  had  been 

nella  cdsa>  che  mi  fu  Q/UEL  DI  burnt  that  same  day  along  with 

STESSO   drsaj   ardesse.    (Bocc.  g.  the  house. 
5.  n.  5.) 


Guarddndo  tra  molte,  che  qm- 
vi  n'  erano  IN  QUEL  MEDESIMO 
ABITO.  (Bocc.  Lab.) 

E  'I  rossignuol  —  TUTTE  LE 
NOTTI  si  lamenta  e  pidnge. 
(Petr.) 

LE  QUALI  COSE  TUTTE   SOHO  da 

esser  diligentemente  considerate. 
(Cresc.  12.  2.) 

Fratelli  miei}  che  anddte  voi 
cercdndo,  a  quest'  6ra}  TUTTI  E 
TRE  ?  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  8.) 

Qudndo  venne  il  tempo,  quella 
misera  PER  VERUN  MODO  POTE- 
VA.  (Vit.  SS.  PP.  2.  21.) 

Anzi  NON  FA  egli  CALDO  VE- 
RTJNO.  (Bocc,  g.  5.  n.  4.) 

NESSUN  DI  SERVITU  giammdi 
si  DOLSE,  —  Ne  di  morte,  quant' 
w  dilibertdte.  (Petr.  Tr.Mort.  1.) 

NON  SI  PUO  COSA  NISSUNA  FARE 

a  lor  modo.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.) 

NETJNO  EBBE  mdi  GLI  DEI  si 
FAVOREVOLI,  che  nel  futiiro  gli 
potdsse  obbligdre.  (Bocc.  Fiam, 
5.  84.) 

EgU  NON  VE  N'  E  NIUNO  SI  CAT- 

Tfvo,  che  non  viparesse  uno  im- 
peratore.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

NTJLLO  MARTIRIO,  fuorche  la 
tua  rdbbia,  —  SAREBBE  al  tuo 


furor   DOLOR   COMPITO. 
Inf.  14.) 


(Dant. 


Looking  among  so  many  wo- 
man, who  were  there,  clad  in  that 
same  dress. 

And  the  nightingale  every  night 
laments  and  weeps. 

All  which  things  ought  to  be 
carefully  considered. 

Brothers,  what  are  you  looking 
for,  all  three,  at  such  an  hour  ? 


When  the  time  arrived,  that  un- 
fortunate one  could  not  do  it  in 
any  manner. 

Nay  it  is  not  at  all  warm. 

No  one  ever  complained  of 
servitude  or  death,  as  much  as  I 
do  of  liberty. 

Nothing  can  be  done  in  their 
manner. 

No  one  even  had  the  Gods  so 
favorabla  as  to  oblige  them  to 
favor  him  in  future. 

There  is  no  one  so  bad,  that 
you  would  not  take  him  for  an 
emperor. 

No  torment,  save  thy  rage,  were 
to  thy  fury  a  well-proportioned 
pain. 


502 


SYNTAX. 


O'nde  felice  dicono  tsser  colm, 

Che     NON      GLI      MANCA      NtJLLA. 

(Fr.  Giord.  20.) 

Chi  in  alcuna  cosa  pud  spe- 
rdre,  DI  NTJXLA  si  DISPERI. 
(Bocc.  Fiam.  5.  85.) 

Altriminti  mdi  NON  NE  FARO 

NtJLLA.       (BOCC.  g.  1.  n.  2.) 

DEL  Ttfo  presente  STATO 
NIENTE  DICO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  6.) 

Se  V  uomo  magndnimo  desse 
ogni  cosa  per  amore,  NON  GLI 

PARREBBE     AVER    DATO    NIENTE. 

(Cavalc.  Speech.  Cr.) 
Fare"ste  ddnno  a  noi,  SENZA 

FARE  A  VOI  PRO  VER1JNO.    (BOCC. 

g.  8.  n.  9.) 

Allora.  gudrdo  intornot  SE  VE- 
RIJNO  —  VKDE  LA  PENA  MIA, 
che  m'  ha  conquiso.  (Rim.  Ant. 
96.) 

QuiNDO  S*  ACCAMPANO  IN  NES- 

ST^NO  LUOGO  per  cagione  di  guer- 
ra.    (Buti.  Purg.  7.) 

TROVOSSI    in  Mildno    NIXJNO, 

CHE     CONTRADIA.SSE      ALLA      PO- 

DESTADE  ?    (Nov,  Ant.  21.) 

TU  LE  DIRAl  S*  6lla  VUOL  Nt7L- 

LA.     (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.) 

IL  DOMANDO  SE  6gU  SI  SENTIS- 
SE  NIENTE.  (BOCC.  g.  9.  n.  S.) 


Whence  they  call  him  happy 
who  wants  nothing. 

Let  him,  who  can  hope  in  any 
thing,  despair  of  nothing. 

Otherwise  I  will  never  do  any 
thing  about  it. 

I  say  nothing  about  thy  pres- 
ent condition. 

If  the  magnanimous  man  should 
give  every  thing  for  love,  it  would 
not  seem  to  him  that  he  had  given 
any  thing. 

You  would  injure  us  without 
doing  any  good  to  yourself. 

Then  I  look  around  me  to  see 
whether  any  one  observes  that 
sorrow,  which  has  subdued  me. 

When  they  encamp  in  any 
place  on  account  of  war. 

Was  there  found  any  one  in 
Milan,  who  opposed  the  public 
power  ? 

Thou  wilt  ask  her  whether  she 
wants  any  thing. 

He  asked  him  whether  he  felt 
any  thing. 


EXERCISE    XXXII. 


They     rob     you. 
rubdre 


Have      pity 
compassione 


di 


the     afflicted. 
afflitto. 


Dost    thou    know    the     daughter    of   Cidippe  ?       May    you 
conoscere3    l      figliuola?  ? 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS.          503 

be    pleased    to    bless    (the)    my    soul.        Let    him       call 
VoUre  benedire  2     dnima1.  Chiamdre 

the    leaders    to    a    council.        What    thou    wishest     that 
duca  —  consiglio.  volere 

1     should     say.        She    said  :     "  How    can     that     be "  ? 
dire.  Dire :     «  potere  questc?     l  "  ? 

He    replied  :     "  Thou    wilt    see    it,    if    thou    comest   im- 
Dire:        "  vedtre  venire       to- 

mediately."        I     am    here    with     one,    who,    I    having    I 
sto"  ,  I  per  avere  \ 

my      name,      wishes      to    be     I    myself   |  in    every   thing 
nome,       volere       —  io  ogni     cosa 

he      does,    or     rather,    that     I     should     be     he.         He 
t  •> 

saw    himself   I  deprived  I    of    the    hope    of     having     her 
ved6re  \    privdre      \  sperdnza 

for     his      wife  - —  (  I    to    have    to    have   I    her    himself), 
I      dov6re        avere        \  6gK> 

if    Ormisda    did    not    marry    her. 
prendere 

The    Turk    then    said :    "  If    I    were    thou,  I   should 
Turco  dire  :     tl  , 

perhaps    infringe    the    law  ;    but    as    I    am    myjself    and 
forse         violdre  legge ;          perche  io 

not    thou,    I    will      never      do      it." 
non1  mai*  fdre*    2." 

I    will     tell     thee     the      truth,     companion,     I    like 
voUre    dire  vero,  sozio, 

her (she    pleases    me)    so    much,    that    I    could    not 

piac6re  ,  potere 

tell    it    to    thee.        He     sent     her    I  word  I    that,    with- 
dire  .         —  Manddre  \  a    dire  \  , 

out    any    more    delay,    she    should     do     what  (that 

indugio,    . —     dovere     fare       — 

which)    he    had    told    her.      I      order     thee    to    go 

—  avere3  dire1         2.      —  Comanddre  —     — 


504  SYNTAX. 

(that    thou    go)    immediately    I    after    I    thy    father.     You 
anddre*  incontanente1  \     per  padre. 

promised    me    1    to    I    make     me     speak     with    (the)    your 
promettere  \    di    \     fare  parldre 

wife.      I     Pray,         leave    me    in    peace.      Why    dost    thou 


donna1.  \  In  grdzia, 


lascidre  pace.        Che 


not      reply,      wicked    man  ?        Art    thou      become      dumb 
rispdndere,    reo        udmo  ?  divenire    tnutolo 

in    hearing    me  ?        Having     raised      (herself      upon  I    her 

—  udire  ?  Lerare  in     \    — 

feet),      she      said  :    "  Brother,     you     are     (the)      welcome." 
pfct         —        dire :    "  Fratdllo,  benvcnuto." 

No,    she    would    not    believe    it,    and    would      turn     me 
,  credere        ,  scaccidre 

out    of    her    house.        He    begged     him    that    he    would 
—       cdsa.  —     Pregdre  —        inse- 

show     him     how    they      did.        "  Then,"    said    he,    "  let 
gndre  —       fare.         "  ,"    dire          ,     «' 

us      do      it."        Say    it     frankly.        (I),    as     for    me,     do 
fare        .'-'        Dire  sicuro.  ,     —  , 

not    remember    (myself  of)    it.       Having    caused    a    purse 
ricorddre  .  -7-  Fare        2    bdrsa3 

to  be  brought   to   her-  (self),  she    put    it  (to   him)    1  into  I 
venire1  ,    —  mettere  \    in   \ 

his    hand,    and    said  :     "  Count     if    they      are     five-hun- 

—  mdno,  dire :    "  Annoverdre         — 

dred."        He      conquered      Scotland,      and     was      crowned 
."  conquistdre        Scozia,  corondre 

king      of     it.         I    did    not      discern     there    any    thing. 
re  .  discfrnerc  cosa. 

There     is      Minos    I    who    I       grins      horribly.         1    will 
stdre  I      c*       |     ringhidre3    orribile.1  fd- 

cause    it    to  be  painted    there.       Where    art    thou,    good 
re  dipingere  .  — ,     buona 

woman  ?        Here      I      am   (behold    me),     what      dost 

donna  ?  —        —      —  ? 


-  USE  AND  POSITION  OF  PRONOUNS.          505 

thou      wish  ?        We    are (behold  us)    ready    to      obey 

2    domanddre1  ?    —      —  pronto        ubbidire 

you. 

My    friend     and     not    the     friend     of    fortune.        My 
amico  fortuna. 

father    told    (it  to)    me,    that    I    should     take    care    (my- 
4       dire3  l,  guarddre 

self)    of    ever     setting-     foot    in    Messenia.        O     Samuel, 
giammdi2  porre*     piede5    3  4. 

once     my    true     father,    dost    thou    command    it  ?       I   As 
vero     pddre,  imponere          ?        \  Per 


mu»ch     as 
qudnto 


thou 


valuest    I    my     affection.      I  In  order 
dbbii.  cdro  I  amor.  Per 


to     die     as    your  daughter,  and    not    as     your      enemy. 

mor'ire        —    '               fi&lif^  nemica. 

He      let      fall     his     hook     at  his     (own)    feot.      Weeping 

—  Lascidre  cascdr  uncino  —        piede.      Pidngere 


he    threw    himself     I    on 
—    gittdre  a 


his    (another    person's)    neck. 
—  —          collo. 


The  unfortunate   ones     wept,    scratched    their  (own)  faces,* 
meschina         —  pidngere,  sgraffidre  —        viso, 

tore        their  (own)    hair.f      In    thinking    of    it    I      shud- 

strappdre  —        capello.  pensdre      —         —      racca- 

> 

der      (myself  all\  over)    and    my    heart    melts    (itself), 
priccidre  tutto  —  cuore  struggere 

He     remained     there     all     the     ni^ht      with      certain 
—         Stare  —  notte  cdrto 

snares    of    his    I    to 
artifizio2 —        J     |  per 

ceived      (himself)    of    it.        There    is     no    one||     of    them 
cdrgere 

so     young,     who    could    not      know      well    how      wowen 
fanciulla,  potere  conoscere2    ben}  femmine 

*  Faces  to  be  put,  i  n  the  Italian,  in  the  singular. 

f  Hair,  in  the  plural.  t  all,  in  the  feminine. 

$  JVo,  for  no  one.  \\  A*o  one,  for  not  any  one,  in  tho/er/miine. 


catch   a      bat.       No§    person    per- 
piglidre     pipistrello.  persona       ac- 


sanctii 

santitw 


506  SYNTAX. 

are.        I    have    not     slept     any     last      night.        Let    no 
—  —    dormzre  passdto    notte. 

one      move     himself,     or    say    a    word,     if    he    does     not 
muovere  ,  fdre  motto, 

wish    to     die.        There     it    seemed     to    me    to    see     no* 
voUre    morire.  l    —    parere15  14      vedtrt19       2 

jtity,     no*     devotion,     no*     good      work,     or     example 
ita?,         4        divozione5,      6        buono1   opera8,      9      es6mpiow 

of     life.          Has    any    one    been    here  ?         If     there    is 
»    vita12.  4  l  1 

any     one,    who    wishes     I     to    bet     I     a    supper,    I    will 
,  vottre      I    matter  su    \  c6na,  met- 

do     it    willingly.        If    Philip      goes      any    where (in 

tere          volentidri.  Filippo   anddre      —        — 

any      place),     follow     him  (approach     thyself    to    him) 

luogo,        —  accostdre 

in    some     manner.        I     have     nothing    I    to    I    fear     now. 
qudlche     modo.  \    da    \  temere  omdi. 

Thou    knowest    nothing    then. 
sapere  dunque. 


CHAPTER    VII. 

VERBS. 

POSITION     OF      VERBS. 


Verbs  are  generally  placed  after  their  subjectives  5 
but  if  a  command  is  given,  or  a  question  is  asked,  or  a 
wish  or  imprecation  is  expressed ;  the  verb  is  to  be  put 
before  the  subjective  ;  as, 


JVo,  for  no  one* 


VERBS. 


507 


SPENGASI  nei  vostri  pttti  let  every  spark  of  venomous 

OGNI  SCINTILLA  di  pesti-  disdain  be  extinguished  in 

fero  sdegno,  your  hearts  ; 

ACCENDASI  in  quelli  ARDEN-  let  there  [in  your  hearts]  be 

TE  FIAMMA  di  sinccro  kindled  a  fervent  flame  of 

amdre,  sincere  affection ; 

die  VUOL  dir  QUEST o  ?  what  can  this  mean  ? 

VOLESSE  IDDIO   che  il  gua-  would  to  Heaven  that  his  gaz- 

tdrmi  gli  fosse  bastdto,  ing  at  me  had  satisfied  him  ; 

MALADETTA  S!A  LA  CRUDEL-  cursed  be  the  cruelty  of  him, 

TA  di  colui,  eke  mi  ti  fa  who  causes    that  I  should 

vedere,  see  thee. 

The  verb  is  likewise  put  before  the  subjective,  when 
it  is  neuter  and  is  preceded  by  a  sentence  or  part  of  it ; 
when  it  is  preceded  by  a  negative  ;  and  when  an  em- 
phatical  adjective  introduces  the  sentence  ;  as, 


standosi  cosi,  VENNE  Alia  vol- 

ta  SUd  UN  GAMBERO, 

ne  me  ne  HA  mdi  PARLATO 


dolce  i  IL 


[the    bird]   being  so,  a  crab 
came  up  to  him  ; 

nor  has  any  one  ever  spoken 

to  me  of  her  ; 
to  do  good  is  pleasing. 


Finally,  the  verb  is  put  before  the  subjective,  when  in 
narrations  the  sayings  or  doings  of  a  person  are  re- 
lated ;  when  in  exclamations  it  is  accompanied  by  the 
word  come  or  quanta  ;  and  when  one  of  the  following 
words  ci,  vi,  qui,  qua,  ivi,  quivi,  dove,  qu'indi,  quanta, 
cosi,  —  begins  a  sentence  or  phrase  ;  as, 

the  lady  said  :  "  How  can  that 

be?" 
oh  !  how  often  do  old  men  fall 

into  this  error  ! 


D1SSE     LA     D6NNA  : 

pud  tsser  questo  1 " 

oh!  come  spisso  CASCANO  i 

VECCHI  in  questo  errore  ! 
se  ce  ne  vENissE  ALCUNA, 

qUl  SONO  GIARD1NI, 


if  some  one  should  come  here ; 
here  are  gardens ; 
chi  t  qutllo  che  now  sdppia     who  does  not  know  how  in- 
quanto     si  A     EGLI     infe-        ferior  he  is  ? 
riore  ? 


508 


SYNTAX. 


EXAM  PLE  9  . 


SPENGASI,   SPENGASI  NEI  vo- 

STRl  PETTI  OGNI  SCJNT1LLA  DI 
PEST1FERO  SDEGNO  J  ACCENDASI 
IN  QUELLI  ARDJENTE  FlARIMA  DI 

8IN-CERO  AMORE.    (Cavalcanti.) 

CHE  VUOL  DIR  QUESTO  ? 
(Bocc.) 

E  VOLESSE  IDDIO,  che  il  pas- 

Sarvi  O  IL  GUATARMI  GLI  FOSSE 
BASTATO.  (BOCC.  g.  3.  D.  3.) 

MALADETTA  SIA  LA  CRUDELTA 
DI  coLth,  CHE  con  gli  occhi  dtl- 
la  fr^nte  or  MI  TI  FA  VEDERE. 
(Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  I.) 

E  STANDOSI  cosi  di  mala  vo° 
glia  VENNE  ALLA  VOLTA  SUA  UN 
GAMBERO.  (Firenz.) 

NE  ME  NE  HA  MAI  PARLATO  AL- 

CUNO,  che  non  mel*  dbbia  dip'in- 
ta  egudle  alia  nria  Costanza. 
(Gell.) 

DOLCE  in  ogni  tempo  E  IL 
BENEFICIO.  (Soave,  Nov.) 

DlSSE  LA  DONNA  I  "  COME  PDO 
ESSER  QUESTO  ?  "  —  "  DlSSE  MeS- 

ser  Lizio  :  "  Tu  il  vedrdi,  se  tu 
vitni  presto"  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  4.) 

OH  !  COME  SPESSO  CASCANO  I 
VECCHI  IN  QUESTO  ERRORE  ! 

(Gell.) 

E  se  per  isciagura  -CE  NE  VE- 
NISSE  ALCtiNA.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  3.) 

QUI    SONO    GIARDINI,    qua   dltri 

luoghi  dilett&voli.    (Bocc.  Intr.) 
Perche,   CHI    E   QUELLO    CHE 

NON     SAPPIA     QUANTO     SIA    EGLI 

di  forze  ?   (Tolom.) 


Let  every  spark  of  venomous 
disdain  be  extinguished  in  your 
heart ;  let  there  be  kindled  a  fer- 
vent flame  of  sincere  affection. 


What  can  this  mean  ? 


And  would  to  Heaven,  that  his 
passing  by,  and  gazing  at  me,  had 
satisfied  him. 

Cursed  be  the  cruelty  of  him, 
who  causes  that  my  eyes  should 
see  thee  now. 


And  being   [the  bird]   so  mel- 
ancholy, a  crab  came  up  to  him. 


Nor  any  one  has  ever  spoken 
to  Hie  of  her,  without  describing 
her  to  me  as  equal  to  my  Con- 
stanza. 

To  do  good  is  pleasing  at  all 
times. 

The  lady  said  :  "  How  can  that 
be  ?  "  —  Mr.  Lizio  said  :  "  Thou 
wilt  see  it  thyself  if  thou  comest 
immediately." 

Oh  !  how  often  do  old  men  fall 
into  this  error ! 


And  if,  for  our  misfortune,  some 
one  should  come  here. 

Here  are  gardens,  there  pleasant 
places. 

Because,  who  does  not   know 
how  inferior  he  is  in  strength  ? 


VERBS.  509 


USE  OP  THE  IMPERFECT  AND  FIRST  AND  SECOND-PERFECT, 

The  preterite  of  English  verbs  answers  to  the  imper- 
fect as  well  as  to  the  first  and  second-perfect.  In  Italian 
these  three  tenses  are  rendered  in  three  different  forms; 
I  loved,  for  instance,  may  be  rendered  by  io  amava,  io 
amai,  or  io  ho  amato  ;  but  these  forms  are  not  indfFerent- 
]y  used. 

We  make  use  of  the  first,  the  imperfect,  when  the 
action  of  which  we  speak  was  present  in  respect  to 
another  action  past  at  the  same  time;  —  CANTA'VA  qudn- 
do  voi  veniste,  '  I  was  singing  when  you  came ' ;  E'RANO 
a  tavola  qudndo  noi  entrammo, ( they  were  at  table  when 
we  entered  ' ;  as, 

mentre  STAVAN  CENANDO,  while  they  were  at  supper,  her 

vtnne  il  mar'Uo,  husband  came  ; 

incontro  la  Catella,  che  VEN!-  he  met  Catella,  who  was  com- 

VA,  ing. 

The  imperfect  is  also  used  when  we  speak  of  an  ac- 
tion become  habitual,  or  continued,  or  repeated  several 
times ;  as, 

io   LAVORAVA  un  loro  giar-  I  had  the  care  of  their  garden ; 

dino, 

ANDAVA  al   bosco  per  le  16-  I  used  to  go  to  the  forest  for 

gne,  wood ; 

ATTIGNEVA  ticqua,  6  FAC^VA  I  drew  water,  and  did  other 
dltri  servigttti,  services ; 

le  donne  mi  DAVAN  si  poco,  the  ladies  gave  me  so  little, 
che  io  non  ne  POTEVA  ap-  that  with  it  I  could  scarcely 
pena  pagdre  i  calzdri,  pay  for  my  shoes. 

Finally,  we  use  the  imperfect  in  speaking  of  the 
age,  name,  actions,  dispositions,  and  good  or  bad  quali- 
ties of  persons  and  things  that  exist  no  more  ;  as, 

ne  pur  tre  lustri  AVEA/ornifo',    he  [Rinaldo]  had  scarcely  fin- 
ished his  third  lustrum  ; 
43* 


510 


SYNTAX. 


la  moglie,  che  Isabella  AVEA 

wo'me, 
ERA  di  buona  mente,  e  di  fe- 

lice  ingegno  dotdto,  e  bd- 

lissimo  favellatore, 

p  A  R  E  v  A  San  la  Feridiana, 
che  da  beccare  dlle  serpi, 

£RA  qutsto  giardino  vago 
molto, 


his  wife,  who  was  called  Isa- 
bella ; 

he  [Joseph  Warren]  was  of 
good  mind,  endowed  with  a 
happy  genius,  and  a  very 
fine  speaker ; 

she  appeared  Saint  Veridiana 
feeding  the  serpents  ; 

this  garden  was  very  pleasant. 


It  may,  perhaps,  assist  the  learner  in  making  a  proper  use  of  this 
tense,  to  observe  further,  that  whenever  the  preterite  in  English  may 
be  turned  into  was  or  were  and  the  present  participle  of  the  same 
verb,  or  into  used  "and  the  infinitive  of  the  same  verb  ;  it  is  to  be 
rendered  by  the  imperfect  tense  in  Italian :  thus,  if,  without  altering 
the  meaning,  I  or  we  LOOKED  for,  may  be  changed  into  /  WAS  or  we 
WERE  LOOKING  for,  or  into  7  or  we  USED  TO  LOOK  /or,  it  must  be 
rendered  by  w  CERCAVA,  or  noi  CERCAVAMO. 


The  first-perfect  is  used  to  denote  an  action  done  in 
a  period  of  time  completely  past ;  as, 

poiche  a  mdrte  mi  SENTII  fe- 
rito, 

AVVENNE  che  il  re  di  Frdncia 

MORI, 

Colombo  PARTI  per  la  sco- 
perta  del  nuovo  mdndo 
V  anno  1492, 

io  altresl  questa  notte  pass&ta 
FECI  un  sognoy 

The  second-perfect  is  used  to  express  an  action  done 
in  a  period  of  time  not  specified;  or,  if  specified,  not 
completely  past ;  as, 


after  I  found  myself  mortally 
wounded  ; 

it  happened  that  the  king  of 
France  died ; 

Columbus  departed  for  the  dis- 
covery of  the  new  world  the 
year  1492 ; 

I  also  had  a  dream  last  night. 


dnzi  V  HO  SKmpre  AMATO.  e 
AvtiTO  cdro, 

voi    r   AV£TE    COMPERATO, 
ed  io  non  V  HO 


nay,  I  always  loved  thee,  and 
held  thee  dear ; 

you  have  obtained  it  by  pur- 
chase, without  my  selling  it 
to  you  ; 


VERBS. 


511 


m*  AVETE  FATTO  pirl&re  con 
iina  stdtua  di  mar  mo, 

gia  sono  otto  anni,  V  HO  pih 
che  la  mia  vita  AMATO, 


mdlte    {tlili    scop&rte 

FATTE  nel  presinte  stcolo, 


you  hav^  made  me  speak  with 

a  marble  statue ; 
for  these  eight  years  have   I 

loved   thee    more   than   my 

very  life ; 

many  useful  discoveries  have 
been  made  within  the  pres- 
ent century. 


The  phrase  /  saw  him  this  morning,  if  used  in  the  foren&on, 
when  the  morning  is  not  yet  elapsed,  is  rendered  by  V  HO  vEDtiTO 
stamattinai  but,  if  used  in. the  afternoon,  when  the  morning  is 
already  elapsed,  it  must  be  rendered  by  lo  vioi  stamattina. 


EXAMPLES. 


MENTRE     STAVAN    CENANDO,        While  they  were  at  supper,  her 
VENNE   IL  MARITO.     (Bocc.  g.  1.    husband  came, 
n.  3.) 


jfrgli  INCONTRO  LA  CATELLA, 
CHE  VENIVA.  (BOCC.  g.  2.  n.  5.) 

lO  LAVORAVA  UN    LORO  GIARDI- 

JPTO  bcllo  e  grande,  e,  dltre  a  qu6- 
sto,  ANDAVA  alcuna  volta  AL  BO- 
SCO  PER  LE  LEGNE,  ATT1GNEVA 
ACQUA,  E  FACEVA  COtdll  ALTRI 

SERVIGETTI  ;    ma   le   DONNE    MI 

DAVANO  SI  POCO,  CHE  £o  NON  NE 
POTEVA  APPENA  PAGARE  I  CAL- 

ZARI.     (Bocc.  g,  4.  n.  1.) 

AU6r  NE  PUR  TRE  LtJSTRI  AVEA 

FORNITI.    (Tass.  Ger.  1.  60.) 

LA  MOGLIE,  CHE  ISABELLA 
AVEA  NOME.  (BOCC.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

ERA  DI  EUONA  MENTE,  E  DI 
FELICE  1NGEGNO  DOTATO,  E  BEL- 
LisSIMO  FAVELLATORE.  (Bott. 

Stor.  Amer.  1.  5.) 

U'na  vtcchia,  che  PAREVA  SAN- 
TA VERIDIANA,CHE  DA  BECCARE 
ALLE  SERPI.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.) 

ERA     Q,UESTO     GIARDINO    VAGO 

MOLTO.     (Bemb.) 


He  met  Catella,  who  was  com- 
ing- 

I  had  the  care  of  a  large  and 
beautiful  garden  of  theirs,  and  be- 
sides this  I  used  sometimes  to  go 
to  the  forest  for  wood  ;  1  drew  wa- 
ter, and  did  other  like  services  for 
them  ;  but  the  ladies  gave  me  so 
little,  that  with  it  I  could  hardly 
pay  for  my  shoes. 

Then  he  [Rinaldo]  had  scarcely 
finished  his  third  lustrum. 

His  wife,  who  was  called  Isa- 
bella. 

He  [Joseph  Warren]  was  of 
good  mind,  endowed  with  a  happy 
genius,  and  a  very  fine  speaker. 

An  old  woman,  who  appeared 
Saint  Veridiana  feeding  the  ser- 
pents. 

This  garden  was  very  pleasant. 


512 


SYNTAX. 


POICCHE    A    MORTE     MI     SENTfl 

FERITO.     (Petr.) 

AVVENNE  CHE    1L    RE  DI  FKAN- 

CIA   MORI,   ed  in   suo   luogo  fu 
corondto  ilfigliuolo.     (Bocc.) 

COLOMBO  PARTI  PER  LA  sco- 

PERTA  DEL  NUOVO  M6NPO  L*  AN- 
NO 1492.  (Vanz.) 

Se  w  fossi  voluto  anddre  dii- 
tro  dj  sogni,  w  non  ci  sarei  venu- 
fo,  non  tdnto  per  lo  tuo,  quanta 
per  unOy  che  io  ALTRESI  QDESTA 

NOTTE  PASSATA  HE  FEC1.     (BOCC. 

g.  4.  n.  6.) 

ANZl    T'  HO    SEMPRE    AMATO,  E 

AVUTO    CARO    inndnzi    ad    dgni 
dltro.     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  5.) 

Ed  or  volcsse  Iddto  che  iofdtto 
V  av6ssi,  percid  che  voi  L'  AVETK 

COMPERATO,     ED     fo    NON     L*     HO 

VENDtJTO.    (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  5.) 

"  Che  ti  pare  ?  HotV  io  Une 
la  promessa  servdta  ?  "  — "  Mes- 
ser,  no  ;  voi  M'  AVETE  ri.TTO 

PARLARE     CON     T?NA    ST^TUA     DI 

M^RMO."     (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  5.) 

To,  misera  me  !  CIA  SONO  OTTO 
ANNI,  T'  HO  PIU  CHE  LA  M!A 

VITA    AMATO.        (BoCC.  g.  3.  D.  6.) 

MOLTE  T^TILI  SCOPERTE  SONOSI 
FATTE  NEL  PRESENTE  SECOLO. 

(Vanz.) 


After  I  found  myself  mortally 
wounded. 

It  happened  that  the  king  of 
France  died,  and  his  son  was 
crowned  in  his  stead. 

Columbus  departed  for  the  dis- 
covery of  the  new  world  the  year 
1492. 

If  I  had  any  faith  in  dreams,  1 
should  not  have  come  here  ;  and 
not  so  much  for  the  sake  of  yours, 
as  of  one  I  also  had  last  night. 


Nay  I  always  loved  thee,  and 
held  thee  dear  beyond  every  other 
person. 

And  now  would  to  Heaven  that 
I  had  done  so,  because  you  have 
obtained  it  by  purchase,  without 
my  selling  it  to  you. 

"  What  dost  thou  think  of  it  ? 
Have  I  not  kept  my  promise  ?  " 
— "  No,  sir ;  you  have  made  me 
speak  to  a  marble  statue." 

Alas  !  for  these  eight  years  have 
I  loved  thee  more  than  my  very 
life. 

Many  useful  discoveries  have 
been  made  within  the  present  cen- 
tury. 


USE  OP  CERTAIN  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE  FOR  SOME  OTHER 
TENSES  OF  THE  SAME  MOOD  ;  AJJD  OF  THE  INFINITIVE  FOR 
CERTAIN  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE,  AND  FOR  THE  CON- 
JUNCTIVE AND  IMPERATIVE  MOODS. 

The  present  of  the  indicative  is  sometimes  used,  in 
narrations,  for  the  first-perfect  ;  as, 

ESCE    [for,    usci]    veloce  da    he  went  quickly  out  of  that 
qutlla  tomba,  tomb  ; 


VERBS. 


513 


or,  CORSE]  alpaldgio,  he  ran  to  his  palace  ; 

non  &  [for,  BRA]  piii  dubbia  the  way  was  no  longer  doubt- 

la  via,  ful ; 

non  E  piii  oscura  la  notte,  the  night  was  no  longer  dark. 
It  is  also  used  for  the  future  ;  as, 

domdne  E  [for,  SARA]  /'  ulti-  to-morrow  will  be  the  last  day ; 

mo  dij 

die  fardi  tu,  se  ilia  il  DICE  what  wilt  thou  do,  if  she  will 

[for,  DIRA]  a?  fraUlli  ?  tell  it  to  her  brothers  ; 

se  to  infra  otto  giorni  non  vi  if  I  shall  not  cure  you  in  eight 

GUAnisco  [for,  GUARIR6],  days,  have  me  burnt ; 

fdtemi  brugidre, 

se  tu  ti  CALI  [for,  CALERAI],  if  thou  wilt  cast  thee  down,  I 

10  non  ti  verro  dtitro  di  cannot  chase  thee  on  foot. 
galoppo, 

The  first-perfect  may  be  used  for  the  present ;  as, 

or  che  AVESTI  [for,  che  HAI],  now  what  ails  thee,  that  thou 

che  fdi  cotdl  viso,  makest  such  a  face  ; 

Anichino  gittd  un  gran  so-  Anichino    gave   a   deep  sigh. 

spiro.     La  donna  disse  :  The   woman   said  :    "  What 

"  Che  avesti,  Anichino  ?  "  ails  thee,  Anichino  ?  " 

The  first-perfect  may  be  used,  also,  for  the  second- 
perfect  ;  as, 

6nde  FOSTI  tu  [for,  SEI  STATO  where   hast    thou    been    this 

tu]    stamane  ?  —  wYbn  so  morning  ?  —  I    know     not 

dve  w  mi  FIJI   [for,  SONO  sWhere  I  have  been ; 
STATO], 

sceglitsti?  [for, HAI  SCELTO?]  hast  thou  chosen?  —  I  have. 

Ho  scelto.  —  Em6n  2  —  —^Emon  ?  -  Death.  — Thou 

Morte.  —  U  avrdi,  shalt  have  it. 

The  second-pluperfect  may  be  used  for  the  first-per- 
fect ;  as, 

lire  FU  GIUNTO  [for,  GI^NSE]  the  king  arrived  and  said: 

c  disse  :  "  Cavaliere,  a  qudl  "  Knight,  what  lady  dost 

donna  se?  tu?"  thou  belong-  to  ?  " 

alzdtala  lanterna,  EBBER  VE-  having  raised  the  lantern,  they 

D^TO  [for,  VIDERO]  il  cat-  saw  that  rogue  Andreuccio. 
tivtl  di  Andreuccio, 


514 


SYNTAX. 


The  future  is  used   for  the  present,  in  doubtful  ac- 
tions ;  as, 


PARR!  [for,  forse  PARE]  a 
voi,  eke  non  vi  vSglia  bene, 

gente  si  appressa :  Elvira 
SARA  [for,  forse  &  Elvira], 

The  future-anterior  is 
in  doubtful  cases  ;  as, 

AVRO    DETTO    [for,  foTSB    HO 

DETTO],  che  ho  da  andare 
a  Venezia, 


perhaps  it  seems  to  you,  that 
she  does  not  like  you  ; 

people    approach  :    perhaps  it 
is  Elvira. 

used  for  the  second-perfect, 


perhaps  I  have  said,  that  I  am 
to  go  to  Venice. 


The  infinitive  may  be  used  for  the  third  person 
singular  of  the  present  and  of  the  imperfect  of  the 
indicative,  and  their  compounds,  depending  on  another 
verb  of  the  same  mood;  as, 

conosco  liii  ESSERE  [for,  che 
egli  E]  un  malvdgio  uomo, 

udendo  il  re  il  maliscdlco  ES- 
SER  [for,  che  il  maliscalco 
ERA]  m&rto, 

ti  converra  avere  nella  memo- 
ria,  Iddio  ESSERE  STATO 
[for,  che  Iddio  ic  STATO] 
creatore  del  cielo,  e  della 
terra, 

S*  accorse  V'abale  AVER  MAN- 
GIATO  [for,  che  V  abate  AVEA 
MANGIATO]  fdve  secche, 

It  may  likewise  be  used  for  the  third  person  singular 
of  the  present  and  of  the  imperfect  of  the  conjunctive, 
and  their  compounds  ;  as, 

si  crede  ESSERE  [for,  che  egli    he  is  thought  to  be  one  of  the 


I  know  that  he  is  a  wicked 
man  ; 

the  king  hearing  that  his  far- 
rier was  dead ; 

thou  must  keep  in  thy  mind, 
that  God  has  been  the  crea- 
tor of  heaven  and  earth  ; 


he  found  out,  that  the  abbot 
had  eaten  dry  beans. 


S!A]  uno  de'  piit  ricchi  pre- 
Idti  del  mdndo, 
ella,  credendo  lui  ESSER  [for, 
che  egli   FOSSE]    Gisippo, 
rispose  di  $i, 


richest  prelates  in  the  world  ; 

she,    believing    that    he    was 
Gisippus,  answered  yes ; 


VERBS. 


515 


di  Guiscardo  ho  io  gict  m'eco  I     have    already    determined 

preso   partilo    che    FARne  within   myself   what  to   do 

[for,  che  ne  DEBBA  FARE],  with  Guiscard  ; 

credendo  lui  ESSER  TORNATO  believing  that  he  had  returned 

[for,  che  egli  FOSSE  TOR-  from  the  wood. 
NATO]  dal  6<5sco, 

Finally,  the  infinitive  is  used  for  the  second  person 
singular  of  the  imperative  rnood,  when  preceded  by  the 
negative  ;  as, 

do  NON  TEMER,*  do  not  fear  that ; 

NON  mi  TOCCARE,  do  not  touch  me. 


E  X  AMP  L  E  S  . 


ESCE  VELOCE  DA  QUELLA  TOM- 
BA,  CORRE  AL  PALAGIO  }  71011  E 

piu  incerto  il  siio  pas  so,  JVON  E 

P1U    DUBBIA    LA  VIA,  NON    E    PIU 

osctJRA  LA  NOTTE.  (Alberg.  Nov.) 

Quello  che  mi  dite  di  fare,  si 
fdccia  tosto,  perciocche  DOMANE 
E  L'  ULTIMO  DI  che  w  debbo  6s- 
sere  aspettdto.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

CHE  FAR.il  TU,  SE  ELLA  IL 
DICE  A'  FRATELLI  ?  (BoCC.  g.  3. 

n.  3.) 

SE  io  INFRA  OTTO  GIORNI  NON 
VI  GUARISCC),  FATEMI  BRUCIARE. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  9.) 

SE  TU  TI  CALI,  fo  NON  TI  VER- 
RO  D1ETRO  DI  GALOPPO.  (Dtmt. 

Inf.  22.) 

OR      CHE       AVESTI,      CHE       FAl 

COTAL  viso.    (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  9.) 

ANICHfNO    GITTO    UN    GRANDfs- 

SIMO  SOSPIRO.  LA  DONNA,  guar- 
ddtolOj  DISSE  :  "  CHE  AVESTI, 
ANICHINO  ?  Du6lti  cost,  che  w  ti 
mnco"  (Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  7.) 


He  went  quickly  out  of  that 
tomb,  ran  to  his  palace  ;  his  steps 
were  no  longer  uncertain,  the  way 
was  no  longer  doubtful,  the  night 
was  no  longer  dark. 

What  is  to  be  done,  let  it  be 
done  immediately,  for  to-morrow 
will  be  the  last  day  of  my  being 
expected. 

What  wilt  tho'u  do,  if  she  tells  it 
to  her  brothers  ? 

If  I  shall  not  cure  you  in  eight 
days,  have  me  burnt. 

If  thou  wilt  cast  thee  down 
[into  the  pitch],  I  cannot  chase 
thee  on  foot. 

Now  what  ails  thee,  that  thou 
makest  such  a  face. 

Anichino  gave  a  very  deep 
sigh.  The  lady,  having  looked  at 
him,  said  :  "  What  ails  thee,  Ani- 
chino ?  Art  thou  sorry,  that  1  con- 
quer thee  ?  " 


*  These  and  similar  expressions  ought  to  be  regarded,  however,  as  equivalent  to 
the  phrases  (ti  comdndo,  —  ti  csdrto, —  ti  consiglio  a)  cio  NON  TEME  RE,  (a)  NON 
MI  TOCCA'RE,  &.C., '  (1)  do  (command,  —  exhort,  —  counsel  thee)  not  (to)  fear  that, 
not  (to)  touch  me  ' ;  &c. ;  in  which  tho  words  contained  within  parentheses  are 
generally  suppressed  by  ellipsis. 


516 


SYNTAX. 


FOSTI    TU    STAMANE  ?  — 

NON  so  OVE  MI  FUI.     (Bocc.  g. 
3.  n.  3.) 

SCEGLIESTI  ?^  —  Ho  SCELTO. 
—  EMON  ?  —  MORTE.  —  L'  AVRAI. 
(Alf.  Antig.  4.  1.) 

lo  anddva  per  grdnde  bisogno 
in  servigio  de'lla  mia  donna,  IL 

RE  FU  GIUNTO,  E  DISSE  :  "  CA- 
VALIERE,  A  QUAL  DONNA  SEJ 

TU  ?  "  (Nov.  ant.  35.) 
ALZATA  dlquanto  LA  LANTER- 

NA,  EBBER  VEDUTO  IL  CATTIVEL 

DI  ANDREUCCIO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n. 
5) 

Eh  ma  !  cdro  amico,  PARR!  A 

VOI,   CHE     NON    VI    VOGLIA    BENE. 

(Gold.  Ver.  Am.) 

GENTE  si  APPRESSA  :  ELVIRA 
SARA.  (Alf.  Fil.  4.  1.) 

AVRO    DETTO,  CHE     HO    DA  AN- 

DARE  [A  VENEZIA],  per  una  lit- 
tera  che  tratta  di  mw  zw.  (Gold.) 

CONOSCO   LUI    ESSERE  UN  MAL- 

VAGIO  UOMO.     (Gr.  Gr.) 
UDENDO  IL  RE  d'  Ing/iilte'rra 

IL     MALISCALCO     ESSER     MORTO. 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.) 
Ti  CONVERRA   sirtipre  AV^RE 

NELLA  MEMORIA,  IDDIO  ESSERE 
8TATO  CREATOR  DEL  CIELO,  E 
BELLA  TERRA.  (BOCC,  g.  3.  n.  4.) 

EgH  S*  ACC6RSE  L'  ABATE  AVER 
MANGIATO  FAVE  SECCHE.  (BOCC. 

g.  10.  n.  2.) 

Venne  a  corte  V  abate  di  Cli- 
gniyil  qudle  si  CREDE  ESSERE  UNO 

DE*     P1U      R1CCHI      PRELATI      DEL 

MONDO.     (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  2.) 

ELLA,  CREDENDO  LUI  ESSER 
GISIPPO,  RISPOSE  DI  si. 


Where  hast  thou  been  this 
morning  ?  —  I  know  not  where  I 
have  been. 

Hast  thou  chosen  ?  —  I  have. 
— J3mon  ?  —  Death.  —  Thou  shalt 
have  it. 

I  was  going  on  an  important 
errand  in  the  service  of  my  lady, 
when  the  king  arrived,  and  said: 
«'  Knight,  what  lady  dost  thou  be- 
long to  ? " 

Having  raised  the  lanlern  a 
little,  they  saw  that  rogue  An- 
dreuccio. 


Come  !  dear  friend,  perhaps  it 
seems  to  you,  that  she  does  not 
like  you 

People  approach  :  perhaps  it  is 
Elvira. 

Perhaps  I  have  said,  that  I  am 
to  go  to  Venice  on  account  of  a 
letter  which  concerns  my  uncle. 

I  know  that  he  is  a  wicked 
man. 

The  king  of  England  hearing 
that  his  farrier  was  dead. 


Thou  must  keep  always  in  thy 
mind  that  God  has  been  the  crea- 
tor of  heaven  and  earth. 


He  found  out,  that  the  abbot 
had  eaten  dry  beans. 

There  came  to  court  the  abbot 
of  Cluny,  who  is  thought  to  be 
one  of  the  richest  prelates  in  the 
world. 

She,  believing  that  he  waa 
Gisippus,  answered  yes. 


VERBS. 


517 


Di    GUISCARDO    HO     10     GIA 

MECO  PRESO  PART1TO  CHE  FARNE  ', 

ma  di  te  sallo  Iddio,  chb  w  non 
so  chc  FARMI.    (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  1.) 

CREDENDO  Ltfi  ESSER  TORNA- 
TO  DAL  BOSCO,  avvisd  di  ripren- 
derlo  forte.  (Bocc.  g.  l.-n.  4.) 

Cio  NON  TEM£R,  che  in  cru- 
delta  son  pdri  —  1  tuoi  ministri 
a  te.  (Alf.  Filip.  4.  2.) 

Ldsciami,  NON  MI  TOCCARE. 
(Bocc.) 


I  have  already  determined  with- 
in myself  what  to  do  with  Guis- 
card  ;  but  God  knows  what  to  do 
with  thee,  for  I  do  not. 

Believing  that  he  had  returned 
from  the  wood,  he  thought  of 
reprimanding  him  severely. 

Do  not  fear  that,  for  thy  min- 
isters are  not  inferior  to  thee  in 
cruelty. 

Let    me   alone, 
me. 


A    COMPOUND 


OF    THE    TENSES    OF    THE    DEPENDENT    VE 
SENTENCE. 

When,  in  a  compound  sentence,  the  principal  verb  is 
in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  future,  the 
dependent  verb  must  be  put  in  the  present  of  the  con- 
junctive, if  we  mean  to  imply  the  present  or  future  time  ; 
and  in  the  imperfect  of  the  conjunctive,  if  we  mean  to 
imply  the  past ;  as, 

«o  CREDO  omdi  che  monti  e    I  believe   that,   by  this  time, 
pidgge  SAPPIAN  di  che  tern-        mountains  and  plains  know 

what  is  the  condition  ojf  ray 


pre  SIA  la  mla  vita, 


CONVERRA.  che  tu  GODA  di  tal 

desio, 
CREDO  mi  PORTASSE  amdre, 


life  : 

it  is  proper  that  this  wish  of 
thine  should  be  gratified  ;  _ 

I  believe  that  he  loved  me ; 

you  will   easily  imagine   how 
to  mt  Fdssi  rallegrato,  much  I  rejoiced  at  it. 

When  the  principal  verb  is  in  the  imperfect  or  the 
perfect  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  conditional,  the  de- 
pendent verb  is  generally  put  in  the  imperfect  of  the 
conjunctive  ;  as, 

appena  SAPE>A    che  far  si    he  hardly  knew  what  to  do  ; 
DOVESSE, 

44 


518 


SYNTAX. 


DOMANDO    qudl    FOSSE    fa   Cd- 

gione  del  loro  romdre, 
chi  STAREBBE  meglio  di  me, 
st  quilli  dtndri  rdssERO 
miii? 


she  asked  what  was  the  cause 
of  their  noise  ; 

who  would  be  happier  than  I, 
if  that  money  were  mine  ? 


In  suppositive  or  conditional  phrases,  the  imperfect  of 
the  indicative  in  English, — had,  was,  or  were,  is  ren- 
dered in  Italian  by  the  imperfect  of  the  conjunctive  ;  as. 


se  cosl  non  FOSSE,  w  non  vi 
potrti  prestdre  un  grosso, 

se  non  AVESSI  paura  di  mio 
padre,  10  gli  insegnerti  la 
risp6sta, 

se  AVESSI  qutsti  dendri,  iegli 
prester&i  incontantnte, 


[if  it  was  not  so]  were  it  not 
so,  I  could  not  lend  you  a 
farthing ; 

[if  I  had  not  the  fear  —  if  I 
was  not  afraid]  were  I  not 
afraid  of  my  father,  I  would 
teach  him  how  to  reply  ; 

if  I  had  this  money,  I  would 
lend  it  to  thee  immediately. 


EXAM  PL  E  S. 


SI  ch'  io  mi  CREDO  OM Ai,  CHE 

MONTI,    E     PIAGGE,  —  E  fiumi,    6 
Stive  SAPPIAN    DI  CHE  TEMPRE — 

SIA  LA  MIA  viTA.     (Petr.  s.  22.) 

Di    TAL     DESIO    CONVERRA  CHE 

TU  GODA.     (Dant.  Inf.  8.) 

CREDO  MI  PORTASSE  AMORE,  e 
che  di  me  non  FOSSE  m6no  ar- 
dtnte.  (Ariost.) 

GlTJDICHERA  FACILMENTE 

qUANTO    10    MI    FOSSI    RALLEGRA- 

TO.     (Bent,  lett.) 

APPENA  SAP^TA  CHE  FAR  si 
DOVESSE.  (Bocc,  g.  2.  n.  8.) 

DOMANDO  LA  REGINA  QUAL 
FOSSE  LA  CAGIONE  DEL  LORO  RO- 

MORE.    (BOCC.  g.  6.) 

CHI  STAREBBE  MEGLIO  DI  ME, 
SE  Q.UELLI  DENARI  FO8SERO  MIEI? 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  5.) 


So  that  I  believe,  that,  by  this 
time,  mountains,  and  plains,  and 
rivers,  and  woods  know  what  is 
the  condition  of  my  life. 

It  is  proper  that  this  wish  of 
thine  should  be  gratified. 

I  believe  that  he  loved  me,  and 
that  he  was  no  less  ardent  in  love 
than  I. 

You  will  easily  imagine  how 
much  I  rejoiced  at  it. 

He  hardly  knew  what  to  do. 

The  queen  asked  what  was  the 
cause  of  their  noise. 


Who   would    be   more  happier 
I,  if  that  money  were  mine  ? 


VERBS.  519 

SE  cosi  NON  FOSSE,  fo  NON  vi  Were   it  not  so,   I   could    not 

POTREI    PRESTARE    UN    GROSS©,  lend  you  a  farthing. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  10.) 

SE  w   NON   AVESSI  PAURA  Di  Were   I  not  afraid  of  my  father, 

MIO  PADRE,  fo  GLI  iNSEGNEREi  I  would  teach  him  how  to  reply. 
LA  RISPOSTA.     (Mach.  Com.) 

SE^O  AVESSI  QUESTI  DENARII,  If  I  had  this  money,  I  would 

w  TE"GLI    PRESTEREI    INCONTA-  lend  it  to  thee  immediately. 
JVENTE.    (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  10.) 


OF     THE     MANNER     OF     EXPRESSING     THE     ENGLISH     PRESENT- 
PARTICIPLE    IN    ITALIAN. 

"The  English  present-participle  may  be  expressed  in 
Italian  : 

First,  by  the  gerund  of  the  corresponding  verb  ;  as, 


consumdre  c6me    seeing  him  waste   away  like 
la  ntve  al  sdle,  snow  in  the  sun  ; 

DORMENDO  gli  pdrve  di  ve-  [sleeping  or]  whilst  he  was 
dire,  la  donna  siia,  asleep,  it  seemed  to  him 

that  he  saw  his  lady. 

Secondly,    by   the    conjunction    cAe,   or   the    adverb 
quando,  and  a  tense  of  the  indicative  mood  ;  as, 

poi  CH'  EBBI    RIPOSATO   il  having  rested  my  weary  body 
cdrpo  lasso, 

QUAND'  EBBE  DETTO  cio,  ri-  having  said  this,  he  took  up 
prtee  il  teschio  misero  c6'  once  more  that  miserable 
dinti,  skull  with  his  teeth. 

Thirdly,  by  a  preposition  and  the  verb  in  the  infini- 
tive ;  as, 

consumo   quella  mattina    IN    he  spent  that  morning  in  look- 

CERcAR/i,  ing  after  them  ; 

crtdo  che  k  suore  sttn  tutte  A    I  believe  that  the  nuns  are  all 

[sleeping  or]  asleep. 


520  SYNTAX. 

When  the  English  present-participle  has  before  it 
preposition,  such  as  cfjfrpm,  with,  on.  in,  for,  without, 
before,  after,  &c.,  it  is  always  rendered  in  Italian  by  the 
corresponding  verb  in  the  infinitive  with  a  preposition. 

If  the  participle  is  preceded  by  the  prepositions  of, 
from,  with,  they  are  expressed  in  Italian  by  the  preposi- 
tion di,  attended  by  the  infinitive  ;  as, 

6bbi  il  piactre  DI  VEDER^O,        I  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing 

him; 

Ma  m'  impedisce  DI  FAR/O,        you  prevent  me  from  doing  so  ; 
conUnto  D'  AVER?«  trovdta,        being     content    with     having 

found  her. 

The  preposition  on,  before  the  participle,  may  be 
expressed  by  the  prepositions  di,  or  in  5  as, 

si  vdnta  D'  AVER  la  loro  co-    he  values  himself  on  being  ac- 
noscinza,  quainted  with  them  ; 

NEl  PARTIRE  gli  sovvtnne  di    on  his  departure  he  recollected 
Ui,  her. 

The  preposition  in  is  rendered  by  a,  or  in  ;  as, 

che  A  FAR  cio  voUsse  aitdrlo,    that  he  would   assist  him  in 

doing  that ; 

avfa  NEZ  QUETAR  popolo  au-    in  appeasing  the  people  he  had 
torita  ed  arte>  both  authority  and  art. 

The  prepositions  for,  without,  before,  after,  &c.,  are 
literally  translated. 


If  the  participle  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  by, 
this  preposition  is  generally  omitted  in  Italian,  and  the 
participle,  rendered  by  the  gerund  of  the  corresponding 
verb ;  as, 

gli  scoldri  impdrano  le  rtgole    scholars  learn  the  rules  of  a 
di  wm  lingua  STUDIANDO-        language  by  studying  them. 
le, 


VERBS. 


521 


But  if  we  wish  to  express  the  preposition,  then  the 
verb  must  be  put  in  the  infinitive,  and  by  rendered  by 
con;  as, 

il  divino   Giulio  rintuzzo  la  the  divine  Julius  checked  the 

sedizione  del  suo   estrcito  sedition  of  his  army  by  only 

col  DIR  sdlo  :  «  M   Qui~  saykig  :   "  Ah  Romans  ! " 
r$/» 

EXAMPLES. 


^  CONSUMERS 

COME     Si  fa    LA     NEVE    AL    SOLE. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

DORMENDO    GLI    PARVE     in    SO- 
gno    DI    VEDERE     LA    DONNA    stlA 

anddr  per  un  bosco  assdi  bello. 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  7.) 

POICH5  £BBI    RIPOSATO  IL  COR- 

po  LASSO,  —  Ripresi  ma  per  la 
piaggia  diserta.     (Dant.  Inf.  I.) 

QUAND'  EBBE  DETTO  cio,  cogli 
occhi   torti,  —  RIPRESE    IL   TES- 

CHIO     MISERO     CO'     DENTI  —  Che 

fiiro  aW  osso,  come  d'  un  can, 
forti.    (Dant.  Inf.  33.) 

Tutto  il  rimanentc  di  Q.UELLA 

MATTINA  CONSUMO   IN    CERCARLI. 

(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  3.) 

I'O    mi    CREDO    CBE    LE    SHORE 
SIEN    TtJTTE    A  DORBlfRE.       (BOCC. 

g.  3.  n.  1.) 
JVbn  prima  di  ieri  EBBI  IL  PIA- 

CKRE    DI    VEDERE,    f'lt    CttSa    deW 

ambasciaddre  del  re  di  Frdncia, 
(Bent.) 

Se  non  ch'  £LLA  M*  IMPED! SCE 
DI  FARLO.    (Metast.  lett.) 

CONT£NTO  DI   AVER  TROVATA 
Filomena.    (Bocc.) 

JEgll     SI      VANTA      D*     AVER     LA 
LORO  CONOSCENZA.       (Gold.) 

44* 


I  seeing  him  waste  away  as  the 
snow  does  in  the  sun. 


Whilst  he  was  asleep,  it  seemed 
to  him  that  he  saw,  in  a  dream,  his 
)ing  through  a  very  beautiful 


Having  rested  my  wearied  body, 
I  made  my  way  through  the  de- 
serted shore. 

Having  said  this,  with  looks 
askanse  he  took  up  once  more  that 
miserable  skull  with  his  teeth, 
which  were  as  strong  upon  the 
bone  as  those  of  a  dog. 

He  spent  all  the  rest  of  that 
morning  in  looking  after  them. 

I  believe  that  the  nuns  are  all 
asleep. 

Not  before  yesterday  did  I  have 
the  pleasure  of  seeing,  at  the  house 
of  the  ambassador  of  the  king  of 
France,  .... 

Except  that  you  prevent  me 
from  doing  so. 

Being  content  with  having  found 
Philomena. 

He  values  himself  on  being  ac- 
quainted with  them. 


522  SYNTAX. 

NEL   PARIIRE    GLI    SOVVENNE  On  his  departure  he  recollected 

DI  LEI,  che  miscra  rimdsa  era.  her,  whom  he  had  left  so  misera- 

(Nov.  Ant.)  ble. 

Pregdndolo   CHE    A   FAR   cio  Begging  that  he  would   assist 

VOLESSE  AITARLO.     (Bocc.  g.  6.)  him  in  doing  that. 

AVEA  NEL  QTJETAR  POPOLO  AU-  In  appeasing  the  people,  he  had 

TORITA  ED  ARTE.     (Dav.  St.  3.)  both  authority  and  art. 

GLI  SCOLARI  IMPARANO  LE  RE-  Scholars   learn   the   rules   of  a 

GOLE  DI  UNA  LINGUA  sTUDiAN-  language  by  studying  them. 
DOLE.   (Rosasco.) 

IL    DIVINO   GIULIO    RINTUZZO  The  divine  Julius  checked  the 

LA  SEDIZIONE  DEL  suo  ESERciTO  sedition  of  his  army  by  only  say- 

COL  DIR  SOLO  :    '*  AH  QUIRITI  ! "  ing  :    "  Ah  Romans  !  " 
(Dav.  Ann.) 


OF     THE     WAT     OF     RENDERING     INTO     ITALIAN     THE     ENGLISH 
PARTICLE    to,    BEFORE    THE    INFINITIVE    OF    VERBS, 

The  particle  to  prefixed  to  English  verbs  is  used 
sometimes  as  a  mere  sign  of  the  infinitive,  and  some- 
times as  a  preposition.  When  it  is  a  mere  sign,  it  is 
never  rendered  in  Italian,  except  when  the  infinitive  is 
used  as  a  noun,  and  then  it  is  expressed  by  the  article 
il  or  lo.  When  to  has  the  force  of  a  preposition,  it  is 
rendered  by  the  prepositions  di,  a,  per. 

When  the  infinitive  of  verbs  can  be  expressed  in  Ital- 
ian by  a  noun  ;  as,  — '  to  read  is  useful,'  la  lettura 
e  Mile  ;  —  '  always  to  study  is  fatiguing,'  lo  studio 
continuo  efaticoso  ;• — the  particle  to  is  rendered  by  the 
article  il  or  lo  ;  —  il  leggere  e  utile,  l  to  read  is  useful ' ; 
—  lo  studiar  sempre  e  faticoso,  c  always  to  study  is 
fatiguing';  as, 

le  impose  IL  SEGUITARE  [or,    she  ordered  her  to  continue  ; 

IL  PROSEGUIMENTO], 

L'  ASTENERSI*   [or,  L'  ASTi-    to  abstain  from  what  pleases, 
NENZA]  da  qu&l  che  place,        is  true  virtue  ; 
£  vera  virtu, 


VERBS.  523 

la  ddnna   veggtndo  che    IL     the    woman,    seeing    that    to 
PREGARE  non  le  valeva  [or,        pray   was   useless,   had   re- 
che  LE  PREGHIERE  non  le        course  to  threats  : 
valvvano],  ricdrse  AL   MI- 
NACCIARE    [or,  ALLE  MI- 
NACCE], 

But  if  the  infinitive  cannot  be  expressed  by  a  noun, 
the  particle  to  is  rendered  by  a  preposition. 

If  the  particle  to  is  preceded  by  a  verb  signifying  re- 
membering or  forgetting,  pleasing  or  displeasing,  rejoic- 
ing or  grieving,  owning  or  denying,  permitting  or  pro- 
hibiting, telling,  declaring,  affirming,  supposing,  suspect- 
ing, fearing,  commanding,  asking,  entreating,  doubting, 
promising,  advising,  concluding,  finishing,  proposing  ; 
or  by  any  verb  implying  desire  or  aversion,  it  is  rendered 
in  Italian  by  the  preposition  di ;  as, 

a  me  pidce  DI  dirvi  una  no-  it    pleases  me    to  tell  you  a 

vella,  story ; 

m'   &  caduto  nelV  dnimo   DI  it  has  occurred  to  my  mind  to 

dimostrdrvi,  show  you  ; 

a  me  appartUne  DI  ragiond-  it  belongs  to  me  to  speak  ; 
.       re, 

dma    D'   essere    sveglidto    a  he  likes  to  be  awakened  by 

su6n  di  trombe,  the  sound  of  trumpets. 

The  particle  to  is  translated  by  the  preposition  a, 
when  it  comes  after  verbs  signifying  beginning,  teach- 
ing, learning,  attaining,  insisting,  persisting,  proceeding, 
remaining,  continuing,  opposing,  contributing,  engaging, 
liking,  accustoming,  encouraging,  obliging ;  after  verbs 
implying  inclination,  difficulty,  application,  thought,  re- 
luctance, fitness  ;  and  after  verbs  signifying  motion  ;  as, 

comincid  A  chiedere  perddno,  he  began  to  ask  pardon ; 

egli  b  brutto  A  vedtre,  he  is  ugly  to  look  at  ; 

quanta  m?  era  cib  cdro   AD  how  pleasing  it  was  to  me  to 

udlre  I  hear  this  ! 

chi  not  crede,  v&nga  A   ve-  let  him  who  does  not  believe  it, 

derla,  come  and  see  her. 


524 


SYNTAX. 


And  whenever  for  the  particle  to,  joined  with  the  in- 
finitive of  English  verbs,  can  be  substituted  the  phrases 
in  order  to,  —  with  the  design  of}  it  is  rendered  in  Ital- 
ian by  the  preposition  per  ;  as, 


PER     MOSTRARE    (F    aVCTC    a 

grddo  la  sua  venula, 
V  agricola,  che  Cristo  elesse 
aW  6rto  suo  PER  AIUTAR- 
lo, 


to  show  how  agreeable  his 
visit  was  to  him  ; 

the  husbandman,  whom  Christ 
chose  to  assist  him  [to  be  his 
helpmate]  in  his  own  garden. 


EXAMPLES. 


La  regina,  a  Filomena  voltdta,  The  queen,  having  turned  to 
LE  IMPOSE  11,  SEGUITARE.  (Bocc.  Philomena,  ordered  her  to  con- 
g.  3.  n.  3.)  tinue. 


E  VERA  VIRTtJTE, IL  SAPER- 

SI  ASTENER  DA   QUEL    CHE   PIACE, 

—  Se    quel    che   place    offende. 
(Past.  Fid.  3.  3.) 

LA  DONNA  VEGGENDO  CHE  IL 
PREGARE  JNOJV  LE  VALEVA,  RI- 
CORSE  AL  MINACCIARE.  (BOCC.  g. 

7.  n.  4.) 

A  ME  PIACE  DI  DfRVI  UNA  NO- 
VELLA. (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  8.) 

M'  E  CADUTO    NELL*  ANIMO    DI 

DIMOSTRARVI  nella  novella,  che 

a  me  tdcca  DI  dire (Bocc. 

g.  1.  n.  5.) 

A  ME  ornai  APPARTIENE  DI  RA- 
G  ION  ARE.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 

AMA    meglio  D*  ESSERE    SVE- 

GLIATO   A   SUON   DI    TROMBE,  6  TO- 

mor  d*  drmej  che  a  suon  di  cetra, 
o  di  vivola.     (Dav.  Stor. ) 

11  medico  COMINCIO  A  CHIEDE- 
RE'PERDONO.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.) 

EG  LI  E  defbrme  di  cdrpo, 

TO  A  VEDERE.       (Vai'Ch.) 

O    qUANTO     M*    ERA    CIO 
AD  UD1RE  !     (BOCC.) 


To  know  how  to  abstain  from 
what  pleases,  when  that  which 
pleases  is  injurious,  is  true  vir- 
tue. 

The  woman,  seeing  that  to 
pray  was  useless,  had  recourse  to 
threats, 


It  pleases  me  to  tell'you'a  story. 

It  has*  occurred  to  my  mind  to 
show  to  you,  in  the  story  which  I 
am  to  tell  you, 

Now  it  belongs  to  me  to  speak. 


He  likes  better  to  be  awakened 
by  the  sound  of  trumpets,  and  the 
noise  of  arms,  than  by  the  sound 
of  citherns  or  viols. 

The  physician  began  to  ask 
pardon. 

He  is  deformed  in  his  person, 
and  ugly  to  look  at. 

O  how  pleasing  it  was  to  me  to 
hear  this  ! 


VERBS. 


525 


CHI   NOL  CREDE,  VENGA  EGLi        Let  him,  who  does  not  believe 
A  YEDEKLA.     (Petr.  s.  210.)  it,  come  and  see  her  himself. 


Crcd6ndo  costui  tssere  un  gran 
barbassoroj  PER  MOSTRARE  DI 

AVERE  A  GRADO  LA   stJA  VENUTA, 

una  gran  coppa  dordta,  la  qudle 
davdnti  avtva,  comandd,  die  fos- 
se empiiita  di  vino,  e  portdta  al 
gentiluomo,  (Bocc.  g.  10.  n.  9.) 

Domenico  fu  detto,  ed  io  ne 
pdrlo,  —  Siccome  delt,'  AGRICOLA, 
CHE  CRISTO  —  ELESSE  ALL*  OR- 
TO  suo  PER  AIUTARLO.  (Dant. 
Par.  12.) 


Believing  that  he  was  a  great 
man,  to  show  how  agreeable  his 
visit  was  to  him,  he  ordered  that 
a  large  gilded  cup,  which  he  had 
before  him,  should  be  filled  up 
with  wine  and  given  to  the  gentle- 
man. 

He  was  called  Dominic,  and 
I  speak  of  him,  as  of  the  husband- 
man whom  Christ  chose  to  be  his 
helpmate  in  his  own  garden. 


EXERCISE    XXXIII. 


Would  to  Heaven   I   that   my    fortune   would  allow   me 
Fdccia    il     Citlo       \  fortuna  ddre 

They    came    in    sight 


to   I    put    them    in    execution. 
di    I  mitttre  opera. 


of (saw    themselves    near    to)    a    small-castle    I   from   I 

—          vedere  memo  castello       \      di 


which,    having    been    seen, 
,  vedtre, 


about  I   twelve    men    suddenly 
da3     ;  4   fdnte5     subito1 


rushed    out    upon    them.    Finally,    no (not    any)    virtue 

uscire*         —        — .      finalmente*  —  Nel        5        virtu* 


can    be    found 
si   trova2 


finalmentfp 

in    those,    who    have    given    themselves 
issere     dare 


up       1    to     gluttony. 
inpreda  \  gola. 


Oh  !    how    true    these    things 
come    vero  cdsa 


It    was    the    castle     of  one    of  the    family    of    the 
—  cast^llo  —    —        — 


Orsini,   and   by 
,  per 

his)    was    there. 


good    fortune 
ventura 


his  lady (a  lady    of 


Words 
Parola 


are    not    necessary 
non        bisOgnano 


in    this 


526  SYNTAX. 

business (here).      The  mother  said  :  "  (O  my)  daughter, 

mddre    Dire:  "  fiaHLtu&a.. 

what    warm    I   are   you    talking    about  ? " 
cdldo     I  fa  egli?" 


The   father, 
padre, 


on  account  of 
per 


the   love    (that)   he   bore 
amore  portdre 


her,    took    no    care  (gave    himself  little    care)  I    to    I 

,      —       —      —  dare3  poco1     cura2   \    di*   \ 

marry    her  again,   and  it  seemed  not  modest  (thing)  I    in    I 
maritdre6        piii5,      —   —  pardre12  ne7  ontsto10    cosa11    \    a8    \ 

her   I   to          ask       it  (of  him).      Who   was    a    very   young 
9     I   il13    richiedere1*  .  —  assdi  giovane 

and    handsome    I        man       »  I  .        And    he    saw    a    knight 
bello          [  delta  persona  \  .  l        —  vedere*  6  cavalier7 

dressed   in   black   following (to    come    after)   her.      But 

—        —   bruno*        —  venire5    di6tro-a2     3. 

the     knight    who    saw    this    cried    I   from    afar   I   to    him. 
cavalier e  vedtre2        l   griddre  \    di  lontdno     \ 

The    following    daj    the    Saladin    caused    a    most    beautiful 
seguente       di         2  3       fdre1       9  bello10 

and      rich      bed     I     to    be    put    up     I     in    a    large     hall. 
11     ricco12  Utto™   I  fdre*  \       5     6     gran7  sdla*. 

Yesterday       at   I    this    hour    we    were    in    Mugello.        He 


leri 


a  6ra     — 


was   one  of  those   men,  who  are   more   attached  to  liberty, 

iLOrnn.  3  1    nfFp.rA.mnhicP'          lihp.rtfi.. 


liberta, 

than  to  life.     Three   months   ago   there  was   a  conflagration. 
vita.  ntese       fa  incendio. 

A     noisy      event      happened    this    year.       Ferondo      was 
strepitoso2  avvenimento1  accadere  anno.  2  Essere1 

quite       pale. 
tutto     pdllido. 

To-morrow    will    be    a   holy-day.        If   thou   wilt  touch 
Domdni  —      festa.  toccdre 


her     with    this    I    written    paper 
scritta, 


she    will     follow    thee 
venir  di^tro 


VERBS.  527 

immediately.      He    said    he    was    perfidious   and   vile.      He 
incontanente.        —    Dire  pdrfido  vile.        

took      a    leap,    and    threw    himself   down    from    the    other 
Prdndere     sdlto,  gittdre  — 

side.         He    thought    that   I   this    man  I        was        such    as 
pdrte.        —      Pensdre      —     j       costui       \  dovere  essere 

the   wickedness   of   the   Burgundians    required    (it).      From 
malvagitd  Borgognone     rickiedere 

these    1   it    was    heard    I    in    the    neighbouring    fields,    that 
I          si    seppe  memo         cdmpo,     — 

Terni    was    guarded    by    four-hundred    horsemen.        If    he 
guarddre  quattrocento         cavdllo. 

thinks    that    the    republic    needs (has    need)    that   the 

credere     —  repubblica      —  bisogno 

senators    should  speak    freely,  why   does  he   enter    into  so 
senatore  parldre          libero,  entrdre 

trifling    details  ?      Do    not    make     a    noise.  .     She         saw 
debole3        cosa1  ?  fare     —  strepito.        —  conoscere* 

clearly     that    her    vision  had-been    true.        She,  who  was 
Manifesto1  —         5    visione6  3      vero*.  , 

not  a   physician,   believed  without  any  doubt,   that  he  was 
2  —    m6dica\       credere*  *       ,5     fdllo*,     —        7 

dead.        Do    not    flatter    thyself. 
morto.  lusingdre 

Come     into    the    house,    for    I    believe    (that)    it    is 
Venire  cdsa,  credere 

1   better  I   that    she    should    not    see    thee.        What    dost 
I     bene     \  vedere 

thou   wish   that   I   should   say   to   her,   if  I   should    happen 
vottre  dire  ,        —      — 

to (it    happens    that    I    should)    speak    to    her  ?        He 

—  avventre  favelldre 

asked        him    what  had  become  of  the  other    leg    of  "the 
Domanddre  divenire    —  coscia 

crane.          He    was    disposed    I    to    I      go     wherever    she 
grit.  disponere    \    di    \  anddre  dovunque      — 


528  SYNTAX. 

pleased (it  was    agreeable    to    her).        I    never    should 

a  grddo  .        — 

have    believed,   that   he   would    act   so (was   capable    of 

credere,  capdce 

doing     this).        Who  would  have   been  the   one  (that), 

far  .  —     —  , 

that    would     not    have (set    himself    to)     run-away. 

essere         mettere  fuggire. 


The     king     having     ordered.         Setting     fire 
re  erdindre.        Jlppiccare 


to 
per 


every   place.       I      met      them     riding    post.      That      day 
luogo.      —  Incontrdre  cdrrere  pdsta.  giorno 

having    passed.         Having      done       writing.        When    she 
passdre.  finire       scnvere. 

began        to       sing. 
comincidre        cantdre. 

He      forbids      him    to      produce      the      proofs     of    his 
—        vietdre  produrre  pruova 

innocence.          I     am    very     glad    to    see    you (I     re- 

innocenza.  —    —        —          —      —      —       —  —  ral- 

joice     myself    much    at    seeing    you).      It    is    a    crime     in 
legrdre  .      vedere  .       —  delitto 

Tyre    to    have    a    great    fortune.*       It      begins      to      rain. 
Tiro  gran        bene.  —    Comincidre     piovere. 

I    beseech    you    to     grant    me     that    favor.       If    it    was 
—  pregdre  accorddre  favore. 

a      fault      to      leave      thee,     behold     I     make     amends    for 
colpa  latcidre  ,       ecco        —      — 

it (I      amend      it).        He    likes      to      play-        I     did 

ammenddre       .  amdre  giuocdre.    —  fare 

so  (it)     to      oblige      you.         She       speaks      thus     to 

obbligdre  .  —        Parldre 

vex  me. 

tormentdre 


*  Fortune,  in  the  plural. 


PARTICIPLES. 


529 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

PARTICIPLES,  AND   USE   AND   POSITION  OF  CERTAIN 
ADVERBS. 


AGREEMENT     OF    PARTICIPLES. 

IT  has  already  been  observed  (p.  344)  that  participles 
in  Italian  are  considered  and  often  used  as  adjectives, 
and  that,  when  so  used,  (pp.  345,  411)  they  agree  with 
substantives  in  gender  and  number. 

This  is  always  the  case  with  present-participles,  which 
constantly  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  their  sub- 
ject ;  as, 

a  ship  carrying  men  tempest- 
tossed,  endangered,  and  sub- 
ject to  so  many  storms  ; 


una  navE  PORTANTE  uomi- 

ni    TEMPESTANTI,  PERICO- 
LANTI,  SOGGIACENTI  a  tdn- 

ti  marosi, 

presente  dgli  6cchi  sudi  1^1 
GRID  ANTE  merce"  svendro- 
no, 

alh  donnv  ASPETTANTI  si  ri- 
volse,  e  disse, 


before  his  eyes  they  slew  her 
[who  was]  crying  out  for 
mercy ; 

he  addressed  himself  to  the  la- 
dies [who  were]  waiting,  and 
said. 


By  a  peculiarity  of  language,  and  in  imitation  of  the 
ablative  absolute  of  the  Latin,  we  often  find  in  good 
writers  a  present  participle  with  its  noun  or  pronoun, 
independent  of  any  verb,  and  standing,  as  it  were,  alone 
in  a  discourse  ;  as, 

quando,  SOPRAVVEGNENTE  when,  night  coming  on,  there 

LA  NOTTE,  surse  un  tempo  came  very  severe  and  tem- 

Jierissimo  etempestoso,  pestuous  weather; 

Cesare  parlo  asseltatamente,  Cesar  spoke  much  to  the  point, 

Ndi,  delta  vita  e  [whilst]  we  [were]  hearing 


delta  morte, 


45 


him,  about  life  and  death. 


530 


SYNTAX. 


With  regard  to  the  agreement  of  past-participles,  the 
following  are  the  most  sure  rules  : 

When  the  past-participle  is  joined  to  the  verb  essere, 
6  to  be  ' ;  or  to  such  verbs  as  venire,  restare  or  rima- 
nere,  vedersi,  &;c.,  used  in  the  signification  of  '  to  be ' ; 
it  is  to  agree  with  the  subject  of  the  verb,  with  which  it 
is  joined,  in  gender  and  number  ;  as, 

issi  iran  di  frondi  di  qutr-     they  were  garlanded  with  oak- 


IJVGHIRLANDATI, 


leaves  ; 


nb  ERANO  /E  fdltE  de'  Vitel-    nor  were  the  faults  of  Vitel- 

lius'    troops    punished,    but 
well  paid  ; 

whilst  it  [the  language]  is  not 
adopted  by  celebrated  wri- 
ters ; 


lidni  PUNITE,  ma  ben  PA- 
GATE, 

mentre  ch?  ELLA  [/A  lingua] 
] 


non  VENGA  [for,  non  SIA 
USATA  dafamosi  scritteri, 
proccurero  che  [EGLI]  RESTI     I  shall  endeavour  that  he  may 
[for,   sii]    IMPIEGATO    in        be  employed  in  this  city ; 
questa  citia^ 

EGLI  RIMASE  [for,  FU]  MA-     he  was  astonished ; 

RAVIGLIATO, 

U  gidvanE  infelicE    si   VIDE     the   unhappy  youth  was   soon 
[for,  FU]  tosto  TRATTO  in        taken  to  prison. 
prigione, 

But  when  the  past-participle  is  joined  to  the  verb 
avere,  '  to  have  '  ;  —  if  this  verb  is  used,  instead  of 
essere,  in  the  signification  of  '  to  be  '  ;  or  is  used  in  the  1 
signification  of  '  to  hold,'  '  to  possess  '  ;  &c.,  as  an  ac- 
tive and  notf  an  auxiliary  verb  ;  the  participle  agrees 
with  the  object  of  the  verb  in  gender  and  number;  as, 

per  non  poterti  vedtre    C  A-     thou  wouldst  have  torn  out  thy 
VRESTI    [for,  ti    SARESTI]         eyes,  not  to  see  thyself ; 

CAVATI  gll  OCchlj 

s'  AVEA  [for,  5'  ERA]  BIESSE     he  had  put  some  small  stones 
alciinE  petruzzE  in  bocca,  in  his  mouth  ; 

uno  che  FORATA  AVEA  [for,     one  who  had  his  throat  pierc- 
TENEA,  POSSEDEA]  /A  g"d/A,         ed  ; 


AGREEMENT  OF  PARTICIPLES. 


531 


I  have  a  mind  so  accus- 
tomed to  contemplate  this 
lady  alone ; 

although  they  had  unsheathed 
their  swords ; 

I  did  not  hear  these  things 
from  the  neighbours  ; 

the  moon  had  lost  her  rays. 


HO  [for,  TENGO]  si  AVVEZZA 
/A  mentE  a  contempldr  so- 
la costei, 

benche   AVESSERO    [for,    TE- 

NESSERO]  IE  SpadE  IGGUAI- 
NATE, 

won  HO  quests  COSE 

da*  vicini, 
AVEA    la    luna 

suoi  rdggi, 

If  the  verb  avere,  to  which  the  past-participle  is  joined, 
is  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb,  in  order  to  represent  the 
idea  of  past  time,  which  could  be  equally  expressed  by  a 
single  form  of  the  verb,  which  the  participle  belongs  to  ; 
then  this  participle  remains  invariable;  as, 

come  10  AVR6  DATO  [or,  DA- 
RO]  loro  ogni  cosa, 

CERCATO      HO      [or,     CERCAl] 

sempre  solitdria  via, 

w'  HA  DIMOSTRATO   [or,  mi 

DIMOSTR6]  la  cagione  del 

tuo  male, 
chi  queste  c6se  HA  MANIFE- 

STATO  [or,  MANIFESTO]  al 

maestro  ? 

When  the  past-participle  is  preceded  by  one  of  the 
pronouns  mi,  ti,  ci,  vi,  si,  il,  lo,  la,  li,  gli,  le,  ne,  che, 
cui,  quale,  quali,  quanti,  as  objects  of  the  verb,  the  parti- 
ciple agrees  with  the  pronouns,  or  the  objects  represented 
by  them,  in  gender  and  number;  as, 

ella  medesima  me  le  ha  DET-  she  herself  has  told  them  to 

TE  [or,  mi  ha  DSTTE  QUE-  me  ; 

STE  COSE], 

il  liberto  diceva  averm  esso  the  freed-man  said  that  he  had 

uccisA  [or,  avere  esso  uc-  killed  her  himself; 

CiSA  LA  D6NNA], 


as  soon  as  I  shall  have  given 
to  them  every  thing  ; 

I  have  always  sought  a  solitary 
way; 

he  has  manifested  to  me  the 
cause  of  thy  evil; 

who  has  told  these  things  to 
the  master  ? 


532 


SYNTAX. 


tu  ci  hai  oggi  tdnto  DILITI- 
CATE  [or,  hdi  DILITICATE 

NOl], 

la  quote  io  raccontero  per 
fdrvi  ACcdRTE  [or,  fare 

ACC6RTE  VOl], 

si  f&  ddre  V  dcqu±,  CHE  il  dl 
davdnti  aveva  FATTA, 

vedendo  cosl  fdttA.  ddnnA,  e 
ctfi  egli  cotdnto  AMATA 
avea, 

h  ddnm,  LI  QUALI  tu  hdi 
per  me, 


thou  hast  delighted  us  so  much 
to-day ; 

which  I  will  relate  to  show 
you; 

she  caused  the  water  to  be 
given  to  her,  which  she  had 
prepared  the  day  before  ; 

seeing  such  a  lady,  and  one 
whom  he  had  loved  so 
much  ; 

the  evils  which  thou  hast  sus- 
tained on  my  account. 


The  participle,  however,  remains  invariable  if  it  is 
accompanied  by  an  infinitive,  and  the  abovementioned 
pronouns  are  the  objects  of  this  infinitive  ;  as, 

le  cose  che  gia  aveva  UDITO 
DIRE,  che  erano  intervenute, 

tiitti  v*  avrh  F^TTO  MORIRE, 


la  ddnna,  la  qudle  il  lungo 
vagheggidre  non  aveva  PO- 
TATO MUOVERE, 


the  things  which  he  had  heard 
of  as  having  happened  ; 

he  will  have  put  you  all  to 
death  ; 

the  lady,  whom  his  long  admi- 
ration had  not  been  able  to 
move. 


Finally,  past-participles  may  be  used,  like  present- 
participles,  absolutely ;  the  gerund  of  the  verb  essere,  or 
avere,  being  generally  understood  ;  and  then,  if  the 
gerund  understood  is  essendo,  they  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject, and  if  avendo,  with  the  object  of  the  proposition  ; 


as, 


IL  famiglidrv  GIT^NTO   [for, 

ESSENDO   GltflNTO],  6  DATE 

[for,    AVENDO    DATE]    ZE 
ei/erE,   e    FATTA   [for,  A- 
VEJSDO  FATTA]  F  cmbascid- 
t A,  fu  con  gran  festa  rice- 
vuto, 


the  domestic  having  arrived, 
arid  having  consigned  the 
the  letters  and  delivered  the 
message,  was  received  with 
great  joy. 


AGREEMENT  OF  PARTICIPLES. 


533 


EXAMPLES. 


UNA  NAVE  PORTANTE  UOMINI 
TEMPE8TANTI,  PERICOLANTI,  SOG- 
GIACENTI  A  TANTI  MAROSI.  (GIOV. 
Fill.  11.  8.) 

PRESE"NTE   AGLI    OCCHI    suoi 

LEI  GRIDANTE  MERCZ  6  CLluto 
SVENARONO.  (BOCC.  g.  4.  D.  4.) 

ALLE    DONNE   ASPETTANTI    sr 

R1VOLSE,    E    DfsSE.       (BOCC.    g.    9. 

n.  10.) 

QuANDO,  SOPRAVVEGNENTE  LA 

NOTTE,  con  6ssa  insieme  SURSE 

UN  TEMPO  FIERISSIMO    E    TEMPE- 

STOSO.     (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  1.) 

CESARE   PARLO   bello  e  ASSET- 

TATAMENTE,  UDENTI  NOI,  BELLA 
VITA  E  BELLA  MORTE,  qudndo 

disse (Brun.  Tes,  8.  34.) 

ESSI  ERAN  tutti  BI  FRONDI 
QUERCIA  1NGHIRLANDATI.  (BOCC. 

g.  9.  n.  1.) 

NE   .iRANO    LE    FALTE    D^'  Vl- 

TELLIAJVI  PUN!TE,  MA  BEN  PA- 
GATE.  (Dav.  Stor.  3.) 

Ma  siasi  una  LINGUA  nobile, 
p6co  le  gioverh  M£NTRE  CHJ  ELLA 

NON     VENGA     USATA    DA    FAMOSI 

SCRITTORI.    (Buom.) 

Se  non  mi  sara  licito  di  spo- 
sdrloj  PROCCURERO  almeno  CHE 

RESTI  IMPIEGATO  IN  QUEST  A  CIT- 
TA.  (Gold.  AVV.) 

EGLI  ^RIMASE     MARAVIGLIATO 

dblla  brutta  invenzione.  (Boccal.) 

E     IL     GIOVANE      INFELICE      SI 

viDE  T6sTo  da  una  squddra  di 
satdlliti  CIRCONDATO  e  TRATTO 
IN  PRIGIONE.  (Soav.  Nov.) 

45* 


A  ship  carrying  men  tempest- 
tossed,  endangered,  and  subject  to 
so  many  storms. 

Before  his  eyes  they  slew  her 
[who  was]  crying  out  for  mercy 
and  assistance. 

He  addressed  himself  to  the 
ladies  who  were  waiting,  and  said. 

"  When,  night  coming  on,  there 
came  with  it  very  severe  and  tem- 
pestuous weather. 

Caesar  spoke  finely  and  much 
to  the  point,  we  hearing  him, 
about  life  and  death,  when  he 
said 

They  were  all  garlanded  with 
oak-leaves. 


Nor  were  the  faults  of  Vitellius' 
troops  punished,  but  well  paid. 

But  however  noble  a  language 
may  be,  this  will  be  of  little  use  to 
it,  whilst  it  is  Dot  adopted  by  cele- 
brated writers. 

If  I  am  not  allowed  to  marry 
him,  1  shall  at  least  endeavour 
that  he  may  be  employed  in  this 
city. 

He  was  astonished  at  the  bad 
invention. 

And  the  unhappy  youth  was 
soon  surrounded  by  a  band  of 
satellites  and  taken  to  prison. 


534 


SYNTAX. 


Di    te    stessa    vergogndndoti, 

PER     NON     POTERTI     VEDERE,      T* 
AVRESTI       CAVATI       GLI     OOCHI. 

(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 

M6sser  lo  geloso  s5  AVEA  MESSE 

ALCUNE   PETRUZZE   IN   BOCCA. 

(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  5.) 

UN  dltro  CHE  FORATA  AVEA  LA 

GOLA.  (Dant.  Inf.  28.) 

Lassdi  qu£l,  ch'  £'  piu  brdmo  : 
ed  HO  si  AVVEZZA —  LA  MENTE 

A  CONTEMPLAR  SOld  COStei, Ck* 

dltro  non  v6de    (Petr.  s.  80.) 

BENCHE  tglino  AVESSERO  gift 
LE  SPADE  ISGUAINATE  e  ttiendte. 
(Amm.  Ant  11.  1.  12.) 

fo  NON  HO  QUESTE  COSE  SA- 
PUTE  DA*  VICINI  ;  ELLA  MEDESI- 

MA,  forte  di  te  dolendosi,  ME  LE 

HA  DETTE.      (BOCC.  g.  3.  D.  3.) 

AV£A  LA  LTJNA,  ess6ndo  nel 
mizzo  del  ciilo,  PERDTJTI  i  RAG- 
GI  suoi.  (Bocc.  g.  6.  Intr.) 

COME  io  AVRO  LORO  OGNI  COSA 
DATO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

CERCATO  HO  SEMPRE  SOLITA- 
RIA  VIA  —  Per  fuggir  quesV  in- 
gdgni  sordi  e  loschi.  (Petr.  s 
222.) 

Domeneddio  M'  HA  DIMOSTRA- 

TO    LA    CAGIONE    DEL    TtJO    MALE. 

(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  4.) 
;Cm  dltri  c/<e  tu,  HA  QUESTE 

COSE  MANIFEST ATO  AL  MAESTRO  ? 

(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  8.) 

iL     LIBERTO      DICEVA     AVERLA 

Esso  UCCISA,  e^vendicdta  V  in- 
giuria  del  padron  suo.    (Dav.) 

Se  tu  ierifci  affligg£sti,TU  ci 

HAI    OGGI    TANTO    DILITICATE  cJl€ 

niuna  di  te  si  dee  rammaricdre. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  5.) 


Being  ashamed  of  thyself,  thou 
wouldst  have  torn  out  thy  eyes, 
not  to  see  thyself. 

* 

The  jealous  man  had  put  some 
small  stones  in  his  mouth. 


Another  who  had  his  throat 
pierced. 

I  have  forgotten  what  I  most 
desire  :  and  my  mind  is  so  ac- 
customed to  contemplate  this  lady 
alone,  that  it  perceives  nothing 
else. 

Although  they  had  unsheathed 
and  used  their  swords. 


I  did  not  hear  these  things 
from  the  neighbours ;  she  herself, 
complaining  bitterly  of  thee,  has 
told  them  to  me. 

The  moon,  although  in  the 
middle  of  heaven,  had  lost  her 
rays. 

As  I  shall  have  given  to  them 
every  thing. 

I  have  always  sought  a  solitary 
way,  iu  order  to  avoid  these  deaf 
and  blind  minds. 


God  has  manifested  to  me  the 
cause  of  thy  evil. 

Who  else  but  thou  has  told 
these  things  to  the  master  ? 

The  freed- man  said  that  he  had 
killed  her  himself,  and  thus  aveng- 
ed the  offence  done  to  his  master. 

If  thou  didst  afflict  us  yesterday, 
thou  hast  delighted  us  so  much 
to-day  that  none  of  us  can  com- 
plain of  thee. 


USE  AND  POSITION  OP  ADVERBS. 


535 


LA  QUALE,  piacev6li  donne,  10 

RACCONTERO  PER  FARVI  ACCORTE 

.....    (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

E  questo  detto,  si  FE*  D^RE 
V  orciuoUtto,  net  qudle  era  L'  AC- 

QUA,  CHE    IL    Dl    DAVANTI  AVEVA 

FATTA,  e  tutta  la  b£vve.    (Bocc. 
g.  4.  n.  1.) 

11  qudle  cosi  FATTA   DONNA, 

E     Ctfl     EGLI     COTANTO     AMATA 

AVEA,   per    moglie    VEDANDOSZ. 
(Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 

To  sono  venuta  a  ristordrti  d6' 

DANNI,     LI     QUALI     TU     HAI     gt'A 
AVtJTI  PER  ME.    (BOCC.  g.  5.  D.  9.) 

LE  COSE  CHE  GlA  AVEVA  TJDfTO 

D!RE,  CHE  di  notte  ERANO  INTER- 
VENT^TE,    (Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  1.) 

Dunque,  un  uom  solo  —  Si 
partira,  che  non  V  am  tie  offeso, 
—  Qudndo  TT^TTI  v*  AVR^.  FAT- 
TO  MORIRE  ?  (Ariost.  Fur.  17.  8.) 


LA  DONNA,    LA  QUALE    IL 

GO  VAGHEGGIARE,  /'  armeggidre, 
le  mattindte  MUOVERE  NON  AVE- 
VANO  POTATO,  mossero  le  affet- 
tuose  parole.  (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  9.) 

GitjNTO  adunque  IL  FAMIGLIA- 
RE  a  Genovaj  E  DA'TE  LE  LET- 
TERE,  E  FA'TTA  L*  AMBASCIA'TA, 
FU  ddlla  donna  CON  GRAN  FESTA 
RicEVtiTO.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  9.) 


Which,  kind  ladies,  1  will  re- 
late to  show  you 

And,  having  said  this,  she  caus- 
ed the  vessel  of  water  to  be  given 
to  her,  which  she  had  prepared  the 
day  before,  and  drank  it  all  off. 

Who  seeing  himself  united  in 
marriage  with  such  a  lady,  and  one 
whom  he  had  loved  so  much. 


I  am  come  to  make  thee  amends 
for  the  injuries  thou  hast  sustained 
on  my  account. 

The  things  which  he  had  heard 
of  as  having  happened  by  night. 

Then,  shall  a  single  man  depart 
from  hence,  when  he  will  have  put 
all  of  you  to  death,  without  having 
been  at  all  hurt  by  you  ? 

The  lady,  whom  his  long  admi- 
ration, tournaments,  serenades, 
were  not  able  to  move,  was  mov- 
ed by  his  tender  words. 

The  domestic,  having  arrived  at 
Genoa,  and  having  consigned  the 
letters  and  delivered  the  message, 
was  received  by  the  lady  with 
great  joy. 


USE     AND     POSITION     OF     CERTAIN     ADVERBS. 


Adverbs,  as  we  mentioned  at  pp.  391,  394,  may  be 
put  before  or  after  the  verb ;  they  may  be  put,  also, 
between  the  auxiliary  and  the  participle,  and  between 
two  participles ;  as, 

tu   SAI   BENE  come  io  s6no    thou  knowest  well  how  I  am 
agidto,  situated ; 


536  SYNTAX. 

PRESTAMENTE  s'  AWENTA'-  quickly  [a  wolf]  seized  her  by 
VA  alia  gola  di  costei,  the  throat ; 

non  HO  mdi  POSCIA  POTATO  I  could  sleep  no  longer  after 
dormire,  that ; 

era    STA'TA    MdLTo    MA'LE     she  had  been  very  badly  ad- 

CONSIGLU/TA,  vised. 

The  adverb  non,  l  no  or  not' ;  is  always  put  before 
the  verb ;  as, 

NON  FARNETICO,  madonna,        I  do  not  rave,  Madam  ; 
NON  v'  ACCORGETE  che  uoi    do  you  not  perceive  that  we 
Mm  vermi  ?  are  worms. 

When  the  adverb  non  is  employed  to  deny  several 
objects,  and  these  precede  the  verb,  the  adverb  is  put 
before  the  nouns,  and  not  before  the  verb  ;  as, 

NON  PIOGGIA,  NON  GRAXNDO,  neither  rain,  nor  hail,  nor  snow, 
NON  NEVE,  NON  RUGIA'DA,  nor  dew,  nor  frost  falls  a- 
NON  BRiNA  piu  su  cdde,  bove. 

The  adverb  mai,  which  in  itself  strictly  means  '  at  any 
time,'  may  be  put  either  before  or  after  the  verb  ; 
when,  however,  it  is  put  before,  it  takes  the  signification 
of  never,  and  when  after,  it  takes  that  of  ever ;  as, 

ti  priego  die  MA'I  Dicni  I  beseech  thee  never  to  tell, 
d*  avermi  veduta,  that  thou  hast  seen  me  ; 

i  Ptrugini  MA'I  si  VOLLERO  the  Perugians  never  wished  to 
dichindre  ad  alcun  accordo,  condescend  to  come  to  any 

agreement ; 

qudi  bdrbare  FUR  MA'I  !  what  barbarians  were  ever ! 

U  cielo  e  oggi  cosl  hello  come  the  sky  is  as  beautiful  to-day 
FU  MAXI,  as  ever  it  was. 

The  adverbs  non  mai,  '  not  ever,'  '  never  ' ;  occurring 
in  the  same  phrase,  are  generally  separated  by  the  verb ; 
and  then  non,  c  no  or  not ' ;  always  precedes,  and  mai, 
6  ever  ' ;  always  follows  that  verb  ;  as, 

io  NON  mdngio  MA'I,  I  never  eat ; 

V  drti  NON  istetter  MA'I  peg-    the  arts  never  fared  worse ; 
' 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  ADVERBS. 


537 


NON  SPERAR  di  vedermi  in  never  hope  to  see  me  again  on 
terra  MAI,  earth. 

But  they  may  be  used,  also,  united  ;  and  then,  if  mai 
precedes  non,  they  are  to  be  put  both  before  the  verb  ; 
if  it  follows  non,  they  may  be  put  after  it  ;  as, 

io  MAI  NON  odRMOj  I  never  sleep  ; 

che  ferro  MAI  NON  STRINGE,      who  never  knew  how  to  use 

arms; 
giurogli  di  MAI  NON  DIRLO,       she  swore  to  him  never  to  tell 

it; 

amid  fedeti  POSSON  DIVEN-  they  can,  indeed,  become  faith- 
TAR  bene,  sudditi  NON  ful  friends,  but  subjects  nev- 
MAI,  er. 

EXAMPLES. 


Pinuccio,  TU  sXi  BENE  COME 
io  SONO  AGIATO.  (Bocc.  g.  9.  n. 
6.) 

II  qildle  PRESTAME'NTE  8*  AV- 
YENTAVA  ALLA  GOLA  DI  COSTEI. 

(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  7.) 

J'O  NON  HO  M^I  POSCIA  POTATO 
DORM1RE.  (BOCC.  g.  9.  n.  6.) 

E  Ck9  el?  ERA  STATA  MOLTO 
MALE  CONSIGLIATA.  (BoCC.) 

Disse    allora    Pirro  :     "  Now 

FARNETICO,      no,      MADONNA." 

(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  9.) 

NOI^V'    ACCORGETE    v6l,    CHE 

NOI  si  AM  V£RMI, — Ndti  a  for- 
mar  V  angelica  forfalla.  (Dant. 
Purg.  10.) 

Perchb     INTON     PIOGGIA,    NON 

GRANDO,  NON  NEVE,~NoN  RU- 
GIADA,  NON  BRIJVA  PIU  3U  CADE, 

—  Che  la  scaletta  de1  tre  grddi 
breve.  (Dant.  Purg.  21.) 

Ti  PRIEGO  CHE  MAI  ad  alcuna 
persdna  DICHI  D*  AVERMI  VEDT^- 
TA.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 


Pinuccio,    thou    knowest    well 
how  I  am  situated. 


Which  [wolf]  quickly  seized  her 
by  the  throat. 

I  could  sleep  no  longer  after 
that. 

And  that  she  had  been  very 
badly  advised. 

Then  Pyrrhus  said  :  "  I  do  not 
rave,  Madam,  no." 

Do  you  not  perceive,  that  we 
are  worms,  made  to  form  the 
winged  insect  imped  with  angel 
plumes. 

Because  neither  rain,  nor  hail, 
nor  snow,  nor  dew,  nor  frost,  ever 
falls  above  that  short  ladder  of 
three  steps. 

I  beseech  thee  never  to  tell  to 
any  ono  that  thou  hast  seen  me. 


538 


SYNTAX. 


I  PERUGINI,  per  loro  alterigia, 

MAI  VOLLERO    DICHINA.RE   AD  AL- 

CUN  ACCORDO.    (Matt.  Vill.  8.  39.) 

QUAI  BARBARE  FUR   MAI, 

Saracme  !    (Dant.  Purg.  23.) 

COSI  Z  OGGI  BELLO  IL  CIELO 
COME  FU  MAI.  (BOCC.  g.  6.  D.  10.) 

Se  tu  digiuni,  io  NOJV  MANGIO 
Mix ;  se  tu  vegghi,  io  MAI  NON 
DORMO.  (Passav.) 

In  quisle  mezzo,  L'  ARTI  e  la 
mercanzia  NON  ISTETTER  MAI 
PEGGIO  in  Fir6nze.  (Giov.  Vill. 
9.  12.) 

NON     SPERAR     DI     VEDERM1     IN 

TERRA  MAI.  (Petr.  s.  212.) 

Popolo  ignudo,  pavdntoso,  e 
Unto,  —  CHE  FERRO  MAI  NON 
STRINGE.  (Petr.  c.  5.) 

E  GIUROGLI  DI  MAI  NON  DIRLO. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  6.) 

AMICI    FEDEL.I     POSSON    DIVEN- 

TAR  BENE  gli  Jlmericani  agV  In- 

fldSl,    SUDDITI    NON    MAI.      (Bott. 
ton  Amer.  1.  6.) 


The  Perugians,  through  pride, 
never  wished  to  condescend  to 
come  to  any  agreement. 

What  barbarians,  what  Saracens 
were  ever  ! 

The  sky  is  as  beautiful  to-day 
as  ever  it  was. 

If  thou  fastest,  I  never  eat;  if 
thou  art  watching,  I  never  sleep. 

During  this  time,  the  arts  and 
commerce  never  fared  worse  in 
Florence. 


Never  hope  to  see  me  again  on 
earth. 

A  race  poor,  fearful,  and  indo- 
lent, who  never  knew  how  to  use 
arms. 

And  she  swore  to  him  never  to 
tell  it. 

The  Americans  can  indeed  be- 
come the  faithful  friends  of  the 
English,  but  subjects  never. 


EXERCISE    XXXIV. 


After    he    had    spent    some     (of  his)    time   I   to    con- 
Poichi    —         4    ponere5  alqudnto1  2    —     t6mpo3  \  in6  dovdr7 

sole  I   her    weeping.      To     him,    then    residing    in 

racconsoldre™  \       8     pidngere9.  ,       —       dimordre 

Ireland,      came     the     desire     of     hearing.        (The)     rivers 
Irldnda,      venire     —      voglia  sentire.  TWO 

of    (the)    blood     extinguished    the    rising     flame.        Happy, 
sdngue      estinguere4  l    ndscere*  fidmrna?.      Felice, 

and    fortunate,    and     enjoying     I       for    ever      I     the     fruit 
fortundto,  godere4      \  in1  ogni2  ttmpo3  \      —        — 


USE  AND  POSITION  OF  ADVERBS.  539 

of  their   love.      You*    are   not   the   first,    nor  will   you   be 
amore.  primo, 

the     last,    that    is     imposed    upon.    I    know    not    whether 
ultimo,  inganndre.  sapere  se 

thou  hast  ^    minded      I    how      close      wef    are      kept. 

C  hdi  posto  in  mente  \  stretto3      —  l     tenere*. 

They    having      arrived      at  the    city,  went        |     with 

Esso*  l      pervenire6      3        4    cittdb,      ne  anddrono13  \          7 

Mr.      Torello      to     his      house,:):      where      fifty      of      the 
Messtr*         9         »        »        cdsa1*,  cinqudnta 

principal     citizens     were     come     to    receive     them.        The 
maggiore     cittadino  venire  ricevere 

message       which    I    have     given    to    him    I    to    I    deliver 
commessione  dare  \     di    \     riferire 

to    the     king.      Thou     knowest      what      is      the      offence, 
re.  sapere  ingiuria, 

which     thou     hast      given     me.        Master,      I     have     seen 
fdre  .        Maestro,  vedtrc 

a      thing        which       troubles       me.          One      who      had 
cosa  dispiacere. 

the     one,     and     the     other    hand     cut    off.      Each   one§  of 
uno,  dltro    man        mozzdre. 

them    had    her      right      breast      cut    off,    I  in   order  to  I 
i      _      diritto3  mammilla^  taglidre*,   \  per 


carry 
portare 


j  the  shield 
I     lo  scudo 


in     I     battles.          They||     are 
alia    I    battdglia. 


handsomer    than     the     painted      angels,     which    you     have 
bello  dipmto2      dgnoli1, 

oflen-tirnes      shown      me.        ThoulF    hast    been     with    that 
piit    volte      mostrdre          •  co~ 

lady,     whom     thou     hast     deceived. 
Ui,  inganndre. 

I   have  caused    the   greater   part   of  my  possessions  to- 
jare  2    maggior3  pdrte4  8        6    possessione*  ven- 

*  You,  feminine  gender.  t  We,  feminine. 

J  House,  in  the  plural.  $  Each  one,  in  the  feminine. 

||  They,  feminine.  *  Thou,  feminine. 


540  SYNTAX. 

be-sold.    They     were      glad     that  they  had (of  having) 

dere1.  —     Rimanere  content o  —      —       — 

successfully (with   success)   known    how   to    mock    the 

—  successo ,    sapere       —     —  schernire 


avarice  of  Calandrino.      I  No   sooner 
avarizia  .       |    Ne  prima « 


had  she  entered  (into) 
—     —    entrdre*      l 


the    room,    than    the   (beating    of  the   arteries the)  pulse 

2   camera3,  che  battimento  —      polso 

returned    to   the    youth  ;     and    having   left   it (she   hav- 

ritorndre  giovane  ; 

ing    departed),  it  [the  pulse]    left   him   also (it   ceased). 

partire,      —     —      —         —      —       —  —    cessdre. 


Is     not    this    the     land,     which    I    first 
terrent  pria 


trod     with 
toe- 


my     feet    I  ?        Ciacco      replied :      "  Thou    knowest    very 
care  \  1  2     Risp6nderel :     "     —          sapere         — 

well,     that     I    shall    come."          Who       quickly       opened 
beney  venire"  prestamente      aprire 

the     door.        The     Devil     said     once     to     St,    Macarius  : 
pdrta.  Diavdlo     dire  una  volta         San     Macdrio  : 

"  If    thou     art    always     watching (watchest),     I     never 

"  —  vegliare, 

sleep  ;      if    thou    I   usest    all    thy    efforts   I    in    thy    works 
dormire ;  ti          affatichi 

(working),     I     never    rest  (have      never       rest)." 

operdre,  non  nidi    riposo" 

Did      not      thy      master      say,      that      we      should      carry 
padrone      dire,  portdre 

I   home     |     these      things  ?          Caring        (himself)     neither 
a  cdsa  cosa  ?  Curare 


for   I   the    palaces,    nor   I   for   I   the    ox,    nor 
' 


for   1    the 
di 


horse,    nor 
cavdllo, 


paldgio,  \     di     \  biie, 

for   I    the    ass,    nor   I   for    I    the    money,*    nor 


di     \  dsino,  \    di     \  dendro, 


for   I   any    other    thing,    which    he    had    seen. 
di     I  cosa,  —        2    vederc1. 


*  Money  t  in  the  plural. 


EXPLETIVES. 


541 


CHAPTER   IX. 
EXPLETIVES. 

[Although  many  of  the  following  words  have  been  already  mentioned  in  treating 
of  the  different  Parts  of  Speech,  which  they  respectively  belong  to,  it  baa, 
nevertheless,  not  been  thought  altogether  useless  to  present  them  here  once 
more  united  in  a  single  chapter.] 


B&LLO : 


IL  vostro  vestito  e  BELL'  efdtto. 
(Fir.) 

per  BELLA  paura  gitto  le  ban- 
diere  del  comune.  (Cron. 
Mor.) 

per  BELLE  scritte  di  lor  mdno 
s'  obbligdrono  V  uno  aW  dl- 
tro.  (Bocc,  g.  2.  n.  9.) 


Your  suit  of  clothes  is  finished. 

through  fear  he  threw  down 
the  standards  of  the  com- 
monwealth. 

they  were  bound  to  each  other 
by  fine,  obligations  written 
with  their  own  hands. 


BENE,  BEN,  BE' : 

Gli  domanddi,  se  gli  bastdva 

V  dnirno  di  caccidrlo  via ;  ed 

egli    rispose  :    "  Si    BENE." 

(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  5.) 
egli  e  qua  un  malvdgio  uomo, 

che  m'  ha  taglidto  la  borsa 

con  BEN  cento  fiorini  d>  oro. 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  1.)   . 
"  BE',"  rispos*  io,  "Messere,par- 

lerem  poi ;  —  JVbn  fat e  qul 

per     or     questo    fracdsso" 

(Bern.  Rim.) 

CI: 

Sempre  che  tu  ci  viverdi.  (Bocc.    As  long  as  thou  livest. 

g.  6.  n.  4.) 
la    donna  e  Ptrro    dicevano  :    the  lady  and    Pyrrhus  said  : 

"  Noi  ci  seggidmo."    (Bocc.        "  We  will  sit  down." 

g.  7.n.9.) 

CON: 

Sldssi  CON  meco.    (Petr.)  He  is  with  me. 

spero  dy  avire  assdi  bu6n  tempo    I  hope  I  shall  have  a  fine  time 
CON  teco.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  10.) 
46 


I  asked  him,  if  he  had  courage 
to  send  him  away ;  and  he 
answered :  "  Yes,  indeed." 

here  is  a  wicked  man,  who  has 
cut  my  purse  with  full  one 
hundred  florins  of  gold. 

"  well,  Sir,"  answered  I,  "  we 
will  speak  afterwards ;  do 
not  make  now  such  a  noise 
here." 


with  thee. 


542  SYNTAX. 

ECCO  : 

Ed    ECCO  Pietro    chiamo   alV    And  lo  Peter  called  at  the  door, 

uscio.    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.) 
ECCO,    Giannotto,    a    te   place    here,  John,  thou  wishest  that  I 

ch?     lo    divenga    Cristidno.        should  become  a  Christian. 

(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

EGLI  : 

EGLI  e  una  compassione  a  ve-  It  excites  pity  to  see  him. 

derlo.     (Mach.  Com.) 

non  ti  fa  mestieri  il  dlrlo,  il  it  is  not  necessary  to  tell  it, 

viso  tuofavella  EGLI.    (Sen.)        thy  face  manifests  it. 

ELLA  : 

ELLA  non  andra  cosl.     (Bocc.  It  shall  not  go  on  so. 

g.  9.  n.  5.) 

se  non  ch>  ilia  ha  in  cib  voluto  except  that  she  wished  to  show 

mostrdre,   ch'  ilia   t  gentile,  by  this,  that  she  is  courte- 

ELLA.  (Bocc.  Corb,  79.)  ous. 

ESSO: 

Andidmo  a  Roma  con  ESSO  lui.    Let  us  go  to  Rome  with  him. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

JEsso,  as  an  expletive,  is  invariable,  and  may  be  used  equally  welf 
before  a  masculine  and  a  feminine  pronoun,  both  singular  and  plural ; 
as,  con  esso  meco, '  with  me  '  j  con  esso  tecor '  with  thee  ' ;  con  esso 
lui,  *with  him';  con essotei,  'with  her,'  or  ^with^you';  con  esso 
noi, (  with  us  '  j  con  es«o  voi, '  with  you  ' ;  con  esso  loro,  l  with  them/ 
or  '  with  you  :  ' 

fatti  alia  finestra,  e  chidmala,  e  go  to  the  window,  and  call 
dV  die  vfaga  a  desindre  con  her,  and  tell  her  to  come 
ESSO  NOI.  (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  8.)  and  dine  with  us. 

GIA: 

Gil  D'to  non  voglia.    (Bocc.    May  God  forbid, 
g.  10.  n.  5.) 

non  credo  lo  Gil  che  ne  avete  a    I  do  not  think  you  take  it  ill. 
male.    (Varch.) 

10: 

Che  farebbe  egli  sj  lo  morlssi,  What  would  he  do  if  I  should 
io  ?  (Mach.  Com.)  die  ? 


EXPLETIVES.  ;,i;> 

6gni  dltro  uo 
si  lodi,  io  me 
ddre  io.    Bo 
n.  3.) 


.  , 

comeche  6gni  dltro  uomo  molto  although  every  other  perton 
di  lid  si  lodi,  io  mene  posso  praises  him  much.  I  can 
poco  loddre,  io.  (Bocc.  g.  10.  praise  him  but  little. 


Mil  : 

Una  pdrte  del  mondo  e,  che    There  is  a  part  of  the  world, 
si   gidce  —  MAI   stmpre    in        which  lies  always  frozen. 
ghidccio.    (Petr.  c.  5.) 

*  come,"  disse  Ferondo,  "  dbn-  "  how,"  said  Ferondo,  u  am  I 

que  sono  io  morto  ?  "  —  Dis-  dead,  then  ?  "  —  The  Monk 

se    il   Mfinaco  :   "  MAI   si."  replied  :  "  Yes  indeed." 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  8.) 

MI: 

to  MI  sono  un  povero  pellegri-    I  am  a  poor  pilgrim. 
no.    (Boce.  Filoc.  1.  5.) 

io  MI  credo  che  le  suore  sien    I  believe  that  the  nuns  are  all 
tutte  a  dormire.    (Bocc.  g.  3.        asleep, 
n.  1.) 

MICA: 

Son    novelle  e   vere,  non    son  These  are  true  news,  they  are 

MICA  fdvole.    (Fir.  Trin.)  aot  fables. 

on  MICA  idiota  ne  materidle ;  not  an  idiot  nor  a  vulgar  man ; 

ma  scienzidto,  e  di  aciito  in-  but  learned,  and  of  an  acute 

gegno.    (Casa.  Gal.)  mind. 

NE: 

Chetamente  N'  ando  per  la  cd-    He  went  tranquilly  through  the 
mera    insino    dtta    Jinestra.        room  to  the  window. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  7.) 


didnNv  l&,  e  laveremlo  spac-    let  us  go  there,  and  we  will 
ciatamente.  (Bocc.  g.  J.  n.  5.)        wash  it  immediately. 


NON: 


Temo  che  voi  NON  mi  abbando-    I  fear  you  will  abandon  me. 

nidte.     (Bocc.) 
la   qual    modestia    dubito    che    which  modesty,  I  doubt,  may 

NON  gli  sia  danndsa.  (Tolom.        be  hurtful  to  him. 

lett.) 


544  SYNTAX. 

6RA  : 

Deh  !  OR  V  avessero  essi  qffogd-    Ah  !    would    that    they    had 
to.     (Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  9.)  drowned  thee. 

ORA    che    vorrd    dir    questo  ?    now  what  does  this  mean  ? 
(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  8.) 

P6l: 

Non  e  POI  vero  qudnto  mi  di-  What  you  told  me  is  not  true. 

ciste.     (Bocc.) 

io  non  mi  sono  POI  risoluto  di  I  have  not  come  to  the  resolu- 

partir  di  R6ma.    (Car.  lett.)  tion  of  leaving  Rome. 

PtiNTO  : 

Sinza  sbigottir  PTJNTO.   (Bocc.)    Without  being  frightened  at  all. 
Teddldo   non  e  PTJNTO  morto.    Tedaldo  is  not  at  all  dead. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

PURE  : 

La  cosa  andd  PUR  cost.   (Bocc.  The  affair  went  off  so. 

g.  2.  n.  5.) 

fa  ptfRE  che  tu  mi  mostri  qudl  do  hut  show  me  him  whomthou 

tipidce.    (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  10.)  likest. 


Del  paldgio  s'  uscl,  e  fuggissi    He  went  out  of  the  palace,  and 
a  cdsa.    (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  8.)  fled  to  his  house. 


Si  e  tdnta  la  benignita,  e  la    So  great  is  the  goodness  and 
misericordia  di  Dio.    (Bocc.        the  mercy  of  God. 
g.  1.  n.  1.) 

TI  : 

I'o  non  so  se  tu  T'  hdi  posto    I  know  not,  whether  thou  hast 
in  mtnte.    (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  1.)        minded. 

TU: 

Tu  dV  tuepar6le,i:u.  (Bocc.  g.     Thou  mayest  say  what  thou 
7.  n.  I.)  pleasest. 


ELLIPSIS.  .-,45 

TUTTO : 

La  donna,  udtndo  costui  par-  The  woman,  hearing  this  man 

Idre    il     qudle    ilia,    credeva  speak    whom    she    thought 

mutolo,  TTJTTA  stordl  (Bocc.  dumb,  was  quite  amazed, 
g.  3.  n.  1.) 

tiJSO: 

Vuoi  tu  quell9  tfw>  ?  (Bocc.)        Dost  thou  want  that  one  ? 

VI: 

Vol  non  sapete  cib  che  v6i  vi     You  do  not  know  what  you 
dite.    (Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  6.)  say. 

VIA: 

"  Va  VIA,"  rispose ;  "  e  cib  che  tu    "  Go  away,"  answered  he ; "  and 
vuoi,  conta."    ( Dant.  Inf.  32.)        relate  what  thou  pleasest." 


CHAPTER    X. 
OF    THE    ELLIPSIS. 

ELLIPSIS  is  a  figure  in  grammar,  which  consists  in 
the  omission  of  one  or  more  words  in  order  to  add  con- 
ciseness and  elegance  to  the  phrase,  without  affecting  its 
clearness.  This  figure  is  very  frequent  in  Italian,  and 
offers  one  of  the  principal  difficulties  in  the  grammatical 
analysis  of  the  Classics.  We  will  here  give  some  exam- 
ples in  which  the  ellipsis  is  employed,  supplying  the 
words  which  are  omitted,  that  the  learner  may  familiar- 
ize himself  with  similar  locutions. 

ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Substantive: 

Ruppe     [la    nave]    in    mdre.    He  made  shipwreck. 

(Crusca.) 
mi  scusdi  [d611a  colpa]  di  cib.    I  exculpated  myself  from  that 

(Class.)  fault. 

46* 


546 


SYNTAX. 


Jllessdndro  muore  [per  amore] 
di  quella  vedova.  (Bocc.) 

conoscdndo  che  quivi  non  era 

[luogo]  da  pidngere 

(Bocc.) 

bdstami  [la  disgrazia]  di  esse- 
re  stdto  schernito  una  volta. 
(Bocc.) 

io  ci  tornerb,  e  darottene  tdnte 
[busse],  ch>  io  ti  farb  tristo 
per  tutto  il  tempo,  che  tu  ci 
viverdi.  (Bocc.  g.  4.  n.  2.) 

niuno  male  si  fece  nella  cadu- 
ta,  quantunque  alqudnto  ca- 
desse  da  alto  [luogo].  (Bocc. 
g.  2.  n.  5.) 


Alexander  dies  for  that  widow. 

knowing  that  there  was  no 
place  to  weep 

it  is  enough  to  have  been  in- 
sulted once. 

I  will  return,  and  give  thee  so 
many  blows,  that  I  will  make 
thee  sorry  as  long  as  thou 
livest. 

he  did  not  hurt  himself  in  fall- 
ing, although  he  fell  from 
a  high  place. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Adjective  : 


E  simpre  poi  per  [buono]  da 
mdlto  I'  6bbe,  e  per  amico. 
(Bocc.  g.  6.  n.  SL) 

fu  [abile]  da  tdnto,  e  tdnto 
seppe  fare,  ch'  tgli  pacifi- 
cb  il  figliuolo  col  padre. 
(Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  3.) 

non  suspicb,  che  cib  Guccio 
BaUna  gli  avessefdtto,  per- 
ciocche  nol  conosceva  [ca- 
pace]  da  tdnto.  (Bocc.  g.  6. 
n.  10.) 

il  re  gli  chiamb,  e  quei,  quan- 
do  il  videro,  tennersi  [im- 
mobili].  (Nov.  Ant.) 


And  considered  him  always 
afterwards  as  a  very  good 
man,  and  as  a  friend. 

he  was  so  able,  and  knew  how 
to  do  so  much,  that  he  re- 
conciled the  son  with  the 
father. 

he  did  not  suspect  that  Guccio 
Balena  had  done  this  to 
him,  because  he  did  not 
think  him  capable  of  so 
much. 

the  king  called  them,  and 
they,  when  they  saw  him, 
stopped. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  Relative  Pronouns: 


Esaminidmo  se  delle  cose  [che 
si  sono]  dette  ne  hafdtto  al- 
cuna.  (Mach.  Princ.). 

la  donna  gli  fece  apprestdre 
pdnni  [i  quali  erano]  stdti 
del  marito.  (Bocc.  g.  2,  n,  2.) 


Let  us  examine  if  he  has  done 
any  of  the  things  which  have 
been  said. 

the  woman  caused  clothes  to 
be  prepared  for  him,  which 
had  been  her  husband's. 


ELLIPSIS. 


riscontrollo  quivi  Pet'dio  Ce- 
ridle  [il  quale  e*ra]  fugglto 
dalle  gudrdie  di  Fitellio. 
(Dav.  Stor.) 


there  met  him  Petilius  Ceri- 
alis,  who  had  escaped  from 
the  guards  of  Viteliiua, 


ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Infinitive  or  Verbs: 
[prendere]    essi.    Go  after  them. 


And&le   per 
(Bocc.) 

qu\  il  sole  non  vi  pub  [pene- 

trare].    (Class.) 
to  ira  un  asindccio  che  non 

poteva   [sostenere]   la  vita. 

(Firenz.) 


here  the  sun  cannot  penetrate. 

I  was  a  great  ass  that  could 
not  endure  life. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Verb  IN  THE  Indicative  Mood : 


Tessa,  6di  tu  qu6l  c/i5  to  [odo]  ? 
(Bocc.  g.  7.  n.  1.) 

questi  &  il  capitdno,  gli  cdtri 
[sono]  da  nulla.  (Dav.  Stor.) 

ira  parinte  stretto  di  Vespa- 
sidnOj  e  [era]  solddto  di  con- 
to.  (Dav.  Stor.) 


Tessa,  do 
hear? 


you  hear   what    I 


this  is  the  captain,  the  others 
are  of  no  account. 

he  was  a  near  relation  of  Ves- 
pasian, and  a  good  soldier. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Verb  IN  THE  Conjunctive  Mood : 


Qut  ha  qutsta  etna,  e  non 
sar6bbe  chi  [potesse]  man- 
giarla.  (Bocc.  g.  2.  n.  2.) 

avrfa  gridato,  se  non  [f6sse 
stato]  che  egli  mi  chttse 
mercd  per  Dio,  e  per  v6i. 
(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  3.) 

ah  !  ah  !  se  non  [f6sse]  cA'  to 
ho  reverenza  a  vdi,  p&dre, 
to  dirti  pure  il  bell3  onore 
ch>  ei  mi  fa.  (Mach.  Com.) 


Here  is  this  supper,  and  there 
is  no  one  to  eat  it 

I  would  have  cried  out,  had 
it  not  been  that  he  besought 
mercy  both  in  the  name  of 
God  and  in  your  name. 

ah !  ah !  were  it  not  for  the 
respect  that  I  hear  to  you, 
father,  I  would  tell  the  grett 
honor  he  does  me. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Gerund  : 

[Essendo]  durante  la  guirra.     [Being]  during  the  war. 

(Bocc.) 


548 


SYNTAX. 


[avendo]  veduto  il  luogo  soli- 
tdrio.  (Bocc.) 

[essendo]  giunto  il  famiglidre 
a  Genova,  e  [avendo]  date 
le  lettere,  e  [avendo]  fdtta 
I3  ambascidta (Bocc.) 


having  seen  the  solitary  place. 

the  domestic  having  arrived  at 
Genoa,  and  having  consign- 
ed the  letter  and  delivered 
the  message 


ELLIPSIS  OF  THE  Participle  : 


Se  is  si  mi  caccidsser  gli  occhi  If  they  should  tear  out  my 
a  die  sar&  io  [ridotto]  ?  eyes,  to  what  should  I  be 
(Bocc.  g.  9.  n,  1.)  reduced  ? 

if  it  had  not  been  for  the  High 
Priest,  whom  curses    light 


se  non  fosse  [stato]  il  Gran 
Prete,  a  cui  mal  prenda. 
(Dant.  Inf.  27.) 

se  non  fosse  [stato]  ch'  egli 
era  giovane,  6gli  avrebbe 
avuto  molto  a  sostenere. 
(Bocc.  g.  8.  n.  7.) 


had  he  not  been  a  young 
man,  he  would  have  had  a 
great  deal  to  suffer. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  Adverbs : 


Ora  [cosi]  fossero  essi  pur 
gia  disposti  a  venire,  che 
veramente  potremmo  dire  la 
fortuna  dssere  favor eggidn- 
te.  (Bocc.  Intr.) 

al  mondo  non  fur  nidipersone 
[talmente]  rdtte,  —  JL  far 
lor  pro  ...  —  Cow3  io  dopo 
cotdi  parole  fdtte.  (Dant. 
Inf.  2.) 


Would  that  they  were  dispos- 
ed to  come,  that  we  might 
truly  say  that  fortune  is  fa- 
vorable. 

never  among  men  did  any  with 
such  speed  haste  to  their 
profit  ...  as  I  when  these 
words  were  spoken. 


ELLIPSIS  OF  Prepositions: 


In    cdsa   [di]    questi 
(Bocc.) 

serviva   [a]    cirti    pescalori. 

(Bocc.  g.  9.  n.  1.) 
usdva    mdlto    [in]    la  chiesa. 

(Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  4.) 

sedette  re  [per]  dnni  quindici. 

(Crusca.) 


usurdi.    In  the  house  of  these  usurers, 
she  served  certain  fishermen. 


he  frequented  much  the  church, 
he  reigned  for  fifteen  years. 


MODES  OF  ADDRESS.  549 


n.  1.) 

ELLIPSIS  OF  Conjunctions  : 

/o  s6nola  mlsera  [e]  ««en<u-    I   am  the  miserable  and   on- 
rata  Zmevra.    (Bocc.  g.  2.    .    fortunate  Ginevra. 

n.  y.  ) 


red;  na^ro,  [e]  aflfflfco  tnfei-  a  royal  nature,  and  an  angelic 

lettoy  —  [e]  Chiar*  dlma,  [e]  mind,  and  "  clear  spirit,*  and 

prdnta  vista,  [e]  6cchio  cer-  a  quick  sight  and  piercing 

vitro.    (Petr.  s.  201.)  eyes. 


REMARKS    ON    THE   DIFFERENT    MODES 
OF   ADDRESS  IN  ITALIAN. 

THE  Italians  have  three  different  modes  of  addressing 
a  person  ;  —  viz.  the  second  person  singular,  TU,  '  thon ' ; 
and  its  inflexion,  TI,  {to  thee,'  cthee': — the  second  per- 
son plural,  voi,  '  you  ' ;  and  its  inflexion,  vi,  *  to  you/ 
*  you '  :  —  and  the  third  person  singular,  feminine,  E'LLA, 
and  its  inflexions,  LE,  LA;  representing  the  title  VOSTRA 
SIGNORIA  (generally  contracted  into  VOSSIGNORJA,  and 
often  written  V.  S.),  'your  worship,'  *your  lordship,' 
c  your  ladyship';  whether  the  person  addressed  be  a 
man  or  a  woman. 

The  second  person  singular  is  used  in  addrtttin^  a 
person  of  inferior  condition ;  as  by  a  master  speaking 
to  a  servant,  by  a  parent  addressing  a  child.  Likewise 
husbands  and  wives,  brothers  and  sisters,  and  any  two 
intimate  friends  adopt  it  in  speaking  to  each  other  I 
is  also  used  in  poetry,  and  in  addressing  the  Divinity. 

The  second  person  plural  is  used  in  addresring  a 
person  of  egwa?  rani  with  the  speaker,  but  not  par- 


550  SYNTAX. 

ticularly  intimate  with  him.  Also  by  children  address- 
ing their  parents,  by  ladies  speaking  to  gentlemen. 
It  is  likewise  used  in  addressing  artisans,  tradesmen, 
dealers,  &c. 

The  third  person  singular,  feminine,  is  used  in  ad- 
dressing a  superior,  or  one-  towards  whom  the  speaker 
wishes  to  exhibit  special  civility  and  respect ;  as  by  a 
servant  to  his  master,  by  a  tradesman  to  a  gentleman, 
&c.  Ladies,  and  persons  respectable  for  their  age  or 
office,  are  addressed  in  this  mode. 

It  is  to  be  observed,  that  when  the  second  person 
plural,  voi,  and  its  inflexion,  vi,  are  used,  the  verb  is 
put  in  the  plural ;  but  all  the  other  words,  such  as 
adjectives,  participles,  &c.,  agreeing  with  the  subject, 
remain  in  the  singular,  masculine  or  feminine,  accord- 
ing to  the  gender  of  the  person  addressed  ;  as, 

voi,  SigndrE,  SARETE  rispet-    you,  Sir,  will  be  respected ; 

tdto, 
voi,  SigndrA,  SIETE  S&VIA,         you,  Madam,  are  wise. 

When  the  third  person  singular,  feminine,  E'LLA,  and 
its  inflexions,  LE,  LA;  or  the  title  VOSSIGNORIA,  are  em- 
ployed, the  verb  is  put  in  the  singular  •  and  the  words 
agreeing  with  them  take  the  feminine  gender,  whether 
the  person  addressed  be  masculine  or  feminine',  as, 

(  you  [Sir],  or  your  lordship  will 

*A,  or  V.  S.  SAKX  mpettflA,  ]  j^jflSjU  your  ladyship 
£     will  be  respected : 
C  you  [Sir]  are,  or  your  lordship 

MA  or  V.  S.  *  sdviA,  1  ybu  [M^dam]  are,  or  your  lady- 

f     ship  is  wise. 

Where  two  or  more  individuals  are  addressed  in  the 
third  person,  the  third  person  plural,  feminine,  E'LLENO, 


MODES  OF  ADDRESS.  551 

and  its  inflexion,  LORO  ;  or  the  titles  VOSTRE   or  LE 

VOSTRE    SlGNORlE,    LE   SlGNORlE   LoHO,  LoR    SlONOBI, 

are  used ;  the  verb  being  put  in  the  plural,  and  the 
words  agreeing  with  them,  in  the  plural  feminine  ;  as, 

x,7  C  y°u  [gentlemen],  or  your  lord- 

etfENo,  or  IE   FostrE  Signo-  1     ships  will  be  respected  • 
TIE  SARANNO  rispettdtE,      \  you  [ladies],  or  your  ladyships 
f     will  be  respected  : 

I  you  [gentlemen],  or  your  lord- 
C//ENO,  or  IE  Signonv  1,6110  1     ships  are  wise  ; 

sdNO  $dw*E,  \  you  [ladies],  or  your  ladyship* 

f     are  wise. 

Some  Italian  Grammariang  assert,  on  the  authority  of  Bembo,  Benti- 
vtigliOj  Ganganelliy  and  other  modern  writers,  that  this  agreement  in 
gender  of  adjectives  and  participles,  with  the  word  Vossignona  or  the 
pronoun  ella,  when  used  in  addressing  a  man,  ought  to  take  place  only, 
when  the  verb  essere, '  to  be/  stands  between  them  ;  as, 

ell  A,  or  V.  S.  £  molto  ddttA,         you  [Sir]  are,  or  your  lordship  b 

very  learned : 

but  if  any  other  verb  stands  between  the  word  Vossignona  or  the 
pronoun  ella  and  the  adjective  or  participle,  these  are  made  to  agree 
with  the  person  signified  by  those  3  as, 

V.  S.,  or  ella  PAR  molto  pensie-    you  [Sir]  seem,  or  your  lordship 
roso,  seems  very  thoughtful. 

If  the  verb  happens  to  be  the  auxiliary  essere,  and  the  participle  of 
another  verb,  then  this  participle  agrees  in  gender  with  the  won! 
or  the  pronoun  6lla,  and  the  following  adjective  or  participle  is  made 
to  agree  with  the  person  signified  by  them  ;  as, 

ellA.  si  %  MOSTRATO,  Stgndr*,    you  have  shown  yourself,  Sir,  both 
non  meno  sdvio,  che  benigno,        wise  and  kind. 


Adjectives  of  nations  agree  always  with  the  person  signified  by  the 
pronoun  ella  or  the  word  V.  S.  j  as, 

ella  senza  dubbio  e  Romdno,       you,    Sir,   without   doubt    are   a 

Roman ; 

le  Signorie  L6ro  sardnno  certo    you,  gentlemen,  are  certainly  llal- 
Italian^  ians. 


552  SYNTAX. 

Besides  the  abovementioned  modes  of  address,  the 
Italians  often  use  the  demonstrative  pronouns  quello, 
quella,  and  the  words  giovane,  uomo,  donna,  in  speaking 
to  a  person  whose  name  is  unknown  to  them  ;  and  say 
quel  giovane,  '  young  man  ' ;  quell*  uomo,  '  good  man  ' ; 
&c.;  as, 

avvertisci,     QUEL     GIOVANE,    take  care,  young  man,  for  thou 

che  tu  V  ingdnni,  deceivest  thyself; 

QUELL'  UOM   DABBENE,   che    what  is  the  matter,  good  man? 

cosa  e  stata  1 

v6i  siete  molto  dtitra,  QUEL-    you  are  very  proud,  my  good 
LA  DONNA,  woman  : 

but  this  way  of  addressing    people,   is   only   used  by 
superiors  towards  their  inferiors. 


The  following  are  the  TITLES  used  by  the  Italians 
in  addressing  the  different  qualities  of  persons  :  viz. 
in  speaking  to  a  GENTLEMAN,  Signore,  '  Sir  ' ;  Fos- 
signoria  (written,  V.  S.),  'your  worship,'  c  your  lord- 
ship '  :  tO  a  PERSON  OF  RANK,  Or  tO  a  NOBLEMAN, 

lllustrissimo  (lllmo),  '  most  illustrious  Sir  ';  Fossi- 
gnoria  Illustrissima  (V.  S.  lllma),  'Your  most  illus- 
trious lordship  ' ;  Eccellenza,  c  Excellency  ' ;  Vostra 
Eccellenza  (V.  JE.),  c  Your  Excellency  '  :  —  to  a 
PRINCE  OF  THE  BLOOD,  JUtezza,  c  Highness  '  5  Pos- 
tra  Jlltezza,  l  Your  Highness ' :  —  to  a  KING,  Sire, 
6  Sire  ' ;  JMaestd,  {  Majesty  ' ;  Fostra  Maesta  (V.  M.), 
c  Your  Majesty  '  :  —  to  an  EMPEROR,  Sire,  c  Sire  ' ; 
Maesta,  (  Majesty ' ;  Maesta  Imperiale,  '  Imperial  Majes- 
ty '  ;  Fostra  Maesta  Imperiale  (V.  M.  /.)  'Your  Im- 
perial Majesty  ' ;  Fostra  Maesta  Reale  e  Imperiale  (F. 
M.  R.  /.),  'Your  Royal  and  Imperial  Majesty5  : — to 
a  MONK,  Padre, '  Father  ' ;  Fostra  Paternitd  (F.  Pta), 
'  Your  Paternity  '  :  —  to  a  PRIEST,  Reverendo,  '  Rev- 
erend';  Fostra  Reverenza  (F.  R.),  'Your  Rever- 


MODES  OF  ADDRESS.  .V^J 

ence  '  :  —  to  a  BISHOP,  Monsignore,  <  Riu;ht  Honorable '; 
Eccellenza  Reverendissima,  '  Most  Reverend  Excellen- 
cy '  ;  Vostra  Eccellenza  Reverendissima  ( V.  E.  Rtma), 
'Your  most  Reverend  Excellency' :  —  to  a  CARDINAL, 
Eminenza,  'Eminence';  Vbstra  Eminenza  (V.  Em£a), 
6  Your  Eminence':  —  to  the  POPE,  Santita,  *  Holiness  ; 
Santo  Padre,  'Holy  Father';  Rostra  Santita 
'Your  Holiness';  V6stra  Beatitudine  (F. 
4  Your  Blessedness.' 


[For  Illustrations  of  the  above  Remarks  on  the  Dffircnt  Modtt  if  .Mrttt  in 
Italian,  see  the  Author's  COKVERSAZIO'NE  ITAUA'»A,  whore  they  have  beeo 

fully  exemplified.] 


47 


PART    IV. 

ITALIAN    ORTHOGRAPHY. 
-o| — 

CHAPTER    I. 
OF    ACCENTS. 

THE  accent,  in  Orthography,  is  a  small  sign  placed 
upon  the  vowels  of  words  to  determine  their  pronun- 
ciation. 

There  are  two  accents  in  Italian,  the  grave  and  the 
acute. 

The  grave  accent  is  an  oblique  line  drawn  from  the 
left  to  the  right  (x)  ;  and  the  acute,  an  oblique  line 
drawn  from  the  right  to  the  left  ('). 

These  accents  are  generally  put  on  all  words  in  which  a  letter  or 
syllable  has  been  suppressed;  as  in  natw  from  nativot  l  native  ' ; 
in  which  v  is  suppressed  ;  virtu  from  w'rfatTE,  virtuoE,  or  virtue, 
t  virtue ' ;  in  which  te,  de,  e,  are  suppressed  ;  &c. 

And  on  those  words  in  which  the  sameness  of  spelling  might  pro- 
duce a  confusion  of  signification  ;  as  in  peidj l  hut ' ;  balia, '  power' ; 
&c.  to  distinguish  them  frompero, '  pear-tree  ';  balia,  *  nurse  J ;  &c. 


The  grave  accent  is  put 

On  all  contracted  nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable ; 
as, 

caritJL        [caritafe,  or  caritacfc],   charity  ; 
merc&        [mercerfe],  mercy  : 


ACCENTS.  555 

On    the   names  of  the  days   of  the  week  ending  in 


Lunedi,  Monday; 

On  the  compounds  of  che  ;  as, 
percn&,  because  ; 

On  the  compounds  of  tre  ;  as 
twenty-three  ; 


Vcnerdi,          Friday: 


although  : 


cenJoTHE, 


one    hundred 
[and  three  : 

On  the  first  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  future 
of  all  verbs  ;  as, 


I  will 


temerb, 
sentirb, 


amerA,  C  love ; 

/emerl,        he  will  <  fear  ; 
senfaYA,  (  hear  : 

On  the  third  person  singular  of  the  perfect  of  all 
those  verbs  in  which  the  first  person  of  the  same  tense 
terminates  with  two  vcwels ;  as, 


[cantAi, 
[credEj, 

C  sang  ;       ] 
I    <  believed  ;] 

canto, 

(  sang  ; 
he   <  believed; 

[dormii, 

(  slept  ;      ] 

dormi, 

(  slept  : 

On  the 

words 

mete, 

half; 

cremisi, 

crimson  ; 

baccate, 

cod-fish  ; 

SO/A, 

sofa; 

caffE, 
taiiE, 
/a/6, 

coffee  ; 
tawny; 
bonfire  ; 

tafetA, 
alcali, 

taffety  ; 
aloes  ; 
alkali  ; 

0166, 
orsu., 

fy; 

come  ; 

co/i, 
cote, 

>  there  ; 

COSl, 

so,  or  thus  ; 

costi, 

testi, 
aimjL  \ 
OIWE  ! 

just  now  ; 
(  alas  ! 

ohs,  • 

ho  there  ! 
take  care  ! 

On  the 

words 

ci6, 

this,  or  that  ; 

ffi     9 

already  ; 

^ 

gift. 

below  ; 

quk, 

S  here  ; 

piu, 

more  ; 

qul, 

S 

pub, 

may,  or  can  ; 

• 

556  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

which  are  written  with  a  grave  accent  in  order  to  show 
that  the  two  vowels  are  to  be  pronounced  both  in  out 
syllable  : 

And  on  the  words 
cfi,         (noun)  day  ; 


w, 

TIE, 
SE, 


I  (adverb) 
^  .« 


there; 


affirmative  particle,  or  adverb)  yes,  or  so ; 
negative  particle,  or  conjunction)  nor,  or  neither ; 
personal  pronoun)  one's  self ; 


(noun)  tea ; 

c^i,      (conjunction)  for,  or  because  ; 

in  which  the  grave  accent  is  used  as  a  mark  of  distinc- 
tion between  them,  and  the  words 

£,      S(prepOSiti°n)  SfYoUorby; 

e,  (conjunction)  and ; 

,?'       >  (article,  or  conjunctive  pronoun)  \  H*6'  or  \ 

h,       jy>  '  }  the,  or  them ; 

si,  (conjunctive  pronoun)  one's  self; 

ne,  (relative  particle)  of  it,  or  of  them ; 

se,  (conjunction)  if; 

te,  (personal  pronoun)  thee,  or  to  thee ; 

che,  (relative  pronoun)  who,  which,  or  that. 

The  acute  accent  is  put 

On  the  i  of  the  terminations  ia,  io,  of  nouns,  when  the 
two  vowels  are  pronounced  in  two  distinct  syllables  :  as, 
magia,  magic ;  desio,  desire : 

On  words  in  which  the  stress  of  the  voice,  by  a 
poetical  license,  is  transferred  from  one  syllable  to 
another  ;  as, 

simile  [for  simile],  similar  ;      oceA.no  [for  oceano],  ocean  : 

And,  sometimes,  on  the  words 

Ancora,  anchor;  nvttare,  nectar; 

fblgore,  thunderbolt ;          tvnere,  tender : 

suite  ; 


APOSTROPHE.  557 

to  distinguish  them  from  the  words 


rtttcora, 

[ancdra], 

yet,  also,  or  again  ; 

folgore, 

[folgdre], 

splendor; 

nettare, 

[nettare], 

to  clean  ; 

tenere, 

[tenerej, 

to  hold  ; 

seguito, 

[seguito], 

followed. 

These  are  all  the  cases  in  which  the  accents  are  used, 
except  that,  in  some  books  which  teach  the  principles  of 
the  language,  the  acute  accent  is  employed  to  facilitate 
the  pronunciation  to  learners. 


CHAPTER    II. 
OF    THE    APOSTROPHE. 

THE  apostrophe  is  a  small  sign,  like  a  comma  ('), 
inserted  between  two  words  to  mark  the  elision  of  a 
vowel. 

The  apostrophe  is  generally  used  at  the  end  of  those  words  that 
terminate  with  a  vowel,  followed  by  a  word  that  begins  with  the  tame 
vowel ',  as, 

[buonA  Avventura]       buori*  \vvcntura,          good  fortune ; 

[grandE  Edifizio]  grand*  vdifizio,  great  edifice  : 

And  at  the  end  of  words  that  terminate  with  a  vowel  followed  by  a 
word  that  begins  with  any  other  vowal,  whenever  it  is  necestary,  to 
render  the  pronunciation  more  agreeable  ;  as, 

[questo  uomo]  quest*  uomo,  this  man  ; 

[quello  Albero]  quell*  A.lbero,  that  tree. 


The  Italians  write  with  an  apostrophe 

The   articles  70,  la,  '  the,'   making  an  elision  of  the 
vowels  o,  a,  before  words  beginning  with  a  vowel ;  as, 
r  Amico,          the  friend  ;  /'  innocenza,   the  innocence. 

47* 


558  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

These  articles  are  also  written  sometimes  without  an  apostrophe  ;  as, 


Jo  Amore,  the  love ;  l\  JLnergia,  the  energy. 

But  when  lo  is  followed  by  an  o,  and  la  is  followed  by  an  a,  they 
e  always  written  with  an  apostrophe ;  as, 

V  onore,  the  honor ;  V  imma,  the  soul : 


The  article  gli,  '  the,'  when  it  is  followed  by  an  i  ;  as, 
gV  mgegni,    the"  geniuses ;        gV  idoli,         the  idols : 

The  article  Ze,  '  the,'  when  the  following  word  begins 
with  e  ;  as, 

V  Eresie,         the  heresies  :         V  vminde,     the  emendations. 

Sometimes  they  write  also  with  an  apostrophe  the  article  t7,  '  the  ' ; 
after  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel,  and  make  an  elision  of  the  vowel 
i ;  as, 

tutto  'I  mondoj    all  the  world;     sopr*.  'I petto,    upon  the  breast : 


The  words  mi,  c  me  ' ;  ti,  c  thee  ' ;  ci,  c  us,'  or  '  here' ; 
vi,  *  you,'  or  '  there  ' ;  si,  £  one's  self ;  we,  (  of  it,'  or 
4  of  them  ';  4  hence,'  or  { thence  ' ;  se,  '  if ' ;  di,  f  of ' ; 
when  they  come  before  a  voweZ ;  as, 

m'  ingdnno,  I  deceive  myself ; 

V  imcr,  he  loves  thee  ; 

c'  intende,  he  understands  us ;  &c. 

And  the  words  i',  e\  de\  a\  dk\  co',  ne\  pe\  be', 
si\  di\fe\  re',  po\  me\  mo\  vo\  te',  &tc.,  abbreviated 
from  io,  c  1 '  ;  ci,  *  he,'  or  '  they  ' ;  dci,  c  of  the  ' ;  ai, 
c  to  the  '  ;  dai,  '  from  or  by  the  ' ;  coi,  '  with  the ' ;  nei, 

*  in  the  '  ;  pel,  '  for   or  by  the '  ;  bei,  or   6ene,  c  hand- 
some,'  or  '  well ' ;  sei,  c  thou  art ' ;  did,  '  say  thou  '  ; 

fece,  *  he  made  ' ;  vedi,  «  see  thou  ' ;  pdco,  '  little  ' ;  me- 
glio,  *  better  ' ;  morfo,   c  mode  '  or  '  manner  ' ;  voglio, 

*  I  wish '  5  *i'e>M,  '  hold  thou  ' ;  &tc. 


APOSTROPHE.  55!) 

The  apostrophe  ought  never  to  be  used  when  the 
elision  of  the  vowel  might  produce,  in  nouns  or  adjec- 
tives, a  confusion  of  gender,  of  number,  or  of  relation 
among  themselves  : 

Thus  die  feminine  of  all  the  adjectives  of  the  common 
gender,  like  innocente,  '  innocent ' ;  errante,  <  wander- 
ing ' ;  &c.  preceded  by  the  article  la,  l  the,'  are  written 
without  elision,  L\.  innocente,  <  the  innocent  woman  ' ;  /A 
errante,  6  the  wandering  woman5;  to  distinguish  them 
from  the  masculine,  V  innocente  [lo  innoc&nte],  *  the  in- 
nocent man  ';  V  err ante  [lo  errante],  'the  wandering 
man' : 

Those  nouns  which  in  the  plural  do  not  change  their 
termination,  as,  effigie,  '  image  ' ;  estasi, '  ecstacy  ' ;  pre- 
ceded by  the  article  le,  'the,'  are  written  without  elision, 
/E  ejffigie,  <  the  images  ';  ZE  estasi,  '  the  ecstacies  ' ;  to 
distinguish  them  from  the  singular,  V  (ffigie  [la  effigie], 
*  the  image  ' ;  /'  estasi  [la  estasi],  '  the  ecstacy  ' : 

And  the  preposition  da,  c  from  or  by,'  expressing  the 
relation  of  derivation,  followed  by  a  noun  beginning 
with  a  vowel,  as  C?A  amore,  '  from  or  by  love ';  is  written 
without  elision,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  relation  of  pos- 
session, d'  amore  [di  amore],  '  of  love.' 

Nor  is  the  apostrophe  to  be  used  when  the  elision  of 
the  vowels  would  change  the  sound  of  the  consonants  ; 
as  in  gli,  '  the,'  followed  by  the  vowels  a,  e,  o,  u,  where 
the  elision  of  the  i  would  render  hard  the  liquid  sound 
of  the  gl ;  as  in 

gV  AVfiri,  )  C  gli  Avdri,  the  misers ; 

gV  Kditti,  ff  )  gliEdilti,  the  edicts; 

gl1  6cchi,  r  J  )  gli  6cchi,  the  eyea ; 

gV  uccttli,  )  f  gli  vcctlli,  the  birds. 

For  the  same  reason,  ci,  <  us,'  or  '  here  ' ;  and  words 
ending  in  ce,  ci  ;  ge,  gi,  are  never  written  with  an  apos- 
trophe before  the  vowels  a,  o,  u;  since  the  elision  of  e,  t, 
would  give  to  the  consonants  a  hard  sound  ;  as  in 


560  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

c'  Ama,  "|  f     ci  Ama,               he  loves  us  ; 

fac'  Ardente,  /acE  Ardente,      burning  light ; 

dole1  Accenti,  }>  for  <(     dolci  Accenti,       sweet  accents  ; 

piagg'  Apriche,  \  piaggE  Apriche,  sunny  places  ; 

pogg'  Ameni,  )  ^    pdggi  Ameni,      pleasant  hills. 

Finally,  words  that  end  with  two  vowels,  as  cambw, 
'exchange  ';  we66iA,  '  fog ' ;  though  followed  by  another 
vowel,  do  not  receive  an  apostrophe  ; 


A  few  verbs,  ending  in  to,  as  vogho,  dogho,  which  followed  by  10, 
1 1,'  are  written 

vogV  io,  I  wish ;  mi  dogV  io,          I  grieve. 


Likewise  words  that  are  marked  with  a  grave  accent, 
asfelicita,  '  happiness  '  ;  gioventu,  c  youth '  ;  &tc.  do  not 
receive  an  apostrophe  ; 

EXCEPT 

Perchb,  benefit,  and  all  the  other  compounds  of  che\  as, 
perch'  egli  disse,  because  he  said ;  bench'  6llafdsse,  although  she  was. 


CHAPTER    III. 

REDUPLICATION   OF   CONSONANTS. 

The  Italians  write  all  words  as  they  pronounce  them  ; 
and  in  those  words  in  which  a  consonant  is  pronounced 
with  double  force,  they  double  the  consonant  in  writ- 
ing ;  as, 

fanligo,          obligation ;  ivrndgine,       image ; 

faccenda,       business  ;  legtTTimo,      lawful. 

Consonants  are  generally  doubled 


REDUPLICATION  OF  CONSONANTS.  561 

In  words  compounded  of  one  of  the  particles  a,  o, 
i  or  in,  si,  se,  ne,  co  or  con,  so,  su,  da,  ra,  fra,  and  of 
any  other  word  beginning  with  a  consonant  ;  as, 

[A  pena]  appena,  hardly ; 

[o  vero]  ovvero,  or  else ; 

[i  or  IN  Rigare]  iRRigdrv,  to  water  ; 

[si  come]  siccome,  as ; 

[SE  Bine,}  seBBene,  although ; 

[N&  Meno],          neyiweno,  nor  yet ; 

[co  or  CON  MUO-  coMMuovere,  to  move  ; 
vere] 

[so  Levare]  soi^i^evdre,  to  raise ; 

[su  ce*dere]  succedere^  to  succeed ; 

[DA  Be*ne]  dasBene,  honest  ; 

[RA  conto]  racconto,  relation  ; 

[FRA  Me*sso]  frawMesso,  put  between  : 

In  words  compounded  of  a  verb  ending  with  a  vowel 
bearing  the  accent  upon  it,  and  of  a  conjunctive  pronoun ; 
as, 

[hA  LO]  MLLO,  he  has  it ; 

[dir6  vi]  dirovvi,  I  will  tell  you  ; 


When  the  verb  is  followed  by  the  pronoun  gli,  when  the  g  is  never 
doubled: 


In  all  words  compounded  of  an  adverb,  a  preposition, 
or  a  conjunction,  ending  with  a  vowel,  and  of  any  other 
word  beginning  with  a  consonant ;  as, 

[61trE  ci6]  oltreccid,  besides  that ; 

[11  oiu]  fattGiic,  there  below ; 

[gil  Mai]  giaMMdi,  never; 

[s6prA  N(5me]  sopranndme,  surname  ; 

[E  pure]  epptire,  and  yet. 


562  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

CHAPTER    IV. 
INCREASE    OF    WORDS. 

THE  increase  of  words  is  the  addition  of  a  vowel  or 
a  consonant,  either  at  the  beginning  or  at  the  end  of  a 
word. 

When  the  words  in,  '  in  ' ;  con,  '  with  ' ;  won,  '  no,' 
or  '  not ' ;  per,  '  for,'  '  by,'  or  i  through  '  ;  are  followed 
by  a  word  beginning  with  an  s  followed  by  another  con- 
sonant, as,  STrada,  spavcnto,  scrive,  scherzo  ;  to  avoid 
the  harshness  produced  by  the  meeting  of  these  con- 
sonants, the  second  word  commonly  takes  an  i  before 
it;  as, 

IN  istrada,         }  C  in  STrdda,  in  the  street ; 

CON  ispa&fnto,  f  jns|.eaj  Of  y  c°n  spavento,  with  fright ; 

NON  iscrive,      ^  J  71071  scr* ye,  does  not  write ; 

PER  ischerzo,     }  \per  sc/ierzo,  in  jest.     - 

In  poetry,  however,  this  rule  is  not  so  strictly  observed  as  in  prose; 
since  the  increase  (adding  a  syllable  to  the  word),  would  be  often 
incompatible  with  the  measure  of  the  verse. 


The  preposition  a,  'to,'  and  the  conjunctions  e, '  and  '; 
o,  '  or  ' ;  when  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a 
vowel,  sometimes  take  a  d  after  them,  to  prevent  the 
hiatus ;  as, 

CD  tfno  cm  tfno,  one  after  another  ; 

amore  CD  orfio,  love  and  hatred  ; 

OD  in  cielo  OD  in  terra,  either  in  heaven  or  on  earth. 

And  the  prepositions  su,  insu,  '  upon  ? ;  followed  by 
another  u,  take  an  r  after  them  ;  as, 

SUR  nn  m6nte,  upon  a  hill ; 

uR  un  pdlco,  upon  a  stage. 


DIMINUTION  OF  WORDS.  563 

CHAPTER    V. 
DIMINUTION    OF    WORDS. 

THE  diminution  of  words  is  the  suppression  or  re- 
trenchment of  a  letter  or  a  syllable,  either  at  the  end  or 
in  the  middle  of  a  word. 

The  Italians  retrench  the  last  vowel  of  words  ending 
in  e,  o,  preceded  by  one  of  the  consonants  /,  m,  n,  r, 
forming  with  them  a  syllable  by  themselves  ;  as  in 
sa-LE,  «  salt  '  ;  WO-MO,  c  man  '  ;  wa-No,  *  hand  '  ;  CWO-RE, 
'  heart  '  ;  and  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant ;  as, 

SAL  comiine,  common  salt  ; 

UOM  in"  c6rte9  courtier  ; 

MAN  DI  donna,  lady's  hand  ; 

CUOR  DolMe,  grieving  heart. 

But  if  le,  lo  ;  ne,  no  ;  re,  ro,  do  not  form  a  syllable  by  themselves, 
but  in  concurrence  with  any  other  consonant,  as  in  Sofo-cL*,  '  Sopho- 
cles '  ;  jfl'n-GLo,.'  Englishman';  VI-GNE,  vineyards  ';  J^-GNO,  «  pledge'; 
O-CRE,  'sour'  ;  ^i-ciio,  «lazy'  ;  the  words  are  never  retrenched. 


When  e  is  preceded  by  rr,  as  in  concteR-RE,  «  to 
conduct';  and  o  is  preceded  by  //  or  wn  ;  as  in  /an- 
C/AL-LO,  {  youth  '  ;  AON-NO,  '  they  have  '  ;  they  retrench 
the  whole  syllable  ;  as,  « 

CONDOR  s^co,  to  conduct  with  one's  self; 

FANCIUL  vezzdso,  handsome  youth  ; 

L'  HAN  Kubdto,  they  have  robbed  him. 

The  last  vowel  of  the  words  uno,  <  a  or  an  '  ;  bene, 
{  well  '  ;  buono,  '  good  '  ;  and  the  last  syllable  of  the 
words  hello,  'handsome';  quello,  <  that';  grande,  'great  \ 


564  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

when  they  are  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a 
consonant,  are  always  retrenched  ;  as, 

UN  Ft'o're,  a  flower  ; 

BEN  TI  sta,  thou  deservest  it ; 

Bu6N  vino,  good  wine  ; 

BEL  prdto,  beautiful  meadow  ; 

QUEL  L*6ro,  that  book  ; 

GRAN  MercdJo,  great  market ; 

GRAN  citta,  great  city. 

The  last  vowel  of  the  word  Signore,  '  Master  ' ;  and 
the  last  syllable  of  the  words  Frate,  <  Brother  [Friar]  ' ; 
Santo,  '  Saint';  when  they  are  used  as  titles;  is  also 
retrenched  before  a  consonant ;  as, 

SIGNOR  CarZo,  Master  Charles  ; 

FRA  Giovdnni,  Brother  John  ; 

SAN  Paolo,  Saint  Paul. 

Words  ending  in  a  are  never  retrenched  ; 

EXCEPT 

Suora, l  Sister ' ;  which,  when  used  as  a  title,  loses  the  a ;  as, 

SUOR  Maiia,  Sister  Mary  ; 

and  6ra,  'now,'  with  its  compounds  allora,  ancora,  talora,  &c.  which, 
before  a  consonant,  may  be  retrenched  ;  as, 

OR  DI',  now  say  ; 

ALLOR  yidij  then  I  saw ; 

ANCOR  ridnge,  he  weeps  still ; 

TALOR  vtgghia,  sometimes  he  is  awake. 

Words  ending  in  i  are  never  retrenched  ; 


Fucni,  l  out ' ;  and  the  second  person  of  the  imperative  of  verbs 
ending  in  ntre,  mre;  as  ti6ni, l  hold  thou  ';  vteni,  *  come  thou ' ;  from 
teNEnE,  Mo  hold';  rCNiRE, '  to  come';  which  before  a  consonant 
lose  their  i ;  as, 


DIMINUTION  OF  WORDS.  fxtf 

FUOR  DI  citta,  out  of  town ; 

TIEN  weslo,  hold  this  ; 

VIEN  prfsto,  come  quick. 

Words  ending  in  u,  and  words  accented  on  the  last 
syllable,  are  never  retrenched. 

Words  ending  with  two  vowels  are  never  retrenched ; 

EXCEPT 

When  the  two  vowels  are  preceded  by  n,  as  in  Antomo,  <  Anthony ' ; 
testiniomo, l  testimony ' ;  in  which  case  they  may  be  retrenched ;  as, 
ANTON-Mana,  Anthony-Maria ; 

TESTIMON  verdce,  true  testimony. 


Words  retrenched  in  the  singular,  are  never  retrench- 
ed in  the  plural ; 


Grande, '  great J ;  which  in  its  plural  grdndij  also,  loses  the  last 
syllable ;  as, 

GRAN  pericoli,  great  dangers  ; 

GRAN  mcchezze,  great  riches; 

and  such  words  as  cavaliere,  l  cavalier ' ;  demdnio,  l  demon ' ;  &c. 
which,  in  poetry,  may  lose  the  last  vowel  or  vowels,  even  in  their 
plurals  ;  as, 

le  donne,  i  CAVALIER,  the  ladies,  the  cavaliers ; 

i  DEMON  duri,  the  cruel  demons. 


Words,  which  would  be  retrenched  before  a  word  be- 
ginning with  a  consonant,  are  always  written  with  an 
apostrophe  before  words  beginning  with  a  vowel;  as, 

bell9  Aspetto,  handsome  appearance  ; 

qudV  Arco,  that  bow  ; 

grand'  uo'mo,  great  man  ; 

FraV  Alberto,  Brother  Albert ; 

Sani^  Andrea,  Saint  Andrew  ; 
48 


566  ORTHOGRAPHY. 


C77no,  '  a  or  an/  and  its  compounds  ;  qudle,  '  which  '  ;  buono, 
'  good  '  ;  bene,  c  well  s  ;  Signore,  '  Master  '  ;  Suora,  '  Sister  '  ;  and  the 
infinitive,  and  forms  of  verbs  ending  in  Z,  m,  n,  r,  which  do  not  receive 
an  apostrophe  ;  as, 


un  AinicOj  a  friend  ; 

alcun  odore,  no  smell  ; 

qudl  \rdire  ,  what  daring  ; 

ftuon  Home,  good  man  ; 
Z>en  mciso,               v      well  engraved  ; 

Signor  Onofrio,  Master  Onofrio  ; 

Suor  Angelica,  Sister  Angelica  ; 

andar  A  spdsso,  to  go  and  take  a  walk  ; 

abbidm  Amdto,  we  have  loved  ; 

andrdn  Ese"ntit  they  will  be  exempted  ; 

sardbber  Lrsij  they  would  be  burnt. 


Words  are  never  retrenched,  when  they  are  followed 
by  a  z,  or  an  s  followed  by  another  consonant ;  or  when 
they  are  at  the  end  of  a  sentence  ; 


In  poetry  where  words  are  sometimes  retrenched,  even  before  a  z, 
or  an  s  followed  by  another  consonant^  on  account  of  the  measure  of 
the  verse. 


Some  words,  when  they  undergo  some  alteration,  lose 
a  vowel  in  the  middle,  particularly  if  the  tonic  accent  of 
the  word,  by  such  alteration,  is  transferred  to  the  fol- 
lowing syllable  ;  as, 

6o6no,  good ;  bonissimo,     very  good ; 

tvono,  thunder;  tonare,          to  thunder; 

suono,  I  play ;  sonidmo,       we  play. 

Some  compound  words  lose  a  letter,  or  a  syllable  in 
their  composition  ;  as, 

[ie*n  sera]  iersfra,  last  evening  ; 


DIMINUTION  OF  WORDS.  507 

[s6tTO  te*rra]  sotttrra,  under  ground ; 

[do.MANi  mattina]       domattina,  to-morrow  morning ; 

[cenTO  cinquanta]     cencinqudnta,          one  hundred  and  fifty. 

Infinitives,  and  those  forms  of  verbs  that  end  in  /«, 
ne,  mo,  no,  when  joined  to  a  conjunctive  pronoun,  drop 
their  final  vowel ;  as, 

[amarE  lo]  «W«RLO,  to  love  him  ; 

[duolE  ti]  du6LTi,  it  grieves  thee  ; 

[vienE  s£ne]  VI^NSENE,  he  comes  thence  ; 

[andiamo  vi]  andidwvi,  let  us  go  there  ; 

[aiutarono  ci]  aiutaroxci,  they  assisted  us. 

The  first  and  third  persons  singular,  and  the  third 
person  plural,  of  the  imperfect  of  the  indicative  of  all  the 
verbs,  which  in  the  infinitive  terminate  in  ere,  ire, 
generally  drop  the  v  ;  as, 


flgli      5*emfcT«J     \°gli,       H««'         he       \ feared : 
[eglino  temerano,]      eglino,      temeano,     they       feared ; 

|°gli      !sentiv^      fe,       Sse«««'        he      Sheard; 
[eglino  sentivano,]     tglino,      sentiano,     they      heard. 

The  words  cavalli,  capelli,  coltelli,  fratelli,  ruscelli, 
quelli,  belli,  delli,  alii,  dalU,  nelli,  pclli,  colli,  sulli, 
tralli,  and  quali,  mali,  tali,  figliuoli,  may  be  contracted 
into  cavai,  capei,  coltei,  fratei,  ruscci,  quei,  bei,  dti,  at, 
dcvi,  nei,  pei,  coi,  sui,  trai,  quai,  mai,  tai,  fifti***, 
which,  when  they  are  followed  by  a  consonant,  it  is  more 
elegant  to  abbreviate,  and  write  with  an  apostrophe  ;  as, 

cavtf  leggtiri,  light  horses  ;    rusct'  ridtnti,  smiling  brooks  ; 
capSbMnchi,  white  hair  ;       gut'  signdri,    those  gentlemen; 
coM  pungenti,  sharp  knives  ;  66'  costumi,       good  manners  ; 
carndli,   own  brothers;  dV  nemlci,        of  the  enemies ; 


568  ORTHOGRAPHY. 

d'  parenti,  to  the  parents  ;        trff  b6schi,     amongst  the  woods  ; 
dd*  Iddrij     by  the  robbers  ;       qua9  dolori,     what  pains  ; 
ne'bisogni,  in  the  necessities  ;  md'  pensieri,  malicious  thoughts  ; 
pff  cdmpi,  through  the  fields  ;  iff  discorsi,     such  discourses ; 
c6'  denli,    with  the  teeth  ;      figliuo*  miser-  very  miserable  sons. 
stf  monti)   upon  the  mountains  ;  [rimi, 

The  word  eglino,  '  they  '  ;  often  loses  its  last  syllable 
and  makes  egli  ;  and  egli,  '  he,'  or  (  they/  may  be 
contracted  into  ei,  and  written  'e',  c  he,'  or  *  they.' 


This  is  all  that  needs  to  be  said  on  the  diminution  or 
retrenchment  of  words ;  except  that  the  rule  respecting 
the  retrenchment  of  e,  0,  when  preceded  by  /,  m,  n,  r, 
does  not  hold  in  certain  instances,  where  such  retrench- 
ment would  produce  a  harsh  sound.  Thus  the  words, 
come,  c  how5;  nome,  '  name';  animo,  '  courage';  chiarOj 
4  clear';  raro,  c  rare';  nero,  c  black';  c^uro,  c  hard';  oscu- 
ro,  'obscure  ';  &c.,  are  never  written  com,  nom,  cmim, 
c/iiar,  ner,  ror,  ^wr,  oscwr,  &tc. 


THE    END. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


PREFACE  to  the  former  Edition vii 

"  to  the  present  Edition        -        -        -        -         xi 

A  LIST  OF  WORKS  examined  with  Reference  to  the  Com- 
pilation of  this  Grammar  xvii 

A  TABLE  of  the  Abbreviations  of  the  Names  of  Authors 

and  of  the  Works  quoted  in  this  Grammar  -  xxiv 


ITALIAN  GRAMMAR. 

INTRODUCTION 1-10 

ITALIAN  ALPHABET     -        -        -        -        -        -  -   11,  12 

PART  L  — ITALIAN  PRONUNCIATION           -  13-24 

CHAPTER  I.  —  Sounds  of  the  Vowels  13 

"        II.  —  Pronunciation  of  the  Consonants     -  -     14 

«      III.  —  Of  J  and  H  16 

«      IV.  —  Double  Consonants  H 

«       V.—  Of  Syllables        -        -  19 

"      VI.  —  Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs  -  -20 

"     VII.  —  General  Rules  on  the  Italian  Pronunciation    21 

EXERCISE  on  the  Pronunciation      - 

PART  II.  — ITALIAN  ANALOGY                         -  25-388 

PARTS  OF  SPEECH 

CHAPTER  I.  —  Articles 

Union  of  the  Prepositions  with  the  Articles   - 

EXERCISE  I. 

CHAPTER  II.  —  Substantive  Mouns 

Gender 

Number,  or  Formation  of  the  Plural 

Variation  of  Nouns 

EXERCISE  II. 

48* 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  III.  —  Adjective  Nouns.  —  Comparatives  and 

Superlatives  62 

Gender            - 62 

Formation  of  the  Plural 62 

Agreement  of  Adjectives          ...--.  63 

Comparatives          --.-...  65 
EXERCISE  III.        ...--.-.71 

Superlatives  --------         72 

EXERCISE  IV. 78 

CHAPTER  IV.  —  Augmentatives  and  Diminutives        -         80 
Augmentatives   -------.80 

EXERCISE  V. 83 

Diminutives       --------     84 

EXERCISE  VI. 89 

CHAPTER  V.  —  Numerals     ------     90 

Cardinal  Numbers      ------         -90 

Ordinal          "  94 

Collective,  Distributive,  and  Proportional  Numbers  96 

EXERCISE  Vll.     -         -         - 98 

CHAPTER  VI.  —  Substantive  Pronouns        -         -         -       100 
Personal  Pronouns     -         -         -        -         -         -         -100 

Variation  of  Personal  Pronouns        -----    101 

EXERCISE  VIII. 107 

Conjunctive  Pronouns        -        -        -        -        -  109 
Union  of  the  Pronouns  miy  ti,  gli,  ne  or  ci,  wi,  sz,  with  the 

Pronouns  lo,  la,  gli,  li,  le,  ne 114 

EXERCISE  IX. 118 

Relative  Pronouns  -        -        -        -        -        -119 

EXERCISE  X. 125 

Interrogative  Pronouns  -         -        -         -        -        -127 

EXERCISE  XI. 129 

»  CHAPTER  VII.  —  Adjective  Pronouns         ~  131 

Possessive  Pronouns  -        -        -        -        -        -131 

EXERCISE  XII. 134 

Demonstrative  Pronouns    -        -        -        -        -        -337 

EXERCISE  XIII. 143 

Indefinite  Pronouns             --___-  145 
EXERCISE  XIV. 156 

CHAPTER  VIII.  —  Of  the  Particles  Ne,  Ci,  Vi        -        -  158 
EXERCISE  XV. 162 

CHAPTER  IX.—  Verbs 164 

Variation  of  Verbs  -        -        -        -        -        -       164 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Auxiliary  Verbs      -        -        -        .        -         -         - 

The  Verb  Avere,  affirmatively 165 

"       negatively 169 

"       interrogatively       -          -          .          -          -  171 

,      "  "       interrogative-negatively       -         -  172 

Essere 173 

Regular  Verbs        -        -  -        -        -        -  177 

Active  Verbs  —  FIRST  CONJUGATION         ...  177 

Aiflare,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  dre  -  177 

Cercdre,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  care   -  181 

Pregare,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  gdre        -         -  182 

Bacidre,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  cidre   •  183 

Fregidre,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  gidre     -         -  185 

Noidre,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  idre      ...  186 

Invldre,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  lore         •         -  187 

SECOND  CONJUGATION       -  -  187 

Temere,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  the  infinitive  in 
ere  (long)  ;  and  of  those  which  in  the  perfect  end  in  ii 
and  etti -  187 

Tissere,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  the  infinitive  in 
ere  (short) ;  and  of  those  which  in  the  perfect  end  in 
It  only 191 

Tacere,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  cere 

JSmpiere,  paradigm  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  iere  -  194 

THIRD  CONJUGATION      ------       195 

Sentirc,  paradigm  of  those  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation 

which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  end  in  o  only  195 

Esibire,  paradigm  of  those  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation 

which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  end  in  isco  only  198 
Abborrire,  paradigm  of  those  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation 

which,  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  end  both  in  o 

and  isco     ---------   201 

Cucire,  paradigms  of  the  Verbs  ending  in  cire  -  204 
Remarks  on  the  foregoing  Verbs  -  205 

EXERCISE  XVI. 20§ 

Passive  Verbs 212 

Essere  Amato,  paradigm  of  the  passive  verbs 

Neuter  Verbs  -  216 

Partire,  paradigm  of  the  neuter  verbs  - 

Pronominal  Verbs      - 

Pentirsi,  paradigm  of  the  pronominal  verbs  - 

Unipersonai  Verbs 

Pidvere,  paradigm  of  the  unipersonal  verbs    • 

Essere^  unipersonally  used 

EXERCISE  XVII. 232 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Order,  quantity,  quality,  affirmation,  negation,  doubt,  com- 
j/arison,  interrogation      ------        351 

Choice,  demonstration  ......   352 

Compound  Adverbs        ------       356 

Adjectives  commonly  used  as  Adverbs   -  357 

Adverbial  Phrases  in  common  use  -  359 

EXERCISE  XXIII.          -  361 

CHAPTER  XIV.  —  Prepositions  -----      363 

Prepositions  in  common  use     ------   363 

EXERCISE  XXIV. 373 

CHAPTER  XV.  —  Conjunctions  -----  376 
Conjunctions  in  common  use  -----  375 
EXERCISE  XXV. 382 

CHAPTER  XVI.  —  Interjections  -  -  -  -  384 
Interjections  in  common  use  -  -  -  -  -  384 
EXERCISE  XXVI. 387 

PART  III.  — ITALIAN   SYNTAX        -        -        -389-553 

CHAPTER  I.  —  Order  and  Position  of  Words  -  -  389 
Simple  Construction  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  389 

Inverse          "  393 

EXERCISE  XXVII. 395 

CHAPTER  II.  —  Concordance  or  Agreement  of  Words  -  397 

Concordance  of  Articles          ------  397 

"  of  Adjectives 397 

"  of  Numerals 403 

<£  of  Pronouns    ------  403 

"  of  Verbs 405 

"  of  Participles 411 

EXERCISE  XXVIII. -  413 

CHAPTER  III.  —  Regimen  or  Government  of  Words      -  415 

Regimen         of  Substantives    ------  415 

"  of  Adjectives  -  418 

"  of  Verbs 421 

"  of  Prepositions        -  -   ,      -  432 

«'  of  Conjunctions 433 

EXERCISE  XXIX. 436 

CHAPTER  IV.—  Use  of  Articles 440 

EXERCISE  XXX.         -     >    -         -         -         -          -         -        468 

CHAPTER  V.  —  Position  of  Adjectives     -  472 

EXERCISE  XXXI. 480 

CHAPTER  VI.  —  Use  and  Position  of  certain  Pronouns    -  483 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

Personal  Pronouns        .«.-..„  453 

Conjunctive     " 486 

Possessive        " 405 

Indefinite         " 499 

XXXII. 502 


CHAPTER  VII.—  Verbs 506 

Position  of  Verbs 506 

Use  of  the  Imperfect  and  First  and  Second  Perfect       -          -   609 
Use  of  Certain   Tenses  of  the   Indicative   for  some   other 
Tenses  of  the  same  Mood ;  and  of  the  Infinitive  for  cer- 
tain Tenses  of  the  Indicative,  and  for  the  Conjunctive  and 
Imperative  Moods        -          -          -          -         -         -          -512 

Of  the  Tenses  of  the  Dependent   Verbs  in  a   Compound 
Sentence  ......          .          .   517 

Of  ihe  Manner  of  Expressing  the  English  Present-Participle 

in  Italian        - 519 

Of  the  way  of  Rendering  into  Italian  the  English  particle 

Tb,  before  the  Infinitive  of  Verbs  -         -         -   522 

EXERCISE  XXXIII.  -         525 

CHAPTER  VIII.  —  Participles.  —  Use  and  Position  of 

certain  Mverbs  _....-         529 

Agreement  of  Participles 529 

Use  and  Position  of  certain  Adverbs     ....        535 
EXERCISE  XXXI V.        - 538 

CHAPTER  IX.  —  Expletives    -        -        -        -        -        -541 

CHAPTER  X.—  Of  the  Ellipsis 545 

REMARKS  ON  THE  DIFFERENT  MODES  OF  ADDRESS  IN 
ITALIAN 

PART  IV.  -  ITALIAN  ORTHOGRAPHY  554-568 

CHAPTER!.—  Of  Accents                          -  -        -        554 

«         II.—  Of  the  Apostrophe  •    557 

"        III.  —  Reduplication  of  Consonants  -        -        560 

«        IV.  —  Increase  of  Words  -    562 
«          V.  —  Diminution  of  Words        - 


CORRIGENDA. 


Page 

line, 

For, 

Read, 

44 

a   subject   and   a    quality,   to 
which  it  affirms  that  the  sub- 

a subject,  and  a  quality  of  which  it 
affirms  that  it  is,  or  is  not,  at- 

23 

15 

ject  is,  or  is  not  attributed, 
gioeondo, 

tributed  to  the  subject, 
gioeondo. 

24 

14 

magndmino, 

magn&nimo. 

26 

12 

nouns  begins, 

noun  begins. 

33 

8 

MERCA'TANTE, 

MERCATA'NTE. 

35 

22 

pidngere, 

pidngere. 

36 

]3 

Erato, 

E'ralo. 

tt 

25 

Lapis, 

Lapis. 

43 

41 

delle  cose, 

che  gli  ho  ddto. 

44 

13 

eclissi, 

ecclissi. 

64 

14 

Dav.  Tac.  am. 

Dav.  Tac.  ann. 

65 

6 

Add.  Cavalc. 

Cavalc. 

69 

1 

Id 

To. 

87 

17 

UMioizzo, 

UMIDU'ZZO. 

89 

4 

BACICCUHIA'I, 

BACIUCCHIA'I. 

cc 

26 

Nasccemmo, 

Nascemmo. 

155 

34 

Qudnto  COSE, 

Qudnte  COSE. 

161 

4 

Pass.  tr.  Hu.  c.  4. 

Pass.  276. 

173 

17 

essere  stdta, 

Essere  stdta. 

179 

20 

that  thou  lovest, 

that  thou  love. 

<« 

21 

that  he  loves, 

that  he  love. 

193 

24 

2 

in. 

258 

25 

as  in  the  case, 

as  H  the  case. 

287 

18 

COTtfllTTO, 

COn/XTTO. 

296 

6 

*  I  kindle  », 

«  I  kindled.' 

299 

6 

M  raise, 

Mi  mise. 

" 

40 

Arr.  Vang. 

Ann.  Vang, 

300 

14 

Jerusalem, 

Jerusalem. 

348 

23 

f6nda, 

frdnda. 

369 

10 

Petr.  Fr.  Am. 

Petr.  Tr.  Am. 

n 

37 

Bocc.  Floe. 

Boec.  Filoc. 

370 

30 

Mach.  Corn. 

Mach.  Com. 

382 

1 

rinuovelli, 

rinnovelli. 

394 

5 

Ephigenia, 

Iphigenia, 

M 

19 

PRE'SEMI  ALL^BA, 

PRE  SEMI   ALLOR. 

<« 

27 

Ephigenia, 

Iphigenia. 

395 

20 

E'lvidio, 

Elvidio. 

406 

26 

PIGLIEBA'MO, 

PIGMERE'MO. 

419 

5 

deaite, 

dedite. 

455 

28 

Gian.  Stor.  Giv.  Nap. 

Gian.  Stor.  Civ.  Nap. 

458 

30 

avviticchia, 

avviticchia. 

463 

8 

FIGLIUOLI, 

FIGLT70I. 

468 

5 

FRUMA  NTO, 

FRUME'NTO. 

477 
479 

39 

36 

Lapari, 
Tris.  Elog.  Galil. 

Lipari. 
Fris.  Elog.  Galil. 

491 

26 

I  see  you, 

I  see  thee. 

495 

5 

msposTO, 

DISP08TO. 

500 

2 

dispesi, 

disperi. 

501 

| 

woman, 

wom*n. 

" 

30 

even, 

ever. 

In  a  ftw  copies  only 

t 

137 

13 

these, 

those. 

138 

14 
30 

these  near  you, 
STAMA'TTINA, 

those  near  you. 

STAMATTlNA, 

143 

19 

COSTUI, 

CO3TU  I. 

" 

24 

EXERCISES, 

EXERCISE  XIII. 

ADDENDA. 

409 

35 

add        (Bocc.  g.  3.  n.  7.) 

446 

26 

add        (Bocc.  g.  1    n.  1,) 

479 

42 

add        (Dant.  Inf.  2.) 

485 

32 

add        (Bocc.  g.  5.  n.  3.) 

486 

10 

add        (Bocc.  g.  7.  n>  4.) 

516 

41 

add        (Bocc.) 

THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  PINE  OP  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  5O  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE, 


LD  21 


.-lOOm-12,' 43  (8796s) 


U.C.  BERKELEY  Lll 


. 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


